JP2019017826A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving an amusement to a game of a player.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: privilege application means for applying a privilege advantageous to a player when a game ball enters a specific region; privilege kind determination means for determining a kind of a privilege applied by the privilege application means; notification means for notifying a player of information related to a kind of the privilege determined by the privilege kind determination means, when the identification information is stopped and displayed; and adjustment means for reducing a flow down amount of game balls guided to specific ball entry means at a position where the game balls can be guided to the specific ball entry means in a prescribed period. Therefore a fraudulent game can be suppressed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting port provided in the game board, and the lottery result is displayed in a symbol or the like and notified in advance. There are known ones that notify in a notification manner so that the fairness of a game can be maintained.

JP 2012-147965 A

  In such a gaming machine, it is required to reduce damage caused by unauthorized gaming.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce damage caused by illegal games.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and a determination capable of executing a determination when a game ball enters the ball entrance means. Means, display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and dynamic display by the dynamic display means The dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information to be displayed is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. A special game execution means capable of executing the special game, and a specific entry means that allows a game ball to enter during the period in which the special game is being executed by the special game execution means, Special game balls that can enter the ball means A privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the specific region, and a privilege type determining means for determining the type of privilege granted by the privilege granting means; And adjusting means for reducing the amount of flow of the game ball guided to the specific entry means to a position where the game ball can be guided to the specific entry means for a predetermined period.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area and the firing strength fired by the launching means can be varied by a player's operation. The firing strength variable means, a first flow path through which the game ball can flow down, and a second flow path through which the game ball flowing down the first flow path becomes difficult to flow down, the adjusting means, The game balls flowing down the two flow paths are distributed at a predetermined ratio between a specific flow path that can be entered into the specific entry means and a flow path that is difficult to enter the specific entry means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area and the firing strength fired by the launching means can be varied by the player's operation. The firing strength variable means, a first flow path through which the game ball can flow down, and a second flow path through which the game ball flowing down the first flow path becomes difficult to flow down, the adjusting means, It has rolling means capable of rolling the game ball flowing down the two flow paths for a predetermined period or longer and discharging the game balls to the flow path guided to the specific entry means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the specific entry means is entered after the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. The period until it becomes possible is configured to be shorter than the period from launching the game ball to the second flow path to reaching the specific entry means through the adjusting means.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a determination means capable of executing a determination when a game ball enters the ball entry means, and the determination Display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means A dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the game, and when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed. A special game entry means capable of entering a game ball during a period in which the special game is being executed by the special game execution means, and a special game entry means for entering the special game Specific area in which the game ball can enter and its specific When a game ball enters a zone, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege advantageous to the player, a privilege type determination unit that determines a type of the privilege granted by the privilege granting unit, and the specific entry Adjusting means for decreasing the amount of flow of the game ball guided to the specific entrance means for a predetermined period at a position where the game ball can be guided to the means.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress illegal games and reduce damage caused by illegal games.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect is achieved. That is, a launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area, a launch intensity varying means capable of changing a launch intensity emitted by the launching means by a player's operation, and a first flow path through which the game ball can flow down And a second flow path in which the game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and the adjusting means passes the game ball flowing down the second flow path to the specific ball entering means. The specific flow path is divided into a predetermined flow rate and a specific flow path that makes it difficult to enter the specific ball entry means.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress illegal games and reduce damage caused by illegal games.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the following effect is achieved. That is, a launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area, a launch intensity varying means capable of changing a launch intensity emitted by the launching means by a player's operation, and a first flow path through which the game ball can flow down And a second flow path in which the game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and the adjusting means rolls the game ball flowing down the second flow path for a predetermined period or more. It has rolling means capable of discharging the game ball to the flow path guided to the specific entry means.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress illegal games and reduce damage caused by illegal games.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, the following effect is achieved. That is, after the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed until the specific ball entry means can enter the ball, the game ball is launched into the second flow path. The adjustment means is configured to be shorter than the period until the specific entry means is reached.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress illegal games and reduce damage caused by illegal games.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a rear view of a displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a left displacement member and a right displacement member. It is a back perspective view of a left displacement member and a right displacement member. It is a front perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st mode. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st mode. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st mode. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 2nd mode. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 3rd mode. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of a projection unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a projection unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a projection unit. It is a front view of a back base. It is a rear view of a front base and an irradiation unit. It is a rear view of a front base. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the front base and irradiation unit in the arrow XXXVI direction view of FIG. It is a front view of a projection board member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member taken along line XXXVIII-XXXVIII in FIG. 37. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit, and (b) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the projection unit taken along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb in FIG. 39 (a). (A) to (c) are partial enlarged sectional views of the projection unit. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove | channel formation member. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove | channel formation member. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove | channel formation member. (A) is a top view of an irradiation unit, (b) is a front view of the irradiation unit in the arrow XLIVb direction view of FIG. 44 (a). 44A is a rear view of the irradiation unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLVa in FIG. 44A, and FIG. 44B is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit along the XLVb-XLVb line in FIG. (A) is a front view of a 1st block, (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st block in the XLVIb-XLVIb line | wire of Fig.46 (a), (c) is a front view of a 2nd block. FIG. 46D is a sectional view of the second block taken along line XLVId-XLVId in FIG. It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of an up-and-down displacement unit. It is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in the 1st position. It is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in an intermediate position. It is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in the 2nd position. It is a rear view of the up-and-down displacement unit in the 1st position. It is a rear view of the up-and-down displacement unit in an intermediate position. It is a rear view of the up-and-down displacement unit in the 2nd position. (A) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member at the first position, (b) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member at the intermediate position, and (c) is a transmission at the second position. It is a rear view of a gear and a connection member. (A) to (c) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the first drive range. 54A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 54, FIG. 54B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 55, and FIG. FIG. 57 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along the line LIXc-LIXc in FIG. 56. (A) is a front view of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove formation member in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the projection plate member, gear member, and groove | channel in the LXb-LXb line | wire of Fig.60 (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a forming member. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) is a front view of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove formation member in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the projection plate member, gear member, and groove | channel in the LXIVb-LXIVb line | wire of Fig.64 (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a forming member. FIG. 64A is a side view of the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove forming member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 64A, and FIG. 65B is a projection plate taken along line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. FIG. 66C is a cross-sectional view of the member, the gear member, and the groove forming member, and FIG. 65C is a cross-sectional view of the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove forming member along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove | channel formation member. (A) is a top view of the irradiation unit in 4th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of an irradiation unit. (A) is the partial expansion schematic diagram of the projection unit in the 1st block vicinity, (b) is the partial expansion schematic diagram of the projection unit in the 2nd block vicinity. It is a front view of the projection unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of a front base. It is a rear view of a projection unit. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in a 1st state, (b) is a front view of the projection unit in a 2nd state. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in a 1st state, (b) is a front view of the projection unit in a 3rd state. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. It is a front view of the projection unit in 6th Embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of the front base in the state where the front base and the irradiation unit are assembled. (A) to (c) is a rear view of the projection unit. (A) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is the display aspect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example. (A) And (b) is a timing chart which showed the game state and the contents of production in the 1st control example. (A) is the timing chart which showed the effect content of the jackpot effect 1 in the 1st control example, (b) is the timing chart which showed the effect content of the jackpot effect 2 in the 1st control example. (A) is the timing chart which showed the effect content of the jackpot effect 3 in the 1st control example, (b) is the timing chart which showed the other example of the effect content of the jackpot effect 1 in the 1st control example. It is. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of the effect for the addition displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example being started, (b) is the figure in a 1st control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the jackpot continuation effect among the addition effects displayed on the 3 symbol display device. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode when the number of rounds is added among the production effects displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example, (b) It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the jackpot continuation effect among the superposition effects displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1 control example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the jackpot ending screen among the production effects displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is a 1st control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode when the jackpot ends among the addition effects displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the special symbol high-speed fluctuation | variation after the end of jackpot among the production effects for superimposition displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the jackpot continuation effect among the superposition effects displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the special symbol high-speed fluctuation | variation after the end of jackpot among the normal winning effects displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) These are figures which showed an example of the display mode at the time of winning a jackpot out of the normal winning effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the battle mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in battle mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the effect before a battle among the battle modes displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display aspect of battle reach among the battle modes displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of battle reach among the battle modes displayed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is the 3rd symbol display in a 1st control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of winning a battle reach among the battle modes displayed with an apparatus. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of drawing in battle reach among the battle modes displayed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is in a 1st control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of defeating battle reach among the battle modes displayed on a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the revival effect of battle reach among the battle modes displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example. (A)-(d) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the HP display area displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the indication effect among the suggestion effects displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is the 3rd symbol in a 1st control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of a countdown effect among the suggestion effects displayed with a display apparatus. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the specific production | presentation displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is the timing chart which showed the flow of the suggestion effect performed within one change among the suggestion effects displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the suggestion effect performed by multiple changes among the suggestion effects displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the expectation degree suggestion effect displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the expectation degree suggestion effect displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the expectation suggestion effect displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st random number table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 2nd random number table set to ROM of this. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st hit classification selection table set to ROM of the main controller in the 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the jackpot variation pattern table. (C) is a diagram schematically showing the specified content of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table, and (d) is a schematic diagram of the defined content of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the special fluctuation pattern table among the fluctuation pattern selection tables set to ROM of the main controller in the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the jackpot transfer setting table set to ROM of the main controller in the 1st control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the state transition table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is a figure showing prescription | regulation content of a state transition 1 table typically. (C) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the state transition 2 table, and (d) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the state transition 3 table. (E) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the state transition 4 table, (f) is the figure which showed the prescription | regulation content of the state transition 5 table typically. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the state transition 6 table among the state transition tables set to ROM of the main controller in the 1st control example, (b) is the state transition 7 It is the figure which showed the prescription | regulation content of the table typically, (c) is the figure which showed the prescription content of the state transition 8 table typically, (d) is the figure which prescribes | regulates the prescription content of the state transition 9 table. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in the 1st control example. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. . (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the special symbol reservation ball number counter in a 1st control example, (b) typically shows the prescription content of the reservation rank selection table in a 1st control example. It is the figure shown, (c) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the jackpot effect selection table. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the addition number selection table in a 1st control example, (b) is the figure which showed the prescription | regulation content of the continuous production mode selection table typically. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the continuation value main selection table in a 1st control example, (b) was the figure which showed the prescription | regulation content of the 1st continuation value subselection table typically. (C) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 2nd continuation value subselection table. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the last aspect selection table in a 1st control example, (b) is the figure explaining the content of the production set as a last aspect. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the expectation degree selection table in a 1st control example, (b) is the figure which showed the prescription | regulation content of the expectation degree production selection table typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation in a 1st control example. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display data table in the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the drawing list | wrist in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frequency subtraction process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information command process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related command process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot medium effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the addition effect performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the superimposition display process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the extension management process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation value setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the expectation degree effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the countdown effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the multi-variation effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows V interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows a stop classification command process. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the opening command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is the round performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the number command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the back image change command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing error command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation value related command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the expectation degree production related command process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the countdown effect relevant command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in the display apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the accessory effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the example of additional production of the 1st control example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display aspect of the accessory effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the example of an effect addition of a 1st control example, (b) is the effect addition of a 1st control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode which resets the title displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in an example. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in the example of additional production of the 1st control example, (b) RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in the example of additional production of the 1st control example It is the block diagram which showed the structure of. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the transformation pattern table in the effect addition example of a 1st control example, (b) is prescription | regulation of the title system selection table in the effect addition example of a 1st control example. It is the figure which showed the content typically, (c) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the title selection table in the production addition example of a 1st control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the accessory action level selection table in the example of additional production of the 1st control example, (b) is the production setting group in the example of additional production of the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the production additional example of a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and production process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the production addition example of the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the change process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the production additional example of the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the title setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the production additional example of a 1st control example. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is the prescription | regulation content of the fall lottery table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in a 2nd control example (C) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the fall state transition table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second control example, and (d) These are the figures which showed typically the fall state transition 1 table prescription | regulation content among the fall state transition tables set to ROM of the main controller in the 2nd control example, (e) is 2nd control. It is the figure which showed typically the fall state transition 2 table prescription | regulation content among the fall state transition tables set to ROM of the main controller in the example. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) shows the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the production additional example of a 2nd control example. FIG. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the continuous production mode selection 3 table in a 2nd control example, (b) is a figure which prescribes | regulates the prescription content of the last aspect selection 3 table in a 2nd control example. It is the figure shown in. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the state determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in another example of the second control example, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the variation pattern table after the fall. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the countdown effect setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the other effect example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and production process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the other production examples. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the third control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the third control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st hit type selection table set to ROM of the main controller in the 3rd control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller in the 3rd control example, (b) is the fluctuation pattern selection table in the 3rd control example. FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a jackpot (probability variation) variation pattern table, and (c) is a first out (probability variation) variation pattern in the variation pattern selection table in the third control example. It is the figure which showed the regulation content of the table typically, (d) showed typically the regulation content of the 2nd deviation (probability change) variation pattern table among the variation pattern selection tables in a 3rd control example. FIG. 8E is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a special (probable variation) variation pattern table in the variation pattern selection table in the third control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the fluctuation | variation scenario setting table set to ROM of the main controller in a 3rd control example, (b)-(d) is a figure in a 3rd control example. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the fluctuation scenarios 1-3 prescribed | regulated by the fluctuation scenario table, respectively. (A)-(d) is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the fluctuation scenarios 4-7 prescribed | regulated by the fluctuation scenario table in a 3rd control example, respectively. (A)-(d) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the fluctuation scenarios 8-11 prescribed | regulated by the fluctuation scenario table in a 3rd control example, respectively. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st continuation value main selection table set to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 2nd continuation value main selection table set to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 3rd continuation value main selection table set to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the continuous production mode selection 4 table set to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the block diagram which showed typically the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frequency subtraction process 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information command process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous effect setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation value setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 4 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation value related command process 4 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the last aspect command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the main controller in another control example of a 3rd control example, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in another control example of a 3rd control example It is. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st random number table set to ROM of the main controller in another control example of a 3rd control example, (b) is a 3rd control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the small hit type selection table set to ROM of the main controller in another example of control. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the fluctuation scenario A1 prescribed | regulated by the fluctuation scenario setting table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in another control example of a 3rd control example, (b) ) Is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a small hit after fluctuation scenario defined in the fluctuation scenario setting table set in the ROM of the main control device in another control example of the third control example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the effect in another example of the suggestion effect demonstrated in the 1st control example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the effect in another example of the suggestion effect demonstrated in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the countdown effect setting process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in another example of the suggestion effect demonstrated in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in another example of the suggestion effect demonstrated in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd warning effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in another example of the suggestion effect demonstrated in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process 6 in the additional description of the 1st control example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the effect in another example of the expectation suggestion effect demonstrated in the 1st control example. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed typically the display screen in another example of the expectation suggestion effect demonstrated in the 1st control example. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed typically the display screen in another example of the expectation suggestion effect demonstrated in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the countdown effect setting process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in another example of the expectation degree suggestion effect demonstrated in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and production | presentation process 7 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in another example of the expectation degree production | presentation demonstrated in the 1st control example. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the A1 embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the A1 embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the A1 embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the V prize apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the V prize apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the movable guide member in 1st Embodiment. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation | variation aspect which does not become a pseudo | simulation series displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation | variation aspect which does not become a pseudo | simulation series displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st A1 embodiment. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation | variation aspect of the pseudo | simulation ream 1 displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in A1 embodiment. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation | variation aspect of the button effect at the time of the pseudo-continuous development displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation | variation aspect of the button effect at the time of the pseudo-continuous development displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in A1 embodiment. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation | variation aspect at the time of V attacker opening | releasing immediately after the symbol stop displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation | variation aspect at the time of V attacker opening | releasing immediately after the symbol stop displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in A1 embodiment. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the main controller in 1st A1 embodiment, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in 1st A1 embodiment. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of the 1st per random number table set to ROM of the main controller in A1 embodiment, (b) is a special symbol 1 random number table in A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed the regulation content typically, (c) is the figure which showed the regulation content of the special symbol 2 random number table in A1 embodiment typically, (d) is the figure in A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the normal symbol random number table. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a special figure 1 jackpot type in the A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed the prescription | regulation content of the selection table typically, (c) is the figure which showed the prescription | regulation content of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table in A1 embodiment typically. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a special figure 1 small hit type in the A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed the prescription | regulation content of the selection table typically, (c) is the figure which showed the prescription | regulation content of the special figure 2 small hits type selection table in A1 embodiment typically. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of the fluctuation pattern table set to ROM of the main controller in A1 embodiment, (b) is the prescription | regulation content of the fluctuation pattern table for normal in A1 embodiment FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the fluctuation pattern table for time reduction in 1st A1 embodiment. FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating each hit type and the action content of a win game in the A1 embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription content of the jackpot scenario table in 1st A1 embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed typically the prescription content of the small hit scenario table in 1st A1 embodiment. (C) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot scenario a in the A1 embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the hit scenario a in 1st A1 embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed typically an example of the hit scenario b in 1st A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the hit scenario c in A1 embodiment. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st A1 embodiment, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st A1 embodiment. . It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the game flow in A1 embodiment. (A)-(i) is the timing chart which showed the time of small hit V passage in A1 embodiment. (A)-(i) is the timing chart which showed the time of the small hit V non-passing in A1 embodiment. (A)-(i) is the timing chart which showed the time of big hit V passage in 1st A1 embodiment. (A)-(i) is the timing chart which showed the time of big hit V non-passing in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in A1 embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation in A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display data table in A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the drawing list | wrist in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting start setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main controller in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the specific jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot ending control process performed by MPU in the main controller in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in the main controller in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting ending control process performed by MPU in the main controller in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and effect process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows V interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the change pattern command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a stop classification command process. (A) is a flowchart which shows the back surface image change command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 embodiment. (C) is a flowchart showing a chance command process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus according to the first embodiment A1. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the jackpot start command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed round number command processing. (A) is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a small hitting start command process. (A) is a flowchart showing a small hit end command process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows V entrance passage command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the V production command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the A2 embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the distribution apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A)-(d) is the figure which showed typically the inside of the sorting apparatus B700 in 2nd A2 embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the A3 embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the croon member in A3 embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the A4 embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow-path unit in A4th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the roulette opportunity displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in A4 embodiment. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the roulette opportunity displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in A4 embodiment. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the roulette opportunity displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in A4 embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in A4th Embodiment. (A) is the timing chart which showed the roulette display timing at the time of small hit V passage in A4 embodiment, (b) is the timing chart which showed the roulette display timing at the time of big hit V passage in A4 embodiment It is. (A) is the timing chart which showed the roulette display timing at the time of small hit V non-passing in A4 embodiment, (b) showed the roulette display timing at the time of big hit V non-passing in A4 embodiment. It is a timing chart. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in A4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the conditional device determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in A4 embodiment. It is the figure which showed V winning device in A5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the specific jackpot control process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in A5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the specific jackpot control process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in A5th Embodiment.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 59, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 1 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape 2 that is formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. And an inner frame 4 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 4, the outer frame 2 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two positions on the left and right of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 4 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places on the left and right sides of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the front door is provided with the side on which the hinges 19 are provided as an opening / closing axis. 5 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front door 5 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is disposed on the back side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the periphery of the window portion 5c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 1, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpots or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front door 5 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light-emitting means such as an LED is incorporated, and a display lamp 34 is provided that can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right-side electric decoration part 32, and an adhering space K1 (see FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 5c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76 and 77, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of wood on which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side cannot be seen by the player. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located at an inner position of the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in the above is planted. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 76 (the upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 1 is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state by a lighting state, or whether a pachinko machine 1 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when there is a winning at either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the big hit type if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) in the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning opening 140 It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a normal state, it is a game state in which neither the probability change nor the time is short (the state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability has been increased).

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time during which the first electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is longer than normal. Time is set. When the first electric combination 140a is in an opened state (open state), the first winning combination 140a is compared with a case where the first electric combination 140a is in a closed state (closed state). The ball is ready to win. Therefore, during the probability change or during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, Thus, the number of times that the first electric accessory 140a is opened may be changed to be larger than normal. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the first electric accessory is not changed during the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and once. It is also possible to change at least one of the number of times 140a is opened. In addition, during the time of probability change or in a short time, the first electric combination 140a and the second electric combination 82 are opened at the time when the first electric combination 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened or once. The number of hits may not be performed, and only the probability of hitting the second symbol may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 as a trigger (start winning). A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for displaying the symbols in a variable manner, and an LED for variably displaying the second symbols with the passage of the first through gate 66 as a trigger. The 2nd symbol display apparatus (not shown) comprised by these is provided.

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66, the second symbol display device alternately displays a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. The variable display to light is performed. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chances for winning in the winning lottery increase, the player can be given many opportunities for the first electric combination 140a of the second winning opening 140 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time reduction.

  In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the second winning a prize opening during the probability change or in the short time may be achieved by other methods such as increasing the probability of winning during the probability change or shortening the time. When it is in a state where it is easy for the ball to win 140 and the third winning opening, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the first electric combination 140a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured to allow passage of a part of the ball that flows down the game board out of the balls fired on the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passages of the first through gate 66 of the sphere is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and a second symbol hold lamp (not shown). ) Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing the ball of the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). . Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 140 through which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second winning port 140, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 ( (See FIG. 4), the jackpot lottery is made, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 is also a winning port from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 140 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls that are paid out when a ball is awarded to the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls that are paid out when a ball is awarded to the second prize opening 140, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 140 may be five.

  The first winning combination 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. The first electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Yes. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the sphere to the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a is The open state (enlarged state) is entered, and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 140.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 140a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Furthermore, during the time when the probability is changing or when the time is short, the time during which the first electric accessory 140a is opened also becomes longer than during normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change or during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball is won at the first winning port 64 and when the ball is won at the second winning port 140. However, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have the first electric accessory 140a as in the second winning port 140, and the ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 140 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, resulting in a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during the probability change and the short time, passing the ball through the first through gate 66 makes it easy for the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 to be in an open state, so that the second winning opening 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 140 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the first through gate 66. It is advantageous for the player to make the first electric accessory 140a open and aim to win 15R probability variation by winning the second winning opening 140.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether it is being prone to change, shorting, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality (for example, three) of two or more may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64. The left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided an adhering space K1 for adhering a certificate paper, an identification label, etc., and the certificate paper or the like affixed to the adhering space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to the unillustrated ball discharge path through the first outlet 71. The The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be held (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes drive motors 481, 491, 661, and 880.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 has a variation effect of the third symbol, etc. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

  In FIG. 7, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R and the protruding member 485 of the displacement unit 400 and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are each displaced to the retracted position, and in FIG. The left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, the projecting member 485, and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively displaced to the overhanging positions.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 300 formed in a box shape, and a displacement unit 400, a projection unit 600, and a vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively disposed in the inner space of the rear case 300. Housed in order.

  The back case 300 includes a bottom wall 301 having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an outer wall 302 standing from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall 301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. The bottom wall 301 is formed with an opening 301a having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back of the bottom wall 301 is visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

  The displacement unit 400 includes a front frame-shaped base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, a left displacement member 420L, a right displacement member 420R, and a base member 410 that are displaceably disposed on the base member 410. A projecting member 485, a retracted position for retracting the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 to the rear side of the projection unit 600, and an opening 301a of the rear case 300 (that is, the third symbol display device). 81) and can be displaced between the overhanging positions projecting to the front side (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  In this case, the displacement unit 400 is provided with two drive means (a first drive motor 481 and a second drive motor 491) for driving the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485). By selecting the driving means to be driven, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be made different (a plurality of types of displacement modes are formed). Details of this structure will be described later.

  The projection unit 600 includes an annular base member 610 disposed in front of the displacement unit 400, a disk-shaped projection plate member 620 disposed on the inner peripheral side of the base member 610, and a projection. And a plurality of LEDs 651 that allow light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620. The projection plate member 620 is made of a light transmissive material, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player. When the light is incident from the LED 651, the incident light is changed into a pattern or The light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in a pattern-shaped manner. That is, a pattern or a pattern can be raised (displayed) on the front of the third symbol display device 81.

  In this case, the projection unit 600 employs a structure that increases the efficiency of incidence of the light emitted from the LED 651 on the projection plate member 620, and strengthens the light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 (pattern or pattern). Can appear clearly). In addition, a structure that improves workability when assembling a plurality of LEDs 651 (irradiation unit 650) to the base member 610 is employed. Details of these structures will be described later.

  The vertical displacement unit 800 includes a front base 820 and a rear base 830 disposed at the upper part of the base member 610 of the projection unit 600, and a displacement member 850 whose one end is rotatably supported by both the base members 820 and 830. The other end side of the displacement member 850 is displaced between a retracted position above the opening 301a of the back case 300 (that is, the third symbol display device 81) and an overhanging position protruding to the front side. Yes (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  In this case, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes an urging spring SP that urges the displacement member 850, and the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elasticity of the urging spring SP at a predetermined position between the retracted position and the extended position. By balancing the recovery force, the displacement member 850 performs reciprocal displacement (approximately simple vibration) by the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP around the balance position (predetermined position). Structure is adopted. Details of this structure will be described later.

  Next, the displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400.

  The displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 300, and a displacement member (left displacement member 420L and right displacement that is displaceably disposed on the base member 410). Member 420R) and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) for applying a drive force to the displacement member, and as described above, the lower drive When the displacement member is displaced by driving the mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481), the displacement member is displaced by driving the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), or the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive). When the displacement member is displaced by driving both the motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), the displacement member may be displaced in a different manner. It is formed so as to kill. Details of the structure will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  First, the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 is a front perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, and FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the displacement unit 400 includes a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420R that are formed as displacement members that perform effects by displacement, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R include the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. The left driven member 430L and the right driven member 430R, the carriage member 440, the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R are connected.

  The left displacement member 420L is a long member disposed in a vertical posture, and includes a connecting shaft 421 protruding from the back surface, a connecting hole 422 drilled at the upper end, and a slide drilled at the lower end. A moving groove 423. The connection shaft 421 is a shaft having a circular cross section, and the connection hole 431 of the left driven member 430L is rotatably supported. That is, the upper end of the left driven member 430L is rotatably connected to the back side of the left displacement member 420L.

  The connecting shaft 421 is set to have a length dimension that protrudes from the back surface of the left driven member 430L, and the protruding tip of the connecting shaft 421 is a drive groove 494c (in the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490). 17 and 18) is slidably inserted. That is, when the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven (rotated), the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c acts on the connecting shaft 421, and the left displacement member 420L is displaced.

  The connecting hole 422 is a hole having a circular cross section, and one connecting shaft 441 of two connecting shafts 441 of a carriage member 440 described later is rotatably inserted. That is, the left displacement member 420L is connected in a state in which a relative change in position with respect to the cart member 440L (rotation with the axis of the connection hole 422 as the rotation center) is allowed.

  The sliding groove 423 is a groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the left displacement member 420L, and a driving pin 488b (see FIG. 15) of the lower left rack 488L described later is rotatably and slidably inserted therethrough. . Accordingly, in the state where the lower left rack 488L is stopped, only the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven or vice versa, the posture change (rotation) of the left displacement member 420L with respect to the base member 410 is reversed. Can be formed.

  The left driven member 430L is a member that is driven between the base member 410 and the left displacement member 420L to be driven by the displacement of the left displacement member 420L, and is a connection hole 431 that is drilled at one end (upper end). And a sliding pin 432 protruding from the back surface.

  The connection hole 431 is a hole having a circular cross section, and as described above, the connection shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is rotatably inserted. The sliding pin 432 is a pin (rod-like body) having a circular cross section, and is rotatably and slidably inserted into a sliding groove 410 a formed in the side of the base member 410. Therefore, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the left driven member 430L can be driven while changing the relative posture with respect to the left displacement member 420L.

  The carriage member 440 rolls on a driven surface that extends along the left-right direction (width direction) on the upper portion of the base member 410 (upper intermediate portion 410f and upper front portion 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18). And two connecting shafts 441 arranged in parallel, and four rolling wheels 442 that are rotatably supported at both ends of each of the connecting shafts 441. Therefore, the upper end of the left displacement member 420L is displaced along the left-right direction (width direction) via the cart member 440 as each rolling wheel 442 of the cart member 440 rolls on the driven surface. .

  The rolling surface of the base member 410 is formed as a substantially horizontal flat surface facing the upper side in the vertical direction, and the rolling wheels 442 of the carriage member 440 are placed on the rolling surface. That is, the left displacement member 420 is suspended and supported by the rolling surface of the base member 410 via the carriage member 440.

  The upper left rack 450L slides on a guide portion that extends along the left-right direction (width direction) on the upper portion of the base member 410 (upper intermediate portion 410f and upper front portion 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18). It is a long plate-shaped member, and is engraved along the longitudinal direction in the two connecting holes 451 through which the two connecting shafts 441 of the carriage member 440 are rotatably inserted and the back surface of the upper left rack 450L. Rack gear 452.

  Here, the right displacement member 420R is formed in a substantially bilaterally symmetric shape with respect to the left displacement member 420L, the right driven member 430R is formed with respect to the left driven member 430L, and the upper right rack 450R is formed with respect to the upper left rack 450L. Since the configuration is substantially the same, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  However, the upper right rack 450R is provided with a rack gear 452 in front of it. In addition, the upper right rack 450R is arranged with the connecting hole 451 formed in a position offset from the front side, and is disposed at a different position in the front-rear direction from the upper left rack 450L. Therefore, the rack gear 452 of the upper left rack 450L and the rack gear 452 of the upper right rack 450R are opposed to each other with a predetermined interval. In this case, a pinion gear 459 that is rotatably supported by the base member 410 is engaged with both rack gears 452.

  Accordingly, in accordance with the displacement of the left displacement member 420L, the upper left rack 450L is displaced (slid) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19) along the guide portion (not shown) of the base member 410. Then, the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

  In the present embodiment, since the number of pinion gears 459 provided between the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R is an odd number (that is, one), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R The displacement direction can be the reverse direction (the direction in which they are close to each other or away from each other). However, the number of pinion gears 459 arranged may be an even number, and the displacement directions of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R may be the same direction.

  Next, the lower drive mechanism 480 among the plurality of drive means (the lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  13 and 15 are front perspective views of the displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 14 and 16 are rear perspective views of the displacement unit 400. 13 and 14 show a state where the back cover 412 is attached, and FIGS. 15 and 16 show a state where the back cover 412 is removed. In addition, in FIG. 13 to FIG. 16, the illustration of the raising cover 413 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, the lower drive mechanism 480 includes a first drive motor 481, a pinion gear 482 attached to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481, and a drive in which the pinion gear 482 is engaged. A gear 483, a drive arm 484 that forms a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 483, a projecting member 485 driven by the drive arm 484, a rack gear 486 disposed on the back surface of the projecting member 485, and a rack gear 486 And a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488R that are meshed with the last gear 487e of the gear train.

  The first drive motor 481 is attached to the front of the left front cover 411L, and a pinion gear 482 is attached (fixed) to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481 protruding from the back of the left front cover 411L. The The drive gear 483 is rotatably supported on the back surface of the left front cover 411L, and the drive arm 484 is rotatably supported on the front surface of the base member 410.

  The drive gear 483 is provided with an eccentric pin 483a which is located eccentric from the center of rotation and protrudes from the back surface. The drive arm 484 includes a shaft support hole 484a through which the support shaft of the base member 410 is rotatably inserted, a linear slide groove 484b through which the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483 is slidably inserted, and shafts thereof. And a drive pin 484c that protrudes from the front at the end opposite to the side where the support hole 484a and the sliding groove 484b are formed.

  Therefore, when the driving gear 483 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction via the pinion gear 482 by the driving force of the first driving motor 481, the eccentric pin 483a of the driving gear 483 moves to the sliding groove 484b of the driving arm 484. When one or the other inner wall surface is acted on, the drive arm 484 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction around the shaft support hole 484a, and the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is raised or lowered.

  The protruding member 485 includes a linear sliding groove 485a into which the driving pin 484c of the driving arm 484 is slidably inserted, and is disposed on the front surface of the base member 410 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is an extendable linear guide mechanism, and is arranged in a vertical posture with its extension / contraction direction along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL is a base end rail disposed on the front surface of the base member 410, a front end rail disposed on the back surface of the protruding member 485, and a base rail interposed between the base end rail and the front end rail. And an intermediate rail that allows the end rail and the end rail to be displaced relative to each other in the longitudinal direction.

  Therefore, when the driving arm 484 is rotated and the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the protruding member 485 is pushed up or pushed down by the driving pin 484c of the driving arm 484, the slide rail SL is expanded and contracted, and the protruding member 485 is used as the base. The member 410 is moved up and down in the vertical direction.

  The rack gear 486 is engraved along the ascending / descending direction of the protruding member 485, and the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) has the front gear 487a meshed with the rack gear 486 and the front and right front sides of the base member 410. Each is rotatably supported between the back surface of the cover 411R. Therefore, by raising and lowering the protruding member 485, the gear train (the gears 487a to 487e) can be rotated using the linear motion of the rack gear 486.

  The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are long plate-like members, a rack gear 488a engraved on the side surface along the longitudinal direction, and a drive pin 488b projecting from the front at the end in the longitudinal direction. Are provided. The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R have different positions in the vertical direction, and with the rack gears 488a facing each other, between the back surface of the base member 410 and the front surface of the back cover 412 (in the width direction). 19 in the left-right direction).

  The gear 487e at the end of the gear train is coaxially fixed to the adjacent gear 487d and protrudes to the back side through the opening 410b drilled in the base member 410, so that the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack It meshes with each rack gear 488a of the rack 488R. Therefore, as described above, when the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) is rotated as the protruding member 485 is moved up and down, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are mutually connected by the rotation of the last gear 487a. It can be linearly moved in the opposite directions (directions close to each other or away from each other).

  The drive pin 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R protrudes to the front side through a linear insertion groove 410c formed in the base member 410, and as described above, the left displacement member 420L. And it is rotatably inserted in the sliding groove 423 of the right displacement member 420R. Thus, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are linearly moved, so that the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

  In addition, the extending direction of the insertion groove 410c is formed substantially parallel to the driven surface on which the rolling wheel 442 of the carriage member 440 rolls. That is, the direction of linear motion of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is substantially parallel to the direction of linear motion of the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R described later.

  Next, the upper drive mechanism 490 among the plurality of drive means (the lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 17 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 18 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit 400. In FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, for easy understanding, the pinion gear 459 and the upper right rack 450R are illustrated between the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the upper drive mechanism 490 includes a second drive motor 491, a pinion gear 492 attached to the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491, and a drive in which the pinion gear 492 is engaged. It mainly includes a gear 493 and a drive arm 494 that forms a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 493.

  The base member 410 has an upper portion (an upper side portion formed in a substantially frame shape when viewed from the front) formed as a divided structure in which an upper back portion 410e, an upper intermediate portion 410f, and a front portion 410g are sequentially stacked on the front side. Is done.

  The second drive motor 491 is attached to the front surface of the portion projecting upward from the upper intermediate portion 410f, and the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491 projecting from the rear surface of the projecting portion has a pinion gear. 492 is attached (fixed). The drive gear 493 and the drive arm 494 are rotatably supported on the back surface of the upper middle portion 410f.

  The drive gear 493 includes an eccentric pin 493a that is eccentric from the center of rotation and protrudes from the back surface. The drive arm 494 includes a shaft support hole 494a through which the support shaft of the upper intermediate portion 410f is rotatably inserted, a linear slide groove 494b through which the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493 is slidably inserted, and these And a linear drive groove 494c located at the end opposite to the side where the shaft support hole 494a and the sliding groove 494b are formed.

  Therefore, when the driving gear 493 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction via the pinion gear 492 by the driving force of the second driving motor 491, the eccentric pin 493a of the driving gear 493 moves to the sliding groove 494b of the driving arm 494. When one or the other inner wall surface receives the action, the drive arm 494 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction around the shaft support hole 494a, and the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is displaced to the left or right.

  As described above, the distal end of the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is slidably inserted into the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494. Therefore, by driving the drive arm 494 (rotating about the shaft support hole 494a) and causing the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c displaced left and right to act on the connecting shaft 421, the cart member 440 (rolling wheel 442) is covered. The upper end side of the left displacement member 420L can be displaced left and right by rolling along the rolling surface.

  In this case, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced left and right and the carriage member 440 (rolling wheel 442) rolls on the driven surface, the upper left rack 450L serves as the guide portion of the base member 410 as described above. Is displaced (slided) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19), and the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459. 420R can be displaced. The rolling surface on which the rolling wheel 442 of the carriage member 440 rolls is formed in the upper middle portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g.

  Next, the operation of the displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, both the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are driven to move the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485). A first mode of displacement will be described with reference to FIGS.

  19, 21 and 23 are front views of the displacement unit 400 in the first mode, and FIGS. 20, 22 and 24 are views of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIGS. 19, 21 and 23, respectively. It is a rear view.

  19 and 20 correspond to the state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485 are disposed at the retracted position, and FIGS. 23 and 24 illustrate the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. This corresponds to the state in which the protruding member 485 is disposed at the protruding position in the first mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, in the state of being disposed at the retracted position, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are disposed at the outermost positions (positions that are most separated from each other in the left-right direction), and The protruding member 485 is disposed at the lowermost position.

  When the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven from this state, respectively, after the state shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the state shown in FIGS. The left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the direction close to each other in the left-right direction (width direction) and the protruding member 485 is raised up to the state (the protruding position in the first mode). In the overhang position in the first mode, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485 are formed in a combined state (a state in which the three side surfaces are in close contact with each other).

  Specifically, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 484 is rotated, and the drive pin 484 c of the drive arm 484 is moved to the sliding groove 485 a of the protruding member 485. The protrusion member 485 is raised by pushing up the inner wall surface (see FIGS. 13 and 14).

  When the protruding member 485 is raised, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are displaced (linearly moved) via the rack gear 486, the gear train (gears 487a to 487e), and the rack gear 488a (see FIGS. 15 and 15). 16), the drive pin 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R acts on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, so that the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement The lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the member 420R is displaced (linearly moved) along the insertion groove 410c of the base member 410 in a direction approaching each other.

  On the other hand, when the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 494 is rotated, and the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is the connecting shaft of the left displacement member 420L. 421 is affected. As a result, the carriage member 440 rolls on the driven surface, and the upper end side (the carriage member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linearly moved) in the direction approaching the right displacement member 420R (FIG. 17 and FIG. 17). 18).

  Further, when the upper end side (cart member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the right displacement member 420R The upper end side (cart member 440) is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the left displacement member 420L (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

  In the present embodiment, the displacement amount in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 20) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is such that the lower end displacement amount is smaller than the upper end displacement amount ( In other words, the movable range of the drive pin 488b (the extended length of the insertion groove 410c) is shorter than the movable range of the carriage member 440 (the extended length of the driven surface).

  In this case, the lower end side and the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R start displacement substantially simultaneously from the retracted position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), and the overhanging position ( The lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven so as to reach substantially the same time (see FIGS. 23 and 24). That is, the displacement speed in the left-right direction on the upper end side (cart member 440) is made faster than the lower end side (drive pin 488b).

  Accordingly, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced in the left-right direction while rotating their postures, instead of being displaced in parallel in the left-right direction without rotating while maintaining the vertical posture. That is, it is impossible to displace the posture while rotating it in this way in a configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove with the driving force of one driving means. This is the first time that the drive means can be used.

  Further, when the displacement speed in the left-right direction on the upper end side (cart member 440) is different from the lower end side (drive pin 488b), the distance between the drive pin 488b and the cart member 440 is changed. Since the moving groove 423 has a long hole shape extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b, a change in the distance between the two can be absorbed. That is, it is not necessary to provide a complicated mechanism, and the sliding groove 423 and the driving pin 488b may be formed to be rotatable and slidable. Therefore, in addition to reducing the product cost, the reliability and durability of the operation are achieved. be able to.

  When the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven in the directions opposite to those described above from the state shown in FIGS. The left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced away from each other in the left-right direction (width direction) up to the state (retracted position) shown in FIGS. Is lowered.

  Next, only the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is driven (that is, the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is maintained in the non-driven state), and the displacement member (the left displacement member 420L, A second mode for displacing the right displacement member 420R and the protruding member 485) will be described with reference to FIGS. In the description of the second aspect, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

  FIG. 25 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the second mode, and FIG. 26 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. 25 and 26 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485 are arranged at the protruding position in the second mode.

  Here, in the state shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 (the state where it is disposed at the retracted position), the left displacement member 420L of the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 rotates on its upper end side (the axis of the connecting hole 422). It is arranged in a posture that allows rotation as a center. That is, the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is allowed to slide along the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494.

  Therefore, when only the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from this state (the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20), as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the drive pins of the figure drive arm 484 are driven. When 484c pushes up the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the projecting member 485, the projecting member 485 is raised, and the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are moved to the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member. By acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of 420R, the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is displaced (linear motion) in a direction close to each other. That is, in the second mode, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated with the upper end side (the axis of the coupling hole 422) as the center of rotation.

  Next, only the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is driven (that is, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is maintained in the non-driven state), and the displacement member (the left displacement member 420L and A third mode for displacing the right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. In the description of the third aspect, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

  FIG. 27 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the third mode, and FIG. 28 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. 27 and 28 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the overhang position in the third mode.

  Here, the sliding groove 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R has an elongated hole shape extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member The member 420R is allowed to be lifted upward.

  Accordingly, when only the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (the state where it is disposed at the retracted position), as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the drive arm The inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of 494 is applied to the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L, and the upper end side (the carriage member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linearly moved) in the direction approaching the right displacement member 420R. In both cases, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the upper end side (the carriage member 440) of the right displacement member 420R is displaced in the direction approaching the left displacement member 420L. (Linear motion)

  That is, in the third aspect, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated with the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) as the center of rotation. In the third mode, only the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced, and the protruding member 485 can be maintained in a stopped state.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, guide means (for example, a guide groove) is extended on the base member 410, and the displacement member is formed so as to be able to be displaced (guided) along the guide means. The displacement mode of the member (the trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one. Therefore, the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member becomes one pattern, and it is difficult to produce an effect that gives the player's intention. Even if the driving force (driving speed) of the driving means (for example, the driving motor) is changed in magnitude, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases and decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) remains constant. For this reason, it is difficult to produce an effect that expresses the player's intention.

  On the other hand, according to the displacement unit 400 of the present embodiment, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are provided, and the drive state is selected (changed). Thus, the displacement member (the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485) can be displaced in three types of modes (first mode, second mode, and third mode). That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member is limited to one, the production is not a single pattern, and the displacement member can be displaced in at least three different displacement modes. Thus, it is possible to produce an effect that makes a player's intention.

  In particular, in the first mode (see FIGS. 19 to 24), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can cause the displacement (linear motion) to be dominant, while the second mode. In the third mode (see FIGS. 19, 25 to 28), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced only by rotation (rotational motion), and the displacement motion forms are different. Can be made. As a result, the change of the displacement mode of the displacement member can be increased, and an effect that makes the player's intention can be easily performed.

  In this case, in the conventional product, there are those that change the displacement mode by changing only the rotation direction while the rotation center remains constant, but the second mode and the third mode in the present embodiment are The rotation center is not the only difference in the rotation direction but the rotation direction is different and the rotation center is also different (in the second aspect, the upper end side is the rotation center, and the third aspect Then, the lower end side is set as the rotation center), and the change of the displacement mode of the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) can be increased, and the effect of giving the player's intention can be easily performed.

  In the first mode, the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) are displaced in a form that combines rotation and parallel movement (linear motion), and the direction of the rotation is the third mode. The direction of rotation is the same as the direction of rotation. Therefore, at the initial stage of the first aspect and the third aspect (see, for example, FIGS. 21 and 27), the player can visually recognize the displacement members so as to be displaced toward each other. Can be difficult. On the other hand, in the first mode, the protruding member 485 is raised in accordance with the displacement of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R in the approaching direction, whereas in the third mode, the protruding member 485 is stopped. Can be maintained in a state. That is, when the protruding member 485 is raised at the initial stage when the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced toward each other, the displacement member is displaced to the overhang position in the first mode. Can make the player expect that.

  In the displacement unit 400, the carriage member 440, the lower left rack 488L, and the lower right rack 488R are respectively disposed (held) on the base member 410 so as to be linearly displaceable, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are disposed on the carriage member 440. And the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are connected to the lower ends (sliding grooves 423) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. It is inserted so as to be rotatable and slidable.

  Thereby, as described above, the structure for causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R to perform a linear motion including the rotational component (first aspect) and a rotational motion (second and third aspects). Can be simplified. For example, it is conceivable to provide a curved guide groove and to displace the displacement member along the guide groove. However, in the case of sliding displacement along such a curved locus, a complicated structure is required ( That is, when the locus is curved, not only the mechanism for guiding the member corresponding to the carriage member 440, the member corresponding to the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R in a curved shape, but also each of these members 440, It is necessary to provide a mechanism that can continuously apply a driving force to 488L and 488R).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the carriage member 440, the lower left rack 488L, and the lower right rack 488R may be guided in the linear direction, and therefore the carriage member 440 may be guided by the driven surface as a flat surface. Since the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R can use a rack and pinion mechanism, their structures can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve durability and operation reliability.

  Further, according to the displacement unit 400, the mechanism for guiding the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is common in any of the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third aspect. One end side (upper end side) of each of the displacement members 420L and 420R is guided by the carriage member 440 rolling on the driven surface, and the other end side (lower end side) thereof is the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack. The 488R is guided by sliding (linear movement) between the base member 410 and the back cover 412. That is, it is not necessary to provide different guide mechanisms according to the respective modes, and therefore it is not necessary to adopt a structure for switching between different guide mechanisms. As a result, the structure can be simplified, the reliability and durability of the operation can be improved, and the product cost can be reduced.

  Next, the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 46.

  First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32. FIG. 29 is a front view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 30 is a rear view of the projection unit 600. FIG. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 to 32, the projection unit 600 includes an annular base member 610 in front view, a disk-shaped projection plate member 620 rotatably disposed on the base member 610, and a projection thereof. A plurality of irradiation units 650 arranged to surround the outer peripheral side of the plate member 620, a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661 are transmitted to the projection plate member 620. And a gear train (gears 662 to 664).

  The base member 610 includes an annular rear surface base 611 and an annular front surface base 612 disposed in front of the rear surface base 611, and is formed between the opposing surfaces of the rear surface base 611 and the front base 612. The projection plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) are accommodated in the internal space.

  It should be noted that the projection plate member 620 is visible to the player in an area inside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612 in front view (hereinafter referred to as “display area”), and is an area outside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612. In the (ie, the area shielded by the front base 612) (hereinafter referred to as “outside the display area”), the projection plate member 620 is not visible to the player.

  The projection plate member 620 is made of a light transmissive material, allows the player to visually recognize the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back side, and is irradiated from the irradiation unit 650. When the incident light is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in a form that forms a pattern or a pattern, and is visually recognized by the player. That is, a pattern or a pattern can be raised (displayed) on the front of the third symbol display device 81.

  A gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 are disposed on the rear side and the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the projection plate member 620, respectively. The gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and are disposed concentrically with the projection plate member 620.

  A plurality of teeth are formed on the gear member 630 along the outer peripheral surface, and the gear 664 at the end of the gear train is engaged. The groove forming member 640 is a member for forming a guide groove 641 having a U-shaped cross section continuous with the projection plate member 620 in the circumferential direction, and a plurality of collars rotatably supported by the base member 610. The projection plate member 620 is rotatably held by the base member 610 by C being guided by the guide groove 641. The detailed configuration of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 will be described later.

  The irradiation unit 650 is a unit including a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 651) for causing light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and each LED 651 faces the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 (opposes the outer peripheral surface). A plurality (5 in this embodiment) are arranged in the posture. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the extension line in the irradiation direction of each LED 651 is set to pass through the approximate center of the projection plate member 620. In addition, the detail of the attachment structure to the base member 610 of the irradiation unit 650 is mentioned later.

  The drive motor 661 is disposed on the back side of the back base 611, and the leading gear 662 of the gear train is connected (fixed) to the drive shaft of the drive motor 661. The gear member 630 disposed on the projection plate member 620 is engaged with the gear 664 at the end of the gear train. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 661 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (gear 662 to gear 664), and the projection plate member 620 is rotated.

  Next, a holding structure for the projection plate member 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 33 is a front view of the back base 611. 34 is a rear view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 35 is a rear view of the front base 612.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the back surface base 611 includes an inner standing portion 611a standing on the inner edge portion of the annular plate member, 611a, and an outer standing portion standing on the outer edge portion of the annular plate member. An installation portion 611c, an intermediate standing portion 611b standing between the inner standing portion 611a and the outer standing portion 611c, and an inner concave groove in a region surrounded by the inner standing portion 611b and the inner standing portion 611a 611d, an outer recessed portion 611e in a region surrounded by the inner standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 611c, and a regulation protrusion 611f that protrudes from an annular plate member with a predetermined interval therebetween. It is formed.

  The inner standing portion 611a is erected from the inner edge of the annular plate member to the front side (front side in FIG. 33) and has a certain thickness in the radial direction.

  The outer standing portion 611c is erected from the outer edge portion of the annular plate member to the front side (the front side in FIG. 33) and has a certain thickness in the radial direction.

  The intermediate standing part 611b is erected at an intermediate position between the inner standing part 611a and the outer standing part 611b. Further, the intermediate standing portion 611b is divided into seven around the axis, and each divided end portion is connected to the outer standing portion 611c.

  The inner concave groove 611d is an area for arranging an outer edge portion of the projection plate member 620, which will be described later, and surrounds the three directions of the annular plate member, the inner standing portion 611a, and the intermediate standing portion 611b. Formed.

  The outer concave groove 611e is an area for arranging an irradiation unit 650, which will be described later, and is formed so as to surround three directions of an annular plate member, an outer standing portion 611c, and an intermediate standing portion 611b. The

  The restriction protrusion 611f is a protrusion that prevents the collar C pivotally supported by the front base 612 from rattling on the back side, and is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter larger than the inner diameter of the hole opened in the axis of the collar C. At the same time, it is formed to project from the front side. In this embodiment, six restricting protrusions 611f are formed at predetermined intervals.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, on the back surface of the front base 612, an inner standing portion 611a, an intermediate standing portion 611b, an outer standing portion 611c, and a regulation projection 611f of the rear base 611 are provided. An installation portion 612a, an intermediate standing portion 612b, an outer standing portion 612c, and a shaft portion 612f are erected. That is, in the assembled state of the base member 610, the standing tip surfaces of the standing portions 612a to 612c of the front base 612 are superimposed on the standing tip surfaces of the standing portions 611a to 611c of the back base 611, respectively. At the same time, the tip of the shaft portion 612f is inserted into the restricting protrusion 611f.

  A plurality of holding pins 612g are erected on the back surface of the front base 612 and in a region between the intermediate erected portion 611b and the outer erected portion 612c. The holding pins 612g have an axial state with a circular cross section for positioning and holding the irradiation unit 650, and are arranged at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction.

  As described above, the irradiation unit 650 includes a plurality of LEDs 651 and is a unit for causing light emitted from each of the LEDs 651 to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and extends along the periphery of the projection plate member 620. Arranged. That is, the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 is surrounded by the plurality of irradiation units 650.

  The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the rear surface of the front base 612 and between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c, and the front surface of the rear base 611 is overlapped with the rear surface of the front base 612. By this, it is accommodated between the opposing surfaces (internal space) of these both bases 611,612.

  36 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650 when viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVI in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 36, a substantially semicircular cutout portion 612b1 is formed in the middle standing portion 612b of the front base 612 by a notch at the leading end side. Similarly, a substantially semi-circular cutout 611b1 is cut out at a position in the same phase as the cutout 612b1 on the standing front end side of the intermediate standing portion 611b of the back base 611 (FIG. 33). reference).

  That is, in the state where the standing front end surfaces of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b are overlapped (that is, the assembled state of the base member 610), a substantially circular opening in front view is formed by the notch portions 611b1 and 612b2. The These circular openings are respectively formed at positions facing the respective LEDs 651 of the irradiation unit 650 (positions having the same phase).

  Therefore, the light emitted from each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 passes through the circular opening formed by the cutout portions 611b1 and 612b1 of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b and enters the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. Is done. The circular opening is set to a diameter larger than the diameter of the light emitting portion of the LED 651.

  Next, the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 37 is a front view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 along the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII in FIG. In FIG. 38, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a plate-like body having a circular shape when viewed from the front. The projection plate member 620 includes a cutout portion 621 and a reflection portion 622 that diffusely reflects light at a part of the outer edge.

  The notch 621 is a part for facilitating the arrangement of the collar C on the restricting protrusion 611f of the back base 611, and is formed by cutting out a part of the outer edge of the projection plate member 620 in a straight line direction perpendicular to the radial direction. Is done.

  The reflection portion 622 is a portion in which the inside of the projection plate member 620 is roughened by laser processing or the like, and is processed into a shape such as a pattern or a pattern over the entire area of the projection plate member 620 when viewed from the front. As a result, when the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 620 is irradiated on the reflecting portion 622, it is diffusely reflected by the rough surface of the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the surface side of the game board.

  As a result, the player can easily visually recognize the irregularly reflected light, and can visually recognize the shape of the reflecting portion 622. That is, when light is incident on the projection plate member 620, the shape of the reflection portion 622 can be displayed on the front side of the projection plate member 620.

  The gear member 630 is made of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 620, is formed from a plate-like body having an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has an outer diameter dimension larger than that of the projection plate member 620. It is set large and is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612). The gear member 630 is disposed on the back side of the projection plate member 620 (the back side in FIG. 37), and its axis is disposed coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

  The gear member 630 is inclined from the toothed portion 631 engraved along the outer peripheral surface, the rear surface portion 632 on the side surface on the rear surface side, and the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) end of the rear surface portion 632 to the front side. An inclined surface portion 633 to be provided.

  The tooth portion 631 is a tooth surface to which the gear 664 is engaged as described above, and is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear member 630 over the entire periphery.

  The inclined surface portion 633 is a surface that is connected to the end portion 634 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the back surface portion 632 and is inclined to the front side. In addition, the inclination angle of the inclined surface portion 633 to the front side is the virtual angle B1 between the imaginary line B connecting the light source A and the end portion 634 of the LED 651 and the back surface portion 632, and the virtual angle obtained by extending the back surface portion 632 to the inner peripheral side. The intersection angle θ2 of the line C and the inclined surface portion 633 is set substantially the same (θ1 = θ2).

  The groove forming member 640 is made of a light transmissive material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 620. The groove forming member 640 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a shape bent in a substantially L shape. Arranged on the projection plate member 620 side. The groove forming member 640 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612). Further, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the front side (the upper side in FIG. 38) of the projection plate member 620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

  The groove forming member 640 includes a side surface portion 641a of one surface of the inner portion bent into a substantially L-shaped cross section, a contact surface 641b of the other surface of the inner portion bent into a substantially L-shaped cross section, and a side surface portion on the front side. A front portion 642 and an inclined surface portion 643 inclined from the end on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the front portion 642 to the back side.

  The side surface portion 641a is a surface that sandwiches the collar C between facing the front surface (upper side in FIG. 38) of the projection plate member 620, and has a constant facing interval around the axis and the plane on the front surface side of the projection plate member 620. It is formed apart.

  The abutting surface 641b is a surface that abuts against the collar C disposed between the side surface portion 641a and the projection plate member 620 so as to rotatably hold the projection plate member 620, and has a cross section orthogonal to the side surface portion 641a. In addition, a circle is formed around the axis.

  Therefore, the side surface portion 641 a and the contact surface 641 b can be formed on the projection plate member 620 to form a guide groove 641 for guiding the collar C. That is, the guide groove 641 is formed between the projection plate member 620 and the groove formation member 640 by assembling the projection plate member 620 and the groove formation member 640.

  The inclined surface portion 643 is a surface inclined from the end portion 644 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the front surface portion 642 and inclined toward the back surface side. Further, the inclination angle of the inclined surface portion 643 toward the back surface is determined by the intersection angle θ3 between the imaginary line D connecting the light source A and the end portion 644 of the LED 651 and the front surface portion 642, and the virtual angle obtained by extending the front surface portion 642 toward the inner periphery. The intersection angle θ4 of the line E and the inclined surface portion 643 is set substantially the same (θ3 = θ4).

  Next, the projection plate member 620 and the collar C will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39A is a rear view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 39B is a partially enlarged sectional view of the projection unit 600 taken along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39A. 40A to 40C are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the projection unit 600. FIG. 40A to 40C show a transition state when the collar C is attached to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612. 39 and 40 show a state in which the rear base 611 is removed from the projection unit 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 39A and 39B, in a state where the collar C is disposed on the shaft portion 612f, the protruding portion C1 protruding outward in the radial direction is the front side of the projection plate member 620 (FIG. 39 (b) (lower side) and the side surface 641a of the groove forming member 640 are arranged between the opposing sides (guide groove 641).

  Further, the distance dimension L1 between the front end surface of the protrusion C1 of the collar C and the side surface portion 641a of the groove forming member 640 is greater than the distance dimension L2 between the shaft portion of the collar C and the outer peripheral surface of the groove forming member 640. Is also set small (L1 <L2).

  Therefore, in order to allow the projection plate member 620 to rotate, when the groove forming member 640 and the collar C are arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is provided, the projection plate member 620 corresponds to the gap in the vertical and horizontal directions. Even if it deviates, the contact surface 641b of the groove forming member 640 can be brought into contact with the tip of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C. As a result, the projection plate member 620 can be rotatably held at the tip of the projection C1 of the collar C, and the projection plate member 620 can be smoothly rotated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40C from FIG. 40A, attachment of the collar C to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612 will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 39A and 40A, when the collar C is disposed on the shaft portion 612f, the projection plate member 620 is disposed on the front base 612.

  Here, the projection plate member 620 is arranged on the front base 612 by arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner concave groove 612d of the front base 612. That is, the radial distance dimension of the inner concave groove 612d is formed to be larger than the radial distance dimension of the groove forming member 640, and the projection plate is formed by disposing the groove forming member 640 inside the inner concave groove 612d. The member 620 can be positioned and arranged.

  Next, the projection plate member 620 is rotated to displace the notch portion 621 of the projection plate member 620 toward the shaft portion 612f where the collar C is disposed. That is, by aligning the position of the notch portion 621 with the shaft portion 612f, the color C can be disposed on the front base 612 in which the projection plate member 620 is disposed.

  Next, the arrangement of the collar C on the shaft portion 612f is such that the shaft of the collar C is on the back side (upper side in FIG. 40 (a)) and the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 40 (a)) with respect to the shaft of the shaft portion 612f. It is performed in a state where it is tilted. In this state, the shaft of the collar C is inserted into the tip of the shaft portion 612f, and the protruding portion C1 positioned inside the projection plate member 620 is inserted into the notch portion 621 and the guide groove 641.

  From this state, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), the opposite side is rotated to the front side (lower side in FIG. 40 (b)) with the tip of the protrusion C1 positioned inside the projection plate member 620 as an axis. Thereby, the axis | shaft of the color | collar C can be arrange | positioned concentrically with the axis | shaft of the axial part 612f.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 40 (c), the collar C is displaced to the front side (lower side in FIG. 40 (c)), so that the tip surface of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C and the groove forming member 640 come into contact with each other. It arrange | positions in the position which a surface opposes. Thereafter, the collar C can be disposed inside the guide groove 641 by rotating the projection plate member 620.

  Here, when a groove is formed on the outer edge of the circular rotating member and a plurality of collars are arranged inside the groove, the rotating member is lifted (operated) to arrange the collar. There is a problem that it is necessary to arrange the color, and the assembly efficiency is low because both hands are used for the assembly.

  On the other hand, in the projection unit 600, since the notch 621 is formed in the projection plate member 620, it is necessary to lift (operate) the projection plate member 620 when arranging the color C as described above. Absent. Therefore, the assembly efficiency of the projection unit 600 can be improved.

  The projection unit 600 can be assembled by covering the rear base 611 from the rear side to the projection unit 600 assembled in this way.

  Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  41A to 43B are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. FIG. In FIG. 41 (b), FIG. 42 (b) and FIG. 43 (b), the cross-sectional lines are not shown for easy understanding.

  41B, 42B, and 43B, the refraction angle when the light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 is as follows. The light incident on the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is illustrated in a straight-line manner as it is considered that there is no influence on the invention. Further, in FIGS. 41 to 43, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

  As shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B, the light with the irradiation angle α that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 620 among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is applied to the projection plate member 620 at its outer edge. Incident from the side of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front and back side surfaces of the projection plate member 620. Thereby, the light incident on the projection plate member 620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 620 toward the center. Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine (upper side in FIG. 41 (b)).

  In this case, when the light traveling in the projection plate member 620 is irradiated on the front or back surface of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other. It is conceivable that the amount of light that enters the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 from the front or back side surface of the projection plate member 620 and travels inside the projection plate member 620 decreases.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 are made of a light transmissive material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the light transmissive material amount of the projection plate member 620. The light traveling through the member 620 is also applied to the front or back of the projection plate member 620 even when the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are irradiated to the front or back of the projection plate member 620. Total reflection is possible on the back side. Therefore, it can suppress that the quantity of the light which injected from the edge part of the projection plate member 620 reduces.

  That is, when the light passing through the medium having a high refractive index travels to the medium having a low refractive index, if the incident angle is increased, the light is totally reflected without entering the medium having a low refractive index. In the projection unit 600, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a plate-like body, and light is incident from the end face (edge) thereof, so that the incident angle of light is sufficiently large. Therefore, light does not enter the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 having a low bending rate from the projection plate member 620, and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, a decrease in the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620 can be suppressed.

  Similarly, the relationship between the projection plate member 620 and air is such that the refractive index of air is sufficiently smaller than the amount of the transmissive material (refractive index 1), and thus proceeds inside the projection plate member 620. The light is not incident on the air (in the atmosphere) from the projection plate member 620 and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, a decrease in the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620 can be suppressed.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 42A and 42B, the light with the irradiation angle β that irradiates the groove forming member 640 out of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 enters the groove forming member 640. Is done.

  The light incident on the groove forming member 640 can be reflected inside the groove forming member 640 and travel toward the axial center of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at a position where the side surface of the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent (facing), the light reflected from the inside of the groove forming member 640 can be incident on the projection plate member 620 side. .

  That is, at the position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the groove forming member 640 is in a state adjacent to the air (atmosphere), so that the light irradiated to the side surface can be reflected. On the other hand, at the position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the projection plate member 620 is formed of a light transmissive material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the light transmissive material amount of the projection plate member 620. Light can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

  The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the groove forming member 640 can be totally reflected on the inner side surface of the projection plate member 620 and travel in the same manner as the light with the irradiation angle α. The reason for this is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle α, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle β can also be transmitted through the projection plate member 620, diffusely reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to increase the intensity (light quantity) of light emitted from the projection plate member 620 without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the intensity (light quantity) of the LED 651 to be irradiated. it can.

  That is, the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is not only incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but the light irradiated to the groove forming member 640 is also incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Accordingly, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly. Therefore, since the light reaching the reflection part 622 of the projection plate member 620 among the light irradiated from the light source A can be increased, the light reflected by the reflection part 622 and emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620. By increasing the amount of the pattern, the pattern or design can be clearly displayed (displayed). In addition, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the thermal influence on other members and devices can be suppressed.

  Further, since the groove forming member 640 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612), it can be difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the appearance is accordingly increased. Deterioration can be suppressed.

  Here, the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is compared to the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above. The incident angle of the light when irradiating the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640 is reduced by the amount that is shifted in the direction). This makes it difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the groove forming member 640 on its inner side surface, but at least a part of the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is reflected, The above-described state (a state in which light is reflected by the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640) can be formed.

  Further, since the groove forming member 640 includes the inclined surface portion 643, it is possible to increase the amount of light that is irradiated at the irradiation angle β and reflected to the projection plate member 620 side. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 643 has an intersection angle θ4 that is the same as the intersection angle θ3 between the imaginary line D connecting the light source A and the end portion 644 of the LED 651 and the front portion 642 (FIG. 38). Therefore, after the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) is reflected toward the end 644, the light can travel along the inclined surface portion 643, and the light with the irradiation angle β is projected to the projection plate member. The area reflected on the 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased.

  Furthermore, since the outer diameter of the groove forming member 640 is formed larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be easily reflected by the outer edge portion of the groove forming member 640 and incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly.

  As shown in FIGS. 43A and 43B, the light with the irradiation angle γ that irradiates the gear member 630 out of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is incident on the gear member 630.

  The light incident on the gear member 630 is reflected inside the gear member 630 and travels toward the axial center of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at a position where the side surface of the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent (facing), the light reflected from the inside of the gear member 630 can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

  That is, at a position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is in a state adjacent to the air (in contact with the atmosphere), so that the light irradiated on the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reflected. be able to. On the other hand, at the position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is formed of a light transmissive material having a refractive index lower than that of the light transmissive material of the projection plate member 620. The emitted light can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

  Light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the gear member 630 is totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620 and travels to the axial center side of the projection plate member 620 in the same manner as light having an irradiation angle α. The reason is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle α, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle γ passes through the projection plate member 620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the amount of light (light amount) of the LED 651 to be irradiated.

  That is, the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is not only incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light irradiated on the gear member 630 can be incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Accordingly, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased. Therefore, since the light reaching the reflection part 622 of the projection plate member 620 among the light emitted from the light source A can be increased, the amount of light reflected by the reflection part and emitted from the front of the light transmission member By increasing the value, the pattern or design can be clearly displayed (displayed). In addition, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the thermal influence on other members and devices can be suppressed.

  Further, since the gear member 630 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612), the gear member 630 can be hardly seen by the player, and the appearance is deteriorated accordingly. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is compared with the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above with respect to the light source A (see FIG. 43 (a) downward direction). The incident angle at the time of irradiating the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reduced by the amount that the position is shifted. This makes it difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the gear member 630 on its side surface, but at least a part of the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is reflected, and the state described above. (A state in which light is reflected by the inner side surface of the gear member 630) can be formed.

  Since the gear member 630 includes the inclined surface portion 633, the amount of light that is irradiated at the irradiation angle γ and reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 633 has an intersection angle θ2 that is the same as the intersection angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A and the end portion 634 of the LED 651 and the back surface portion 632 (FIG. 38). Therefore, after reflecting the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) toward the end portion 634, the light can travel along the inclined surface portion 633, and the light irradiated at the irradiation angle γ The area reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased.

  Moreover, since the outer diameter of the gear member 630 is formed larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be easily reflected on the outer edge portion of the gear member 630 and incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly.

  Next, a detailed configuration of the irradiation unit 650 and a mounting structure to the base member 610 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46.

  44 (a) is a top view of the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 44 (b) is a front view of the irradiation unit 650 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XLIVb in FIG. 44 (a). 45A is a rear view of the irradiation unit 650 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XLVa in FIG. 44A, and FIG. 45B is an irradiation unit 650 along the XLVb-XLVb line in FIG. FIG. 44 and 45 show a state before being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612) (that is, a state where the substrate member 652 is not elastically deformed).

  As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the irradiation unit 650 includes a plurality (eight in this embodiment) of LEDs 651, a substrate member 652 on which the plurality of LEDs 651 are mounted on the front surface, and a back surface of the substrate member 652. A plurality of (two in this embodiment) first blocks 653 and second blocks 654 are provided.

  The substrate member 652 is formed from a material that can be elastically deformed into a band shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front. As described above, the LED 651 is a light emitting unit that emits light for entering from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and a plurality of the LEDs 651 are oriented in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 with the irradiation surface facing the front surface of the substrate member 652. (FIG. 44 (b) left and right direction) are arranged at equal intervals.

  The first block 653 and the second block 654 are members interposed between the substrate member 652 and the base member 610, and two first blocks 653 are disposed on the center side in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652. In addition, second blocks 654 are disposed on both sides in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 with the first blocks 653 interposed therebetween.

  The first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape from a resin material, and have higher rigidity (characteristics that are difficult to elastically deform) than the substrate member 652. Therefore, in the state of being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), only the portion located between adjacent blocks 653 and 654 of the substrate member 652 can be elastically deformed. Here, the first block 653 and the second block 654 will be described with reference to FIG.

  46 (a) is a front view of the first block 653, and FIG. 46 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first block 653 along the XLVIb-XLVIb line of FIG. 46 (a). FIG. 46C is a front view of the second block 654, and FIG. 46D is a cross-sectional view of the second block 654 along the XLVId-XLVId line of FIG.

  The first block 653 includes a bottom wall portion 653a that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and a side wall portion 653b that is erected from the four sides of the bottom wall portion 653a toward the front side (see FIG. 46A). It is formed in a box shape with the front side open.

  Of the four side wall parts 653b, the opposing side wall part 653b (standing from the short side of the bottom wall part 653a) is provided with a fastening hole h in the end face on the front side, and the screw S1 can be fastened. It is said. Further, the side wall portions 653b different from the side wall portion 653b in which the fastening holes h are provided are connected to each other by a connecting wall 653c, and a projection 653c1 protrudes from the front end surface of the connecting wall 653c.

  The second block 654 includes a bottom wall portion 654a that is rectangular in front view and a side wall portion 654b that is erected from the four sides of the bottom wall portion 654a toward the front side. The side) is formed in an open box shape. An opening 654a1 having a rectangular shape in front view is formed in the bottom wall portion 654a so that an electrical connection line can be inserted.

  Of the four side wall portions 654b, the side wall portion 654b erected from the short side of the bottom wall portion 654a is provided with a fastening hole h in the end surface on the front side, and the screw S1 can be fastened. Further, the side wall portions 653b erected from the long side of the bottom wall portion 654a are connected to each other by a connecting wall 654c. The connecting wall 654c has a fastening hole h formed in an end surface on the front side thereof, and a screw S1. Can be concluded.

  In the first block 653 and the second block 654, insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 are formed in two portions of each of the side wall portions 653b and 654b erected from the long side of the bottom wall portions 653a and 654a (FIG. 45). (See (a) and FIG. 46 (b)). The holding pins 612g of the front base 612 are inserted through the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1. As a result, the positions of the blocks 653 and 654 with respect to the front base 612 can be positioned and held at the positions.

  The first block 653 is symmetric with respect to a first virtual plane (that is, a virtual plane including the axes of the two fastening holes h) passing through the center in the vertical direction (FIG. 46A, vertical direction). In addition, it is formed in a shape that is symmetric with respect to a second virtual plane that passes through the center in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 46A) and is perpendicular to the first virtual plane.

  Therefore, since the first block 653 can be shared in the irradiation unit 650 in which the two first blocks 653 are arranged for one substrate member 620, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can do. Further, when the first block 653 is assembled to the substrate member 620, the first block 653 does not have both the vertical direction and the longitudinal direction with respect to the substrate member 620, so that the workability during the assembly operation is improved. Can be achieved.

  Similarly, the 2nd block 654 is with respect to the 1st virtual surface (namely, virtual plane each including the axial center of the two fastening holes h) which passes through the center of an up-down direction (FIG.46 (c) up-down direction). It is formed in a symmetrical shape.

  Therefore, since the second block 654 can be made common in the irradiation unit 650 in which the second block 654 is disposed for the substrate member 620, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can do. In addition, when the second block 654 is assembled to the board member 620, the second block 654 does not have a vertical direction with respect to the board member 620, so that the workability during the assembly work is improved. Can do.

  Returning to FIG. 44 and FIG. The first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back side of the substrate member 652 with their longitudinal directions aligned with the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 and spaced apart from adjacent ones. The

  Specifically, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are overlapped with the back surface of the board member 652, and the screw S1 inserted through the insertion hole formed in the board member 652 is screwed into the fastening hole h. As a result, the substrate member 652 is fastened and fixed to the back side. In this case, the protrusion 653c1 of the first block 653 protrudes to the front side from the insertion hole formed in the board member 652.

  Only the LED 651 is disposed (mounted) on the front surface of the substrate member 652, and other electronic components and connectors are disposed (mounted) on the back surface of the substrate member 652. In this case, as described above, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in a box shape with the front surface opened, and the opened side is disposed so as to overlap the back surface of the substrate member 652. That is, since both the blocks 653 and 654 are provided with a recess on the surface on which the board member 652 is overlaid (arranged), an electronic component or connector mounted on the board member 652 is provided in the recess (internal space). Can be accommodated. Therefore, the electronic component and the connector can be covered and protected by the both blocks 653 and 654, so that the electronic component and the connector are prevented from being damaged due to contact with the surrounding displacement member (for example, the projection plate member 620). it can.

  The circuit (pattern) formed on the substrate member 652 is formed on the back surface thereof. Therefore, since such a circuit can also be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, it is possible to prevent the circuit from being damaged (disconnected) due to contact with a surrounding member (for example, the projection plate member 620). it can. In addition, the portion of the board member 652 where the blocks 653 and 654 are not disposed is elastically deformed (bent) into a curved shape that protrudes toward the back side (see FIG. 34), so that the circuit is projected accordingly. It can be separated from the plate member 620. Thereby, it can suppress that a circuit is damaged (disconnection) also about the part in which both blocks 653 and 654 are not arranged.

  An arrangement method (assembly method) of the irradiation unit 650 configured as described above to the base member 610 will be described. First, the irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 612 and in an area between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c. In this case, the holding pins 612g erected from the rear surface of the front base 612 are inserted into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654 while elastically deforming (bending) the substrate member 652. .

  Thus, the blocks 653 and 654 (that is, the irradiation unit 650) are held on the back surface of the front base 612, and the position where the irradiation unit 650 is disposed (that is, the irradiation direction of the LED 651) can be positioned at a predetermined position (FIG. 34). reference). Thereafter, the front surface of the back surface base 611 is overlapped with the back surface of the front surface base 612, so that the irradiation unit 650 is accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of both the bases 611 and 612. That is, the irradiation unit 650 is disposed (assembled) on the base member 610.

  In the present embodiment, in a state where the irradiation unit 650 is disposed on the base member 610, the LEDs 651 are disposed on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction as described above. That is, not only the circumferential interval of the LED 651 in one irradiation unit 650 but also the circumferential interval of the LED 651 in the one irradiation unit 650 and the irradiation unit 650 adjacent to the one irradiation unit 650 is the same interval as the other. Is done.

  Here, the projection unit 600 causes light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 651 to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, it is necessary to arrange a plurality of LEDs 651 along the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. In addition to the large number of LEDs 651 (attachment), each LED 651 is adjusted by adjusting the irradiation surface (irradiation direction) of each LED 651 toward the center of the projection plate member 620. It is necessary to do this, and the labor of arrangement work increases.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651 are mounted on the substrate member 652 formed to be elastically deformable, so that one substrate member 652 (irradiation unit 650). Is disposed (attached) to the front base 612 (base member 610), so that a plurality of (eight in the present embodiment) LED 651 can be disposed at once (see FIG. 34). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the trouble of arranging the LED 651 accordingly.

  Further, the holding pin 612g of the back surface base 612 is inserted into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654, so that the board member 652 can be held in a predetermined posture that is elastically deformed. The direction of the irradiated surface can be defined (see FIG. 34). That is, it is not necessary to assemble a plurality of LEDs 651 to the back base 612 while individually adjusting their irradiation surfaces, and each LED 651 is simply inserted through the holding pins 612g into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of both blocks 653 and 654. Since the attitude (irradiation direction) of the LED 651 can be set (adjusted), it is possible to suppress the trouble of disposing (attaching) the LED 651 from this point.

  In this case, the irradiation unit 650 includes a first block 653 and a second block 654 that are formed with higher rigidity than the substrate member 652, and both the blocks 653 and 654 are held by the back surface base 612. It is possible to easily regulate the posture of the substrate member 652 to a desired posture by suppressing the warpage or the deflection of the substrate member 652 due to the external force input or by correcting the warp or the deflection of the substrate member 652 itself. As a result, the posture of each LED 651 can be prevented from being affected by the warping or bending of the substrate member 652, and the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction and the orientation can be easily maintained.

  In particular, each LED 651 is arranged in a region of the board member 652 where the first block 653 or the second block 654 is disposed (that is, inside the region surrounded by the four side wall portions 653b and 654b in a front view). Established. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the warping and bending of the board member 652 due to external force input such as vibration, or to easily correct the warping and bending of the board member 652 itself, so that the posture of the board member 652 is set to a desired posture. Easy to define. As a result, the posture of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warping or bending of the substrate member 652, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be further maintained. Easy to do.

  Each LED 651 is mounted on the front surface of the board member 652, while the first block 653 and the second block 654 are disposed on the back surface of the board member 652. The LED 651 can be brought closer to the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture.

  Here, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals along the longitudinal direction of the board member 652 (the horizontal direction in FIGS. 44 and 45). That is, when the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), the LEDs 651 can be arranged on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 34). Uniformity of light incident from the outer peripheral surface can be ensured.

  In this case, in this embodiment, since one of the fastening holes h formed in two places is formed in the connecting wall 654c, the second block 654 has a longitudinal dimension of the second block 654 correspondingly. Can be shortened. The second block 654 is disposed on the substrate member 652 in such a posture that the side wall portion 653b in which the fastening hole h is formed is on the first block 653 side. That is, the side wall part 653b in which the fastening hole h is not formed is positioned on both ends in the longitudinal direction of the board member 652.

  Accordingly, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652, and the uniformity of the light incident on the projection plate member 620 is ensured while the longitudinal direction of the irradiation unit 650 (horizontal direction in FIGS. 44 and 45). ) Can be shortened, and a space can be provided between adjacent irradiation units 650 (a space can be provided). In this case, the shaft portion 612f can be disposed by using such a space, and as a result, the distance between the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be easily approached.

  On the other hand, since both the fastening holes h formed in two places are formed in the connection wall 654c, the distance between the fastening holes h and the LEDs 651 can be shortened. That is, the fastening position of the board member 652 to the first block 653 by the screw S1 can be brought close to the LED 651. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the LED 651 to be affected by the warping or bending of the board member 652 due to external force input such as vibration, and it is possible to easily correct the warping or bending of the board member 652 itself in the vicinity of the LED 651. Therefore, since the posture of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warping or bending of the substrate member 652, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction and the orientation can be further maintained. Easy to do.

  In this case, in the 1st block 653, since the space | interval of the fastening hole h formed in two places becomes large, there exists a possibility that the restraint of the board | substrate member 652 between these two fastening holes h may become weak. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a connecting wall 653c is provided between the side wall portions 653b in which the fastening holes h are formed, and a protrusion 653c1 protruding from the connecting wall 653c is inserted into the board member 652. Insert it into the hole. Therefore, by engaging the protrusion 653c1 and the insertion hole, it is possible to easily suppress the warpage and bending of the board member 652 due to external force input such as vibration, or it is possible to easily correct the warping and bending of the board member 652 itself. It is possible to easily define the posture of the substrate member 652 to a desired posture. As a result, it is not necessary to provide the screw S1 separately, and the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction while reducing the product cost. It is easier to maintain.

  Note that both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 (outermost in the longitudinal direction, left end and right end in FIG. 45B) are free ends (that is, not restricted by the second block 654). There is a possibility that the postures of the LEDs 651 located at both ends may become unstable. In contrast, in this embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are disposed on the back side of the substrate member 652, and the substrate member 652 is elastically deformed (bent) in a direction in which the arc center is located on the front side. ) (See FIG. 34), the elastic recovery force of the substrate member 652 can be applied as a force in a direction in which the back surfaces of both ends of the substrate member 652 are pressed against the front surface of the second block 654. As a result, the postures of the LEDs 651 located at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 can be stabilized.

  Next, the vertical displacement unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50.

  FIG. 47 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 48 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800. 49 is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 50 is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800.

  As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes a rear base 830 that is rectangular in front view, a front base 820 that is superimposed on the front side of the rear base 830, and a rear side of the rear base 830. Disposed drive motor 880, displacement member 850 that is rotated relative to rear base 830 and front base 820 by the drive force of drive motor 880, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the drive force of drive motor 880 to displacement member 850 860, a connecting member 870 that connects the transmission mechanism 860 and the displacement member 850, and a cover member 840 that is disposed in front of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 and attached to the front base 820. .

  The rear base 830 protrudes from the respective shaft centers of the opening 831 that is formed to have a size that allows the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860 connected to the drive motor 880 to be inserted, and the transmission gears 862 and 863 of the transmission mechanism 860. It mainly includes shaft portions 832 and 833 that are formed, and a rear side regulating portion 834 that protrudes from the front side and extends in a curved shape.

  The shaft portion of the drive motor 880 attached to the back surface side of the back surface base 830 is inserted into the opening 831. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be transmitted to the transmission mechanism 860 disposed on the front side of the rear base 830.

  The opening 831 is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860. Thereby, when the transmission gear 861 is damaged, the transmission gear 861 can be detached from the vertical displacement unit 800 by removing the drive motor 880 from the back surface base 830. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of parts replacement work steps when the transmission gear 861 is damaged.

  The shaft portions 832 and 833 are shafts on which transmission gears 862 and 863 of a transmission mechanism 860 described later are pivotally supported and rotatably supported, and are formed to protrude from the back surface base 830 to the front side in a columnar shape.

  The back side regulating portion 834 is a projection that regulates displacement of the connecting member 870 described later in the back direction (the depth direction in FIG. 47), and protrudes from the front side of the back base 830 and also includes a connecting member 870 described below. It extends in a curved shape along the displacement.

  The front base 820 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view with a slightly larger outer shape than the back base 830. The front base 820 has a shaft support 821 that is recessed from the front side toward the back side (from the front side of FIG. 47 to the back side of the page), a side wall 822 that stands on the edge of the back side, and protrudes to the back side. A protrusion 823, a front-side regulating portion 824 that protrudes on the back side and extends in a curved shape, and a bulging portion 825 that protrudes on the back side.

  The shaft support portion 821 is a shaft hole into which one end of a pin member 890 described later is inserted, and is recessed below the right side of the front base 820 when viewed from the front.

  The side wall 822 is a wall portion for forming a gap in which a later-described transmission mechanism 860 and a connection member 870 are disposed between the back base 830 and the front base 820, and the thickness of the transmission mechanism 860 and the connection member 870 in the front-rear direction. It is erected on the upper and left and right (other than the lower end) edges of the front base 820 with a size larger than the size. Thereby, when the front base 820 and the back base 830 are fastened, the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be arranged in a displaceable state therebetween.

  The protrusion 823 is a protrusion with which one end side (upper side in FIG. 48) of an urging spring SP described later is engaged, and is formed in a columnar shape and protrudes from the back side of the front base 820.

  The front side restricting portion 824 is a protrusion that restricts the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction (the front side in FIG. 47), protrudes from the back side of the front base 820, and follows the displacement of the connecting member 870. The curved shape is extended.

  The bulging portion 825 is a projecting wall that is disposed laterally adjacent to a biasing spring SP, which will be described later, at a predetermined interval, and is formed to project from the lower end portion of the front base 820 to the back side.

  The transmission mechanism 860 is a gear train composed of transmission gears 861 to 863, and the driving force applied from the driving motor 880 is transmitted through the transmission gears 861 and 862 by engaging with each other in series. Is transmitted.

  The transmission gear 863 includes a tooth portion 863a that meshes with the transmission gear 862, a shaft portion 863b that is coupled to the coupling member 870, a projecting portion 863c that projects in an arc shape around the shaft, and a rotational position thereof. And a plate-like sensor detection plate 863d for detecting the above.

  The tooth portion 863 a is a meshing surface formed on about two-thirds of the circular side surface of the transmission gear 863, whereby the driving force can be transmitted from the transmission gear 862 to the transmission gear 863.

  The shaft portion 863b is a shaft coupled to the coupling member 870, protrudes in a columnar shape on the back side, and is disposed at a position (eccentric position) different from the rotation axis of the transmission gear 863.

  The projecting portion 863c is a projection for suppressing the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction. The projecting portion 863c is formed to project from the outer edge portion on the back side of the transmission gear 863 and is centered on the axis of the transmission gear 863. It is formed to be curved in a circular shape.

  The sensor detection plate 863d is a plate that blocks a detection region of a position detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the front base in order to detect the rotational position of the transmission gear 863, and is formed by a tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863. It is formed to protrude radially outward on the side surface that is not.

  The connecting member 870 is a member that transmits the rotational driving force of the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, and is formed to be bent in a substantially C-shape when viewed from the front, with one end (upper end in FIG. 48) in the front-rear direction. A gear side connecting hole 871 formed through, a displacement side connecting hole 872 formed through the other end of the curved shape (lower end in FIG. 48) in the front-rear direction, and a contact formed by protruding upward from the outside of the curved portion. Part 873.

  The gear side connection hole 871 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 863b. Thereby, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the transmission gear 863 can be transmitted to the connecting member 870.

  The displacement side connection hole 872 is a through hole into which a shaft portion 853 of a displacement member 850 described later is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 853. Thereby, the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 can be connected, and the driving force of the connecting member 870 can be transmitted to the displacement member 850.

  The contact portion 873 is a protrusion for restricting the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the front-rear direction, and the tip is disposed between the back-side restriction portion 834 of the back surface base 830 and the front-side restriction portion 824 of the front base 820. Is done.

  Further, the contact portion 873 has a width dimension in the front-rear direction at the front end that is slightly smaller than the distance between the back-side restriction portion 834 of the back base 830 and the front-side restriction portion 824 of the front base 820. It is formed. Therefore, when the connecting member 870 is displaced, the contact portion 873 is displaced in the gap between the back-side restricting portion 834 and the front-side restricting portion 824, thereby increasing resistance when the connecting member 870 is displaced. Can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the connecting member 870 is displaced in the front-rear direction, the displacement of the connecting member 870 can be stabilized by contacting the front base 820 or the back base 830.

  The cover member 840 is a member that holds one end side (the right end portion in FIG. 47) of the displacement member 850, is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and is fastened to the front base 820 with a pin member 890 interposed therebetween. . The cover member 840 is formed with a shaft support portion 841 that is recessed in a circular shape from the back side to the front side.

  The shaft support portion 841 is a groove that holds (pin supports) the pin member 890 in a rotatable state by inserting an end portion on the front side of the pin member 890, and is a position facing the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820. Formed. Thereby, since the pin member 890 is disposed between the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support portion 841 of the cover member 840, it can be prevented from falling off the vertical displacement unit 800.

  The displacement member 850 is a member with decoration on the front side, and one end side (the right side in FIG. 47) is formed in a horizontally long rectangle in front view, and the other end side (the left side in FIG. 47) is formed in a circular shape in front view. The displacement member 850 includes a shaft hole 851 through which the pin member 890 is inserted, a protrusion 852 to which the biasing spring SP is connected, and a shaft portion 853 that transmits the driving force of the connection member 870.

  The shaft hole 851 is a through hole into which the pin member 890 is inserted as described above, and is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at one end of the displacement member, and its inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the pin member 890. Is also formed large. Therefore, the displacement member 850 is disposed between the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support portion 841 of the cover member 840 while the pin member 890 is inserted through the shaft hole 851. The displacement member 850 can be disposed in front of the front base 820 in a state where the displacement member 850 can rotate about the axis of the shaft hole 851.

  The protrusion 852 is a protrusion with which the other end (the lower end in FIG. 50) of the urging spring SP is engaged, and is formed to protrude from the back side of the displacement member 850. In addition, when the displacement member 850 is disposed on the front base 820, the protrusion 852 is formed at a position protruding from the lower side of the protrusion 823 of the front base 820 to the back side, and the protruding distance is the front side of the back base. It is formed to a position substantially coinciding with the side surface. Therefore, the longitudinal direction of the urging spring SP can be made parallel to the direction of gravity. As a result, the displacement member 850 is always biased upward in the gravity direction with respect to the front base 820.

  As described above, the shaft portion 853 is a shaft that is inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870. When the displacement member 850 is disposed in the front base 820, the shaft portion 853 is below the front base 820 (FIG. 50). Projected to the lower position. Therefore, the displacement member 850 and the connecting member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the displacement member 850 can be transmitted to the connecting member 870.

  As described above, the pin member 890 is a shaft that is inserted into the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850, and is formed from a metal rod-like body having a hardness higher than that of the displacement member 850. Thereby, when a force is applied to the rotating shaft when the displacement member 850 is displaced, the rotating shaft can be prevented from being damaged.

  Further, the resistance of the shaft portion when the displacement member 850 rotates is the resistance when the pin member 890 rotates with respect to the respective shaft support portions 821 and 841 and the resistance when the displacement member 850 rotates with respect to the pin member 890. Since the resistance can be divided into two, the resistance can be prevented from being damaged by increasing the resistance at one location.

  Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 800 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the first position, FIG. 52 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the intermediate position, and FIG. 53 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the second position. It is.

  54 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the first position, FIG. 55 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the intermediate position, and FIG. 56 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the second position. It is. 54 to 56 show a state in which the rear base 830 is removed for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, in the state where the other end side (left side in FIG. 52) of the displacement member 850 is disposed in the raised position (first position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is disposed upward, A connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is disposed above. As a result, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 is disposed upward, so that the displacement member 850 is lifted upward.

  In the first position, the straight line connecting the shaft center of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft center of the shaft portion 863b is connected to the shaft center of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870. The straight line is arranged on the same straight line.

  Therefore, in the first position, the displacement member 850 can form a state in which a force component in a direction in which the transmission gear 863 is rotated by pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 is not generated (that is, a dead point). As a result, after the displacement member 850 is disposed at the first position, rattling of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed and durability can be improved.

  From the state shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, when power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and the drive motor 880 is driven to rotate, and each of the transmission gears 861, 862, and 863 (transmission mechanism 860) is rotated, The shaft portion 863b is displaced downward. Therefore, the gear side connection hole 871 of the connection member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is pushed downward as the shaft portion 863b is driven to rotate. As a result, the displacement side connection hole 872 formed on the other end side (the lower side in FIGS. 54 and 55) of the connection member 870 can push down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 and rotate the displacement member 850.

  In this case, by rotating the transmission gear 863, a straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863b, the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863, and the displacement side of the connecting member 870 The straight line connecting the connecting holes 872 is in a tolerance state. Therefore, the state in which the displacement member 850 does not generate a force component in the direction of rotating the transmission gear 863 by pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 can be released. As a result, when the transmission gear 863 starts to rotate in the rotation direction for displacing the displacement member 850 (right rotation in FIG. 54), the force by which the gear side connection hole 871 of the connection member 780 is pulled by the gravity of the displacement member 850 is generated. The transmission gear 863 can be applied in the rotating direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor 880 when it is displaced from the first position.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 52 and 55, after displacement member 850 is displaced from the state shown in FIGS. 51 and 54 (that is, the state located at the dead point), power supply to drive motor 880 is performed. An explanation will be given when the is turned off.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, when the power supply to the drive motor 880 is turned off after being displaced from the first position, the shaft center (rotation center) of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft of the transmission gear 863 are shown. Gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and elastic recovery of the biasing spring SP at a position where the direction connecting the portion 863b and the direction connecting the gear side connection hole 871 and the displacement side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 are substantially orthogonal to each other. The force is balanced (intermediate position).

  Therefore, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the first position to the second position described later, the power supply to the drive motor 880 is turned off, so that the displacement member 850 is centered on the intermediate position (balanced position). It is possible to cause the displacement member 850 to perform reciprocal displacement due to the acting weight and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP. In other words, the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the gravitational direction can be an orthogonal projection motion of constant velocity circular motion, and the displacement speed can be changed, so that the displacement member can be subjected to an interesting displacement.

  On the other hand, if electric power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and a driving force is applied from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 via the connecting member 870, it is different from the above-described displacement (normal projection motion of constant velocity circular motion). In the aspect, the displacement member 850 can be displaced between the first position and the second position, and the variation of the displacement can be increased accordingly. That is, it is possible to increase the variation of displacement simply by turning on / off the power supply to the drive motor 880 and switching whether or not to apply the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850. Since it is not necessary to make it complicated, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the reliability.

  Further, as described above, since the displacement member 850 is rotationally displaced with the shaft hole 851 as an axis, the application of the driving force of the displacement member 850 from the transmission mechanism 860 is released, and the action of gravity of the displacement member 850 is achieved. When the reciprocating displacement due to the elastic restoring force of the urging spring SP is performed by the displacement member 850, the displacement on the other end side (left side in FIG. 52) of the displacement member 850 is not limited to the linear motion in the vertical direction, Displacement combined with rotational movement about the shaft hole 851 can also be used. As a result, it is possible to cause the displacement member 850 to perform an interesting displacement.

  In this case, the connecting member 870 connected to the displacement member 850 is pushed and pulled (displaced in the vertical direction) in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member 850 to rotate the transmission gear 863. Since the posture of 863 is changed, the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member in the push-pull direction can be changed. That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocally displaced, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member 850 receives from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connection member 870 can be changed. As a result, a change can be given to the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850, and an interesting displacement can be made to the displacement member.

  Furthermore, as described above, in the state where the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP are balanced (intermediate position), the shaft center of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 are Since the straight line connecting the shaft centers and the straight line connecting the shaft center of the gear side connection hole 871 and the shaft side of the displacement side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 are substantially orthogonal to each other, The magnitude of the force component in the direction in which the transmission gear 863 is rotated is maximized at the balance position (intermediate position), and the force component can be reduced in any direction from the balance position to the push-pull direction. . That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocally displaced, the resistance that the displacement member 850 receives from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed substantially symmetrically with respect to the balanced position. Can be continued easily.

  52 and 55, when electric power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and the transmission gears 861, 862, and 863 (transmission mechanism 860) are further rotated, the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is further lowered. Is displaced. Therefore, the gear side connection hole 871 of the connection member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is pushed downward further as the shaft portion 863b is driven to rotate. As a result, the displacement side connection hole 872 formed on the other end side of the connection member 870 can push down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 and rotate the displacement member 850.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, in the state where the other end side (left side in FIG. 53) of the displacement member 850 is disposed at the lowered position (second position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is disposed below. The connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is disposed below. Thereby, since the axial part 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted in the displacement side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 is arrange | positioned below, the displacement member 850 can be made into the attitude | position pressed down below.

  In the second position, the straight line connecting the shaft center of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft center of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863, the shaft center of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863, and the displacement side connection of the connecting member 870 are connected. The straight line connecting the axial centers of the holes 872 is arranged at the same straight line length.

  Therefore, in the second position, a state can be formed in which the displacement member 850 does not generate a force component in the direction of rotating the transmission gear 863 by pushing and pulling the connecting member 870. As a result, after the displacement member 850 is disposed at the second position, rattling of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed and durability can be improved.

  Next, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the first position, and FIG. 57 (b) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the intermediate position. (C) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the second position. 57 (a) to 57 (c), a part of the transmission gear 863 (the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 positioned in front of the connecting member 870) is indicated by a broken line.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (a), in the first position, the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is disposed at a position facing the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 disposed between the back surface base 830 and the transmission gear 863 can be reduced, the connecting member 870 can be easily brought into contact with the back surface base 830 or the transmission gear 863.

  Therefore, in the first position, it is possible to increase the resistance when driving the displacement member 850. As a result, in the first position, it is preferable that the displacement member 850 is in a stopped state in order to form a retracted state in which the displacement member 850 is disposed upward and the third symbol display device 81 is visible from the player. However, it is possible to easily maintain the stopped state by increasing the resistance for driving the displacement member 850.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 57 (b) and 57 (c), power is applied to the drive motor 880 and the transmission gear 863 is rotated more than a certain amount (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is in the second state). In the state where the driving range θ6 is driven), the connecting member 870 and the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 are not opposed to each other in the front-rear direction.

  Therefore, if the transmission gear 863 is rotated more than a certain amount, the gap in the front-rear direction of the coupling member 870 disposed between the transmission gear 863 and the back surface base 830 can be increased, so that resistance when the coupling member 870 is displaced is increased. Can be reduced.

  Therefore, when displacing the displacement member 850 from the first position to the second position, it is preferable to displace it in front of the third symbol display device 81 in a short time, but the resistance for displacing the connecting member 870 is reduced. The displacement member 850 can be displaced from the first position to the second position in a short time.

  As shown in FIG. 57C, the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863 at the second position.

  Here, when the displacement member that is displaced up and down is displaced downward and stopped, the gravity of the displacement member is added to the inertial force at the time of stop, so that the displacement member cannot be stopped quickly. was there.

  On the other hand, when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the vertical displacement unit 800 can abut the abutting portion 873c of the connecting member 870 on the transmission gear 863. The force for stopping the rotation of the transmission gear 863 is 2 between the force stopped when the connecting member 870 comes into contact with the transmission gear 863 and the force stopped when the rotation of the transmission gear 863 (driving of the drive motor 880) is stopped. Can be distributed in one. As a result, the displacement member 850 that has been displaced from the first position to the second position of the displacement member 850 can be quickly stopped at the second position.

  Next, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 when displaced from the first position will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c). 58 (a) to 58 (c) are rear views of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the first drive range θ5. 58 (a) to 58 (c) illustrate a transition state from the first position. 58 (a) to 58 (c), a part of the transmission gear 863 (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 positioned in front of the connecting member 870) is indicated by a broken line.

  58 (a) to 58 (c), when the transmission gear 863 is rotated and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 displaces the first drive range θ5, the second position is changed from the first position to the second position. As the position is displaced, the portion where the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 face each other can be reduced.

  Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated from the first position, the resistance for displacing the displacement member 850 can be reduced along with the displacement, so that the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

  Further, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the second position to the first position, the sliding resistance of the displacement member 850 can be increased while being displaced to the first position of the retracted position. The displacement member 850 can be quickly brought into a stopped state when it is displaced to a position and stopped.

  That is, when the displacement member 850 is displaced and stopped, it is difficult to quickly form a stop state due to the inertial force that stops the operation. However, since the resistance of the displacement member 850 can be increased, the stop state can be quickly formed. can do.

  On the other hand, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 displaces the second drive range θ6, the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 are not disposed at positions facing each other in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the resistance for displacing the displacement member 850 can be reduced. As a result, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 drives the second drive range θ6, the displacement member 850 can be quickly displaced, and the effect effect by the extending operation of the displacement member 850 can be enhanced.

  Further, in the second driving range θ6, when the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 is released, and the reciprocating displacement is performed with the displacement member 850 being the center of the intermediate position (balanced position), the projecting configuration is provided. Generation of resistance by the portion 863c can be avoided, and the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be performed smoothly.

  Next, the contact portion 873, the front base 820, and the back base 830 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 54, and FIG. 59B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. FIG. 59C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along the line LIXc-LIXc in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 is between the front-side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back-side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830. Placed in.

  That is, the front-side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back-side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830 are formed in a curved shape accompanying the displacement of the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. Thereby, the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction is restricted.

  Here, since the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 are in a state in which the shaft portion 853 is inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872, the clearance between the shaft and the hole is inclined in the front-rear direction due to the gravity of the displacement member 850. Thus, there is a problem that the displacement side connecting hole 872 or the shaft portion 853 is deformed.

  On the other hand, since the vertical displacement unit 800 is restrained from being tilted in the front-rear direction by the contact portion 873, the displacement member 850 can be displaced smoothly.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (c), when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the position where the back side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830 faces the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. It can be set as the state which is not arrange | positioned.

  Thereby, the clearance gap between the contact part 873 of the connection member 870 in the 2nd position, the front base 820, and the back surface base 830 can be enlarged. As a result, the resistance when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the second position to the first position can be reduced, and the displacement member 850 can be easily displaced from the second position.

  Further, the vertical displacement unit 800 has an abutment portion 873 substantially on a straight line connecting the shaft center of the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 and the shaft center of the gear side connection hole of the connection member 870, and the transmission gear 863 and It is arranged on the opposite side to the axis of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 across the axis of the gear side connection hole of the connection member 870 (see FIG. 54).

  Therefore, when the connecting member 870 rattles against the front base 820 and the back base 830, the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 comes into contact with the front base 820 and the back base 830, so that the shaft of the transmission gear 863 is The inclination of the gear side connection hole 871 of the part 863b and the connection member 870 can be easily suppressed. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member 850 via the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is set to be smaller than that of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640. However, in the second embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is set. The outer diameter of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is set to be the same.

  First, the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 60A is a front view of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 60B is a projection along the LXb-LXb line in FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a plate member 2620, a gear member 630, and a groove forming member 2640.

  As shown in FIGS. 60A and 60B, gear members 630 and groove forming members 2640 are disposed on the rear and front sides of the outer peripheral edge of the projection plate member 2620, respectively. Projection plate member 2620 is formed in a circular plate-like body in front view, and has an outer diameter that is the same as the outer diameters of gear member 630 and groove forming member 2640. In addition, the projection plate member 2620 includes a cutout portion 621 and a reflection portion 622 that diffusely reflects light at a part of the outer edge.

  The groove forming member 2640 is made of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 2620. The groove forming member 2640 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has a U-shaped cross section that is concave from the outer edge side to the inner edge side. The guide groove 2641 is provided. The groove forming member 2640 is disposed on the front side of the projection plate member 2620 (the upper side in FIG. 60B), and its axis is disposed coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 2620. Further, the groove forming member 2640 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612).

  The guide groove 2641 is a groove that guides the collar C inward, and has a recessed width larger than the axial dimension of the protrusion C1 of the collar C. Therefore, the plurality of collars C that are rotatably supported by the base member 610 are guided by the guide grooves 2641, so that the projection plate member 2620 is rotatably held by the base member 610.

  Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  61 to 63 are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640. In FIG. 61 (b), FIG. 62 (b) and FIG. 63 (b), the cross-sectional lines are not shown for easy understanding.

  In FIGS. 61 (b), 62 (b), and 63 (b), the light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 as in the first embodiment. The refraction angle at this time is considered as having no influence on the present invention, and the light incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 from the light source A is shown in a straight line manner. Further, in FIGS. 61 to 63, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M, as in the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 61A and 61B, the light with the irradiation angle α2 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 2620 among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is applied to the projection plate member 620 with its outer edge. Incident from the side of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 2620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front and back side surfaces of the projection plate member 2620. Thereby, the light incident on the projection plate member 2620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 2620 toward the central portion (axial center). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine.

  In this case, the projection plate member 2620 is formed to have a larger outer dimension than the projection plate member 620 in the first embodiment. Thereby, the edge part of the projection board member 2620 can be arrange | positioned near LED651 (light source A). Therefore, since the irradiation angle α2 of the second embodiment can be made larger than the irradiation angle α1 of the first embodiment, the amount of light (light quantity) projected onto the projection plate member 2620 can be increased accordingly. it can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the amount of light emitted from the LED 651.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b), irradiation of the groove forming member 640 on the front side (upper side of FIG. 62 (a)) from the guide groove 641 out of the light irradiated from the light source A of the LED 651. Light having an angle β2 is incident on the front edge of the groove forming member 2640.

  The light irradiated to the range of the irradiation angle β2 and incident on the groove forming member 2640 is reflected inside the groove forming member 2640 and travels toward the axial center of the projection plate member 2620. In this case, similarly to the first embodiment, at the position where the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 are adjacent (facing), the light irradiated on the inner side surface of the groove forming member 2640 is projected to the projection plate member 2620. It can be made to enter.

  As shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B, the groove forming member 2640 on the back side (the lower side in FIG. 62A) of the guide groove 641 among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is irradiated. The light with the irradiation angle Δ2 is incident from the rear edge of the groove forming member 2640.

  The light that is irradiated in the range of the irradiation angle Δ2 and is incident on the groove forming member 2640 is irradiated to the side surface of the guide groove 2641 of the groove forming member 2640 and reflected. The reflected light can be incident on the projection plate member 2620 by irradiating the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the side surface of the position where the projection plate member 2620 is adjacent (facing).

  That is, by making the guide groove 2641 concave on the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, light incident on the groove forming member 2640 from between the guide groove 2641 and the projection plate member 2620 is reflected on the side surface of the guide groove 2641. It can be reflected and incident on the projection plate member 2620.

  Therefore, by forming the guide groove 2641 so as to be recessed in the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, it is possible to combine the role of holding the collar C and the role of collecting light on the projection plate member 2620. .

  Compared with the first embodiment, the amount of light (light quantity) incident on the projection plate member 2620 from the groove forming member 2640 can be increased by the addition of the irradiation angle Δ. Therefore, the intensity (light quantity) of light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the light intensity (light quantity) of the LED 651 to be irradiated. .

  Furthermore, since the groove forming member 2640 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612), it can be difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the appearance is accordingly increased. Deterioration can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the light which irradiates the gear member 630 among the lights irradiated from the light source A of LED651 is the same as that of 1st Embodiment, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the state where the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are grounded over the entire outer periphery of the projection plate member 620 has been described. However, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the third embodiment are A floating surface is formed with respect to the projection plate member 3620.

  First, the shapes of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 64A is a front view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 64B is a projection along the line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. 6 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a plate member 3620, a gear member 3630, and a groove forming member 640. FIG.

  FIG. 65 (a) is a side view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 64 (a), and FIG. 65 (b) is a side view of FIG. FIG. 65C is a cross-sectional view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 along the line LXVb-LXVb, and FIG. 65C is a diagram of the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 along the LXVc-LXVc line in FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the groove forming member 640. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the projection plate member 3620 in the third embodiment is formed in a plate-like body having a circular shape in front view, and a gear member 3630 and a groove forming member 3640 are provided on the rear side and the front side at the outer peripheral edge thereof. It is arranged on each side. Further, the projection plate member 3620 has an outer diameter larger than that of the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, and a protrusion 3623 that protrudes to the front side and the back side is formed on the outer edge thereof.

  The protrusion 3623 is formed in a substantially triangular cross section that protrudes to the front side (upper side in FIG. 64 (b)) or the rear side (lower side in FIG. 64 (b)) toward the outer edge. Further, the protrusion 3623 protruding to the front side is set on the imaginary line F connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge end of the groove 3645 formed in the groove forming member 3640 described later. Is done. On the other hand, the protrusion 3623 that protrudes to the back side is set at the tip of the imaginary line G that connects the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge of the groove 3635 formed in the gear member 3630 described later. The

  The gear member 3630 is formed in an annular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. Further, the gear member 3630 includes a groove 3635 that is recessed in the side surface on the front side (upper side in FIG. 64B) with a predetermined interval, and a screw that is formed to penetrate in the circumferential direction with a predetermined interval. A stop hole 636 for use.

  The recessed grooves 3635 are grooves that are recessed in the radial direction, and are formed on both circumferential sides of each retaining hole 636. Thereby, when the gear member 3630 is disposed on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 (see FIG. 64B).

  The groove forming member 3640 is formed in an annular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. Further, the groove forming member 3640 is formed so as to penetrate the side surface on the back side (the lower side in FIG. 64 (b)) with a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction and a concave groove 3645 which is recessed with a predetermined interval. And an opening 646 for screwing.

  The concave groove 3645 is a groove provided in the radial direction, and is formed at a position facing the concave groove 3636 formed in the gear member 3630. Thus, when the groove forming member 3640 is disposed on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630.

  In this case, the surface on which the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 are grounded is, as shown in FIG. 65, an opening 646 for inserting the bolt T for fastening the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630. The surfaces overlap in the radial direction. Accordingly, when a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the holding force. That is, when the gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove formation member 3640 can be grounded by the diameter of the opening 646. Therefore, a holding surface for sandwiching the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 can be secured.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the light irradiated from LED651 (light source A) is demonstrated.

  66A and 66B are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. FIG. In FIG. 66B, the cross-sectional line is not shown for easy understanding.

  In FIG. 66B, similarly to the first embodiment, the refraction angle when the light from the light source A enters the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 affects the present invention. The light incident on the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 from the light source A is shown in a straight line state. Furthermore, in FIG. 66, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M as in the first embodiment.

  66A and 66B, among the light irradiated from the light source A of the LED 651, the light with the irradiation angle α3 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 3620 is emitted from the outer edge of the projection plate member 3620. Incident from the side.

  The light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is totally reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front and back side surfaces of the projection plate member 3620. Accordingly, light incident on the projection plate member 3620 can travel from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center side (axial center side). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α3 passes through the projection plate member 3620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine.

  In this case, in the third embodiment, since a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 is reflected by the reflecting portion 622. Can be easily reached. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 can be easily made to reach the reflection portion 622, so that the light reflected by the reflection portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620 is strengthened. And the design can be clearly revealed.

  On the other hand, light irradiated at an irradiation angle other than the irradiation angle α3 is incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630. In this case, since the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member are arranged with a gap as described above, the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630 is the first implementation. It is not incident on the projection plate member 620 side as in the embodiment.

  Therefore, the light of the light source other than the light source A of the LED 651 is incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 so that the light of the light source other than the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 3620 side. Can be prevented from entering. Thereby, it can suppress that the display given to the reflection part 622 of the projection board member 3620 floats (displays) with lights other than LED651.

  Further, as described above, the grounding surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65 (c)). A place where light is not incident can be a ground plane.

  That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when light is incident from the outside in the radial direction of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T, and the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 from being incident on the projection plate member 3620 side.

  Further, in this case, the grounding surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 can be formed over the entire surface overlapping the opening 646 in the radial direction, so that the grounding surface can be secured and projected. The groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 can be prevented from shifting with respect to the plate member 3620.

  Here, if a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, the light of the LED 651 is inserted from the gap to the axial center side of the projection plate member 3620, There is a possibility that light leaks from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 to the center.

  On the other hand, since the projection 3623 is formed at the edge of the projection plate member 3620 of the third embodiment, the light from the light source A of the LED 651 is reflected between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630. The gap is not irradiated. Therefore, light can be prevented from leaking from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 to the center.

  Furthermore, the projection 3623 can increase the dimension of the edge side surface of the projection plate member 3620 in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 66 (a)), so that the irradiation angle α3 can be increased. Therefore, the intensity (light quantity) of light emitted from the projection plate member 3620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 3620 or increasing the intensity (light quantity) of the LED 651 to be irradiated. .

  Next, an irradiation unit 4650 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 67A is a top view of the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 67B is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit 4650. FIG. 68A is a partial enlarged schematic view of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the first block 653, and FIG. 68B is a partial enlarged schematic view of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the second block 654. FIG. 67 (b) corresponds to FIG. 44 (b). Further, FIG. 68 schematically shows a state where the irradiation unit 4650 is disposed on the base member 610.

  As shown in FIG. 67, in the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are fastened and fixed to the board member 620 by screws S2. In this case, the screw S2 is set such that the height dimension of the head (the vertical dimension in FIG. 67) is larger than the height dimension of the LED 651. That is, the protruding amount of the screw S2 from the front surface of the substrate member 620 is made larger than the protruding amount of the LED 651.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 is such that the projection plate member 620 is placed on the head of one screw S2 and the screw S2 adjacent to the one screw S2. When the outer peripheral surface comes into contact (externally), the dimension is set such that the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 cannot contact the LED 651 disposed between the two screws S2.

  Thereby, LED651 can be protected by the head of screw S2. In other words, when the projection plate member 620 is rotated, for example, when the projection plate member 620 is brought close to the irradiation unit 2650 due to radial backlash based on dimensional tolerance or assembly tolerance, the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 is screwed. Contact with the head of S2 can avoid contact with the LED 651, and as a result, the LED 651 can be prevented from being damaged.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is formed from a resin material, whereas the screw S2 is formed from a metal material, so that the LED 651 is protected when the projection plate member 620 rattles in the radial direction. Can enhance the effect. Further, when the projection plate member 620 is continuously rotated while being in contact with the screw S2, since the projection plate member 620 is worn, the projection plate member 620 rattles in the radial direction. In addition, the contact with the LED 651 can be avoided.

  As described above, the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2, so that the formation of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b can be omitted. Therefore, in this case, since complicated shapes can be omitted, the shapes of the back base 611 and the front base 612 can be simplified, and the moldability in the resin molding can be improved. As a result, the yield can be improved.

  Further, since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2, the allowable amount of radial shakiness caused by the dimensional tolerance and assembly tolerance of the parts can be moderated, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. That is, the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be brought closer to each other, and as a result, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be efficiently incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620.

  Next, a projection unit 5600 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 620 is formed in a disk shape when viewed from the front and is rotated around the center of the circle has been described. However, in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 is a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. A case will be described in which the sliding displacement is made in one direction.

  First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 69 is a front view of a projection unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 5600. 71 is a rear view of the front base 5612. FIG. FIG. 72 is a rear view of the projection unit 5600. FIG. 72 shows a state in which the rear base 5611 is removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 69 to 72, the projection unit 5600 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and has a base member 5610 whose central portion is open, and is slidably disposed in an opening portion of the base member 5610. Projection plate member 5620, an irradiation unit 650 for making light incident from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 5620, a drive motor 661 for slidably displacing the projection plate member 5620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661. And a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668) for transmission to 5620.

  The base member 5610 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a rear base 5611 whose central portion is opened in a horizontally long rectangular shape is disposed in front of the rear base 5611 and has substantially the same outer shape as the rear base 5611. And a projection plate member 5620, an irradiation unit 650, and a gear train (gears 662-664, 5665) in an internal space formed between the opposing surfaces of the rear base 5611 and the front base 5612. 5668) is stored.

  As described above, the front base 5612 is a plate member that is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and has an outer standing portion 612c that is erected at the outer edge on the back side, and an opening that is horizontally long when viewed from the center. A central opening 5612h, an inner standing part 612a standing on the back side edge of the central opening 5612h, a pair of left and right holding parts 5612i protruding from both upper ends of the central opening 5612h, It is mainly formed by two shaft portions 5612k that are formed to project from the gap between the pair of holding portions 5612i to the back side, and a sliding projection 5612m that is formed to project from the lower side of the central opening 5612h to the back side. The

  The central opening 5612h is opened in a horizontally long rectangular shape at the front center of the front base 5612. The player can visually recognize the pattern and symbols of the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side of the projection unit 5600 through the central opening 5612h.

  The holding portion 5612i is a protruding portion for holding a rod member 5625, which will be described later, and is formed to protrude from the back side (front side in FIG. 71) of the front base 5612 at both upper ends of the central opening 5612h. In addition, the holding portion 5612i is formed with a recessed groove 5612i1 that is recessed in a manner of being recessed on the front side (the back side in FIG. 71) on the protruding surface.

  The groove 5612i1 is recessed in a cross-sectional arc shape from the center in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 71) of the front base 5612, and the inner diameter of the groove 5612i1 is the outer diameter of a rod member 5625 described later. Is formed larger. The pair of concave grooves 5612i1 are formed at the same height in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 71), and the distance between the ends in the horizontal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 71) is the axis of the rod member 5625. It is set larger than the directional dimension. Therefore, after disposing the rod member 5625 on the inner peripheral surface of the concave groove 5612i1, a groove having a radius larger than the outer diameter of the rod member 5625 at a position facing the concave groove 5612i1 from the back side (the front side in FIG. 71). By disposing the holding unit cover 5628 provided with both ends, the bar member 5625 can be disposed on the front base 5612 (see FIG. 72).

  The shaft portion 5612k is a projection serving as a rotation shaft of a rotating member 5670 described later, and is disposed at a symmetrical position about a perpendicular passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612 above the central opening portion 5612h.

  The sliding protrusion 5612m is a protrusion that guides the displacement of a rack 5627, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape protruding from the lower side to the back side of the central opening 5612h. The pair of sliding protrusions 5612m are arranged at symmetrical positions with respect to a perpendicular passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612.

  The projection plate member 5620 is made of a light transmissive material, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player. When the light of the LED 651 is incident, the incident light is changed into a pattern or The light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 in a pattern-shaped manner. That is, a pattern or a pattern can be raised (displayed) on the front of the third symbol display device 81.

  The projection plate member 5620 includes a rack 5627 extending in the left-right direction at the lower end portion, and a reflection portion 622 formed inside the projection plate member 5620. The rack 5627 is disposed below the central opening of the base member 610 (central opening 5612h of the front base 5612), and is disposed at a position where it cannot be seen from the front side of the projection unit 5600 in the assembled state. The rack 5627 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and its longitudinal dimension is set longer than the dimension of the projection plate member 5620 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72). Thereby, the movable range of the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 can be made larger than the horizontal dimension of the projection plate member 5620.

  In the rack 5627, a rack gear 5627a meshed with the gear 5668 is engraved on the lower surface, and a sliding groove 5627b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the center.

  The rack gear 5627a is a gear tooth surface that displaces the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) in the left-right direction when the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted through a gear train (gears 662-664, 5665-5668). Yes, and formed on the entire lower surface side of the rack 5627.

  The sliding groove 5627b is a groove for preventing the rack 5627 from tilting when the rack 5627 is displaced in the left-right direction by the drive of the drive motor 661, and is opened long in the left-right direction. A pair of sliding protrusions 5612m of the base 5612 are inserted. Thereby, when the rack 5627 is displaced with respect to the back surface base 5611, the displacement direction is regulated, and the rack 5627 is slid. The detailed operation of the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) will be described later.

  Above the rear side of the projection plate member 5620, a columnar bar member 5625 extending in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72), and a rectangular shape in front view at a position facing the projection plate member 5620 across the bar member 5625. A front cover 5626 having a shape is disposed.

  The rod member 5625 is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620 and shorter than the outer diameter of the rear base 5611, and the front cover 5626 and the projection plate member 5620 are formed. The projection plate member 5620 is interposed between the projection plate members 5620.

  The front cover 5626 is a plate member guided by the bar member 5625, and the length dimension in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72) is set to be substantially the same as the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620. A rod member 5625 is sandwiched between the projection plate member 5620 and the member 5620.

  The front cover 5626 includes a groove portion 5626a that is recessed in the front side (the rear side in FIG. 72) on the side surface facing the projection plate member 5620 and recessed in the left-right direction. The groove portion 5626a is a groove in which the rod member 5625 is disposed inside, and is recessed in a substantially U-shaped cross section. The recessed dimension in the vertical direction and the front side is set larger than the outer diameter size of the rod member 5625. Is done.

  Thereby, the rod member 5625 can be disposed inside the groove 5626a. Thereby, the projection plate member 5620 can be slidably displaced in the axial direction of the bar member 5625 with respect to the bar member 5625.

  Further, the bar member 5625 is disposed on the back side with respect to the front side surface of the front cover 5626. That is, since the rod member 5625 does not protrude from the front surface of the front cover 5626, the front cover 5626 can be disposed on the projection plate member 5620 without forming a concave portion on the projection plate member 5620.

  Here, if the bar member 5625 protrudes from the front surface of the front cover 5626, a groove for inserting the bar member 5625 needs to be formed on the back side of the projection plate member 5620. However, the projection plate member 5620 is a member that emits light incident on the projection plate member 5620 from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620 in a pattern or pattern shape. If the thickness dimension is partially reduced, the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 5620 becomes difficult to travel as much as the thickness dimension is reduced, and the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 is reduced. There was a problem.

  In contrast, in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 can be disposed on the front cover 5626 in a state where the rod member 5625 is disposed inside without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 5620. As a result, it is possible to suppress the light entering the projection plate member 5620 from becoming difficult to travel, and to suppress the amount of light emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620 from decreasing.

  Further, as described above, since both ends of the rod member 5625 are disposed on the front base 5612 so as not to drop off, the projection plate member 5620 can slide in the axial direction of the rod member 5625 with respect to the front base 5612. Retained. That is, the projection plate member 5620 is suspended from the rod member 5625 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72).

  Therefore, when a driving force is applied to the driving motor 661, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 5627 through the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668), and the rack 5627 is slid in the left-right direction. . When the rack 5627 is slid in the left-right direction, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 can be displaced in the sliding direction.

  In the irradiation unit 650, the first block 653 is arranged in a substantially linear shape along the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the LED 651 arranged in front of the first block is connected to the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. It arrange | positions in the position which opposes. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 can be made incident from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the pattern or design of the reflection portion 622 of the projection plate member 5620 can be raised.

  In addition, the side surface of the front base 5612 on which the first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is disposed is formed with a bulging portion 5612n that bulges in a substantially rectangular shape in the rear view on the back side (the front side in FIG. 71). The bulging part 5612n is a part for raising the first block 653 to the back side, and the raising dimension is set larger than the plate thickness of the rotating member 5670 described later. Accordingly, a rotation member 5670 described later can be disposed in the gap between the second block 654 and the front base 6512.

  Further, a protrusion 612g is formed on the bulging portion 5612n. The first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is disposed in the irradiation unit 5600 by inserting the protrusion 612g into the insertion hole 653b1 and being sandwiched between the front base 5612 and the rear base 5611.

  A rotation member 5670 is attached to the front side of the second block 654 disposed at both ends of the irradiation unit 650.

  The rotating member 5670 is a plate member that is bent in an L shape when viewed from the front. The rotating member 5670 is disposed on the front base 5612 in a state where the bent portion is positioned on the center side in the left-right direction, and the irradiation unit on one side of the long side. A second block 654 of 650 is attached. Further, a through hole 5671 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the bent portion of the rotating member 5670.

  The through hole 5671 is an opening into which the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 5612k. Therefore, when the rotation member 5670 is disposed on the front base 5612, the rotation member 5670 can rotate around the shaft portion 5612 k with respect to the front base 5612.

  Here, since the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the rotating member 5670, the irradiation unit 650 can be displaced when the rotating member 5670 is rotated with respect to the front base 5612. That is, by displacing the rotation member 5670, the base member 652 of the irradiation unit 650 can be bent and the second block 654 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653.

  The rotating member 5670 is urged in a direction to displace the tip portion on one side downward with respect to the shaft portion 5612k by an urging spring (not shown) interposed between the rotating member 5670 and the front base 5612. 5612 is disposed. Further, a displacement restricting protrusion 5612j that protrudes to the back side is formed below the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 on which the rotating member 5670 is disposed.

  The displacement restricting projection 5612j is a member that restricts the downward displacement of one end of the rotating member 5670, and the rear end of the projecting tip is disposed on the front base 5612 (on the back base 5611 side). In addition to being positioned, it is formed on the front side (front base 5612 side) of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 attached to the rotating member 5670. As a result, the downward displacement of one end of the rotating member 5670 is regulated by the displacement regulating projection 5612j, and the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 to the projection plate member 5620 side is displaced by the displacement regulating projection. Blocking by 5612j can be suppressed.

  Next, the operation of the projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 (a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 73 (b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. FIG. 74A is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 74B is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state.

  FIG. 75A is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 75B is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the third state. FIG. 76A is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 76B is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. 74 and 76 show a state in which the rear base 5611 is removed. Further, since the displacement operation from the first state to the third state is only the displacement operation from the first state to the second state and the displacement direction reversed left and right, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 73 (a) and 74 (a), in the first state in which the projection plate member 5620 is disposed at a substantially central portion on the left and right sides of the central opening 5612h, the rotation disposed on both sides in the left and right directions. The member 5670 is biased by a biasing spring (not shown), and one end side is displaced downward. Accordingly, the second block 654 of the irradiation unit 650 disposed on the rotating member 5670 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed on the front surface of the second block 654 can be changed. It can be tilted to the projection plate member 5620 side. As a result, the light of the LED 651 disposed on the front surface of the second block 654 can be made incident from the left and right sides (the left and right sides in FIG. 74A) of the projection plate member 5620, and the projection plate member 5620 correspondingly. The amount of light emitted from the front of the projector can be increased, and the pattern and design of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

  From the state shown in FIGS. 73 (a) and 74 (a), a driving force is applied to the driving motor 661, and the driving force is applied to the rack 5627 via a gear train (gears 662-664, 5665-5668). When slid in the right direction in the front view (right direction in FIG. 73), the projection plate member 5620 coupled to the rack 5627 is similarly slid in the right direction (see FIGS. 73 (b) and 74 (b)). ). Thus, a second state is formed in which the projection plate member 5620 is disposed on the right side in front view with respect to the central opening 5612h.

  In this case, the front cover 5626 disposed on the front surface side of the upper end of the projection plate member 5620 is in contact with the side surface on the other end side of the L-shape of the rotation member 5670 disposed in the sliding direction. Thereby, a rotational moment in a direction in which one end side is pushed upward can be applied to the rotating member 5670 around the axis of the shaft portion 5612k serving as a rotating shaft. Accordingly, since one end side of the rotating member 5670 is pushed upward, the second block 654 disposed on the rotating member 5670 is similarly displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the longitudinal direction of the first block 653 (FIG. 74). (B) Left and right direction) and the longitudinal direction of the second block 654 are displaced to a position where they are substantially on the same straight line.

  As a result, in accordance with the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 is displaced to increase the amount of light incident from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. it can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the pattern and design of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

  Further, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 can be displaced in accordance with the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 can be changed. Can be changed. That is, the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 can be changed. As a result, it is easy to give the player interest.

  Here, when the projection plate member is displaced, the LED disposed at another position is turned on in accordance with the displacement, so that the amount of light of the projection plate member is kept constant. Along with this, it is necessary to control whether the LED is turned on or off. As the displacement of the projection plate member becomes more complicated, the control of the LED becomes more complicated, and the reliability of the product decreases. In addition, there is a problem that the product cost increases because the LED is disposed at another position.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the projection direction of the LED 651 can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the projection plate member 5620. Therefore, the position of the projection plate member 5620 is detected and disposed at another position. Since it is not necessary to control the LED to be turned on or off, the control of the LED 651 can be simplified, the reliability of the product can be improved, and an increase in product cost can be suppressed.

  Moreover, in order to irradiate light to the irradiated body (projection plate member) to be displaced, a plurality of fixed irradiated bodies (LEDs) are arranged around the irradiated body, and the irradiation range of each irradiated body There was a problem that a weak part of the light amount was formed during this period, and when the irradiated object was displaced, light and darkness was produced, which lowered the interest of the player. Here, it is conceivable to solve the above-mentioned problem by narrowing the arrangement interval of the irradiation bodies. However, in this case, the number of the irradiation bodies to be arranged increases, so that the product cost increases. There was a point.

  However, in the fifth embodiment, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can follow the displacement operation of the projection plate member 5620. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 can always be stably projected regardless of the displacement position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the brightness of the light accompanying the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, and to prevent the player's interest from being impaired. Furthermore, since there is no need to increase the number of LEDs 651, it is possible to suppress an increase in product cost.

  Further, as described above, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 can be changed by the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, so that the driving force of the drive motor 661 is applied to the projection plate member 5620. The driving for sliding displacement and the driving for rotating the second block 654 can be used together, and it is not necessary to newly provide driving means for displacing the second block 654. As a result, an increase in product cost can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the irradiation unit 650 is formed by the base member 652 formed from an elastically deformable material and the blocks 653 and 654, there is no need to form the second block 654 to be displaced as a separate member. Therefore, after the irradiation unit 650 assembled as a unit is disposed on the front base 5612, the irradiation unit 650 can be disposed on the front base by connecting the wiring, so that the assembly process can be simplified.

  On the other hand, when displacing from the second state to the first state, the rack 5627 is displaced to the center position in the left-right direction of the central opening 5612h by reversing the drive of the drive motor 661. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is similarly slid to form the first state.

  In this case, the rotating member 5670 on the side of which one end is pushed up by the displacement to the second state (left side in FIG. 74 (b)) is projected by an unillustrated urging spring interposed between the front base 5612 and the projection plate. As the member 5620 slides and displaces to the center position in the left-right direction, one end side of the L-shaped front view of the rotating member 5670 is pushed downward and rotated about the shaft portion 5612k. In addition, as described above, the rotation member 5670 displaced downward is brought into contact with the displacement restricting protrusion 5612j, so that the rotation range thereof is restricted.

  The displacement from the first state to the third state shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 8 is only detailed as the displacement operation from the first state to the second state and the displacement direction are reversed left and right as described above. Description is omitted. The third state is a state in which the projection plate member 5620 is disposed on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the central opening 5612h (see FIGS. 75B and 76B).

  Next, a projection unit 6600 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. In the first embodiment, the case where the entire central portion of the projection plate member 620 is always visible from the player has been described. However, in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is partially visible from the player. It is possible to arrange.

  First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 77 is a front view of a projection unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment. 78 is a front exploded perspective view of the projection unit 6600. FIG. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the front base 6612 in a state where the front base 6612 and the irradiation unit 650 are assembled.

  As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the projection unit 6600 includes a base member 6610 formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and a projection plate member disposed so as to be partially visible from an opening formed in the base member 6610. 6620, an irradiation unit 650 that makes light incident from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 6620, a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 6620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661 are transmitted to the projection plate member 6620. And a gear train (gears 662 to 664).

  The base member 6610 includes a ring-shaped back base 611 and a ring-shaped front base 6612 disposed in front of the back base 611, and is formed on a face between the back base 611 and the front base 6612. The projection plate member 6620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

  The front base 6612 is formed with a shield member 6612r having a ring shape when viewed from the front at the inner edge of the ring-shaped front base 612 of the first embodiment, and an opening opening in a fan shape in the front-rear direction in a part of the shield member 6612r. A portion 6612p is formed.

  The opening 6612p is an opening for making the projection plate member 6620 disposed on the back surface visible from the opening, and is formed in a fan shape centered on the axis of the front base 6612 formed in a front view annular shape. The shield member 6612r is formed with a length of about 1/6 of the entire circumference, and is formed on the right side of the front view.

  The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the rear surface of the front base 6612 and in a region between the intermediate standing portion 612b and the outer standing portion 612c at the outer edge of the opening 6612p. Are stacked between the opposing surfaces (internal space) of both the bases 611 and 612.

  Projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner diameter larger than the inner diameter of annular base surface base 6612. Projection plate member 6620 is disposed coaxially with the axis of front base 6612. Therefore, when the projection unit 6600 is assembled, the inner edge portion of the projection plate member 6620 is disposed so as not to be visually recognized by the player.

  The gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 disposed on the projection plate member 6620 are disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612 (shielding member 612r)). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the appearance can be prevented from deteriorating accordingly.

  Projection plate member 6620 is made of a light-transmitting material, transmits the display of third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back side, and is visually recognized by the player through opening 6612p of front base 6612. In addition, when the light emitted from the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern or a pattern, and the front base 6612 is formed. The player is made to visually recognize through the opening 6612p. That is, a pattern or a pattern can be raised (displayed) in the internal space of the opening 6612p of the front base 6612.

  In addition, the projection plate member 6620 includes a reflection portion 6622 that diffusely reflects light therein. The reflection portion 6622 is a portion whose interior is roughened by laser processing or the like, and is formed by dividing a plurality of patterns, designs, etc. in the circumferential direction of the projection plate member 6620 over the entire area of the projection plate member 6620 in the front view. The In the present embodiment, the shape of the reflective portion 6622 such as the pattern or symbol is formed by dividing it into six in the circumferential direction, and reflection regions 6622a to 6622f of six patterns or symbols are formed (see FIG. 80). .

  Further, the projection plate member 6620 is provided with a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 on the outer peripheral edge portion on the back side and the front side, respectively. Thus, as in the first embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (662 to 664), whereby the projection plate member 6620 can be rotated.

  Next, the operation of the projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIG. 80A to 80C are rear views of the projection unit 6600. FIG. 80A to 80C show the transition state of the projection plate member 6620. Further, FIG. 80 illustrates a state where the rear base 611 is removed. Further, the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 and the reflection part 6622 (reflection areas 6622a to 6622f) of the projection plate member 6620 are shown by chain lines.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (a), in a state where the projection plate member 6620 is disposed at the initial position, the projection plate member 6620 is located inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 in a front view (viewed from the back of the page). A reflective region 6622a is disposed. Therefore, when the light of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer edge portion of the projection plate member 6620, the pattern or design of the reflective region 6622a can be displayed inside the opening 6612p. That is, the player can visually recognize the patterns and symbols that appear inside the opening 6612p.

  In this case, the light of the LED 651 is also applied to the reflection areas 6622b and 6622f adjacent to the reflection area 6622a, but the front base 6612 is disposed in front of the reflection areas 6622b and 6622f. The display of the regions 6622b and 6622f cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, by displaying the pattern or design of the projection plate member 6620 through the opening 6612p, the player does not visually recognize the display other than the display surface, and the player's interest is impaired because other regions can be visually recognized. Can be suppressed.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 80B and 80C, when a driving force is applied to the driving motor 661, the driving force is projected through the gear train (gears 662 to 664) as described above. The projection plate member 6620 is rotated by being transmitted to the plate member. By rotating the projection plate member 6620, the patterns and symbols of the reflection areas 6622a to 6622f arranged inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 in the front view are switched. Thereby, a plurality of different patterns and symbols can be displayed inside the opening 6612p.

  Here, when a pattern or a pattern is printed on the front surface of the irradiated body (projection plate member 6620) and the irradiated body is displaced to switch the display surface, the visible area (opening portion) of the irradiated body is switched. 6612p), the pattern or design of the irradiated object can be seen, and the player can know which display will be displayed next before switching the pattern or design, so that the player There was a problem that the displacement could not be enjoyed to the end.

  Even if the power of the light source (LED 651) that irradiates light to the irradiated object is turned off to darken the display surface of the irradiated object, the irradiated object may be affected by the light from other devices or fluorescent lamps in the store. By being irradiated, the pattern and design of the irradiated object can be visually recognized by the player.

  In the present application, the projection plate member 6620 is made of a light-transmitting material, and by turning off the light of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650, it is difficult to visually recognize the pattern and design of the projection plate member 6620, thereby making the transparent state. be able to. Therefore, when the projection plate member 6620 is rotated, by turning off the irradiation of the LED 651, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the pattern and design of the projection plate member 6620. The displacement of 6620 can be enjoyed to the end.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is rotated around the center of the projection plate member 6620. Therefore, the projection plate member 6620 is compared with the case where the projection plate member 6620 slides. The space required for disposing the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while ensuring the number of patterns and symbols to be visually recognized by the player through the opening 6612p of 6612.

  That is, when the projection plate member 6620 slides and displaces, the arrangement space in the left and right or up and down directions is limited, so that it is difficult to secure the number of patterns and figures on the projection plate member 6620. By forming the projection plate member 6620, the space required for disposing the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while securing the number of patterns and symbols.

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

  In the first and second embodiments, the case where a total of four first blocks 653 and second blocks 654 are disposed on the substrate member 652 in the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 has been described. The total number of the first block 653 and the second block 654 is not limited, and may be 3 or less, or 5 or more. In this case, the ratio of the first block 653 and the second block 654 is arbitrary, and may be only the first block 653 or only the second block 654.

  In the first and second embodiments, the case where the LED 651 is disposed on the front surface of the substrate member 652 and the first block 653 and the second block 654 are disposed on the back surface has been described. Instead of the LED 651, the LED 651, the first block 653, and the second block 654 may be disposed in front of the board member 652. In this case, the LED 651 is accommodated in the first block 653 and the second block 654, and the light emitted from the LED 651 is projected from the opening formed in front of the first block 653 and the second block 654. The light is incident on the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620.

  In the first and second embodiments, the case where the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 of the projection unit 600 are formed from a light-transmitting material has been described. 630 and groove forming members 640 and 2640 may be formed of two layers of a light transmissive material and a non-transmissive material.

  For example, the back surface 632 side of the gear member 630 and the front surface 642 side of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are formed of a non-permeable material layer, and the projection plate members 620 and 2620 side of the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are formed. It may be formed of a layer of permeable material. In this case, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from other devices in the game area from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620 by the layer of the non-permeable material. That is, light emitted from a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by the layer of non-transmissive material.

  As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (no light is incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and no pattern or design is displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), It can be suppressed that light is incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and a pattern or a pattern is displayed on the front surface of the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

  In this case, the layer formed of the non-transmissive material is formed of a highly reflective metal material or a flexible material, or between the non-transmissive material layer and the transmissive material layer. It is preferable to interpose a highly reflective metallic material or flexible material. Thereby, the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 from the LED 651 can be more easily reflected on the projection plate members 620 and 2620. As a result, the light reflected from the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be strengthened, and the pattern or design can be clearly revealed.

  In the first and second embodiments, the case where the rear surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 of the projection unit 600 and the front surface portion 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are in contact with air (atmosphere) has been described. For example, a seal of a member (for example, silver foil or aluminum) having a higher reflectivity than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is attached to the rear view 632 and the front portion 642, or a color having a high reflectivity (For example, white) may be printed.

  In this case, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from other devices in the game area from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620 by sticking or printing. That is, light emitted from a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by sticking or printing.

  As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (no light is incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and no pattern or design is displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), It can be suppressed that light is incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and a pattern or a pattern is displayed on the front surface of the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

  Furthermore, the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 from the LED 651 can be more easily reflected on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 by sealing or printing. As a result, the light reflected from the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be strengthened, and the pattern or design can be clearly revealed.

  In addition, when attaching a seal | sticker, you may attach the seal | sticker in the state protruded from the back part 632 of the gear member 630 and the front part 642 of the groove | channel formation members 640 and 2640 to the outer edge side. In this case, since the light radiated from the LED 651 and spreading in a fan shape can be reflected by the protruding seal portion, the light radiated from the LED 651 can be easily condensed on the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

  In the third embodiment, the case where an air layer is formed between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620 has been described. Instead, a plate member made of a non-transparent material having higher reflectivity than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is provided between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620. It may be interposed.

  In this case, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is surely totally reflected by the plate member made of a non-transmissive material having a high reflectance, and can be advanced from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center side. it can. Therefore, it can suppress that the intensity | strength (light quantity) of the light irradiated at irradiation angle (alpha) 3 reduces, the light reflected by the reflection part 622 and inject | emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620 is strengthened, Patterns and designs can be clearly revealed.

  Further, the light emitted from another device in the game area can be prevented from entering the projection plate member 3620 by the plate member made of a non-transparent material with high reflectance. That is, light emitted from a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a plate member made of a non-transmissive material having a high reflectance.

  As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (no light is incident on the projection plate member 3620 and no pattern or design is displayed on the front surface of the projection plate member 3620), light from other devices is projected onto the projection plate. It can suppress that a pattern and a symbol are displayed on the front of the projection plate member 3620 by being incident on the member 3620.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the means for biasing the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is a coil spring has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an elastic body of a rubber-like body, a torsion spring, A leaf spring may be used. The attachment method is exemplified by a state in which the protrusion 852 and the protrusion 823 are connected and attached, or an aspect in which the protrusion 852 is attached between the rotation shaft of the displacement member 850 and the shaft support portion 821 of the base member 820.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is rotationally moved about the shaft hole 851 formed at one end. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. 850 may be one that slides and displaces a guide groove formed in the front base 820. In this case, if both ends of the guide groove of the front base 820 are formed at different positions in the vertical direction (gravity direction), the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the gravitational direction is the same as in the first embodiment. Since it can be an orthogonal projection motion of constant-velocity circular motion and a change can be given to the displacement speed, it is possible to cause the displacement member 850 to perform an interesting displacement.

  In the first to third and sixth embodiments, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is disposed at a position facing the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 has been described. For example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be disposed at a position facing the side end surfaces of the gear members 630 and 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640 and 3640.

  Also in this case, similarly to the first to third, fifth, and sixth embodiments, the light of the LED 651 is incident from the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640, and the projection plate. Patterns and symbols can be displayed on the surfaces of the members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620.

  Further, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is not opposed to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 (that is, the light irradiation of the LED 651). The surface of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630, and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction), and the light emitted from the LED 651 May be arranged so as to be incident on the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640.

  In this case, the light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is irradiated obliquely from the irradiation surface of the LED 651 while irradiating other non-irradiation members different from the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620. A part of the light can be incident on the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640. That is, the LED 651 can be used for both the light for displaying the pattern and the pattern on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 and the light for irradiating other irradiated objects.

  In the first to third, fifth, and sixth embodiments, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 and the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 are disposed in parallel has been described. For example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be tilted with respect to the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620.

  Specifically, the light irradiating surface of the LED 651 is disposed toward the back side, and the light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the illuminating surface of the LED 651 is disposed on the position where the LED 651 is disposed on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620. , 6620 may be irradiated to the side end faces. In this case, when a pattern or a pattern is displayed on the surface of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the light of the LED 651 leaks out from the inner edges of the front bases 612, 6612 formed in an annular shape in front view. This can be suppressed.

  In addition, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is disposed toward the front side, and the light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is disposed on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620. It is good also as a position irradiated to a side end surface.

  Further, the LED 651 is disposed in a state where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is tilted with respect to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 toward the back side or the front side, and the LED 651 is disposed at the position where the LED 651 is disposed. It is good also as a position where the light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to this irradiation surface is irradiated to the side end surfaces of the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 or the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630.

  In addition, the LED 651 is disposed in a state where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is tilted with respect to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, with the light irradiation surface facing the back side or the front side. It is good also as a position where the light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of LED651 is irradiated to the front part 632 of the groove formation members 640, 2640, 3640 or the back part 632 of the gear members 630, 3630.

  In the fifth embodiment, the light emitted from the LED 651 disposed on the front surface of the second block 654 is incident on the projection plate member 5620 from the left and right side surfaces of the projection plate member 5620, so that the light is irradiated from the front of the projection plate member 5620. Although the case where the emitted light quantity is increased has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and a pattern or a pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 by light incident from the left and right sides of the projection plate member 5620 is changed to the projection plate member. The pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 5620 may be different from the light incident from the upper end surface of the 5620.

  That is, the upper end of the projection plate member 5620 is formed by providing an air layer or a non-light-transmitting material inside the projection plate member 5620 and dividing the region of the reflection part 622 (for example, dividing into three regions). The light incident from the front part is emitted from the front side by the reflection part 622 of the first region, and the light incident from the left side surface is emitted from the front side by the reflection part 622 of the second region and from the right side surface. Incident light can be emitted from the front side by the reflecting portion 622 of the third region. As a result, a plurality of patterns and design patterns displayed on the projection plate member 5620 can be formed, and the player's interest can be suppressed from being impaired.

  In this case, a plurality of light sources (LEDs 651) for irradiating the first to third regions are provided around the irradiated body (projection plate member 5620) to irradiate the first to third regions (for example, on the top). The arranged light source irradiates the first region with light incident from the upper end, the light source arranged on the left side irradiates the second region by entering from the left end surface, and the light source arranged on the right side is the right end. However, there is a problem in that the product cost increases because it is necessary to provide a plurality of light sources.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 is rotated with respect to the first block 653 by the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, so that Since the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 disposed in front can be changed, it is possible to irradiate two areas, that is, a case where the second or third area is irradiated and a case where the first area is irradiated. Therefore, the number of the LEDs 651 disposed can be reduced correspondingly, and the increase in product cost can be suppressed.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the light irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 is changed in accordance with the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the rotating member 5670 may be rotated by being connected to the shaft portion of the drive motor newly disposed.

  In this case, the rotation member 5670 can be rotated regardless of the slide position of the projection plate member 5620 to change the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654, and thus the projection plate member 5620. It is possible to partially increase or decrease the amount of light emitted from the front. In other words, the direction of light incident on the projection plate member 5620 can be displaced to change the shade of the display of patterns and symbols displayed on the projection plate member 5620.

  In the first embodiment, the projection plate member 620, the plurality of irradiation units 650 that irradiate the projection plate member 620, and the gear that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 661, between the opposed surfaces of the front base 612 and the back base 611. Although the case where the rows (gears 662 to 664) are arranged as one unit has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-described unit (projection) is provided between the opposing surfaces of the front base 612 and the rear base 611. The plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) may be arranged in a state where two or more are stacked in the front-rear direction.

  In this case, by displaying the patterns and symbols on the respective projection plate members 620, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the patterns and symbols displayed on the respective projection plate members 620 in combination. As a result, by changing the rotational position of each projection plate member 620, it is possible to form a display pattern of a plurality of patterns and symbols, and to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 620 is rotationally displaced has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the projection plate member 620 may be fixed and the irradiation unit 650 may be displaced. .

  In the third embodiment, the case has been described in which the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the center side from the side end portion of the projection plate member 3620 at the position where the bolt T is disposed, but this is not necessarily limited thereto. Instead, the bolt T may be formed of a metal material (for example, iron or stainless steel), and the light projected on the side surface may be reflected to the center side of the projection plate member 3620. In this case, it is possible to easily collect the light emitted from the LED 651 at the center of the projection plate member 3620.

  In addition, a plurality of bolts T are arranged at regular intervals, and a portion where a pattern or a pattern is not displayed on the surface of the projection plate member 3620 (the light of the LED 651 is not incident) is partially formed. The display may be divided.

  Further, as described above, the grounding surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65 (c)). A place where light is not incident can be a ground plane.

  That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when light is incident from the outside in the radial direction of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T, and the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 from being incident on the projection plate member 3620 side.

  In this case, by displacing the irradiation unit 650 in a state where the light of the LED 651 disposed in the irradiation unit 650 is irradiated, the player can visually recognize that the projection plate member 620 is displaced (rotated). .

  In addition, the displacement of the irradiation unit 650 in this case may be a slide displacement or a rotational displacement, and the irradiation directions of the LEDs 651 arranged in the first block 653 and the second block 654 are displaced in different directions. It may be a thing.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 in each embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first control example, an effect (variation effect) for showing a lottery result of a special symbol executed in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 and an effect (indicating that a jackpot game is being executed) The jackpot effect) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  In this control example, when the jackpot game is executed a plurality of times during a predetermined period, the jackpot effect (continuous jackpot effect) over the plurality of jackpot games is executed as an effect during the jackpot game. It is configured as follows. Specifically, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140, the entrance information can be stored, and when the jackpot game is executed, the stored entry is stored. If it is determined whether there is the winning information that wins the jackpot in the ball information, and if it is determined that there is the winning information that wins the jackpot, it will straddle multiple jackpot games A continuous jackpot production is executed.

  By configuring in this way, the game result after the currently executed jackpot game is completed can be suggested to the player according to the contents of the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot game. You can be interested in the jackpot production.

  Furthermore, in this control example, it is possible to vary the contents of the jackpot effect based not only on the pitch information stored at the timing when the jackpot game is executed, but also on the pitch information newly stored during the jackpot game. It is configured to be able to. By configuring in this way, it is possible to refer to more ball entry information, to make it easier to execute a continuous jackpot effect, and to make the player interested in the jackpot effect.

  In addition, the present control example is configured so that the content of the jackpot effect can be varied based on the number of stored ballistic information (the number of reserved memories) at the time when the jackpot game is executed as the jackpot succession effect. ing.

  In this control example, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability, without electric support) (probability change state (high probability, with electric support), short time state (low probability, with electric support) )), An effect (battle effect) for indicating that the gaming state is continuing is executed. By comprising in this way, it can alert | report to a player intelligibly that the gaming state advantageous to a player is continuing.

  Furthermore, the above-described battle effects are produced from an effect (battle reach) that suggests whether or not the gaming state advantageous to the player ends, and an effect (pre-battle effect) for determining the effect mode of the battle reach. It is composed. By configuring in this way, when the gaming state that is advantageous to the player actually ends, for example, the battle effect continues in a period other than when winning the normal jackpot where the gaming state transitions to the normal state after the jackpot ends Therefore, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation that the gaming state advantageous to the player has continued and anxiety that the player thinks that the gaming state advantageous to the player has ended. You can play games while holding them.

  In addition, in this control example, a plurality of effects having different jackpot expectations are executed as effects for suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. Thereby, the expectation to the jackpot can be made different for the player depending on which effect is executed. Further, a plurality of expectation suggestion modes capable of suggesting a jackpot expectation level in stages can be displayed in one variation effect, and the expectation suggestion manner is variable during one variation effect. .

  In addition, the present control example is configured such that an expectation variable suggestion effect that suggests to the player is added by adding together the amount by which a plurality of expectation suggestion modes vary stepwise during a single variation effect. ing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to cause the player who grasps the contents of the effect of the expectation variable suggestion effect to play the game while predicting how much the expectation suggestion aspect changes, and the effect Can be increased.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the specific effect (PUSH display effect) is suggested as an suggestion effect that indicates the timing at which a specific effect (for example, a PUSH display effect that operates the frame button 22) executed during one variation effect is executed. ) Is executed so as to execute a countdown effect for specifically informing the execution timing and a precursor effect for notifying that the countdown effect is executed. In addition, during a single variation effect, the start timing of the precursor effect described above, the execution timing of the specific effect, and the period of the countdown effect can be determined from a plurality, and based on the contents determined, An effect mode and a countdown effect mode are set.

  By comprising in this way, the freedom degree which sets a suggestion effect can be raised compared with the structure which performs a suggestion effect for a predetermined fixed period, and an effect can be heightened.

  First, with reference to FIG. 81, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in this 1st control example is demonstrated. The third symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is composed of 10 kinds of main symbols imitating numbers “0” to “9”. . Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, “777”), and the fluctuation display is performed. The jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. In other words, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

  Specifically, in the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform the variable display.

  In addition, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 in the main display area Dm. If the third symbol is stopped together with a jackpot symbol combination (in the first control example, the same main symbol combination) on the active line, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the 3rd symbol in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, the number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol sequence, and each symbol The number of symbols in the column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to the above. For example, a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character with a number may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the 3rd symbol is variably displayed may be varied. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81, the 3rd symbol's variable display area is displayed. It is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the third symbol is changing by reducing the size or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, the corner of the display screen). You may make it do. Further, during the period in which the special symbol is changing, the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

  A small display area Dn1 is formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm in front view. The small display area Dn1 displays a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction of launching the ball (game direction) (see FIG. 85 (a)). That is, in the present control example, the small display area Dn1 is used as the guidance display area Dn1. By configuring in this way, the player can easily grasp to which area of the game board the ball should be fired only by visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area Dn1. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

  A small display area Dn2 is formed in the upper right of the main display area Dm in front view. The small display area Dn2 is configured to be able to easily display the variation display of the third symbol. Here, when the variable display is executed in the small display area Dn2, for example, in the main display area Dm, a display effect such as an effect that a predetermined character performs an action or an effect that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 is executed. It is a case. While the display effect is being executed, an effect that is easier to understand can be provided by displaying the effect in a larger main display area Dm. In addition, it is easy for the player that the variation display of the third symbol is continued by simply displaying the variation display of the third symbol in the small display area Dn2 during execution of the display effect. Can be understood.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (a), a sub display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), a reserved symbol composed of a black circle is displayed. As described above, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances is suspended up to 4 times. The number of reserved symbols displayed for the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of times of reserved balls. In the first control example, since the maximum value of the number of reserved balls is set to four, a maximum of four reserved symbols are displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  In this control example, the number of reserved symbols is varied in correspondence with the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of reserved balls may be displayed as a number.

  Furthermore, in this control example, in addition to this, a game result suggesting mode for suggesting a game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player, and contents of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm are displayed. An effect explanation mode for explanation, a frame button related display mode for indicating the timing and result of operating the frame button 22, and a hit related information display mode for displaying information on the jackpot game are displayed in the sub display area Ds. It is configured to be displayed, and the ratio of the display area of the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds is set to be different depending on the content displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  Further, when the combination of the 3rd symbols displayed in a stopped state is a combination corresponding to detachment and there is a holding ball, a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started after the stopping display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest balls in time.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the special symbol detachment is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where there is no reserved ball, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140. When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. There is rarely a situation in which there is no entry at either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140, even though the player has fired the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). In many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a game by the pachinko machine 10 is not performed at all because the player quits the game. caused by.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, if a new ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new entrance Corresponding 3rd symbol variation display is executed.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long below the main display area Dm. Among the spheres that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 140, a sphere that has not yet been changed ( This is an area for displaying the number of balls on hold, which is the number of balls on hold. Although details will be described later, the sub display area Ds is divided into a first display area Ds1 and a second display area Ds2 for displaying game contents and effect contents to the player (FIG. 102 ( a)). The reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds are displayed when the variation display being executed is finished and the next variation is started, and the reserved symbols corresponding to the next variation (the front view of FIG. 81 (b)) are displayed. The reserved symbol displayed on the left is deleted, and the remaining reserved symbols are shifted to the left and displayed.

  Here, the symbol corresponding to the variation display being executed (the reserved symbol displayed on the leftmost during the previous variation) is the symbol display area being executed (the region where the expectation display mode Dk1 of FIG. 102 is displayed). ) Is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player which pending display the fluctuation display being executed corresponds to.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), a total of nine main symbols and sub-designs of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, at the right end and the left end (outside the effective line) of the main display area Dm, three main symbols and three sub symbols of the third symbol are displayed.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, or when the ball enters the second entrance 140, the number of entrances Are held for a maximum of four times, and the number of balls held is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and also displayed in the sub display area Ds. In this control example, the entrance to the first entrance 64 and the entrance to the second entrance 140 are each configured to be held up to 4 times, but the upper limit value of the number of held balls is It is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls for entering the first entrance 64 and the upper limit value of the number of retained balls for entering the second entrance 140 are not limited to the same. The upper limit value of the number of reserved balls for entering the first entrance 64 may be greater than the upper limit value of the number of retained balls for entering the second entrance 140, or conversely, Good. Further, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the sub-display area Ds, the number of reserved balls is a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the four divided areas are different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, the color or lighting pattern may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82 (a) and FIG. 82 (b), the flow of each effect executed in the first control example will be roughly described. 82 (a) and 82 (b) are timing charts schematically showing the relationship between the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 and the effect contents executed by the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 82A, the present control example is configured such that different effects are executed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, when the gaming state is “normal”, that is, when the gaming state is a big hit or a normal state that is not in the probability variation state or the short-time state, the normal performance is executed, and the gaming state is “big hit” If the game state is “probability change or short time”, that is, if the game state is the probability change state or the short time state, the probability change is in progress (in the probability change state or in the short time state). Medium) Production is performed.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily grasp the currently set gaming state simply by looking at the effect being performed, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine. In this control example, each effect is configured to be executed in association with the game state. However, for example, a common effect that can be executed when a plurality of game states are set may be provided. . This makes it possible for the player to predict the currently set gaming state by visually recognizing the effect that is being executed, while expecting that a gaming state advantageous to the player is set. The player can play a game.

  In addition, in FIG. 82, it is explained that the content of the effect (display content) displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 differs depending on the gaming state, but the mode included in the effect content is the 3rd symbol. Of course, the display mode is not limited to the display mode displayed on the display device 81. For example, the output mode of the audio output by the audio output device 226 and the light emission mode of the lamp executed by the lamp display device 227 are also included. is there.

  First, the effects executed during the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIGS. First, in this control example, the number of special symbol reservation balls at the time when the jackpot game is executed and the content of the stored and stored ball information (for example, whether there is ball winning information that is won in the win) Based on the result, the contents of the effect executed during the jackpot game are set.

  Specifically, when a plurality of jackpot games are executed in succession, an effect of partially informing the contents of the previous jackpot game (the first jackpot game) (for example, a 15-round jackpot game is executed) In the case of playing, the effect of informing the number of rounds for 5 rounds) is continuously executed across a plurality of jackpots, so that a plurality of jackpot games are continuously executed Execute the production corresponding to each jackpot game, and before that jackpot game (during the special symbol change period that is performed until the previous jackpot game is finished and the next jackpot game is executed) By continuously displaying the ending effect of the jackpot game, the jackpot effect 2 that produces the effect that a plurality of jackpot games are continuously executed and the previous jackpot game are At the time of the, it notifies that the following big hit game is executed, and the effect of jackpots 3 to perform the effect of continued is configured to be set for a plurality of jackpot gaming.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 83 (a), the content of the jackpot effect 1 mentioned above is demonstrated. FIG. 83A is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the jackpot production 1. As shown in FIG. 83 (a), the jackpot effect 1 is “3” when the jackpot game (jackpot 1) is executed (a state in which a new ball can be acquired during the jackpot game). In addition, this is a jackpot production that can be set when the winning ball information already included in the reserved ball already acquired is included.

  When jackpot production 1 is set, when the previous jackpot game (jackpot 1 ((15 rounds (R))) is executed, first, a part of the number of rounds of jackpot 1 (5 rounds (R The jackpot game effect (5R effect) indicating)) is executed, and then the 5R effect is continuously executed until the next jackpot game (the jackpot 2 (10 rounds (R))) is completed. Is set to execute a jackpot game effect for 25R.

  In other words, it is configured so that the production contents (production scenario) executed during one jackpot game are not set as a series of production contents (production scenario) but in units of a predetermined period (for example, 5 rounds). The new production content (scenario) is set on the basis of the entry information stored on hold at that time.

  Specifically, using FIG. 83A, when the jackpot 1 (15R) is started, 5R effect 1 (see FIG. 85A) is executed. When the 5R effect is started, an effect (notification of the number of confirmed rounds) for notifying the player that the jackpot game will continue for at least 5 rounds is executed. When the jackpot game progresses to the 4Rth, a suggestion effect (see FIG. 85 (b)) suggesting whether or not the next 5R effect is executed is executed, and then the 5R effect is executed next at the 5Rth. A notification effect (see FIG. 86 (a)) for notifying the result of whether or not is performed is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 83 (a), since the big hit of 15 rounds is set as the first big hit, the 5R effect is executed three times. Here, the 5R effect executed for the third time (5R effect 3) is a period until the second jackpot to be executed next is started, that is, the first jackpot ending period and the first jackpot. It is set to be executed even during the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation executed after the end (see FIGS. 87 (a) and 88 (a)). And 5R production 4 is performed with the start of the second jackpot (start of the second jackpot opening period).

  As a result, when a new holding memory is generated during the jackpot game, and the storing information includes the pitch information corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol, it is based on the pitch information (for example, the number of rounds). It is possible to set a new effect (additional round number display). Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the contents of the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot at the start of the jackpot are set as a series of effect scenarios, the effect executed during the jackpot (additional round number display) can be easily varied. .

  FIG. 83 (a) shows an example in which a period of 5 rounds is used as one production unit during the jackpot game, but the production content may be set for each round. Further, it may be configured to perform a discrimination management process for discriminating the contents of the entry information every round, and set the production contents every predetermined round (for example, every 5 rounds). Further, when new entry information is generated, the contents of the entry information are discriminated, and information used for setting the effect contents during the big hit (presence / absence of big hit, number of rounds) is stored in the storage area. You may comprise.

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the processing load from temporarily increasing at the timing of setting the content of the effect during the big hit game (every 5 rounds in FIG. 83A).

  Here, the display contents of the jackpot effect 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 85A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed immediately after the jackpot effect 1 is executed, and FIG. 85B is executed in the jackpot effect 1. FIG. 86A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an effect display for indicating whether or not a 5R effect to be continued. FIG. 86A shows an effect display for indicating that a new 5R effect is executed. FIG. 86 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen in the previous round where jackpot 1 ends, and FIG. 87 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of FIG. 87B is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display screen indicating that the jackpot continues during the jackpot 1 ending period, and FIG. 87B illustrates that the jackpot during the jackpot 1 ending period ends. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the screen, 8 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen in the special symbol variation after jackpot 1 ends.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (a), when the jackpot production 1 is executed, the letters “big jack” indicating that the jackpot has been won, and “777” indicating that the jackpot has been won by a special symbol lottery. The third symbol that is stopped and displayed is displayed in the main display area Dm. Then, in the small display area (guide display area) Dn1 of the main display area Dm, a “right-handed” character is displayed to guide the ball to be launched into the right-handed area, and the front view of the main display area Dm is displayed. On the upper right side, in the round number display area Dm2 for informing the player of the number of rounds of the jackpot game, it is confirmed that the running round number display mode Dm3 indicating the number of currently executed rounds is executed. A confirmed round number display mode Dm4 indicating the number of confirmed rounds is displayed.

  In this control example, as the jackpot effect 1, a 5-round (R) effect that notifies the player in advance that a jackpot game for at least 5 rounds is executed is executed, which is shown in FIG. Thus, “5” is displayed as the determined round number display mode Dm4.

  Then, when the number of rounds of the jackpot game (the number of running rounds display mode Dm3) becomes “4”, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), an additional effect (figure 5) executed in the next round (fifth round) 86 (a)) is performed (a big hit continuation effect) is suggested. In this control example, as the big hit continuation effect, selected images Dm5 to Dm7 that imitate “treasure chest” are displayed as display modes that can be selected by the player, and selected image Dm8 that imitates “arrow” is selected image Dm5. Displayed so as to correspond to each of Dm7. The player selects one of the “treasure chests” displayed by selecting one of the selected images Dm8 displayed so as to correspond to each of the selected images Dm5 to Dm7. Select “Treasure Chest”.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, the display mode of one “arrow” among the three “arrows” that are the selected image Dm8 is displayed so as to be regularly changed. The selected images Dm5 to Dm7 corresponding to the changed display mode (variable display mode Dm9) become the selected images selected by the player, and the player has changed the arbitrary “arrow” to the variable display mode Dm9. In this case, an arbitrary selected image is selected by operating the frame button 22.

  Note that the method by which the player selects an arbitrary selected image is not limited to the above-described content, and other configurations may be used. For example, it may be configured to be selectable by touching the display area of an arbitrary selected image among the selected images Dm5 to Dm7 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the player can select a frame. You may comprise so that the selection image Dm8 used as the variable display mode Dm9 can be selected by operating the button 22. FIG.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the same display mode is displayed as the display mode of the selected images Dm5 to Dm7, but a different display mode may be displayed for each selected image. In this case, when a selected image having a display mode different from the normal one is displayed, the next 5R effect may be easily executed. Thereby, the expectation that the jackpot game can be continued at the stage where the selected image is displayed can be increased, and the player can actively participate in the game.

  When the selected image Dm5 is selected and the number of rounds of the jackpot game enters the fifth round, the screen shown in FIG. 86 (a) is displayed. In FIG. 86 (a), only the “treasure chest” (selected image Dm5) selected in the jackpot continuation effect executed in the fourth round of the jackpot game is displayed, and the number of confirmed rounds is displayed from the “treasure chest”. “+5” is displayed as the additional round number display mode Dm10 added to the mode Dm4, and an additional effect in which the value of the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 is variably displayed from “5” to “10” is displayed.

  With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the jackpot game will continue for at least the next five rounds. 86 (a) shows the display screen when “+5” is displayed as the additional round number display mode Dm10, but the selected image selected in the jackpot continuation effect (see FIG. 85 (b)). Accordingly, the contents of the extra round number display mode Dm10 are set differently. Thereby, a player can be actively participated in the jackpot continuation production.

  Further, in this control example, the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 is displayed with a numerical value corresponding to the number of rounds, but the number of rounds to be displayed on the display screen among the remaining round numbers of the jackpot game set internally. The display mode may be changed in accordance with the display mode, and a display mode using an abstract expression such as a character's motion, color, or size may be used. In this way, by using an abstract display mode as the determined round number display mode Dm4, it is possible to increase the pleasure of making the player predict the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot game.

  In addition, a player who has played a game for a long time can grasp the regularity of the display mode using abstract expressions, so it is easier to grasp the contents of the jackpot game than other players, Satisfaction can be increased. In this case, as the contents of the jackpot game, the number of rounds of each jackpot game is displayed in the jackpot effect in which an effect in which the first jackpot and the second jackpot are continuously executed is executed. It is good to be able to grasp by the regularity of the aspect.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to predict whether or not a gaming state advantageous to the player is set after the end of the second jackpot game, based on the number of rounds of the second jackpot game. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide game information more advantageous than other players to a player who has played a game for a long time, and the willingness to continue playing for a long time can be enhanced.

  In FIG. 86 (a), “+5” is displayed as the additional round number display mode Dm10 that is added to the determined round number display mode Dm4 while the fifth round game is being executed. Although the example in which the value of the display mode Dm4 is variably displayed from “5” to “10” is shown, the timing at which the additional round number display mode Dm10 is displayed is a timing other than during the round game, that is, 5 rounds The production contents may be set so that an inter-round interval period is between the end of the round game of the eye and the start of the round game of the sixth round.

  In addition, a means for discriminating the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 in the jackpot continuation effect shown in FIG. 85B is provided, and the operation timing is for a predetermined period (for example, after the operation of the frame button 22 becomes effective). 3 seconds), the added round number display mode Dm10 is displayed during the fifth round game, and the operation timing is a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds after the operation of the frame button 22 becomes effective). When it exceeds or is not operated, the round number display mode Dm10 may be displayed in the interval period between rounds after the end of the fifth round.

  In this way, the player actively participates in the production by changing the timing of displaying the added round number display mode Dm10 based on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 and the presence or absence of the operation. Thus, the production effect can be enhanced. It should be noted that any configuration may be used as long as the player operates the frame button 22 and the timing for displaying the added round number display mode Dm10 based on whether or not the frame button 22 is operated. It is possible to provide a discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the player has operated the frame button 22 during a specific one second), and to change the timing for displaying the added round number display mode Dm10 based on the discrimination result. . Further, only when the operation content for the frame button 22 satisfies a predetermined operation condition (for example, the frame button 22 is operated for a specific one second during the round game of the fourth round), the added round number display mode Dm10 It is also possible to configure so that the values displayed in are different.

  Next, the contents for making it appear that multiple (two) jackpot games are continuously executed, that is, special until the second jackpot game is started after the first jackpot game is finished. The contents of the effect during the symbol variation period will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 (b) and 87 (a).

  First, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), the jackpot continuation effect is executed based on the start of the last round (14th round) of the last round of the first jackpot game. In FIG. 86 (b), an effect mode different from the jackpot continuation effect shown in FIG. 85 (b) is shown, and the number of selected images displayed on the display screen and the display mode are different. Specifically, the number of selected images is changed from three to two, and a display mode that is more luxurious than usual is set as the display mode of the selected image Dm5. Thus, by varying the effect mode of the jackpot continuation effect, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will continue according to the effect mode of the jackpot continuation effect that is executed. Therefore, the player pays attention to the contents of the production, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  In FIG. 86 (b), in order to explain the variation of the jackpot continuation effect, an effect mode different from that in FIG. 85 (b) is shown, but the jackpot continuation effect (14 corresponding to the final round of the first jackpot game) is shown. As a matter of course, the same effect mode as that shown in FIG. 85 (b) is set to be executed as the big hit continuation effect executed in the round. Thus, by using the same effect mode for the jackpot continuation effect executed in the middle of the first jackpot game and the jackpot continuation effect executed at the end of the first jackpot game, at which timing the first It is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the big jackpot game has ended (how many rounds the first jackpot was).

  In addition to the above-described setting method of the jackpot continuation effect, for example, according to the selected image ("treasure box") selected in the jackpot continuation effect, the current jackpot continuation effect is executed in the final round of the jackpot game. It may be configured to suggest to the player that it is a big hit continuation effect.

  When the selected image Dm5 is selected in the big hit continuation effect shown in FIG. 86 (b), when the final round (15th round) is entered, the same display as the addition effect shown in FIG. 86 (a) is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 87A, the display is continuously displayed during the ending period after the end of the final round. When the jackpot ending period ends (the jackpot ends) and the change of the special symbol is started, the display screen shown in FIG. 88A is displayed.

  FIG. 88 (a) is an example of a display screen during the period when the first jackpot game is over and the special symbol is changing. As shown in FIG. 88 (a), after the first jackpot game is finished (after the change of the special symbol is started), the display of the extra effect is continuously executed. In the small display area Dn2, the variation of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is displayed. When the change of the special symbol winning the jackpot is stopped, the combination of symbols (for example, “777”) for indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed in the small display area Dn2, and the additional effect display is executed. The next jackpot game is started while maintaining the state.

  In this control example, when an extra effect is set as an effect during a big hit, the number of rounds set for the big hit being executed and the next big hit that will be a reserved game in the reservation (the jackpot stored on hold) ) Is added to the number of rounds set to), and the display mode of the presentation effect can be set. Therefore, before the next jackpot that becomes a reserved resort is started, that is, 1 It is possible to display the additional round number display mode Dm10 including the number of rounds set for the next jackpot during the second jackpot.

  In the above example, the period from the last round of jackpot to winning the next jackpot (until the next jackpot is passed and the first round of round games is executed after that jackpot opening period has passed) An example of an effect that continuously displays an additional effect during the period) is shown, but other effects may be used. For example, the additional effect is completed in the final round (15th round), and during the ending period (see FIG. 87 (a)) and during the special symbol change period (see FIG. 88 (a)), a congratulatory performance that congratulates that the number of rounds has been added may be executed, or the final round (15 Round) and during the ending period (see FIG. 87 (a)), the extra effect was completed, and during the special symbol change period (see FIG. 88 (a)), the number of rounds was increased. The final round (15th round) may continue to display the jackpot continuation effect (see FIG. 86 (b)) executed on the 14th round, and the ending. An additional effect may be executed during the period (see FIG. 87 (a)) and during the special symbol change period (see FIG. 88 (a)).

  When the above-mentioned blessing effect is executed, the next round of the round in which the extra effect (for example, the extra effect executed in the fifth round (see FIG. 86 (a))) is executed during one jackpot ( For example, the same blessing effect may be executed in the sixth round). As a result, while the extra effect is being executed, the player has difficulty in determining how many jackpots have been won, that is, the extra bonus effect mode executed during one jackpot, and 2 It is possible to make the effect mode of the extra effect executed between the two jackpots the same (except for an error that is difficult for the player to identify).

  On the other hand, when there is no number of rounds to be added by the extra effect, “+0” is displayed as the additional round number display mode Dm10 as shown in FIG. 87B, and the value of the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 is “15”. ”Is not changed, and the comment“ Unfortunate jackpot end ”is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the jackpot ends.

  In addition, this control example is configured such that a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) is set as an interval period between round games (inter-round interval period) executed during the jackpot game. For example, even if the number of jackpot rounds is the same according to the selected jackpot type, the interval period between rounds may be configured to be different. In this case, as an interval between rounds set during one big hit, an interval between rounds before a round that is a multiple of 5 ends (for example, an interval between rounds set between 5 and 6 rounds) is 5 The jackpot type that sets the second interval to 2 seconds, and the interval between rounds two times before the start of a multiple of 5 (for example, the round set between 3 and 4 rounds) It is preferable to provide a jackpot type in which the interval is set to 5 seconds and the interval between other rounds is set to 2 seconds.

  Moreover, when using the jackpot type with different intervals between rounds as described above, it is preferable to switch the jackpot effect at a timing when a long-term interval between rounds is set. Furthermore, in the case of performing a big hit effect with a predetermined period (5 rounds) as one unit as in this control example, from the start of the big hit (start of the big hit opening period or start of the first round) Since the interval until the first long-round interval is set (for example, the end of the third round) is less than one unit of the big hit effect, the effect other than the extra effect is executed. Good.

  Furthermore, in this control example, a constant period (for example, 1 second) is set as the jackpot ending period regardless of the jackpot type, but the jackpot set for this ending period is also set. It may be configured to be different for each type, or may be configured to be different for each set jackpot type with respect to the jackpot opening period.

  In this way, the contents of the jackpot game (the number of rounds of the jackpot game) are the same, but the opening period, the interval period between rounds, and the ending period set for the jackpot are made different depending on the set jackpot type. And how many wins are won for a player while a single jackpot production is being executed for a player by setting the jackpot production to span multiple jackpot games Can be difficult to grasp.

  In addition, if the period from the end of the previous jackpot to the winning of the next jackpot is different, that is, if the next jackpot is won in the special rotation of the first rotation after the end of the previous jackpot Even if the special symbol change period executed between jackpots is different in the case of winning the next jackpot in the special symbol change of the third rotation, the opening period, the interval interval between rounds, By configuring the ending period to be different according to the set jackpot type, it is possible to execute the jackpot effect without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  Next, returning to FIG. 83 (b), the contents of the aforementioned jackpot effect 2 will be described. FIG. 83 (b) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the jackpot production 2. In the jackpot effect 2, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), when the jackpot game (jackpot 1) is executed, the number of held balls is “2” (a state where a new ball can be acquired during the jackpot game). In addition, this is a jackpot effect that can be set when the winning information already won is not included in the reserved balls already acquired.

  When the jackpot effect 2 is set, when the previous jackpot game (one jackpot 1 ((15 round (R))) is executed, the jackpot game effect (15R indicating that the current jackpot is 15R) The ending effect displayed during the ending period set at the end of the jackpot game is the next jackpot (2 jackpots (10 rounds (R))) after the jackpot 1 ends. The content of the effect is switched from the ending effect to the 10R effect when the jackpot 2 is executed.

  This jackpot production 2 is such that a plurality of jackpot games that are continuously executed are continuously executed in the case that the holding information newly acquired during the jackpot game includes entry information corresponding to the hit. It is something to produce. That is, the jackpot game effect corresponding to the jackpot 1 is a normal jackpot game effect (15R effect), and it is continuously changed by changing the content of the ending effect based on the incoming information of the reserved ball newly acquired during the jackpot game. It is possible to produce such that a plurality of jackpot games that are executed in the same manner are continuously executed.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to set an effect (continuous jackpot effect) that is continuously executed by a plurality of jackpot gaming machines based on the reserved balls acquired during the jackpot game, It is possible to facilitate execution and enhance the production effect. Further, even if the normal jackpot game effect is executed, the jackpot game can be performed while expecting the player to shift to the continuous jackpot effect.

  Here, the content of the effect displayed between the two jackpots in the jackpot effect 2 (see FIG. 83B) will be described with reference to FIGS. 88B to 89B. FIG. 88 (b) is a diagram schematically showing an ending display displayed during the first jackpot ending period, and FIG. 89 (a) shows the end of the first jackpot and starts the change of special symbols. FIG. 89B is a diagram schematically showing the display screen in a state where a special symbol jackpot is won.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (b), in the ending display displayed during the first ending period of the jackpot, information for indicating the number of rounds of this jackpot and the number of balls acquired during the jackpot in the main display area Dm. (Acquired points) is displayed. Then, when the jackpot game ends and the change of the special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), the ending display is continuously displayed and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is suggested to the player. In the round number display area Dm2 for executing, the currently executed round number display mode Dm3 indicating the number of currently executed rounds and the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 indicating the determined round number which is determined to be executed are being hit Will continue to be displayed. In addition, a small display area Dn2, a hold execution area Dn3, and a hold symbol display area Dn4 that display changes in the third symbol are displayed. In FIG. 89 (a), in the reserved symbol display area Dn4, the second reserved symbol from the left (the reserved symbol in which 3 is added to the circle that is variably displayed one after another) wins the jackpot. It shows the state.

  When the special symbol jackpot is won (when the variable symbol display with 3 added to the circle is stopped), the jackpot continues in the main display area Dm as shown in FIG. 89B ( A comment “Notice that the jackpot will continue” is displayed to notify that the new jackpot will be started), and the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 indicates the second jackpot round number “10”. The value is variably displayed from “15” to “25”. In addition, in the small display area Dn2, the combination “777” of the third symbol indicating that the jackpot is won is stopped and displayed.

  The content of the effect executed in the jackpot effect 2 has been described above, but a similar effect may be used for the jackpot effect 1. In other words, in the jackpot production 1 described above, an effect using a plurality of rounds is executed as the jackpot continuation production. For example, during the final round of the first jackpot or the ending period after the end of the final round, the jackpot In the case where a new holding ball including the winning ball winning information is acquired, it is difficult to execute the jackpot effect so as to straddle a plurality of jackpots. In such a case, by executing the same effect as the above-described jackpot effect 2, the jackpot effect can be smoothly executed so as to straddle a plurality of jackpots.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84 (a), the contents of the jackpot medium effect 3 described above will be described. FIG. 84A is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the jackpot production 3. As shown in FIG. 84 (a), the jackpot effect 3 is a state where the number of reserved balls is “4” (a new reserved ball cannot be acquired during the jackpot game) when the jackpot game (one jackpot) is executed. ), And a winning game during a big hit that can be set when the already-acquired holding ball contains the winning entry information that has been won.

  When jackpot production 3 is set, if the previous jackpot game (one jackpot 1 ((15 rounds (R))) is executed, the next jackpot game (two jackpots (10 rounds (R))) The jackpot game effect (25R effect) that combines the game contents is executed.

  This jackpot effect 3 is a state in which it is not possible to newly acquire a holding ball during the jackpot game, that is, a state in which it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot is continuously won at the timing when the jackpot 1 is executed. It is an effect performed in When the jackpot production 3 is executed, it is possible to quickly notify the player that the jackpot has been won continuously, giving the player a sense of security, and newly holding during the jackpot game It is possible to prevent the player from expecting excessively for winning the jackpot continuously because the above-mentioned jackpot effect 2 is executed in a state where the ball cannot be acquired.

  As described above, in the present control example, when the jackpot is continuously won within a predetermined period (within the holding storage), the jackpot for making it appear that a plurality of jackpot games are continuously executed. A plurality of medium effects are prepared, and the jackpot / medium effect to be executed is set based on the number of special symbols held at the time when the previous jackpot game is executed and the determination result of the stored and stored ball information. doing.

  In addition, the plurality of jackpot productions have different timings for notifying the player that the jackpot has been won successively. As a result, the jackpot game can be enjoyed to the end while expecting that the jackpot is won continuously.

  This control example corresponds to the jackpot of the special symbol during the jackpot game when the jackpot game is executed in a state where the number of reserved symbols of the special symbol is vacant (a state in which the new bonus can be stored during the jackpot game). Even if the holding symbol is held and stored, the jackpot effect for making it appear that a plurality of jackpot games are continuously executed can be executed, so that the jackpot game is held and stored when the jackpot game is executed. As compared with the case where the jackpot effect is determined based on the information, the jackpot effect for making it appear that a plurality of jackpot games are continuously executed can be easily executed, and the effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, as one of a plurality of jackpot effects, since the number of rounds executed in the previous jackpot game is divided into a plurality of times and can be partially notified to the player, the current jackpot effect is one time It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the effect is executed in the jackpot game or the effect executed across multiple jackpot games. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting that the jackpot game will continue for a long time.

  In this control example, during the special symbol change period after the end of the jackpot game, as in the normal special symbol change period, the small display area Dn2 for displaying the change in the third symbol, the hold execution area Dn3, Although the configuration in which the reserved symbol display area Dn4 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used, other configurations may be used. For example, the condition that the jackpot continuation effect is executed during the special symbol variation period is satisfied. If it is determined that the condition for executing the big hit continuation effect is established by the means, even during the special symbol change period, the change display of the third symbol and the above-described hold symbol It is better to execute processing that does not display related display, or execute processing to display in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to grasp the contents (for example, reduced display or movement of the display area).

  With this configuration, the player knows the end timing of the first jackpot game and the start timing of the second jackpot game based on the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Can be made difficult.

  In addition, during the interval between rounds in the first jackpot game, a pseudo-ending display, a pseudo-variable display that fluctuates a pseudo-pattern imitating the third design, and a pseudo-stop that stops the pseudo-design that is fluctuating in a combination corresponding to the jackpot A pseudo game execution means for executing a pseudo jackpot start display after the stop display and the pseudo stop display is provided, and a pseudo jackpot is executed so that a plurality of jackpots are executed while one jackpot game is executed. You may comprise so that an effect may be performed. With this configuration, the special symbol (this symbol) displayed on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b at the time of winning the first jackpot is a special symbol corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (this symbol). ) Can be made difficult for the player to grasp. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the effect of the big hit effect performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, another example of the jackpot production 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84B is a timing chart showing the contents of another example of the jackpot production 1. In this example, the content of the extra effect is changed from the 5R effect to the 10R effect with respect to the content shown in FIG. 83 (a), and the winning prize at the start of the big hit (in the winning information storage area 223a) It is different in that the presence or absence of (winning information indicating winning) is different.

  Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 84 (b), the jackpot 1 (15R) is started in a state where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2) is “1” and there is no winning prize. The 10R effect 1 is executed as the first effect for addition. Then, while the 10R effect 1 is being executed, a new reserved ball containing the winning entry information that has been won is acquired (the number of held balls becomes “2”). In the jackpot continuation effect, an effect indicating that the 10R effect 2 is executed using the number of rounds obtained by adding the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot 2 is executed.

  By executing such an effect, one additional effect is executed so as to straddle multiple jackpots (one extra effect is executed in a period from 11R of jackpot 1 to 5R of jackpot 2) Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of rounds set for one jackpot. In addition, according to the example shown in FIG. 84 (b), the 10R effect 1 and the 10R effect 2 are executed because the effect for 10R is executed as an effect for addition that is executed so as to straddle a plurality of jackpots. Later, the same 5R effect 5 as in FIG. 83A described above can be executed, and data used for the effect for addition can be shared.

  Note that FIG. 83 (a) or 84 (b) shows an example of an extra effect, and an extra effect other than the content exemplified above is also executed. Specifically, the extra effect is a 5R effect using a period of 5 rounds, a 10R effect using a period of 10 rounds, and a 7R effect or a period of 8 rounds using a period of 7 rounds. An 8R effect using a period is configured to be executable.

  In this way, by using a plurality of effects corresponding to different numbers of rounds as an additional effect, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of rounds executed during one big hit, While predicting how long (and how many rounds) this big jackpot will continue, it is possible to have a game played with the expectation that it will continue for a long time.

  In addition, the gaming state set at the time when the jackpot effect 1 executed corresponding to one or a plurality of jackpots is completed, that is, the jackpot type (probability variable jackpot) executed last corresponding to the jackpot effect 1 In other words, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state set at the time when the jackpot effect 1 is finished is the probability variation state. As an extra effect to be executed in the early stage of the jackpot effect 1, it is easy to set an extra effect (for example, a 10R effect) corresponding to a long number of rounds, or when the jackpot effect 1 ends. It may be configured to execute an extra effect (for example, a 7R effect) that is executed only when the set gaming state is a probabilistic state. .

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to cause the player to predict both the number of rounds executed during the jackpot and the game state set after the jackpot ends, by the added effect that is executed, Can be increased.

  Returning to FIG. 82, the description will be continued. In this control example, when the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (probability change state or short-time state), a specific effect (probability changing effect or time-short-time effect (hereinafter referred to as high-probability effect) is called. )) Is executed. The period during which this high-definition effect is being executed is a period in which a predetermined effect (battle effect) is repeatedly executed, and whether or not the gaming state advantageous to the player ends based on the result of the battle effect. An effect of informing the player is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 90 to FIG. 97, the contents of the high-definition effect (continuous effect) will be described in detail. FIG. 90 shows a high-probability state that is continuously executed until a big win is won out of the flow of the high-probability effect (continuous effect) that is executed when the gaming state is an advantageous state (probability change state or short-time state). It is a timing chart showing an effect (continuous effect). As shown in FIG. 90, it is configured such that the battle effect is repeatedly executed during the high-certain effect (continuous effect). The battle effect is a battle reach (see FIGS. 93 to 96) in which an effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state (probability change state or short-time state) ends is executed in a period corresponding to one special figure change. The effect for changing the display mode when the battle reach is executed is composed of a pre-battle effect (see FIGS. 91 and 92) executed in a period corresponding to multiple special figure fluctuations.

  Although detailed production contents will be described later, in battle reach, an effect (attack production) in which the own character and the opponent's character reduce each other's HP value (continuation value) is executed a plurality of times (three times). When the HP value (continuation value) of the game becomes “0” (in the case of a battle reach of the defeat pattern), the end condition of the advantageous state (winning at the jackpot at which the advantageous state ends or the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is set) Reached the number of times), and when the opponent's character's HP value (continuation value) is “0” (in the case of a battle pattern battle reach), it indicates that the winning position has been won, When the mutual HP value (continuation value) does not become “0” (in the case of the battle reach of the draw pattern), it indicates that the highly accurate medium effect is continued.

  In the pre-battle effect, an effect of increasing or decreasing the HP value (continuation value) of the opponent character at the time when the battle reach is started is executed. This pre-battle effect is configured so that the effect mode is set based on the pre-read result of the reserved symbol and the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly set, and based on the effect mode, a plurality of special symbol variations are performed. The used HP management is executed.

  FIG. 91 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when a battle effect is started as a highly accurate medium effect (continuous effect). When the battle effect is started, first, the pre-battle effect that is the first half part of the battle effect is executed. In the pre-battle effect, an effect for increasing or decreasing the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent of the battle reach, which is the latter half part of the battle effect, is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (a), when the pre-battle presentation is executed, a boy character Dm11 is displayed on the center left side of the main display area Dm and an opponent for selecting a battle reach opponent candidate. The selection mode is displayed. In this opponent selection mode, selection parts Dm13 to Dm16 corresponding to the four types of characters A to D are displayed as opponent candidates to be opponents of battle reach, and one of the selection parts is selected. FIG. 91A shows a state where the selection unit Dm13 corresponding to the character A is selected.

  Further, on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, an HP display area Dm17 indicating a continuation value (HP value) corresponding to each of the four types of characters A to D is displayed. The HP display region Dm17 is formed of a display unit that displays a HP value with a horizontally long gauge and a display unit (Dm18) that displays a numerical value. The value (display mode) displayed in the HP display area Dm17 is variably displayed so as to vary (decrease) according to the attack on the opponent during the pre-battle presentation.

  In the pre-battle presentation, when an opponent to be played is selected, the screen shown in FIG. 92 (a) is displayed next, and an presentation for reducing the opponent's HP value is executed, and is displayed in the HP display area Dm17. A display for identifying the HP display corresponding to the opponent character (a circle on the character A) is made. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp the HP value of the currently selected opponent character.

  Further, during this pre-battle presentation, only the presentation that reduces the HP value of the opponent character is executed, and the HP value of itself (character Dm11) does not decrease. As a result, until the battle reach is executed, as a result of the effect of attacking the opponent, the HP value of the player does not decrease, so it is expected that the effect of attacking the opponent will be executed many times. You can play games. In addition, since the HP value of the player (character Dm11) is not displayed on the screen during the pre-battle presentation, the situation of giving the player a sense of anxiety that the HP value of the player will be reduced as a result of the executed execution is suppressed. can do.

  In addition, the production mode of the pre-battle presentation is not limited to the above-described content, and may display an own HP value and execute an effect of reducing the own HP value, or the own HP value or the other party An effect of increasing the HP value may be executed. Also, in the pre-battle production that is the first half part of the battle production, the opponent's HP value is decreased to “0”, and the jackpot (the probability change state after the jackpot is completed, or without performing the battle reach that is the second half part of the battle production) , A jackpot that is given a short-time state) may be executed.

  In FIG. 92A, since the attack (main attack effect) for reducing the HP by “200” is performed on the character ADm13, the display unit Dm18a corresponding to the character A in the HP display region Dm17 is displayed in the main display region Dm. Corresponding to the contents of the production, “800” is variably displayed.

  On the other hand, in the display example shown in FIG. 92B, in addition to the effect (main attack effect) in which the player (character Dm11) makes an attack, the cat character Dm20 appears and performs an additional attack (secondary attack effect). Is also executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), the character ADm13 is attacked to reduce the HP by “230”, and the display unit Dm18c corresponding to the character C in the HP display area Dm17 is displayed in the main display area Dm. Is displayed in a variable manner at “770” corresponding to the contents of the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 92 (b), during the pre-battle presentation, the opponent may be changed in the middle, and when the opponent is changed, the current opponent can be identified. The HP display area Dm18 is displayed (circled on the character A).

  Here, a method of setting the HP value that decreases due to the attack effect will be briefly described. In this control example, based on the lottery result of the special symbol and the pre-determined result (prefetch result) of the stored pitch information, the result of the battle effect and the rough effect content (HP value A decrease value (100's place) and main attack effect) are determined. Then, for the purpose of diversifying the types of effects with respect to the contents of the effects determined by the continuation value management means (HP value reduction value and main attack effect), the effect setting means converts the results into lottery results and look-ahead results. Detailed production contents (decrease value of HP value (10's place) and secondary attack production) are determined without being affected.

  Then, the continuation value (HP value) determined by the continuation value management unit is stored, and the continuation value (HP value) is increased or decreased with respect to the stored continuation value (HP value) using the continuation value management unit. It is composed.

  Specifically, in FIG. 92A described above, an effect (main attack effect) for reducing the continuation value (HP value) by 200 is set by the continuation value management means, and the continuation value (HP value) is set by the effect setting means. The example of a display when the content which does not increase / decrease a value is set is shown, and the main attack effect (attack effect of character Dm11) which decreases the continuation value (HP value) of partner character ADm13 by 200 is performed as a pre-battle effect. Yes.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 92B described above, an effect (main attack effect) for decreasing the continuation value (HP value) by 200 is set by the continuation value management means, and the continuation value (HP value) is set to 20 by the effect setting means. The example of a display when the production | generation to reduce (sub-attack production) is set is shown, In addition to the main attack production (attack production of character Dm11) which decreases the continuation value (HP value) of opponent character ADm13 by 200, the other character A secondary attack effect that reduces the continuation value (HP value) of ADm13 by 30 (attack effect of cat character Dm20) is executed, and the continuation value (HP value) of opponent character ADm13 is reduced by 230 as a pre-battle effect in total. Is running.

  By comprising in this way, the number of the effects displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be increased with respect to the number of the effects set by the continuous value management means. In other words, it is possible to reduce the management number of effects that continuously increase or decrease the continuation value (HP value) with respect to the number of effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The burden of control can be reduced.

  In addition, when the opponent during the pre-battle presentation is changed, the HP value of the opponent character before the change is continuously displayed as it is. Therefore, when the opponent is changed and the same opponent character is selected again, it is possible to continue the production from the previous HP value. In this way, the battle reach is executed after gradually reducing the HP of the opponent character who can be an opponent of the battle reach during the pre-battle production, so that the battle reach is frequently performed in the high-precision production. Even if it is not generated, a series of effects can be executed.

  In addition, during the pre-battle presentation, if the decrease in the HP of multiple opponent candidates is biased, the stage is watched while expecting a battle reach with an opponent with as little HP as possible. be able to.

  When the pre-battle production, which is the first half part of the battle production, is finished, a battle reach for performing a battle with a specific opponent is executed. If this battle reach is won (the opponent's HP is set to “0”), it indicates that the player has won a winning game state that is advantageous to the player, and is defeated (your HP is set to “0”). ) Indicates that the player has won the game state (normal state) disadvantageous to the player. In addition, when the battle reach is executed at a timing when the special symbol lottery result is not a hit, the draw is not made (HP is not “0” for both himself and the opponent), and the high-probability production is continued.

  This battle reach can be used when a big win is won during high accuracy (probability, short time), or when a predetermined condition is met during high accuracy (for example, when the number of special figure fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, If the reach effect lottery is won), and if the result of the battle reach is a draw, the pre-battle effect is transferred again. In this case, the HP values of the opponent characters are all set to initial values. In other words, since the pre-battle production is performed by reducing the HP value of the opponent character, for example, if the period that is not won by the special symbol continues for a long time during the probability variation state, the pre-battle production is being performed. In order to prevent the opponent character's HP from becoming “0”, it is necessary to make it difficult to execute an effect (attack effect) that decreases the opponent character's HP, and the effect of the effect before the battle may be reduced. there were.

  In this control example, a battle reach is generated in addition to the case where the special symbol is won, and a “draw” is provided as a result of the battle reach. Since the HP value is reset to the initial value and the pre-battle presentation is resumed, there is a problem that the pre-battle presentation effect is reduced when one pre-battle presentation is executed for a long period of time. Can be solved. Further, by providing “draw” in the result of battle reach, the possibility of “draw” can be left even when an effect with low expectation is executed during battle reach.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 93 (a)-FIG.96 (b), the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 displayed during battle reach is demonstrated. First, FIG. 93A is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen immediately after the battle reach is started. Here, the content of the battle reach will be described. In the battle reach of this control example, the attack of the opponent or the opponent is executed a total of three times, and an effect is displayed in which the result is displayed according to the final HP value. There are three types of attacks, “strong attack”, “medium attack”, and “weak attack”, and the HP values to be reduced are set differently.

  When the battle reach is started, the characters “battle start” and the characters “first time” indicating the number of battle reach this time are displayed above the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Is done. Below that, an HP gauge Dm21 indicating its own HP value and an HP gauge Dm22 indicating its opponent's HP value are displayed. The HP gauge Dm21 displays “1000”, which is the upper limit value, and the HP gauge Dm22 displays “500”, which is a value decreased in the pre-battle presentation.

  An accumulation gauge Dm23 is displayed below the HP gauge Dm21. The accumulated gauge Dm23 accumulates a value based on being attacked by the opponent, and when the accumulated value reaches “MAX”, a reverse effect is executed and an effect of winning the battle reach is executed. By making this reversal effect possible, even if the opponent's dominant effect is executed during the battle reach where three battles are unfolded, the expectation for the big hit can be given to the end.

  A progress display area Dm24 for indicating the progress of battle reach is formed below the main display area Dm, and a history of attack effects during battle reach is displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93 (b), display contents when the first attack in battle reach is self will be described. As shown in FIG. 93 (b), an effect in which the character (boy character) Dm11 attacks (weak attack) the opponent character Dm15 in the main display area Dm is executed, and the value of the HP gauge Dm22 is “ It decreases from “500” to “300”. In the progress display area Dm24, a “circle” indicating that the first battle was an attack is displayed.

  When the second battle performance is executed following the first battle performance shown in FIG. 93 (b), the second battle performance is displayed as shown in FIG. 94 (a). Here, in FIG. 94 (a), an effect in which the opponent character Dm15 attacks is executed as an effect of the second battle, and the value of the HP gauge Dm21 indicating the continuation value (HP value) of the character Dm11 is “1000”. ”Is reduced from“ 700 ”to“ 700 ”, and an effect that the value of the accumulation gauge Dm23 is half (50) accumulated is displayed. In the progress display area Dm24, a “bat mark” indicating that the second battle was an opponent's attack is displayed.

  Next, when the effect of the third battle (last battle) is executed, the effect of the third battle is displayed as shown in FIG. Here, in FIG. 94 (b), as an effect of the third battle, an effect that the player's character (boy character) Dm11 attacks (middle attack) the opponent character Dm15 in the main display area Dm is executed. The value of Dm22 is decreased from “300” to “0”, and it is notified that the current battle reach is a battle reach indicating that a winning game that is advantageous to the player is won. In the small display area Dn2, “777” is displayed as a combination display of the third symbol for indicating that the current special symbol lottery is a big hit.

  In addition to the battle reach (win pattern) shown in FIG. 94 (b), the battle reach in this control example is provided with the draw pattern and the defeat pattern as described above, and the battle reach of the draw pattern is set. If it is, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 95A is displayed instead of the third effect shown in FIG. 94B. In the display example shown in FIG. 95A, an effect in which the opponent character Dm15 attacks is executed as the third effect of the battle. In the case of a draw pattern battle reach, the value of the HP gauge Dm21 of the character Dm11 does not decrease to 0 (decreases to 500), and the continuation value (HP value) of both itself and the opponent does not become 0. To do. In this case, a new battle effect is executed, and the pre-battle effect (see FIG. 91) is executed again.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (a), even if the final battle reach attack (third attack) is the opponent's attack, a draw pattern in which the continuation value (HP value) does not decrease to 0 is provided. So, until the end of the battle reach, the player can be expected. In FIG. 95 (a), a pattern in which the opponent performs the third attack as a draw pattern battle reach, that is, at the time of the third attack, the player is either defeated or drawn in this battle reach. In addition to the effects that seem to be patterns, in addition to this, the pattern that the third attack is performed as a battle reach of the draw pattern, that is, at the time of the third attack, this battle reach is won by the player or An effect resembling any of the draw patterns is also executed. In this case, when the third attack is performed, the player can be relieved because there is no defeat in this battle reach.

  When the defeat pattern battle reach is set, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 95B is displayed instead of the third effect shown in FIG. 94B. In the display example shown in FIG. 95 (b), an effect in which the opponent character Dm15 attacks is executed as the third effect of the battle, the value of the HP gauge Dm21 of the own character Dm11 decreases to 0, and the accumulation gauge Dm23 The battle reach ends without accumulating the value up to the upper limit (MAX).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 96A, when the value of the accumulated gauge Dm23 reaches the upper limit (MAX) even when the value of the HP gauge Dm21 of its own character Dm11 decreases to 0, The character “Resurrection” is displayed in the upper center of the display area Dm, and the own character Dm11 stands up, and as shown in FIG. 96 (b), a resurrection effect is performed to defeat the opponent character Dm15.

  As described above, the battle reach effect in this control example is such that the effect result varies depending on the value of the accumulated gauge Dm23 in addition to the decrease in the HP gauge Dm21 of the own character Dm11 and the HP gauge Dm22 of the opponent character Dm15. Because it is configured, it is possible to have a big hit expectation until the end of the battle reach.

  Further, in the first control example, the content of the pre-battle effect (effect mode) is based on the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly executed, and the reserved memory information (entrance information) of the special symbol at the time of setting the battle effect. It is configured to be variable. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 97, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 is configured to be variable.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 97, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 will be described. 97 (a) to 97 (d) show the HP display area Dm17 variably set based on the number of times that the battle effect is repeatedly executed and the special symbol hold storage information (entrance information) at the time of setting the battle effect. It is the figure which showed the display mode.

  FIG. 97 (a) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of the HP display area Dm17, and a schematic diagram illustrating a display mode of the HP display area Dm17 having a pattern in which the opponent character does not change during the battle effect. It is. As shown in FIG. 97 (a), only the same opponent character (character ADm13) has different continuation values (HP values) in the HP display area Dm17 (four stages "700" to "1000"). It is displayed. When such HP display area Dm17 is displayed, the character ADm13 is always set as the opponent of the pre-battle effect, and the player's own attack executed in the pre-battle effect (see FIG. 92 (a)). As a result, an effect in which all the HP values displayed in the HP display area Dm17 are reduced is executed.

  By using such a display mode, a plurality of HP values are reduced at a time, so that the effect to be executed can be flashy. Further, since the initial value of the continuation value (HP value) is different even for the same character ADm13, it is expected that the character ADm13 having a low continuation value (HP value) will be selected at the time of battle reach development. You can play games. In addition, by setting different initial values of the continuation value (HP value) for the same character ADm13, it is possible to set a plurality of expectations for the jackpot for the same character ADm13. The type of image data for displaying a character can be reduced as compared with the case where a different opponent character is set every time.

  Next, the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 97 (b) shows a display mode in which the display order of the characters A to D is different from the display mode of the normal HP display area Dm17 (see FIG. 91). It is the shown schematic diagram. When such a display mode is used, for example, in a case where the degree of selection as an opponent character is varied depending on the position displayed in the HP display area Dm17 during the battle effect, the opponent who is easily selected during the battle effect. Characters can be varied. Further, the display order of the characters A to D displayed in the HP display area Dm17 may be changed while the battle effect is being executed.

  FIG. 97 (c) is a schematic diagram showing a display mode in which a partner character different from the display mode (see FIG. 91) of the normal HP display area Dm17 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 97 (c), in this display mode in which the opponent characters E and F are displayed, the opponent character is a special opponent character whose initial value of the continuation value (HP value) is lower than that of the normal opponent characters A and B. E and F are displayed in a selectable manner. By configuring in this way, the player can be expected to win the battle reach in this battle production.

  FIG. 97D is a schematic diagram showing a display mode in which the number of selectable opponent characters is reduced with respect to the display mode of the normal HP display area Dm17 (see FIG. 91). By using such a display mode, in order to reduce the choices of the opponent character selected in the pre-battle presentation, the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent character at the time of battle reach development is reduced in advance (during the pre-battle presentation). It can be made easy.

  As described above, in this control example, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 is based on the number of times that the battle effect is repeatedly executed and the stored information (entrance information) of the special symbol at the time of setting the battle effect. Although it is configured to be variably set, the variation of battle production is increased and the production effect is enhanced. For example, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 suggests future game results to the player. You may comprise so that it may do.

  For example, when the special opponent character E described above with reference to FIG. 97C is selected as an opponent for battle reach, it is preferable that the battle reach of the defeat pattern is not executed. Thus, in addition to the effect of reducing the opponent character's continuation value (HP value) in the pre-battle effect, the player can be interested in the opponent character selected in the battle reach. When the opponent character E is set instead of the opponent character A in the display mode shown in FIG. 97 (a), the battle reach of the defeat pattern during the current battle effect period at the timing when the battle effect is executed. Is no longer executed, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, when the stored information (entrance information) of the special symbol at the time of setting the battle effect includes entrance information for executing the victory pattern battle reach, the battle reach of the victory pattern is selected. A display mode including a specific opponent character on which is executed may be displayed.

  Further, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 may be variably set based on the operation result of the frame button 22 that can be operated by the player. In this case, until the operation of the frame button 22 is accepted, the display mode of the normal HP display area Dm17 shown in FIG. 91 is displayed, and the operation effect for operating the frame button 22 during the pre-battle effect is executed. For example, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 may be configured to be changed to the display mode described above with reference to FIGS.

  In the example described above with reference to FIGS. 97A to 97D, the length of the HP gauge is configured to be a constant length even when different continuation values (HP values) are set. Therefore, for example, when the continuation value (HP value) is decreased by “100”, the HP value gauge is variably displayed so that the decrease rate of the HP value gauge varies depending on the set continuation value (HP value). Without being limited to such a display mode, the HP gauge may be displayed with a length corresponding to the set continuation value (HP value). Further, in order to easily grasp the remaining continuation value (HP value) by the length of the HP gauge, the display mode (for example, color) of the HP value gauge is made variable according to the length of the HP gauge. You may do it.

  By configuring as described above, even if the battle effect is repeatedly executed for the player, the effect mode can be varied, and the player gets bored with the effect content early. Can be suppressed. In this control example, the effect mode of the pre-battle effect is based on the number of times that the battle effect is repeatedly executed and the stored information (entrance information) of the special symbol when the battle effect is set (when the pre-battle effect is set). However, the production mode may be variably set using other conditions. For example, as a gaming state in which a battle production can be executed, the first gaming state (for example, the probability variation state) ) And a second gaming state (for example, a short time state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state can be discriminated, and the gaming state at the time of setting the battle effect (when setting the effect before the battle) An effect mode may be set based on a result of determining whether the game state is the first game state or the second game state, and the entry information that is held and stored when the battle effect is set (when the pre-battle effect is set) Determine As a determination result, the gaming state may set the representation embodiment based on the first to the playing state whether there is ball entrance information indicating that the shift to the second game state determination result.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98 to FIG. 101, a suggestion effect that is an effect that is executed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is set to the normal state will be described. This suggestion effect is a game in which a specific effect for indicating a high degree of expectation of jackpot is executed by a change effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in response to a change of a special symbol. It is an effect for suggesting to a person in advance, and is an effect composed of a prelude effect of the first half part and a countdown effect of the second half part.

  First, the contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 98 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen at the time when the precursor effect, which is the first half part of the suggestive effect, is started, and FIG. 98 (b) is the end of the precursor effect, which is the first half part. FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen at the time when the countdown effect that is the second half part is started, and FIG. 99 shows the display screen at the time when the suggestive effect (countdown effect) ends and the specific effect starts. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example.

  As shown in FIG. 98 (a), when the suggestion effect is started, the precursor effect is executed in the sub display area Ds. In the example shown in FIG. 98 (a), the character Dc1 that imitates a “car” performs a dynamic effect that proceeds from the left to the right, and the arrival point Dc3 where the character “goal” is displayed as the character Dc1. By arriving at, the effect is executed so as to switch to the countdown effect.

  Then, as a movement route when the character Dc1 moves to the arrival point Dc3, either the first route Dc2a indicating a straight route or the second route Dc2b indicating a meandering route is set. In the example shown in FIG. 98 (a), the second path Dc2b is selected, and a dynamic effect is performed in which the character Dc1 moves along the meandering path.

  Here, although detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 100, in the first control example, the start timing of the warning effect that is the first half part of the suggested effects is configured to be selectable from a plurality of points, Since the period in which the precursor effect is executed is indefinite, the path of the character Dc1 is selected according to the length of the period in which the precursor effect is executed. Thereby, when the precursor effect is executed, it is possible to visually grasp the timing at which the countdown effect is started.

  In FIG. 98A, an effect suggesting the timing at which the countdown effect is started is used as the sign effect, but other effects may be used as the sign effect. For example, the countdown effect is executed. An effect that suggests to the player, an effect that suggests the period of the countdown effect, or an effect that suggests the type of specific effect that is the target of the countdown effect may be used. In other words, any effect that informs in advance information related to an effect to be executed in the future as the suggestion effect may be used.

  When the indication effect ends, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), the comment “countdown start” is displayed above the main display area Dm, and in the sub display area Ds, the character Dc1 arrives at the arrival point Dc3 and counts down. A character “3” indicating that the period is 3 seconds is displayed in the countdown display area Dc4. Thereby, it is possible to specifically notify the player that the current countdown effect is an effect starting from “3” and the timing at which the specific effect is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 98 (b), a countdown effect in which the countdown period is 3 seconds is shown. However, in the first control example, another countdown period (for example, 7 seconds) is set. There is also a countdown effect, and the longer the countdown period, the higher the jackpot expectation. By configuring in this way, the countdown effect in which a long countdown period is set is executed while predicting the timing at which the countdown effect is started and the current variation pattern during the precursor effect which is the first part of the suggestion effect. Can be expected.

  When the countdown effect shown in FIG. 98 (b) is completed, as shown in FIG. 99, the character “0” indicating that the countdown period has ended is displayed in the countdown display area Dc4 of the sub display area Ds, and the main display. In the region Dm, an operation effect is displayed in which an image simulating the frame button 22 is displayed as the specific effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 100 and FIG. 101, a flow of setting a precursor effect and a countdown effect that are executed as suggested effects of the first control example will be described. In the first control example, the suggestion effect is executed in order to notify the player of the timing at which the specific effect is executed, and in the countdown effect executed in the second half part of the suggestion effect, the execution timing of the target specific effect is executed. The effect (see FIG. 98 (b)) that accurately (specifically) is notified is executed, and in the precursor effect executed in the first half part, an effect that directly or indirectly suggests that the specific effect is executed (See FIG. 98 (a)).

  Here, in the variation effect that is conventionally executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the suggestion effect for suggesting (notifying) the player that the specific effect is executed at a predetermined timing is determined in advance. A configuration that executes for a predetermined period of time has been used. If the period during which the suggestion effect is executed is determined in advance, the execution period overlaps with another effect executed in the variable effect (for example, an effect suggesting a higher degree of expectation than the suggestion effect). In some cases, a prohibition process was performed to prevent the suggestion effect from being executed. In addition, there is a problem that the suggestion effect cannot be executed with respect to the specific effect executed at a timing at which the period in which the suggestion effect is executed cannot be secured.

  In order to solve the above-described problem, if a plurality of suggested effect data having different predetermined periods are prepared, the storage capacity increases, and the process for setting the variable effect becomes complicated. A new problem arises.

  Therefore, in this control example, the execution timing and the end timing of the suggestion effect are set separately, and the period during which the suggestion effect is executed can be adjusted. Specifically, the end timing of the suggestion effect (end timing of the countdown effect that is the second half part) is set based on the execution timing of the specific effect that is the target of the suggestion effect, and the start timing of the suggestion effect (the precursor that is the first half part) The production start timing) can be set from a plurality of points.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect without setting a period for execution in advance. In addition, since the start timing of the suggestion effect is configured to be settable from a plurality of points, for example, the period during which the suggestion effect is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol is variable (for example, when winning a jackpot It is possible to set the period during which the suggestive effect is executed for a long time) or to change the start timing of the suggestive effect according to the execution timing of other effects. Therefore, the degree of freedom when setting the suggestion effect can be increased.

  FIG. 100 (a) is a timing chart showing a flow of executing the suggestion effect in the change effect in which the change time of 60 seconds is set. In the example shown in FIG. 100A, the timing at which the suggestive effect can be started 10 seconds or 20 seconds after the start of the change is set, and the “PUSH effect” that is the specific effect is executed 33 seconds after the start of the change. Is set to Then, the countdown period (30 to 33 seconds from the start of the change) is set so that the countdown effect (the execution period of 3 seconds) ends at the timing when the specific effect is executed (33 seconds after the start of the change). And since this change is a case where the big win is won, a timing (timing 10 seconds after the start of the change) at which the suggested effect period can be set longer than a plurality of start timings. Set as.

  Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 100 (a), the countdown effect (the production period of 3 seconds) is performed after the warning effect (the production period of 20 seconds) is executed 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (after 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation). ) Is executed. Then, the specific effect (“PUSH effect”) is executed at the end timing of the effect period of the countdown effect. If the current variation is not won by a big win, a timing (20 seconds after the start of the variation) at which the suggestion production period is shortened is set as a suggestion production start timing (a start production start timing). .

  In this way, in the case of performing the suggestion effect for the specific effect executed at the specific timing of the predetermined variation effect, by using a configuration that sets the start timing of the suggestion effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol, The length of the suggestion effect period can be varied based on the lottery result of the special symbol, and the player can be made aware of the length of the effect period. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, even when the length of the suggestion effect period is variable, the countdown effect period that is the second half part of the suggestion effect, that is, the period for executing the effect that specifically (accurately) notifies the execution timing of the specific effect is Since it is configured to be set based on the execution timing of the specific effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the suggestion effect.

  That is, when the length of the suggestion effect period is varied, only the period in which the precursor effect that is the first half part of the suggestion effect is executed is variable. This precursor effect directly or indirectly suggests that the specific effect is executed as described above, and even if the length of the effect period is changed, it is executed in the latter half part of the suggestion effect. The player can be surely notified of the timing at which the specific effect is executed by the countdown effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 100B, the flow of the suggestion effect executed in the variation effect B different from the variation effect A described above with reference to FIG. FIG. 100B is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of effects executed in the variation effect B.

  Unlike the variation effect A described above, the variation effect B shown in FIG. 100B is a variation effect in which a plurality of specific effects that can be targeted for the suggestion effect are set. The method for setting the variation effect executed in the variation effect B will be described focusing on the differences from the variation effect A described above. In the variation effect B, a timing at which the suggestion effect can be started 10 seconds or 20 seconds after the start of the change is set, and a timing at which the specific effect can be executed after 26 seconds or 30 seconds from the start of the change is set.

  In the variation effect B, a “cut-in effect” (not shown) in which the boy character is displayed so as to cover the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as a specific effect that can be executed 26 seconds after the start of the variation. The “PUSH effect” (see FIG. 99) can be set as a specific effect that can be executed 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation. These two specific effects have the same jackpot expectation, and the specific effect corresponding to the set suggestion effect is executed.

  The variation effect shown in FIG. 100 (b) is configured such that a period during which the suggestion effect is executed is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, as in FIG. 100 (a) described above. When the lottery result is a big hit, the configuration is such that the “PUSH effect” that is executed 40 seconds after the start of the change is set as the specific effect at the timing 10 seconds after the start of the change as the suggested effect start timing. doing.

  More specifically, in the order in which the jackpot expectation level is high, the above-mentioned suggestion effect is the pattern with the highest jackpot expectation level, and then the timing 17 seconds after the start of the change is set as the start timing of the suggestion effect, The pattern for setting “PUSH effect” as a specific effect, the timing 10 seconds after the start of variation is set as the start timing of the suggestive effect, the pattern for setting “cut-in effect” as the specific effect, the timing 17 seconds after the start of variation Is set as the start timing of the suggestion effect, and the suggestion effect is set corresponding to the expected degree of jackpot in the order of the pattern in which “cut-in effect” is set as the specific effect.

  Furthermore, in the variation effect B shown in FIG. 100 (b), the start timing of the countdown effect (the length of the countdown period) can be varied according to the length of the set suggestion effect period. When an effect pattern with high expectation level is set, the start timing of the countdown effect is set 7 seconds before the specific effect is executed, and immediately after the countdown effect is started, the sub-display of the third symbol display device 81 is set. A countdown effect in which the character “7” is displayed in the countdown display area Dc4 (see FIG. 98B) of the display area Ds is executed.

  In the first control example, a suggestion effect that straddles a plurality of variation effects is configured to be executable. The flow of the suggestion effect executed across the plurality of variation effects will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect when the suggestive effect is set across the change effect corresponding to two consecutive special symbol changes.

  As shown in FIG. 101, in the present control example, when a new reserved memory is acquired during execution of a variation effect, information included in the newly acquired reserved memory (a determination result, a variation pattern, etc.) is determined in advance. (Pre-reading), and based on the determination result, it is possible to set the effect mode of the change effect executed before the change effect corresponding to the corresponding reserved storage.

  Specifically, the fluctuation effect C (fluctuation time 30 seconds) starts to be changed in a state where there is no pending storage, and at the timing when 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation (the remaining period of the fluctuation effect C is 15 seconds), When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 and acquires a new on-hold memory (a on-hold memory corresponding to the next variation effect), based on information included in the new on-hold memory. Then, it is determined whether or not the suggestion effect is executed.

  Here, when it is determined that the next variation effect is a variation effect for executing the suggestion effect, it is determined whether the remaining period of the current variation effect is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). In the example shown in FIG. 101, since the remaining period of the fluctuation effect C is the timing of 15 seconds when the new hold memory is acquired, it is determined that the remaining period of the current fluctuation effect is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, The start timing of the suggestion effect is set at a predetermined timing (a timing when 20 seconds have passed since the start of the change) in the change effect of the first time, and the specific effect (specification) that is executed 5 seconds after the start of the change in the next change effect (the change effect D) A countdown effect (effect period 3 seconds) is set for effect C).

  As described above, by setting the start timing of the suggestion effect and the end timing of the suggestion effect (start timing of the specific effect) across the continuously executed change effects (variation effects C and D), the change effect C When 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the sign production that is the first half part of the suggestion production is executed for a period (10 seconds) until the fluctuation production C ends. The precursor effect is continuously executed during the period (2 seconds) from the change start timing of the change effect D until the countdown effect is executed, and thereafter (two seconds after the start of change of the change effect D), the countdown effect is executed. After being executed for 3 seconds, the bonus effect C is executed.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 101, since the suggestion effect can be executed in the change effect executed before the change effect in which the specific effect is executed, the beginning of the change effect (for example, 5 seconds after the start of change) The suggestion effect can also be executed for the specific effect executed at (1). Therefore, the freedom degree of suggestion production can be raised more.

  Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 101, when the timing for acquiring a new reserved memory is when the remaining period of the variation effect C is less than a predetermined period (less than 10 seconds) (for example, the timing of the additional prize B shown in FIG. 101). In the case), since it is not possible to secure a period for performing the suggestion effect for the specific effect C of the variation effect D, the suggestion effect for the specific effect C is not set.

  In the above-described example, it is determined whether or not the suggestion effect is executed for the specific effect executed in the next and subsequent variation effects, based on the timing of additional winning (the timing at which a new reserved memory is acquired). Although the configuration is used, other configurations may be used. For example, based on the timing of additional winning (the timing at which a new reserved memory is acquired), the timing for executing the specific performance in the subsequent variation effects It may be configured to be variable.

  By comprising in this way, it can make it easy to set the suggestion effect performed across a some variation | change effect, and can improve an effect.

  In addition, in FIG. 101, as an example of the suggestion effect executed across the plurality of variation effects, the flow of the suggestion effect when the start condition of the next variation effect is satisfied during the execution of the variation effect has been described. You may make it perform the suggestion production which straddled the several fluctuation production on other conditions.

  For example, when the start condition for the next variation effect is satisfied in the state where the start condition for the next variation effect is satisfied, any timing in the next variation effect is set as the execution timing of the specific effect, You may comprise so that the timing which performs a suggestion effect may be set in the timing of the remaining period of the variation | change effect being performed, or the period when the next variation | change effect is performed.

  In this case, the effect executed in the current variation effect and the content of the effect executed during the next variation effect are determined, and the result of the determination and the special symbol corresponding to the next variation effect are drawn. It is good to comprise so that the start timing of suggestion production may be set based on a result. By configuring in this way, for example, in the case where a continuous production with a series of productions of a fluctuation production that is currently changing and a next fluctuation production is set, a suggestion production is produced for the next production of fluctuations. If a special effect is set to be executed at the end timing of the currently-changing variation effect, i.e., at the start timing of the next variation effect, the suggested effect will be performed within the next variation effect period. If there is no factor that prohibits the setting of the suggestion effect in the current variation and the next variation production, the remaining period of the current variation or the next variation The start timing of the suggestion effect can be set in any one of the effect periods.

  In addition, when the start condition for the next (next time) variation effect is established, it is determined whether the variation effect is a variation effect corresponding to the jackpot winning, and the start timing of the suggested effect is being executed based on the determination result It may be set to either the remaining period of the fluctuation effect or the execution period of the next (next time) variable effect. Accordingly, it is possible to easily set a suggestion effect period that is longer than one fluctuation effect period.

  In the first control example, the suggestion effect is executed for one specific effect, but the suggestion effect may be executed for a plurality of specific effects. In this case, it may be configured to set a precursor period in which a common precursor effect is executed and a countdown period in which a countdown effect is executed in correspondence with each of a plurality of specific effects. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while predicting how many suggestive effects have been executed for a specific effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

  In addition, a pseudo countdown effect (pseudo countdown effect) that does not target the specific effect may be executed while the precursor effect is being executed. By comprising in this way, it can be made difficult for a player to know at which timing the suggestion effect is executed for the specific effect executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102 to FIG. 104, an expectation suggestion effect that is an effect that is executed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is set to the normal state will be described. This expectation suggestion effect varies the expectation display effect that displays a plurality of expectation display modes capable of informing step by step of the jackpot winning expectation degree, and the display mode of the expectation display mode (winning win expectation degree Is an effect composed of an expectation increase effect for changing the display mode to a higher display mode.

  First, with reference to FIG. 102A, an expectation level display mode used for an expectation level suggestion effect in the first control example will be described. FIG. 102A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an expectation display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. 102A, in this control example, a plurality of expectation degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are displayed.

  The expectation level display mode Dk1 indicates the jackpot expectation level using the display during execution indicating information corresponding to the variation effect being performed. In FIG. 102 (a), “LV2” indicates the jackpot expectation level. Is displayed. As will be described in detail later, this expectation level display mode Dk1 is displayed 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuating effect, and is displayed on the display screen the earliest among the plurality of expected level display modes Dk1 to Dk3. The

  The expectation degree display mode Dk2 indicates the jackpot expectation degree using the character appearing during the variation effect, and “LV1” indicating the jackpot expectation degree is displayed in FIG. The expectation degree display mode Dk2 will be described later in detail, but is displayed 24 seconds after the start of the variation effect.

  The expectation degree display mode Dk3 indicates the jackpot expectation degree using a dialogue display indicating the contents of the fluctuation effect and the progress information. In FIG. 102A, “LV2” indicating the jackpot expectation degree is displayed. Has been. The expectation degree display mode Dk3 will be described in detail later, but is displayed 36 seconds after the change effect is started.

  In FIG. 102 (a), each expectation degree display mode is shown by LV display step by step, but any mode that can notify the jackpot expectation stepwise may be used. For example, it corresponds to the jackpot expectation degree. It is also possible to use a configuration in which the color of each display mode, the speed of the dynamic effect, the output volume and the amount of light are varied stepwise. Moreover, you may use the structure which changes the production | presentation aspect which shows a growth process or a transformation process in steps toward a final aspect.

  Moreover, about the display during execution displayed on the expectation degree display mode Dk1, for example, it is configured to continuously display the display mode of the reserved symbol display displayed in the first display area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. Also good. Thereby, when the effect (holding symbol advance notice effect) which changes the display mode of the reserved symbol is performed during the display of the reserved symbol, the display mode of the changed reserved symbol is continuously used as the display during execution. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the relationship between the variation display being executed and the reserved symbol display.

  When the expectation level suggestion effect is executed, in addition to the expectation level display effect in which the expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 shown in FIG. 102 (a) are displayed, the display mode of the expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 is variable (increased) The expectation increase (addition) effect is executed (see FIG. 102B).

  As shown in FIG. 102 (b), when the expectation increase (addition) effect is executed, first, a display having selection areas Dk4a to Dk4c in which different increase (addition) values are displayed as the expectation setting effect. A mode (roulette) Dk4 is displayed in a rotated manner, and when the roulette Dk4 stops, an ascending (added) value displayed in the selection area designated by the arrow Dk5 is set.

  This increase (addition) value indicates a variable amount for changing the display mode of each expectation level display mode displayed during the expected level suggestion effect, and when “1UP” is set as the increase (addition) value Indicates that for any one of the expectation level display modes, an effect that the jackpot expectation degree is changed to a display mode one step higher than the currently displayed display mode is executed. Show.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify only the variable amount of each expectation degree display mode displayed during the present expectation suggestion effect by executing the expectation increase (addition) effect. . Therefore, the player enjoys the expectation rise (addition) effect while expecting that the expectation degree of the expectation display form in which the display form corresponding to the high jackpot expectation degree is already displayed is further changed (increased). Can do.

  In this control example, each expectation level that changes (rises) while the current expectation increase (addition) effect is being executed as the increase (addition) value set in the expectation increase (addition) effect. A value obtained by adding the variable amount of the display mode is set. Thereby, for example, when “3UP” is set as the ascending (addition) value, the display mode of one expectation degree display mode is variable by three levels, or the three expectation level display modes are each variable by one level. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to know what to do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the effect result of the expectation suggestion effect at an early stage and enhance the effect.

  next. With reference to FIG. 103 (a), description will be given of the contents of the effect when “3UP” is set as the rise (addition) value. FIG. 103A is a schematic diagram showing an example of changing (raising) the display mode of each expectation degree display mode using the set rise (addition) value.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 103 (a), “3UP” is set as the increase (addition), and each of the expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is It is variably displayed step by step. Specifically, the display mode of the expected level display mode Dk1 is changed from “LV2” to “LV3”, the display mode of the expected level display mode Dk2 is changed from “LV1” to “LV2”, and the expected level display mode Dk3. Is changed from “LV2” to “LV3”.

  In addition, in FIG. 103A described above, a pattern in which the display modes of all expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are simultaneously changed is illustrated, but the display modes of the expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are changed at different timings. It may be configured to be variable. In this case, an increase (addition) by subtracting a value corresponding to a variable amount obtained by changing the display form of any expectation display form from the rise (addition) value set in the expectation rise (addition) effect. ) The value is displayed on the display screen as a residual rise (addition). By configuring in this way, it is possible to specifically predict the production result based on the remaining increase (addition) value displayed on the display screen and the expectation display mode in which the display mode is not changed. The effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, an expectation increase (addition) effect may be executed so as to change the display mode a plurality of times at different timings with respect to the same expectation level display mode. By doing in this way, the production | presentation which is unexpected with respect to a player can be performed.

  Further, in this control example, each of the plurality of expectation degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 displayed at different timings in one variation effect is continuously displayed, so that the display as shown in FIG. Although it is configured to be displayed on the screen at the same time, it is not necessary to provide a period during which each of the expected degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 is displayed at the same time, and among the display timings of the plurality of expected degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 At least some display timings may be set simultaneously.

  Further, in the expectation rise (addition) effect, the player may be notified of the expectation display mode for which the rise (addition) value is set (see FIG. 103B). In this case, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), a comment “I will raise the boy's level” is displayed above the main display area Dm, which suggests the target degree of expectation display mode. By displaying this comment, the player can grasp what is the expectation display mode that is the target of the expectation suggestion effect this time, and can enjoy the game while predicting the progress of the future effect. It can be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the flow of the expectation level display effect executed in this control example will be described. FIG. 104 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the expectation level display effect. As shown in FIG. 104, in one variation pattern (super reach 60 seconds), expectation degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 that indicate the degree of expectation of winning a big hit are displayed in different timings. Specifically, the expectation degree display mode Dk1 (expected degree 1 display) is displayed 12 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and the expected degree display form Dk2 (expected degree 2 display) is displayed 24 seconds after the start of fluctuation. The mode Dk3 (expected degree 3 display) is displayed 36 seconds after the start of fluctuation.

  And the expectation rise effect (expectation degree addition display) which raises (adds) the display mode of each expectation degree display mode Dk1 to Dk3 is displayed at any timing of 5 seconds, 17 seconds or 29 seconds from the start of fluctuation. . Here, the expectation increasing effect (expanded expectation display) is configured so that the expectation display mode for which the expectation is increased differs depending on the display (execution) timing. It is configured such that an expectation display mode that is displayed after execution of a degree increase effect (expanded expectation display) is targeted.

  Specifically, when the expectation rise effect (expanded expectation display) is displayed 5 seconds after the start of the change, the expectation rises 17 seconds after the start of the change for all of the expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3. When an effect (expanded expectation display) is displayed, the expectation display modes Dk2 and Dk3 are targeted, and when an expectation increasing effect (expanded expectation display) is displayed 29 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the expectation An effect for only the display mode Dk3 is executed.

  By comprising in this way, the production content of the expectation rise production which is the same production aspect can be varied only by varying the display timing (execution timing). In addition, since the expectation increase effect is executed for a plurality of expectation level display modes, the player can determine how much the expectation level notified by the expectation level increase effect increases the expectation level of which expectation level display mode. The game can be performed while letting it expect.

  In this control example, as described above, the target of the expectation rise effect (expanded expectation display) is the expectation display mode in which the display timing is set later, but other configurations may be used. For example, the expectation level display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the expected level increase effect (expectation level addition display) is executed may be targeted. It is also possible to target a combination of. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to predict which display mode of the expected level display mode changes (whether the expected level increases) due to the expected level increase effect (expanded level display). The production effect can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, in order to enhance the effect of the expectation increase effect (expanded expectation display), the selection means that allows the player to select at least one of a plurality of expectation display modes, and the expectation selected by the selection means The target display means for determining whether the display mode is a target whose display mode is changed by the expectation increase effect (expanded display of expectation), and the expectation display mode selected by the selection means is the expectation increase effect ( Variable control means for changing the display mode by an expectation increasing effect (expectation added display) when the target discriminating unit determines that the display mode is to be changed by the expectation level display) Also good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a player-participation-type effect, and it is possible to actively participate in the game.

  In this case, for example, the suggestion notification that suggests the expectation level display mode that is the target of the expectation level increase effect (expectation level display) is displayed in a period before the period in which the player selects the expectation level display mode by the selection means. It is preferable to provide suggestion notification means to be executed. Thereby, it is possible to limit the target range to be selected by the selection means for the player, and it is possible to increase the probability that the expectation increase effect (expanded expectation display) is executed.

  In addition, when the expectation level display mode selected by the selection unit is determined by the target determination unit that the display mode is not the target whose display mode is changed by the expected level increase effect (expectation level addition display), It is good to comprise the effect switching means which performs a different effect using the raise (additional) value set by the expectation rise effect (expected degree addition display). Thereby, the increase (addition) value already displayed on the display screen can be digested which gives the player a sense of incongruity.

  Examples of the different effects described above include, for example, an effect for informing the player of the contents of the winning information stored on hold in advance, and a value stored by the player to obtain a privilege (for example, a game level or experience) Value) may be advantageous for the player, or it may be disadvantageous for the player, such as an effect that changes the appearance mode so that the expectation level of the expectation display mode is lowered (expectation lowering effect). Directing is also acceptable.

  In addition, there is provided means configured to change the display mode of the effect switched by the effect switching means in correspondence with the increase (addition) value set in the expectation increase effect (expanded expectation display). Also good. Furthermore, when the player does not select the expectation level increasing mode by the selection means, the configuration may be such that the non-target expected level display mode is automatically selected, or the target expected level display mode. May be automatically selected. In addition, if the target expectation level display mode is automatically selected, it is configured such that an effect that is more advantageous to the player is performed by selecting the target level display mode not selected by the selection unit. Good. Thereby, the player can be made to actively select the expectation level display mode by the selection means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Electric Configuration in First Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 125. First, details of the main controller 110 provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 113) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, first, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first jackpot type (the jackpot symbol) used for selection Hit type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3 used to select a stop type of detachment in a special symbol, variation type counter CS1 used to select a variation pattern, and initial value setting of first random number counter C1 A first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for the above is used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 136). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for the winning for the first entrance 64 and each counter value for the winning for the second entrance 140. The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is provided. As described above, in the present control example, up to four reserved balls are provided for each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 140. For this reason, if the ball wins the first entrance 64 during a period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not being a big hit game, each counter value is special. When the ball is stored in the symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a ball wins any of the second entrances 140, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Thereafter, among the counter values stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the counter value that is the oldest in time is moved to the execution area, and the special symbol 1 or Various settings and control processes for variably displaying the special symbol 2 (dynamic display) are executed.

  On the other hand, during the period when the special symbol 1 cannot be drawn, such as during the special symbol fluctuation display or during the big hit game, the ball has entered the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140, and the winning When the number of reserved balls corresponding to the ball opening is less than the upper limit value (four in this control example), each counter value is acquired, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball It is stored in the storage area 203b. Further, when the corresponding reserved number is equal to or more than the upper limit value (4 in this control example), each counter value or the like is not acquired, and only the prize balls (three prize balls in this embodiment) are obtained. Is treated as an invalid ball to be paid out to the player.

  In this control example, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is four for each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 140, but is not limited thereto, and is less than 4 (for example, 3) or more than 4 (for example, 8). Further, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls may be different between the first entrance port 64 and the second entrance port 140, or a configuration may be adopted in which no upper limit value is provided. Furthermore, a reserved ball storage area may be provided only for one of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 140 so that only one of the reserve balls can be stored.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 238) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 238 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 238). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 238, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 238. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 136).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this control example), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 Are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 106A) provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number that is a big hit specified in the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state in the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 lottery are set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 106 (a), when the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state, the value of the first per-random-number counter C1 acquired in the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 lottery Is “7”, and if it is “7”, it is determined that it is a big hit. When the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 lottery is within the range of “5 to 9”. If it is within the range of “5 to 9”, it is determined that it is a big hit.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is special It becomes the thing at the time of the big hit of the design. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 238. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first random number counter C1 that is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random value “7” is the first random number table as described above. 202a. In this way, since the total number of random values is 239, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1, so the probability that a special symbol is jackpot will be “1/239”. On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are five values of the first per-random number counter C1 that is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value “5-9” is the first per-random number table as described above. 202a. Thus, since the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random numbers 239, the probability that a special symbol jackpot will be “1 / 47.8”.

  Returning to FIG. 113, the description will be continued. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 199. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, any one of jackpots A to K is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107). The jackpot type will be selected.

  Here, the details of the first hit type selection table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 107, in the first hit type selection table 202c, the selected jackpot type is defined in association with each value range of the first hit type counter C2. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 107, the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special symbol 1), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 19”. The jackpot A is defined in association with it. This “jackpot A” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a special symbol probability changing state regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Since the number of rounds is large and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a probability change state that is advantageous to the player, the “jackpot A” is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player. Of the 200 counter values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 20 random value values for which “big hit A” is selected. The ratio at which “is selected” is 10%.

  In addition, in the range where the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special symbol 1) and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “20 to 79”, “big hit B” is defined in association with it. . This “jackpot B” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a special symbol probability changing state regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. The number of rounds executed during the jackpot is smaller than the “jackpot A”, but since the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a probability variation state advantageous to the player, the “jackpot B” is a jackpot type advantageous to the player. It is. Of the 200 counter values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 60 random number values for which “big hit B” is selected. The ratio at which “is selected” is 30%.

  In the range where the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special symbol 1) and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 114”, “big hit C” is defined in association with it. This “big hit C” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the short-time state is set 100 times as the gaming state after the big hit regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit. Of the 200 counter values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 35 random values for which “big hit C” is selected. "Is selected is 17.5%.

  Further, in the range where the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special symbol 1) and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “115 to 164”, “big hit D” is defined in association with it. . This “jackpot D” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is five and the game state after the jackpot is set to a special symbol probability change state regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Of the 200 counter values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 50 random number values for which “big hit D” is selected. "Is selected is 25%.

  And, the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special symbol 1) and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “165 to 199”, “Big hit E” is defined in association with it. . This “jackpot E” is a normal state as a gaming state after the jackpot ends when the number of rounds is 5 and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a low probability state and not a short-time state (in a normal state) Is set, and when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than the normal state (high probability state or short-time state), the game state after the jackpot is a jackpot type in which the short-time state is set 100 times. Of the 200 counter values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 35 random values for which “big hit E” is selected. "Is selected is 17.5%.

  Next, when the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 2 (special symbol 2), as in the case of special symbol 2 described above, based on the contents defined in the first hit type selection table 202c, “big hit F ”To“ Big hit K ”are selected. Although a detailed description is omitted, the jackpot type (first hit type) selected when the corresponding symbol type is Special Figure 2 is the jackpot type selected when the corresponding symbol type is Special Figure 1 With respect to (first hit type), the ratio (selection ratio is 80%) is set so that the ratio of selecting a big hit (“big hit F”) with 15 rounds is high. As a result, when winning a jackpot with a special symbol, the jackpot that allows a player to acquire a large number of balls in a single jackpot will be higher when winning the jackpot with Special Figure 2 than with Special Figure 1, The degree of advantage of the player can be made different between the lottery shown in FIG. 1 and the lottery shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the corresponding symbol type is special figure 2, the big hit type (first hit type) which is disadvantageous than the big hit type (first hit type) selected when the corresponding symbol type is special figure 1 May be selected. Specifically, when “big hit I” to “big hit K” are selected, two rounds are smaller than five rounds, which is the smallest number of jackpot types selected in the case of FIG. Is set.

  In addition, when the jackpot type to which a short-time state is given, “jackpot H”, “jackpot J”, or “jackpot K” is selected as the gaming state after the jackpot ends, the corresponding symbol type is a special symbol. In the jackpot type (first hit type) selected in the case of 1, the number of times (100 times) less than the number of times set (when the time-short state is given as the gaming state after the jackpot is ended) 50 times and 25 times) are set.

  In this way, the contents (number of rounds) of the jackpot game to be executed and the case where the jackpot game is ended are set in the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery of FIG. 1 and in the case of the jackpot in the lottery of FIG. By changing the game state to be different, it is possible to make the game more complex and to suppress the player from always being given excessive privileges.

  Furthermore, since the game state set after the jackpot ends is different based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the game state that is set for the special symbol jackpot is conscious of the set game state. While playing games. Specifically, even in a gaming state in which a jackpot lottery is performed with the same probability (for example, a low probability state), the gaming state that is set after the jackpot ends in the short-time state and the normal state In contrast, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player in the time-short state is set. Thereby, it is possible to play a game while strongly expecting to win a jackpot of a special symbol during a specific period (short time).

  In this control example, the ratio of setting a high probability state in which the jackpot probability is improved after the jackpot ends is the same in the case where the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 and in the case where the jackpot is won in the special figure 2 The first hit type selection table 202c is defined as described above, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ratio at which the high probability state is set may be varied. Further, by selecting a jackpot type (first hit type) based on the first hit type selection table 202c and passing a sphere through a specific area during the jackpot, a probable change state (high probability state) is given after the jackpot ends In the gaming machine to be played, the passing of the ball to the specific area described above in the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 and the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the special figure 2 You may comprise so that ease of carrying out may differ. Thereby, the privilege given to the player can be made different depending on the special symbol won in the jackpot.

  Furthermore, as a method for differentiating the privilege given to the player depending on the special symbol won in the jackpot, for example, a plurality of variable winning devices 65 (see FIG. 2) that allow a ball to be won during the jackpot game are provided and executed. Depending on the jackpot, the variable winning device 65 that makes it possible to win a ball during the jackpot game may be different. In this case, the ease of winning the ball to the plurality of variable winning devices 65, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball wins, and the end condition (the number of balls to be entered and the time limit) for completing one release operation. It is good to make them different. Thereby, the privilege given to the player can be made different depending on the special symbol won in the jackpot.

  Returning to FIG. 113, the description will be continued. For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In this control example, the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach has occurred, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 Are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and the range of random values set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79 and the probability is low so as to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front / rear out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than front / rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines one fluctuation pattern from the set fluctuation pattern table. In this variation pattern, a variation time (dynamic display period) is set, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 136) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 108 and 109) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided inside.

  A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 108 and 109). In this variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to the gaming state are set, and a variation pattern table is set for each of the determination results. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and the right and left normal entrances (through gates) 66 and 67 are left and right. It is acquired when it is detected that it has passed (hereinafter referred to as a normal entrance (through gate) 67), and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is defined in the second random number table 202b (see FIG. 106 (b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is When the value matches the random number value specified in the second hit random number table 202b, it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit. Details of the second random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 106 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202b. In the random number table 202b per second symbol, there are two random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability (during the normal state of the normal symbol), and the range is “5 to 6”. Yes. Among the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second per-random number counter C4, since the total number of random number values that can be won is two, the probability of winning a normal symbol is “1/120”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. In FIG. 5, the normal symbol variation display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 6”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 140a associated with the second entrance 140 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time”.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability (during the short time state of the normal symbol), there are 200 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. Among the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second per-random number counter C4, the total number of random number values that can be won is 200, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is “1 / 1.2”. .

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. The normal symbol variation display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 140a associated with the second entrance 140 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the opening period of the electric accessory 140a is further shortened. Since “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times” is very long, the ball easily enters the second entrance 140. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 140a is opened only "one second x twice" when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The details will be described later with reference to a normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132), which will be described later. In this control example, the normal symbol state (low probability or high probability) at the time of normal symbol lottery (during hit determination). ), The change display time of the normal symbol is determined, and given when the normal symbol wins depending on the state (low probability or high probability) of the normal symbol at the timing when the fluctuation of the normal symbol stops The content of the privilege, that is, the opening operation content of the electric accessory 140a is determined.

  In other words, if the normal symbol starts to change during the high probability of the normal symbol (during the short-time state), a short variation time (for example, 3 seconds) is set as the normal symbol variation time. When the symbol state shifts to the low probability state (when the state shifts from the short-time state to the normal state), even if the normal symbol indicating the winning is stopped after the end of the short fluctuation, the electric accessory 140a is the normal symbol. The opening operation (for example, “0.2 seconds × 1 time”) is executed during the low probability (during the normal state).

  With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 in which the variation of the special symbol and the variation of the normal symbol are executed separately and independently, based on the gaming state that can be changed according to the lottery result of the special symbol and the number of lotteries. If the normal symbol variation time and the bonus content at the time of winning the winning symbol are determined, the normal symbol variation time is determined based on the gaming status at the time of the normal symbol lottery, Can be determined on the basis of the gaming state at the time of the normal symbol fluctuation stop (when the electric accessory 140a is opened), there is a situation where the operation content of the normal symbol differs from the set gaming state. Generation | occurrence | production can be suppressed.

  Note that the normal symbol variation control is not limited to the content of the control example described above, and other controls may naturally be used. For example, based on the gaming state at the time of normal symbol lottery, the variation time and The privilege content (the opening operation content of the electric accessory 140a) may be set. In addition, when the normal symbol lottery and when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped (when the electric accessory 140a is opened), only when the normal symbol is in a high probability state (time-short state) A privilege (for example, “1 second × 2 times”) that (the opening operation content of the electric accessory 140a) is advantageous to the player may be set, or when the normal symbol lottery and the normal symbol fluctuation stop Only when both (when the electric accessory 140a is opened) is in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the privilege at the time of winning the normal symbol is disadvantageous to the player (for example, “0.2 seconds X1 ") may be set.

  In addition, a plurality of setting methods described above may be switched and executed. For example, during a probability variation state that is a high probability state of a normal symbol, a combination that is most advantageous to the player (at the time of lottery of a normal symbol) And a combination that gives a bonus that is advantageous to the player except when the normal symbol fluctuation stop (when the electric accessory 140a is opened) is in the normal symbol low probability state (normal state). When the normal symbol is in the high probability state, the combination that is more disadvantageous to the player than in the probability variation state (when the normal symbol fluctuation is stopped (when the electric accessory 140a is opened)), the normal symbol has a high probability state. In such a case, a combination that gives a privilege advantageous to the player may be set. By comprising in this way, an advantage and disadvantage can be set in the high probability state of a normal symbol, and the interest of a game can be raised.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 136).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 105 (a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores, as part of the fixed value data, a first per random number table 202a, a second per random number table 202b, and a first per type selection table 202c. At least a variation pattern selection table 202d, a jackpot transition setting table 202e, and a state transition table 202f are stored.

  The first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 106A) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 is stored as described above. As described above, the second hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 106B) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the second hit random number counter C4 is stored. The first hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107) is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored. As described above, the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is set to each big hit. It is defined in association with the type. Since these tables have already been described in detail together with descriptions of various counters, the description thereof is omitted here.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which determination values of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation pattern display mode are defined for each display mode. Details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG.

  FIG. 108A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 108 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202d in the present first control example is a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 used for selecting a variation pattern in the case of winning the jackpot regardless of the gaming state. The out-of-game (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 used for selecting a variation pattern when the game state is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol) and winning is selected. And a game pattern (probability variation state or short-time state) other than the normal state, and a variation pattern table 202d3 for out-use (probability variation) used for selecting a variation pattern in the case of winning the out-of-game, and a special symbol lottery Special variation pattern test used to select the variation pattern when the special condition is satisfied regardless of the result And Bull 202d4, is constructed from.

  First, details of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 108 (b), the value range of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), various types of normal reach having a variation time of 30 seconds are defined in association with the range of the variation type counter CS1 being “0 to 50”, and “50 to 179”. Each range is defined in association with various types of super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in association with various types of special reach with a variation time of 90 seconds in the range of “180 to 198”. ing. In this way, when the lottery result of the special symbol is won, the variation pattern of 30 seconds, 60 seconds or 90 seconds is set as the variation pattern, and a command indicating this variation pattern is set. By transmitting to the sound lamp control device 113, a variation effect corresponding to the variation time is executed in the third symbol display device 81.

  As shown in FIG. 108 (b), the variation pattern (variation time) selected in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is 60 seconds (selection rate is about 55%), 30 seconds (selection rate is about 25%). , 90 seconds (selection ratio is about 20%) in order. This is related to the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern table that is referred to when the lottery result of the special symbol, which will be described later, is off, and the fluctuation time (variation pattern) that is selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. The probability of jackpot expectation when a specific variation time (variation pattern) is selected can be suggested by the proportion and the proportion of the variation time (variation pattern) selected when the special symbol lottery result is out of place. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not the jackpot is won by the selected variation time (variation pattern).

  In this control example, regardless of the winning jackpot type, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a jackpot type indicating a promising jackpot, and the normal jackpot type. It is good also as a structure using a different variation pattern table by the case where it is a jackpot type which shows. In this case, for example, a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is selected in the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating normal jackpot than the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating probability variation jackpot. It may be configured so as to be easily performed. As a result, the longer the variation time set in the variation pattern to be executed, the more the player can expect a game result that will be advantageous to the player. be able to.

  In addition, it is easier to select a variation pattern with a longer variation time in the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type showing the normal jackpot than the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type showing the probability variation jackpot. In this way, when a big win is won with a short variation time, an unexpected game result can be provided to the player, even if a short variation time is selected. , You can have expectations until the end.

  Next, the details of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 108 (c), the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 includes the range of values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 when the stop type is “completely out” and “reach common”, and the fluctuation pattern. Are defined in association with each other.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 108 (c), the stop type is “completely out”, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is within the range of “0 to 98” and the fluctuation time is 7 seconds. In the range of “99 to 198”, an extraordinary deviation of 10 seconds in the variation time is defined. When “completely off” is selected as the stop type, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state.

  The range of “149 to 197” is defined by associating various types of normal reach with a variation time of 30 seconds in the range of “0 to 149” with the stop type “reach common” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 being “0 to 149”. Are defined in association with various types of super reach having a variation time of 60 seconds, and various special reach types having a variation time of 90 seconds are defined in the range of “198”.

  Next, the details of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 will be described with reference to FIG. This deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 is referred to when the special symbol lottery result is out and the gaming state is the probability change state (short time state). In the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 when the stop type is “complete deviation” and “reach common” is the same as the above-described deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. A range and a variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108 (d), the stop type is “completely off”, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 190”, and the fluctuation time is very short of 3 seconds. Are defined in association with each other, and a short deviation with a variation time of 5 seconds is defined in association with the range of “191 to 198”.

  Further, various types of normal reach having a variation time of 30 seconds are defined in association with the range of the stop type “reach common” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 “0 to 190”, and the range of “191 to 198”. Are defined in association with various types of super reach having a variation time of 60 seconds. That is, it is defined that when the gaming state is a probable change state (short time state), the fluctuation time of 90 seconds is not selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is not satisfied. Therefore, when the game state is the probable change state (short time state) and the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of 90 seconds is selected, it is only when the special symbol jackpot is won. In this case, a bonus effect that congratulates the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 is executed. This suppresses the player from being dissatisfied when a special symbol is missed after a long-term variation pattern is executed during a probable change state (short time state), which is a game state advantageous to the player. Can do.

  As described above, when the probable change state (short-time state) is set as the gaming state and the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 is used, the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the deviating (normal) ) Since the variation time of the special symbol is set to be shorter than when the variation pattern table 202d2 is used, the special symbol lottery in the probability variation state (short time state) which is a game state advantageous to the player is performed. It can be done efficiently. Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the probability variation state (short time state) is set as the gaming state, the stop type is reached when the special symbol is removed, compared to the case where the normal state is set. The ratio of falling out is set to be low. Therefore, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (short-time state), the appearance frequency of missed reach decreases (because it is difficult to perform out-of-fluctuation fluctuation with a long variation time), so that the probable state of gaming state advantageous to the player ( The special symbol lottery during the short time state) can be performed more efficiently.

  Next, the details of the special variation pattern table 202d4 will be described with reference to FIG. This special variation pattern table 202d4 is a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern for the special figure variation four rotations when the gaming state after the jackpot is in the probabilistic state or the short-time state, It is referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation (see FIG. 89 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 109, in the special variation pattern table 202d4, the variation pattern is defined in association with the special symbol (special diagram) variation count after the big hit, the lottery result of the special symbol, and the value of the variation type counter CS1. ing. Specifically, in the first to third special symbol variations after the end of the jackpot, the variation time is very short (less than 0.5 seconds) regardless of the special symbol lottery result and the value of the variation type counter CS1. Short win) is defined.

  In the special symbol variation for the fourth time after the end of the jackpot, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the range, an extremely short deviation of 0.5 seconds is defined regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. When the lottery result is a win, an ultra short hit with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is defined in the range of the variation type counter CS1 “0 to 179”, and a variation time of 32 in the range of “180 to 198”. A special hit of 5 seconds is specified.

  By comprising in this way, when the game state after jackpot end is a probable change state or a time-short state, a change for four special symbols can be immediately executed. As a result, when a series of jackpot effects are executed using a plurality of jackpot games as in the case of the consecutive jackpot effects described above, the variation period of special symbols executed between jackpot games can be shortened. The effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, although details will be described later, in this control example, in the state in which the probability change state or the time saving state is set as the gaming state (in the extended play mode), the jackpot in which the probability change state or the time reduction state is set again after the big hit ends. In the case of winning, the variation pattern is selected using the special variation pattern table 202d4. By configuring in this way, it is possible to shorten the special symbol variation time for a predetermined number of times (4 times) after the jackpot is completed only in a state where the probability variation state (time reduction state) is continuously executed.

  Thus, for example, in a state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, when a jackpot (for example, jackpot A to jackpot D) in which a probable change state or a short time state is set after the jackpot ends, that is, the jackpot ends Later, since there is a reserved memory for the special symbol 1 and there is no reserved memory for the special symbol 2, in the state where the symbol variation of the special symbol 1 is likely to be executed, the variation pattern table 202d1 for jackpot or for deviating (probability variation) A variation pattern is set with reference to the variation pattern table 202d3.

  On the other hand, in the state in which the probability change state (short-time state) is set, when winning the jackpot (for example, jackpot F to jackpot K) in which the probability change state or the time-short state is set after the jackpot ends, that is, In a state where the special symbol 2 has a reserved storage and the symbol variation of the special symbol 2 is easily executed, the special variation pattern is set to a very short variation of 0.5 seconds.

  Further, as shown in the special fluctuation pattern table 202d4 in FIG. 109, in this control example, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special hit is a part (about 10%) of the winning combination in the fourth rotation after the big hit. (Variation time 32.5 seconds) is selected.

  By configuring in this way, a series of jackpot effects (continuous jackpot effects) continued from the previous jackpot game when the winning pattern is won in a state where the variation pattern is selected with reference to the special variation pattern table 202d4. Separately, it is possible to execute a special performance that congratulates the winning of the jackpot. Therefore, various jackpot effects can be provided to the player, and the effects can be enhanced.

  In this control example, the special variation pattern table 202d4 is defined so that the special hit variation (32.5 seconds) is selected in a part of the fourth variation after the big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. Without specially, the special hit fluctuation (32.5 seconds) may be selected even when the number of fluctuations after the jackpot is 1 to 3 times. Further, the special variation pattern table 202d4 is defined so that a variation pattern in which a variation time other than 0.5 seconds is set (for example, a variation time of 10 seconds) is selected when the special symbol lottery result is out of the range. Also good. By configuring in this way, when a variation of 0.5 seconds or more is executed until the number of variations after the end of the jackpot reaches four times, the player can be expected to win the jackpot Therefore, it is possible to have a game that takes into account the variation time of special symbols.

  Next, the details of the jackpot migration setting table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot transition setting table 202e is a table for defining the gaming state set after the jackpot is over, and the jackpot type (jackpot A to jackpot K) selected with reference to the first jackpot type selection table 202c. State transition statuses (state transition 1 to state transition 9) are defined in association with the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

  The jackpot transition setting table 202e is referred to (S1213: Yes) when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 134) described later (S1211: Yes), and the selected state transition status. Thus, the gaming state is set in accordance with the prescribed contents prescribed in the state transition table 202f described later.

  The jackpot migration setting table 202e will be described in detail. The jackpot type is any one of “bonanza A”, “jackpot B”, “jackpot D”, “jackpot F”, “jackpot G”, and “jackpot H”. If the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is “normal state (ST1)”, “state transition 1” is set as the state transition status, and “probability change state (high probability short time) (ST2)” or “ In the case of “short time state (low probability short time) (ST3)”, “state transition 2” is set as the state transition status.

  When “state transition 1” is set as the state transition status, the gaming state is set based on the contents specified in the state transition 1 table 202f1 of the state transition table 202f (see FIG. 111) described later. When “2” is set, the gaming state is set based on the contents defined in the state transition 2 table 202f2.

  Next, when the jackpot type is “Big Jack C” and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is “Normal State (ST1)”, “State Transition 3” is set as the state transition status, and “Probability Change State (High In the case of “probability short time” (ST2) ”or“ short time state (low probability short time) (ST3) ”,“ state transition 4 ”is set as the state transition status, and the jackpot type is“ jackpot E ” When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is “normal state (ST1)”, “state transition 5” is set as the state transition status, and “probability change state (with high probability short time) (ST2)” or “short time state” In the case of “(low probability time is short) (ST3)”, “state transition 4” is set as the state transition status.

  Furthermore, when the jackpot type is “Big Jack H” or “Big Jack J” and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is “Normal State (ST1)”, “State Transition 6” is set as the state transition status. In the case of “probability change state (with high probability short time) (ST2)” or “time short state (low probability short time) (ST3)”, “state transition 7” is set as the state transition status, and the jackpot type is “big hit K If the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is “normal state (ST1)”, “state transition 8” is set as the state transition status, and “probability change state (with high probability short time) (ST2)”, Alternatively, in the case of “short time state (low probability time short) (ST3)”, “state transition 9” is set as the state transition status.

  When any of “state transition 3” to “state transition 9” is set as the state transition status, among the state transition 3 table 202f3 to the state transition 9 table 202f9 of the state transition table 202f (see FIG. 111) described later The gaming state is set based on the contents defined in the corresponding table.

  Here, the contents of the state transition table 202f will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This state transition table 202f is a table used for transitioning state statuses such as a gaming state and a variation pattern table based on the number of variations of the special symbol, and is a prescribed number counter 203j stored in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. The status status is shifted based on the value of. This state transition table 202f is referred to when the specified number of times counter 203j is acquired (S1214) when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) (S1214). In the variation count subtraction process (see FIG. 129), when it is determined that the value of the specified count counter 203j is 0 (S409: Yes), it is referred to to set the next status (S410).

  FIG. 111A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the state transition table 202f in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 111A, the state transition table 202f in the first control example is a state transition status ("state transition 1" to "state transition 9") set by using the jackpot transition setting table 202e described above. ) Corresponding to the status transition table ("status transition 1 table 202f1" to "status transition 9 table 202f9").

  First, the details of the state transition 1 table 202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. 111 (b). The state transition 1 table 202f1 is a table that is referred to when “state transition 1” is set as the state transition status, and the state status “ST2 (probability change state) in which“ 0 ”is set as the value of the specified count counter 203j. ) ”. In other words, in a state where the state transition 1 table 202f1 is used (a state where “state transition 1” is set), the probability variation state is continuously set until the next jackpot is won.

  Next, the details of the state transition 2 table 202f2 will be described with reference to FIG. The state transition 2 table 202f2 is a table that is referred to when “state transition 2” is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 2 table 202f2, a status status “ST2a (probability variation state)” in which “4” is set as the value of the specified count counter 203j and a status status in which “0” is set as the value of the specified count counter 203j “ST2 (probability change state)” is defined. That is, after the jackpot is ended, “ST2a” is set as the status status until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes “0”, and thereafter “ST2” is set as the status status.

  Here, when “ST2a” is set as the status status, the special variation pattern table 202d4 in the variation pattern selection table 202d is set to be used when the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected. With this configuration, a rule for selecting a variation pattern can be set in advance using the special variation pattern table 202d4 only for a specific period in a state where the same gaming state (probability variation state) is continuously set. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the main controller 110.

  FIG. 111 (d) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 3 table 202f3. The state transition 3 table 202f3 is a table that is referred to when “state transition 3” is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 3 table 202f3, the status status “ST3 (short-time state)” in which “100” is set as the value of the specified count counter 203j and the status status in which “0” is set as the value of the specified count counter 203j “ST1 (normal state)” is defined. In other words, after the jackpot is ended, “ST3” is set as the status status until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes “0” (the time-saving state is set until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 in the time-saving state). Thereafter, “ST1 (normal state)” is set as the state status.

  FIG. 111 (e) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 4 table 202f4. The state transition 4 table 202f4 is a table referred to when “state transition 4” is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 4 table 202f4, a status status “ST3a (short-time state)” in which “4” is set as the value of the specified count counter 203j and a status status in which “96” is set as the value of the specified count counter 203j “ST3 (short-time state)” and a state status “ST1 (normal state)” in which “0” is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j are defined. That is, after the jackpot ends, “ST3a” is set as the status status until the value of the specified number of times counter 203j becomes “0” (until the special symbol fluctuates four times), and then the special symbol fluctuates 96 times. “ST3 (short time state)” is set as the status status, and thereafter “ST1 (normal status)” is set as the status status. As a result, when the time-short state (100 times) is set after the big hit, the variation pattern can be selected by referring to the special variation pattern table 202d4 only for the special symbol variation for the first four times.

  FIG. 111 (f) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 5 table 202f5. The state transition 5 table 202f5 is a table that is referred to when “state transition 5” is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 5 table 202f5, a state status “ST1 (normal state)” in which “0” is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j is defined. That is, the normal state is set without setting a gaming state (probability change state, time saving state) advantageous to the player after the jackpot.

  FIG. 112A is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 6 table 202f6. The state transition 6 table 202f6 is a table referred to when “state transition 6” is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 6 table 202f6, a status status “ST3 (short-time state)” in which “50” is set as the value of the specified count counter 203j and a status status in which “0” is set as the value of the specified count counter 203j “ST1 (normal state)” is defined. In other words, after the jackpot is ended, “ST3” is set as the status status until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes “0” (the time-saving state is set until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 50 in the time-saving state). Thereafter, “ST1 (normal state)” is set as the state status.

  FIG. 112B is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 7 table 202f7. The state transition 7 table 202f7 is a table referred to when “state transition 7” is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 7 table 202f7, a status status “ST3a (short-time state)” in which “4” is set as the value of the specified count counter 203j and a status status in which “46” is set as the value of the specified count counter 203j “ST3 (short-time state)” and a state status “ST1 (normal state)” in which “0” is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j are defined. That is, after the jackpot ends, “ST3a” is set as the status status until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes “0” (until the special symbol fluctuates four times), and then the special symbol fluctuates 46 times. “ST3 (short time state)” is set as the status status, and thereafter “ST1 (normal status)” is set as the status status. As a result, when the time-short state (50 times) is set after the jackpot is ended, only the special symbol variation for the first four times executed can be selected with reference to the special variation pattern table 202d4.

  FIG. 112 (c) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 8 table 202f8. The state transition 8 table 202f8 is a table referred to when “state transition 8” is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 8 table 202f8, the status status “ST3 (short-time state)” in which “25” is set as the value of the specified count counter 203j and the status status in which “0” is set as the value of the specified count counter 203j “ST1 (normal state)” is defined. In other words, after the jackpot is ended, “ST3” is set as the status status until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes “0” (the time reduction state is set until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 25 in the time reduction state). Thereafter, “ST1 (normal state)” is set as the state status.

  FIG. 112 (d) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 9 table 202f9. The state transition 9 table 202f9 is a table referred to when “state transition 9” is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 9 table 202f9, a status status “ST3a (short-time state)” in which “4” is set as the value of the specified count counter 203j and a status status in which “21” is set as the value of the specified count counter 203j “ST3 (short-time state)” and a state status “ST1 (normal state)” in which “0” is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j are defined. That is, after the jackpot ends, “ST3a” is set as the status status until the value of the specified number of times counter 203j becomes “0” (until the special symbol fluctuates four times), and then the special symbol fluctuates 21 times. “ST3 (short time state)” is set as the status status, and thereafter “ST1 (normal status)” is set as the status status. As a result, when the time reduction state (25 times) is set after the jackpot is ended, only the special symbol variation for the first four times executed can be selected with reference to the special variation pattern table 202d4.

  As described above, in the first control example, when the special symbol jackpot is won, based on the jackpot type of the jackpot won and the gaming state set at the time of winning the jackpot The game state set after the end of the jackpot and the variation pattern table used for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot can be made different. Thereby, the content of a game can be made more complicated and the interest of a game can be improved.

  In this control example, the period for selecting the variation pattern using the special variation pattern table 202d4 is set to the special symbol variation 1 to 4 rotations after the big hit, but other configurations may be used. The special variation pattern table 202d4 may be used at the 11th to 14th rotations after the big hit ends, instead of the special symbol change executed immediately after the big hit ends. In the case of such a configuration, the state transition table is set with the status status “ST3 (short time state)” in which “10” is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j and “4” as the value of the specified number counter 203j. State status “ST3a (short time state)”, “46” is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j, and “0” is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j. The “ST1 (normal state)” may be defined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to select the variation pattern of the 11th to 14th rotations after the big hit is over, using the special variation pattern table.

  In this way, by using the configuration of the state transition table described above, the state status set with the end of the jackpot as the starting point is set in association with the number of special symbol fluctuations (specified number) that the state status continues. Only by doing this, the game specifications can be easily set, and the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced. Even when the game specifications are changed, the contents of the state transition table may be changed, so that the game specifications can be easily changed.

  Further, in the first control example, when the normal state is set as the gaming state (when ST1 is set as the state status), “0” is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j. The same variation pattern table (the big hit variation pattern table 202d1 or the out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2) is configured to be referred to, but the variation pattern table that can be referred to when the gaming state is the normal state. A plurality may be provided, and different variation pattern tables may be referred to in correspondence with the value of the specified number counter 203j. In this case, for example, in a state where the time reduction state is set as the gaming state, the time reduction termination condition is satisfied (for example, the special symbol variation count reaches 50), and the gaming state shifts to the normal state (When the value of the specified number counter 203j is “0” in the state transition 6 table 202f6), the value of the specified number counter 203j is set to “10” in correspondence with the status status ST1.

  Then, in a state where the status status ST1 is set, if the value of the specified number counter 203j is larger than “0”, the variation pattern may be selected by referring to the special variation (normal) pattern table. With this configuration, immediately after the gaming state transitions from the short-time state to the normal state, it becomes possible to select a variation pattern that is different from usual, so that there is a gaming state advantageous to the player for the player. It can be thought that it is still continuing.

  In the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, the period of referring to the special variation pattern table is output from the variation effect effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the audio output device 226. The sound mode and the light emission mode output from the lamp display device 227 may be configured to be a special mode corresponding to the period. By comprising in this way, a special feeling can be provided with respect to a player more. In addition, even when a jackpot is won during a period in which the special variation pattern table is referenced, a special effect mode different from a normal jackpot effect may be executed. Thereby, it is possible to make the player feel that he / she has won the jackpot during a special period, and to enhance the effect.

  In the first control example, a state transition table is provided in correspondence with each state transition status, but a common state transition table may be used for a portion where the setting contents of the state transition table are common. With this configuration, the amount of data stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, in the first control example, a configuration is used in which the variation pattern table that is referred to by changing the status status based on the value of the specified number counter 203j is used. However, the status status is used for other elements. May be made variable. For example, in the state where the state transition 6 table 202f6 is being referred to, when the status status ST3 is set and the value of the specified number counter 203j is “40”, the lottery result of the special symbol is not out, but a small amount of benefits When winning a lottery result (so-called small hit) that can be given (a privilege to open the variable winning device 65 for a short period of time (for example, 3 seconds)), the status status is changed from ST3 to ST3b, and the value of the specified number counter 203j Is set to “4”, the status status ST3b is set, and the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is larger than “0” (in the case of “1” to “4”), the variation pattern table dedicated to after small hits Refer to You may make it switch the fluctuation pattern table to refer. By configuring in this way, it is possible to select a dedicated variation pattern only for a predetermined period (a period until the special symbol varies four times) after winning the small hit.

  In the state where the status status ST3b is set, when the value of the specified count counter 203j becomes “0”, the status status ST3 is set again, and the status status ST3b is set as the value of the specified count counter 203j. By setting it to be set to “35” that is subtracted by the value counted while is set, the period during which the short-time state is set as the gaming state (the period until the special symbol changes 50 times) Without change, a dedicated fluctuation pattern can be selected and executed for a predetermined period (a period until the special symbol fluctuates four times) based on the small winnings won during the short state at that time.

  Further, details will be described later with reference to FIG. 129. However, the configuration is such that the value of the specified number counter 203j is subtracted when a special symbol change is executed, but other configurations may be used. For example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 having the above-mentioned small hit as the special symbol lottery result, the value of the specified number counter 203j may be subtracted based on the number of wins for the small hit. In this way, by switching the variation pattern table to be referred to based on the lottery result of the special symbol (based on the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol has become the predetermined lottery result) instead of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, Since the variation pattern table that is referred to at a timing different from the transition of the number of variations of the special symbol in the state can be varied, it is possible to provide an unexpected game to the player.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 105 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. A special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol held ball number counter 203f, a probability variation flag 203g, an hour / hour counter 203h, a status status storage area 203i, a specified number counter 203j, and other memory areas 203z have.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a first per-random number counter C1 and a first per-type counter Each value of C2, stop type selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas ( Among the vacant areas of the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in main controller 110, each value of each counter C1-C3, CS1 stored in the reserved first area of special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is executed. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, which are shifted (moved) to the area and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is acquired according to the start winning, the original special symbol is displayed. Apart from the big win lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various types of data obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1). The prediction of information is described as prefetching a lottery result of a special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure type, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. It is stored in 223a.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area), like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, data (values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the start winning to the second entrance 140 is stored.

  The normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the right or left normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (hold first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while maintaining the winning order. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Shift processing is performed in which the winning data stored in the reserved area is packed into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a special symbol 1 variable display (in the third symbol display device 81) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display to be performed. The initial value N1 of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero. Every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the reserved ball number of the special symbol 1 increases, One is added to the maximum value 4 (see S504 in FIG. 130). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 127).

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e displays the variation display of the special symbol 1 performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to the second entrance 140 (the variation display performed on the third symbol display device 81). ) Is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) up to four times. The value N2 of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to an initial value of zero as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Each time the number of reserved balls of symbol 2 increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 (see S510 in FIG. 130). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 127).

  These special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (variable display holding number N1 in special symbol 1) and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (variable display holding number N2 in special symbol 2) are held balls. The voice lamp controller 113 is notified by a number command (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 127, and S505 and S511 in FIG. 130). The reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are changed. Command.

  The sound lamp controller 113 controls the main control by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 every time the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls in the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 held in the device 110. As a result, the number of balls on the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reserved in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of held balls in the fluctuation display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved symbols in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is the number of held balls (standby) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67. This is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes the normal entrance 67 and the number of held balls for fluctuation display increases. (See S804 in FIG. 133). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the normal symbol variation display is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 132).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the left or right normal entrance 67, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 133). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right side, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. (S803 in FIG. 133: No).

  The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (special symbol high probability state). If the probability variation flag 203g is on, the pachinko machine 10 is Indicates that the special symbol is in a probable state. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203g is in an off state, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). The probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF at the initial state, and is set to ON every time the “big hit A, B, D, F, G, I” end timing is reached (a big hit control process (see FIG. 137)). ) S1212). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203g is turned off every time the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off or the start of jackpot is set (S218 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127)).

  When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128) is executed by the MPU 201, the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is selected. In the special symbol variation start process, the probability variation flag 203g is referred to, and if the state is ON, the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is drawn based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203g is OFF, the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is drawn based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for the low probability (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 128).

  In this control example, while the probability variation state is set as the gaming state, the short time state of the normal symbol is also set. For this reason, when a lottery for normal symbols is performed, the probability variation flag 203g and the value of the hour / minute counter 203h are referred to and it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a time-short state. Specifically, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 1 or more, or if the probability change flag 203g is on (if it is in the time reduction state or the probability change state), it is determined that the symbol is in the time reduction state of the normal symbol, Based on the random number table for normal symbols for high probability, lottery of normal symbols is performed. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / medium counter 203h is 0 and the probability variation flag 203g is off (not in either the time shortening state or the probability variation state), based on the random symbol table for ordinary symbols for low probability, A lottery is performed (see S709 and S710 in FIG. 132).

  The hour / minute counter 203h is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203h is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the initial value of the short / medium counter 203h is set to 0, the main controller 110 wins a special symbol jackpot, and a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set at the end of the jackpot (S1212 in FIG. 137). ). Specifically, when the jackpot type is “big hit C”, “100” is set as the value of the hour / medium counter 203h at the end of the jackpot, and when “big hit H, J”, at the end of the jackpot “50” is set as the value of the hour / minute counter 203h, and in the case of “big hit K”, “25” is set as the value of the hour / minute counter 203h at the end of the big hit.

  When the jackpot type is “Big Jack E”, the value of the hour / medium counter 203h set at the end of the jackpot is set differently depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. If the gaming state is a short-time state (low-probability time-shortening) or a probabilistic change state (high-probability time-shortening), the value of the time-shortage counter 203h is set to “100”, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state ( If there is no low probability time, the value of the hour / medium counter 203h is not set.

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted every time the display of variation of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is completed until the value of the hour / middle counter 203h becomes 0 (S402 in FIG. 129). Even if the value of the hour / middle counter 203h is 1 or more, if the jackpot is won, the value is reset to 0 (S218 in FIG. 127).

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the hour and middle counter 203h is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, a lottery of a normal symbol is drawn based on a random number table for a normal symbol for a high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 and the probability variation flag 203g, which will be described later, is OFF, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. (See S709 and S710 in FIG. 132).

  The status status storage area 203i is a storage area for storing information on the current status status (ST) set by the status transition table 202f. In the status status storage area 203i, when the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) determines that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211: Yes), that is, the acquired status status is the jackpot end time. Stored, and then, in the fluctuation number subtraction process (see FIG. 129), when the value of the specified number counter 203j subtracted every time the special symbol fluctuates becomes 0 (S409: Yes), it is newly set. The status status is stored.

  The specified number of times counter 203j is a counter for measuring that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol has reached the specified number of times. In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137), the specified number counter 203j corresponds to the specified number of times acquired when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211: Yes), that is, at the end of the jackpot. The value is set (S1213), and then subtracted every time the special symbol fluctuates in the fluctuation number subtraction process (see FIG. 129) (S407). When the value of the specified number counter 203j changes from “1” to “0”, a new state status is set based on the contents specified in the corresponding state transition table 202f.

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 114 to 119, details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 114A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 114 (a), the ROM 222 has a variation pattern table 222a, a hold rank selection table 222b, a jackpot medium effect selection table 222c, an extra number selection table 222d, a continuous effect mode selection table 222e, and a continuation. It has at least a value main selection table 222f, a continuation value subselection table 222g, a final mode selection table 222h, an expectation degree selection table 222i, and an expectation degree effect selection table 222j.

  The variation pattern table 222a is referred to in order to select a detailed aspect of the variation effect (variation display) based on the rough variation effect (variation display) aspect notified by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110. It is a table. Based on the variation effect mode selected from the variation pattern table 222a, a variation pattern command for display is set (see S3812 in FIG. 147).

  The reserved rank selection table 222b is a table for selecting the reserved rank based on the reserved status of the special symbol, and the effect of the big hit is determined based on the selected reserved rank. Details of the reserved rank selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (b).

  FIG. 115 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the reserved rank selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 115 (b), the reservation rank selection table 222b has the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 (the number of reserved balls of special symbol) and whether there is winning information indicating a big hit on the reserved ball of special symbol 2 The hold rank is defined in association with the determination result of whether or not. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the effect executed during the jackpot based on the variation result (lottery result) of the special symbol (special symbol 2) executed after the end of the jackpot.

  Here, in the present control example, when both the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 and the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 exist, a process of preferentially digesting the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is executed (see FIG. 127). It is structured as follows. That is, the timing at which the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 is digested is indefinite.

  Therefore, in the present control example, based on the winning information included in the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 that fluctuates preferentially after the end of the jackpot (the holding ball in which the change order after the end of the jackpot is fixed) and the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 The holding rank is selected, and the jackpot effect based on the variation result (lottery result) of the special symbol executed after the jackpot is completed can be executed.

  In addition, in the case where both the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 and the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 exist, the reserved balls in the order in which they are reserved (the order of entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 140). If it is a pachinko machine 10 that uses a structure that digests (so-called winning order digestion), not the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2, but the number of all reserved balls, or a predetermined number of balls (for example, four) in the order of digestion What is necessary is just to comprise so that a pending | holding rank may be selected as object. Thereby, it is possible to execute a jackpot effect based on a variation result (lottery result) of a special symbol executed after the jackpot ends.

  Referring to FIG. 115 (b), the contents of the reserved rank selection table 222b will be described in detail. The number of reserved balls of the special symbol (special symbol 2) is “1 to 3”, and the win is indicated in that. When the winning information is “present”, the holding rank “3” is selected, and when the winning information indicating the winning is “not”, the holding rank “2” is selected.

  Also, if the number of holds for the special symbol (special symbol 2) is “4” and the winning information indicating the winning is “present”, the holding rank “4” is selected, and there is no winning information indicating the winning. ", The hold rank" 1 "is selected. When the number of holds for the special symbol (special symbol 2) is “0”, the hold rank “1” is selected without using the hold rank selection table 222b.

  The reservation rank selected with reference to the reservation rank selection table 222b is referred to in the jackpot medium effect selection table 222c described later. Next, the jackpot medium effect selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. This jackpot effect selection table 222c is a table for selecting an effect to be executed during the jackpot, receives the opening command in the hit related command processing (see FIG. 142) (S3301: Yes), and receives the jackpot effect. Referenced when executing the setting process (see FIG. 143) (S3406).

  In the jackpot effect selection table 222c, a jackpot effect is defined in association with the hold rank selected in the hold rank selection table 222b and the first effect counter 223y1. Specifically, “normal win effect” is defined in the range where the hold rank is “1” and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is “0 to 99”. This “normal winning effect” is an effect that is completed during one jackpot game (see FIG. 83B), and an effect corresponding to the jackpot jackpot type to be executed is executed.

  In the range where the hold rank is “1” and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is “100 to 149”, “addition effect” is defined. As described above with reference to FIG. 83 (a), this “addition effect” is a partial display of the number of round games executed in one big win (for example, in the case of 15 rounds, This is an effect of displaying the number of remaining rounds (the number of undisplayed rounds) as the jackpot game progresses.

  When the “additional effect” is executed during the jackpot, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how many rounds the jackpot currently being executed is, and it is possible to watch the performance during the jackpot game. . Furthermore, in the first control example, the “additional effect” includes winning the next jackpot in the winning information (holding symbol) acquired at the end of the previous jackpot when a plurality of jackpots are won in a short period of time. In the case), the next jackpot round number is added to the previous jackpot round number so as to be executed across a plurality of jackpots.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how many times the jackpot has been won while the “additional effect” is being executed. Therefore, a game can be performed while enjoying the total number of rounds displayed by the “additional effect”.

  Furthermore, in the “addition effect” in this control example, the number of rounds executed in one big hit can be divided and displayed, and the number of rounds executed in a plurality of big hits can be added and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of jackpots that were won during the execution of one “additional effect” and the number of rounds that are executed for each jackpot. As a result, for example, when the number of rounds executed during a single jackpot is 15 rounds, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the probable change state is always set as the gaming state after the jackpot ends, the winner of 15 rounds of jackpot This makes it possible to play a game while predicting which game state will be set after the jackpot is over.

  In addition, when an effect that suggests a gaming state set after the jackpot is used as an effect executed during the jackpot, it is executed during a single jackpot before the result of the effect is displayed. By knowing the number of rounds to be played, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot is specified and the effect of production is reduced.

  Next, the “normal win effect” is defined in the range where the hold rank is “2” and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is “0 to 49”, and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is In the range of “50 to 149”, “addition effect” is defined. “Normal win effect” is defined in the range where the hold rank is “3” and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is “0 to 49”, and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is “50 to “Additional effects” is defined in the range of “99”, and “Consecutive effects” is defined in the range where the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is “100 to 149”.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 84, this “continuous winning effect” is an effect that informs the player that the first (first) jackpot game has been started (a first winning game) ( 84). As the “continuous hit effect” executed here, for example, a value obtained by adding the number of rounds of the first jackpot (for example, 15 rounds) and the number of rounds of the second jackpot (for example, 10 rounds) (for example, 25). Round) is performed at the time when one jackpot game is started (the first round of the first jackpot is started).

  By executing “Consecutive Winning Effects” in this way, it is possible to quickly notify the player that a plurality of jackpots have been won, and the jackpot game can be performed with peace of mind while giving the player a sense of superiority. Can be made.

  In the range where the hold rank is “4” and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is “0 to 49”, “ordinary effect for win” is defined, and in the range of “50 to 149”, “Consecutive performance” is defined.

  As described above, the present control example is configured to execute different effects during the jackpot (a jackpot effect) based on the selected hold rank and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223y1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the performance executed during the jackpot.

  Furthermore, since the timing for notifying the player that the next jackpot is included in the hold is varied depending on the selected jackpot effect, for example, at the timing when the previous jackpot game is ended, Compared to the case of notifying the presence or absence of an on-hold consecutive villa only at a specific timing, such as a pachinko machine that notifies the presence or absence of a reserved design to win a jackpot (presence or absence of a consecutive renso) The jackpot game can be executed while expecting the game, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  In addition, since the contents and ratio of the jackpot effect selected according to the holding rank are different, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations, and the second entrance during the jackpot game It is possible to execute an effect that can also take into account the pre-reading result of the sphere that won a prize 140, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Specifically, when the rank is “1”, that is, when the number of symbols on hold is the upper limit value when the jackpot is won and there is no winning information corresponding to the jackpot in the reserved symbols, Since the villa is not executed, it is specified that either the normal winning effect or the extra effect is selected, and the selection ratio is specified so that the normal winning effect is easily selected. In other words, if the reservation rank is “1” at the time of winning the jackpot, the “normal winning effect” that does not give the player an excessive expectation of the reservation in the reservation, or this time One of the “additional effects” that makes it difficult to understand how many rounds the jackpot is.

  If the reserve rank is “2”, that is, if the number of held symbols is not the upper limit at the time of winning the jackpot, and there is no winning information corresponding to the jackpot in the reserved symbols, the hold rank is different from “1”, There is a possibility of acquiring a new reserved symbol during the jackpot game. Therefore, in order to cope with the case where the reserved renso is confirmed during the jackpot game even if the reserved renso is not confirmed at the time of winning the jackpot, it is more effective than the case where the reservation rank is “1”. The ratio at which “production” is selected is set high. As a result, when a reserved symbol that wins a jackpot is acquired during the jackpot game, the player can be notified of this by the “addition effect”.

  If the reserve rank is “3”, that is, the number of symbols on hold is not the upper limit when the jackpot is won, and there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot in the reserved symbol, that is, the hold symbol is not the upper limit and is on hold When a jackpot game is executed with the villas established, in addition to the above-mentioned “normal winning effects” and “additional effects”, it is possible to quickly notify that the reserved villas have been confirmed. If the “ranking effect for consecutive” is selectable and the holding rank is “4”, that is, if the holding symbol is the upper limit and there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot in the holding symbol, It is stipulated that any one of “Production effect” and “Continuous hit effect” is selected.

  In other words, in the holding ranks “3” and “4” in which the holding renso has already been established, the holding rank “3” is a state in which a new holding ball (winning information) can be acquired during the jackpot game. Therefore, by making it possible to select the “additional effect”, it is possible to make the player think that the player has won the next jackpot based on the reserved ball (winning information) acquired during the jackpot game.

  On the other hand, in the case of the holding rank “4”, a new holding ball (winning information) cannot be obtained during the jackpot game, and the next jackpot is not won during the jackpot game. The “effect” is not selected and the “continuous win effect” is executed. By configuring in this way, when the number of held balls at the time of winning the jackpot is the upper limit, in other cases, that is, in the determination result of whether or not it is possible to acquire a new held ball during the jackpot game Based on this, it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect having a sense of incongruity with respect to the actual holding situation by making the choices of the effect executed during the jackpot differ.

  In this control example, it is stipulated that “ordinary winning effect” is selected regardless of which holding rank is selected, so that “normal winning effect” is executed. Even if it exists, the possibility of a reserving villa can be left. Therefore, it is possible to execute the jackpot game while expecting the player to hold the retirement in the reservation until the end.

  Next, the additional number selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. This additional number selection table 222d is a determined round number display mode Dm4 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 when “addition effect” is selected as an effect executed during the jackpot. It is a table for selecting the value (the number of extra rounds) to be added to (see FIG. 86 (a)).

  This extra number selection table 222d shows a case where a new round number command is received in the hit-related command processing (see FIG. 142) (S3304: Yes), and the extra effect flag 223h is set to ON ( It is referred to in the partial processing (see FIG. 144) during the extra effect executed (S3306: Yes) (S3506). The selected additional number is stored in an area for storing a value to be added to the determined round number display mode Dm4 in the display round number storage area 223g (S3506).

  Then, the value displayed in the running round number display mode Dm3 (the number of jackpot rounds currently being executed) and the value displayed in the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 (the number of rounds determined to be executed) When they are the same, the number of additions stored in the display round number storage area 223g is displayed in the round number display mode Dm10 (see FIG. 86 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 116 (a), this extra number selection table 222d includes the number of remaining big wins, the presence / absence of a winning prize (whether or not the reserved game is confirmed), the second effect counter 223y2 The number of extras is defined in association with. Specifically, when the value of the number of remaining rounds is “5”, “5” is selected as the additional number regardless of whether or not there is a winning prize and the value of the second effect counter 223y2.

  In this first control example, the number of all jackpot rounds (number of jackpot rounds in which the jackpot effect is executed) is set to a multiple of 5 (5 rounds, 10 rounds, 15 rounds), and the number of remaining rounds is 5 This is because in the case of a round, it is necessary to display the number of remaining rounds in the determined round number display mode Dm4 at this timing.

  When the value of the remaining round is “10, 15”, the winning prize is “Yes”, and the value of the second effect counter 223y2 is “0 to 49”, the additional number “5” is “50 to 99”. An additional number “10” is defined for the range, an additional number “15” is defined for the range of “100 to 149”, the value of the remaining round number is “10, 15”, the winning prize is “none”, and the second When the value of the effect counter 223y2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, the additional number “5”, the additional number “15” is in the range “50 to 99”, and the additional number “15” is in the range “100 to 149”. 10 "is defined.

  As described above, when the number of remaining rounds is the same (for example, “15”), it is defined that the ratio of the selected additional number differs depending on the presence / absence of a winning prize. This makes it possible for the player to predict the presence / absence of an on-hold consecutive resort based on the value added during the “additional effect”, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

  When the value of the remaining round is “20-”, the winning prize is “Yes”, and the value of the second effect counter 223y2 is “0-49”, the additional number “5” is within the range of “50-99” Is defined as an additional number “10”, and an additional number “15” is defined in the range of “100 to 149”. In the first control example, since the maximum value of the number of jackpot rounds executed in one jackpot game is set to “15 rounds”, the value of the number of remaining rounds is “20 to”, The winning prize is never "None". Therefore, when the value of the remaining round number is “20˜” and the winning prize is “None”, the additional number “−” is defined, and when selected, an error command is set. .

  Here, when an error command is set, that is, when the remaining number of rounds actually executed is different from the number of remaining rounds managed by the audio lamp control device 113, the effect for addition is continued. Since it is highly likely that an effect that gives the player a sense of incongruity will be executed, the execution of the extra effect is stopped and based on the information received from the main controller 110 for the currently executed jackpot It is preferable that the execution of the effect of displaying the number of rounds currently set for the jackpot and the number of currently executed rounds on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is started. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the big hit effect that gives the player a sense of incongruity is continuously executed.

  Next, the continuous effect mode selection table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous effect mode selection table 222e. This continuation effect mode selection table 222e is an effect mode (until the battle reach (final mode) is executed among the battle effects (see FIG. 90) executed in the probability change of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, and in a short time. It is a table for selecting the continuous effect mode for setting the effect mode of the pre-battle effect), and is referred to in the continuous effect setting process (S3806) of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) (S4005 in FIG. 149). ), The continuous effect mode selected in the process of S4005 is stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223m (S4006). Then, the effect mode of the effect before the battle is set based on the continuous effect mode stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223m.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (b), the continuous effect mode selection table 222e includes a value of a continuous effect setting counter 223q, which will be described later, and the presence / absence of a winning prize (whether or not the on-hold consecutive resort is confirmed). Different continuous effect modes are defined in association with the value of the third effect counter 223y3.

  Here, the continuation effect setting counter 223q is a counter for counting the number of times that the continuation effect is set in one probability change state or in a time-short state, This is used to determine that the production has been executed a plurality of times. The detailed contents of the continuation effect setting counter 223q will be described later with reference to FIG. 114 (b).

  The contents defined in the continuous effect mode selection table 222e will be described in detail when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is “1” and the hold information (winning information) is set to “Yes”. In the range where the value of the third effect counter 223y3 is “0 to 99”, the continuous effect mode “1” is specified, and in the range of “100 to 149”, the continuous effect mode “2” is specified. Yes.

  On the other hand, when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is “1” and the hold information (winning information) is “Yes”, the continuous effect mode “5” is set regardless of the value of the third effect counter 223y3. It is prescribed. The pattern corresponding to the continuous effect mode “5” is a case where the first rotation in which the battle effect is executed first after the end of the jackpot is won in the jackpot, in order to provide a special feeling to the player. In addition, a dedicated continuous production mode is set.

  Next, when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is “2 to 5” and the winning information (winning information) is “None”, the value of the third effect counter 223y3 is in the range of “0 to 99”. If the continuous production mode “2” is defined, the continuous production mode “3” is defined in the range of “100 to 149”, and the winning information (winning information) is “Yes”, the third production counter 223y3 The continuous effect mode “2” is defined in the range of “0 to 99”, and the continuous effect mode “1” is defined in the range of “100 to 149”.

  When the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is “6 or more” and the winning information (winning information) is “None”, the value of the third effect counter 223y3 is within the range of “0 to 99”. The mode “3” is defined, the continuous production mode “4” is defined in the range of “100 to 149”, and the value of the third production counter 223y3 is obtained when the holding information (winning information) is “Yes” In the range of “0 to 99”, the continuous effect mode “4” is defined, and in the range of “100 to 149”, the continuous effect mode “3” is defined.

  In this example of control, it is comprised so that the production aspect of the production before a battle may be set based on the continuous production mode selected with reference to the continuous production mode selection table 222e, for example, the production before a battle (refer FIG. 91). ), The display mode at the time of battle reach development, such as the type of the player's own character, the type and arrangement order of the opponent character displayed in a selectable manner, the type of the opponent character actually selected and the HP value, It is set based on the continuous effect mode in which an effect mode not related to the display mode at the time of battle reach development such as the type and color of the background displayed during the pre-battle effect and the attack pattern to the opponent character is selected.

  For example, when the continuous effect mode “5” is selected (that is, when the first battle effect is executed and there is a win in the hold), the player will be notified that a big win will be won soon. The production mode for doing is set. Specifically, a premier character that is set when there is winning information for winning a jackpot within the hold is set as a character of the opponent or the opponent, or a specific value as an initial value or an intermediate progress value of the opponent character (For example, “777” or “333”), or the same character is displayed as a combination of selectable opponent characters. By performing such a display, it is possible to suggest that the player wins a jackpot using a plurality of variable periods.

  Next, the contents of the continuous value main selection table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuation value main selection table 222f. Here, the continuation value in this control example will be described. In this control example, in a state where the game state is set to a game state advantageous to the player (probability change state or time-short state), a battle effect is executed as a continuous effect to indicate that the game state is continuing Is done.

  In this battle effect, a battle reach (final aspect) effect for indicating whether or not the advantageous gaming state is finished, and a pre-battle effect that is continuously executed for the period until the battle reach is executed. If the advantageous game state does not end as a result of the battle reach effect, the pre-battle effect is executed again.

  During the pre-battle effect, the third symbol display device 81 performs an effect of reducing the opponent's HP value (continuation value) as described above with reference to FIG. Based on the continuation value reduced during the pre-battle presentation, the battle reach presentation mode (the opponent's HP at the start of battle reach (continuation value)) is determined.

  In the first control example, the continuation value reduced during the pre-battle presentation is obtained by adding the value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f and the value selected by the continuation value sub-selection table 222g. It is configured to be calculated. In this way, by setting a continuation value to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by combining a plurality of values, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the variation of the continuation value is increased.

  Returning to FIG. 117 (a), the description will be continued. In the continuation value main selection table 222f, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the result of determining the number of remaining changes until the change of the special symbol won in the jackpot is executed and the current display is performed. The continuation value to be selected in association with the continuation value is defined.

  That is, in the continuation value main selection table 222f, it is defined that the continuation value is selected based on the lottery result of the special symbol. Thereby, when taking over the opponent's HP (continuation value) that is varied during the pre-battle presentation and executing the battle reach presentation, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Here, in order to enrich the variation of the continuous value increase / decrease display executed during the pre-battle presentation, if the content of the continuous value main selection table 222f is set more complicated, for example, in this control example, the The continuation value is managed in units of, but the continuation value is managed in a smaller unit (ten units), or the lottery results of special symbols are further subdivided, and each subdivided lottery result In the case where the continuation value is defined in association with each other, there is a problem that the processing load for selecting the continuation value increases. However, in order to enhance the effect of the pre-battle presentation, it is necessary to increase the variation of the continuous value increase / decrease display.

  Therefore, in this control example, when a continuation value is selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f, a continuation value main selection table 222g, which is a table independent of the continuation value main selection table 222f, is used. The continuation value selected by the selection table 222f is further variable. Thereby, the variation of the continuation value displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be increased.

  Although details will be described later, in the first control example, the continuation value is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the difference value of the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f. The production mode of the production (attack production) for reducing (HP value) is set. In the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f and the continuation value sub-selection table 222g is displayed as a continuation value after being reduced (after update). It is configured as follows.

  Then, the attack effect managed with the value (continuation value) selected with reference to the continuation value main selection table 222f, and the continuation value set with reference to the continuation value main selection table 222f and the continuation value sub-selection table 222g ( The range of values selected in the continuation value sub-selection table 222g is set so that the difference value of (HP value) does not differ.

  By configuring in this way, an effect mode of an effect (attack effect) that reduces the continuation value (HP value) in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f. Even if it is managed with only a rough continuation value, it is possible to perform the production without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  As an attack effect set based on the difference value of the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f, specifically, if the difference value is “0 to 200”, “weak attack” (FIG. 92). (See (a)), “201 to 400” is set to execute an effect corresponding to “medium attack” and “401 or more” is executed as “strong attack (see FIG. 92 (b))”. The

  Thereby, for example, even if the difference value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f is in the range of “medium attack” (for example, 300), the difference value of the displayed continuation value is “weak”. It becomes possible to prevent the range of the continuation value based on the special symbol lottery from being different from the range of the continuation value that is actually displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (a), the continuation value main selection table 222f includes a remaining change count up to the hit change and the continuation value selected last time (of the continuation values currently displayed, the continuation value main selection table 222f). The continuation value is defined in association with the value selected in (1). Specifically, if the value of the remaining fluctuation counter 222t is “3” and the last selected continuation value is “1000”, “800” is selected, and if “900”, “700” is selected. As such, a value with a difference value of “200” is selected. Similarly, if the last selected continuation value is “400” to “800”, then the value with the difference value “200” is selected. If the last selected continuation value is “300”, “200” is selected (difference value “100”), and if the last selected continuation value is “100” or “200”, the difference value is “100”. A value of “0” is selected.

  Next, when the value of the remaining fluctuation counter 222t is “2”, if the last selected continuation value is “300” to “700”, the value with the difference value “100” is selected respectively. When the selected continuation value is “100” or “200”, a value with a difference value of “0” is selected. When the value of the remaining fluctuation counter 222t is “1”, that is, when the next fluctuation is a hit fluctuation, when the last selected continuous value is “300” to “700”, the difference value is “200”. Is selected, and when the previously selected value is “200”, a value (“200”) with a difference value of “0” is selected, and when the previously selected value is “100” Then, the value “0” with the difference value “100” is selected.

  As described above, in this control example, based on the continuation value main selection table 222f, the approximate value (HP value) among the continuation values (HP values) displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 ( 100 unit) value is selected, and the effect mode of the attack effect is set based on the difference value, so the continuation value displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (HP value), that is, the value of the value to be referred to is set rather than setting the effect mode of the attack effect based on the continuation value (HP value) selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f and the continuation value sub-selection table 222g. The pattern can be reduced, and the processing load when setting the production can be reduced.

  Next, the contents of the first continuation value subselection table 222g1 and the second continuation value subselection table 222g2 used as the continuation value subselection table 222g will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 (b) and 117 (c). FIG. 117 (b) schematically shows the contents of the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1, and FIG. 117 (c) schematically shows the contents of the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2. FIG.

  As described above, the continuation value sub-selection table 222g is used to increase the variable pattern of the continuation value during the continuation effect, and is referred to after the continuation value is selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f. It is a table. In this control example, the continuation value displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is obtained by adding the value selected in the continuation value sub-selection table 222g to the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f. (Continuation value for production) is set.

  In this control example, it is determined whether the continuation value selected with reference to the continuation value main selection table 222f is a predetermined value (for example, 200) or less, and a different continuation value sub-selection table 222g is selected based on the determination result. When the continuation value selected with reference to the continuation value main selection table 222f is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 200), the first continuation value secondary shown in FIG. 117 (b) is configured. The selection table 222g1 is referred to, and if it is less than a predetermined value (for example, 200), the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 shown in FIG. 117 (c) is referred to.

  In the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 shown in FIG. 117 (b), continuation values are defined in association with the value of the fourth effect counter 223y4. Specifically, the continuation value “0” is selected when the value of the fourth effect counter 223y4 is “0 to 39”, and the continuation value “−10” is selected within the range of “40 to 79”. In the range of “80 to 119”, the continuation value “−20” is selected, and in the range of “120 to 149”, the continuation value “+20” is selected.

  Thereby, the continuation value selected using the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 is added to the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f, and the type of continuation value on the display is increased. Can do. Specifically, referring to the continuous value main selection table 222f, when the continuous value is decreased (updated) from “1000” to “800”, the selected continuous value (“800”) is a predetermined value ( For example, since it is 200) or more, the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 is referred to. When the value “+20” is selected in the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1, “820” is displayed as the continuation value (HP value) in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 ( (See FIG. 92 (a)). On the other hand, when a value of “−20” is selected in the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1, “780” is displayed as the continuation value (HP value).

  Thus, the continuation displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is obtained by adding the value selected in the continuation value sub-selection table 222g to the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f. The variation of the value (HP value) can be increased.

  Here, when the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f becomes a predetermined value (for example, 200) or less, the continuation value on the display (refer to the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 described above) If the (HP value) is set, the value “+20” is selected in the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 while “0” is selected as the continuation value in the continuation value main selection table 222f. As an attack effect, there is a problem that the attack continuation value (HP value) on the display is “20”, while the attack effect is executed to set the HP value of the opponent character to “0”.

  Therefore, in this control example, it is determined whether the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 200). The sub selection table 222g2 is referred to. In the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2, a range of “−20” to “0” is defined as a value to be selected, as shown in FIG. 117 (c).

  In the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 shown in FIG. 117 (b), continuation values are defined in association with the value of the fourth effect counter 223y4. Specifically, the continuation value “0” is selected when the value of the fourth effect counter 223y4 is “0 to 39”, and the continuation value “−5” is selected within the range of “40 to 99”. In the range of “100 to 149”, the continuation value “−10” is selected.

  Here, the difference between the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 and the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 will be described. In the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1, as values that can be selected, a continuation value (for example, 500) selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is added (“+20”), and a subtraction value (“−”). 10 ”and“ −20 ”) are selectable. On the other hand, as a value that can be selected, the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 subtracts the continuation value (for example, 100) selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f (“−5”, “−10”). ) Only selected.

  With this configuration, when the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 200), the range of the displayed continuation value (HP value) is set to be wide. If the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is a predetermined value (for example, 200) or less, the displayed continuation value (HP value) is set within a range that does not give the player a sense of incongruity. Therefore, it is possible to increase the production variation within a range that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

  In addition to the contents of the first control example described above, the storage means for storing the value selected by the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1, and whether the value stored in the storage means is a positive value or a negative value is determined. Determining means for determining, based on the determination result of the determining means, a determining means for determining which of the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 and the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 is used to select a value; May be provided. Thereby, it can suppress that the value selected by the continuation value subselection table 222g is biased to the plus direction or the minus direction.

  In the first control example, as described above, a configuration is used in which the mode of attack effect is selected based on the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f, but other configurations may be used. For example, when the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is a predetermined value (for example, 200) or less, the continuation value (HP value) actually displayed on the display screen and the continuation value main selection table 222f. And a calculation means for calculating a difference value from the continuation value (HP value) set based on the continuation value sub-selection table 222g, and a selection for selecting an attack effect mode based on the difference value calculated by the calculation means It is good also as a structure using a means.

  In the first control example, the audio lamp control device 113 has the continuation value sub-selection table 222g. However, other configurations may be used. For example, the audio lamp control device 113 includes a continuation value main selection table. Only 222f may be provided and the continuation value sub-selection table 222g may be provided on the display control device 114 side, or the display control device 114 may be configured to perform a process of selecting an attack effect mode. By configuring in this way, the sound lamp control device 113 only needs to perform continuation value update management using the continuation value main selection table 222f, and the processing load can be further reduced.

  In the first control example, the continuation value using the continuation value main selection table 222f or the continuation value sub-selection table 222g, which is executed when there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot as the pre-read result of the reserved symbol, In addition to the setting, that is, when there is no winning information corresponding to the jackpot as the pre-read result of the reserved symbol, the process of varying the continuation value in an effect is executed. Although the detailed description of the continuation value variable process on the effect is omitted, it varies depending on the period during which the continuation effect (effect before the battle) is continuously executed and the type of the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. A later continuation value is selected.

  By configuring in this way, while the continuation effect (pre-battle effect) is being executed, the effect of reducing the continuation value can be executed frequently, and the player is prevented from getting bored with the content of the effect. can do.

  Moreover, in this 1st control example, since the continuation value of 4 bodies (AD) is displayed as an opponent candidate who can fight at the time of battle reach as a continuation effect (effect before battle) (refer FIG. 91 (a)), For example, even if the continuation value (HP) of a specific opponent is greatly reduced in a continuation effect (pre-battle effect), the continuation effect (pre-battle effect) is continued by selecting another opponent. And can be executed.

  By configuring in this way, only when the continuation effect (pre-battle effect) is executed for a long period of time (for example, when winning is not won during probability change), only the continuation value continues to decrease. It can suppress that the production aspect of a battle reach production becomes scarce.

  Further, in the first control example, in order to prevent the pre-battle presentation from continuing for a long period of time, even if the special symbol is not won, the predetermined condition (for example, the special symbol is 10 When the pre-battle presentation continues for more than the number of times and the special symbol lottery result is a 60-second deviation variation pattern), the battle reach is configured to be executed. As a result, if the winning is not won, the continuation effect (second time) is executed again, and the continuation value is initialized. As a result, when the continuation effect (pre-battle effect) is executed over a long period of time (for example, when the winning effect is not won during probability change), only the continuation value continues to decrease. It can suppress that the production aspect of a battle reach production becomes scarce.

  Next, the final mode selection table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. The final mode selection table 222h is a table for selecting the battle reach performance mode executed during the above-described continuous performance, and the determination result of the special symbol variation in which the battle reach is performed and the fifth effect. Different final modes are defined in association with the value of the counter 223y5.

  Specifically, if the special symbol win / fail determination result is a jackpot, and a gaming state (probability change state or time-short state) advantageous to the player is given after the jackpot ends, the value of the fifth effect counter 223y5 is The final mode “1” is defined in the range of “0 to 49”, the final mode “2” is defined in the range of “50 to 129”, and the final mode “3” is defined in the range of “130 to 149”.

  If the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is successful is a big hit, and the gaming state advantageous to the player is not given after the big hit, the value of the fifth effect counter 223y5 is in the range of “0 to 129” and the final mode “4”. However, if the final mode “5” is defined in the range of “130 to 149” and the result of determining whether the special symbol is right or wrong, the value of the fifth effect counter 223y5 is in the range of “0 to 129”. The final mode “7” is defined in the range of “130” to “149”.

  In addition, in the case of special figure fluctuation in which the determination result of the special symbol is not satisfied and the time-shortening end condition is satisfied, the final mode “4” is in the range of “0 to 129” of the fifth effect counter 223y5, The final mode “5” is defined in the range of “130 to 149”.

  Here, the production contents of each final mode selected using the final mode selection table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (b). FIG. 118 (b) is a diagram for explaining the production contents of each final mode selected using the final mode selection table 222h. In this control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96 as the final mode (battle reach) of the battle effect, an effect is performed in which either the main character or the opponent character attacks three times in total. The different attack patterns are selected according to the selected final mode.

  Specifically, in the final modes “1” to “3”, an attack pattern in which a victory battle in which the main character wins is executed is selected. In the final mode “1”, all three attack opportunities are selected. In the case of the final mode “2”, the main character attacks at the first and third attack opportunities, and the opponent character attacks at the second attack opportunity. The attack pattern to be performed is selected. In the case of the final mode “3”, an attack pattern (resurrection effect (see FIG. 96)) in which the main character revives and defeats the other character after the opponent character attacks in all three attack opportunities is selected. Is done.

  Although detailed description is omitted, the final mode selection table 222h is provided for each variation pattern (variation time) of the variation effect to be executed. For example, three times for a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds. The final modes (final modes “1” and “2”) that are completed by the above-described attack are defined so as to be easily selected, and in the variation pattern with the variation time of 90 seconds, the revival effect is easily defined. Here, in the revival effect executed with a variation pattern with a variation time of 90 seconds, the same effect data as the variation pattern with the variation time of 60 seconds (final mode “5”) is used as the effect data for the first three attacks. Is used. As a result, the production data is shared to reduce the data capacity, and the first half of the production in which the victory battle is executed (the first half of the final mode “3”) and the production in which the defeat battle is executed (the final mode “5”). )), It is possible to reliably prevent the player from grasping the effect result during the effect by executing the same effect.

  Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. In the final modes “4” and “5”, an attack pattern in which a defeat battle in which the main character loses is executed is selected. In this defeat battle, an effect that the HP gauge Dm21 indicating the continuation value (HP) of the hero as a result of battle reach is finally zero is executed. In the case of the final mode “4”, the attack pattern in which the main character attacks at the first attack opportunity and the opponent character attacks at the second and third attack opportunities is selected, and the final mode “5”. In this case, an attack pattern in which the opponent character attacks is selected in all three attack opportunities. In this manner, in the defeat battle attack pattern set in this control example, until the last one attack (third attack) is executed, other battles (win battle, draw battle described later) and Since the same effect is executed, it is possible to reliably suppress a situation in which the player grasps the effect result during the effect.

  In the final modes “6” and “7”, an attack pattern is selected in which a draw battle is executed in which neither the HP gauge Dm21 indicating the continuation value of the main character nor the HP gauge Dm22 indicating the continuation value of the opponent character is zero. When this draw battle is executed, the battle reach ends, and the next pre-battle effect is executed. In the case of the final mode “6”, an attack pattern in which the main character attacks at the first attack opportunity and the opponent character attacks at the second and third attack opportunities is selected, and the final mode “7”. In this case, an attack pattern in which the opponent character attacks is selected in all three attack opportunities. In this way, in the draw battle attack pattern set in this control example, the same effect as the other battle (defeat battle) is executed as the attack pattern, so not only the attack pattern against the player, It is possible to pay attention to the decrease in the HP gauge, and it is possible to reliably suppress the situation where the effect result is grasped in the middle of the effect.

  In this control example, it is configured so that the same attack pattern as the defeat battle is executed as the attack pattern executed during the draw battle, but it is the same as other battles (win battles). You may comprise so that the production in which an attack pattern is performed may be selected. As a result, when the third battle is executed, the current battle reach is either a winning battle or a draw battle depending on the attack pattern executed at each attack opportunity (the first to third attack opportunities) (that is, It is possible to make the player know that the battle is not defeated) and to see the production (battle reach) without worrying about the transition of the gaming state to the normal state.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 114 (b). FIG. 114 (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a change start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a state storage area 223e, a big hit information storage area 223f, and a display round number storage are stored. Area 223g, additional effect flag 223h, display extension flag 223i, variation counter 223j, elapsed time counter 223k, continuous effect mode storage area 223m, continuation value storage area 223n, continuation period counter 223p, continuation An effect setting counter 223q, a continuation effect flag 223r, a sign setting flag 223t, an effect counter group 223y, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a includes one execution area, four areas corresponding to the special symbol 1 (first area to fourth area), and four areas corresponding to the special symbol 2 (first area to fourth area). In each of these areas, winning information is stored. In the pachinko machine 10, when the start winning for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 is detected in the main controller 110, the first random number counter C1 acquired in accordance with the start winning is obtained. Various information obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning prize is drawn from each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 (whether, big hit type in case of big win, fluctuation pattern) ) Is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various information notified by the winning information command (whether or not, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, variation pattern) as winning information, and the winning information. Is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information includes four areas (the first area to the first entrance 64) corresponding to the type of entrance (the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140) that detected the entrance. Among the vacant areas of the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  In the first control example, the main control device 110 is based on various types of information (whether it is a big win, a big hit type in the case of a big win, a variation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning prize is drawn. Although a configuration in which a winning information command is set and notified to the audio lamp control device 113 is used, other configurations may be used.

  For example, when a start winning occurs, various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is added to various information predicted corresponding to the start winning. Is added to the setting means for setting the winning information command and the various information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223a when the winning information command is received and included in the received winning information command. It is good also as a structure which provides the discrimination | determination means which discriminate | determines whether various information (winning information) corresponds. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a is appropriately stored.

  Further, in the first control example, a configuration is used in which a winning information command is set and notified to the voice lamp control device 113 when a new start winning is generated, but the winning information command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. The notification timing is not limited to the above-described timing (timing at which the winning information command is set). For example, a storage means for temporarily storing the winning information command is provided, and in addition to the timing at which the start winning is received, the timing is periodically (For example, every 5 seconds), when the game condition is variable (for example, when the game state transitions from the short-time state to the normal state, or when the big hit game starts or ends), or when the special symbol starts to change (or A configuration may be used in which a winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 at the time of stopping. By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect (so-called pre-reading effect) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

  In this control example, setting of effects such as a jackpot effect, a battle effect, an expectation level display effect, etc. is executed as a pre-read effect based on each winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. In this way, by executing various effects (pre-read effects) based on each winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the player can be given to each held ball before the variable display is started. You can have a sense of expectation that will be a big hit. It is also possible to execute a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (a), the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b counts the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 for counting the reserved ball number of the special symbol 1, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number. And a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2, and the value of each counter according to the timing at which the number of held balls increases or decreases when a winning information command is received or when a variation pattern command is received. Update.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 is a variation display of the special symbol 1 performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and the special symbol 1 held in the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variation effect for each special symbol type. Similarly, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 is a variation display of the special symbol 2 performed in the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is held in the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the special symbol 2 up to four times for each special symbol type.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value cannot be obtained. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 are counted. Thus, the number of reserved balls is managed for each special symbol type.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display is added, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and the number of held balls is subtracted. In this case, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball is received from the reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command among the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 (see S3208 in FIG. 140). In this manner, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

  The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2. In order to notify the display controller 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 after storage, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114. .

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 of the voice lamp control device 113 or the special symbol 2 hold. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the ball counter 223b2 is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b2 The value is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved balls displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is also set to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223c is turned on when the variation pattern command of the special symbol 1 or the variation pattern command of the special symbol 2 transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S3202 in FIG. 140), and the third symbol display device It is turned off when the variable display is set in 81 (see S3802 in FIG. 147). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The variation pattern command for display set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S3204 in FIG. 140), and the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S3814 in FIG. 147). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The jackpot information storage area 223f is an area for storing information related to the jackpot to be executed, and information related to the jackpot executed this time (for example, the number of rounds, a game state that shifts after the jackpot ends, etc.) This is an area for storing when received from 110. In this control example, the aspect of the effect executed during the jackpot is set based on the information stored in the jackpot information storage area 223f.

  The display round number storage area 223g is an area for storing information on the number of rounds displayed during the jackpot. In the present control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 85 (a), when the effect for adding is executed during the jackpot, the currently executed round number display mode Dm3 indicating the number of currently executed rounds, The confirmed round number display mode Dm4 for partially confirming and displaying the set round number is based on the information related to the number of rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223g, and the main display area of the third symbol display device 81 It is configured to be displayed on Dm.

  This display round number storage area 223g stores 0 as an initial value, receives the round number command among the hit-related commands transmitted from the main control device 110 (S3304: Yes in FIG. 142), and adds an effect flag. Internally set with reference to the stored value (number of rounds) in the process of adding effect (see FIG. 143) executed when 223h is set to ON (S3306: Yes in FIG. 142) The difference between the number of rounds determined and the number of confirmed rounds is calculated, and the value of the number of confirmed rounds (number of rounds) newly determined based on the difference value is stored.

  The number of rounds stored here is added to the display so as to be displayed as the determined round number display mode Dm4 when the number of rounds is a predetermined number of rounds (number of rounds n) in the additional display process (see FIG. 145). It is used when setting a display command (see S3604 in FIG. 145). Then, when the effect for adding is finished, the stored value is initialized.

  As described above, in this control example, when a new round is started, the extra stage production process (see FIG. 144) is executed, the number of confirmed rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223g is updated, and a predetermined number When a round of (a multiple of 5 in this control example) is started, a display process for updating the display mode of the determined round number display mode Dm4 is executed. Therefore, since the number of confirmed rounds is constantly updated (every round), a condition for updating the display mode of the determined round number display mode Dm4 is added, or the display of the determined round number display mode Dm4 is performed based on the player's operation. By selecting whether or not to update the mode, it is possible to reliably cope with the case where the display timing of the number of confirmed rounds is changed.

  Furthermore, in this control example, when an additional winning that occurred during the jackpot is won by the jackpot, the number of rounds is specified in advance based on the winning information corresponding to the additional winning, and the preliminary specifying result is indicated. The display round number is set by the total round number including the round number information.

  The extra effect flag 223h is a flag for indicating that the extra effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the extra effect is selected as the big hit effect. This extra effect flag 223h is set to ON when the extra effect is read as the big hit effect in the big hit effect setting process (see FIG. 143) (see S3408 in FIG. 143), and the hit related command process (see FIG. 142). ), The setting state is determined (S3306 in FIG. 142). Then, in the after-hit effect setting process (see FIG. 146), when it is determined that there is no on-hold consecutive resort (S3703: No in FIG. 146), it is set to off.

  The display extension flag 223i is a flag for indicating a state in which a jackpot effect (a jackpot ending display) is extended and displayed even during a special symbol change period executed after the jackpot ends. It is set to ON when displaying the jackpot ending display). When the display extension flag 223i is turned on, that is, when a new jackpot is won while performing a jackpot effect (a jackpot ending display), information on the jackpot (acquired ball) The number and the number of rounds) are displayed in a display form continued from the information (the number of acquired balls and the number of rounds) related to the previous jackpot.

  This display extension flag 223i is used when the big hit effect executed this time is a normal hit effect in the big hit effect setting process (see FIG. 146), and the gaming state after the big hit ends is a probability change state or a short-time state ( 146 (S3709: Yes in FIG. 146) is set to ON (S3710 in FIG. 146). Then, when the special symbol changes four times after the display extension flag 223i is set to ON (S3904: Yes in FIG. 148), or when the elapsed time becomes 4 seconds (S5103: Yes in FIG. 154). Are set to OFF (S3905 in FIG. 148, S5104 in FIG. 154).

  As described above, in the present control example, the display extension flag 223i is set to ON and the special symbol variation count reaches the predetermined count (four times) or the predetermined time (four seconds) elapses. It is configured to be set to OFF when the above is established. This is the period when the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, and the effect of winning the jackpot is continuously executed, and if the jackpot is won during that period, the effect of winning the jackpot is displayed. This is because it is a period to continue (the previous jackpot effect is continuously executed).

  More specifically, if the condition for setting the display extension flag 223i to be off is set only to reach a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times), the special symbol is suspended at the end of the jackpot. The value of the number of balls (the sum of the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2) is less than the predetermined number of times (four times) described above, and the player interrupts the ball launch after the big hit If this happens, the game will be interrupted without reaching the predetermined number of times (4 times) after the jackpot, and there is a possibility that the stage of the jackpot will continue for a long time. is there. In addition, if a player stops playing in such a state, a big hit effect will be displayed despite the fact that no one is playing the game, so a new player There is a problem that he / she is hesitant to play a game with the pachinko machine 10 and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered.

  Therefore, in this control example, the elapsed time (4 seconds) is provided as a condition for setting the display extension flag 223i to be off in addition to the number of times the special symbol fluctuates. As a result, the period during which the effect of winning the jackpot is continuously displayed and the effect over the plurality of jackpots can be executed can be set as a limited period. This makes it possible for the player to play the game eagerly to win a jackpot in a limited period in which the display extension flag 223i is set to ON.

  The fluctuation number counter 223j is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol during the period when the display extension flag 223i is set to ON. The variation counter 223j executes the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) in a state where the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, and “5” when the extension management process (see FIG. 148) is performed. Is set (see S3902 in FIG. 148).

  The elapsed time counter 223k counts the elapsed time in the period when the display extension flag 223i is set to ON. This elapsed time counter 223k is set to “4000 (corresponding to 4 seconds)” as the counter value when the display extension flag 223i is set to ON in the big hit after effect setting process (see FIG. 146) (see FIG. 146). Each time the effect update process (S3112) of the main process (see FIG. 139) of the sound lamp controller 113 executed every millisecond is executed (S3112), the counter value is decremented by “1” (see FIG. 154). Of S5102).

  Then, in the effect update process (see FIG. 154), when the count value of the elapsed time counter 223k becomes “0”, the display extension flag 223i is set to OFF (see S5104 in FIG. 154). By configuring in this way, when the elapsed time after the end of the jackpot has passed a predetermined time (4 seconds), it is possible to finish the jackpot effect and execute a normal effect corresponding to each gaming state. In the limited time period, you can make the game eager to win the jackpot.

  In this control example, “4000” corresponding to 4 seconds is set as the counter value of the elapsed time counter 223k, but the time to be set is not limited to this. For example, even if it is 3 seconds Alternatively, each time the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, one of a plurality of times may be selected and the period may be set. Further, the value set as the counter value of the elapsed time counter 223k may be set longer than the sum of the fluctuation periods for the four rotations of the special symbol 2 executed after the end of the jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the change for the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 that is preferentially digested during the jackpot while the display extension flag 223i is set to ON.

  The continuous effect mode storage area 223m is a storage area for storing the continuous effect mode selected when the continuous effect is executed. This continuous effect mode storage area 223m is executed when it is determined in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) that the display extension flag 223i is set to OFF and the gaming state is the short-time state or the probability variation state. In the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149), the continuous effect mode selected by the continuous effect mode selection table 222e is stored, and the clear fall mode is selected by the final mode selection table (battle reach is executed). Until the event), an effect (pre-battle effect) corresponding to the continuous effect mode stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223m is executed.

  The continuation value storage area 223n is a storage area for storing a value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f among continuation values (HP values) that are increased or decreased during the continuation effect executed in this control example. Then, based on the continuation value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n, update (increase / decrease) processing of the continuation value (HP value) during the continuation effect is executed.

  In this control example, a continuation value (HP value) is roughly selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f, and a detailed value of the continuation value (HP value) is selected based on the continuation value sub-selection table 222g. With this configuration, the increase / decrease pattern of the continuation value displayed during the continuation effect is increased, but the continuation value (HP value) management in the sound lamp control device 113 is managed in the continuation value main selection table 222f. Since it is configured to execute only the continuation value selected based on the continuation value (HP value) displayed during the continuation effect, the type of continuation value (HP value) to be managed Can be reduced.

  The continuation period counter 223p is a counter for measuring a period during which the continuation effect flag 223r is set to ON, and is intended to prevent the final mode (battle reach) from being frequently executed in the continuation effect. , The counter used.

  The continuation period counter 223p is continued each time the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) is executed in a state where the continuation effect flag 223r is set to on, that is, every time a special symbol variation is performed. In the effect setting process (see FIG. 149), 1 is added (see S4009 in FIG. 149). In the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149), if it is determined that the counter value is less than “6” (S4003: No in FIG. 149), the final mode (battle reach) is not selected. It is composed. By configuring in this way, the selection of the final mode (battle reach) is suppressed until the value of the continuation counter is 6 or more, that is, until the pre-battle presentation is executed and the special symbol variation is executed 6 times. Is done.

  The continuation effect setting counter 223q is a counter for measuring the number of times that the battle effect is repeatedly set (the number of times the continuation effect flag 223r is set to ON) while the game state is set to the probabilistic state or the short time state. Yes, it is set so that different continuation effect modes are easily selected based on the value of the continuation effect setting counter 223q. Thereby, when a continuation effect is performed for a long time and a battle effect is repeatedly set, it can suppress that the battle effect of the same aspect is frequently performed. Further, by setting the continuous effect mode that is executed only when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is a specific value (for example, 1), it is possible to provide the player with a rare value effect.

  This continuous effect setting counter 223q is referred to when a new continuous effect mode is selected in the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149) (see S4005 in FIG. 149), and is added when the continuous effect mode is selected. (See S4007 in FIG. 149). Then, when the continuation effect ends (when the game state shifts to a normal state or when a big win is won), the counter value is cleared to zero.

  The continuation effect flag 223r is a flag for indicating that the continuation effect mode is selected during execution of the continuation effect (ie, the pre-battle effect is being executed), and when the continuation effect mode is selected. Set to on. While this continuous effect flag 223r is set to ON, the new pre-battle effect is executed in the same continuous effect mode without selecting a new continuous effect mode.

  This continuous effect flag 223r is initially set to off when the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149) is executed, and is set to on when the continuous effect mode is selected (see S4008 in FIG. 149). While it is set to ON, the process for selecting the continuous effect mode is skipped (S4004: Yes in FIG. 149). Then, when the final mode is selected based on the final mode selection table 222h (that is, when the battle reach is selected and the pre-battle effect is finished), it is set to OFF (see FIG. 149: S4015).

  The sign setting flag 223t is a flag used when a countdown effect is executed across a plurality of changes (see FIG. 101), and is set to ON when the change display is switched during the sign effect period. When the sign setting flag 223t is set to ON, when setting a new variation effect in the countdown effect setting process (see FIG. 152) executed in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147), Control is performed so that the precursor effect of the previous change is continuously executed from the start of the change.

  The sign setting flag 223t has a countdown effect having a specific effect C (see FIG. 101) as pre-read information in the winning information command process (see FIG. 141) (see S3232 and S3233 in FIG. 141), and the variation currently being executed. When it is determined that the remaining change period of display is 10 seconds or more (S3234: Yes in FIG. 141), the display is set to ON (see S3236 in FIG. 141).

  In the countdown effect setting process (see FIG. 152), it is referred to when setting the effect mode (see S4301 in FIG. 152), and it is determined in the process of S4301 that the precursor effect flag 233m is set to ON. In the multi-variable effect setting process (see FIG. 153) executed at the same time, the effect mode is set and then turned off (see S4405 in FIG. 153).

  The effect counter group 223y is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. This effect counter group 223y has at least a first effect counter 223y1 to a sixth effect counter 223y6, and any counter is an IC for generating random numbers electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113. A random value in the range of 0 to 198 acquired from (not shown) is stored. The operating clock (operating frequency) of the IC for generating random numbers is an IC that can be operated with an operating clock (for example, 1 MHz) that can be determined by updating to a different random value for at least each effect counter. Is adopted. The value of the effect counter group 223y is used when executing various determinations executed by the audio lamp control device 113, such as whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect and determining the notice type of the normal press effect.

  The other memory area 223z is provided with flags other than the above-described flags for setting data storage areas and states other than the above-described data, and temporarily stores other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. This is an area for memorizing. Specifically, for example, a power-off flag used for determining whether or not an instantaneous power failure has occurred is provided. This power-off flag is set to ON before the power-off command is received from the main controller 110 and the power-off process is executed. Thereafter, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, in the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 138), when the power-off flag is on (3008: Yes in FIG. 138), a certain time (100) after the power-off flag is set on. This is a case where the voice lamp control device 113 starts up before the elapse of milliseconds, that is, when there is an instantaneous power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not erased, and unnecessary information (or information that has become incomplete because only a part of the information has disappeared) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there is a case, the information of the work area in the RAM 223 is cleared (see S3009 in FIG. 138). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be normally operated.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory 234a is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads out the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, the NAND flash memory 234a reads out the instructions constituting the control program. It may take time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers a control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is read from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time from reading to setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is a control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 155) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 155) stored in the program storage area 233a. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 125), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 157 (b)), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory 234a generally facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and it is possible to omit the time required for the reading. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 140 is detected. This power-on image is an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 155).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 121, the power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 121 shows that the display control device 114 is turned on when the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to use the power-on main image shown in FIG. 121 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in FIG. 22, on the display screen of the main image when power is turned on, the fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the symbol “◯” at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” as shown in FIG. A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 121 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “out of special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. 121 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, the player started playing while the main image was displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the power was turned on, and the entrance was detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 121 (b) and 121 (c) are alternately displayed. The image controller 237 is instructed by the MPU 231 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. If an incoming ball is detected at the first entrance 64 or the second incoming ball 1640 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device. 81 can be displayed immediately.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thereby, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can check the power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81. Can do. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. However, it is possible to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation is stopped until the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. it can.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 122, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c of the back image and the back image will be described. FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the four types of back images and the range of back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 122B shows the rear surface A corresponding to the “sand beach stage” and the rear surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 122, the back image corresponding to each of the back surfaces A and B is prepared in the character ROM 234 as an image that is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the change of the back type is determined and the stage is changed to “sand beach stage” or “deep sea stage”, the MPU 231 first sets the position between the position a and the position a ′ of the corresponding back image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 122 (a), the rear surface A corresponding to the sand stage as the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage “Sand Beach Stage” is displayed. By making them all reside in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Thus, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 122 (b), the rear surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage” has only a part of the rear surface, that is, image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is the range from the position a to the position a ′ (or the range of FIGS. 122A and 122B). ) And image data corresponding to an image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or an image between FIGS. 122A and 122B) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the back of the resident video RAM 235 is determined when the stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from the left to the right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the back B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 120) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicate data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned nine types of main symbols (see FIG. 81 (b)) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. The As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, the third symbol display device has been started in spite of the fact that the first symbol display device 37 has started changing after the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 has been entered. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuating effect is not started immediately.

  In the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the sub symbol not numbered is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a sub-symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “youth” and “female” are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e. Thus, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but the character in the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading image data resident in the symbol area 235e in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed when the MPU 231 includes transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a combined value storage area 233k, and a sign effect flag 233m.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect and an opening effect are provided. A display data table corresponding to the hit effect, round effect, ending effect, and demo effect is prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  In this control example, the sound lamp control device 113 displays a display variation pattern command corresponding to a period of one special symbol variation (variation pattern (variation time) selected by the main control device 110). Although it is configured so as to set an effect mode corresponding to each command that is output together with the command and received by the display control device 114, other configurations may be used, for example, the audio lamp control device 113 The display control device 114 divides the display variation pattern command corresponding to one special symbol variation period (for example, 60 seconds) into a plurality of segments (for example, the first variation pattern (30 seconds) and the second variation pattern (30 seconds)). In this way, the game content (for example, to the player) that occurred during the period when the first half variation pattern is being executed is configured. That the operation with respect to the frame button 22, it is possible to set the display variation pattern command corresponding to the second half of the variation pattern based on the acquisition of a new ball entrance information).

  In addition, by using the above-described configuration, once a display variation pattern command corresponding to a period of one special symbol variation is output, an additional display variation pattern command is received when an additional display variation pattern command is received. There is no need to perform the process of rewriting the production contents in response to the pattern command, and the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced. As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 divides the display variation pattern command corresponding to one special symbol variation period (for example, 60 seconds) into a plurality of segments (for example, the first variation pattern (30 seconds) and the second half. When the variation pattern (30 seconds) is output to the display control device 114, the display stop type command may be output together with the first display variation pattern command.

  Further, in this control example, the display effect command for executing the continuous effect (see FIG. 96) continuously executed when the game state is an advantageous state advantageous to the player, or the continuous effect is ended. The voice lamp control device 113 includes a display final mode command for executing an effect (battle reach) for notifying whether or not, and various other commands for increasing the degree of expectation that the player wins a big hit. When various commands are received, effects corresponding to the various commands are displayed.

  Further, even if the production contents have already been set based on the reception of the predetermined display command, if the additional display command is received after that, the additional display command is supported. The contents are overwritten with the production contents. Thereby, based on the fact that the display variation pattern command is received, an effect for a period corresponding to a predetermined period (a special symbol variation period) is set (created) in advance, and an additional effect is added during that period. When a display command (for example, a display command for indicating operation of the player on the frame button 22 or acquisition of new entry information) is received, the display content of the effect can be changed smoothly.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special game state from now on and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is repeatedly opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the sub-designs without the numerals “1” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, is prepared with 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. When the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as youth images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (“morning stage”, “evening stage”, or “night stage”), or the back surface A to Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. In addition, the back surface type includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C (special back surfaces A to C, etc.). .

  The MPU 231 specifies the rear image corresponding to the stage determined by the lottery among the rear surfaces A to E as the drawing target when the rear surface type specifies that any of the rear surfaces A to C is displayed. Further, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this control example, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “0000H”, which is the head address of the display data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 75) contains the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 125) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each presentation. As described above, the transfer data table is resident among the sprite image data used in the presentation specified in the display data table. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 124 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 124).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 124, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 125) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 124, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined by the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is a main image executed by the MPU 231 after image data corresponding to the power-on image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. It is set to ON in the process (see FIG. 155) (see S6005 in FIG. 155). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process of the transfer setting process, an image other than the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is set to OFF (see S8005 in FIG. 170 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 157 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 157 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 157) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 157 (b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 158 to 166) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 157 to 169) are executed.

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7901 in FIG. 170A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 170 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 125), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 125) describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 125), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 167 (b) ) (See S6303)), pointer update processing (see S7305 in FIG. 169) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 125) is created, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol ) Describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this control example, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed (FIG. 157 (b Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7607 in FIG. 167). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 155) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S8113 in FIG. 171). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S8114 in FIG. 171). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S8202 in FIG. 172).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, the drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the process drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 157 (b)) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The combined value storage area 233k is an area for storing (storing) a history displayed (displayed as a combined value) as a continuous value (HP value) that is variably displayed in the above-described continuous effect (see FIG. 91). Based on the difference between the value (summed value) stored (stored) in this summed value storage area 233k and the newly received continuation value (HP value), the display content (for example, FIG. The display mode of the decrease value Dm12 and the HP display area Dm17 shown, and the effect mode of the attack effect) are determined and displayed.

  That is, in the present control example, the sound lamp control device 113 side is provided with means (total value storage area 233k) for storing the previously set sum value on the display control device 114 side without storing the sum value previously set. The display control device 114 calculates the difference between the previous total value and the current total value, and displays the display mode based on the calculation result. Thereby, the structure of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 can be simplified.

  In this control example, means (continuation value sub-selection table 222g and S4105 to S4107 in FIG. 150) for setting an effect value for increasing the display variation of the continuation value (HP value) on the sound lamp control device 113 side. The display control device 114 may be provided with means for setting the effect value. With this configuration, the configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 can be simplified, and the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be further reduced.

  The precursor effect flag 233m is a flag for determining whether or not the precursor effect is executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations. If this indication effect flag 233m is on, it means that the indication effect is executed across a plurality of special figure changes, and if it is off, the indication effect is executed across a plurality of special figure changes. It means that it is not done. The indication effect flag 233m is set to ON when a display additional indication command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S7505 in FIG. 166). The precursor effect flag 233m is referred to in the variation pattern process (see S6501 in FIG. 159), and after setting a display data table corresponding to the precursor effect executed across a plurality of special figure variations. Is set to OFF (see S6503 in FIG. 159). As a result, the sign effect can be executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations.

  In addition, although detailed description is omitted, in the case of executing a precursor effect across a plurality of special figure changes, the effect data of the precursor effect executed in the previous special figure change and the point in time when the effect data has been executed , And when setting an effect corresponding to the current special figure fluctuation (S6502 in FIG. 159), the effect data stored in the storage means described above is referred to the previous time. The warning effect executed in the special figure fluctuation is continuously displayed. As a result, it is possible to display the sign effect executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  Further, in this control example, the indication effect is set based on the fact that the display variation pattern command is received (that is, the indication effect is executed as a part of the variation pattern). Without being limited to this, when a display command indicating that the precursor effect is to be executed is received, regardless of the variable display contents, for the display that indicates the precursor effect during the period indicated by the command, or for the stop of the precursor effect You may comprise so that it may display until a command is received.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 126 to 137. The MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading processes of various winning switches are executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (238 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example). When 238, 199, 99, 239) are reached, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104) as a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process associated with winning a prize at the entrance 64 (start winning) is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 127 to 131.

  After the start winning process (S105) is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106). Gate passing processing is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In the special symbol variation process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. Otherwise (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 2) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

  When it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205), A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S206). The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1101) of a main process (see FIG. 136) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. They are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2, respectively.

  After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S210). The reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process proceeds to S213.

  As described above, in the present control example, when the process for starting the variation of the special symbol is executed, first, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter is acquired, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball is acquired. When the value (N2) of the number counter is 0, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is 0, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter is then acquired. . By comprising in this way, the fluctuation | variation of the special symbol 2 can be preferentially performed.

  The process for starting the variation of the special symbol is not limited to the configuration of the present control example. For example, the variation of the special symbol 1 may be executed with priority, or the special symbol 1 may be executed. Alternatively, the priority order may not be set for the special symbol 2, and for example, the special symbol may be changed according to the order in which the balls have entered the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140. In this case, a storage area for storing the order in which the balls enter the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 is provided, and the special symbol 1 is set according to the order (entry order) stored in the storage area. It may be configured to acquire the value of the reserved ball number counter or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter, or may be configured to use a common held ball number counter for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2. .

  Further, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be configured to change independently and simultaneously. In this case, if it is determined that one of the special symbols is a big hit, the other special symbol will stop changing (subtraction of the change time will stop until one big hit ends) It is preferable to configure such that the variation of the special symbol is discarded (even if the variation time has not elapsed, the lottery result is rewritten to be forcibly stopped). By configuring in this way, in a configuration in which a plurality of special symbols are changed at the same time, when one of them becomes advantageous to the player, the game can be performed without worrying about the change of the other special symbol. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 127, the description will be continued. In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If it has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S214 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start processing is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Is called. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first per-random number counter C1. The jackpot type (big hits A to K) is determined according to the value of the symbol 2) and the first hit type counter C2.

  In this control example, the winning jackpot type can be identified by changing the lighting pattern of the LED of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the jackpot type (big hits A to K). Specifically, a plurality of lighting patterns are configured by turning on or off each of a plurality of LEDs (for example, seven) provided in the first symbol display device 37. The lighting pattern of the first symbol display device 37 may be configured so that the lighting color is different. Further, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to notify the outside that the special symbol is fluctuating by blinking at least one of the plurality of LEDs, and is used in this blinking display. The lighting period (lighting period for indicating the stop state of the special symbol) displayed from when the special symbol stops until the next special symbol change is executed is longer than the LED lighting period. It is configured. Thereby, it can be made to grasp | ascertain whether it is the state which is changing the special symbol with respect to a player.

  After the process of S215 is completed, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), based on the jackpot type, an opening scenario for the specific winning opening 65a is set (S217). Thereafter, the probability variation flag 203g is reset to OFF, and the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is reset to 0 (S218), and the start of a big hit is set (S219). When the special symbol jackpot start is set by the processing of S219, when the jackpot control processing (S1104) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) is executed, the process branches to S1201: Yes and an opening command is set. Is done. As a result, the big hit effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S219 is completed, a stop command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of information related to the stop symbol is set (S220), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the current lottery result is out of the process in S216 (S216: No), the variation number subtraction process is executed (S221). The fluctuation number subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to the above-described S220 process, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and is an execution area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the changed effect.

  In the special symbol variation start process (S213), first, a first random number counter stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b). Each value of C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302). The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state. If the probability variation flag 203g is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol certain variation state. If the flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (low probability state).

  When the probability variation flag 203g is on (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol certain variation state, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and the first value for the high probability time are displayed. Based on the per random number table, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the ten random number values stored in the first random number table for high probability. As described above, five random numbers of “5-9” are set as special symbol jackpots, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value that hits them. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 share the same determination value, but depending on whether the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 The determination value that is a big hit may be different. By configuring in this way, it is configured so that the random number value determined to be out of place in the special symbol 1 is determined to be a hit in the special symbol 2, and the big hit bias can be suppressed.

  Also, in this control, the same winning symbol is set for the special symbol 1 lottery and the special symbol 2 lottery, but the special symbol 1 lottery and the special symbol 2 lottery The number of determination values that are jackpots may be varied. By configuring in this way, the probability of jackpots can be made different between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player wins the jackpot Can be expected.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the probability variation flag 203g is off (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability state) of the special symbol, so the first per-random number acquired in the process of S301. Based on the value of the counter C1 and the first random number table for low probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared with one random number value stored in the first per-random number table for low probability. Only “7” is set as the random number value that is a special symbol jackpot, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches “7”, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the process of S305, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). ), The display mode for the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202c, and two types of special symbol jackpots (big hits) A to K) is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special symbol 1) and the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”, the jackpot A (the number of rounds is In 15 rounds, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, it is determined that the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is a jackpot type that is set to a special symbol probability change state (see FIG. 107). If it is within the range, it is determined that the jackpot is B (a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a special symbol probability changing state regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot).

  Also, if the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “80 to 114”, the jackpot C (the number of rounds is 10 rounds and the gaming state after the jackpot ends regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot As a result, if it is within the range of “115 to 164”, the jackpot D (the number of rounds is 5 rounds, regardless of the gaming status at the time of winning the jackpot) It is determined that the gaming state after the end is the jackpot type set to the special symbol probability changing state.

  Furthermore, if the value of the obtained first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “165 to 199”, the big hit E (the number of rounds is five rounds, the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is a low probability state and not a short time state) In the case (in the normal state), the normal state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot ends, and after the jackpot ends if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than the normal state (high probability state or short time state) As the gaming state, it is determined that the short-time state is a jackpot type set 100 times (see FIG. 107).

  Also, when the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 2 (special symbol 2), as in the case of special symbol 1 described above, based on the contents defined in the first hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107). The jackpot F to jackpot K are determined.

  In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hits A to K). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jacket A to K) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is determined in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 108) as described above. When the process of S307 ends, the process proceeds to S310.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S305 that the special symbol is not a big hit (displacement) (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the special symbol reserved ball storage area (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b) based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area, the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / back out, or complete Set whether it is off.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, as in the processing of S308, normal reach, by comparing the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 with the specified content of the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 108). Determine the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as super reach and special reach. When the process of S309 ends, the process proceeds to S310.

  In the process of S310 executed after the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, a change pattern command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the change pattern determined in the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set ( S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1101 of the main processing (see FIG. 136). Is done. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127).

  Next, the fluctuation number subtraction process (S221) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing this variation subtraction process (S221). In the fluctuation number subtraction process (S221), the hour / minute counter 203h and the specified number counter 203j are subtracted based on the end of fluctuation of the special symbol.

  The time reduction / medium counter 203h is a counter for measuring the remaining number of times in which the time reduction state is set, and the time reduction number is set when the gaming state shifts to the time reduction state after the big hit. The specified number counter 203j is a counter for updating each scenario set in the state transition table 202f (see FIGS. 111 and 112), and is based on the contents of the state transition table set after the jackpot is ended. Is set.

  When the process of FIG. 129 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is larger than 0 (S401). When it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S401: Yes), that is, when the current hour is in the hour / hour state, the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S402), and the hour / hour counter 203h A remaining short time command indicating the value of is set (S403). The short remaining time command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1101 of the main processing (see FIG. 136). Is done. The voice lamp control device 113 extracts the current gaming state, that is, the short time remaining number of times in the short time state from the short time remaining time command received as a part of the state command, and stores it in the state storage area 223e.

  When the processing of S403 is completed, next, the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0, that is, the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is decremented by 1 by the processing of S402, so that the value of the hour / hour counter 203h becomes zero. (S404). In the process of S404, if it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S404: Yes), the gaming state is set to the normal state, the corresponding state command is set (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S404, when it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is not 0 (1 or more) (S404: No), the process of S405 is skipped and the process proceeds to S406. In the process of S401, when it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is not larger than 0 (0), the process (S402 to S405) relating to the hour / hour counter 203h is skipped and the process proceeds to S406. .

  In the process of S406, it is determined whether the value of the specified number counter 203j is greater than 0 (S406). In the process of S406, if it is determined that the value of the specified number counter 203j is greater than 0 (S406: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S407), and the remaining value indicating the value of the specified number counter 203j is left. A change count command is set (S408). The remaining variation number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1101 of the main process (see FIG. 136). The voice lamp control device 113 extracts the remaining variation count of each status status from the command of the remaining variation count received as part of the state command, that is, the remaining variation count until the gaming state and the variation pattern selection table to be referred to are switched. And stored in the state storage area 223e.

  When the process of S408 is completed, next, the value of the specified number counter 203j is 0, that is, the value of the specified number counter 203j is decremented by 1 by the process of S407, so that the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes 0. (S409). When it is determined that the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is 0 (S409: Yes), state transition is performed according to the state transition table 202f, and a corresponding state command is set (S410).

  In the process of S410, for example, the state transition 4 table 202f4 is set as the state transition table 202f, and the value “4” of the specified number counter 203j set for the state status ST3a is subtracted to “0”. When the status status shifts from ST3a to ST3, information indicating the status status ST3 and information indicating the newly set number of times “96” are set as status commands.

  When the processing of S410 is completed, the value of the specified number counter 203j is set according to the set state transition table 202f (S411), and this processing is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S406 that the value of the specified number counter 203j is not greater than 0 (0) (S406: No), the process (S407 to S411) related to the specified number counter 203j is skipped. This process ends.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 126), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140, When there is a start winning prize, the number of reserved balls of each special symbol is added, and the value of each corresponding counter is stored in each reserved ball storage area, and the value of the stored various counters is used in the special symbol. A pre-reading process for discriminating the lottery result in advance is executed.

  When the start winning process (S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) at the first entrance 64 (S501). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S502). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the first control example) (S503).

  In the process of S503, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S504). . Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S505).

  The reserved ball number command set here (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and a main process (see FIG. 136) described later executed by the MPU 201. In the external output process (S1101), the signal is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the number-of-holding-balls command in the process of S505, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-update that were updated in the above-described timer interrupt process in S103. Each value of the random number counter C4 is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S506). In the process of S506, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the ball has not won (entered) the first winning entrance (entrance entrance) 64 (S501: No), or in the process of S503, the special symbol 1 reserved ball When it is determined that the value (N1) of the number counter 203d is not less than 4 (4) (S503: No), the start winning process related to the special symbol 1 is skipped and the process proceeds to S507.

  Next, in each process of S507 to S512, the same process as that of S501 to S506 is executed for winning (winning) to the second entrance 140. Each process of S507 to S512 is different only in that a process of holding the holding ball corresponding to the winning of the second entrance 140 is executed, and other processes are different from the processes of S501 to S506. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted. Further, when each process of S507 to S512 is completed, a prefetch process is executed (S513), and this process is terminated.

  Next, referring to FIG. 131, the prefetching process (S513) which is one process in the start winning process (see FIG. 130) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S513). In this pre-reading process (S513), when there is a new winning (entrance) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140, the lottery result of the special symbol for the winning (entrance) Processing for setting a command for determining (pre-reading) and outputting the pre-determination (pre-reading) result to the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the command set here (winning (ball) information command), so that the effect on the winning (ball) information stored on the hold is based on the winning (ball) information. It can be executed at a time before the special symbol change is executed.

  In this prefetching process (FIG. 131, S513), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning (entering) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 (S601). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning (entry) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 (S601: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a new winning (entry) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 (S601: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserve ball is stored in the special symbol reserve ball storage area. Storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b) The value of the first random number counter C1, the value of the first type counter C2, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponding to the current winning A value is acquired (S602).

  Next, among the determination results stipulated in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 106 (a)), a hit determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is acquired (S603), Of the determination results defined in the first hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107), the hit type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is acquired (S604).

  When the process of S604 is completed, a stop type determination result corresponding to the value of the acquired stop type selection counter C3 is acquired from the determination results defined in the stop type table (S605), and the variation pattern selection table 202d is obtained. Among the determination results defined in (see FIG. 108), the variation type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired (S606).

  Then, the hit determination result information indicating the hit determination result, the hit type information indicating the hit type determination result, the stop type information indicating the stop type determination result, and the fluctuation indicating the variation type determination result acquired in the above-described processing of S603 to S606. A winning information command including type information is set (S607), and this process ends.

  The winning (entering) information acquired in the above-described processing of S602 is information for indicating in advance the lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed for a new winning (entering). If you need it. The lottery result may be selected in advance using various selection tables used for the special symbol lottery, or the same selection table as the above-described various selection tables may be provided for the prefetch processing.

  Also, in the process of S607, the game state information for indicating the game state when the special symbol change based on the winning (entry ball) information that is the target of the pre-reading process is executed is added to the winning (pending) information command. May be included. Here, the gaming state information will be described. In this control example, a normal state, a probability variation state, and a short-time state can be set as the gaming state, and a special symbol lottery result (a jackpot determination result, a jackpot type, and a variation pattern) according to each gaming state. ), And the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 set by the sound lamp control device 113 is different.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the gaming state is configured to be shifted based on the number of special symbol fluctuations. Specifically, when the short time state (100 times) is set as the gaming state, the gaming state is changed from the short time state to the normal state on the condition that the number of changes in the special symbol has reached 100 times in that state. Migrated.

  In this control example configured as described above, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery based on the winning (entry ball) to be prefetched is executed during the short time state, and the determination result is used as the game state information. The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by including it in the winning (successful) information command. As a result, a special symbol lottery (fluctuation) based on a ball that has won (entered) the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 while the game state is in the short-time state is changed to the normal state. Even when the game is executed after the transition, it is possible to set a winning (entering) information command corresponding to the gaming state when the lottery (variation) of special symbols is executed. Further, only a winning information command corresponding to a gaming state when a special symbol lottery (variation) corresponding to the winning (winning) information command is executed is set as a winning (ball) information command, and an audio lamp Since the data can be output to the control device 113, the volume of data output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  Note that the method for setting a winning (entering) information command by pre-reading processing is not limited to the content of this control example, and is set by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the content of the received winning (entering) information command. What is necessary is just a structure which can suppress the malfunction that the content of the effect (prefetching effect) performed contradicts the lottery (fluctuation) result of the special symbol changed by the transition of a game state.

  For example, when a winning (entering) information command is set in the look-ahead process of the main controller 110, a winning (entering) information command corresponding to a plurality of gaming states can be set, and the audio lamp controller 113 is set. The game state when the lottery (fluctuation) of the special symbol corresponding to the winning (entering) information command is executed is determined, and the pre-reading effect is set based on the winning (entering) information corresponding to the determination result. It may be configured to do. Thereby, in the prefetch process of the main controller 110, it is not necessary to perform a process of prefetching the gaming state, so that the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, for example, as the winning (ball) information command corresponding to the plurality of gaming states described above, as the jackpot determination result, the first determination result for winning the jackpot regardless of the gaming state, the gaming state is definitely changed Set either the second determination result that wins the jackpot only in the case of the state or the third determination result that is not won in the jackpot in any gaming state, and the sound lamp control device 113 side corresponds to the gaming state The jackpot determination result may be acquired, and information indicating the value of each counter acquired in the pre-reading process is output as a winning (winning) information command as it is, and the sound lamp control device 113 may be configured such that the lottery result can be determined based on the received information (information indicating the value of each counter acquired by the main control device 110 in the prefetching process).

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 140. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 140a.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S701). The normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit, while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning symbol, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second entrance 140 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S701: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S705).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the current state is the normal symbol time-short state (S708). Specifically, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203h in the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or when the probability variation flag 203g is on, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the hour / short state, and the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0, If the probability variation flag 203g is off, it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol (not the short-time state).

  If it is determined in the processing of S708 that the normal symbol is in a short time state (S708: Yes), the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S707 and the second per-random number table 202b for high probability. Based on the above, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S709). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202b for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see 202b in FIG. 106 (b)).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S708 that the normal symbol is not in the short time state (S708: No), the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S707 and the second per-second for low probability Based on the random number table 202b, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202b for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5-6”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 7-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see 202b in FIG. 106 (b)).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S709 or S710 is a normal symbol win (S711). If it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S711: Yes). The display mode for winning is set (S712). In the process of S712, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “O” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S714. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S711 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S711: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to S714.

  In the process of S714, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the short time state (S714). If the normal symbol is in the short time state (S714: Yes), the variation display variable time in the second symbol display device 83 is determined. Is set to 3 seconds (S715), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S714, when it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol (S714: No), the variation time of the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S716). Exit. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability (when the time is short), the time of the variable display is “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, which is much shorter than when the normal symbol has a low probability (when the normal state). Therefore, the lottery frequency of normal symbols increases. Therefore, since the frequency of winning in the normal symbol lottery is increased, the electric accessory 140a associated with the second entrance 140 is easily opened, so that the ball can easily enter the second entrance 140. It becomes a state.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, the game state of the normal symbol is configured so that the normal state is set when the special symbol is won during the jackpot of the special symbol. By comprising in this way, in the jackpot which is advantageous for a player, the game state of a normal symbol also becomes an advantageous state, and it can suppress giving an excessive privilege to a player. In addition, the variable winning device 65 is easy to open (a special symbol jackpot period) and the electric accessory 140a is easy to open (a normal symbol hitting period), which is the most advantageous for the player. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the open electric accessory 140a inhibits the winning of the ball to the device 65.

  The above-described content will be described in detail. When the electric accessory 140a is provided in the first flow path in which the ball flows down so that the variable winning device 65 can win, the electric accessory 140a is opened during the jackpot period. As a result, the ball that has flowed down the first flow path wins the electric accessory 140a, and there is a problem that the ball cannot be sufficiently won in the variable winning device 65 during the big hit period. Therefore, for example, the electric accessory 140a is disposed below the variable winning device 65 (downstream side), and the ball that has flowed down the first flow path during the jackpot period (during the period when the variable winning device 65 is open). However, in this case, there is a problem that the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 is limited.

  On the other hand, in this control example, the normal symbol is shifted to a low probability state (normal state) during the special symbol jackpot, so it becomes difficult for the electric accessory 140a to be released during the jackpot period, thus solving the above-described problem. can do.

  In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S717). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S715 or the processing of S716 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the process of S717, when it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (S717: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S717, when it is determined that the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S717: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S718). In the process of S718, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S712, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lights up). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S713, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S718, when the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the processing of S712 or S713.

  Next, the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process when the variation display currently being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started is the normal symbol win. Is discriminated (S719). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol win (S719: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in a short time state (S720), and it is determined that the current symbol is in a short time state (S720: Yes), “1 second × 2 times” is set as the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second entrance 140 (S722), and the process proceeds to S723. . On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S720 that the normal symbol is in the normal state (not in the short time state) (S720: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second entrance 140 Then, “0.2 second × 1 time” is set (S721), and the process proceeds to S723.

  In the process of S723, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 140a is set for the time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S721 or S722 (S723), and this process ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 140a is set by the process of S723, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed next, The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 140a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S721 or S722 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S719, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S719: No), the process of S720 to S723 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and there has been a sphere passing. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process (S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S801). Here, the passage of a ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the first control example) (S803).

  Even if the ball does not pass through the normal entrance 67 (S801: No), or the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is If it is not less than 4 (S803: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S805), and this process is terminated. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the current control and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable, a wait process (1 second in the first control example) is performed. Execute (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004). If it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if not stored (S1005: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S1012 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S812. As will be described later in the processing of S1114 in FIG. 136, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1010.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1007: Yes), the information on occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1010, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1101 to S1107 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 126) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) or the start winning process (see FIG. 130) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 130) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the first control example). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103). Then, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, the big hit effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the first control example, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in a timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second entrance 140 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 140a is set by the process of S723 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 140a is started. Note that the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 140a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S721 or the processing of S722 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1106). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 128), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In the first control example, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED If the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is lit. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned on. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128) or the process of S309 is completed, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 128). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the processing of S715 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 132) or the processing of S716, the second symbol display device 83 Start the variable display. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S718 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 132), the second symbol display device 83 executes the symbol display update processing. Is displayed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S712 or the processing of S713 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 132) ( (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main process execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the first control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process ( In S1109), if the predetermined time has already passed (S1109: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101, and the processes after S1101 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1109: No), within the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. The update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1110, S1111).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (238, 239 in the first control example), it is set to 0. clear. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1102 (S1111).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1108, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 134 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1112 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1112), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1113). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1108 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1107 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can start from S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at power-off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (see S1001 in FIG. 135). Since the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can start from S1101. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 136), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1201). Specifically, if the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) S219 is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1201, when a special symbol jackpot is started (S1201: Yes), an opening command is set (S1202), and this process ends.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot is not started in the processing of S1201 (S1201: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1203). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1203, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1203: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1203, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1203: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1204). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1204: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1205), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1206). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1204, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1204: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1207). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1207, when the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1207: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1208), and this processing ends. To do. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1207: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1209). Specifically, it is the start timing of the ending effect when the special gaming state (all round games set for jackpot (for example, 15 rounds)) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed. Is determined.

  In the processing of S1209, when it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1209: Yes), an ending command is set (S1210), and this processing is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S1209, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1209: No), it is then determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211), and it is not the end timing of the ending effect. If it is determined (S1211: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1211 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211: Yes), that is, when it is determined that it is the timing when all the big hit games are ended, based on the first hit type selection table 202c. Then, the contents of the probability variation flag 203g and the hour / middle counter 203h are set (S1212). Through the processing of S1212, the gaming state after the jackpot corresponding to the selected jackpot type (presence / absence of probability change state, presence / absence of time reduction state and setting of the number of time reductions) is set.

  Next, referring to the jackpot transition setting table 202e, a state transition destination is selected based on the jackpot type won this time and the gaming state at the time of winning (see FIG. 110), and the state transition corresponding to the selected state transition destination Based on the table 202f, the status status and the specified number of times counter 203j are acquired (S1213). For example, when “high probability and short time (probability change state)” is set as the gaming state and “big hit G” is won as the jackpot type, “state transition 2” is selected as the state transition destination, Of the transition table 202f (see FIG. 111A), the state transition 2 table 202f2 (see FIG. 111C) corresponding to “state transition 2” is referred to.

  Thereafter, a state designation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the gaming state (high probability state (probability variation state), low probability state (normal state)) of the special symbol after the jackpot is ended ( In step S1214, end of jackpot is set (S1215), and the process ends.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 to 154. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, initial setting associated with power-on is executed (S3001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S3118 (see FIG. 139) depends on whether the current start-up process is caused by an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S3002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 139, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (S3115: Yes in FIG. 139), it executes a power-off process in S3118. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S3118 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process in progress flag is off (S3002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after an instantaneous power failure, and S3118 in FIG. Started after completing the execution of the power-off process, or only when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) It is a thing. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S3006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S3003: Yes), the process proceeds to S3004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S3004. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S3118, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S3003: No), and the process proceeds to S3008.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3002, when it is determined that the power-off process flag is on (S3002: Yes), this startup process is performed after an instantaneous power failure and the power-off process of S3118. During the execution of the process, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S3004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S3004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S3006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S3005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S3007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S3008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S3118 in FIG. 139 is executed (see S3117 in FIG. 139). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S3118 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S3118 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared in order to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S3009), and the process proceeds to S3010. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the process of S3008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, through the processes of S3004 to S3006. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: No), S3009 which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3010.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S3009 is that when the process from S3004 to S3006 is reached via the process in S3006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S3004. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  In the process of S3010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3010). Next, interrupt permission is set (S3011), and time setting processing for setting reference time information (reference time) for determining the execution period (specific time zone) of the time effect is executed (S3012). , Transition to main processing.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous processing of S3101 was executed (S3101). If not (S3101: No), the processing proceeds to S3113 without performing the processing of S3102 to S3112. In S3101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S3102 to S3112 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S3113 and the variable display setting process of S3114 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S3113 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the process of S3114 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the processing of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S3103 to S3114 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3102). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S3108 described later are set (S3103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S3104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 so that it may alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S3105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S3105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on a hold lamp (not shown) according to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S3107). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting an effect. Here, the contents of the frame button input monitoring / production process (S3107) will be described.

  In this frame button input monitoring / production process (S3107), first, it is determined whether or not the effective period flag indicating that it is a period for effectively handling the pressing of the frame button 22 is set to ON. If the validity period flag is set to ON, it is next determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. If it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected, a display pressing command corresponding to the button pressing is set, and this process ends.

  Note that the above-described validity period flag is provided for each effect executed based on the pressing of the frame button 22. For example, if the background of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed based on the pressing of the frame button 22, the effective period flag (first effective period flag) is turned on to indicate that. If the operation effect that changes the variation effect mode of the third symbol based on the press of the frame button 22 is being executed (a period during which the press of the frame button 22 is effectively received in the operation effect) An effective period flag (second effective period flag) for indicating that is set to ON.

  Furthermore, in the above-mentioned plurality of validity period flags, priorities are set in advance corresponding to the privilege value given when the player presses the frame button 22, and the plurality of validity period flags are set to ON. If it is set, the processing based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is executed based on the effective period flag having a higher priority among the plurality of effective period flags set to ON.

  By configuring in this way, when the period during which the frame button 22 is effectively received overlaps, for example, the period in which the background can be varied (the period in which the first effective period flag is set to ON), and the operation effect Based on the pressing of the frame button 22 based on the second effective period flag set with a higher priority when the period in which is executed (the period in which the second effective period flag is set to ON) overlaps Since the process is executed, it is possible to execute an effect with a high privilege value for the player, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

  In addition, the effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is similarly configured such that an effect for indicating that the second effective period flag is set to ON is executed. Since only the effect corresponding to the effective period set with a high priority is executed, the player operates the operation timing while watching the effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The frame button 22 can be pressed without making a mistake. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

  In this control example, as a method of setting the priority order for each effective period flag, a configuration in which the priority order is set in advance for each effective period flag is used. However, other configurations may be used. In the button input monitoring / production process (S3107), it may be configured to determine whether the valid period flag is set to ON in order from the highest priority. Thereby, even if a plurality of valid period flags are set to ON at the same time, the process based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is executed based on the valid period flag having a high priority, so that the player With this, it is possible to execute an effect with a high privilege value and enhance the effect.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process (S3107) ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S3108), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S3109, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S3110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process of S3108 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S3109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S3110 ends, various counter update processes are executed (S3111). In the various counter update processing, processing for updating various counters used in the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. Specifically, the counter values of the first effect counter 223y1 to the sixth effect counter 223y6 included in the effect counter group 223y are updated so as not to be synchronized. The first effect counter 223y1 to the sixth effect counter 223y6 are counters used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The first effect counter 223y1 to the sixth effect counter 223y6 are composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 149, each time the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed (1 ms). Each time, the update process is executed so as to have different values.

  In the first control example, when a plurality of effects are selected based on the value of the effect counter, a plurality of effects counters having different update values are used. Therefore, when a plurality of effects are selected in the main process. Even so, although the same counter value is referred to and the selected effects are suppressed from being biased, for example, a plurality of effects modes selected in different processes within one main process When it is desired to synchronize, it may be configured to select an effect mode using the same effect counter.

  In the first control example, a plurality of counters (first effect counter 223y1 to sixth effect counter 223y6) having different update patterns are used. For example, a random value using an update value of one effect counter is used. May be calculated, and each effect may be selected using the calculated value. With this configuration, the number of counters included in the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In this case, for example, among the updated values of the production counter, the lower first digit value, the lower second digit value, and the lower first digit and lower value obtained by multiplying the first digit value by the second digit value. It may be calculated so that each value does not have regularity, such as a value obtained by adding the second digit value.

  When the process of S3111 ends, an effect update process (S3112) is executed next. This effect update process is a process of updating various effects set by the audio lamp control device 113 based on the elapsed period. In the effect update process (S3112), control is performed on an effect (for example, a display extension effect that is executed after the end of the jackpot) that is executed regardless of changes in the special symbol. Detailed description of this effect update process (S3112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S3113, a command determination process that performs a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed (S3113). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S3114). In the variation display setting process, based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect corresponding to the special symbol variation (a variation effect of the third symbol or other effects). Display variation pattern commands are generated and set. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S3114 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3115). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If it is determined in the processing of S3115 that the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S3115: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S3117), and the power interruption processing is executed. (S3118). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S3119), and then the process loops infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S3115 (S3115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3116: No), the process returns to S3101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3116: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process (S3113). This command determination process (S3113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 136) and is a process for executing control according to the type of command received from the main control device 110.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S3201). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S3201: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3202), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command ( S3203), the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to in order to determine the detailed display mode of the variation pattern in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) described later. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3201 that a variation pattern command has not been received (S3201: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3204). When the stop type command is received (S3204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3205), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S3206). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3204 that a stop type command has not been received (S3204: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3207). If it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (S3207: Yes), the reserved ball number counter of the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) corresponding to the received reserved ball number command is displayed. Then, the value included in the received number-of-holding-balls command is stored (S3208), and this process ends. Specifically, if the currently-held reserved ball number command is a reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 is determined from the received reserved ball number command. The value (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 hold ball counter 223b1 of the voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, if the currently received reserved ball number command is a reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 2, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 is determined from the received reserved ball number command (special The variable display hold count N2) for the symbol 2 is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball counter 223b2 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  If the value of either the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 is changed in the process of S3208, the updated counter value is notified to the display control device 114. A display hold ball number command is set. Since the actual number of reserved balls can be notified to the display control device 114 by this display reserved ball number command, in the hold display area Dn4 of the third symbol display device 81, an accurate number of reserved symbols is always displayed. Can be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3207, when it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S3207: No), it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3209). If it is determined that a winning information command has been received (S3209: Yes), a winning information command process is executed (S3210), and this process ends.

  Here, the winning information command processing (S3210) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information command process (S3210). This winning information command process (S3210) is a process executed when a winning information command is received from the main controller 110, and corresponds to the information included in the received winning information command in the winning information storage area 223a. Processing for storing in the area (the reserved storage area corresponding to the winning information command) is executed.

  Here, the information included in the winning information command is information about the winning ball, such as information on the determination result of special symbols, information on stop types, information on fluctuation patterns, but other information is included. For example, winning information relating to a ball that has already been won (a winning information command has been received in the past) may be included.

  When the winning information command processing (S3210) is executed, first, the received winning information command information (prefetch information) is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S3231). As described above, the winning information storage area 223a can store a maximum of four winning information commands for the special symbol 1 and a maximum of four winning information commands for the special symbol 2, for a total of eight winning information commands. The winning information command is stored in a designated storage area according to the order of receiving the winning information command.

  Next, it is determined whether there is variation type information (variation pattern information of reach or more) having a variation time of 60 seconds or more as information (prefetch information) included in the winning information command received this time (S3232). In the process of S3232, when it is determined that there is no change type information (change pattern information of reach or more) having a change time of 60 seconds or more (S3232: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is variation type information (variation pattern information of reach or more) having a variation time of 60 seconds or more (S3232: Yes), then a specific effect C (see FIG. 101), that is, predetermined from the start of variation. It is determined whether there is variation type information indicating a specific effect (for example, an effect for causing the player to operate the frame button 22) to be executed within a period (for example, within 5 seconds) (S3233).

  If it is determined that the specific effect C is present (S3233: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the currently displayed variation display is 10 seconds or longer (S3234). In the process of S3234, based on the time (elapsed time with respect to the set fluctuation time) managed by the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S3110) executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) of the sound lamp control device 113. The remaining variation time of the variation display is determined.

  In the process of S3234, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 10 seconds or more (S3234: Yes), it is a case where a period during which the precursor effect can be added to the fluctuation display during execution is secured. A precursor command is set (S3235), the precursor setting flag 223t is set to ON (S3236), and this process is terminated. By executing the above-described processing, it is possible to execute a precursor effect that straddles a plurality of variable displays as a suggested effect for the specific effect C executed in the subsequent variable display. Thereby, the specific effect (for example, the specific effect C (see FIG. 101) executed 5 seconds after the start of the change) executed in the early stage of the variable display, that is, the period for executing the suggestive effect with only one variable display. Since a suggestion effect can be executed using a plurality of variable displays even for a specific effect that is executed at a timing that cannot be ensured, the occurrence frequency of the suggestion effect can be increased, and a range in which the specific effect can be set It becomes possible to widen, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of effects related to the variable display.

  In the process of S3234, when it is determined that the remaining variation time is less than 10 seconds (S3234: No), that is, when it is not possible to secure a period during which the suggestive effect can be added to the variation display during execution, This process is terminated without changing the display mode of the variable display. Here, when it is not possible to secure a period during which the suggestive effect can be added to the currently displayed variation display (S3234: No), the variation corresponding to the winning information determined to have the countdown effect in the current winning information command processing (S3210). When setting the display, the specific effect is set within a range in which the suggestive effect can be executed with only one variable display (for example, a range in which 15 seconds or more have elapsed from the start of the change), and the suggestive effect is set.

  With this configuration, the timing at which the winning information is generated (the first entrance 64 or the second entrance) with respect to the variation to which the winning information for indicating the execution of the countdown effect is given. The timing aspect of the countdown effect can be varied according to the timing at which the ball enters 140), and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In this control example, a specific effect (for example, a specific effect C (see FIG. 101) that is executed 5 seconds after the start of change) set in the early stage of the variable display is used as a specific effect (for example, It is specified to be an effect indicating that the jackpot expectation is higher than a specific effect executed 20 seconds after the start of fluctuation. That is, the variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol jackpot winning is defined such that the variation pattern capable of executing the specific effect C is more easily selected.

  Thereby, when the suggestion effect is executed across a plurality of variation displays, it is possible to increase the expectation that the player wins a big hit with the variation after the next time. Furthermore, it is possible to motivate the player to reserve special symbols so that a suggestion effect across a plurality of variations is executed.

  In this control example, as described above, the winning information included in the winning information command received and the timing at which the winning information command is received (the remaining period of the variable display being executed) are crossed over a plurality of variable displays. It is determined whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, but other configurations may be used, for example, the suggestion effect based on the timing of receiving the winning information command (the remaining period of the variable display being executed) If it is determined whether or not to execute, the warning effect is executed as the suggestion effect, and the specific effect may be set at the timing of starting the next variable display. The specific effect is set based on the operation content of the player's frame button 22 during the period in which the sign effect is being executed (the specific effect that is the target of the suggested effect is set from a plurality of specific effects). It may be configured to. By configuring in this way, based on the game situation (the lottery result and variation pattern of the next variation, or the operation content to the operation means (the frame button 22)) after the suggestion effect is started, the suggestion effect is produced. Aspects can be set. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the production can be increased as compared with the configuration in which the production mode of the suggestion production is determined in advance.

  Moreover, in this control example, as an example of executing the suggestive effect across a plurality of variation displays, a variation display being executed and a variation display to be executed next time based on the winning information won during the variation display, Although the suggestion effect used is described, the present invention is not limited to this, and any configuration may be used as long as the suggestion effect is executed across a plurality of variable displays. For example, winning information that is won during the variable display is executed one after another. In the case of the variable display, the suggestive effect may be executed so as to extend from the variable display being executed to the variable display executed one after another, or from the next time the variable display executed next time. The suggestion effect may be executed so as to straddle the variable display. In this case, based on the timing of receiving the winning information command (remaining period of the variable display being executed), it is determined whether the timing for executing the suggestive effect is set to the variable display being executed or to the next variable display. It is good to provide a means to do.

  The winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is referred to when selecting the contents of various effects set by the sound lamp control device 113. For example, the reserved display area in which the number of reserved balls of special symbols is displayed. In Dn4, in order to suggest a holding display (holding symbol) corresponding to the winning information indicating the jackpot, a holding change notice effect for changing the display mode of the holding display is set, or a special symbol corresponding to the winning information indicating the jackpot It is referred to when setting a continuous notice effect that expects a big hit as an effect of a special symbol whose change starts before.

  In the first control example, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is referred to when the jackpot is won, during the jackpot game, or at the end of the jackpot, and the winning information indicating the jackpot is included in the hold. (The presence / absence of an on-hold consecutive villa) is determined, and an effect during the jackpot game or after the jackpot ends is set based on the determination result. In addition, even in the continuous effect executed during the probability change state, the effect content is selected based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, when an effect (pre-reading effect) referring to the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is being executed, a flag ( For example, when the pre-reading effect flag is set to ON and the pre-reading effect flag is set to ON, when a new winning information command is received, the winning information included in the winning information command is received. A new pre-reading effect based on the information is not executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that a plurality of pre-reading effects are continuously executed without leaving a gap and the player feels uncomfortable.

  In addition, you may use control other than the content mentioned above for solving the problem mentioned above, for example, a priority rank is given to several prefetch effects set based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. The priority rank of the pre-reading effect that is currently being executed and the priority rank of the pre-reading effect that can be set based on the winning information included in the new winning information command are compared, and the pre-reading effect that has a higher priority rank You may control to perform. In this case, if it is determined that the priority rank of the new pre-reading effect is higher, the pre-reading effect switching notification is issued to notify the player that the pre-reading effect being executed will end in the middle. After that, a new pre-reading effect is executed, or after changing the effect mode of the pre-reading effect being executed to a shortened pre-reading effect mode that is earlier than the end timing that was initially set, You may do it.

  In addition, as the priority rank of the pre-reading effect, the higher the expectation level of winning the jackpot so that the priority rank of the pre-reading effect corresponding to the winning information indicating that the jackpot is won is the highest. Should be set to be high. By this. When the pre-reading effect being executed is terminated in the middle, the player can have a sense of expectation for the big hit, and the new pre-reading effect to be executed next can be watched.

  Returning to FIG. 140, the description will be continued. In the processing of S3209, if it is determined that a winning information command has not been received (S3209: No), it is then determined whether a winning related command has been received (S3211), and if a winning related command has been received (S3211) S3211: Yes), a hit related command process (S3212) is executed, and after the hit related command process ends, this process ends.

  Here, the contents of the hit-related command processing (S3212) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit related command process (S3212). In the hit-related command processing, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3301). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S3301: Yes), the jackpot / medium effect setting process is executed (S3302), and then the opening effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. An opening command is set (S3303), and this process ends. The display opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the contents of the jackpot / medium effect setting process (S3302) executed when the opening command is received (S3301: Yes) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot effect setting process (S3302). In this jackpot production setting process (S3302), the status of winning when the jackpot is won (the contents of the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a and the counter value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223b2 (the number of held balls)) A process for setting an effect to be executed during the jackpot based on is executed.

  Specifically, the result of determining the presence or absence of winning information indicating that the special symbol jackpot has been won, and the result of determining whether or not the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 has reached the upper limit (four) Based on the above, the effect to be executed during the jackpot is selected using the jackpot effect selection table 222c (see FIG. 115C).

  When the jackpot production setting processing (S3302) is executed, first, winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is extracted (S3401), and then based on the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223b2. The current number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2) is extracted (S3402), and it is determined whether the extracted number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2) is 0 (S3403).

  Here, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not 0 (1 or more) (S3403; No), the extracted winning information and the reserved rank corresponding to the number of reserved balls are read from the reserved rank selection table 222b (S3404). The process proceeds to S3406 described later. On the other hand, in the process of S3403, when it is determined that the number of held balls is 0, “1” is read as the reserved rank, and the process proceeds to S3406.

  In the hold rank selection table 222b, in order to select the hold rank based on the expectation level that the winning information that wins the big jackpot again (to be held in the hold) can exist in the hold at the end of the big win, it is stored at the time of the big win The result of determining whether or not the jackpot winning information is included in the winning information that has been won, and whether or not there is a possibility of storing new winning information during the jackpot (whether or not the number of reserved balls is an upper limit) The hold rank is selected based on the determination result. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is “0” at the time of winning the big hit, since there is no winning information, the reserved rank “1” is set without using the reserved rank selection table 222b.

  As described above, in this control example, when selecting an effect to be executed during the jackpot, the number of winning information stored in the winning information storage area, that is, the number of reserved balls and the contents of the winning information, The hold rank is selected based on the determination result. An effect to be executed during the jackpot is selected in the process of S3406, which will be described later, based on the hold rank selected here.

  With this configuration, an effect corresponding to the number of winning information stored in the winning information storage area, that is, the number of reserved balls and the contents of the winning information, that is, the determination result is executed during the jackpot. In addition to the effect of congratulating the player on winning the jackpot, an effect suggesting the game content after the jackpot can be executed.

  In addition, in this control example, although the structure which refers the reservation rank selected with the content mentioned above is used for the effect performed during the jackpot, other than that, for example, the number of jackpots included in the winning information, Reservation rank based on information such as the type of variation pattern and the transition of the game state (probability variation state, short time state, normal state) (game state that can be determined when all the variations of the special symbol corresponding to the retention ball have been completed) May be selected.

  Furthermore, in addition to the above-mentioned hold rank, the jackpot type being executed this time, the number of wins of the jackpot being continued within a predetermined period (for example, the number of fluctuations of special symbols within 50 times), and the player is advantageous The so-called number of consecutive games, such as the number of jackpots won in a state where the game state continues, or operation information indicating the operation content of the player's operation means may be used. Thereby, more various effects can be executed during the big hit.

  In this control example, the big hit effect selected based on the above-described hold rank is executed using the entire main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 86 (a)). As long as the aspect allows the player to grasp the contents during the jackpot, the present invention is not limited to this, and a common jackpot effect is executed using the entire main display area Dm, and a partial area of the main display area Dm. As a sub-effect to be executed using the above-mentioned effect, a jackpot effect selected based on the above-described hold rank may be executed, or a device other than the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a sub-display device, a lamp) Apparatus, frame of pachinko machine 10, audio output device). By this, while sharing the effect for indicating that the jackpot is won (the effect for indicating that the jackpot is being won), the game content after the jackpot can be suggested to the player based on the holding rank. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the jackpot is being made in an easy-to-understand manner, and to perform an effect that gives expectation after the jackpot ends.

  Returning to FIG. 143, the description will be continued. In the process of S3406, based on the read reservation rank and the value of the first effect counter 223y1, the jackpot effect is read with reference to the jackpot effect selection table 222c (S3406). Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit effect that has been read this time is an effect for addition (S3407). If it is determined that it is an effect for addition (S3407: Yes), the effect flag 223h for addition is set on (S3408). Then, the display jackpot effect command corresponding to the read jackpot effect is set (S3409), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3407, when it is determined that the jackpot effect that has been read this time is not an extra effect (S3407: No), the process of S3408 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3409 described above.

  Returning to FIG. 142, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S3301 that the opening command has not been received (S3301: No), it is next determined whether a round number command has been received (S3304). If a round number command is received (S3304: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S3305), and then it is determined whether the extra effect flag 223h is set to ON (S3306). ).

  If the extra effect flag 223h is set to ON (S3306: Yes), processing related to the extra effect is executed at the timing when a new round is started (that is, when the round number command is received). Therefore, a process for adding presentation effect is executed (S3307), and then an additional presentation command for display is set (S3308), and a display round number command corresponding to the number of rounds extracted this time is set (S3309). ), This process is terminated. The display addition effect command and the display round number command set here are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and are executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (see FIG. 136). In step S <b> 3102, the data is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the contents of the extra effect processing (S3307) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the contents of the on-effect production process (S3307). This extra effect production process (S3307) is a process executed when an extra effect is selected as the big hit effect in the aforementioned jackpot effect setting process (see FIG. 143). This is a process for selecting the display mode of the round number display mode Dm10 (see FIG. 86 (a)) displayed when it is executed.

  This extra effect in-progress process (S3307) is a process executed when it is determined that a round number command is received in the hit-related command process (see FIG. 142) (S3304: Yes). In other words, during the jackpot, the above-described extra effect processing is executed every time a new round is started. Thereby, it is possible to select the round number display mode Dm10 corresponding to the progress of the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 and the running round number display mode Dm3 already displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in this control example, the number of rounds displayed in the extra effect is included in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a in the number of rounds set for the jackpot being executed (for example, 10 rounds). The number of jackpot rounds (for example, 15 rounds) is summed up. In the present control example configured as described above, the bonus information newly stored during the jackpot corresponds to the jackpot by executing the extra stage processing (S3307) each time a new round is started. Even if it is, it is possible to immediately execute an effect for adding up the content, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  When the extra effect processing (S3307) is executed, first, the number of big hits stored in the jackpot information storage area 223f, that is, the number of rounds currently set for the big hit is read (S3501). Then, all winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read (S3502). Then, it is determined whether the winning information includes winning information corresponding to the jackpot (S3503).

  If it is determined that there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot (S3503: Yes), the number of rounds read by the processing of S3501 (the number of rounds currently set for the jackpot) and the winning information A summing process (S3508 to S3511) for summing up the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot included in is executed. The summing process will be described later.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no winning information corresponding to the jackpot (S3503: No), the number of display rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223g, that is, the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 The display round number displayed as the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 (“10” in the case of FIG. 86 (a)) is read (S3504), and the number of rounds read in the process of S3501 is read in the process of S3506. The number of displayed rounds is subtracted (S3505). By the process of S3505, the number of rounds obtained by subtracting the number of rounds (the number of confirmed rounds) that can be recognized by the player from the number of rounds that are determined to be executed internally, that is, the player The number of unrecognized rounds (the number of remaining rounds) is calculated.

  Next, the display round number is selected with reference to the extra number selection table 222d based on the number of remaining rounds calculated in the processing of S3505 and the presence / absence of winning information corresponding to the jackpot, and stored in the display round number storage area 223g. (S3506), an overlay display process is executed (S3507), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3503, when it is determined that there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot (S3503: Yes), the summation process is executed. In this summing process, first, the number of rounds corresponding to the winning prize stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read (S3508), and then the number of rounds read in the process of S3501 and the number of rounds read in the process of S3508. The total number of rounds is calculated by summing up (S3509).

  Next, the display round number stored in the display round number storage area 223g, that is, the display round number displayed as the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 86 ( In the case of a), “10”) is read (S3510), and the display round number read in the process of S3510 is subtracted from the total number of rounds added in the process of S3509 (S3511). By the process of S3511, the number of rounds obtained by subtracting the number of rounds (the number of confirmed rounds) displayed so that the player can be recognized from the number of rounds determined to be executed internally, that is, the player The number of unrecognized rounds (the number of remaining rounds) is calculated. And after performing the process of S3506 mentioned above, a superposition display process is performed and this process is complete | finished.

  Of the above-described process for adding effects (S3307), the processes from S3501 to S3511 are processes for setting the display mode of the round number display mode Dm10 during the execution of the effect for adding. As described above, the game is configured to be executed when a new round is started during a jackpot (a new round game is started). Thereby, the process for setting the display mode of the effect regarding the number of rounds can be executed at an optimal timing.

  Note that the execution timing and processing content for setting the display mode to be displayed as the round number display mode Dm10 are not limited to the content of this control example. For example, in this control example, a new round Is configured to execute the process of adding effects, the winning information determination process (S3502, S3503 process) and the display round number setting process (S3504 to S3506, SS3510 to S3506) Process) is integrally executed, but the above-described winning information determination process is executed in advance at the timing of receiving the winning information command, the result is temporarily stored, and the stored result is used. The display round number setting process described above may be executed.

  Further, in this control example, when the round number command is received (S3304: Yes in FIG. 142), it is configured to execute the extra effect processing. However, during the round game (interval period), the extra effect is performed. You may comprise so that middle processing may be performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an extra effect processing during a round game (interval period) in which the processing amount is relatively small during a big hit when various control processing is executed, and the sound lamp control device 113. It is possible to prevent the processing load from increasing temporarily.

  In this case, if the number of rounds to be executed next is determined based on the winning information command that has already been received, and the above-described process of adding effects is executed based on the determination result. Good. Furthermore, in this control example, it is configured such that the process during the presentation effect is executed every time a new round is started, but a specific round (for example, an even number round, a multiple of 5) is started. It may be configured to be executed only at the time of execution, or a lottery for determining whether or not to perform the extra effect processing may be performed, and may be executed based on the result of the lottery.

  In this control example, the processing of S3501 to S3511 is executed every time a new round is started. For example, after the processing of S3502, a new winning is started from the time when the previous round is started. A process for determining whether information has been added may be provided, and if new winning information has not been added, the processes of S3503 to S3511 may be skipped. Thereby, the process performed every round can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. When the process of S3506 is completed, an extra display process (S3507), which is a process for executing an effect display related to the number of display rounds set in the process of S3506, is executed, and this process ends. Here, the superimposition display process (S3507) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the contents of the overlay display process (S3507). This extra display process (S3507) is a process for setting an extra effect display command corresponding to the number of display rounds (see S3508 in FIG. 144) determined in the extra effect processing (see FIG. 144). In this control example, the number of display rounds (determined round number display mode Dm4) when the number of rounds of jackpot is a predetermined number of rounds n (number of rounds that is a multiple of 5; that is, 5 rounds, 10 rounds, and 15 rounds). ) Is updated and the number of rounds immediately before the predetermined number of rounds n (number of rounds that is a multiple of 5) (that is, the fourth round, the ninth round, and the 14th round) is the next round (the predetermined number of rounds n ), An indication effect (see FIG. 85 (b)) suggesting that the number of display rounds (determined round number display mode Dm4) is updated is executed.

  When the additional display process (S3507) is executed, first, the number of rounds n (specifically, 5 rounds, 10 rounds) in which the current round number is the update timing of the round number (timing for displaying the added round number) It is determined whether the number of rounds is n-1 (4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) less than 1 (multiple of 5 such as 15 rounds) (S3601). If it is determined that this time is the number of rounds n-1 (4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) (S3601: Yes), the sign effect for displaying the number of confirmed rounds in the next round (FIG. 85 (b) )) Is executed, a corresponding display addition selection command is set (S3602), and this process ends.

  In this control example, the above-described effect of the precursor effect (see FIG. 85B) is set based on the display round number stored in the display round number storage area 223g. For example, the display round number is stored. When the number of display rounds stored in the area 223g is 10 or more, the display mode (see FIG. 86 (b)) in which the number of “treasure chests” displayed during the precursor effect is reduced or displayed during the precursor effect. An effect mode (see FIG. 86B) in which the display mode of “treasure box” is gorgeous is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to cause the player to predict the contents of the effect of the additional display effect at the time when the sign effect is executed.

  In this control example, the effect mode of the precursor effect is set based on the number of display rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223g, but other than that, for example, it is determined internally. You may comprise so that the production | presentation aspect of a precursor effect may be set based on the number of rounds (when the number of rounds within a holding | maintenance is fixed, the number of rounds set also as the number of rounds inside a holding | maintenance is added together). Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to predict the number of rounds determined internally based on the effect mode of the sign effect and the effect mode of the additional effect that adds the number of display rounds, and is executed during the jackpot You can continue to be interested in the production.

  Further, in this example of control, the player will be able to develop future development of the extra effect executed during the jackpot by changing the display mode of the “treasure box (selected images Dm5 to Dm7)” displayed during the precursor effect. The display mode for other configurations may be changed. For example, the display of “arrow (selected image Dm8)” for selecting “treasure box (selected images Dm5 to Dm7)” is used. The mode (for example, color and size) may be varied, and the sound and the lighting pattern of the LED may be varied. Moreover, you may comprise so that the period when a precursor effect is performed may be varied.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3601 that the current round number is not n-1 rounds (4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) (S3601: No), then the current round number is n rounds (No. It is determined whether it is the 5th, 10th, 15th round (S3603), and when it is determined that it is the nth round (5th, 10th, 15th round) (S3603: Yes), the number of display rounds is stored. An additional display command for display corresponding to the number of display rounds stored in the area 223g is set (S3604), and this process ends. Also, in the process of S3603, when it is determined that the current round number is not the n-th round (S3603: No), this process is ended as it is.

  The display overlay display command set in the above-described processing of S3604 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. Are transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display addition display command, the display control device 114 displays the round number display mode Dm10 corresponding to the content of the command on the third symbol display device 81.

  In this control example, the number of display rounds set in the extra stage processing during a specific round (number of rounds n) is displayed (the display mode of the determined round number display mode Dm4 is changed (added)). However, the display mode of the determined round number display mode Dm4 may be changed (added) at other timings. For example, it is determined whether or not to update the determined round number display mode Dm4. The lottery means may execute a lottery every time a new round starts, and set a timing for executing an effect of adding and updating the determined round number display mode Dm4 based on the lottery result. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the timing at which the content of the determined round number display mode Dm4 is updated irregularly, and it is possible to continuously play a big hit game while giving the player a sense of expectation.

  Returning to FIG. 142, the description will be continued. In the process of S3306, when it is determined that the extra effect flag 223h is not on (is off) (S3306: No), it is not necessary to execute the extra effect process (S3307), so the processes of S3307 and S3308 are performed. The processing of S3309 described above is skipped and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3304 that a round number command has not been received (S3304: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3310). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S3310: Yes), a display ending command is set (S3311), a jackpot effect setting process is executed (S3312), and this process ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the jackpot post effect setting process (S3312) executed when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S3310: Yes) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big hit effect setting process (S3312). This jackpot post effect setting process (S3312) is a process for continuously executing the effect executed during the jackpot during the period when the jackpot ends and the special symbol variation is executed. This is a process for setting a jackpot post effect corresponding to the executed effect.

  When the big hit effect setting processing (S3312) is executed, first, the game state after the big hit is read from the information stored in the state storage area 223e (S3701), and then the extra effect flag 223h is set to ON. It is determined whether or not the effect executed during the current jackpot is an effect for addition (S3702). If it is determined that it is an effect for addition (S3702: Yes), it is then determined whether or not there is winning information that has been won in the winning information storage area 223a (whether or not the consecutively held game is held) (S3703).

  In the process of S3703, when it is determined that there is winning information won in the jackpot (S3703: Yes), a display extra effect jackpot command is set (S3704), and this process is terminated. That is, in the process of S3703, when it is determined that there is winning information that has been won by the jackpot (S3703: Yes), all the total round numbers calculated in the process of S3505 of the process of adding the stage in FIG. 144 (S3307) are displayed. Since it is not displayed as the number of rounds, the extra effect continues until the next jackpot is executed (until the change of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information including the jackpot information ends). Set the display extra bonus command for display so that it is displayed.

  The display extra effect jackpot command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display extra effect jackpot command, the display control device 114 starts display for continuously executing the extra effect while executing the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 88 (a)). By comprising in this way, the effect performed during the jackpot can be continuously executed even after the jackpot ends.

  In this control example, the display round number (determined round number display mode Dm4) is partially displayed (for example, 5 rounds) even for the round number (for example, 15 rounds) set per jackpot. Because of the configuration, the content of the effect for the extra effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is an extra effect that is executed during one big hit, or a plurality of jackpots (the first big hit is It is difficult to grasp whether the effect is an extra effect that is executed during the special symbol change period that is executed after the end of the game until the second jackpot is started. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the number of winning jackpots won while the extra effect is being continuously executed or the number of rounds set for one winning jackpot in an incomprehensible manner. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting the player to expect the extra effect to continue for a long time (the jackpot continues for a long time).

  Returning to FIG. In the process of S3703, when it is determined that there is no winning information won in the jackpot (S3703: No), the total number of rounds calculated in the process of S3505 in the process of superimposing effect (S3307) in FIG. 144 is the number of display rounds. Therefore, the additional effect flag 223h is set to OFF (S3705), the display round number storage area 223g is cleared (S3706), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3702 that the effect executed during the current jackpot is not an extra effect (S3702: No), then the effect executed during the current jackpot is the continuous hit effect. It is determined whether it is (see FIG. 84) (S3707). Here, when it is determined that the effect is for consecutive hits (S3707: Yes), a display hitting effect for consecutive hits for display is set (S3708), and this process ends.

  The display success hitting display big hit command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process of the main process (see FIG. 136) (S3102). Are transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives a command for displaying consecutive hits for consecutive display, the display control device 114 starts display for continuously executing the effect for consecutive hits while executing the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. To do. By comprising in this way, the effect performed during the jackpot can be continuously executed even after the jackpot ends.

  In the process of S3707, when it is determined that the effect is not a continuous winning effect (S3707: No), that is, when the normal winning effect is executed during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is in a probable or short-time state. (S3709: Yes), the display extension flag 223i is set to ON (S3710), and the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is set to “4000”. The setting is made (S3711), and this process is terminated.

  Here, the contents executed in the processes of S3710 and S3711 will be described. In the present control example, the jackpot effect is selected with reference to the jackpot effect selection table 222c shown in FIG. 115 (c). As shown in FIG. 115 (c), the normal winning effect is the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a at the time of winning all the holding ranks “1” to “4”, that is, when the jackpot is won. It is configured as an effect that can be executed when the information that is won in the jackpot is included in the (holding symbol) (when the consecutive resort in the hold) is not included (when the consecutive resort in the hold is not included) Yes.

  Then, when the game state after the jackpot end in which the normal winning effect is executed is a certain change or a short-time state, the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, and the ending display displayed during the jackpot is a predetermined after the jackpot ends. It is displayed until the condition is satisfied (see FIG. 89 (a)). With this configuration, the special symbol change is executed in a state where the jackpot ending display is displayed. When the jackpot is won, the fact that the jackpot is won is displayed on the ending display screen (FIG. 89 ( b)). Thereby, even if it is a case where the effect for normal hits is performed, while having a expectation in the on-hold consecutive resort, when performing the on-hold consecutive resort, it is possible to continue and execute the effect on the big hit.

  Further, in this control example, as a period for continuously executing the jackpot ending display even after the jackpot ends, the special symbol variation count is four times or four seconds after the jackpot ends until one of the conditions is satisfied. A period has been set, and in the process of S3711, by setting a value of “4000” to the elapsed time counter 223k, the time has elapsed since the end of the jackpot (after the special symbol can be changed) To count.

  In this way, the period for executing the jackpot ending display is not set based on the number of times the special symbol is changed (for example, 4 times), but is set based on the elapsed time since the end of the jackpot. Even when the special symbol change is not executed after the end (when the special symbol is not held), the jackpot ending display can be executed only for a limited period.

  In this control example, when the special symbol change is not executed after the jackpot ends and the elapsed time after the jackpot ends exceeds a predetermined period (4 seconds), the demo screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  In the process of S3709, if it is determined that the gaming state after the jackpot is not a certain change or a short-time state (S3709: No), the effect executed during the jackpot is continued during the variation period of the special symbol executed after the jackpot Then, the display round number storage area 223g is cleared without executing the display process (S3712), and this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 142, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S3310 that an ending command has not been received (S3310: No), processing according to another command is executed (S3313), and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 140, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S3211 that a hit-related command has not been received (S3211: No), it is then determined whether a status command has been received (S3213), and it has been determined that a status command has been received. (S3213: Yes), the current gaming state is extracted from the received command and stored in the state storage area 223e (S3214).

  In the process of S3214, when the state designation command set in the process of S1214 of the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the main controller 110 described above with reference to FIG. 137 is received, the current gaming state Separately, processing for storing the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot is executed. With this configuration, the state command indicating the current gaming state and the state designation command indicating the gaming state (scheduled gaming state) set when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the jackpot ends) are distinguished. And memorize it. In addition, after the jackpot is over, a state command indicating the current gaming state is received, and at that time, the contents of the state command indicating the current gaming state, the contents of the state designation command indicating the scheduled gaming state, A configuration may be used in which a determination unit that determines whether or not the game state matches is provided, and whether or not the gaming state is set appropriately based on the determination result of the determination unit. Thereby, for example, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of variably setting the gaming state after the jackpot end to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

  In the process of S3213, when it is determined that the status command has not been received (S3213: No), the process according to the received command is executed (S3216), and the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  By this processing, it is possible to set commands for performing various settings for the display control device 114 based on commands output from the main control device 110.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the variable display setting process (S3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S3114). This variable display setting process (S3114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process (S4014), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S3801). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S3801: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, and thus the process proceeds to S3813. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the change start flag 223c is on (S3801: Yes), the change start flag 223c is set to off (S3802), and then in the process of S3203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 140). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223.

  Next, it is determined whether the display extension flag 223i is set to ON (S3803). If it is determined that the display extension flag 223i is set to ON (S3803: Yes), the extension management process is executed (S3804). Transition to processing. The extension management process (S3804) is a process for managing the end timing of the extended display effect in which the ending display during the jackpot is displayed continuously (extended) even after the jackpot ends. The extension management process (S3804) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3803 that the display extension flag 223i is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3803: No), next, the game stored in the state storage area 223e Information indicating the state is read, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is a certain change or a short time state (S3805). If it is determined that the state is a certain change or a short time state (S3805: Yes), a continuous effect setting process is executed (S3806), and then the process proceeds to S3811. The continuation effect setting process (S3806) is a process for setting an effect mode of a continuation effect (battle effect) (see FIG. 91) executed in a probabilistic or time-saving state. The continuation effect setting process (S3806) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S3805, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the probability change or the short-time state (S3805: No), based on the extracted variation pattern, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern for executing the expectation effect. It is determined (S3807). In the process of S3807, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is to execute the expectation degree effect (S3807: Yes), the expectation degree effect setting process is executed (S3808), and the process proceeds to S3811. The expectation level effect setting process (S3808) is a process of setting an effect mode of an effect (see FIG. 102) for suggesting an expectation level that the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit. This expectation degree effect setting process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3807 that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern that does not execute the expectation effect (S3807: No), the current variation pattern executes a countdown effect based on the extracted variation pattern. If it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern for executing a countdown effect (S3809: Yes), a countdown effect setting process (S3810) is performed, and S3811 is performed. Move on to processing. The countdown effect setting process (S3810) informs the player of the timing at which the specific effect is executed during the special symbol variation display to suggest that the lottery result of the current special symbol is a big win. This is a process of setting the effect mode of the effect (see FIG. 98) to be performed. The countdown effect setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of S3809, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern that does not execute the countdown effect (S3809: No), or when the processing of S3804, S3806, S3808, and S3810 is completed, the extracted variation Based on the pattern, the current variation display mode is determined from the variation pattern table 222a of the sound lamp control device 113 (S3811), and the corresponding variation pattern command for display is set (S3812).

  When the processing of S3812 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S3813). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S3813: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this variation display setting. The process (S3114) ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S3813: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S3814), and then in the process of S3206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 140), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3815).

  Next, in the process of S3815, it is determined whether or not the acquired stop type is a jackpot type indicating a jackpot (S3816). If it is determined that it is a jackpot type (S3816: Yes), it is acquired in the jackpot information storage area 223f. The winning information corresponding to the jackpot type (number of jackpot rounds, information regarding the gaming state set after the jackpot) is stored (S3817), and the process proceeds to S3818. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3816 that the type is not the big hit type (S3816: No), the process proceeds to S3818 as it is.

  In the process of S3818, the stop type extracted by the process of S3815 is set (S3818), and based on the set stop type, a display stop type command to be transmitted to the display control device 114 is set (S3819). ), This process is terminated. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, the extension management process (S3804) executed in the variable display setting process (S3114 in FIG. 147) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the extension management process (S3804). In this extension management process (S3804), a process for managing whether or not an end condition relating to the number of changes in the special symbol is satisfied among the end conditions of the jackpot ending display continuously displayed after the end of the jackpot is executed.

  When the extension management process (S3804) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter 223j is 0 (S3901). When it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223j is 0 (S3901: Yes), that is, when it is time to set the first variation display after the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, the variation counter “5” is set as the display end condition (display extension end condition) for the jackpot ending display in the value of 223j (S3902), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3901 that the value of the variation counter 223j is not 0 (1 or more) (S3901: No), that is, the second to fourth times after the display extension flag 223i is set to ON. If it is time to set the first variation display, the value of the variation counter 223j is decremented by 1 (S3903), and then it is determined whether the value of the variation counter 223j is “1” (S3904). When it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223j is “1” (S3904: Yes), that is, it is determined that it is the timing to set the variation display of the fifth rotation after the display extension flag 223i is set to ON. If this is the case, the display extension flag 223i is set to off (S3905) because one of the display extension end conditions is “up to four special symbol fluctuations” is satisfied. To do.

  In the process of S3904, if it is determined that the value of the variation counter is not “1” (“2” or more) (S3904: No), a display extension effect command is set (S3906), and this process is performed. finish. With this configuration, if the special symbol variation count satisfies the display extension termination condition while the jackpot ending display is extended and executed, the variation corresponding to the next special symbol variation is performed. The display extension flag 223i is set to OFF at the timing when the display is executed, and the extension effect (ending display) can be ended. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the ending display is ended during the special symbol variation display and the player feels uncomfortable.

  In this control example, when a certain change or short-time state is set after the big hit, the dedicated fluctuation pattern table (special fluctuation pattern table 202d4) is used for a predetermined period (1 to 4 rotations after the big hit). A short variation time (0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol (see FIG. 109). As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is the upper limit (4) after the big hit, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (4 rotations) is more than the elapsed time (4 seconds) as the end condition of the extension effect. The termination condition based on is established first.

  Therefore, during the period when the jackpot ending display is extended and executed, a game with a reserved ball is always secured in order to change a lot of special symbols and see special effects (see FIG. 89 (b)). Therefore, the operation of the game can be improved.

  As for management based on the elapsed time, which is one of the conditions for ending the extended effect, an effect update process (periodically performed every 1 ms) in the main process (see FIG. 136) of the audio lamp control device 113 ( In step S3112). The effect update process (S3112) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the continuous effect setting process (S3806) executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous effect setting process (S3806). This continuation effect setting process (S3806) is a process for setting the effect mode of the continuation effect (battle effect) that is executed during the probability change or the short time state. Specifically, as the continuation effect (battle effect), the effect mode of the final mode effect (battle reach) for informing whether or not the probability change or the short-time state is finished, and the final mode effect (battle reach) are executed. The production mode of the production up to (the production before the battle) is stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 based on the determination result of the special symbol, the variation pattern (variation time), and the duration of the production before the battle. The setting process is executed with reference to the continuous production mode selection table 222e, the continuous value main selection table 222f, the continuous value sub selection table 222g, and the final mode selection table 222h.

  This control example is configured such that the above-described continuation effect (battle effect) is repeatedly executed until the probability change or the time saving state ends. By configuring in this way, when a certain change or short-time state continues for a long period of time, each continuation effect (battle effect) is extended and each effect (for example, executed during the continuation effect (battle effect)) (for example, It is possible to suppress a reduction in the effect of the effect of increasing or decreasing the continuation value (HP value).

  Further, when the continuous effect (battle effect) is repeatedly executed, that is, when the final aspect effect (battle reach) occurs at a timing at which the gaming state does not change from the certainty or the short time state, the final aspect effect ( “Draw” is selected as the production result of (Battle Reach), and the pre-battle production is started again. Thus, in the configuration in which the continuous production is repeatedly executed, one continuous production period is long. When it is going to be suppressed, the final mode effect (drawing battle reach) other than the final mode effect (battle reach with win / loss) for indicating that the gaming state shifts is frequently executed. There is a problem that the player gets bored with the final aspect production at an early stage.

  In contrast, in this control example, the elapsed period (the number of times the special symbol has been changed) since the last final aspect effect (draw battle reach) is measured, and the measurement result is within a predetermined period (for example, the special symbol) When the number of fluctuations is less than 6), the final mode effect (draw battle reach) without winning or losing is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress that the draw battle reach is frequently executed in a short period of time and the player gets tired of the production early.

  Furthermore, in this control example, it is configured to indicate to the player the result of determination of whether or not the special symbol is held and the remaining period in the probable or shortened state depending on the effect of the draw battle reach. By comprising in this way, it becomes possible to make a player interested in a draw battle reach, and the effect of the whole continuous effect can be heightened.

  In addition, in this control example, the number of times that the continuation effect (battle effect) is repeatedly executed is measured, and the effect mode of the continuation effect (battle effect) is set based on the measurement result. Thereby, when the probability change or the time-short state continues for a long time and the continuation effect (battle effect) is repeatedly executed, the continuation effect (battle effect) of the different effect modes can be executed, and the player can make the effect early. Can be prevented from getting bored.

  Here, the process executed in the continuous effect setting process (see S3806 in FIG. 149) of this control example will be briefly described. First, in the present variation display, battle reach is executed as a continuous effect, or before the battle. A process of determining whether to execute an effect (execution effect selection process) is executed, and based on the determination result of the execution effect selection process, a process of setting the effect mode of the pre-battle effect (first effect mode setting process) or The process of setting the battle reach effect mode (second (final) effect mode setting process) is executed.

  As described above, in the present control example, every time the continuous effect setting process (S3806) is executed, it is configured to determine whether to execute the pre-battle effect or the battle reach with the current variation display. It is possible to smoothly switch the production from the pre-battle production to the battle reach.

  As shown in FIG. 149, when the continuous effect setting process (S3806) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is a winning variation (the variation won in the special symbol jackpot) (S4001). If it is determined that the variation is not a hit variation (S4001: No), then whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds (a variation pattern capable of executing battle reach). (S4002), and if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is 60 seconds or 90 seconds (S4002: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the duration counter 223p is 6 or more (S4003).

  In the process of S4003, if it is determined that the value of the continuation period counter 223p is not 6 or more (less than 6) (S4003: No), it is determined whether the continuation effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4004). When it is determined that the continuous effect flag 223r is not on (S4004: No), that is, when the continuous effect is not executed, the continuous effect mode is selected based on the continuous effect mode selection table 222e (S4005). The selected continuous effect mode is stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223m (S4006), the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is incremented by 1 (S4007), and the continuous effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4008).

  When it is determined that the continuation effect flag 223r is not turned on in the processing of S4004 described above, the first variation display is set after the probability variation or the short time state is set as the gaming state, or the previous variation display is final. It is a mode effect (battle reach), and is a case where a new continuous effect (pre-battle effect) is set in the current variation display.

  In such a case, in the process of S4005, based on the continuous effect mode selection table 222e, the effect mode (effect mode) of the effect before battle executed from the current variation display is selected. Here, in the continuous effect mode selection table 222e, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), the number of times the continuous effect is repeatedly executed (the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q) and the winnings stored in the winning information storage area 223a. The continuous effect mode (mode 1 to mode 5) is set based on the information and the value of the third effect counter 223y3, and the selected continuous effect until the next final aspect effect (battle reach) is executed. A pre-battle presentation based on the mode is executed.

  In this control example, when the continuous effect flag 223r is set to OFF, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is prefetched, and the continuous effect mode is set based on the prefetched result. Although the configuration is used to execute the process of setting the variation display mode based on the continuous effect mode that is set every time the variation of the special symbol is performed, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is pre-read. However, as long as the effect based on the prefetched result is executed, the configuration other than that used in the present control example may be used. For example, when the continuation effect flag 223r is set to OFF, the winning information storage area 223a is displayed. The stored winning information is prefetched and stored in the winning information storage area 223a from the display mode of the variable display executed this time based on the prefetched result. Until variable display of the display mode corresponding to the winning information is may be configured to previously set a.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4004, when it is determined that the continuation effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4004: Yes), or when the process of S4008 ends, the value of the continuation counter 223p is incremented by 1 (S4009). . Thereby, the value of continuation effect setting counter 223q at the time of selecting the next continuation effect mode can be made different, and it can be suppressed that the same continuation effect mode is continuously selected.

  In this control example, it is suppressed that the same continuous effect mode is continuously selected, and at a specific timing (the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is 1), the specific condition (successful on-hold ) Is established, a specific effect (continuous effect mode 5) is made executable so that the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is incremented by 1, but the same continuous effect mode continues. Other configurations may be used to achieve the purpose of suppressing the selection.

  For example, you may comprise so that the value which adds the value of the continuation effect setting counter 223q may be determined by lottery (for example, the value to -5-5 is lottery). With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the regularity in which the continuous production mode is selected, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, it may be configured to add the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q based on the operation result of the player on the frame button 22, or the number of jackpot consecutive games (the game state transitions to the normal state) Alternatively, the value of the continuation effect setting counter 223q may be added based on the number of consecutive wins for the jackpot) or the special symbol lottery result when the continuation effect mode is selected.

  When the process of S4009 is completed, a continuation value setting process is next executed (S4010). Details of the continuation value setting process executed in the process of S4010 will be described later with reference to FIG. A display effect command corresponding to the difference continuation value set in the continuation value setting process of S4010 is set (S4011), and this process ends. In the process of S4011, an effect command indicating the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set as the pre-battle effect among the continuous effects. Specifically, the display mode corresponding to the continuous effect mode selected in the process of S4005 and the display mode corresponding to the difference continuation value set in the process of S4010 are collectively set as a display effect command. .

  The display effect command set in the process of S4011 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display effect command as the variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the pre-battle effect.

  The processes from S4001 to S4003 in the continuous effect setting process (S3806) described above correspond to the execution effect selection process, and the processes from S4004 to S4011 set the effect mode of the pre-battle effect (first effect mode). Corresponds to the setting process).

  On the other hand, in the process of S4001, when it is determined that the current fluctuation is a hit fluctuation (S4001: Yes), the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is reset (S4012), and the process proceeds to S4013. Also, in the process of S4003, when it is determined that the value of the continuation period counter is 6 or more (S4003: Yes), that is, when the pre-battle presentation continues for 6 or more special symbol variations, the process proceeds to S4013. Transition.

  In the process of S4013, an effect mode of battle reach (final mode) is selected based on the final mode selection table 222h (S4013), and a corresponding final mode command for display is set (S4014). The final display mode command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the final display mode command, the third symbol display device 81 uses the continuation value (HP value) displayed in the pre-battle effect (see FIG. 93 (a)). Is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch the production from the pre-battle production to the battle reach without giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.

  When the processing of S4014 is completed, next, the continuous effect flag 223r is set to OFF (S4015), the continuous effect mode storage area 223m is cleared (S4016), and the value of the duration counter 223p is cleared to 0 (S4017). This process is terminated.

  As described above, in this control example, the pre-battle effect is executed as a variation display corresponding to a plurality of special symbol variations executed while the probability variation or the short time state is set as the gaming state, and a specific one Although it is configured to execute the final mode effect (battle reach) for special symbol fluctuation (special symbol hit fluctuation or 60-second or 90-second fluctuation time selected fluctuation), other than that Alternatively, for example, a final mode effect (battle reach) may be executed using a variation display corresponding to a plurality of special symbol variations. In this case, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (the determination result of the on-hold determination and the fluctuation pattern) (based on the pre-reading result), the effect mode of the final mode (battle reach) is variably displayed. It is preferable to configure so as to correspond to the above. Thereby, the last aspect production (battle reach) performed over a some special symbol fluctuation | variation can be performed smoothly.

  Moreover, when using the structure which performs the last aspect production (battle reach) straddling a some special symbol fluctuation | variation, it is several for all the display aspects displayed by the last aspect production (battle reach). It may be configured to be determined and set in advance for each special symbol change, or the content of battle reach, that is, only the attack pattern and the effect result are set in advance, and the continuation value (HP value) increase / decrease display control is performed. May be configured to be set each time the special symbol variation display is executed. Thereby, the kind of final aspect production (battle reach) preset based on a prefetch result can be reduced.

  Next, the continuation value setting process (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuation value setting process (S4010). This continuation value setting process (S4010) is a process for setting a continuation value (HP value in the battle effect) that is variably displayed during the continuation effect. In this control example, when setting the value of the continuation value (the value of the continuation value after the variable), the value selected based on the special symbol lottery (the value of the hundreds of the opponent's HP) and the production The value selected on the basis of the lottery (the tens place value of the opponent's HP) is set to be added up. Thereby, the variation of the continuation value displayed can be increased.

  When the continuation value setting process (S4010) is executed, it is first determined whether or not it is time to change the continuation value (S4101). Although detailed description is omitted, in S4101, the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern table 222a of the sound lamp control device 113 is continued based on the rough variation pattern notified from the main control device 110 by the variation pattern command. It is determined whether the pattern changes the value.

  In this control example, as described above, the timing for changing the continuation value (HP value) is determined based on the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern table 222a of the sound lamp control device 113. In addition to the above, there is provided a measuring means for measuring the number of times the variation pattern that does not change the continuation value is continuously selected, and when the number of times measured by the measuring means reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4 times) If the number of times measured by the measurement means described above is a specific number of times (for example, once), the change regulation means that does not change the continuation value regardless of the extracted variation pattern. It may be provided. By configuring in this way, during the continuation effect (during pre-battle effect), the continuation value (HP value) is not changed at all, and the player gets bored with the effect (pre-battle effect), or the continuation value frequently It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which (HP value) is changed and it is difficult to understand the contents of the effect.

  Further, the continuation value change timing may be set based on the operation result of the player on the frame button 22 or the prefetch result of the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. The continuation value change timing is set based on the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the continuation value (HP value) selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f. The frequency of recording may be varied.

  If it is determined that it is not the continuation value change timing in the processing of S4101 (S4101: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the continuation value change timing (S4101: Yes), the hundreds of continuation values are selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f (S4102), and the selected continuation value (continuation value) is selected. The continuation value selected based on the main selection table 222f) is stored in the continuation value storage area 223n (S4103). Although detailed description will be given later, in this control example, the effect stored in the continuation value storage area 223n, that is, the continuation value main, is the effect aspect of the effect (attack effect) executed when the continuation value varies. The continuation value selected based on the selection table 222f is set with reference to the continuation value.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation value (value of hundreds) selected in the processing of S4102 is 200 or more (S4104). If it is determined that it is 200 or more (S4104: Yes), the first An effect value (decimal value) is selected based on the continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 (see FIG. 117 (b)) (S4105), and if it is determined that it is less than 200 (S4104; No), the second An effect value (decimal value) is selected based on the continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 (see FIG. 117 (c)) (S4106). A continuation value obtained by adding the value selected in the process of S4102 and the value selected in the process of S4103 is calculated (S4104).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 117 (b) and FIG. 117 (c), the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 and the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 ) Are different, the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 defines the range of selectable effect values as "-20 to +20", and the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 can be selected. The range of the production value is defined as “−10 to 0”. That is, the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 is configured such that a positive value (plus value) is not selected as the effect value. In the pre-battle presentation, for example, when “0” is selected as the continuation value (value of hundreds) based on the continuation value main selection table 222f, internally (in the continuation value storage area 223n) Although “0” is set as the stored value), the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the effect value is not “0” (for example, “20”). ") This is a configuration for suppressing the display of a value and executing an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort.

  In this way, the value of the continuation value (hundred value) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f is discriminated, and the range of selectable effect values is changed based on the discrimination result. In the normal case (continuation value is 200 or more), the continuation value (HP value) can be varied in both the plus and minus directions, increasing the variation of the performance and the continuation value. If it is less than 200, the continuation value (HP value) is varied only in the negative direction to suppress the occurrence of contradiction in the production.

  When the process of S4105 or S4106 is completed, the continuation value (hundreds place value) selected in the process of S4102 and the effect value (tenth place value) selected in either S4105 or S4106 are displayed. Are added together to calculate a continuation value (HP value) (S4107), a display summation command corresponding to the calculated continuation value (HP value) is set (S4108), and this process ends.

  As described above, in this control example, variable management of the continuation value (HP value) that is variably displayed (increase / decrease display) while the continuation effect is being executed is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The displayed continuation value (HP value), that is, the continuation value selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f (value of hundreds) and the continuation value selected based on the continuation value sub-selection table 222g ( The value is not the sum of the tenth value), but the continuation value selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f (the hundredth value). By configuring in this way, the pattern for performing variable management of the continuation value (HP value) is reduced with respect to the display pattern of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. And the processing load can be reduced.

  Further, in this control example, even if variable management of the continuation value (HP value) is performed only with the continuation value (value of hundreds) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f, the continuation value (HP value) ) Management content and the display content of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are configured so as not to differ from each other. Can be executed, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 of this control example selects a continuation value based on the continuation value main selection table 222f and the continuation value sub-selection table 222g, and displays information (command) indicating the selected continuation value as a display control device. To 114. Then, only the continuation value selected with reference to the continuation value main selection table 222f is stored in the continuation value storage area 223n, and the continuation value increase / decrease management is repeatedly executed based on the stored continuation value.

  A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 164. In this control example, the display mode of the continuous effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, specifically, the attack pattern display mode to be executed. The display control device 114 sets and displays the variable (increase / decrease) display mode of the continuation value (HP value). That is, when the display control device 114 receives a command related to the continuation value output from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 has an area (total value storage area) for storing the combined continuation value. A difference between the sum value stored in the sum value storage area and the sum value calculated from the command related to the continuation value received this time, and an attack pattern display mode based on the calculated difference value; A variable (increase / decrease) display mode of the continuation value (HP value) is set and displayed.

  By comprising in this way, a continuous effect can be performed suitably, reducing the processing load of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and an effect can be heightened.

  In this control example, a continuation value sub-selection table 222g for selecting a continuation value for performance is provided in the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to select a continuation value for performance. However, the display control device 114 may be provided with a configuration (for example, a continuation value sub-selection table 222g) for selecting a continuation value for production. With this configuration, the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 can be further reduced.

  Further, in this control example, when a continuation value is selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f, a configuration in which a continuation value for performance is selected with reference to the continuation value sub-selection table 222g is used. Other configurations may be used. For example, even if the continuation value is not selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f (for example, in the case of S4104: No in FIG. 149), the continuation value for production ( It may be configured to increase / decrease only the tens digit). Thereby, the increase / decrease display of the continuation value (HP value) performed during a continuous effect can be set more finely, and the effect of an effect can be heightened.

  In this control example, as the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f, only a value that is smaller than the current continuation value (the continuation value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n) is selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a value increased from the current continuation value may be selected. In this case, when a value increased from the current continuation value is selected, the continuation effect is not the normal attack effect but the continuation value as the effect form of the continuation effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is good to comprise so that the recovery effect which (HP value) recovers may be performed. In this way, by using the configuration for increasing the continuation value (HP value) during the continuous performance, the variation of the increase / decrease display of the continuation value (HP value) executed during the continuous performance can be increased and the continuation can be performed. It can be suppressed that the continuation value (HP value) reaches the lower limit value (for example, “0”) when the value (HP value) is frequently changed (increased or decreased).

  In this control example, the character's HP is used as the continuation value that is variably displayed during the continuation effect, but in addition to that, a predetermined state (for example, an advantageous state advantageous to the player (probability change or short-time state)). ) Is set as long as it is suggested to the player based on a variable value. For example, it is set based on the success rate (%) of the effect to be executed and the operation content on the frame button 22. The number of operations performed (times) may be used.

  Further, in this control example, when the value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f is “0”, the continuation value (HP value) executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is In order to prevent a value larger than “0” from being set, if the value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f is less than a predetermined value (for example, 200), it is used for production. The configuration is such that a positive value is not selected as the continuation value, but other configurations may be used. For example, when the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f is “0”. May be configured not to execute the selection of the continuation value for production (selection using the continuation value sub-selection table 222g).

  In addition, as in this control example, a process for setting a rough effect content in the first control device (sound lamp control device 113) among different control devices (sound lamp control device 113 and display control device 114). In a configuration in which a predetermined effect is repeatedly displayed by executing a process of setting a specific effect display mode by the second control device (display control device 114), the second control device (display control) The processing result of the device 114) is output to the first control device (sound lamp control device 113), and then the first control device (sound lamp control device 113) sets a rough effect content. In the case of execution, it is determined whether or not the processing result output from the second control device (display control device 114) is within the allowable range. If it is within the allowable range, the next effect content is set as it is. processing If it is out of the allowable range, the information about the rough effect set at the time of setting the previous effect content is corrected, and the process for setting the next effect content is executed based on the correction result. If the processing result is not received and output from the second control device (display control device 114) at the timing of setting the production content, a process for postponing the timing for setting the next production content is executed. It may be configured.

  By comprising in this way, the next production can be set corresponding to the production mode already displayed by the process performed by the 2nd control device (display control device 114), and a player can be set. It is possible to perform the performance continuously without giving a sense of incongruity. In this case, when it is determined that the processing result output from the second control device (display control device 114) is out of the allowable range, the processing result is wider than the error range set as the allowable range. If it is within the limit range, and the determination result is within the limit range, it is possible to continue to set the effect by performing the above-described correction. It is good to forcibly end the production without performing correction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the expectation level effect setting process (S3808) will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the contents of the expectation level effect setting process (S3808). In this expectation level effect setting process (S3808), by changing the display mode of the expected level display mode displayed during the special symbol variation effect, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation of this time has been won. This effect is suggested to the player (see FIGS. 102 and 103).

  In this control example, three types of expectation degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 (see FIG. 102A) are displayed as the expectation degree effect corresponding to the passage of time of the special symbol variation. And among each expectation degree display mode, the expectation rise mode Dk4 for changing any display mode to a display mode with high expectation is displayed, and any one of the expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 is displayed. The effect is executed so that the variable is variable. Moreover, the process which sets the display timing which sets the timing when the expectation rise aspect Dk4 is displayed is also performed.

  Here, in this control example, since the timing at which the above-described three types of expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are displayed is different, the expectation rises depending on the timing at which the expectation rise mode Dk4 is displayed. The target of the expectation display mode whose display mode varies depending on the mode Dk4 can be varied. As a result, even when the same expectation level increase mode Dk4 is used, different presentation contents can be obtained by changing the timing at which the expectation level increase mode Dk4 is displayed, and the storage capacity of the image data is reduced. can do.

  In this case, it is preferable that only a still image (for example, a character image) with a small amount of image data is displayed in correspondence with an expectation display mode that increases the expectation. Thereby, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation with a small amount of data.

  Furthermore, in this example of control, the display mode used as the reference | standard of three types of expectation display modes Dk1-Dk3 according to the expectation degree production mode level is predetermined. Thereby, the display mode of three types of expectation display modes Dk1-Dk3 comprised from a some combination can be set, and the processing load of a display process can be reduced. Moreover, since the reference display mode (reference display mode) is determined according to the expectation level effect mode level, it is possible to prevent the degree of expectation from increasing.

  In addition, it is set according to the final display mode (display mode that can be displayed after the end of the expected level effect) and the expected level effect mode level of the three types of expected level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 set based on the variation pattern. When the expected display mode is different from the reference display mode, the expected level increase mode Dk4 is displayed, so that the player already shows a high level of expectations. An effect can be executed while expecting the display mode of the expectation level display mode to change to a display mode that shows a higher level of expectation.

  When the expectation degree effect setting process (S3808) is executed, first, the current expectation degree is selected based on the expectation degree selection table 222i (S4201), and then based on the expectation degree effect selection table 222j, the reference display mode is selected. The expectation level effect mode level for setting is selected (S4202). After selecting the expectation level effect mode level, the display mode of each expectation level display mode predetermined for the expectation level effect mode level and the actual expectation level effect mode (each expectation level set based on the variation pattern) The difference from the display mode of the mode is extracted (S4203).

  When the process of S4203 is completed, it is determined whether there is a difference (S4204). If it is determined that there is a difference, a difference is calculated for each expectation display mode (S4205), and based on the presence or absence of the calculated difference. The display timing of the expectation increase mode Dk4 is determined (S4206). Next, the difference for each expectation degree display mode is summed (S4207), and the display content (display mode, display timing) of the expectation rise mode is determined based on the summed difference (S4208), and the expectation effect is displayed. The display expectation degree production command is set (S4209), and a good display expectation level target aspect notification command for notifying the expectation degree display aspect that is the target of the expected degree increase aspect is set (S4210).

  The processing of S4208 described above will be specifically described. First, the display mode determination process for determining the display mode (for example, “3UP”) corresponding to the difference value added by the processing of S4207 is performed by the display mode determination unit. Executed. Also, the expectation level display mode in which the difference is generated is determined by the difference determination means, and a plurality of timings at which the expected level display mode can be set is determined based on the determination result, and among the determined plurality of timings Is selected based on the degree of expectation selected with reference to the expectation degree selection table 222i. As a result, the difference between the display content of the expectation level display mode set in the process of S4202 and the display content of the expected level display mode set in the process of S4203 can be complemented by an expectation increase effect. Therefore, since the expectation increase mode Dk4 can be set by setting one timing, it is possible to increase variations in performance without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the above-described example, the display mode of each expectation level display mode is determined first, and the content of the expected level display mode Dk4 is set based on the value corresponding to the difference. The display mode of the expectation level display mode Dk4 is set based on the expected level previously selected with reference to the expected level selection table 222i, and the display content of each expected level display mode is determined based on the set content. You may comprise as follows.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 152, the countdown effect setting process (S3810) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the contents of the countdown effect setting process (S3810). This countdown effect setting process (S3810) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 140) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the received change pattern is a change pattern for executing the countdown effect. As a suggestion effect for suggesting to the player the execution timing of the specific effect that is executed during the variable display, the countdown effect that accurately notifies the execution timing of the specific effect A process of setting an effect mode, a process of setting an effect mode of a precursor effect for suggesting that a countdown effect is executed, and a specific effect determining process of determining a specific effect as a target of the countdown effect are executed. To do.

  When the countdown effect setting process (S3810) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the precursor setting flag 223t is set to ON (S4301). When it is determined that the sign setting flag 223t is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4301: No), the suggested effect can be executed among the plurality of specific effects included in the current variation pattern. One specific effect set at the timing is set (S4302). That is, among the specific effects (specific effects a and b (see FIG. 100 (b))) other than the specific effect (specific effect c (see FIG. 101)) executed at a timing when it is difficult to execute the suggestion effect, Set either one.

  When the processing of S4302 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the current variation pattern is the variation pattern that has been won (S4303). When it is determined that the current variation pattern is the winning variation pattern (S4303: Yes), the indication of a sign a (timing 10 seconds after the start of variation (FIG. 100 (b)) (See S4304), and in the process of S4303, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is a winning variation pattern that has not been won (S4303: No), A precursor display b (a timing 17 seconds after the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 100B)) is set (S4305). That is, in the present control example, the start timing of the suggestion effect (the start timing of the precursor effect) that suggests the execution timing of the specific effect can be set based on the lottery result (the determination result).

  In addition, in the example mentioned above, although the structure which sets the start timing (start timing of a precursor effect) of the suggestion effect is used based on the lottery result (the determination result of the change) of the change, based on other conditions The start timing of the suggestion effect (the start timing of the sign effect) may be set. For example, the operation result of the player on the frame button 22 or the determination of the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. It is configured to set the start timing of the suggestion effect (the start timing of the predecessor effect) based on the result (prefetch result), the timing result of the time measuring means (for example, real time clock), the past game history, etc. You may do it.

  In this manner, a plurality of timings (points where the suggestion effect can be started) that can be set as the start timing of the suggestion effect (prediction effect) are prepared in one change display (variation pattern), and the various conditions described above are satisfied. By using a configuration in which one of a plurality of suggestive effect startable points is set based on this, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the suggested effect that is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the process of S4304 or S4305, when the start timing of the precursor effect (suggest effect) is set, next, the countdown period is set based on the start timing of the specific effect and the start timing of the precursor effect (suggest effect) ( S4306).

  When this process is specifically described with reference to FIG. 100B, the specific effect that is the target of the suggested effect in the current variation display in the process of S4302 is executed 30 seconds after the start of the change. When the precursor display a (timing 10 seconds after the start of change (see FIG. 100 (b))) is set as the start timing of the precursor effect in the process of S4304, the countdown period is 7 Second is set, and the specific effect that is the target of the suggestion effect in the current variation display in the process of S4302 is set to the specific effect a (specific effect that is executed 30 seconds after the start of the change), and the prelude effect in the process of S4305 When the indication b (timing 17 seconds after the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 100B)) is set as the start timing of 3 seconds is set as the down period.

  Next, the start timing of the countdown effect (the display timing of the countdown effect) is calculated based on the start timing of the specific effect and the set countdown period, and the start timing of the precursor effect and the display timing of the countdown effect An interval, that is, a precursor effect period in which the precursor effect is executed is calculated (S4307). Next, in the processing of S4307, it is determined whether or not the calculated interval (precursor effect period) is within 15 seconds (S4308). If it is within 15 seconds (S4308: Yes), the effect mode (precursor effect) When the short production mode is set as the production mode (S4309) and it is determined that the interval (precursor production period) is not within 15 seconds (longer than 15 seconds) (S4308: No), the long production is performed as the precursor production mode. A mode is set (S4310).

  When the process of S4309 or S4310 is finished, a display countdown effect command corresponding to the set mode (specific effect mode, countdown effect mode, precursor effect mode) is set (S4311), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the sign setting flag 223t is set to ON (S4301: Yes), that is, in the winning information command process (see S3210 in FIG. 141), the sign effect is already executed (multiple When the precursor effect is executed across the variable display), the multiple variable effect setting process (S4312) is executed, and then the process of S4311 described above is executed, and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 153, the contents of the multiple variation effect setting process (S4312) will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the multiple variation effect setting process (S4312). In this multi-variation effect setting process (S4312), a prelude effect continuous execution process for continuously executing the predecessor effect executed during the previous variation display and a countdown effect for the specific effect corresponding to the sign effect are set. Processing to be executed.

  When the multiple variation effect setting process (S4312) is executed, first, the specific effect C (see FIG. 101) is set as the specific effect (S4401), and the countdown period is set to 3 seconds (S4402). Then, a display precursor command is set (S4403). The display precursor command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the display precursor command, the display control device 114 displays the precursor effect on the third symbol display device 81 simultaneously with the start of the current variation (including a time difference that the player cannot identify). By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the sign effect continuously from the previous variation display without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  Although detailed description is omitted, the display control device 114 of this control example determines whether or not the sign effect is displayed at the timing when the variable display ends (the sign setting flag 223t is turned on from the sound lamp control device 113). A means for determining that a command indicating that it has been set has been received), and a sign effect that is being executed when it is determined by the determination means that the sign effect is being displayed at the timing when the variable display ends. When the presentation data storage area that temporarily stores the data together with the time data indicating the timing when the change ends, and when the display precursor command is received, the precursor presentation data stored in the presentation data storage area is Resumption display means for resuming and displaying from the time point when the fluctuation display of the image is finished, and a prelude effect over a plurality of fluctuations When you run, directing a series of aura (eg, effect (see FIG. 98 (a)) to run toward the car to the destination) can be performed without causing cut Interrupting.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the display precursor command is output as the display variation pattern command indicating the variation display of the special symbol, so that a plurality of variations corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol are straddled. It is possible to perform display processing of effects (continuous effects) executed in. Therefore, the effect of the period until the special symbol variation is completed is displayed based on the contents of the variation pattern command received every time the processing of the conventional display control device 114, that is, the special symbol variation display is executed. A continuous effect can be executed using the processing, and the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced. In such a configuration, when executing a continuous effect that continues the dynamic display even during the special symbol stop period (symbol determination period (for example, 0.5 seconds)), based on the variation pattern command A continuous effect having a length obtained by adding the above-described symbol determination period to the calculated variation time is set. Thereby, it is possible to smoothly execute a continuous effect during the symbol determination period of the special symbol, that is, during the period between successive variation patterns.

  In addition, when a precursor effect is executed across a plurality of fluctuations, a configuration other than the present control example may be used as long as it can be executed without interrupting a series of precursor effects. The precursor effect is executed without setting the precursor effect period (end timing of the precursor effect) in the previous variable display, and the end timing of the precursor effect is set based on the timing at which the countdown effect is executed in the current variable display. You may comprise.

  Returning to FIG. 153, the description will be continued. When the processing of S4403 is completed, next, a display countdown effect command is set (S4404), the precursor setting flag 223t is set to OFF (S4405), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the effect update process (S3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the effect update process (S3112). This effect update process (S3112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is controlled based on the elapsed time regardless of the variation of the special symbol. This is a process for setting an effect.

  When the effect update process (S3112) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is greater than 0 (S5101). When it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is not larger than 0 (0) (S5101: No), that is, when the elapsed time is not counted, processing related to the measurement of the elapsed time is performed. The process skips to S5108.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is greater than 0 (S5101: Yes), the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is decremented by 1 (S5102), and then the value of the elapsed time counter 223k after the subtraction is Whether it is 0 is determined (S5103). Here, when it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is not 0 (1 or more) (S5103: No), the process proceeds to S5108 as it is.

  In the process of S5103, when it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is 0 (S5103: Yes), next, the display extension flag 223i is set to OFF (S5104), and the special symbol is currently changing. It is determined whether it exists (S5105). In the process of S5105, when it is determined that the special symbol is not currently changing (S5105: No), the normal display effect for notifying the display control device 114 that the extended display of the jackpot ending display is to be ended. A command is set (S5106), and the process proceeds to S5107.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5105 that the special symbol is currently changing (S5105: Yes), the process of S5106 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5107. By configuring in this way, when the extended effect (the effect of extending and displaying the jackpot ending display) is executed after the jackpot ends, a time condition (4 seconds elapses) is one of the end conditions of the extended effect ) Is established, if the special symbol has not changed, the extension effect is immediately ended. If the special symbol has changed, the display extension flag 223i is set to OFF, and the next special symbol change starts. Sometimes the extended production ends. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the extension effect suddenly ends during the change of the special symbol and confuses the player, and a complicated effect setting process in the case where the extension effect ends during the change of the special symbol. Since there is no need to execute, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the process of S5108, a process related to updating of other effects is executed. Specifically, for example, processing related to performance based on time information acquired from a real-time clock (RTC) is executed (S5108). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

<Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 155 to 172, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. In addition, when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply apparatus 115 to the display control apparatus 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 155). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 155) (S6105), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 155), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all configured by DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM 234d does not store all the boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 156, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in step S6101. In addition, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S6102.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present control example, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S6005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 170A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S7702 in FIG. 170A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V-interrupt process (see FIG. 157 (b)), the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 157 (b)) and the simple display setting process so that the power-on image is drawn. (Refer to S6309 in FIG. 157 (b)) is executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 (start winning), and the main instruction is to start the variation effect. When the control device 110 is connected via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on is displayed immediately during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is displayed. It can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 157 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 157 (b). FIG. 157 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 125) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 157 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S6301: No), it means that transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, the normal effect image is displayed instead of the power-on image. In order to display on the display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and a display demo command or When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 158 to 166.

  In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305) are used. 125 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete The stop type table corresponding to “off” and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 158 to 166, details of the above-described command determination process (S6302) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 158, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S6405), the process returns to S6401.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 159 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command process, first, it is determined whether or not the indication effect flag 233m is set to ON (S6501). Here, when it is determined that the precursor effect flag 233m is set to ON (S6501: Yes), that is, when the precursor effect is executed continuously from the previous change, the precursor effect is executed from the start of the change. Therefore, the variable display data table corresponding to the sign effect is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6502), and the sign effect flag 233m is set off (S6503).

  Specifically, from the display data table set during the previous change and the time data set in the display data table, the displayed period information for indicating the period displayed during the previous change is displayed. A storage means for temporarily storing the extracted extracted information is provided, and in the processing of S6502, the continuation of the precursor effect executed during the previous special figure change is executed in the current special figure change. . Thereby, even if the sign effect is executed across a plurality of changes, the sign effect can be displayed smoothly.

  In this control example, the contents of the precursor effect executed during the previous fluctuation are stored, and the continuation of the stored warning effect is executed in the current fluctuation, but other configurations are used. For example, the display data table corresponding to the indication effect is divided into a plurality of effect blocks corresponding to the passage of time, the effect block executed during the previous change is determined, and the previous change You may comprise so that the production | presentation block set next to the production | generation block performed inside may be performed. Thereby, management of the precursor effect performed over a some fluctuation | variation can be simplified.

  Further, in this control example, since the precursor effect that is executed across a plurality of variations is configured so that only the precursor effect for two variations can be executed, the precursor effect flag 233m is set to ON in the process of S6501. In this case, since the current change is the end change of the sign effect, the sign effect flag 233m is set to OFF in the process of S6503. For example, the sign effect is equal to or more than the change of the special symbol 3 If it is configured to be executed across the counter, a counter (for example, a precursor effect counter) that can determine the period (the number of times the special symbol has changed) in which the precursor effect flag 233m is set to ON. And storage means (for example, effect continuation count storage means) for storing how many fluctuations the executed precursor effect lasts, and each time the variation pattern command process is executed Then, the value of the precursor effect counter is updated, it is determined whether the updated value matches the value stored in the effect continuation number storage means, and if it is determined that it matches, the precursor effect flag 233m is set to off. What is necessary is just to comprise.

  In the process of S6501, when it is determined that the indication effect flag 233m is not ON (OFF) (S6501: No), or when the process of S6503 is completed, the change effect indicated by the display change pattern command is next. A variation display data table corresponding to the pattern is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from a variation effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S6504).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in this control example, by setting the change display data table corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6504 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6505).

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6504, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6506), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6507). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6508), the variation pattern command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command process (see FIG. 159 (a)), in the display setting process, the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6507 is updated, and the display data table buffer 233d is processed by the process of S6504. The drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted from the set variable display data table, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, S6505. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the above process, and the image data of the necessary sprite in the set fluctuation display data table is Character ROM2 in advance From 4 to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  Also, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set in the process of S6503, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table ends. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In this control example, when the precursor effect flag 233m is set to ON (S6501: Yes), each of the variation display data table corresponding to the precursor effect and the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern command. Is set in the corresponding display data table buffer, and the display data corresponding to the indication effect is preferentially displayed at the place where the display data overlaps. Specifically, the layer in which the prelude effect is executed and displayed is prioritized over the layer in which the normal variation effect is executed and displayed, and when the display process is executed for each layer, the predecessor The content displayed on the effect layer is visible to the player.

  It should be noted that the mode corresponding to the sign effect may be displayed with priority over the mode corresponding to the normal effect. As a method other than the above-described example, the display data for the sign effect and the received variation pattern command may be used. It is also possible to discriminate the display data for normal effects set based on this and set only the display data to be visually recognized by the player in the display data table buffer.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display variation type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and the processing returns to S6401.

  Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 159 (b). FIG. 159 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to stop type information (one of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, front / rear reach, reach other than front / rear reach, complete release) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. (S6603), and this process ends.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the task process (S6304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S6603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S6602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as shown in the present control example, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete disconnection, in fact, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops complete disconnection. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 158, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display stop type command in the processing of S6406 (S6406: No), it is then determined whether there is a display hit related command among the unprocessed commands. This display hit-related command is a command that is referred to when a jackpot is won. Specifically, a display opening command for indicating the start of a jackpot, a display round command, a display ending, It is executed when a command or the like is received.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 160, the details of the hit-related command processing (S6409) will be described. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit related command processing (S6409). This hit-related command processing (S6409) executes processing corresponding to the display opening command, the display round number command, and the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  When the winning related command process (S6409) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command (S6701). If there is a display opening command (S6701: Yes), the opening command process is executed. (S6702), and this process ends. The opening command process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 161 (a). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6701 that there is no display opening command (S6701: No), it is then determined whether there is a display round number command (S6703).

  In the process of S6703, when it is determined that there is a display round number command (S6703: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6704), and this process ends. The round number command processing (S6704) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 161 (b). If it is determined in step S6703 that there is no display round number command (S6703: No), it is determined whether there is a display ending command (S6705). If there is a display ending command (S6705: Yes), an ending command process is executed (S6706), and this process ends. The ending command process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6705 that there is no display ending command (S6705: No), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 161 (a), the opening command process (S6702) executed in the hit-related command process of FIG. 160 will be described. FIG. 161 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is read from an opening effect table storage area (not shown) in the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S6801 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6805), the opening command process is terminated, and the present process is terminated.

  By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6804, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6801, The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, and the contents of one frame image to be displayed next are specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S8702. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set opening display data table is stored in advance in the character ROM 234. As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, it produces a big hit effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) due to its slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data to be used to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Since the display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing when the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, it indicates the first round. If image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting is required after the opening effect is finished until the round effect is started. There is a risk that time will be generated, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped, or to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  In addition, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is matched with the timing when all of the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 are completed (for example, 15 rounds, 10 rounds, 5 rounds, 2 rounds). Since the audio lamp control device 113 receives the display ending command, the round effect ends when the image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. After that, there is a lot of waiting time until the ending effect is started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped or feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in this control example, when a display opening command is received, transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from that point, and until the jackpot variation display is ended in the third symbol display device 81. Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect ends. Thereby, when the opening effect is finished in the 3rd symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started immediately in the 3rd symbol display device 81, and all the round effects in the 3rd symbol display device 81 (for 16 rounds). Or 2 rounds), the ending effect can be started immediately on the 3rd symbol display device 81, which may cause the player to feel uneasy about whether or not the operation has stopped or feel uncomfortable. Absent. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in this control example, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the opening effect is started therefrom, Control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect ends before the variation effect that is a big hit ends in the third symbol display device 81. Thus, when the variation effect that is a big hit in the 3rd symbol display device 81 ends, the opening effect can be started immediately in the 3rd symbol display device 81, so the player is concerned that the operation has not stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Next, the round number command processing (S6704) will be described with reference to FIG. 161 (b). FIG. 161 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the round number processing, first, the round number display data table is read from the round number effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6902). Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6905), the round number command processing is ended, and this processing is ended.

  Next, the ending command process (S6706) will be described with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending command process (S6706). This ending command process (S6706) executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command process (S6706), first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is used for the ending effect in the data table storage area 233b. The data is read from a table storage area (not shown) and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7001). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S7002). Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7001, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S7003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S7004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S7005), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this ending command process, the ending effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the special symbol jackpot ends, so that the player recognizes that the jackpot has ended. Can be made.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S6408 that there is no display-related command (S6408: No), it is then determined whether there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is an image change command (S6410: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 163, details of the back image change command process (S6411) will be described. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing (S6411). This rear image change command processing (S6411) is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the back image change command processing (S6411), first, the back image change flag is set to ON (S7101). Thereby, it is possible to determine the change of the back image in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7603 in FIG. 171). Of the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back surfaces A to C and special back surfaces A to C corresponding to time effects), the back surface corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command. The image discrimination flag is turned on, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the other back image type is set to off (S7102), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process (see S7603 in FIG. 171), when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S7101 is turned on, it is changed from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S7102 after the change. The back image type of is specified. If the specified back image type is back B or back C, the image data corresponding to the back image is not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Note that when the rear image type after the change is the rear A, all image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235, and therefore no image transfer is performed.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back A to C and the special back A to C corresponding to the time effect is displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, From the back image discrimination flag set by the processing of S7102, the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and further, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified over time, and the range of the back image is specified. The RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data corresponding to is stored and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, two or more back image change commands are not stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command may change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a rear image change command. In the processing of S7102, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S6410 that there is no rear image change command (S6410: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6412). If (S6412: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 163 (b), details of the error command processing (S6413) will be described. FIG. 163 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing (S6413). This error command process (S6413) executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the error command process (S6413), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred is set to ON (S7201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set off (S7202). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7201, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S7202 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON in the process of S7202. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Returning to the description of FIG. If it is determined in step S6412 that there is no error command (S6412: No), it is then determined whether there is a continuation value related command (S6414). If it is determined that there is a continuation value related command (S6414: Yes), a continuation value related command process (S6415) is executed, S6401 and other processes corresponding to unprocessed commands are executed (S6420), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 164, details of the continuation value related command processing (S6415) will be described. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the continuation value related command processing (S6415). This continuation value related command process (S6415) executes a process corresponding to the continuation value related command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the continuation value related command processing (S6415), first, a continuation value display data table corresponding to the received command is determined, set in the display data table buffer (S7301), and the sum stored in the sum value storage area 233k. The value (total value set at the time of previous command reception) is read (S7302), and a difference from the total value indicated by the command received this time is calculated (S7303).

  Then, a display data table indicating an attack pattern corresponding to the difference calculated in the process of S7303 is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7304), and the value of the command received this time is stored in the total value storage area 233k. (S7305). The total value storage area 233k is configured to be able to store the total value indicated by the command received during the period in which the continuous effect is being executed, in the order in which the command is received. Further, the difference value calculated in the process of S7303 can also be stored.

  Thereby, for example, when the value of the received sum value continuously satisfies the predetermined condition (for example, when 7 is continuously added to any one of the sum values), or calculated in the process of S7303. When the difference value is a predetermined number (for example, 300 or more) continuously, a special attack pattern display data table can be set.

  After the processing of S7305 is completed, the contents are cleared by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7306). Then, based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7301 and S7304, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S7307), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S7308). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S7309), the continuation value related command process is terminated, and the present process is terminated.

  As described above, in this control example, only the command indicating the total value of the continuation value (HP value) is output from the sound lamp control device 113, and the total value set in the previous continuation value related command processing is output. And the value of the difference is discriminate | determined by the display control apparatus 114 side, and the display mode (effect mode) displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 based on the discrimination | determination result is performed in the display control apparatus 114. Running. With this configuration, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced while diversifying the display of the continuation value (HP value) in the continuation effect (battle effect).

  In this control example, the sound lamp control device 113 has a means for setting a sum value, and the display control device 114 calculates a difference between the sum value set last time and the sum value set this time. And a means for setting a display mode (attack pattern, subtraction number display) corresponding to the difference calculated by the difference calculating means, but a structure capable of reducing the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 For example, the sound lamp control device 113 has means for setting a first continuation value (a continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f) in order to vary the continuation value (HP value). All other means (means for setting the second continuation value (continuation value selected using the continuation value sub-selection table 222g) for changing the continuation value (HP value)) Difference calculating means for calculating a difference between the set sum value and the currently set sum value, and means for setting a display mode (attack pattern, subtraction number display) corresponding to the difference calculated by the difference calculating means) The display control device 114 may have a configuration, or among the above-described units, only the attack pattern may be set by the sound lamp control device 113.

  Returning to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6414 that there is no continuation value related command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether there is an expectation effect related command (S6416), and it is determined that there is an expectation effect related command. (S6416: Yes), an expectation degree effect related command process (S6417) is executed, and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 165, details of the expectation level effect related command processing (S6417) will be described. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the expected degree effect related command processing (S6417). This expectation level effect related command process (S6417) is to execute a process corresponding to the expectation level related command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the expectation degree effect related command process (S6417), first, a display data table corresponding to the effect indicated by the received expectation degree effect related command is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7401). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S7401 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7402).

  Based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7402, the time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S7403), and the pointer 233f is set. It is initialized to 0 (S7404), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In this control example, in the expectation level effect setting process (see S3803 in FIG. 151) set and executed by the audio lamp control device 113, the display mode (see FIG. 102 (a)) at the start point of the expectation level effect is used. In order to notify a display expectation effect command for indicating a display aspect (see FIG. 103 (a)) that is an effect result (final display aspect), and an expectation display aspect to be notified in the expectation effect. And a display expected degree target mode notification command for indicating the display mode (see FIG. 103B) are set including information indicating the display timing.

  In the expectation level effect-related command processing (S6417 in FIG. 165), the display mode corresponding to each received command is set to be displayed at the display timing corresponding to the display timing information included in each command. Specifically, a display mode (see FIG. 102A) at the start point of the expectation effect is displayed in correspondence with the timing when the expectation effect is started, and then a display mode corresponding to the expectation increase effect. (See FIG. 102B) is displayed. After that, when the command indicating the current expectation increase effect includes information for notifying the expected display mode to be notified, the display corresponding to the display timing information included in the command is displayed. Display with timing. Thereafter, the display mode (see FIG. 103 (a)) which is the effect result (final display mode) is displayed.

  In addition, when it is comprised so that a player can select the expectation display mode used as the object of an expectation rise effect among a plurality of expectation display modes displayed, the selection result (correct answer or A command for indicating “incorrect answer” is output from the sound lamp control device 113, and the presence or absence of display of the final display mode is determined based on the content of the received command. That is, when the player's selection result is correct, each piece of information (information for indicating the display mode and information for indicating the display timing) included in the display expectation degree effect command is used as the expectation degree effect related command process (S6417). If the player's selection result is incorrect, the information included in the display expectation effect command (information for indicating the display mode, information for indicating the display timing) The setting information related to the display of the final display mode is cleared, and the display process is executed so that the final display mode is not displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 158, the description will be continued. In the process of S6416, when it is determined that there is no expectation effect related command (S6416: No), it is then determined whether there is a countdown effect related command (S6417). In the process of S6417, when it is determined that there is a countdown effect related command (S6417: Yes), the countdown effect related command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 166, the countdown effect-related command processing (S6419) will be described. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the contents of the countdown effect related command processing (S6419). This countdown effect related command process (S6419) executes a process corresponding to the countdown effect related command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the countdown effect related command processing (S6419), first, it is determined whether or not there is an additional sign command for display (S7501). If it is determined that there is an additional sign command for display (S7501: Yes), that is, the previous change In the case of executing the indication effect continued from the display, an additional indication data table corresponding to the indication indicated by the display additional indication command is set in the display data table buffer (S7502), and the display data table set in S7502 is supported. The transfer data table to be determined is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7503).

  Based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7503, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S7504), and the pointer 233f is set. It is initialized to 0 (S7509), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7501 that there is no display use indication command (S7501: No), a countdown effect data table corresponding to the received display countdown effect command is determined and set in the display data table buffer. (S7506), a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S7506 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7507).

  Based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S7507, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S7508), and the pointer 233f is set. It is initialized to 0 (S7509), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 158, the description will be continued. In the process of S6418, when it is determined that there is no countdown effect related command (S6418: No), it is determined whether there are other display commands. If it is determined that there are other display commands, Corresponding processing is executed (S6420). Here, as other display commands, for example, a display reserved ball number command indicating increase / decrease in the number of held balls, or an effect (so-called continuous notice) for a specific change across a plurality of changes is shown. There are a continuous notice command for display and a display time effect command indicating a time effect based on a measurement result by a time measuring means (so-called real time clock) included in the sound lamp control device 113.

  When the display hold ball number command is received, the new hold ball number flag is set to ON. Then, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received reserved ball number command for display, and the number of reserved balls displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is updated by updating the reserved ball number counter based on the extracted reserved ball number. Update display. When the display continuous notice command is received, the new continuous notice command flag is set to ON. Then, the distribution between the back of the school of fish and the back of the bubble is extracted from the continuous notice command for display. Next, the continuous notice information storage area is updated based on the extracted distribution, and the continuous notice corresponding to the updated content is displayed.

  In the process of S6401, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processes of S6402 to S6420 are executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6420 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination End the process.

  The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157 (b)) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extraction is performed, and fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 159 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 159 (b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, are executed. The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 159 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Since the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, the processing of S6502 In the processing, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 167 to FIG. 169, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 167, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7601). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7601: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the processes of S7602 and S7603 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7604. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7601: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7602), an error occurrence flag Is ON (S7603). If the error occurrence flag is ON (S7603: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed based on the error determination flag (S7604).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the contents of the warning image setting process. When the warning image setting process is executed, the warning image data is developed based on the error determination flag (S7701), the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7702), and the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, if the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7603: No), the process of S7604 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7605.

  In S7605 of FIG. 167, pointer update processing is executed (S7605). Here, the details of the pointer update process (S7605) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process (S7605). This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7801). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S7801, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S7802). As a result, if it is End information (S7782: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7803). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7803: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7804), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7805), and this processing ends. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7803 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a display data table for demonstration (S7803: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S7806), the process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7802, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7802: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 167, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7606). Here, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the process of S7606 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and the display coordinate position and Various parameters necessary for drawing such as an enlargement ratio and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S7607), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7608). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7608: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7608: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S7609).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7609: No), the final display effect has not been performed yet, and the final display effect has been set. The process of S7615 is executed. In the process of S7610, the fixed display data table is read from the fixed display effect table storage area in the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7610), and then Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, the content is cleared (S7611). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7612).

  When the process of S7612 ends, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7613). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7614), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7615), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233d to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7615 is used to identify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task processing, until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is identified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S7615 and the identification is performed. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7609, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7609: Yes), the process of S7616 to S7621 is executed to set the display mode of the demonstration effect. In the process of S7616, it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S7616). If the demo display flag is off (S7616: No), the display data table for demonstration is read and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7617), and then Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The contents are cleared (S7618). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7619).

  When the process of S7619 is completed, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7620), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7621), this process is terminated, and V Return to processing.

  As a result, even if a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the fixed display of the third symbol, the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display opening command is received. If not, the drawing content can be set so that the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 170 and FIG. 171, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 170 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7901). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7901: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Is executed (S7902), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 170 (b).

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S7901, that is, if it is off (S7901: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7903), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7902), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 170 (b). FIG. 170 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7902).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S8001), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S8001: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S8002). In the process of S8002, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S8002 that the transfer process has not ended (S8002: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S8002: Yes), the process proceeds to S8003. Also, as a result of the process of S8001, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S8001: No), the process proceeds to S8003.

  In the process of S8003, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S8003). If there is untransferred resident target image data (S8003: No), that A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the image data to be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 (S8004), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  On the other hand, if all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S8003 (S8003: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S8005), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 157 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 157 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 158 to 166) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 167 to 169) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. Displays the normal image. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) (see S7901: No in FIG. 170A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S7903), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7903).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7605) of the display setting process (S6303) executed previously is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S8101). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S8102). If it is transfer data information (S8102: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S8103, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S8104), and the process proceeds to step S8105.

  In the process of S8102, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S8102: No), the processes of S8103 and S8104 are skipped and the process proceeds to S8105. In the processing of S8105, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S8105), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S8105: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S8106).

  In the process of S 8106, when an image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process in S8106 (S8106: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, and therefore the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S8106: Yes), the process proceeds to S8107. Also, as a result of the process of S8105, when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S8105: No), the process proceeds to S8107.

  In the processing of S8107, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S8107). If the transfer start flag is on (S8107: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S8108), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S8103 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S8113. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S8107: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S8109). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S8109: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S8109: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S8110), it is provided for each back image type. Among the back image discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S8111). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state, and the transfer destination ( The head address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S8112), and the process proceeds to S8113.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the corresponding image data is all resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the processing of S8111, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer processing is ended as it is.

  In the process of S8113, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S8113). The determination in the process of S8113 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S8113 (S8113: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S8113 (S8113: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S8114). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S8114, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S8115), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed previously, and as a result, the process is indicated by the display stop type command. If it is determined that the stop type information is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the jackpot effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In this control example, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 172, the details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 125 is generated (S8201). That is, in the process of S8201, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the head address (storage head address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S8202). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. To send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is developed, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S8202, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S8203). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 157 (b)) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in the first control example, in the third symbol variation display for showing the player the lottery result of the special symbol, a specific effect (for example, “PUSH display for operating the frame button 22” is displayed. As a suggestion effect for informing the timing of occurrence of “)”, a countdown effect set based on the timing at which the specific effect is set, and a period from the start of the suggestion effect until the start of the countdown effect And a sign production set to be executed.

  Therefore, it is possible to freely set a period for executing the suggestion effect (a period for executing the precursor effect) as compared with a case where the suggestion effect for informing the timing at which the specific effect occurs is executed for a predetermined period. .

  In the first control example, the timing for starting the suggestion effect and the specific effect that is the target of the suggestion effect can be selected from a plurality. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set various periods during which the suggestion effect is executed by various combinations.

  Furthermore, it is determined whether the interval between the start timing of the suggestion effect and the timing at which the specific effect is executed is a predetermined period (for example, 15 seconds). Based on the determination result, the indication effect or the countdown effect is determined. It is configured to be variable. Thereby, based on the content of the effect performed, a player can play a game, predicting the effect performed from now on.

  In addition, the appearance of the sign effect and the countdown effect is also variable based on the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a win, it is configured such that a long period (for example, 7 seconds) is easily set as the period during which the countdown effect is executed. Thereby, it is possible to play a game while expecting that the current variation display corresponds to the special symbol that was won by the countdown effect.

  In addition, you may use the aspect other than the aspect of this 1st control example as an aspect of the production | presentation set based on the lottery result of a special symbol, for example, when the lottery result of a special symbol is win, a suggestion production period is long. A mode may be set. In this case, it is configured such that a part of the effect mode is variable according to the period during which the suggestion effect is executed (the suggestion effect period), the length of the suggestion effect period for the player, and the lottery result of the special symbol. For example, the color of the display mode of a character or the like displayed during the suggestive effect can be changed according to the length of the elapsed period (blue → yellow → red → rainbow color). You may comprise so that it may be comprised, or it may comprise so that the stage parameter | index (for example, expectation degree) displayed during suggestion production may be changed according to the length of an elapsed period.

  Further, each of the plurality of specific effects may be set so that the degree of expectation for jackpot is different, and the degree of expectation for jackpot may be varied depending on the target specific effect. In this case, a place where a specific effect can be executed is provided at a plurality of points during the variable display period, and the special effect executed at the point that is the target of the suggestion effect among the plurality of points is selected by drawing a special symbol. You may comprise so that it may set based on a result. As a result, even after the countdown effect is started and it is grasped at which timing (the point during the variable display period) the specific effect is executed for the player, the countdown effect is executed. It can be difficult to understand which effect is executed, and the suggestive effect can be enjoyed until the end.

  In the first control example, an effect executed as a precursor effect among the suggestive effects is used as an effect mode (effect mode indicating the execution timing of the countdown effect) for indicating the period of the warning effect. In this way, in addition to the effect for indicating the effect period to the player, for example, an effect mode for instructing the player of the content of the specific effect that is the target of the current suggestion effect, and the current variation display In this case, an effect mode (notification mode) for notifying the player that the countdown effect is executed may be set.

  Further, in the first control example, the suggestion effect start timing (precursor effect start timing) and the suggestion effect end timing (countdown effect end timing) are configured to be set separately, The suggestion effect can be executed so as to straddle a plurality of variable displays. Thereby, the start timing of the suggestion effect can be set during the previous change display even for the specific effect set at the initial point of the change display (for example, 5 seconds from the start of change). Thereby, the freedom degree at the time of setting a suggestion effect can be enlarged.

  In the case of using the above-described technique, based on the contents of a plurality of winning information already stored in reserve, a suggestion effect may be set so as to straddle a plurality of variable displays, or a special symbol variable display is executed. A means for discriminating a winning ball (a winning ball that will be the next variation) is provided, and when the remaining variation period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period, the suggestion effect is provided so as to straddle a plurality of variation displays. It may be set. In the latter case, it is difficult to store the reserved memory (when the variation time of the special symbol is short or when it is difficult for the ball to enter the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 140), and the special symbol is Even when the first hold memory (hold memory used for the next change) is generated during the change, the suggestive effect across the plurality of change displays can be executed. Thereby, the opportunity to perform a suggestion effect can be increased and the effect of an effect can be heightened.

  The variation time of special symbols is generally configured so that a long variation time is easily selected when winning a jackpot, and the longer the suggested performance period during which the suggested performance is executed to correspond to this, the greater the expected value of jackpot It is configured to be high. The conventional pachinko machine 10 configured as described above has a problem that the expected degree of jackpot for the current variation display is predicted at the timing when the suggestive effect is started. On the other hand, in the first control example, a plurality of points are provided for the timing when the suggestion effect is started and the timing when the suggestion effect ends, so that the suggestion effect period cannot be predicted from the timing when the suggestion effect starts. It is configured. Moreover, even if the suggestion effect period is the same, the period in which the precursor effect is executed and the period in which the countdown effect is executed are configured to be variable. Furthermore, as a specific effect that is the target of the suggestion effect, any one of the specific effects having different jackpot expectations can be selected.

  In the first control example configured as described above, even after the suggestion effect is started, this suggestion effect period, the target specific effect, the period of the precursor effect, and the period of the countdown effect Can be predicted at an early stage, and the production effect can be suppressed from deteriorating.

  In the first control example, the countdown display in which the numbers are regularly reduced (for example, every second) is used as the effect mode executed during the countdown effect. Any configuration may be used so long as it can be accurately notified to a person. For example, a plurality of sections are regularly filled (for example, every second), and a specific effect is executed after a predetermined period. May be. In this case, the number of divided areas is a display mode for indicating the period of the countdown effect. Moreover, the structure of those other than this may be sufficient.

  In the first control example, display data for a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 10 seconds) is stored in the storage area of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 as display data displayed during the countdown effect, and is executed this time. The display data corresponding to the period information indicating the period of the countdown effect set to the suggested effect is displayed. By having display data in this way, the storage capacity can be reduced.

  In the first control example, the suggestion effect end timing (countdown effect end timing) is configured to be set based on the specific effect start timing set in the target variation effect. The end timing of the effect only needs to coincide with the start timing of the specific effect. For example, in the case where the specific effect is executed for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), the setting is made based on the end timing of the specific effect. It may be configured.

  As described above, in the first control example, the end timing of the countdown effect is set based on the execution timing of the specific effect so that the end timing of the countdown effect executed as the suggestion effect matches the start timing of the specific effect. Then, the countdown effect period is set by calculating back the period (time) for executing the countdown effect from the set end timing. Thereby, the countdown effect of a predetermined period can be easily set corresponding to the execution timing of a specific effect.

  In the first control example described above, as the period for executing the suggestion effect, the precursor effect period in which the precursor effect is executed and the countdown effect period in which the countdown effect is executed are set in advance before the suggestion effect is executed. However, other methods may be used. For example, the timing at which the suggestive effect starts (timing at which the precursor effect starts) and the timing at which the suggestive effect ends (timing at which the countdown effect ends, that is, Only the timing at which the specific effect is started) may be set in advance, and the timing at which the indication effect is switched to the countdown effect may be set after the suggestion effect is executed.

  In this case, for example, display control may be executed so that the sign effect is switched to the countdown effect based on a predetermined operation performed on the frame button 22 during the sign effect. This makes it possible for the player to actively participate in the game so as to execute the countdown effect as soon as possible. Moreover, based on the lottery result of the special symbol, a period during which the countdown effect can be executed is determined in advance, and the timing at which a predetermined operation is performed on the frame button 22 during the warning effect can execute the countdown effect. It is preferable to configure so that the sign effect is switched to the countdown effect only at the timing, and the operation effect that operates the frame button 22 during the sign effect is executed at various timings. By comprising in this way, a player can be enthusiastically participated in the operation effect performed during a precursor effect, and the effect of an effect can be heightened.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that the pseudo countdown effect (pseudo countdown effect) which does not make a specific effect into object during a precursor effect may be performed. By executing this pseudo countdown effect, it is possible to make the player think that the precursor effect has ended, and it is difficult to predict the future development of the effect. In this way, the pseudo countdown effect can be performed while expecting that the executed countdown effect is pseudo, by configuring it so that it is easy to execute when the jackpot is won, Until the countdown effect (pseudo countdown effect) ends, it is possible to keep an eye on the effect that is being continuously executed.

  In the first control example described above, the length of the precursor effect period executed as the suggestive effect is determined, and the effect mode of the predictor effect period is set based on the determination result. A configuration in which the length to be executed is not discriminated may be used, and for example, an indication mode of the sign effect may be set based on the timing at which the suggestion effect is executed. In this case, since the length of the precursor effect period is not determined, an effect mode that does not give the player a sense of incongruity at any timing may be used as the effect mode executed as the precursor effect. It is preferable to use a dynamic display mode that is executed according to a certain rule, such as an effect in which a car continues to run on a road at a constant speed.

  By using such an effect mode, even if the precursor effect is executed without discriminating the length of the precursor effect period, it is possible to smoothly switch to the countdown effect without giving the player a sense of incongruity. Even in the case where such an effect mode is used, the display mode (for example, color) of a part of the effect mode (in the above-described example, a car) is changed according to the elapsed period of the sign effect as described above. Of course, it may be configured to be variable.

  Further, it may be configured to discriminate only the length of a part of the period instead of discriminating all the lengths of the precursor effect period in which the precursor effect is executed. For example, it may be configured to divide into the first sign production period of the first half part and the second sign production period of the second half part, and to determine the length of the period only for the second sign production period. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute a specific precursor effect only during a predetermined period (second predictor effect period) retroactive from the end timing of the precursor effect (the start timing of the countdown effect), and more smoothly The production can be switched from the sign production to the countdown production.

  As described above, in the first control example described above, the gaming state (probability change state (high probability, with electric support)) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability, without electric support) as the gaming state, An effect (battle effect) for indicating that the time-short state (low probability, with electric support) is set is used. By comprising in this way, it can alert | report to a player intelligibly that the gaming state advantageous to a player is continuing.

  Furthermore, the above-described battle effects are produced from an effect (battle reach) that suggests whether or not the gaming state advantageous to the player ends, and an effect (pre-battle effect) for determining the effect mode of the battle reach. It is composed. By configuring in this way, the battle is not performed in a period other than when the gaming state that is advantageous to the player actually ends (for example, when it is determined that the gaming state shifts to the normal state by lottery of special symbols). Since the performance can be continuously executed, the player has a sense of expectation that the gaming state advantageous to the player has continued and a sense of anxiety that seems to have ended the gaming state advantageous to the player. It is possible to continue playing games while holding them on.

  Furthermore, during the battle effect described above, an effect is performed in which the continuation value (HP value) for indicating whether or not a gaming state (advantageous state) advantageous to the player is continuously set is increased or decreased. . The continuation value (HP value) is configured to increase or decrease based on a currently set gaming state, a special symbol lottery result, or a remaining period in which an advantageous state is set.

  Here, when the increase / decrease pattern of the continuation value (HP value) described above is increased and an effect rich in variations is executed, the currently set gaming state, special symbol lottery result, or advantageous state is set. It is necessary to perform complicated management in which the remaining period and the displayed continuation value (HP value) are associated with each other. Such management increases the processing load of the pachinko machine 10, and it is required to increase production variations while reducing the processing load.

  Therefore, in the first control example, the above-described expected value (HP value) is set based on the currently set gaming state, the special symbol lottery result, the remaining period in which the advantageous state is set, or the like ( Continuation of the sum of the main continuation value (for example, the value of the 100th place) and the value set for the purpose of increasing the production variation (secondary continuation value (for example, the value of the 10th place)) It was configured to display as a value (HP value).

  Thus, the display pattern of the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be increased by adding together the value actually managed and set, and the value set effectively.

  In the first control example described above, a display mode (attack pattern) corresponding to the difference amount of the continuation value is displayed. By displaying this display mode, it is possible to visually notify the player of the increase / decrease of the continuation value, so that an easy-to-understand presentation can be executed.

  In the first control example, as a display mode (attack pattern) corresponding to the difference amount of the continuation value, “weak attack” as a display mode corresponding to a small difference amount (for example, a range of 50 to 150) and a large difference amount ( For example, it has “strong attack” as a display mode corresponding to a range of 350 to 550 and “medium attack” as a display mode corresponding to a difference amount (for example, a range of 151 to 349) therebetween. When the set display mode (attack pattern) is executed, a different effect is executed for each display mode, and then the continuation value is updated.

  That is, the player grasps the amount of decrease (difference value) in the continuation value (HP) by grasping the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and then concretely by the updated continuation value. To figure out the typical figures. By displaying in this order, it is possible to notify the player of information relating to the game step by step, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

  Further, in the first control example described above, when the display mode (attack pattern) described above is set in order to reduce the control load of the production, the main continuation is not the difference value of the combined continuation value (HP). The display mode (attack pattern) is set based on the difference value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the continuation value (continuation value before update, continuation value after update) or difference value pattern used when setting the display mode (attack pattern).

  As described above, when the display mode (attack pattern) based on the difference value of the continuation value (HP value) is set based on the difference value of the main continuation value, the continuation value on the display (third symbol) The difference value of the main continuation value and the sub continuation value displayed on the display device 81 does not match the difference value of the main continuation value, and is different from the apparent difference value range. There is a problem that a situation occurs in which (attack pattern) is set.

  In order to solve the above-described problem, in the first control example, when the value of the continuation value (HP) is continuously updated a plurality of times, the difference value of the continuation value (HP) on the display and the main continuation value Are set to have the same display mode (attack pattern). By configuring in this way, the above-described problem can be solved.

  Further, in the first control example, a main continuation value discriminating unit for discriminating the set main continuation value is provided, and the sub continuation value set for production is set based on the discrimination result of the main continuation value discriminating unit. The selection table for selecting is configured to be different. Specifically, when the value of the main continuation value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 200), a selection table in which “−20 to +20” is defined as a selectable range as the sub continuation value is referred to. When the value is less than the value (for example, 200), a selection table in which “−30 to 0” is defined as a selectable range as the secondary continuation value is referred to.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the selection of a positive value as the sub continuation value when the main continuation value is 0.

  In the first control example, as described above, the first effect (pre-battle effect) and the second effect (battle reach) as effects for indicating a period (advantageous period) in which a gaming state advantageous to the player is set. ) To produce a unit effect (battle effect). In the first effect, an effect for suggesting the effect mode of the second effect is executed, and in the second effect, an effect for notifying the player whether or not the advantageous period ends is executed.

  Furthermore, in the first control example, the unit effect described above is repeatedly executed while the advantageous period is set. With this configuration, the second effect can be executed a plurality of times during the advantageous period, so that the player can play a game during the advantageous period with a sense of tension. .

  In addition, by making it possible to execute a plurality of unit effects while the advantageous period is set, it is possible to suppress a situation in which one unit effect continues for a long period of time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the production contents from being extended.

  In the first control example, as a condition for ending one unit effect (a condition for executing the second effect), a special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (an opportunity for the advantageous period to end). In addition to the case where the remaining period of the advantageous period is zero, and the case where the number of changes in the special symbol is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. Thus, the second effect is configured to be executed even when the advantageous period ends, but the second effect is configured to be executed when other conditions are satisfied. Also good.

  In addition, if the second effect for informing whether or not the advantageous period ends is executed a plurality of times in a short period of time, the player gets bored with the second effect at an early stage. In the example, it is suppressed that the second effect (pseudo second effect) executed for the purpose of the effect is executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period. Specifically, the number of special symbol fluctuations after the unit effect is executed is counted, and when the counter value is less than a predetermined number, the pseudo second effect is not executed. Thereby, it can suppress that a player gets tired of the 2nd production at an early stage.

  In the first control example described above, a plurality of expectation effect modes are provided for stepwise suggesting the expectation degree that the lottery result of the special symbol being fluctuated is a big hit, and any of the expectation effect effect modes displayed An expectation variable (rising) effect that changes the effect mode to an effect mode in which the expectation level that is a big hit is set higher than the effect mode is configured to be executed.

  Then, at least one of the above-described expectation effect modes is configured to be displayed at different timings, and the expectation variable (rising) effect indicates which expectation effect mode the expectation level is variable. It is executed in a display mode that is difficult for the player to grasp.

  In the first control example configured as described above, it is notified that the effect mode of any one of the expectation effect modes changes (rises) by executing the expectation level variable (rise) effect. In this state, the player causes the player to watch the effect while expecting that the desired expectation effect mode (for example, the expectation effect mode in which the expectation level that has already been a big hit is set high) is further changed (increased). Can do.

  Note that the first control example is configured to vary the target expectation effect mode by changing the timing at which the expectation variable (rise) effect is executed. Specifically, it is configured such that the expectation effect mode displayed after the expectation variable (rise) effect is executed. Thereby, it is possible to make the player watch the timing when the expectation variable (rise) effect is executed.

  In the first control example, the expectation variable (rising) effect is configured so that the effect modes of the plurality of expectation effect modes can be varied, and the variable amount is variable for each expectation effect mode. A variable amount for displaying a value obtained by adding (stages) is displayed. Thereby, after the expectation variable (rising) effect is executed and it is understood that any one of the expectation effect modes is changed, the player can be made aware of the amount that the expectation effect mode is variable in the current effect. it can.

  Furthermore, since a notification mode for notifying the player of an object whose expectation level is to be increased in the current performance is displayed after the expected level variable (rise) performance is executed, the expected level performance mode targeted for the player is displayed. It can be easily grasped.

  In the first control example described above, a plurality of expectation effect modes having an effect mode capable of displaying the jackpot expectation level in stages are provided, and each stage having different expectation level effect modes can be displayed. It is configured to predict whether or not the current fluctuation is a big win by comprehending the display contents of each expected degree effect mode.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to complicate the mode that suggests the jackpot expectation degree, and to provide a fun to make the player predict, but on the other hand, display contents of each expectation degree effect mode There has been a problem that the processing load for control increases. Furthermore, when the production mode that raises the degree of expectation is biased, specifically, among the plurality of production modes of expectation, only one expectation production mode is variable to a production mode indicating that the big hit expectation is high. If the remaining expectation performance mode remains the performance mode indicating that the jackpot expectation level is low, the player will have excessive expectations for the jackpot winning, and the content of the performance is distrustful. There was a problem of giving.

  On the other hand, in the first control example, in the plurality of expectation degree effect forms, the expectation effect effect form before being changed by the expectation variable (rising) effect is set in a plurality of patterns, and a special symbol is configured. The expectation degree of the expectation degree effect mode set in the pattern is varied (increased) according to the expectation degree set based on the lottery result. By configuring in this way, the above-described plurality of problems can be solved.

<Production addition example of the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 173 to 181, an example of adding effects in the first control example will be described. In this additional example, an effect (title giving effect) that progresses based on the operation content on the frame button 22 is added to the above-described first control example. This title giving effect was operated during the period when the operation effect requiring the frame button operation, the operation number of the frame button 22 for the operation effect (the number of effective operations), and the operation effect are not executed. Based on the number of operations of the frame button 22 (number of invalid operations), the privilege (title) to be given to the player is executed differently.

  By using such an effect, not only can the player operate the frame button 22 as instructed, but also the pleasure of performing other operations (including non-operation) can be provided, and the player can play early in the game. Can be prevented from getting bored.

  Furthermore, in this additional example, the appearance frequency of the operation effect (for example, the effect of dropping the accessory unit (displacement member) 450) for operating the frame button 22 is variable based on the privilege (title) given to the player. It is configured to make it. As a result, an operation effect frequently appears for a player who operates the frame button 22 eagerly, and an appearance frequency of the operation effect is displayed for a player who does not want to operate the frame button 22. It can be lowered.

  In addition, the frequency of appearance of operation effects can be matched to the player's preference based on the operation results of operation effects executed during a game, compared to the case where a technique for selecting the appearance frequency of operation effects in advance by the player is used. Therefore, the operation performed by the player can be reduced.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 173 and FIG. 174, the operation effect executed in this additional example will be described. FIG. 173 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a conversation effect which is one of the operation effects executed in this additional example, and FIG. 173 (b) is an effect when the frame button 22 is operated in the conversation effect. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content.

  As shown in FIG. 173 (a), in this additional example, an accessory unit (displacement member) 450 is provided so as to cover an upper part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2 for details). ). Then, the characters “I can speak with the button PUSH” prompting the operation of the frame button 22 are displayed in the sub display area Ds. Here, when operating the frame button 22 are displayed characters "Hello" in the main display area Dm as if as shown in FIG. 173 (b), the character object unit 450 is a comment. In this way, in this additional example, a conversation effect that allows conversation with the accessory unit 450 is executed. The accessory unit 450 is movable to a position other than the position (initial position) shown in FIG. 173 (b) (for example, a position lowered so as to cover the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81). Therefore, for example, there may be provided a discriminating means for discriminating the position of an accessory and a comment display position setting means for displaying a comment in a display area corresponding to the accessory position discriminated by the discrimination means. . As a result, regardless of the character object position, always the character object unit 450 is able to display the characters of "Hello" in the main display area Dm as if it were a comment.

  Further, as a determining means for determining the position of the accessory, a means for directly detecting the position of the accessory unit 450 using a proximity sensor may be used, or a drive motor for driving the accessory unit 450 or driving of the drive motor may be used. A detecting means for detecting the driving state (for example, the number of steps) of the transmitting means (pulley, etc.) for transmitting the force may be provided, and a means for determining the position of the accessory based on the detection result of the detecting means may be used. When 450 is driven based on an operation scenario, means for determining the position of an accessory based on the progress of the operation scenario may be used. In the case of using the configuration of the last one, it is possible to grasp the future position of the feature in addition to the current position of the feature based on the contents of the operation scenario. It can be set in advance. Further, the operation scenario of the accessory unit 450 may be configured to store in advance information related to the display position of the comment, or a plurality of the above-described means may be combined.

  On the lower right side of the main display area Dm, a level display area Dr1 for indicating the current level (set value) and a title display area Dr2 for indicating the current title are displayed. Here, the level (set value) is a value that is added (increased) based on the game history (game period, game result, production content, etc.). In this additional example, “Level 3” to “Sennin” Levels are provided in stages (see FIG. 176 (c)), and in FIG. 173 (a), “Level 3” which is the lowest stage is displayed.

  The title is a privilege set based on the level (set value) described above and the operation content for the frame button 22. Although a detailed description will be given later, a plurality of systems are set for this title, and one system is set depending on the game content (the operation content of the frame button 22). Each system is set with a unique privilege (title) corresponding to each level, and “beginner” is displayed in FIG. 173 (a).

  In FIG. 173 (b), based on the operation of the frame button 22 in the state of FIG. 173 (a), a comment is displayed from the accessory unit 450, and the level displayed in the level display area Dr1 increases. “Class 2” is displayed, and “Half-person” is displayed in the title display area Dr2. The comment content of the accessory unit 450 is variably set according to the level and title, and the higher the level and title, the more advantageous the information to the player (for example, the expected level of change during the change and the current gaming state) Information relating to games) is set so that it is easy to display. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game.

  Next, the contents of the accessory driving effect, which is one of the operation effects executed in this additional example, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory driving effect. As shown in FIG. 174 (a), when the accessory driving effect is executed, the characters “Press the button to drop the accessory” are displayed in the main display area Dm as an effect to prompt the operation of the frame button 22. In addition, an image simulating the frame button 22 is displayed.

  In addition, in the first display area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds, a character “chance when dropped” indicating the detection result of the accessory driving effect is displayed. During the period in which the accessory driving effect is being executed (during the operation valid period of the frame button 22), when the frame button 22 is operated and the accessory falls to a position that covers the main display area Dm, it is changing. This suggests that the special symbol is likely to win the jackpot. In this manner, in the operation effect of operating the frame button 22, by configuring the frame button 22 so that it is possible to quickly detect that the jackpot has been won, the player is ambitious to the player. The frame button 22 can be operated.

  In this additional example, as described above, when the frame button 22 is eagerly operated and when it is not operated, a different privilege (title) is given, so that an operation effect is executed. In addition, it is possible to cause the player to select whether or not to operate the frame button 22 eagerly, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, in this additional example, since it is configured so that different privileges (titles) are given according to the title system set as described above, even if a game is continuously performed in one title system, It is configured so that all benefits (titles) cannot be obtained. Thereby, it is difficult to acquire all the privileges (titles) given to the player, and it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  Further, since the title system is set according to the operation content of the frame button, it is configured so that all privileges (titles) cannot be acquired unless the operation content of the frame button 22 is devised. This makes it difficult to acquire all the benefits (titles) given to the player, and can provide the player with various effects executed based on the operation content of the frame button 22, The production effect can be enhanced.

  Here, in order to obtain various privileges (titles) as described above, it is necessary to set different title systems, so the current title system is initialized (history of operation contents of the frame button 22 is initialized). Although it is configured to be able to do so, there is a possibility that there will be a problem that the motivation of the player will be reduced if all the history based on games that have been played so far is initialized .

  Therefore, in this additional example, there is a change operation that allows the player to select whether to initialize all histories or to delete histories until a stage where a different title system can be set. FIG. 174 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen during the changing operation.

  As shown in FIG. 174 (b), in the main display area Dm, the characters “from the beginning” as the all erasure selection mode Dr3 indicating the selection part to be selected when all the histories are initialized, and a part of the history The character “from the middle” is displayed as the partial erasure selection mode Dr4 indicating the selection portion to be selected when erasing. Here, when the all erasure selection mode Dr3 is selected, the level (set value) displayed in the level display area Dr1 and the title displayed in the title display area Dr2 are set to initial values. This all erasure selection mode Dr3 is mainly selected when erasing operation histories of different players.

  On the other hand, when the partial erasure selection mode Dr4 is selected, a display traced back to a stage where a different title system can be set is displayed in the level display area Dr1 and the title display area Dr2. Although detailed description will be described later, in this control example, the level (set value) is configured so that the same privilege (title) is given to any title system when the level (set value) is low. When the position becomes higher, one of the plurality of title systems is further branched into a plurality of title systems.

  As a result, the content displayed retroactively when the partial erasure selection mode Dr4 is selected can be varied depending on the level (set value) and title when the partial erasure selection mode Dr4 is selected. In addition, you may provide the title system | strain which will not be set if this partial deletion selection aspect Dr4 is not selected. Thus, it is necessary not only to add (increase) the level (set value) but also to subtract (decrease) it, so that a game with more variations can be provided.

  As described above, in the first control example, as the effect during the jackpot game, when the jackpot game is executed a plurality of times during a predetermined period, the jackpot effect over the plurality of jackpot games is performed. (Consecutive jackpot effect) is configured to be executed, and the content of the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot game is configured to indicate to the player the game result after the currently executed jackpot game is over. However, if it is a gaming machine having a special gaming state other than the jackpot game, for example, a gaming machine having a jackpot game set with less privileges that can be given to the player than the jackpot game, during the predetermined period When a small win game or a big win game (hereinafter referred to as a win game) is executed a plurality of times, a win effect (continuous win) over the multiple hit games is executed. Ri director) may be configured to be executed. As described above, in the first control example described above, the contents explained for the winning of the jackpot may be executed for a game result other than the jackpot (for example, a jackpot), The game results include various game results that exist as a well-known configuration.

  Further, in the first control example, as a game result after the currently executed jackpot game is completed, the player is instructed whether or not to win the jackpot again within a predetermined period (within the holding storage). However, other game results may be suggested to the player by a winning effect executed during the winning game. For example, the number of winning jackpots (including the jackpot) in the hold memory, the winning jackpot ( Bonus details (round number), game status after winning jackpot (including small hits) in winning memory (probability or short-time state), and multiple game results (big hit, small hits) If it is a target, it may be configured to suggest the type of game result and the order of execution.

  Furthermore, in the first control example, the contents of the jackpot effect are varied based not only on the pitch information stored at the timing when the jackpot game is executed, but also on the pitch information newly stored during the jackpot game. It is configured to be able to. By configuring in this way, it is possible to refer to more ball entry information, to make it easier to execute a continuous jackpot effect, and to make the player interested in the jackpot effect.

  In addition, the present control example is configured so that the content of the jackpot effect can be varied based on the stored number of pieces of entry information at the time when the jackpot game is executed as the jackpot continuous effect. Specifically, on the basis of the number of stored ballistic information at the time when the jackpot game is executed, a plurality of timings for suggesting (notifying) that the jackpot is won again within a predetermined period (within the holding memory) are different. The jackpot effect is configured to be executed.

  Among them, in the special jackpot effect (addition effect) that can be executed when the number of reserved balls (number of entered information) of the special symbol is not the upper limit, new entry information is acquired during the jackpot game, and the entry information When the player wins the jackpot, the contents of the jackpot effect can be changed so that the player does not notice.

  In the above-mentioned specific jackpot production, the jackpot game (multi-round game (for example, 15 round games)) executed during a single jackpot is partially notified (for example, for five rounds). Since the effect is executed, it is possible to inform the player of how many rounds of the jackpot game have been executed while the specific jackpot effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing in advance the gaming state after the jackpot by the number of rounds set for the jackpot game.

  In this example of control, it is configured such that an extra display (additional display of the number of rounds) of the jackpot game by the extra effect is executed every predetermined round (every five rounds). And the length of the interval period between rounds in a predetermined round is set longer than the length of the interval period between other rounds. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect asking whether or not the jackpot ends every predetermined round (every five rounds). In addition, since it is configured so that the variation of special symbols for a predetermined number of times (4 rotations) executed after the end of the jackpot is executed in a shortened time (0.5 seconds), every predetermined round (every 5 rounds) It is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify the interval period and the special symbol variation period between jackpots.

  It should be noted that the special symbol variation period for a predetermined period that is executed after the jackpot is ended may be constant regardless of whether or not the jackpot is won. Specifically, a fluctuation pattern table for selecting a special pattern fluctuation pattern for 4 rotations after the end of the jackpot is defined as a fluctuation of 0.5 seconds for all periods when the lottery result is out of place, and when the lottery result is a big hit It is preferable that the first rotation is changed for 2 seconds, the second rotation is 1.5 seconds, the third rotation is 1 second, and the fourth rotation is 0.5 seconds. As a result, a predetermined period (a period until the special symbol fluctuates four times or a period until the jackpot is won) is fixed (2 seconds) regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol for four rotations after the jackpot ends. be able to. In this case, the interval period for every predetermined round (every 5 rounds) is also configured to match the above-mentioned predetermined period (2 seconds), so that the interval period for every predetermined round (every 5 rounds) and the jackpot It is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify the special symbol variation period.

  In addition, the first control example is a normal jackpot that does not suggest that the jackpot is won again within a predetermined period (within the holding memory) during the jackpot game (during the round game) as a jackpot effect executed during the jackpot Has production. When this normal jackpot effect is executed, the end display mode displayed in the final period during the jackpot game (the ending period after the end of the round game) is a predetermined period after the jackpot ends (special symbol 4 variation, or Displayed continuously for 4 seconds. Then, when the jackpot is won again within the period in which the end display mode is displayed continuously after the jackpot ends, a continuous hit effect is executed in which the jackpot effect is started again via the end display mode.

  By configuring in this way, the winning information corresponding to the special symbol variation executed during the predetermined period (4 symbol special variation or 4 seconds) after the jackpot game ends is acquired after the jackpot game ends, Even when the acquired entry information is won in a big win, the continuous winning effect can be executed. In other words, since the entry information acquired after the jackpot can be included as the execution condition of the consecutive jackpot effect indicating that the jackpot is continuously executed, the rate at which the consecutive jackpot effect is executed can be increased. The production effect can be enhanced.

  In the first control example, it is determined whether or not the continuous jackpot effect is to be executed based on whether or not there is the entry information for winning the jackpot in the hold memory. If there is entry information to win the jackpot, it is determined whether the jackpot is a jackpot that is advantageous to the player, and based on the determination result, it is determined whether to perform a continuous jackpot effect. It is also possible to determine whether or not a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a probability variation state) is set as the gaming state after the jackpot in the hold memory is executed, and continuously based on the determination result It may be determined whether or not to execute the jackpot effect. Furthermore, after a game state (normal state (low probability state)) that is once disadvantageous to the player is set after the end of the jackpot executed this time, the game state after the jackpot in the hold memory is executed is given to the player. It may be determined whether or not an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probability variation state) is set, and based on the determination result, it may be determined whether or not to execute a continuous jackpot effect.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the added value to the player when the continuous jackpot effect is executed, and to allow the player to play the game with peace of mind.

  In addition, as in the second control example described above, in a gaming machine having a structure of falling lottery, it is difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state when winning a jackpot. The lottery result may be notified to the player.

  Specifically, means for determining the gaming state at the time of winning the current jackpot, means for determining the gaming state set after the end of the current jackpot, and a falling lottery executed before winning the next jackpot A means for determining the lottery result, and determining whether or not to execute the continuous jackpot effect based on the determination result of each of the above-described determination means. For example, a game in the case of winning this jackpot It is configured so that the consecutive jackpot effect is executed only when the state is a low probability state of the special symbol, that is, when the gaming state of the special symbol has fallen due to the falling lottery, or after the special jackpot ends, Only when the probability state is set and the game state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state by the falling lottery before the next jackpot is won, the continuous jackpot effect is realized. Even if the gaming state won for the current jackpot is won for the next jackpot without the transition of the gaming state of the special symbol to the low probability state due to falling lottery, the special symbol has a high probability state. You may comprise so that a continuous jackpot presentation may be performed in some cases.

  In this control example, the winning information at the time when the jackpot game is executed is used as the winning information used to determine the contents of the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot game. Can be any timing as long as it is determined that the jackpot game will be executed. For example, the timing when the symbol for indicating that the jackpot is won is stopped or the jackpot game is started. Or a predetermined timing within a period (opening period) from when the jackpot game is started to when the jackpot effect is executed. Further, it may be a timing at which the variation of the special symbol won in the jackpot is started or a predetermined timing within a period in which the variation is being executed.

  In this control example, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability, without electric support) (probability change state (high probability, with electric support), short time state (low probability, with electric support) )), An effect (battle effect) for indicating that the gaming state is continuing is executed. By comprising in this way, it can alert | report to a player intelligibly that the gaming state advantageous to a player is continuing.

<Electric Configuration in Additional Example of First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 175 to 177, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the additional example of the first control example will be described. FIG. 175 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 175 (a), the ROM 222 in this additional example is obtained by partially changing the contents of the variation pattern table 222a with respect to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example (see FIG. 114). The difference is that a title system selection table 222aa, a title selection table 222ab, and an accessory action level selection table 222ac are added. Other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 222 in the first control example.

  First, with reference to FIG. 176 (a), the contents of the variation pattern table 222a for the accessory operation added in this additional example will be described. FIG. 176 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table 222a (for an accessory). As shown in FIG. 176 (a), the fluctuation pattern table 222a (for an accessory) includes an accessory action level (1 to 3) selected by an accessory action level selection table 222ac described later, and an extracted fluctuation pattern ( In association with (a to z), the accessory operation frequencies (low) to (high) and (none) are defined. By comprising in this way, even if it is a case where the same fluctuation | variation pattern is selected, an accessory operating frequency can be varied.

  Next, the contents of the title system selection table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. 176 (b). FIG. 176 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the title system selection table 222aa. In the title system selection table 222aa, a plurality of title systems (1 to 3) are defined in association with the ratio between the effective operation and the invalid operation of the frame button 22 and the button operation ratio when the operation effect is executed.

  FIG. 176 (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the title selection table 222ab. In the title selection table 222ab, the current level (setting value) ("3rd grade" to "Senjin") and a title that is a privilege to be given to the player in association with the title system (1 to 3) are defined. Yes. The title selected here is displayed in the title display area Dr2 (see FIG. 173 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 176 (c), when the level (set value) is low (level 3 to first stage), the same title is set regardless of which title system is set. The set title system cannot be grasped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of the operation of changing the title system because the currently set title system is grasped immediately after the game is started.

  Next, the contents of the accessory action level selection table 222ac will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory action level selection table 222ac. The accessory action level set in the accessory action level selection table 222ac is referred to when the variation pattern table 222a (for an accessory) described above with reference to FIG. 176 (a) is used.

  As shown in FIG. 177 (a), in the accessory action level selection table 222ac, an accessory action level is defined in association with a set value (level) and a title system. Among them, in the title system 3 that can reach the set value up to “Sennin”, the accessory action level 3 can be selected. In this way, by providing an accessory action level that is selected only when the level (set value) is raised in a state where a specific title system is set, it is possible to perform an accessory action that is executed during a fluctuating effect. It is possible to give a special feeling and enhance the production effect.

  FIG. 175 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 175 (b), the RAM 223 in this modification is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 114) in that an effect setting group 223aa is provided. . Other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 223 in the first control example.

  Here, the contents of the effect setting group 223aa will be described with reference to FIG. 177 (b). As shown in FIG. 177 (b), the effect setting group 223aa includes an operation effect count counter 223aa1, an effective operation count counter 223aa2, an operation ratio storage area 223aa3, a title system storage area 223aa4, a set value storage area 223aa5, and an invalid operation count. A counter 223aa6, a change flag 223aa7, and an accessory action level storage area 223aa8 are stored.

  The operation effect number counter 223aa1 is a counter for counting the number of times that the operation effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is executed. This operation effect number counter 223aa1 is incremented by 1 when the change display setting process 2 (see FIG. 178) determines that the operation effect is a change pattern (S3851: Yes in FIG. 178) and frame button input. Reference is made when the button operation ratio is calculated in the monitoring / production process 2 (see FIG. 179) (S5060 in FIG. 179). Then, in the change process (see FIG. 180), it is cleared when the operation effect history is changed (erased) (see S5103 in FIG. 180).

  The effective operation number counter 223aa2 is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the operation effect. In this control example, the value of the effective operation number counter 223aa2 is added by the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the effective period during the operation effect, and the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (FIG. 179), 1 is added when the frame button 22 is pressed during the effective period of the operation effect (see S5054 in FIG. 179), and is referenced when calculating the button operation ratio (see S5060 in FIG. 179). This is also referred to when calculating the effective operation ratio (see S5061 in FIG. 179). Then, in the change process (see FIG. 180), it is cleared when the operation effect history is changed (erased) (see S5103 in FIG. 180).

  In this additional example, the value of the effective operation number counter 223aa2 is added by the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the effective period during the operation effect. For example, the frame button 22 is repeatedly pressed. If it is an operation effect to be performed, it is determined whether an operation condition such as pressing a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) or an operation effect in which the frame button 22 is operated a plurality of times with good timing satisfies a success rate (for example, 50%). However, when the determination result satisfies the operation condition, the value of the effective operation number counter 223aa2 may be incremented by one. Thereby, the value of the counter can be added fairly regardless of the contents of the operation effect to be executed.

  Further, in this additional example, the value of one effective operation number counter 223aa2 is added regardless of the instruction contents of the operation effect for the frame button 22 (pressing, continuous hitting, timing pressing, long pressing, etc.). However, for example, an effective operation number counter 223aa2 may be provided for each operation effect instruction content for the frame button 22, and the value of the corresponding effective operation number counter 223aa2 may be added. By configuring in this way, the operation history indicating the player's operation content to the frame button 22 can be classified more finely, so that the content and frequency of the operation effect can be varied to be more suitable for the player. Can do.

  The operation ratio storage area 223aa3 includes all operations of the frame button 22 based on the value of the valid operation count counter 223aa2 (valid operation count value) and the value of an invalid operation count counter 223aa6 described later (invalid operation count value). This is an area for storing the ratio of the number of effective operations to the number of times (button operation ratio). This operation ratio storage area 223aa3 stores the button operation ratio calculated in S5060 of the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (S4007) and the effective operation ratio calculated in the process of S5061 (see S5062).

  The title system storage area 223aa4 is an area for storing the title system selected using the above-described title system selection table 222aa.

  The set value storage area 223aa5 is an area for storing game content and a level (set value) set based on a change operation.

  The invalid operation number counter 223aa6 is a counter for counting the number of times that the frame button 22 is operated at a timing other than the operation effective period (operation effective period of the frame button 22 during the operation effect).

  The change flag 223aa7 is a flag that is set to ON when the partial erasure selection mode Dr4 is selected by a change operation. When this flag is set to ON, an effect that suggests how to operate the frame button 22 for setting a different title system is executed for the player.

  The accessory action level storage area 223aa8 is an area for storing the accessory action level selected using the above-described accessory action level selection table 222ac. The appearance frequency of the accessory action effect (operation effect) is variably set by referring to the accessory action level stored in the accessory action level storage area 223aa8 by the variation pattern table 222a (for the accessory).

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Additional Example of First Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the additional example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 181. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same element as the various control processing performed by MPU221 of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 in a 1st control example, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. First, with reference to FIG. 178, the variable display setting process 2 in this additional example will be described.

  FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 2 in this additional example. Of the variable display setting process 2 in this additional example, the same processes as the variable display setting process in the first control example (see FIG. 147) are executed in S3801 to S3810 and S3812 to S3817.

  When the fluctuation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 178) is executed, the same processes of S3801 to S3810 as the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example described above are executed, and then the fluctuation pattern of this time Is a variation pattern having an operation effect (S3851). If it is determined that the variation pattern has an operation effect (S3851: Yes), the value of the operation effect number counter 223aa1 is incremented by 1 (S3852). , The process proceeds to S3853. On the other hand, in the process of S3851, when it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is not a fluctuation pattern having an operation effect (S3851: No), the process of S3852 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3853.

  In the process of S3853, the current variation display mode is determined based on the extracted variation pattern and the accessory action level (S3851). Specifically, based on the accessory action level selected based on the accessory action level selection table 222ac and the extracted change patterns (az), the change pattern table for the accessory action (FIG. 176 (FIG. 176)). The accessory action frequency defined in a) is set, and the current variation display mode (variation effect display and presence / absence of accessory action) is determined. Among the variable display modes determined here, for the content displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is set by the processing of S3812 and is set by various processing of the sound lamp control device 113. Similar to the display command, the display control device 114 is notified, and the contents related to the accessory operation are command output processing (see FIG. 139) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 139) of the sound lamp control device 113. In step S3102), an accessory operation command to be notified to a device (the other device 228 (see FIG. 4)) that drives and controls the accessory unit 450 is set. When the process of S3853 is completed, the same processes of S3812 to S3817 as in the first control example described above are executed, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (S3107) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S3107).

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (S3107) is executed, it is first determined whether or not it is detected that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5051). Here, when pressing is not detected (S5051: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (S5051: Yes), it is then determined whether the current period is the effective period of the conversation effect (see FIG. 173) among the operation effects (S5052). When it is determined that it is the effective period of the conversation effect (S5052: Yes), a display pressing command corresponding to the button pressing is set (S5053), the value of the effective operation number counter is incremented by 1 (S5054), and S5060. Move on to processing.

  The display pressing command set in the processing of S5053 is configured such that the content of the command is set based on the position of the accessory unit 450, the accessory action level, and the title to be selected. Is a display push command for setting the comment display position of the conversation effect based on the result of determining the position of the accessory unit 450 and determining the content of the comment displayed based on the accessory action level and the title selected. Is set. The display pressing command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the pressing command for display, the comment is displayed in the display area corresponding to the position of the accessory unit 450 in the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. It is possible to display an effect such as having a conversation with the unit 450.

  In this control example, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the conversation effective period of the conversation effect, a display pressing command is set, and a comment is displayed in the display area corresponding to the position of the accessory unit 450. However, when the accessory unit 450 is configured to be movable to a plurality of positions covered by the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the position of the accessory unit 450 and the third symbol display device 81 The display content displayed on the display screen may be discriminated, and the timing of executing the conversation effect (comment display) based on the discrimination result may be made different from the pressing timing of the frame button 22. That is, the display area of the comment displayed corresponding to the position of the accessory unit 450 and the main part of the variation effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a display indicating the expected degree of jackpot, If it is determined that there is an overlap between the display area and the display of the symbol to be stopped), based on the timing at which the display areas do not overlap, that is, the position of the accessory unit 450 moves. Comment until the display area of the comment changes or the display area of the 3rd symbol display device 81 changes and the display area of the main part changes so that the display areas do not overlap. The display may be delayed.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to suitably execute both the fluctuation effect displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 and the conversation effect which is one of the operation effects, and enhance the effect. Can do. In addition, the main part (for example, the display area of the comment displayed corresponding to the position of the accessory unit 450, and the change effect displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 (for example, without using the structure mentioned above) When it is determined that the display indicating the degree of jackpot expectation and the display indicating the symbol to be stopped) are overlapped, the conversation effect may be stopped.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5052 that the period is not the effective period of the conversation effect (S5052: No), it is determined whether the present is the effective period of the accessory action effect among the operation effects (S5055). If it is determined that it is the effective period of the accessory action effect (S5055: Yes), a display pressing command corresponding to the button pressing is set (S5056), and the value of the effective operation number counter is incremented by 1 (S5054). , The process proceeds to S5060.

  In the process of S5055, when it is determined that it is not the effective period of the accessory action effect (S5055: No), it is then determined whether it is the change effective period (S5057), and when it is the change effective period (S5057: Yes), change processing is executed (S5058), and then the process proceeds to S5060. The contents of the change process (S5058) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, in the processing of S5057, if it is determined that it is not the change effective period (S5057: No), the value of the invalid operation number counter 223aa6 is incremented by 1 because the current pressing operation is not in the effective period of the operation effect. (S5059), the process proceeds to S5060.

  In the process of S5060, the button operation ratio is calculated based on the value of the operation effect number counter 223aa1 and the value of the effective operation number counter 223aa2 (S5060). Next, the effective operation ratio is calculated based on the value of the effective operation number counter 223aa2 and the value of the invalid operation number counter 223aa6 (S5061), and the calculated button operation ratio and the effective operation ratio are stored in the operation ratio storage area 223aa3. (S5062). Thereafter, a title setting process is executed (S5063), and this process ends.

  Next, the contents of the change process (S5058) will be described with reference to FIG. This change process (S5058) is a process executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the validity period of the change operation (see FIG. 174 (b)), and is based on various information based on the player's operation content. This is a process for clearing the title system, the set value (level), and the information regarding the button operation ratio and the information regarding the effective operation ratio referred to when selecting the title system.

  When the change process (S5058) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current operation content is all reset (whether the all deletion selection mode Dr3 is selected) (S5101). When it is determined that all the resets have been made (S5101: Yes), all the information in the set value storage area 223aa5 is cleared (S5102), the operation effect number counter 223aa1, and the effective operation number counter 223aa2. All the values of the invalid operation number counter 223aa6 are cleared (S5103), the information in the title system storage area 223aa4 is cleared (S5104), and this process is terminated. As a result, all information based on the player's operation content is cleared, “Level 3” which is the initial value is displayed in the level display area Dr1, and “Beginner” which is the initial value is displayed in the title display area Dr2. (See FIG. 173 (a)).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5101 that the reset is not complete (S5101: No), it is determined whether the operation content is partially reset (whether the partial erase selection mode Dr4 is selected) (S5105). If it is determined that it is a partial reset (S5105: Yes), the change flag 223aa7 is set to ON (S5106), the information in the set value storage area 223aa5 is set to the first stage (S5107), and the process proceeds to S5103. . In the process of S5105, when it is determined that there is no partial reset (S5105: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Next, the title setting process (S5063) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the contents of the title setting process (S5063). When this title setting process (S5063) is executed, first, a title system is selected based on the title system selection table 222aa (S5201). The selected title system is stored in the title system storage area 223aa4 (S5202), and then the set value is determined based on the value of the operation effect counter 223aa1, and stored in the set value storage area 223aa5 (S5203).

  Thereafter, a display set value command is set (S5204), a title is selected based on the title selection table 222ab (S5205), and a display title command is set (S5206). Next, it is determined whether the change flag 223aa7 is set to ON (S5207). If it is determined that the change flag 223aa7 is set to ON (S5207: Yes), a display operation instruction command is set (S5208), and the change flag is set. 223aa7 is set to OFF (S5209), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5207, when it is determined that the change flag 223aa7 is not on (is off) (S5207: No), this process is ended as it is.

  As described above, in the additional example described above, the operation aspect of the operation effect (for example, the appearance frequency and the effect content) that is an effect for operating the frame button 22 is changed to the operation content (operation history) of the frame button 22. ) Can be variably set based on. Thereby, compared with the case where the change operation for changing the frequency of the operation effect to the frequency desired by the player is performed separately from the game, the desired effect mode is set without causing the player to feel troublesome. be able to.

  In the pachinko machine 10 that varies the effect mode of the operation effect based on the operation history of such a player, in order to be able to set the effect mode of the operation effect suitable for various types of players, While a plurality of effect modes are prepared, while the same operation (for example, when the operation effect is executed, the frame button 22 is always operated more than the necessary amount) is repeatedly executed. Only the same effect mode is set, and there is a problem that various operation effects cannot be provided to the player.

  Therefore, in the additional example described above, the player is configured so that a different privilege (title) is given to the player by accumulating the game contents, and the type of the privilege (title) is at least the player's frame button 22. It is configured to be different according to the operation content (operation history).

  With this configuration, various operations are performed on the frame button 22 in order to acquire different privileges (titles). Then, based on the contents of various operations performed on the frame button 22, the effect mode of the operation effect is variably set. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with various operation effects that can be variably set based on the operation content (operation history) of the frame button 22.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration in which a different privilege (title) is given by accumulating game contents, a setting value (for example, level) is variably set according to the accumulation state of the game contents and set. It is common to use a configuration that grants a privilege (title) corresponding to the set value (level), but when the set value (level) reaches the upper limit, a privilege (title) higher than that is acquired. There is a possibility that the game will not be able to be performed and the willingness to play is reduced. Also, if the upper limit of the set value (level) is set high to prevent the set value (level) from reaching the upper limit, there is a problem that the storage capacity for the effect increases.

  Therefore, in the additional example described above, one of a plurality of systems (title systems) with different privileges (titles) to be given is set based on the operation content (operation history) to the frame button 22. In this way, the privilege (title) to be given to the player is determined based on the set value (level) and the set system. Thereby, since it is not possible to acquire all the benefits (titles) simply by accumulating game contents, it is possible to suppress a decrease in player's gaming motivation.

  Further, in the additional example described above, since there is an erasing unit for erasing past game contents, operation contents (operation history) executed in the past when a system different from the currently set system is set. It can suppress that a system | strain is set based on. In this additional example, an erasure unit that erases past operation contents (operation history) is used to prevent the system from being set based on the operation contents (operation history) executed in the past. Other configurations may be used. For example, a message indicating that a different system setting is desired is input (by executing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22). You may comprise so that a new system | strain may not be set until (the period of the operation history referred when setting a system | strain) passes.

  Further, in the additional example described above, as the erasing means, there are all erasing means for erasing all past game contents and operation contents, and partial erasing means for erasing a part. The partial erasure means is used when setting a different system from the currently set system, and a different system can set the past operation content (operation history) referred to when setting the system. It is configured to erase to the state. This eliminates the need to redo the game from the beginning when setting a different system, so that the player can be motivated to set a different system.

  In this additional example, when the partial erasing unit is operated, a part of the past operation content (operation history) is erased, and a process of executing an initial value as a setting value (level) is used. However, by operating the partial erasing means, it is only necessary to set a system different from the currently set system rather than starting the game from the beginning (rather than operating all the erasing means). Only a part of the past operation content (operation history) may be deleted while the set value (level) continues. Alternatively, a system desired by the player may be specified, and a part of past operation contents (operation history) may be erased until the specified system can be set.

  Here, in order to set a system different from the system that is currently set, even if the player operates the partial deletion means and deletes part of the past operation content (operation history), the operation to be executed later If the frame button 22 is not appropriately operated for the effect, a different system is not set, and there is a possibility that the player may be dissatisfied. Specifically, if the operation effect is digested in the same operation mode as before after operating the partial erasing means, the same system as the system set before operating the partial erasing means may be set. There is.

  Therefore, in this additional example, guidance notifying means for guiding the operation content of the frame button 22 by the player is provided so that a different system is set after operating the partial erasing means. Different systems can be easily set by digesting the operation effect based on the content notified by the guidance notification means. In addition, since the guidance notification means notifies the operation contents different from the conventional operation contents in order to set a different system, the operation effects are produced by digesting the operation effects according to the notification contents by the guidance notification means. The contents are also variably set. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a different operation effect than before, and to enhance the effect.

  Note that the content notified to the player by the guidance notification means may simply be a content prompting an operation effect different from that for the operation effect or a content indicating an operation content to be specifically executed. Further, in addition to the notification by the guidance notification means, a progress notification means for notifying the player of the progress until the condition for setting a different system is established may be provided. Thereby, the player can easily grasp whether the operation effect is digested so that different systems are set.

  Further, in the system set in the above-described additional example, it is possible to set only when the predetermined erasing unit is operated when the set system and the set value (level) satisfy the predetermined condition. A system may be added. By providing such a system, for example, a dedicated system can be set only when all the erasing means are operated in a state where the set value has reached the upper limit, or the set value is one lower than the upper limit value. In this case, the dedicated system may be set only when the partial erasing unit is operated.

  Also, based on the erasure timing by the erasure means, the system that can be set may be different, specifically, when the erasure means is operated during a jackpot game or while a specific variation effect is being executed. Only a special system may be settable. In this case, it is preferable that the above-described specific variation effect be executed only when the variation effect executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol satisfies a predetermined condition.

  By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to set a different system depending on the timing of operating the erasing means, and to actively participate in the game.

  In the additional example described above, a configuration in which a privilege (title) is set in advance corresponding to each set value (level) of each system is used, but other configurations may be used and have already been acquired. A storage unit that stores a privilege (title) may be provided, and a privilege (title) to be granted may be set based on the privilege (title) stored in the storage unit.

  In the additional example mentioned above, the content which suggests the setting conditions of the system currently set is used as the content (title content) of the privilege (title) given to the player. Thereby, the condition required in order to set a different system | strain can be estimated by grasping | ascertaining the content of the acquired privilege (title).

  Furthermore, when a predetermined game condition is satisfied, a condition necessary for setting a desired system may be notified to the player, and among the obtainable benefits (titles), the benefits already acquired You may make it alert | report to the player the number and ratio of (title). Thereby, a player's willingness to participate can be enhanced to acquire all the benefits (titles).

  As described above, based on the operation content (operation history) to the frame button 22, one of a plurality of systems (title systems) with different privileges (titles) to be granted is set, When configured to determine a privilege (title) to be given to the player based on the set value (level) and the set system, the system currently set based on the granted privilege (title) There is a problem that it is easy for a player to grasp.

  On the other hand, in the additional example described above, the same privilege (title) is given until the set value (level) reaches a predetermined stage regardless of which system is set. It is configured as follows. Thus, until the set value (level) reaches a predetermined stage (unless the game is executed for a certain period after the predetermined system is set), the player knows which system is set. Can be difficult.

  The operation content (operation history) for the frame button 22 referred to in the additional example described above includes, for example, operation effect frequency information for indicating the number of times the operation effect is executed, and a frame button for the executed operation effect. Operation execution frequency information for indicating whether or not an operation has been performed on 22, operation success frequency information for indicating the number of successful operation effects (the number of times a predetermined operation condition has been satisfied), and a period during which the operation effect is not being executed (operation Any information may be used as long as the information indicates the player's operation status for the frame button 22, such as invalid operation count information for indicating the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated outside the valid period.

  Further, as the contents of the operation effect, in addition to the pressing effect that simply presses the frame button 22 within a predetermined period, the timing operation effect that operates the frame button 22 at a predetermined timing, or the frame button 22 is operated more than a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period. A continuous hitting operation effect to be operated may be provided, and a long press operation effect in which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for a predetermined period or longer. In this case, the operation content (operation history) for the frame button 22 may be managed for each type of operation effect executed.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine in detail whether the player simply does not like to operate the frame button 22 or does not like a predetermined operation (continuous hit, long press, timing press) on the frame button 22. Is possible. Therefore, when setting the operation effect corresponding to the operation content (operation history), it is possible to provide an operation effect more suitable for the player, and to suppress dissatisfaction with the player.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10 provided with a plurality of operation means, each information may be managed for each operation means, or the operation contents for all the operation means may be added together and managed. It may be configured. Furthermore, when an operation effect that causes different operation means to be operated according to the degree of jackpot expectation is executed, the number of times the operation effect is executed and information indicating the number of operations of the operation means are managed in correspondence with the degree of jackpot expectation. Alternatively, the operation content (operation history) may be managed only for the operation effect executed when the jackpot is won.

  In the additional example described above, reference is made when determining the mode of operation effect (execution frequency, effect mode, etc.) and the privilege (title) to be granted based on the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22) for the operation effect. System and set value (level) are set, but based on the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22), in addition to the mode of operation effects (execution frequency, effect mode, etc.) Alternatively, only one of the above-described system or set value (level) may be set.

  In the additional example described above, the frame button 22 is used as an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the player presses the frame button 22 to determine that the operation means has been operated. However, other configurations are used. It is also possible to use a lever-shaped operation means that can determine that the player has been operated by tilting left or right or back and forth, or a touch that can determine that the player has been operated by contact or proximity. Sensor-type operation means, wireless-type operation means that can determine that an operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used, or a plurality of the above-described operation means may be provided.

  As in the additional example described above, when using a configuration in which the aspect of the operation effect is varied based on the operation content (operation history) of the player or a predetermined privilege (title) is used, another day is used. It is better to be able to play the game with the operation content (operation history) of the game performed on the day, specifically, by performing a predetermined operation (end operation) at the end of the game, Constructed so that the player can acquire information related to game contents and operation contents (password issue processing), and the output information related to the acquired information is input to the pachinko machine 10 to continue from the acquired information. It is preferable that the game can be performed in a state.

<About the second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 188. In the first control example described above, a gaming machine has been described in which when a special symbol jackpot is won and the probability variation state is set after the jackpot ends, the probability variation state continues until the next jackpot is won.

  On the other hand, in the second control example, apart from the jackpot lottery for determining whether or not the special symbol is successful, the probability change state (that is, the high probability state where the jackpot probability is high) to the normal state (that is, the low probability state where the jackpot probability is low). A gaming machine that is executed every time a condition for determining whether or not a special symbol is determined will be described in the transition lottery (hereinafter referred to as the “falling lottery”). As described above, in the gaming machine having the falling lottery function, even if the probability variation state (high probability state) is set, the period during which the high probability state is surely continued is not set, so that the special symbol variation is executed. A tension can be given to a player every time.

  Further, in the second control example, as in the first control example described above, when the probability variation state is set, a high probability state in which the jackpot probability is high and a short time state in which the electric accessory 140a is likely to be opened. Even if the winning lottery is won and the player falls from a high probability state to a low probability state, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times after a predetermined period (for example, after the jackpot is over). The time-short state is set until it reaches (). As a result, even if the winning lottery is won immediately after the jackpot (for example, 3 rotations), the time-short state is set for a predetermined period (100 rotations), so that the winning lottery was won depending on the operating condition of the electric accessory 140a. Can be suppressed by the player.

  Although details will be described later, the falling lottery is configured to be executed before the special symbol jackpot lottery, and the special symbol jackpot lottery when winning the falling lottery is executed in a low probability state. Is done. In other words, if you win the falling lottery after the above-mentioned predetermined period (for example, after the end of the jackpot, the number of fluctuations in the special symbol is 100), the game state is in the normal state when the special symbol variation is started. (Low probability state and non-time-short state) will be set.

  In this case, even if an effect that suggests to the player whether the winning lottery is won or not is performed using the variation time of the special symbol won in the falling lottery, it is possible to fall only by looking at the operation status of the electric accessory 140a. There was a problem that it was possible to easily determine whether or not the lottery was successful. Therefore, in the second control example, when the jackpot lottery is won before the falling lottery in a state where the above-mentioned predetermined period (for example, after the jackpot ends, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times) The game state is configured to shift to the normal state before the symbol change starts.

  With this configuration, the operation content of the electric accessory 140a suddenly becomes an operation content in a non-short-time state in a state where a predetermined period (for example, after the end of the jackpot, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times) has been exceeded. In the event that the player has won the falling lottery or the jackpot lottery, it can be difficult for the player to grasp, and the player can have a sense of expectation until the change of the special symbol is completed. it can.

  In the second control example, it is possible to set an effect mode capable of suggesting to the player the success / failure situation of the falling lottery using the continuous effect described in the first control example. By comprising in this way, the effect which a player performs will be watched more and a production effect can be heightened.

<Electric Configuration in Second Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 184. In the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 are partially changed with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, and the sound lamp control device 113 is provided. The contents of the ROM 222 and the contents of the RAM 223 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 182 (a) is a block diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the ROM 202 in the present control example includes a fall lottery table 202ba and a fall state transition table 202bb added to the ROM 202 in the first control example, and the first hit type selection table 202c. (Refer to Fig. 107) The difference is that the game state after the jackpot ends is defined as "Short next time when the probability changes", and is defined as "Successfully change until the falling lottery win, or the time when the falling lottery wins or 100 times". The other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The falling lottery table 202ba is a table that is referred to when performing determination (falling lottery) on whether or not to fall from the probability variation state to the normal state in the probability variation state of the special symbol. Counter value) is stored. In the special symbol probability changing state, each time the special symbol lottery is executed, the falling lottery table 202ba is referred to and it is determined whether or not to fall into the normal state. Here, the details of the falling lottery table 202ba will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (b).

  FIG. 182 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the falling lottery table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 182 (b), a random number value (counter value) determined to be falling in the falling lottery is stored. Specifically, two random values (counter values) of “100, 101” are used as determination values corresponding to the fall to the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol) in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. ) Is prescribed. When the special symbol lottery is executed in the special symbol probability changing state, the value of the falling lottery counter (not shown) is compared with the random value (counter value) corresponding to the falling specified in the falling lottery table 202ba. When the values match, it falls to the normal state. The falling lottery counter (not shown) is a loop counter that is updated periodically (for example, every time the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed) in the range of “0 to 299”. Of the 300 random number values (counter values) that the falling lottery counter can take, two random numbers that are determined to fall are defined, so the probability that a single falling lottery will determine that a fall has occurred is 1/150. It is. Note that the random number value (value of the first random number counter C1) determined to be a big hit in the probability variation state is five (see FIG. 106 (a)) of “5 to 9”, and is a big hit in the probability variation state. Since the probability is 1/48, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to be higher than the probability of being judged to fall by the falling lottery during the probability variation state. Therefore, once the state is changed to the probable state, the player can be expected to win a large number of times before falling to the normal state, so that the player's interest in the game in the probable state can be improved. it can.

  The falling state transition table 202bb is a state transition table that is referred to when a falling lottery is won in the probability variation state. Note that the description of the same elements as those in the state transition table 202f described in the first control example is omitted.

  FIG. 182 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fall state transition table 202bb. As shown in FIG. 182 (c), the fall state transition table 202bb stores a fall state transition 1 table 202bb1 and a fall state transition 2 table 202bb2. Here, the contents of the fall state transition 1 table 202bb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (d).

  FIG. 182 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall state transition 1 table 202bb1. This fall state transition 1 table 202bb1 is different from the state transition 1 table 202f1 described in the first control example in that a state status in the case of winning the fall lottery is added during each state status. Are the same.

  Specifically, when the status status is “ST2” and the specified number counter is greater than 0 (at most 100), when the winning lottery is won, the status status is set to ST3 (there is a short time). The value of the count counter is continued as it is. In addition, when the status status is “ST2” and the specified number counter is 0, when the winning lottery is won, the status status is set to ST1 (no low probability time).

  In other words, even if the value of the specified number counter is set to 100 and the falling lottery is won before the specified number counter value is decremented to 0, the expected number counter value is decremented to 0. A state is granted.

  Next, the fall state transition 2 table 202bb2 will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (e). FIG. 182 (e) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall state transition 2 table 202bb2. The state transition 2 table 202bb2 for fall differs from the state transition 2 table 202f2 described in the first control example in that a state status in the case of winning the fall lottery is added during each state status. Are the same.

  Specifically, when the status status is “ST2a” and the specified number counter is greater than 0 (4 at the maximum), when the falling lottery is won, the status status is set to ST3a (special with short time). The value of the specified number counter is continued as it is. If the status status is “ST2” and the specified number counter is larger than 0 (96 at the maximum), if the winning lottery is won, the status status is set to ST3 (there is a low probability time), and the value of the specified number counter Will continue. In addition, when the status status is “ST2” and the specified number counter is 0, when the winning lottery is won, the status status is set to ST1 (no low probability time).

  In other words, even if the value of the specified number counter is set to 100 and the falling lottery is won before the specified number counter value is decremented to 0, the expected number counter value is decremented to 0. A state is granted.

  FIG. 183 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 183 (a), the ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222e is provided instead of the continuous effect mode selection table 222e, and the final mode selection. The difference is that a final mode selection 3 table 222h is provided instead of the table 222h, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, the continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 184 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222e. This continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222e is associated with the value of the remaining period (remaining variation number) stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb, with respect to the continuous effect mode selection table 222e of the first control example described above. The difference is that the correspondence of the continuous production mode is selected. In addition, if there is winning information indicating a jackpot winning in the hold at the time of the fall winning, it is a special state of winning the jackpot (winning in the low probability state) immediately after winning the falling lottery, so it depends on the remaining period First, the special mode B can be selected to give a bonus effect to the player.

  Next, the contents of the final mode selection 3 table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. 184 (b). FIG. 184 (b). It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the last aspect selection 3 table 222h. The final mode selection 3 table 222h is different from the final mode selection table 222h used in the first control example described above in that the final mode is changed according to the setting state of the fall flag 222ba. The point is the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 184 (b), even if the result of the determination is not good, if there is winning information indicating a big win in the hold, this can be suggested in the final mode.

  Returning to FIG. 183 (b), the description will be continued. FIG. 183 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 183 (b), the RAM 223 in the second control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a fall flag 223ba and a remaining period storage area 223bb are provided, and the other points are the same. is there. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The falling flag 223ba is a flag for indicating that the falling lottery has been won, and is set to ON when a status command indicating that the falling lottery has been won is received from the main controller 110.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 185, a control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the second control example will be described. The present control example is different in that the special symbol variation start process 3 (S213) is used instead of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128) of the first control example described above, and the other points are the same. . The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the special fluctuation start process 3 (S213) is executed, first, the processes of S301 and S302 are executed in the same manner as the special fluctuation start process (see FIG. 128) of the first control example, and then the value of the falling lottery counter is calculated. The random number value (counter value) corresponding to the fall specified in the fall lottery table 202ba is compared (S351), and whether the value of the fall lottery counter matches the random value corresponding to the fall (lottery result corresponding to the fall) (S352).

  In the processing of S352, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall has been reached (S352: Yes), the game state is dropped to the normal state by setting the probability variation flag 203g to off (S353), and the fall ( A state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the gaming state has been changed to the normal state is set (S354).

  Then, similarly to the special variation start process of the first control example (see FIG. 128), after executing the processes of S303 to S307, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is won after the short time period (S355). Here, when winning after the time reduction period (S355: Yes), the time reduction middle counter 203h is reset (S356), and thereafter, S310 and S311 are performed similarly to the special variation start process (see FIG. 128) of the first control example. This process is executed and the present process is terminated.

  As described above, in the second control example, when an advantageous state (probability variation state) advantageous to the player is set, if the special symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the special symbol lottery (big hit) Before the lottery is executed, a falling lottery for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state from the advantageous state to the normal state (a gaming state that is disadvantageous than the advantageous state) is executed.

  Furthermore, in this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit in the state in which the electric accessory 140a is easy to open (probability change state or short-time state (hereinafter referred to as a normal probability high probability state)), The configuration is such that the high probability state of the normal symbol is shifted to the low probability state before the change of the target special symbol is started.

  According to the control process of the main controller 110 in the second control example described above, there are two end conditions for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol. Specifically, the first termination condition is that the number of times the special symbol has been changed during the short-time state has reached a predetermined number of times (the short-time number given to the set state). When the state is set, the fact that the falling lottery is won is set as the second end condition, and when the above two end conditions are both satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol is ended. . Regardless of whether or not the two end conditions described above are satisfied, if the special symbol jackpot is won, the end condition of the time reduction condition is satisfied.

  In other words, for example, if the winning state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot is over (next time) and the jackpot is set to 100 times, the first end mentioned above that the special symbol has changed 100 times. It becomes a condition, and winning the falling lottery is the second end condition described above. Specifically, in the above-described example, when the falling lottery is won at the 10th rotation of the special symbol variation after the big hit, the second end condition is satisfied at that time, but the first end condition is Since it is not satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol is continued until the first end condition is satisfied (the special symbol fluctuates 100 times) (until both end conditions are satisfied). When the number of changes of the special symbol reaches 100, both end conditions are satisfied, and the normal symbol shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  On the other hand, in a state where the number of special symbol fluctuations after the jackpot has exceeded 100 (the first end condition is satisfied), the falling lottery is not won (the second end condition is satisfied). If not, the high probability state of the normal symbol is continued until the falling lottery is won. When the falling lottery is won (when the second end condition is satisfied), the normal symbol shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  As described above, by providing a plurality (two) of conditions necessary for shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state, the state transition timing of the normal symbol can be diversified. In addition, when only the second end condition described above is not satisfied (in the above example, when a high probability state of a normal symbol is set in a state where the number of special symbol fluctuations exceeds 100) ) Because it is difficult for the player to know when the normal symbol is transferred to the low probability state (whether the winning lottery will be won), the normal symbol is in the high probability state for the player as long as possible The game can be performed while expecting to be.

  In the second control example, a special symbol variation count of 100 is set as one of the conditions for shifting the normal symbol high probability state (short time state) to the low probability state (normal state). However, the number of times may be set in accordance with the type of jackpot, for example, “1 time”, “25 times”, and “50 times” may be set in stages. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a plurality of timings at which the high probability state (time-short state) of the normal symbol ends together with the presence / absence of the winning of the falling lottery. Specifically, if the number of special symbol changes after the jackpot has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 25, 50, 100 times) and the winning lottery is won, the number of special symbol changes is a predetermined number of times ( When, for example, 25 times is set as the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of jackpot, the high probability state (short-time state) of the normal symbol ends when the number of times reaches 1, 25, 50, 100 times) When the number of special symbol fluctuations exceeds 25, and the winning lottery is won, the high probability state (short time state) of the normal symbol is immediately terminated.

  This makes it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the high probability state (short time state) of the normal symbol ends.

  Furthermore, in the second control example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is used as one of the conditions for ending the high probability state (time-short state) of the normal symbol. However, other termination conditions may be provided, For example, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a lottery result (so-called small winning prize winning) in which a game that opens the variable winning device 65 for a short period of time is executed (the number of times that the variable winning device 65 is operated) Or, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is measured separately for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol 1 reaches 10 times, or the total number of fluctuations of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 reaches 100 times. You may set as an end condition.

<Regarding the control process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 186 and 187, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In this control example, the command determination process 3 (see FIG. 186) is executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 140), and the command determination process 3 (see FIG. 186) is compared to the first control example described above. The difference is that a state determination process (see FIG. 187) is added as a sub-process, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 186. In the command determination process 3, the processes of S3201 to S3214 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 140) in the first control example described above.

  When the process of S3214 is completed, the state determination process (S3251) is executed next, and then the process of S3215 is executed, and this process ends. Here, details of the state determination process (S3251) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this state determination process (S3251), various processes on the sound lamp control device 113 side when the falling lottery is won are executed.

  When the state determination process (S3251) is executed, it is first determined whether a command indicating a fall has been received (S3252). The command indicating the falling is set when the falling lottery is won by the special symbol variation start process 3 (see FIG. 185) of the main control device 110 (S352 of FIG. 185: Yes) (see S354 of FIG. 185). When the command indicating the fall is not received in the process of S3252 (S3252: No), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if a command indicating a fall is received (S3252: Yes), it is determined whether the current time is in a short time period (S3253). If it is determined that the time is short (S3253: Yes), the fall flag 223ba is set to ON (S3254), and the remaining short time is calculated (S3255). The calculated remaining short time count is stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb (S3256).

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is winning information that has been won in jackpot (S3257). If it is determined that there is (S3257: Yes), special condition establishment information is stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb (S3258). Here, when the special condition establishment information is stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb, the special mode B is selected when the continuous effect mode is set using the continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222e (see FIG. 184).

  When the processing of S3258 is completed, it is next determined whether or not a command indicating that the gaming state is the normal state has been received (S3260), and if it is determined that the command indicating the normal state has been received (S3260), the fall It is determined whether the flag 223ba is set to ON (S3261). In the process of S3261, when it is determined that the fall flag 223ba is set to ON (S3261: Yes), that is, when the gaming state shifts from the short-time state to the normal state in the state of winning the fall lottery. If it is determined, the fall flag 223ba is set to OFF (S3262), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command indicating the normal state is not received in the process of S3260 (S3260: No), or the fall flag 223ba is not set to ON (set to OFF) in the process of S3261. ) (S3261: No), the process is terminated as it is.

  As described above, in the second control example, apart from the jackpot lottery for determining whether or not the special symbol is successful, from the probability variation state (that is, the high probability state with a high jackpot probability) to the low probability state with a low jackpot probability. Transition lottery to make a transition (fall) (hereinafter referred to as a falling lottery). A gaming machine that is executed each time a condition for determining whether or not a special symbol is determined will be described. As described above, in the gaming machine having the falling lottery function, even if the probability variation state (high probability state) is set, the period during which the high probability state is surely continued is not set, so that the special symbol variation is executed. A tension can be given to a player every time.

  Further, in the second control example, as in the first control example described above, when the probability variation state is set, a high probability state in which the jackpot probability is high and a short time state in which the electric accessory 140a is likely to be opened. Even if the winning lottery is won and the high probability state falls to the low probability state, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times after a predetermined period (for example, after the jackpot is over). The time-short state is set until it reaches (). As a result, even if the winning lottery is won immediately after the jackpot is over (for example, 3 rotations), because the short-time state is set for a predetermined period, it is determined that the player has won the falling lottery depending on the operation status of the electric accessory 140a. Can be suppressed.

  Although details will be described later, the falling lottery is configured to be executed before the special symbol jackpot lottery, and the special symbol jackpot lottery when winning the falling lottery is executed in a low probability state. Is done. In other words, if you win the falling lottery after the above-mentioned predetermined period (for example, after the end of the jackpot, the number of fluctuations in the special symbol is 100), the game state is in the normal state when the special symbol variation is started. (Low probability state and non-time-short state) will be set.

  In this case, even if an effect that suggests to the player whether the winning lottery is won or not is performed using the variation time of the special symbol won in the falling lottery, it is possible to fall only by looking at the operation status of the electric accessory 140a. There was a problem that it was possible to easily determine whether or not the lottery was successful. Therefore, in the second control example, when the jackpot lottery is won before the falling lottery in a state where the above-mentioned predetermined period (for example, after the jackpot ends, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times) The game state is configured to shift to the normal state before the symbol change starts.

  With this configuration, the operation content of the electric accessory 140a suddenly becomes an operation content in a non-short-time state in a state where a predetermined period (for example, after the end of the jackpot, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times) has been exceeded. In the event that the player has won the falling lottery or the jackpot lottery, it can be difficult for the player to grasp, and the player can have a sense of expectation until the change of the special symbol is completed. it can.

  Further, in the second control example, it is possible to set an effect mode capable of suggesting to the player the success / failure situation of the falling lottery by using the continuation effect described above. By comprising in this way, the effect which a player performs will be watched more and a production effect can be heightened.

  In the above-described second control example, if the falling lottery is won during the probability variation state, and the falling timing is during the time-shortening period, the fluctuation pattern table that is continuously used during the time-shortening is provided after the falling. By using the configuration to select the variation pattern, it is difficult for the player to know whether or not the falling lottery has been won. However, other configurations may be used, for example, as shown in FIG. In addition, another example may be used in which a variation pattern is selected using a special variation pattern table triggered by winning the falling lottery.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 188, the contents of the above-described another example will be described. FIG. 188 (a) is a block diagram schematically showing a variation pattern selection table 202d provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 when another example described above is used. As shown in FIG. 188 (a), the post-falling variation pattern table 202d5 is added in the other example described above.

  The contents of the post-falling variation pattern table 202d5 will be described with reference to FIG. 188 (b). FIG. 188 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the post-falling variation pattern table 202d5. As shown in FIG. 188 (b), the post-falling variation pattern table 202d5 is a variation pattern table used for four special symbol rotations after winning the falling lottery during the short time period. The post-falling fluctuation pattern table 202d5 is configured so that a 60-second fluctuation pattern can be easily selected even if it is out of place. Therefore, immediately after winning the falling lottery, battle reach is likely to occur. Thereby, whenever a battle reach occurs, an effect can be watched, giving a player a feeling of tension.

  In this case, it is preferable that the player is informed at a predetermined rate of the effect of notifying that the falling lottery is not won according to the effect mode of the battle reach. Specifically, the opponent of the battle reach (the opponent character) may indicate whether or not the falling lottery has been won, or depending on the direction (attack pattern) executed during the battle reach, The presence / absence of winning a lottery may be suggested, or the result of battle reach (the value of the remaining HP at the time of draw battle reach) may indicate the presence / absence of winning a fall lottery. Thereby, as a result of the battle reach, in addition to whether or not the jackpot has been won, it is also concerned whether or not the falling lottery has been won, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, when a big win is won during the period using the post-falling variation pattern table, a special effect mode may be executed as a special win. Thereby, it is possible to easily grasp that the player has won the jackpot in a low-probability state immediately after winning the falling lottery by viewing the effect mode executed as a special winner. In this case, the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the special hit may be a variation time that cannot be set in other variation pattern tables. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player of the instant hit after the fall due to a sense of incongruity due to the difference in the variation time.

<Description of another example of the suggestive effect described in the first control example>
Next, another example of the suggestion effect described in the first control example described above will be described. In the first control example described above, an effect mode of the suggestion effect composed of the sign effect and the countdown effect is changed in the change display setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 147) executed at the timing when the special figure change is started. The configuration set in the countdown effect setting process (S3810 in FIG. 152), which is a partial process, was used. On the other hand, in this other example, in the countdown effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 189) executed at the timing when the special figure change is started, only the start timing of the suggestion effect (the start timing of the precursor effect) is set, Based on the operation to the frame button 22 executed during the warning effect, the specific effect that is the target of the suggested effect is set.

  By configuring in this way, the start timing of the precursor effect that becomes the trigger for starting the suggestive effect is set as the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, and while the predictor effect is being executed (while the suggestive effect is being executed) In addition, it is possible to set a specific effect as a target of the suggestion effect. Therefore, as compared with the case where the suggestion effect is executed with respect to the predetermined specific effect, the effect mode of the suggestion effect can be freely set, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, similarly to the first control example described above, as the suggestion effect, a sign effect that roughly notifies the timing at which the specific effect is executed, and a countdown effect that specifically notifies the timing at which the specific effect is executed, Since it is configured to be executable, even if the specific effect is set after the suggestion effect is executed (during execution of the precursor effect), the suggestion effect can be executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in another example of the suggestion effect>
Next, with reference to FIG. 189 and FIG. 190, a control process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in this different example will be described. In this example, in contrast to the first control example described above, the countdown effect setting process 3 (FIG. 189) is used instead of the countdown setting process (see FIG. 152), and the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. The difference is that the processing content executed in S3107 of 139 is changed to the processing content of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (see FIG. 190). The other elements are the same as those in the first control example described above. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 189, the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810) executed in this another example will be described. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the contents of the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810). As shown in FIG. 189, when the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810) is executed, the same processes of S4301 to S4305 as in the first control example described above are executed, and then the current variation pattern is set. Based on the change time and the start timing of the suggestion effect (the start timing of the sign effect), an effect mode of the sign effect is set (S4351), a display sign effect start command for display is set (S4352), and the process ends. To do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4301 that the sign setting flag 223t is on (S4301: Yes), the multi-variable effect setting process is executed (S4321) in the same manner as in the first control example described above, and then this process is performed. finish.

  As described above, in this additional example, in the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810) executed in the fluctuation display setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 147) executed at the start of the special symbol fluctuation, The start timing of the sign effect that becomes the start opportunity is set. Thereby, the sign effect is set without setting the specific effect that is the target of the suggestion effect.

  In addition, in this additional example, it is configured to vary the start trigger of the suggestion effect (the start timing of the prognostic effect) depending on whether or not the special figure change this time is the change pattern won in the jackpot, The start timing of the suggestion effect (start timing of the sign effect) may be set using other conditions, for example, the start timing of the suggestion effect (start timing of the sign effect depending on the length of the variation pattern to be executed) ) May be set, or a plurality of suggestive effects start timings (start timings of predictive effects) that can be set for one variation pattern are provided, and the start timings of the plurality of suggestive effects (start timing of predictive effects) A lottery means for performing a lottery for determining the start timing (start timing of the sign effect) of one suggestion effect may be provided, and the lottery means may be set based on the lottery result of the lottery means. Further, the start timing of the suggestion effect (the start timing of the sign effect) may be set based on the operation content of the player operating the frame button 22 before the change of the special symbol this time is started.

  Further, the start timing of the suggestion effect (the start timing of the sign effect) may be varied based on the currently set gaming state. Specifically, for example, when the currently set gaming state is a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a probable variation state), a sign A ( It is good to comprise so that the point (refer the precursor pattern A shown to Fig.100 (a)) where the period from a change start is short may be set. Thereby, in addition to the lottery result of the variation, the currently set gaming state can be suggested to the player depending on the direction of the suggestion effect, so the player is interested in the suggested effect to be executed. Can be made. Further, as in the above-described second control example, the pachinko machine 10 has a transition (falling) means for shifting (falling) from a probability change state that is most advantageous to the player to a short-time state before the player notices it. Since it becomes an effect for suggesting the gaming state, the player can be more interested.

  In addition, as a method for setting the start timing of the suggestive effect (the start timing of the sign effect), when a change pattern corresponding to super reach or special reach is set as the change pattern, a predetermined timing from the start of change (for example, It may be configured such that the start timing of the suggestion effect (the start timing of the sign effect) is set at any timing among 5 seconds and 10 seconds later.

  When the suggestion effect is started in a state where the start trigger (start timing) of the specific effect that is the target of the suggestion effect is not set, as in this additional example Is a state in which the production period of the suggestion effect is not set, and therefore, as in the first control example described above, there is a problem that it is not possible to set the production mode of the precursor effect based on the set production period. is there.

  On the other hand, in this additional example, in the process of S4351, the effect mode of the precursor effect is set based on the change time of the change pattern executed this time and the start timing of the suggestive effect (the start timing of the precursor effect). It is configured to do. Specifically, if the current variation pattern is 60 seconds or more and the start timing of the suggestion effect (the start timing of the predictive effect) is the sign A, the sign of the sign effect is indicated as a long-term sign. A long effect mode (second route Dc2b in FIG. 98 (a)) corresponding to the effect is set, and in other cases, a short effect mode (first of FIG. A route Dc1a) is set.

  Thus, it is set later by roughly setting the effect mode of the sign effect based on the period during which the suggestion effect can be executed (the effect execution possible period based on the start timing of the suggestion effect and the fluctuation time of the change). It is possible to set an effect mode that does not give the player an uncomfortable feeling with respect to the specific effect (the effect period of the suggestion effect).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 190, the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S3107) executed in this different example will be described. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S3107). In this frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S3107), the production mode of the suggestion production is changed based on the pressing operation on the frame button 22 executed while the precursor production set in the processing of FIG. 189 is being executed. Processing to set is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 190, when the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (S3107) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5051), and if not pressed (S5051: No) ), And this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the processing of S5051 (S5051; Yes), it is then determined whether or not the present is in the precursor effect period (S5071).

  In the process of S5071, when it is determined that the present is not during the precursor effect period (S5071: No), other processes related to the frame button operation are executed (S5078), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5071 that the present is in the precursor stage (S5071: Yes), a specific effect corresponding to the pressed content of the frame button 22 is set (S5072).

  Here, the processing of S5072 will be specifically described. In this additional example, when a prelude effect is being executed (that is, when the display of FIG. 98 (a) is displayed), a frame button 22 is given to the player in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. An operation effect to be operated is executed. In this operation effect, an effect of changing the movement mode (movement speed or movement position) of the character Dc1 imitating a car displayed in the sub display area Ds as a precursor effect based on the operation of the frame button 22 is executed. . Then, the specific effect suggestion mode for indicating the type of the specific effect set in the current suggestion effect is displayed in the sub display area Ds that scrolls in response to the movement of the character Dc1, and the specific effect suggestion acquired by the character Dc1 A specific effect corresponding to the aspect is set.

  Here, the specific effect suggesting aspect displayed in the sub display area Ds during the sign effect is an aspect in which the player can grasp the content of the corresponding specific effect (for example, the PUSH effect) (for example, “PUSH” is attached). Displayed mode). And this specific production | presentation display aspect is set based on the specific production (specific production corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery of a special symbol) which can be set in this special figure fluctuation pattern, and specifically, FIG. ), A specific effect display mode corresponding to a “cut-in effect” executed 26 seconds after the start of change and a “PUSH display effect” executed 30 seconds after the start of change is displayed. Is done.

  In addition, in this additional example, the mode of the specific effect is associated with the timing at which the specific effect is executed, but the mode of the specific effect and the timing at which the specific effect is executed can be set separately. You may comprise. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine which specific effect mode is to be acquired from among a plurality of specific effect display modes displayed in the operation effect executed during the sign effect, and the period of the suggested effect is set longer. Can be suppressed from being grasped by a person. Therefore, even after the operation effect is finished, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the entire suggestion effect, and it is possible to continuously enjoy the suggestion effect for the player.

  Further, it may be configured to set the execution timing of the specific effect corresponding to the specific effect display mode acquired during the operation effect based on the contents of the change pattern of the special symbol this time (change time and jackpot lottery result). good. Thereby, it is possible to select a specific effect desired by the player, and the player can actively participate in the game. Even when such a configuration is used, the timing at which the specific effect selected by the player is executed is based on the contents of the variation pattern of the current special symbol (variation time and jackpot lottery result) as described above. By setting, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the effect executed during the change of the special symbol.

  Returning to FIG. 190, the description will be continued. When the processing of S5072 is completed, a period from the current time to the start timing of the countdown effect is calculated (S5073). In the process of S5073, the start timing of the countdown effect (3 seconds in this additional example) is calculated by calculating backward from the execution timing of the specific effect set in the process of S5072, and the period from the current time to the start timing of the countdown effect is calculated. calculate. That is, the period calculated in the process of S5073 can be lengthened by operating the frame button 22 quickly during the operation effect executed during the precursor effect.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the interval calculated in the processing of S5073 is within 15 seconds (S5074). If it is determined that it is within 15 seconds (S5074: Yes), the effect of the precursor effect currently being executed is determined. If the mode is set to the short effect mode (S5075), and it is determined that it is not within 15 seconds (longer than 15 seconds) (S5074: No), the effect mode of the predicate effect currently being executed is the long effect. The mode is set (S5076).

  That is, in this additional example, at the change start timing of the special symbol, first, based on the contents of the current change pattern (change time, jackpot lottery result), the effect mode of the precursor effect is set (S4351 in FIG. 189). ), The sign effect is executed along the set effect mode. When the specific effect that is the target of the suggestive effect is set while the sign effect is being executed, the sign effect is based on the remaining period of the suggestive effect (the remaining period of the predictive effect). The production mode is configured to be variable.

  By comprising in this way, a suggestion effect can be displayed without a sense of incongruity toward the specific effect performed during a variable display. In addition, since the display mode of the sign effect can be changed based on the operation content during the operation effect, for example, the short effect mode is easily set as the sign effect mode intentionally (the remaining period of the sign effect is short). ) Operate the frame button 22 at the end stage of the operation production, which is the timing, and enjoy whether or not the long production mode is set (whether or not the current variation pattern is a long variation time) or vice versa The sign effect that is executed in the long effect mode by operating the frame button 22 at the beginning of the operation effect, which is the timing when the long effect mode is easily set as the sign effect mode (the remaining period of the sign effect is long). Can be enjoyed, and the performance according to the player's request can be executed.

  After setting the precursor effect mode in the process of S5075 or S5076, a display countdown effect command corresponding to the set effect mode is set (S5077), the process of S5078 described above is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in this additional example, in the countdown effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 189) executed at the timing when the special figure change is started, the start timing of the suggestion effect (the start timing of the precursor effect) Only a specific effect that is the target of the suggested effect is set based on an operation on the frame button 22 that is executed during the sign effect.

  By configuring in this way, the start timing of the precursor effect that becomes the trigger for starting the suggestive effect is set as the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, and while the predictor effect is being executed (while the suggestive effect is being executed) In addition, it is possible to set a specific effect as a target of the suggestion effect. Therefore, as compared with the case where the suggestion effect is executed with respect to the predetermined specific effect, the effect mode of the suggestion effect can be freely set, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, similarly to the first control example described above, as the suggestion effect, a sign effect that roughly notifies the timing at which the specific effect is executed, and a countdown effect that specifically notifies the timing at which the specific effect is executed, Since it is configured to be executable, even if the specific effect is set after the suggestion effect is executed (during execution of the precursor effect), the suggestion effect can be executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In addition, in this additional example, it is possible to variably set the effect mode of the indication effect that is a partial effect of the suggestion effect (the effect executed in the first half), so the effect aspect of the entire suggestion effect can be changed. It can be set without a sense of incongruity. In this additional example, the effect mode of the countdown effect that is executed as a partial effect of the suggestion effect (the effect executed in the second half) is fixed (countdown display for 3 seconds), but not limited to this, The interval until the specific effect is executed at the timing (see S5073 in FIG. 190) at which the specific effect to be executed this time is set is determined (see S5074 in FIG. 190), and the countdown effect is produced based on the determination result. The period may be set (for example, 3 seconds or 7 seconds).

  Each of the configuration and the technical idea described in the first control example described above may be added to the additional example described above, and the contents of the first control example described above, the contents of the additional example, and You may provide the pachinko machine 10 which has each.

<Description when various effects described in the first control example are used in the second control example>
Next, the content when the content of the first control example and the content of the second control example are combined will be described. Specifically, based on the lottery result of the falling lottery or the preliminary determination result of the falling lottery determined in advance based on the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the first control described above. The content in the case of setting the production mode of various productions described in the example will be described.

  In the first control example described above, in the jackpot medium effect setting process (see S3302 in FIG. 143) for setting the jackpot effect, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 and the entry information for winning the jackpot in the reserved ball Based on the determination result of whether or not there is, it is configured to be able to set the continuous jackpot effect with reference to the jackpot effect selection table 222c, but in a gaming machine having a structure of a falling lottery, the lottery result of the falling lottery Alternatively, it may be configured to set the big hit effect with reference to the pre-determination result of the falling lottery that is pre-determined based on the information (pre-read information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

  Specifically, there is provided second pre-discriminating means capable of discriminating the winning information for winning the jackpot as the pre-reading information and the winning information for winning the falling lottery in association with the order in which the special symbol variation is executed, If it is determined that the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information won in the falling lottery is executed after the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information won in the jackpot is determined, the continuous jackpot effect is set. It is better to configure not to. As a result, when the consecutive jackpot effect is executed, there is no winning information for winning the falling lottery in the winning information stored on hold at that time. Value can be further increased.

  In addition, when it is determined by the second pre-discriminating means that the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information won in the jackpot is executed after the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information won in the falling lottery is executed, You may comprise so that a jackpot presentation may be set. As a result, it is possible to execute the jackpot continuous effect for the player without executing the fall suggestion effect that suggests that the player has won the fall lottery. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy by executing the fall suggestion effect.

  In addition, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the first rotation after the jackpot ends in the pre-reading information at the time of winning the jackpot contains information indicating that the winning lottery will be won, It is good to comprise so that the production which suggests that the game state (probability change state) advantageous to a player will be set after the end of jackpot as an effect is not performed. In other words, when the falling lottery is won at the start timing of the special symbol change for the first rotation after the big hit, the special symbol big hit lottery is never received in a high probability state advantageous to the player. In such a state, if an effect suggesting that a gaming state (probability variation state) advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot is ended during the jackpot, an excessive sense of expectation is given to the player. It will be. When the configuration described above is used, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving an excessive sense of expectation to the player.

  Next, in the first control example described above, a continuation effect (battle effect) for notifying a period in which a game state (probability change state or time-short state) advantageous to the player is continuously set is configured to be executable. , The effect mode of the continuation effect (the effect mode of the effect before the battle and the effect mode of the battle reach), the special symbol lottery result, information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (pre-read information), and Although it is configured such that the display mode of the continuous effect (battle effect) is set based on the number of times of the battle effect that is repeatedly executed during one advantageous state (during the probability change state or during the short time state), In gaming machines having a structure of falling lottery, refer to the result of the lottery drawing lottery or the result of pre-determination of the falling lottery determined in advance based on the information (pre-reading information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a. It may be configured to set the performance aspect of the continued production and.

  Each control example described above is configured to set a variation pattern (variation effect) at the timing when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. In other words, the variation pattern (variation effect) based on the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a is also configured to be executed at the variation start timing of the special symbol. In this case, since the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e) is decremented by 1 to start the variation of the special symbol, There has been a problem that a variation pattern (variation effect) cannot be set in a state where the information (prefetch information) stored in the information storage area 223a has reached the upper limit.

  In order to solve the above-described problem, a configuration in which a variation pattern (variation effect) is set by the audio lamp control device 113 is executed in common regardless of information (pre-read information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a. First variation pattern setting means for setting a first variation pattern to be performed (for example, an effect of varying the third symbol), and information executed in accordance with information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a. And a second variation pattern setting means for setting a second variation pattern (for example, a suggestive effect that suggests that there is a hit within the hold), and the variation start timing, that is, the following configuration may be used. That is, in the change display setting process (see FIG. 147) executed when a change pattern command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 140), only the first change pattern described above is set.

  Information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (read-ahead information) by the second variation pattern setting means after a predetermined time (for example, five seconds later) after the variation effect is executed based on the first variation pattern. ) To set a second variation pattern, and execute a variation effect in which information indicating the second variation pattern is added to the variation effect being executed in the first variation pattern. With this configuration, the timing for setting the variation pattern (variation effect) based on the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a can be delayed from the variation start timing of the special symbol.

  Therefore, a variation pattern (variation effect) based on the prefetch information can be set in a state where the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a has reached the upper limit number, and an effect based on the prefetch information ( It is possible to make it easier to execute a prefetching effect).

  The timing for executing the process for setting the second variation pattern by the second variation pattern setting means described above may be set after a certain time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the variation of the special symbol was started. Alternatively, the setting timing of the second variation pattern may be varied in correspondence with the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern setting means. By comprising in this way, the timing which sets a prefetch effect can be varied with the variation pattern performed, Therefore A player can be actively stored a holding ball.

  Here, as the execution timing set corresponding to the first variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern setting means, for example, a relatively long variation time (variation time of 60 seconds or more) is set as the first variation pattern. If set, the setting timing of the second variation pattern is set 15 seconds after the start of variation, and if a relatively short variation time (30 seconds variation time) is set as the first variation pattern, the second variation pattern is set. The pattern setting timing may be set 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation.

  In addition, when the variation time of the first variation pattern set by the first variation pattern setting unit is less than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the second variation pattern setting unit may not be executed. With this configuration, when a variation time in which it is difficult to execute the prefetching effect is set, the prefetching effect is not added during the variation, and an effect that is difficult for the player to execute is performed. This can be suppressed.

  Further, as the second variation pattern (prefetching effect) that can be set by the second variation pattern setting means, a short effect (for example, a comment display advance notice) executed in a short period (for example, 2 seconds) and a long period (for example, for example) Even if it is configured to be able to set a long effect (for example, a chance stop notice) executed in 20 seconds), the variation time of the first variation pattern set by the first variation pattern setting means Is less than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the variation time of the first variation pattern set by the first variation pattern setting unit is configured to not execute the second variation pattern setting unit. In the case of (for example, 10 seconds) or more, the second variation pattern (prefetching effect) can be easily executed by the second variation pattern setting means.

  As described above, when the second variation pattern setting unit is configured not to be executed according to the variation time of the first variation pattern set by the first variation pattern setting unit, the winning information storage area 223a is displayed. Among the stored winning information, the winning information that has already been determined whether or not the second fluctuation pattern is set by the second fluctuation pattern setting means and the winning information that has not been executed are stored in an identifiable manner. When the second variation pattern setting unit is executed, whether or not the second variation pattern is already set by the second variation pattern setting unit among the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. It may be configured to execute the setting determination of the second variation pattern by excluding the winning information that has been determined.

  In addition to the above-described example, a pre-reading effect execution command indicating that the second variation pattern (prefetching effect) set by the second variation pattern setting means has been executed by the display control device 114 is sent from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp. When the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to output to the control device 113 and the second fluctuation pattern (prefetch effect) is set, the prefetch effect execution command cannot be received (the prefetch effect was not executed). In the case of the next variation, the second variation pattern setting means may be executed again for the same winning information.

  A special symbol based on a storage means capable of storing (holding storage) a plurality of special symbol start winnings (first entrance 64 or second entrance 140) and information stored in the storage means (winning information) Before the lottery (variation) is executed (before the special symbol lottery condition based on the winning information stored in the storage means is established), the contents of the winning information stored in the storage means In a game machine having a pre-discriminating means (pre-reading means) for discriminating in advance, when executing a variation effect (pre-reading effect) based on the discrimination result of the prior discriminating means, at the start of the special symbol variation There is a configuration in which an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the current special symbol variation based on the determination result of the determination means is provided.

  According to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, an effect mode based on the determination result of the pre-discrimination means can be set as the effect mode corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol. The special symbol lottery result and the determination result of the prize information stored in the storage means can be suggested, and an effect that makes the player interested can be executed. However, since the effect mode based on the determination result of the prior determination result is determined at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the effect mode is set with the number of winning information stored in the storage means not reaching the upper limit number. There was a problem that had to be. In other words, the timing for setting the production mode is the timing for executing the variation of the special symbol using the oldest winning information (the winning information used for the next special symbol variation) stored in the storage unit (stored in the storage unit). (The timing when the winning information is reduced by one)), the effect mode cannot be set in a state where the number of the winning information stored in the storage means has reached the upper limit number, and the prior discrimination means There is a problem in that the execution frequency of the fluctuating effect (prefetching effect) based on the determination result is reduced.

  Further, in the configuration described above, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol, processing for determining the contents of the winning information stored in the storage means, and processing for setting the effect mode corresponding to the variation of the special symbol, There is a problem that the processing is concentrated in a short time and the processing load increases.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the prior determination unit described above based on the fact that new winning information is stored in the storage unit as a configuration for executing the variation effect (prefetching effect) based on the determination result of the prior determination unit. There is also a gaming machine that executes a determination based on the determination result, and executes an effect (pre-reading effect) for showing a prior determination result different from the variation display of the special symbol based on the determination result.

  In such a configuration, since the pre-reading effect can be executed at the timing when the new winning information is stored in the storage unit, the effect based on the determination result of the prior determination unit can be smoothly performed. However, since the effect to be executed is an effect for indicating the determination result of the prior determination means, the effect indicating the determination result of the special symbol currently being executed and the display content are overlapped, and There was a problem that it was difficult to understand. In addition, since the control for executing the pre-reading effect is performed at the timing when the new winning information is stored in the storage unit, there is a problem that the processing load temporarily increases.

  In order to solve the above-described problem, a configuration in which a variation pattern (variation effect) is set by the audio lamp control device 113 is executed in common regardless of information (pre-read information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a. First variation pattern setting means for setting a first variation pattern to be performed (for example, an effect of varying the third symbol), and information executed in accordance with information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a. And a second variation pattern setting means for setting a second variation pattern (for example, a suggestive effect that suggests that there is a hit within the hold), and the variation start timing, that is, the following configuration may be used. That is, in the change display setting process (see FIG. 147) executed when a change pattern command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 140), only the first change pattern described above is set.

  Information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (read-ahead information) by the second variation pattern setting means after a predetermined time (for example, five seconds later) after the variation effect is executed based on the first variation pattern. ) To set a second variation pattern, and execute a variation effect in which information indicating the second variation pattern is added to the variation effect being executed in the first variation pattern. With this configuration, the timing for setting the variation pattern (variation effect) based on the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a can be delayed from the variation start timing of the special symbol.

<Third control example>
Next, another control example of the continuous effect described in the first control example described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 90, the first control example described above is configured such that the battle effect (the pre-battle effect and the battle reach) is repeatedly executed during high accuracy (during the probability variation state or during the short time state). . In the control content of the first control example described above, a variation pattern that can execute battle reach depending on the lottery result of the special symbol (variation pattern that the variation time is 60 seconds or more), or a variation pattern that cannot execute battle reach. (Fluctuation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds) may be selected continuously. In the first control example described above, in order to suppress a decrease in the interest in the player's performance, a fluctuation pattern that can execute battle reach (a deviation fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 60 seconds or more) is within a predetermined period. When multiple selections are made (for example, within an interval in which the special symbol fluctuates six times), the battle reach is performed unnecessarily by configuring the latter variation pattern not to execute the battle reach. Although it is configured to solve the problem of reducing the production effect, a random pattern that can execute battle reach and a random pattern that cannot execute battle reach are randomly selected based on the lottery results of special symbols. In the first control example to be selected, a fluctuation pattern in which battle reach cannot be executed depending on a lottery result of a special symbol (a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds). Down) is will be selected in succession, battle before production was remains a problem that the long period of time.

  Therefore, in the third control example, a special effect for displaying a lottery result of a special symbol that is configured such that a continuation effect (battle effect) is executed during the probability change state as the gaming state. As a variation pattern table used when selecting a variation pattern of variation, a variation pattern table in which pre-battle effects are executed (easy to be performed) and a variation pattern table in which battle reach is performed (easy to be performed) are predetermined. It is configured to be used in accordance with rules (variation scenarios).

  With this configuration, when the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is selected, when the special symbol variation number is the predetermined number of times (for example, the 14th rotation from the end of the big hit), the battle reach is always executed. And the above-mentioned problems can be solved. Further, in the third control example, the variation scenario used while the probability variation state is set is configured to be selected from a plurality of variation scenarios having different contents. Thereby, even if it is a case where the structure by which a fluctuation pattern is selected along a predetermined fluctuation scenario is used, it can suppress that a player gets tired of a game early.

  Furthermore, in this third control example, a plurality of types of jackpot types are prepared for the jackpot that provides the same value (content of the jackpot game, game state set after the jackpot is finished), and the selected jackpot type Based on the fluctuation scenario corresponding to, the fluctuation pattern executed after the jackpot is selected is selected. As a result, it is possible to set a variation scenario to be executed after the jackpot is finished according to the type of jackpot, so that a variation pattern according to the variation scenario is surely selected from the special symbol variation of the first rotation after the jackpot ends. be able to.

<Electric Configuration in Third Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 and the contents of the RAM 203 are partially changed, and the sound lamp control The difference is that the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the device 113 and the contents of the RAM 223 are partially changed and the contents of the character ROM 234 provided in the display control device 114 are partially changed. Are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 191 (a) is a block diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 191 (a), the ROM 202 in the present control example is a part of the contents of the first hit type selection table 202c and the point that the variation scenario setting table 202ca is added to the ROM 202 in the first control example. The difference is that the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202c in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 192 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202c in the third control example. The detailed description of the same elements as those in the first hit type selection table 202c used in the first control example described above is omitted.

  In the first hit type selection table 202c in the third control example, the jackpot type (the jackpot A to the jackpot K) corresponding to the contents of the jackpot game (number of rounds) and the game state set after the jackpot game ends is further set. Subdivided jackpot types (jackpots Aa to Aj) are defined. Specifically, among the values “0 to 19” of the first hit type counter C2 that is defined in association with “big hit A”, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0, 1”. Is defined in association with “big jackpot Aa”, in the range of “2,3”, is defined in association with “big jackpot Ab”, and in the range of “4,5” "Ac" is defined in association with it, "Corporate Ad" is defined in association with the range "6, 7", and "Corporate Ae" is associated with in the range "8, 9" The range of “10, 11” is defined in association with “Big jackpot Af”, and the range of “12, 13” is defined in association with “Big jackpot Ag”. In the range of “14, 15”, “Big jackpot Ah” is defined in association with it. Cage, the range of "16, 17", are defined in association with the "big hit Ai", the range of "19" is defined in association with the "big hit Aj".

  That is, in the third control example, out of 200 counter values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 10 kinds of random number values for which “big hit A” is selected are classified into 10 types. The jackpot type (jackpot Aa to jackpot Aj) is defined to be evenly allocated, and the ratio of selecting each jackpot type (jackpot Aa to jackpot Aj) is 1%.

  Although detailed description will be given later, in the third control example, when any one of “big jackpot Aa” to “big jackpot Aj” is selected, the big jackpot game defined by “big jackpot A” (15 rounds) Game) is executed, and after the jackpot game is completed, a game state defined as “jackpot A” is set. And the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot game is configured to be different depending on the selected jackpot type (jackpot Aa to jackpot Aj). .

  With this configuration, when a specific jackpot game is set, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed after the jackpot game ends can be made different. For example, the jackpot type is “jackpot Aa”. When “Big jackpot Aj” is selected, a variation pattern with a short variation time can be more easily selected as a variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed after the jackpot game ends. That is, even if it is a jackpot type in which the same game state is set with the same jackpot game content, the number of fluctuations per unit time in the special symbol variation after the jackpot game can be varied depending on the jackpot type, A player who wants to win the next jackpot as soon as possible can have a sense of expectation for the winning jackpot type until the timing when the special symbol variation after the jackpot game is executed.

  Similar to the above-mentioned "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit D", "big hit G", "big hit I" defined in the first hit type selection table 202c, that is, high probability after the big hit game ends For jackpot types to which a state and a short time state (hereinafter referred to as a probability variation state) are assigned, it is defined that “a to j”, which are subclasses of the jackpot types, are equally allocated. On the other hand, “big hit C”, “big hit H”, “big hit J”, “big hit K”, that is, a high probability state and a short time state are not given after the big hit game ends (a low probability state and a short time state are given) ) For the jackpot type, a small variation (a to j) of the jackpot type is not defined, and a common variation pattern is selected as a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation executed after the jackpot game ends. It is configured as follows.

  Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 193 (a). FIG. 193 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 193 (a), the third control example is different from the first control example in that the special variation pattern table 202d4 is deleted, the big hit (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc1, and the first outlier The difference is that a (probability) variation pattern table 202dc2, a second out (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3, and a special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc4 are added.

  Here, the jackpot (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc1 will be described with reference to FIG. 193 (b). FIG. 193 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc1. The jackpot (probability change) variation pattern table 202dc1 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the gaming state is a probability variation state and the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 193 (b), one of the variation patterns having a variation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds is selected. Specifically, in the range where the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 179”, variation patterns (various types of super reach) with a variation time of 60 seconds are defined in association with each other. In the range, variation patterns (various special reach) having a variation time of 90 seconds are defined in association with each other. In the third control example, when a variation pattern having a variation time of 60 seconds is selected, a battle reach (win battle) in which three attacks are performed by the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (see FIG. 94). When the fluctuation pattern of 90 seconds is selected, a battle reach (winning battle) in which a revival effect is performed after three attacks are unfolded (see FIG. 96).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 193 (c), the first out (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc2 will be described. FIG. 193 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first out (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc2. This first deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202dc2 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the gaming state is the probability variation state and the special symbol lottery result is out. One.

  As shown in FIG. 193 (c), in the first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc2, a variation pattern with a short variation time (for example, 3 seconds, 5 seconds) has a long variation time (for example, 60 seconds). It is configured to be easier to select than the variation pattern. Specifically, in the range where the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 149”, a variation pattern (short deviation a) having a variation time of 3 seconds is defined in association with the value “150 to 197”. In the range, a fluctuation pattern (short deviation b) having a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is defined in association with the range, and “198” is defined in association with a fluctuation pattern (long deviation a) having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds. Has been.

  That is, in the first out-of-range (probable variation) variation pattern table 202 dc 2, 198 random values (range of “0 to 197”) among 199 counter values (random numbers) that the variation type counter C 1 can take. Thus, a short deviation (short deviation a, short deviation b) which is a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is defined, and a long fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is defined for the remaining one random value (“198”). Since the deviation (long deviation a) is defined, the variation time is short in most cases (about 99.5%) when the variation pattern is selected with reference to the first variation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc2. A variation pattern is selected.

  In the third control example, when a variation pattern having a variation time of 3 seconds (short deviation a) or a variation pattern having a variation time of 5 seconds (short deviation b) is selected, the sound lamp control device 113 performs a pre-battle effect (FIG. 91, see FIG. 92), and when “short deviation b” is selected, an attack effect (see FIG. 92) for increasing or decreasing the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent is executed. In addition, when “short deviation a” is selected, for example, an effect in which the player's character and the opponent's character have a conversation without performing an effect of increasing / decreasing the opponent's continuation value (HP value) The effect of switching the character is executed. Further, when “outside a” is selected, a battle reach (draw battle) in which three attacks are unfolded (see FIG. 94) is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 193 (d), the contents of the second out (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3 will be described. FIG. 193 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second out-of-range (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3. This second out (probability change) variation pattern table 202dc3 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the gaming state is in the certain variation state and the lottery result of the special symbol is out. As shown in FIG. 193 (d), one of the variation patterns having a variation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds is selected.

  Specifically, in the range where the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 197”, a variation pattern (out-of-range a) having a variation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with each other. A fluctuation pattern (long deviation b) having a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is defined in association with it.

  FIG. 193 (e) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc4. This special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc4 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the jackpot gaming state is a probability variation state, and the variation time is determined regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. A variation pattern of 0.5 seconds is selected. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the range, the fluctuation pattern (ultra-short deviation) with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds corresponds to the whole range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. If the special symbol lottery result is a big win, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"), the fluctuation pattern of 0.5 seconds fluctuation time (per ultra short) Are defined in association with each other.

  Returning to FIG. 191 (a), the description will be continued. The variation scenario setting table 202ca is a variation scenario that defines the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 193 (a)) referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation corresponding to the number of variations of the special symbol. It is defined in association with the jackpot type. This fluctuation scenario setting table 202ca is determined in the jackpot control process (see S1104 in FIG. 137) executed by the main controller 110 when it is determined that the end timing of the ending effect, that is, the jackpot game end timing (FIG. 137). S1211: Yes), it is referred to in order to set the fluctuation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type won this time, and the fluctuation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type won this time is read out and stored in the fluctuation scenario storage area 203ca.

  Here, the contents of the fluctuation scenario defined in the fluctuation scenario setting table 202ca will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 194 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario setting table 202ca. As shown in FIG. 194 (a), the variation scenario setting table 202ca is associated with each variation scenario (variation) in association with the jackpot type (small category (a to j) of the jackpot type) and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Scenario 1 to fluctuation scenario 11) are defined.

  In other words, in the third control example, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed after the jackpot ends (the special symbol variation performed after the jackpot ends) according to the winning jackpot type and the gaming state when the jackpot is won. The range in which the fluctuation pattern is selected can be varied. Therefore, when winning the jackpot, in addition to the contents (number of rounds) of the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot game, the variation pattern set after the jackpot game can be made different. Interest can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), the variation scenario set after the jackpot ends is different depending on the gaming state when the jackpot is won. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a state where there is no shortage (common high probability state and low probability state of the special symbol), any jackpot type (small category of jackpot type (a to j)) Even if is set, if a common variation scenario (variation scenario 1) is set, and the game state when winning the jackpot is a state with a short time (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state common) The variation scenario (variation scenarios 2 to 11) corresponding to the set jackpot type (small classification (a to j) of the jackpot type) is set.

  By configuring in this way, the number of special symbol fluctuations per unit time is greater when winning the jackpot (probability jackpot) in the state with time reduction than when winning the jackpot (probability jackpot) with no time reduction It becomes possible to do. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more aware of the gaming state when winning the jackpot and improve the interest of the game.

  In this third control example, when winning a jackpot (probability change jackpot) in a state with a shorter time than the fluctuation scenario (change scenario 1) set when winning a jackpot (probability change jackpot) without a time reduction. Each variation scenario is configured so that the set variation scenario (variation scenario 2 to variation scenario 11) increases the number of special symbol variations per unit time, but is not limited to this. Each fluctuation scenario may be configured so that the number of special symbol fluctuations per unit time increases when winning a jackpot (probable variation jackpot) in the state. By configuring in this way, for example, a privilege video can be executed for a long time in an effect mode that can be set only when a promising big hit is won in a state with a short time.

  In addition, among the fluctuation scenarios (fluctuation scenario 2 to fluctuation scenario 11) that are set when winning a jackpot (probable change jackpot) with a shortage of time, some of the fluctuation scenarios are set to jackpots (probable change jackpots) without a shortage of time. It may be set so that the number of special symbol fluctuations per unit time is less than the fluctuation scenario (variation scenario 1) set when winning, or when winning a big hit (probable change big hit) without time reduction In addition, a plurality of fluctuation scenarios may be set based on the jackpot type (small classification (a to j) of the jackpot type).

  Next, the contents of each variation scenario defined in the variation scenario setting table 202ca will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 (b) to 196 (d). FIG. 194 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario 1. First, the contents defined in the fluctuation scenario will be described with reference to FIG. 194 (b). The fluctuation scenario refers to the number of changes in the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot game (that is, one special symbol change after the end of the jackpot game becomes the number of changes 1) and the change pattern of the change. Are defined in association with each other.

  Further, in the third control example, as described above, when the jackpot type for which the probability variation state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends is won, the corresponding variation scenario is set by the variation scenario setting table 202ca, and the variation scenario is set. The variation pattern is selected according to the contents defined in the above.

  As shown in FIG. 194 (b), in the fluctuation scenario 1, table A (special (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc4) is defined as a fluctuation pattern table to be referred to when the fluctuation count is “1 to 4”, and the fluctuation count. Table B (displacement (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3) is defined as a variation pattern referred to when “5” is “5”.

  As shown in FIG. 194 (a), the fluctuation scenario 1 is set when all the jackpots with the jackpot type (small classification) are won in the state where the short-time state is not given as the gaming state. Is done. When the variation scenario 1 is set, the special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc4 (table A) (see FIG. 193 (e)) is used during the special symbol variation 1 to 4 rotations after the end of the jackpot, and the special symbol is used. Regardless of the lottery result, a variation pattern having a variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected.

  Then, after the 5th rotation of the special symbol variation after the big hit, the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (table B) (see FIG. 108 (d)) is used, and the variation time is out of 7 to 90 seconds. The variation pattern is selected based on the acquired value of the variation type CS1. In addition, since the variation scenario 1 is a scenario that is set when the gaming state is a probabilistic variation state, if the bonus symbol wins a special symbol with the variation scenario 1 set, as described above (Probability variation) A variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table 202dc1.

  Next, the contents of the fluctuation scenario 2 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 194 (c), in variation scenario 2, table A (special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc4) is associated with the range of variation numbers “1 to 4” in the same manner as variation scenario 1 described above. The table C (first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range where the number of fluctuations is “5 to 13”, and when the number of fluctuations is “14”, the table D (second deviation ( (Probability change) Fluctuation pattern table 202dc3) is defined.

  Thereafter, until the number of fluctuations reaches “199”, the table C (first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in association with the number of fluctuations nine times, and the table D (second A deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined in association with it. In other words, during the period in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the jackpot is “5 to 199”, the special pattern variation in which the variation pattern is selected using the table C is executed nine times, and then the variation pattern is changed using the table D. The scenario in which the selected special symbol variation is executed is repeatedly executed.

  With this configuration, in the battle effect executed during the period in which the probability change state is set as the gaming state, a special symbol variation (a short deviation (short deviation a using the table C) in which the pre-battle effect is executed) is executed. , Special symbol variation in which short deviation b) is selected) and special symbol variation in which battle reach is performed (special symbol variation in which long deviation (long deviation a, long deviation b) is selected using Table D) Can be set in advance, so that it is possible to vary the effect mode of the pre-battle effect toward the special symbol fluctuation in which the battle reach is executed.

  Further, in the third control example, when the variation pattern is selected using the table C, a slight deviation a (60-second deviation variation) is selected, although slightly. Thereby, when a fluctuation scenario is set in advance, the battle reach can be executed at an unexpected timing. As a result, when a battle reach is executed at an unexpected timing (that is, when a variation time (a variation time of 60 seconds or more) capable of performing the battle reach is selected), a big hit is given to the player. You can play games while expecting to win.

  In addition, as described above, a variable scenario is set, and the period during which the pre-battle presentation and the battle reach are executed can be set in advance, so that a long-term (for example, holding) It is possible to set the production mode of the pre-battle presentation in a period in which a larger number of special symbol variations than the upper limit of memory is executed), but every time the battle production is executed, the same fluctuation scenario is set. If the production based on the performance is executed, there is a problem that the player gets bored with the battle production itself.

  In order to solve such a problem, in the third control example, the jackpot game content (number of rounds) and the game state set after the jackpot end are the same jackpot type (for example, “jackpot A”) On the other hand, a plurality of jackpot types (for example, “jackpot Aa” to “jackpot Aj”) in which different variation scenarios are defined so that the player cannot grasp the contents of the variation scenario during the battle performance. It is composed.

  Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the demerits (monotonization of effects) due to the scenario, while having the advantages (providing a long-term effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity) due to the scenario of the variation pattern. Also, because the jackpot game content (number of rounds) and the game state set after the jackpot ends are configured in a plurality of variable scenarios for the same jackpot type (for example, “jackpot A”), Even if the player knows the jackpot game content and the game state that is set after the jackpot ends, it can be difficult to understand in which fluctuation scenario the special figure change is executed after the jackpot ends . Therefore, when a battle reach is executed, it is difficult to determine whether it is a predetermined battle reach based on a fluctuating scenario (draw battle) or a battle reach based on winning a jackpot (win or defeat battle) It is possible to enhance the production effect.

  In this control example, the jackpot type to which “a to j” is assigned is defined for all of “jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, “jackpot D”, “jackpot G”, and “jackpot I”. However, the jackpot type defined for each jackpot may be different. For example, when a jackpot game corresponding to “jackpot A” is executed, a specific variation scenario (for example, a variation scenario) It may be configured such that only 2) can be set. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for a player who has played a game for a long time to grasp the relationship between the jackpot game content and the fluctuation scenario. Therefore, after a specific jackpot game (for example, a jackpot game corresponding to “jackpot A”) is finished, when a battle reach is executed at a timing different from usual, the expectation for the jackpot can be increased.

  Then, the table B (outgoing (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3) is defined in association with the range in which the number of variations of the special symbol is "200-". With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the probability variation state continues until the next jackpot as in this control example, it is not necessary to create infinite variation scenarios, and thus the data capacity of the main controller 110 can be reduced. Can do. In the third control example, for a jackpot probability of a special symbol in the probability variation state (about 1/48 (see FIG. 106 (a)), a fluctuation that is reached when a lottery more than four times the probability is executed. When the number of times “200” is exceeded, the table B (outgoing (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3) is configured to be executed. ) The variation pattern table 202d3) may be executed. For example, the table B is used when the number of variations reached “500” is exceeded when a lottery of 10 or more times of the jackpot probability is executed. The selected variation pattern may be executed.

  Further, in the third control example, when the fluctuation number “200” that is the upper limit of the fluctuation scenario is exceeded, the selection of the fluctuation pattern using the table B is performed. A table may be used. For example, a variation pattern using table A may be configured to be executed until the next jackpot is won, or it may vary from the variation number “200” that is the upper limit of the variation scenario. The variation pattern selection using the table A is executed in the period of the number “399”, and when the variation number exceeds “400”, the variation pattern selection using the table B is executed until the next jackpot is won. You may comprise so that.

  As described above, the third control example is configured to execute the battle effect based on the fluctuation scenario for the special symbol fluctuation within the range of the number of lotteries that can be won in the big win if it is normal. However, when the upper limit of the variation scenario (the number of times of variation “200”) is exceeded, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to execute an effect other than the battle effect. In this case, it may be configured such that a bonus effect is provided in which video and audio that are not normally visible to the player are provided, or points collected by the player are given. Thereby, it becomes possible to give a special privilege to the player who could not win the jackpot over a long period of time. In addition, in the third control example, the above-described privilege effect is executed using a variation pattern different from the variation pattern corresponding to the variation scenario set in order to smoothly execute the battle effect executed during the probability variation state. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom of the effect production.

  Next, the contents of the fluctuation scenario 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 194 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the fluctuation scenario 3. This variation scenario 3 is configured such that the period during which the variation pattern is selected using the table C and the table D is different from the above-described variation scenario 2 (see FIG. 194 (c)). Specifically, in the variation scenario 3, the variation number is defined in association with the table A (special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc4) in the range of “1 to 4” as in the variation scenario 2 described above. Is defined in the range of “5 to 9”, the table C (first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc2) is defined, and when the number of variations is “10”, the table D (second variation (probability variation) variation pattern table) 202 dc3) is defined.

  Thereafter, until the number of fluctuations reaches “190”, the table C (first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in association with the number of fluctuations five times, and the table D (second A deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined in association with it. In other words, during the period in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the jackpot is “5 to 190”, after the special symbol variation in which the variation pattern is selected using the table C is executed five times, the variation pattern is changed using the table D. The scenario in which the selected special symbol variation is executed is repeatedly executed.

  By configuring in this way, the timing at which the battle reach based on the variation scenario (draw battle) is executed can be varied depending on the type of variation scenario set, so the battle reach based on winning the jackpot ( Whether it is a victory or defeat battle) can be made difficult to understand, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Similarly to the above-described variation scenario 2, the table C (first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of “190 to 198” and the number of variations is “199”. A table D (second deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined, and a table B (extraction (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3) is defined in the range of “200 to”.

  In this way, the period of the pre-battle presentation corresponding to the last battle reach (battle reach executed when the number of fluctuations is “199”) (period where the number of fluctuations is “190 to 198”) is regardless of the jackpot type. By unifying, it is possible to easily unify the contents of the effect to be executed regardless of which jackpot type is set. Therefore, since it is not necessary to prepare for each jackpot type an effect that suggests to the player that the battle effect is to end (an effect that makes the pre-battle effect or the effect mode of battle reach different from normal), the capacity of the effect data is reduced. Can be reduced.

  In addition, it is not necessary to unify the effects (the effects that make the pre-battle effects and the effect modes of battle reach different from normal) that suggest to the player that the battle effects will end for all jackpot types, at least 2 You can configure a fluctuating scenario to unify the effects that suggest to the player that the battle effects will end for the two jackpot types (the effects that make the pre-battle effects and the battle reach effects different from normal) Thus, the capacity of the production data can be reduced.

  Next, the contents of the fluctuation scenario 4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 195 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario 4. In the fluctuation scenario 4, the same contents as the above-described fluctuation scenario 2 (see FIG. 194 (c)) are defined in the period from the number of fluctuations “1 to 14”, and the contents defined thereafter. Is configured to be different from the fluctuation scenario 2. In this way, a plurality of variable scenarios are defined for the player this time by configuring the same content for a predetermined period after the jackpot ends and making the content different after the predetermined period has elapsed. It can be harder to understand what the fluctuation scenario is.

  FIG. 195 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario 5. Unlike the fluctuation scenarios 2 to 4, the fluctuation scenario 5 is a special symbol fluctuation in which the fluctuation pattern is selected using the table D after the number of fluctuations “1 to 4” in which the fluctuation pattern is selected using the table A. Is executed. That is, a battle reach (draw battle) is performed without performing the pre-battle effect. By comprising in this way, compared with the case where another fluctuation scenario is set, a player can give a big discomfort to a player with respect to a battle effect. Therefore, the expectation of jackpot can be raised with respect to the battle reach performed immediately after the start of the battle effect. Since other contents are the same as those of the above-described fluctuation scenarios 2 to 4, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, FIG. 195 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario 6. As shown in FIG. 195 (c), the fluctuation scenario 6 has a point that the fluctuation pattern is not selected using the table A and the special symbol fluctuation in which the fluctuation pattern is selected using the table D. Is different from the other fluctuation scenarios in that it is set continuously. Since the other elements are the same as those in the above-described fluctuation scenarios 2 to 4, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Also, with respect to the above-described variation scenario 6, in order to prevent the player from easily grasping the variation scenario, the variation pattern table defined in the variation scenario is made the same and is associated with each variation pattern table. A variation scenario 7 (see FIG. 195 (d)) in which only the number of variations is changed is provided. As a result, even if the variation pattern is selected using the table C after the jackpot ends (that is, when the battle effect is started immediately after the jackpot ends), the variation set this time for the player. It can be difficult to understand what the scenario is.

  Next, the contents of the fluctuation scenario 8 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 196 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario 8. As shown in FIG. 196 (a), the fluctuation scenario 8 is different from the above-described fluctuation scenarios 1 to 7 in that the period during which the fluctuation pattern is selected is set longer using the table A. . Specifically, the table A is defined in association with the range in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed after the jackpot ends is “1-10”. By configuring in this way, it is possible to lengthen the period for selecting the variation pattern using the table A in which the variation pattern having a variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. Can be provided in a short time.

  Further, during the period defined in association with this table A, the 3rd symbol display device 81 has a display similar to the extended display in the first control example described above, that is, an ending screen indicating the end of the jackpot game. It is configured to be displayed. Thereby, a series of jackpot effects can be executed for a plurality of jackpot games.

  Next, the fluctuation scenario 9 will be described with reference to FIG. 196 (b). FIG. 196 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario 9. As shown in FIG. 196 (b), the fluctuation scenario 9 is different from other fluctuation scenarios in that the fluctuation pattern table defined first after the jackpot is changed to the table B instead of the table A. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that the probability variation state is not set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot. After that, when a period (a period of fluctuation number “1 to 4”) defined in association with Table B has passed, a fluctuation pattern using Table C and Table D is selected as in other fluctuation scenarios. Since the battle effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the selected variation pattern, an unexpected effect can be provided to the player.

  FIG. 196 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario 10. As shown in FIG. 196 (c), the fluctuation scenario 10 is different from other fluctuation scenarios in that a period for selecting a fluctuation pattern using the table D is not set. That is, in this variation scenario 10, since the variation pattern is not selected using the table D during the period when the battle effect is performed, a battle reach (draw battle) determined in advance based on the variation scenario is executed. There is nothing to be done.

  In the present fluctuation scenario 10, when the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 when selecting a fluctuation pattern using the table C is “198”, and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (out of a) is selected. Alternatively, when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds is selected using the jackpot (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202dc1, the battle reach is executed. . Therefore, when the present fluctuation scenario 10 is set, the probability of winning the jackpot when the battle reach is executed can be increased as compared with the case where other fluctuation scenarios are set.

  Further, in the third control example, as in the first control example described above, the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and the probability change big hit in which the probability change state is given as the gaming state after the big hit ends, and the big hit As a gaming state after the end, it has a normal jackpot that is given a normal state, and in the battle reach that is executed during the battle production, if you win the odds jackpot, the winning battle is executed and the normal jackpot is won In this case, a defeat battle is executed, and a draw battle is executed when a special symbol lottery result is out of play.

  That is, when the present fluctuation scenario 10 is set, the frequency with which the draw battle is executed can be reduced as compared with the case where another fluctuation scenario is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the contents of the effect when the battle reach is executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Note that, when the variation scenario is set without using the table D as in the variation scenario 10, there is a possibility that the pre-battle presentation may be executed for a long period of time. For example, a variation pattern that can be selected using the table C ( It is preferable to use a table (table C2) in which a fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds to 1 second) that is shorter than the fluctuation time of 3 seconds to 5 seconds) can be selected. . Thereby, the period when the pre-battle presentation is continuously executed can be shortened.

  Next, the fluctuation scenario 11 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 196 (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario 11. In this fluctuation scenario 11, as shown in FIG. 196 (d), the fluctuation pattern table defined first after the jackpot ends is the table C, and after a predetermined period has passed since the jackpot ends (the special symbol has changed 249 times). After that, it is different from the other fluctuation scenarios in that the table A is defined and the upper limit number of fluctuation scenarios is set to “400”.

  According to the fluctuation scenario 11, since there is no period in which the fluctuation pattern is selected using the table D as in the case of the fluctuation scenario 10 described above, there is a possibility that the player wins a jackpot when the battle reach is executed. (Possibility that a victory or defeat battle is executed) can be increased, and the player can be watched for the content of the battle reach.

  In addition, when the number of special symbol changes after the jackpot is over a predetermined number (399 times), the table A that provides the highest number of changes per unit time is specified, so the probability change state is set as the gaming state. In spite of the fact that the player does not win the jackpot, the dissatisfaction that the player feels when the period for which the special symbol variation is executed 10 times the denominator value of the jackpot probability continues for a long period of time A feeling can be suppressed.

  As described above, in the third control example, a plurality (10 types) of fluctuation scenarios can be set for the jackpot type in which the same jackpot is executed, and battle reach (drawing) based on the fluctuation scenario is configured. Battle) and battle reach (winning or defeating battle) based on winning a special symbol jackpot, but the types of variable scenarios are not limited to this, and many more types You may comprise so that a fluctuation scenario can be set.

  In the third control example, a variable scenario is defined for all periods in which the battle effect is executed, and the content of the battle effect (pre-battle effect, battle reach) can be determined in advance. Only a part of the period during which the battle effect is performed (for example, the period from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol variation is executed 50 times, or the period of 10 special symbol variations calculated backward from the timing when the battle effect ends) You may comprise so that a fluctuation | variation scenario may be defined.

  In the third control example, a configuration for setting a fluctuation scenario for special symbol fluctuation based on the selected jackpot type is used, but other elements for setting (variing) the fluctuation scenario may be used. Although the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, it can be configured to set (variable) a variable scenario when the lottery result (so-called so-called “big hit”) gives a player a smaller amount of benefits than the big hit. Alternatively, the falling scenario may be set (variable) by the falling lottery means used in the second control example described above when the falling is won. Furthermore, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol variation reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), a means for performing lottery for varying the variation scenario is provided, and the variation scenario is set (variable) based on the lottery result. You may comprise so that it may do.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 used in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 191 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 191 (b), the RAM 203 of the third control example is different from the RAM 203 of the first control example described above in that a variable scenario storage area 203ca is added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The fluctuation scenario storage area 203ca is an area for storing a fluctuation scenario set using the fluctuation scenario setting table 202ca. In the third control example, the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected based on the variation scenario stored in the variation scenario storage area 203ca. In the variation scenario storage area 203ca, when a special symbol jackpot is won, a variation scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is stored, and the variation number subtraction process 4 ( (Refer to S452 in FIG. 204). In this way, after winning the jackpot (after the process of starting the special symbol variation to indicate that the jackpot was won), until the special symbol variation after the jackpot ends is executed Since the variation scenario is stored in the meantime, the variation pattern of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot can be surely selected based on the variation scenario stored in the variation scenario storage area 203ca.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 197, details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 197 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 197 (a), the ROM 222 of the third control example deletes the continuous value main selection table 222f and the continuous value sub-selection table 222g from the ROM 222 of the first control example described above. Point, variation scenario storage area 222ca, first continuation value main selection table 222cb, second continuation value main selection table 222cc, third continuation value main selection table 222cd, and continuation effect mode selection 2 table 222ce. It is different in that it has been added. In addition, since the third control example shows a modification example of the continuation effect (battle effect) of the first control example described above, the continuation among the elements provided in the ROM 222 of the first control example described above. The description of elements that are not related to the performance is omitted, and the other elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The fluctuation scenario storage area 222ca is an area in which information for indicating the contents of a plurality of fluctuation scenarios defined in the fluctuation scenario setting table 202ca of the main controller 110 is stored, and is output from the main controller 110. The fluctuation scenario is updated on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the command for indicating the setting status of the fluctuation scenario (for example, the command for indicating the jackpot type or the command for indicating the set fluctuation scenario). Information used for management is stored.

  This fluctuation scenario storage area 222ca is determined in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 205) of the sound lamp control device 113 when it is determined that a state command including related information related to the fluctuation scenario has been received (S3271 in FIG. 205: Yes). ), The fluctuation scenario corresponding to the received command is read out and set in the fluctuation scenario update area 223ca (see S3272 in FIG. 205).

  With this configuration, the fluctuation scenario set by the main control device 110 and the fluctuation scenario managed by the sound lamp control device 113 can be synchronized. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern selected in the future by the main control device 110. (Variation pattern selected based on the set variation scenario) can be grasped in advance on the sound lamp control device 113 side. Therefore, it is possible to easily set a long-term effect without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

  That is, in the conventional gaming machine, the contents of a plurality of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a are determined, and based on the determination result, specific winning information (for example, the third of the winning information is the third). Long-term using the fluctuation period of the special symbol variation (special symbol variation executed first and second of the winning information) that is executed before that (winning information in which special symbol variation is executed) For example, when a plurality of winning information is not stored in the winning information storage area 223a, it is difficult to execute a long-term effect. At the same time, the maximum value of the range in which a long-term effect can be performed is a variation period of special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the maximum number of winning information that can be stored in the winning information storage area 223a, so that the effect period is limited. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, in the third control example, scenario change management of a special symbol variation pattern (variation time) can be performed to easily determine a special symbol variation pattern (variation time) to be executed in the future. Therefore, a freedom degree can be raised with respect to a long-term production.

  In the third control example, since the sound lamp control device 113 has the fluctuation scenario storage area 222ca, it is not necessary to output all the contents of the fluctuation scenario set by the main control device 110 and is set. Information for indicating the fluctuation scenario (for example, information indicating the winning jackpot type or identification information for specifying the set fluctuation scenario from a plurality of fluctuation scenarios) may be output. The amount of data to be output can be reduced.

  In addition, although detailed description is omitted, in the third control example, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (when a power failure occurs), the main controller 110 is restored when the power supply is restored. The recovery process for outputting the stored gaming state immediately before the power supply to the sound lamp control device 113 is cut off (or until the processing of the main control device 110 is stopped after the power supply is cut off) is executed. In the information for indicating the gaming state output in the recovery process, at least the previously won jackpot type is currently set as information for indicating the currently set fluctuation scenario. Information to indicate one of the fluctuation scenarios, the update status of the fluctuation scenario currently set, and the number of fluctuations of special symbols executed after the last jackpot And information for indicating, are configured to contain. As a result, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted due to a power failure or the like during the game, the updated contents of the fluctuation scenario set in the main controller 110 after the recovery and the fluctuations managed by the audio lamp controller 113 Scenario updates can be easily synchronized.

  In this case, a predetermined period (for example, the special symbol fluctuates a plurality of times (five times) after the fluctuating scenario update management processing by the sound lamp control device 113 is restored based on the information output from the main control device 110 as the restoration processing. And the update period of the fluctuation scenario set in the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 manage the period until the change and the change pattern table defined in the fluctuation scenario). It may be used as a confirmation period for determining whether the update contents of the fluctuation scenario are correctly updated. Thereby, the update management process of the fluctuation scenario can be restored more accurately. In addition, during the above-described confirmation period, to show that the variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 and that it is being restored without being based on the variation scenario. It may be configured to execute the recovery display. Thereby, since the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suppress giving the player unpleasant feeling.

  The first continuation value main selection table 222cb is a table that is referred to when updating the continuation value (HP value) when the continuation effect (battle effect) is being executed, until the battle reach is executed. This table is referred to when the period (remaining period) is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, when the number of special symbol fluctuations until the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to battle reach is executed is four or more).

  Here, the continuation value setting method in the third control example will be described focusing on the differences from the first control example described above. In the first control example described above, the main continuation value for performing update management of the continuation value in the sound lamp control device 113 and the continuation value (HP value) for presentation to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The secondary continuation value of each is set with reference to the corresponding table, and the sum of the set main continuation value and the secondary continuation value is calculated, and an information command for indicating the total value is displayed on the display control device. In contrast, in the third control example, only the value of the main continuation value is set by the sound lamp control device 113, and the main continuation value set by the sound lamp control device 113 is shown. The information command including the information for output is output to the display control device 114, and the sub continuation value is set based on the information command received on the display control device 114 side, and the sum value is calculated.

  That is, in the third control example, when the continuation value is repeatedly increased or decreased, only the main continuation value, which is a value managed to deal with the special symbol lottery result or the fluctuation scenario, is selected by the sound lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 executes all other processing. Thereby, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be greatly reduced.

  Here, the contents of the first continuation value main selection table 222cb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 198 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first continuation value main selection table 222cb. In the first continuation value main selection table 222cb, a ratio in which the selected value (main continuation value) selected is different from the value (main continuation value) stored in the current continuation value (continuation value storage area 223n). It is stipulated that

  The selection ratio is set by assigning each value to a range (for example, 0 to 199) that can be taken by a dedicated effect counter (not shown). In the first continuation value main selection table 222cb, the lower limit of selectable selection values is defined as “400”. As described above, the first continuation value main selection table 222cb has a special symbol when the value of the remaining number counter is 4 or more, that is, at least four times before the battle reach determined by the fluctuation scenario is executed. This is because the table is used when it is necessary to change, so that a low selection value is set unnecessarily, and the progress of the increase / decrease effect of the continuation value is suppressed. Thereby, when the value of the remaining number counter 223cb becomes 3 or less, that is, when battle reach is about to start, an effect of increasing or decreasing the continuation value can be executed without a sense of incongruity.

  Explaining the contents shown in FIG. 198, when the value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n is “1000”, the ratio of “1000” being selected as the selected value (main continuation value) to be selected. Is 5%, "900" is selected at 50%, "800" is selected at 30%, "700" is selected at 10%, "600" is selected at 3 %, The ratio at which “500” is selected is defined as 2%.

  Here, the content of the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 corresponding to increase / decrease in a continuation value (main continuation value) is demonstrated. In the third control example, an effect corresponding to the increase or decrease of the total value obtained by adding the main continuation value selected by the sound lamp control device 113 and the sub continuation value selected by the display control device 114 is executed. . The effect to be executed is configured such that the secondary continuation value is selected so that the increase / decrease range of the main continuation value and the increase / decrease range of the combined value are the same as in the first control example described above. The content of the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is substantially determined by the selection value (main continuation value) selected using the 1st continuation value main selection table 222cb.

  Specifically, when the current main continuation value is “1000” and the selection value is “1000”, an “exercise” effect is executed, and an effect in which the continuation value (HP value) on the display screen does not increase or decrease is executed. Is done. When a selection value that does not decrease the main continuation value is selected in the first continuation value main selection table 222cb, a command to that effect is output to the display control device 114, and when that command is received, The display control device 114 is configured not to select the sub continuation value. Thereby, although the main continuation value does not decrease, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the sub continuation value is selected and the continuation value (HP value) on the display increases or decreases.

  Next, when the current main continuation value is “1000” and the selection values are “900” to “500”, an “attack” effect is performed to decrease the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent. The detailed production mode of this “attack” production is set by the difference value between the current main continuation value and the selection value. When the difference value is 100, “weak attack”, when 200, “medium attack”, “300” is set as “strong attack”, 400 is set as “strong attack”, and 500 is set as “strongest attack”. By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the reduction range of the continuation value (HP value) based on the content of the effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Can interest you.

  Similarly, when the value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n is “900”, as a selection value to be selected (main continuation value), the ratio of “900” being selected is 10%, “800”. Is selected as 50%, "700" is selected as 30%, "600" is selected as 5%, and "500" is selected as 5%. When the value stored in the storage area 223n is “800”, as a selection value (main continuation value) to be selected, a ratio of “800” being selected is 20%, and a ratio of “700” being selected. Is 50%, “600” is selected as 20%, and “500” is selected as 10%.

  When the value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n is “700”, the ratio of “900” being selected as the selection value (main continuation value) to be selected is 10%, and “700” is “700”. The selection ratio is defined as 30%, the selection ratio of “600” is 40%, the selection ratio of “500” is 20%, and the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223n is “600”. In this case, the ratio that “800” is selected is defined as 10%, the ratio that “600” is selected is 40%, and the ratio that “500” is selected is defined as 40%. When the stored value is “500”, the ratio that “900” is selected is 10%, the ratio that “700” is selected is 10%, and the ratio that “500” is selected is 80%. Stored in the continuation value storage area 223n. When the value is “400”, the ratio at which “900” is selected is 30%, the ratio at which “700” is selected is 20%, the ratio at which “500” is selected is 10%, and “400” is The selected ratio is defined as 40%.

  As described above, when the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223n is “700” to “400”, the selected value may be higher than the current continuous value. In this case, a “recovery” effect in which the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent increases as an effect executed on the display screen. By executing this recovery effect, when the continuation value (HP value) decreases unexpectedly, the effect of increasing or decreasing the continuation value (HP value) can be continuously executed again.

  As described above, the first continuation value main selection table 222cb used when the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 4 or more is a ratio at which an effect (weak attack) that gradually decreases the main continuation value is selected. Is set higher than the rate at which other effects are selected. Thereby, even when the pre-battle effect is executed over a long period of time, the continuous value increase / decrease effect can be advanced. Further, even if the ratio of selecting “weak attack” is set high, the effect mode executed on the display screen is varied corresponding to the selected secondary continuation value as in the first control example described above. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player, and to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  Returning to FIG. The second continuation value main selection table 222cc is used when selecting the effect mode of the pre-battle effect when the on-hold bonus flag 223cc is set to ON, that is, when the special symbol becomes a big hit after changing several times. This is the table used. Next, the contents of the second continuation value main selection table 222cc will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 199 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second continuation value main selection table 222cc. As shown in FIG. 199, the second continuation value main selection table 222cc is different from the first continuation value main selection table 222cb described with reference to FIG. 198 as selectable selection values “777”, “333”, It is greatly different in that “300” to “0” are added. Hereinafter, a description will be given focusing on differences from the first continuation value main selection table 222cb. Of the contents defined in the second continuation value main selection table 222cc, detailed description of elements that are the same as or different from the first continuation value main selection table 222cb is omitted. .

  The second continuation value main selection table 222cc is configured so that “777” and “333” can be selected as main continuation value values in order to notify in advance that the winning information corresponding to the jackpot exists within the hold. Yes. When “777” or “333” is selected as the selection value, a dedicated command indicating that is output to the display control device 114, and when the command is received, the display control device 114 performs sub-continuation. It is configured not to select a value. As a result, the secondary continuation value is selected in spite of the selection of the main continuation value for indicating that the jackpot is won using the second continuation value main selection table 222cc. Value) can be suppressed.

  In the third control example, when the main continuation value for indicating that the jackpot is won is selected, the sub continuation value prohibits the player from selecting a value, thereby main continuation for the player. It is configured to be able to notify the value values (“777”, “333”), but other configurations may be used, and when a command related to the main continuation value for indicating that the jackpot is won is received In addition, the display control device 114 is configured to select a secondary continuation value using a dedicated selection table, and when the value (secondary continuation value) selected using the dedicated selection table is “0”. Only “777” and “333” may be displayed as the continuation value (HP value) on the display screen. In this case, as the values that can be taken by the dedicated selection table described above, for example, when the main continuation value is “777”, values to which “23” and “13” are added, “7” and “17” It is preferable that the value to be subtracted can be selected. With this configuration, when a value other than “0” is selected as the secondary continuation value, the last digit value of the continuation value (HP value) can be set to “0”. The added value of displaying a continuation value (HP value) for indicating that the player wins a big hit on the display screen can be made difficult for the player to grasp that “777” has been selected as the continuation value. Can be increased.

  Further, unlike the first continuation value main selection table 222cb, the second continuation value main selection table 222cc is configured to be able to select “300” to “0” as selection values. Thereby, when the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen in the pre-battle effect is less than “300”, the player can predict that the battle reach will be executed soon. . Although details will be described later, in the third continuation value main selection table 222cd (a table used when the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 3 or less), “300” to “0” are selected as the selection values. The continuation value main selection table 222cc can be selected at a lower selection ratio. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the degree of expectation for the jackpot.

  In FIG. 199, a plurality of values such as “1000 to 800” are collectively shown as the current continuation value and selection value, but in actuality, “1000”, “900”, and “800” are independent contents. Since the contents defined in each are the same, a plurality of values are collectively described.

  In addition, in the second continuation value main selection table 222cc, a value of “1000 to 800” is selected as a value to be selected when the revival effect is executed regardless of the currently set main continuation value. The ratio is set high. This is configured so that “777” and “333” can be selected as main continuation values for indicating that the second continuation value main selection table 222 cc wins the big hit, and the continuation values (HP values) are restored. In the pre-battle presentation after the game, the main continuation value for indicating that the jackpot is won is increased to a selectable range so that the player wins the jackpot again. To show, the game can be played while expecting the main continuation value to be selected.

  Returning to FIG. The third continuation value main selection table 222cd is used when the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 3 or less, that is, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the battle reach set based on the fluctuation scenario is executed is 3 or less. It is a table used when selecting the production mode of the pre-battle production. Next, the third continuation value main selection table 222cd will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 200 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the third continuous value main selection table 222cd.

  As shown in FIG. 200, the third continuation value main selection table 222cd has contents similar to the second continuation value main selection table 222cc shown in FIG. 199. Specifically, it is determined that the jackpot is won. The point at which the main continuation value (“777”, “333”) for selection is selected is set to “0”, the rate at which “0” is selected as the selection value is set to “0”, and the whole The difference is that the ratio at which a low value (“300” to “0”) is selected as the selection value is reduced, and the difference in the selection ratio is the same to some extent for the other contents.

  Returning to FIG. Continuous effect mode selection 4 table 222ce is a table for selecting the effect mode (effect mode) of the pre-battle effect in the continuous effect. Here, with reference to FIG. 201, the contents of the continuous effect mode selection 4 table 222ce will be described. FIG. 201 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the continuous effect mode selection 4 table 222ce. When the continuous effect mode selection 4 table 222ce reaches the upper limit of the variation scenario with respect to the continuous effect mode selection table 222e of the first control example described above (the variation number of the special symbol is 200 when the probability variation state is set). It is different in that a dedicated effect (mode 6) is selected when the number of times exceeds. Other elements are the same, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  That is, in the third control example, a variation scenario is set for the special symbol variation after the jackpot, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is determined using the variation pattern table defined in the set variation scenario. Configured to be selected. Then, in consideration of the data capacity of the main controller 110, the fluctuation scenario is set up to a range where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, a number corresponding to a numerical value obtained by multiplying the value of the denominator of the jackpot probability) Is configured such that a variation pattern is selected using a specific variation pattern table (Table B) until the next jackpot is won (see FIG. 194).

  In the third control example configured as described above, it is difficult to execute a continuous effect using a variation scenario when the number of variations of a special symbol exceeds the predetermined number of times described above. “Mode 6” is selected. When “mode 6” is selected, the battle effect ends, and the identification corresponding to the variation pattern (see FIG. 108 (d)) defined in the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (table B). Production is performed. As this specific effect, for example, an effect that cannot be normally seen is executed, such as an effect in which a party is settled with an opponent who has not settled during the battle effect.

  In the third control example, only when the number of changes of the special symbol that is the upper limit of the change scenario is set to “200” or “400” and the period in which the jackpot is not won in the probable change state becomes long. It is configured to execute the specific effects described above and give the player a sense of satisfaction. In addition, for example, this is set when a big jackpot is won in a specific jackpot type (for example, the small category “k”) Only the specific variation scenario to be performed may be set to “20” as the number of variations of the special symbol that is the upper limit of the variation scenario, so that the above-described privilege effect can be easily seen. Thus, when a plurality of jackpot types (small classifications “a” to “k”) are provided for the big jackpot (for example, the big jackpot “big jackpot A”) in which the same jackpot game is executed, A privilege (ease of executing a specific effect) given to a person can be made different, and even after winning a jackpot, the winning jackpot type can be interested.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 197 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example. The RAM 223 of the third control example is different from the RAM 223 of the first control example in that the continuation period counter 223p is deleted, a fluctuation scenario update area 223ca, a remaining number counter 223cb, a pending hit flag 223cc, and a continuation setting flag 223cd. It is different in that it is added. In the third control example, another control example related to the continuation effect of the first control example described above is described. Therefore, among the elements defined in the RAM 223, Description is omitted.

  The fluctuation scenario update area 223ca is an area that is updated and managed in order for the voice lamp control apparatus 113 to grasp the fluctuation scenario set in the main controller 110 and the update status of the fluctuation scenario. This fluctuation scenario update area 223ca is determined in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 205) that it has received the fluctuation scenario related information for indicating the fluctuation scenario set in the main controller 110 (FIG. 205: S3271). : Yes), a variation scenario corresponding to the received variation scenario related information is selected from the plurality of variation scenarios stored in the variation scenario storage area 222ca, the selected variation scenario is set, and variation display setting processing ( Each time (see FIG. 147) is executed, the progress of the fluctuation scenario is updated. Based on the update state of the change scenario set in the change scenario update area 223ca, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is set in the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207). When the jackpot is won, the set fluctuation scenario is cleared (not shown).

  The remaining number counter 223cb is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the next battle reach is executed based on the fluctuation scenario, and when the set value becomes 0, the battle reach Is configured to run. This remaining number counter 223cb calculates the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the next battle reach is executed based on the information of the fluctuation scenario update area 223ca in the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207). This value is set as the value of the remaining number counter 223cb (S4052 in FIG. 207).

  The value set in the remaining number counter 223cb is decremented by 1 every time the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207) is executed (see S4057 in FIG. 207), or the battle reach is executed as the continuous effect or the pre-battle effect This is referred to when determining whether to execute. Also, in the winning information command processing (see FIG. 206), when it is determined that there is a winning prize in the hold (S3251: Yes in FIG. 206), the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is referred to correspond to the winning prize in the hold. The special symbol variation to be executed first and the special symbol variation corresponding to the battle reach to be executed when the value of the remaining number counter 223cb becomes 0 are discriminated as to which special symbol variation is executed first ( S3253 in FIG. 206). When battle reach is executed, the value is set (cleared) to 0 (S4060 in FIG. 207).

  The on-hold winning flag 223cc is a flag for indicating whether or not the winning information for winning the jackpot exists in the winning information storage area 223a. When the winning information is set to ON, the winning information storage area 223a is displayed. It shows that there is winning information to win the jackpot.

  This pending winning flag 223cc is not always set to ON when winning information for winning a jackpot exists in the winning information storage area 223a, and a special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information for winning a jackpot is not set. If it is determined that the remaining number counter 223cb is executed before the value becomes “0” (S3253: Yes in FIG. 206), it is set to ON. In the continuation value setting process 4 (see FIG. 208), it is determined whether the pending hit flag 223cc is set on (see S4151 in FIG. 208), and when it is determined that it is set on (see FIG. 208). S4151: Yes), hundreds of continuation values are executed based on the second continuation value main selection table 222cc.

  The continuation setting flag 223cd is a flag for determining whether or not the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is set in the probability changing state. When the value is set to ON, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is set. It shows that it is.

  This continuation setting flag 223cd is determined in the continuation effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207) when the setting status is determined (see S4051 in FIG. 207) and is not set to ON (set to OFF). (S4051 in FIG. 207: No), after the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is set, it is set to ON (S4053 in FIG. 207). On the other hand, in the process of S4051 in FIG. 207, when it is determined that it is set to ON (S4051: Yes in FIG. 207), the process of setting the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is skipped. Then, when the battle reach is executed, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is cleared to 0 (see S4060 in FIG. 207).

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the value of the remaining number counter 223cb from being reset when a value has already been set in the remaining number counter 223cb. Thus, after the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is set, every time the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207) is executed, a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the remaining number counter 223cb (see S4057 in FIG. 207). It is possible to easily synchronize the update state of the fluctuation scenario set in the main control device 110 and the update state of the fluctuation scenario managed by the sound lamp control device 113 simply by executing.

  In addition, a value that does not correspond to the fluctuation scenario in the process of S3254 executed in the winning information command process 4 (see FIG. 206), that is, a value indicating the number of special symbol fluctuations until the winning information that wins the jackpot is executed. When the remaining number counter 223cb is set, the subtraction based on the value can be surely executed.

  Next, details of the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 202 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration provided in the MPU 221 of the display control apparatus 114 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 202, the display control device 114 of the third control example is different from the display control device 114 of the first control example described above in that a continuous value storage area 233ca is added to the work RAM 233, and the character ROM 234 The difference is that a first continuation value sub-selection table 234a3 and a second continuation value sub-selection table 234a4 are added to the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The continuation value storage area 233ca is an area for storing a continuation value calculated based on the display continuation value command received from the sound lamp control device 113. In the continuation value related command process 4 (see FIG. 210), The calculated continuation value is stored (see S7305 in FIG. 210). Then, in the final mode command processing (see FIG. 211), when it is determined that the final mode to be executed this time is not a victory battle (S8305: No in FIG. 211), the stored value is referred to (FIG. 211). Of S8306).

  The first continuation value sub-selection table 234a3 and the second continuation value sub-selection table 234a4 are the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 (FIG. 117 (b)) provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the first control example described above. Reference) and the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 (see FIG. 117 (c)), the fourth effect provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the first control example described above. A difference is that an effect counter (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is used instead of the counter 223y4.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller 110 in Third Control Example>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In this control example, the point that the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 203) is used instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127), and the number of variations subtraction process (FIG. 129) is different from the first control example described above. It is different in that the fluctuation number subtraction process 4 (see FIG. 204) is used instead of the reference), and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 203, the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 4 (S104) performed by MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 in this 3rd control example is demonstrated. FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 4 (S104). The special symbol variation process 4 is a special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) of the first control example described above (S214: Yes), and the current lottery result is a big hit. When the determination is made (S216: Yes), the contents of the processing executed are partially different, and the same processing is executed for the other elements. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the special symbol variation process 4 is executed, first, the same processes of S201 to S216 as the above-described special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) are executed. If it is determined in the process of S216 that the current lottery result is a jackpot (S216: Yes), then the jackpot type selected with reference to the first hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 192) is selected. Based on this, a scenario for opening a specific prize opening is set. Specifically, the jackpot game content to be executed this time (for example, 15 rounds), the opening period from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round, the interval period between each round, the last round (for example, , The 15th round), and the ending period from the end of the jackpot to the end of the jackpot, a scenario is set in which the specific winning opening is opened at this jackpot.

  When the processing of S217 is completed, next, the probability variation flag 203g and the hour / medium counter 203h are reset (S218), the start of jackpot is set (S219), and the status command based on the jackpot type is set (S251). And the process of S220 same as the 1st control example mentioned above is performed, and this process is complete | finished. On the other hand, in the process of S216, even when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (displacement) (S216: No), the same process of S221 as in the first control example described above is executed, and the process of S220 To finish this processing.

  In the process of S251 described above, a state command including information for indicating at least the jackpot type that has been won this time is set. The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts information on the jackpot type from the status command, and responds from the fluctuation scenario stored in the fluctuation scenario storage area 222ca of the ROM 222 based on the extracted information. The fluctuation scenario is selected, and the selected fluctuation scenario is stored in the fluctuation scenario update area 223ca.

  By configuring in this way, the sound lamp control device 113 side can grasp which variation scenario is used to select the variation pattern of the special symbol after the jackpot is ended at the timing when the jackpot game is started. . As a result, for example, the information command indicating the change pattern at the timing when the jackpot ends and the change of the special symbol starts, and the command for indicating the change scenario set this time are output more reliably. An effect corresponding to the scenario can be set.

  In the third control example, the status command set at the timing when the jackpot game is started includes information for indicating the variation scenario set after the jackpot is completed, and therefore corresponds to the contents of the status command. You can also set up a big hit. Therefore, since the variation scenario set after the jackpot is ended can be suggested to the player by the effect executed during the jackpot, the player can be interested in the effect executed during the jackpot. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 204, the contents of the variation number subtraction process 4 executed in the third control example will be described. FIG. 204 is a flowchart schematically showing the contents of the variation count subtraction process 4. The variation number subtraction process 4 is a process (S451, S452) for updating the variation scenario stored in the variation scenario update area 223ca in contrast to the variation number subtraction process (see FIG. 129) of the first control example described above. The difference is in the added points, and the others are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 204, when the variation count subtraction process 4 is executed, the same processes 401 to S411 in S3709 as the variation count subtraction process (see FIG. 129) of the first control example described above are executed. Next, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation scenario is stored in the fluctuation scenario update area 223ca (S451). If it is determined that a fluctuation scenario is stored (S451: Yes), the stored fluctuation scenario is updated ( S452), the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S451, when it is determined that the fluctuation scenario is not stored (S451: No), the process ends without executing the process of S452.

  Here, the update contents of the fluctuation scenario executed in the process of S452 will be described in detail. First, the fluctuation number subtraction process 4 (see S204) is executed as a subroutine of the special symbol fluctuation process (see S203). Thereby, when it is determined that the variation of the special symbol is started, the variation scenario can be reliably updated.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device 113 in Third Control Example>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In this control example, instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 140), the command determination process 4 (S205) is used instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 140), and the winning information command process (see S141) is used. The difference is that the winning information command process 4 (see FIG. 203) is used, and the changing number subtraction process 4 (see FIG. 129) is used instead of the changing number subtraction process (see FIG. 129). Are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, when the process of FIG. 205 is executed, the same processes of S3201 to S3214 as the first control example described above are executed. When the processing of S3214 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the received state command includes related information for setting the fluctuation scenario (S3271), and related information for setting the fluctuation scenario is included. If it is determined (S3271: Yes), the fluctuation scenario corresponding to the fluctuation scenario related information included in the received state command is selected from the fluctuation scenario storage area 222ca and stored in the fluctuation scenario update area 223ca (S3272). . Then, a display status command is set (S3215), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3271 that the related information for setting the fluctuation scenario is not included (S3271: No), the process of S3272 is skipped, the process of S3215 is executed, and this process is performed. finish.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 206, the winning information command processing 4 will be described. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information command process 4.

  When the winning information command processing 4 is executed, first, the received winning command information is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area (S3231), and whether the winning command received this time includes information corresponding to the jackpot ( It is determined whether or not it is a winning prize (S3251). If it is determined in the process of S3251 that the winning prize is found (S3251: Yes), the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information received this time is based on the location where the winning information received this time in the winning information storage area is stored. The order in which is executed is calculated (S3252).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is larger than the variation order calculated in the process of S3252 (S3253), and when it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is larger (S3253: Yes). The value set in the remaining number counter 223cb, that is, the value indicating the remaining number of times (special symbol variation number) until the battle reach is executed based on the contents of the set variation scenario is won. Is variably set to a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the battle reach is executed (S3254).

  As a result, since the period until the battle reach is actually executed can be flexibly set and determined, the pre-battle effect that is continuously executed until the battle reach is executed during the battle effect. The content (content of increase / decrease of the continuation value) can be set based on the remaining period until the next battle reach is executed. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

  When the processing of S3254 is completed, the pending hit flag 223cc is set to ON (S3255), other prefetch processing is executed (S3256), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3251 that the currently received winning command is not a winning prize (S3251: No), the processes of S3252-S3255 are skipped, the process of S3256 is executed, and this process is terminated. To do.

  Next, the contents of the continuous effect setting process 4 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing the content of the continuous effect setting process 4. This continuation effect setting process 4 (S3806 in FIG. 207) is for setting an effect mode of a plurality of effects executed during the continuation effect. When the continuation effect setting process 4 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the continuation setting flag 223cd is set to ON (S4051). If it is determined that the continuation setting flag 223cd is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4051: Yes), then the remaining number counter is based on the information stored in the variable scenario update area 223ca. The value of 223cb is set (S4052).

  Here, the process of S4052 will be described. The fluctuation scenario update area 223ca stores a fluctuation scenario corresponding to (synchronized with) the fluctuation scenario set by the main controller 110. Then, using the table D, the number of special symbol variations until the special symbol variation for which the variation pattern is selected is executed is calculated, and the calculated number is set in the remaining number counter 223cb. As a result, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb indicates the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the next battle reach is executed based on the fluctuation scenario.

  In the third control example, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is determined, and the table for setting the continuation value based on the determination result is configured to be variable. Thereby, the continuation value set corresponding to the period until the next battle reach is executed (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the continuation value is greatly reduced in spite of the situation where the battle reach is not performed for the time being (the situation where the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is large).

  Further, in a situation where a battle reach is about to be executed (a situation where the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is small), the continuation value may be greatly reduced in order to make the player expect that a battle battle will be executed in the battle reach. it can.

  Furthermore, the third control example is configured to determine in advance the number of special symbol variations until the special symbol variation in which the battle reach is executed based on the information (variation pattern information) specified in the variation scenario. Therefore, it is possible to determine the variation of the special symbol in which the battle reach is performed regardless of the number of the reserved symbols of the special symbol and the contents of the winning information stored on hold. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of incongruity.

  As will be described in detail later, in the fluctuation pattern stored on hold, the fluctuation in the special symbol fluctuation executed before the battle reach (drawing battle) determined in advance using the fluctuation scenario is executed. Variation pattern selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 “198” is acquired in the variation pattern table (Table C) for the first variation (probable variation) variation pattern when the time is 60 seconds and the special symbol lottery result is out of range. ) Or when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit and it is determined that the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (twice) or more before the special symbol change is executed. A value corresponding to the number of special symbol fluctuations until the symbol is changed is set as the value of the remaining number counter 223cb. Thus, even when the battle reach is executed without being based on the fluctuation scenario, that is, even when the battle reach is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, in the special symbol change executed until the battle reach (battle In the previous production), the continuation value can be appropriately increased or decreased.

  Returning to FIG. When the processing of S4052 is completed, the continuation setting flag 223cd is set to ON (S4053). As described above, while the continuation setting flag 223cd is set to ON, the processing of S4052 is not executed by the determination processing of S4051. As a result, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is prohibited from being set again in a state where the value is already set in the remaining number counter 223cb. Therefore, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb that is not based on the fluctuation scenario (the value of the remaining number counter 223cb set corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation that is a big hit when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit) is set. Even if it is, the value can be maintained continuously.

  When the processing of S4053 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation) is a hit fluctuation corresponding to the big hit (S4054), and if it is determined that it is a hit fluctuation (S4054: Yes), a battle is performed. In order to set the battle reach production mode which is the final mode of production, the process proceeds to S4013 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation is not a hit variation (a deviation variation) (S4054: No), it is then determined whether the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 0 (S4055).

  Here, when it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 0 (S4055: Yes), that is, the special symbol variation of this time is a special symbol variation (table D is determined based on the variation scenario). If the variation pattern is selected and used as a special symbol variation), the process proceeds to S4013, which will be described later, and it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is not 0 (1 or more) (S4055: No) Next, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds (S4056).

  In the process of S4056, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds (long deviation a) is selected using the first variation (probability variation) variation pattern table (Table C), and the variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds. (S4056: Yes), it moves to the process of S4013 mentioned later. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not 60 seconds (long deviation a) (S4056: No), the process proceeds to S4057.

  That is, in the above-described determination processing of S4054 to S4056, whether the pre-battle effect is set as the variation effect (effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81) set in response to the current special symbol change, In S4054, it is determined whether or not a big win is won in the special symbol lottery. In S4055, it is determined whether or not the battle reach is set based on the special symbol fluctuation scenario. In S4056, it is determined whether or not a special lottery result has been won in the special symbol lottery.

  When the variation effect executed in response to the special symbol variation this time is a pre-battle effect, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is decremented by 1 (S4057), and next, as in the first control example described above, S4004 ˜S4008 is executed, then continuation value setting process 2 is executed (S4058), and this process ends. The contents of the continuation value setting process 2 (S4058) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the variation effect executed in response to the current special symbol variation is battle reach (when Yes is determined in any one of S4054, S4055, and S4056), the final effect is selected based on the final mode selection table 222h. The mode is selected (S4013), the corresponding final mode command for display is set (S4014), the continuation effect flag 223r, the continuation setting flag 223cd, and the on-hold hit flag 223cc are set to OFF (S4059), and the remaining number counter 223cb Is set to 0 (S4060), the contents stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223m are cleared (process 4016 of S3709), and this process ends.

  Next, the continuation value setting process 4 (S4058) executed in the continuation effect setting process 4 (see S3806 in FIG. 207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing the contents of continuation value setting processing 4 (S4058). In the continuation value setting process 4 (S4058), a process for determining a selection table for selecting a continuation value according to the value of the remaining number counter 223cb and the setting status of the pending hit flag 223cc is executed. In this way, by changing the selection range of the continuation value set as the effect mode of the pre-battle presentation depending on the game situation, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Interest can be given to the player.

  When the continuation value setting process 4 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation is the continuation value fluctuation timing. In the third control example, when the short deviation b having a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is selected in the first deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2 (table C), it is determined that the continuous value fluctuation timing is reached. . In the third control example, as a special symbol variation pattern, a variation pattern determined to be the continuous value variation timing (short deviation b) and a variation pattern determined to be not the continuous value variation timing (short deviation a However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with lottery means for lottering whether or not the continuation value is varied, and the continuation value is varied with respect to the same variation pattern. It may be configured to be able to set the case where it is not allowed. Further, when it is determined that the player has performed a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 (operation means), it may be determined that it is the continuous value fluctuation timing. By comprising in this way, a player can be actively participated in a game.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4101 that it is the continuation value change timing (S4101: Yes), in order to execute the processing for setting an effect mode for increasing / decreasing (variing) the continuation value in the current variation effect, the process of S4151 Transition to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the continuation value change timing (S4101: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S4151, it is determined whether or not the on-hold hit flag 223cc is set to ON (S4151). Here, if it is determined that the on-hold bonus flag 223cc is set to ON (S4151: Yes), that is, if the winning information corresponding to the special symbol that is won in the jackpot exists in the hold, the second Based on the continuation value main selection table 222cc, the value of the main continuation value (hundreds of the HP) is selected (S4157), and the selected main continuation value is a specific value ("333" or "777"). It is determined whether or not there is (S4158).

  In the process of S4158, when it is determined that the selected main continuation value is a specific value (S4158: Yes), the display control is performed in order to display the selected value on the third symbol display device 81 as it is. The device 114 sets a display specific continuation value command to which the continuation value (secondary continuation value) for presentation is not added (S4159), and the process is terminated. Note that, as described above with reference to FIG. 206, even if there is a special symbol that wins a jackpot in the special symbol hold, it is based on the fluctuation scenario until the corresponding special symbol is changed. When the battle reach (drawing battle) is executed, the pending hit flag 223cc is not set to ON, so that the main continuation value is not selected using the second continuation value main selection table 222cc. Thereby, a battle reach (win or defeat battle) can be performed immediately after a battle reach (drawing battle) based on a change scenario is performed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that is surprising to the player.

  As described above, in the third control example, based on the order of change between the special symbol won in the jackpot and the special symbol in which the battle reach (draw battle) is executed based on the fluctuation scenario, Specifically, the main continuation value is selected with the content corresponding to the special symbol variation executed first, but other configurations may be used, for example, in the hold The type of jackpot to be determined is determined in advance, and the determination result is a predetermined determination result (for example, the determination result corresponding to the probability variation jackpot in which the victory battle is executed) and the predetermined determination result (for example, the defeat battle is The selection table for selecting the value of the main continuation value may be different from the case of the determination result corresponding to the normal execution executed).

  Specifically, for example, when a special symbol change that executes a battle reach (draw battle) based on a fluctuation scenario is executed earlier than a special symbol change corresponding to a probable jackpot that exists in the hold Is a new scenario in which the number of fluctuations until the change of the special symbol corresponding to the probable big hit is executed is set as the value of the remaining number counter 223cb, and the fluctuation scenario is larger than the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the normal hit existing in the hold. When the special symbol change in which the battle reach (drawing battle) based on is executed first, the value of the remaining counter 223cb that has already been set is not changed. Thus, based on the type of jackpot to be executed (probable jackpot or normal jackpot), the value of the main continuation value that can be selected until the battle reach is executed is made different, so that the pre-battle effect It is possible to predict the type of jackpot according to the production mode, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that the continuation value finally displayed in the battle reach used as a draw battle may be taken over as it is, and the production aspect of the next battle production may be set. Thereby, relevance can be given with respect to the battle effect performed repeatedly several times, and it can be interested in the effect performed over a long period of time with respect to a player.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4151 that the pending hit flag 223cc is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4151: No), then the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 4 or more. (S4152), if it is determined that the number is 4 or more (S4152: Yes), the main continuation value (hundreds of HP) is selected based on the first continuation value main selection table 222cb. (S4153), and the process proceeds to S4154.

  In the process of S4152, when it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is not 4 or more (3 or less) (S4152: No), the main continuation value is determined based on the third continuation value main selection table 222cd. A value (the hundreds of HP) is selected (S4156), the process proceeds to S4154, a display continuation value command corresponding to the value of the main continuation value selected this time is set (S4154), and the process proceeds to S4155. Transition.

  In the process of S4155, the value of the main continuation value selected in the processes of S4153, S4156, and S4159 described above is stored in the continuation value storage area 223n. Thus, at the next timing of setting the continuation value, the value of the main continuation value selected this time can be read and a new continuation value can be selected. When the process of S4155 is finished, this process is finished.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device 114 in Third Control Example>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In this control example, the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 209) is used instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 158), and the continuation value related command process (see FIG. 164) is used in the first control example. ) Instead of the continuation value related command processing 4 (see FIG. 210), and the addition of the final mode command processing (see FIG. 211), and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the third control example, as compared with the first control example described above, the value of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the continuation effect (pre-battle effect, battle reach). Is different in that the display control device 114 is set. Thus, by setting the value of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen by the display control device 114, the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. As described above, the main continuation value set based on the lottery result of the special symbol or the fluctuation scenario is set by the voice lamp control device 113, and a command for indicating the set main continuation value is displayed and controlled. Since it is configured to output to the device 114, more information than is necessary for the display control device 114 (for example, information for showing a lottery result of a special symbol, and an update status of a fluctuation scenario) There is no need to output a command to indicate (information). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load of processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113 (processing for setting a continuation value, processing for setting a command to be output to the display control device 114).

  First, the contents of the command determination process 4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 4. In this command determination process 4, in contrast to the command determination process in the first control example described above (see FIG. 158), a process executed when there is a continuation value related command and whether there is a final display mode command. This is different in that a process for discriminating is added.

  When the command determination process 4 is executed, the same processes of S6401 to S6414 as the command determination process of the first control example (see FIG. 158) described above are executed, and it is determined that there is a continuation value related command in the process of S6414. If it is (S6414: Yes), the continuation value related command process 4 is executed (S6451), and the process proceeds to S6401. The continuation value related command process 4 executed in the process of S6451 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no continuation value related command in the processing of S6414 (S6414: No), it is determined whether there is a final display mode command next (S6452), and it is determined that there is a final display mode command. In this case (S6452: Yes), the final display mode command process is executed (S6453), and then the process proceeds to S6401.

  The final display mode command process executed in the process of S6453 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no final display mode command in the process of S6452 (S6452: No), after executing the same process of S6420 as the command determination process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 158), The processing shifts to processing 6401 of S3709.

  Next, the contents of the continuation value related command process 4 (S6451) executed in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 209) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuation value related command processing 4. In the continuation value related command process 4, a process for setting and displaying a continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 while the continuation effect is being executed, and a continuation effect. The process for displaying the effect executed during the process is executed.

  When the continuation value related command process 4 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the command received this time includes a specific continuation value command for display (S7351). The specific continuation value command for display is a specific value (“333”) indicating that the jackpot is won as the main continuation value in the continuation value setting process 4 (see S4058 in FIG. 208) executed in the sound lamp control device 113. "," 777 ") is selected. Although detailed description will be given later, in this process, when it is determined that there is a specific continuation value command for display, the main continuation value output from the sound lamp control device 113 is displayed on the display screen as it is. doing. As a result, when a specific value (“333”, “777”) for indicating that the jackpot is won as the main continuation value is selected, the display control device 114 sets the sub continuation value, and the main continuation value To prevent the player from notifying the player of specific values ("333", "777") to indicate that the jackpot is won. Can do.

  In the process of S7351, if it is determined that there is no display specific continuation value command (S7351: No), that is, if a display continuation value command is received, the continuation value (main continuation value) corresponding to the command received this time ) Is calculated (S7352), and it is determined whether the calculated continuation value (main continuation value) is 0 (S7353). In the process of S7353, when it is determined that the continuation value (main continuation value) is not 0 (100 or more), the sub continuation value is selected based on the first continuation value sub selection table 234a3, and the process proceeds to S7356. Transition. Each sub-continuation value defined in the first continuation value sub-selection table 234a3 is the same as the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 (see FIG. 117 (b)) of the first control example described above. The description is omitted.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7353, when it is determined that the continuation value (main continuation value) is 0 (S7353: Yes), the sub continuation value is selected based on the second continuation value subselection table 234a4, and the process of S7356 is performed. Migrate to Each sub-continuation value defined in the second continuation value sub-selection table 234a4 is the same as the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 (see FIG. 117 (c)) of the first control example described above. The description is omitted.

  In the process of S7356, the continuation value (main continuation value) corresponding to the received command and the sub continuation value selected by the process of S7354 or S7355 are added together (S7356). As described above, when the continuation value (main continuation value) corresponding to the received command is 0, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is greater than 0. Since the second continuation value sub-selection table 234a4 in which a sub continuation value that cannot be a value (that is, a positive value cannot be selected as a sub continuation value) is defined is used, the sound lamp control device With respect to the contents indicated by the continuation value (main continuation value) selected at 113 (the contents indicating that the opponent's continuation value (HP value) is set to “0” and that the winning effect will be won in this battle production) The situation in which the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is inconsistent (a value other than “0” is displayed) can be suppressed.

  When the process of S7356 is completed, the sum value stored in the sum value storage area 233k is read (S7357), and the sum value calculated in the process of S7356 and the sum value read in the process of S7357 are read. The difference is calculated (S7358). Then, an attack pattern display data table corresponding to the calculated difference is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7359), the currently calculated total value is stored in the total value storage area 233k (S7360), and the process of S7365 is performed. Migrate to

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7351 that there is a display specific continuation value command (S7351: Yes), then the sum value is read from the sum value storage area 233k (S7361) and the continuation calculated in the process of S7352 is performed. The difference between the value and the sum value read in the processing of S7361 is calculated (S7362), an attack pattern display data table corresponding to the calculated difference is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7359), and this time is calculated. The continuation value is stored in the total value storage area 233k (S7360), and the process proceeds to S7365.

  When the process of S7360 or the process of S7364 is finished, the continuation value calculated in the process of S7352 is then stored in the continuation value storage area 233ca (S7365), and then the continuation value related to the first control example described above. The command processing (see FIG. 164) and the same processing of S7306 to S7309 are executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, the content of the final mode command process (S6453) executed in the above-described command determination process 4 (see FIG. 209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the contents of final mode command processing. In this final mode command process, a process for setting a battle reach effect mode (display mode of the continuation value (HP value)) for indicating the result of the continuous effect (battle effect) and the set effect mode on the display screen. And a process for displaying.

  When the final mode command processing (S6453) is executed, first, a final mode data table corresponding to the received command is determined (S8301). The received command indicates the final mode selected based on the final mode selection table 222h (see FIG. 118 (a)) in the continuous effect setting process (see S3806 in FIG. 149) executed in the audio lamp control device 113. Information is included, and the final mode data table corresponding to the information is read from the character ROM 234 and determined.

  Next, the sum value stored in the sum value storage area 233k, that is, the continuation value (HP value) currently displayed on the display screen is read (S8302), and the initial state data table determined in the process of S8301 is initialized. It is set as value data (S8303). In this way, data relating to the continuation value (HP value) that can be set to various values is additionally set for the effect data corresponding to the battle reach effect mode (attack pattern mode) of a predetermined number of patterns. By making it possible, it is possible to reduce the amount of data related to the effect mode of battle reach.

  When the processing of S8303 is completed, next, the final result information included in the received command is read (processing 8304 of S3709), and it is determined whether the read final result is information indicating victory (S8305). Here, as the final result information included in the received command, information for indicating the final mode selected based on the final mode selection table 222h (see FIG. 118A) is used to determine the final result. Alternatively, the display final mode command process may be executed including dedicated information for indicating the final result of the battle.

  In the process of S8305, when it is determined that the final result is not a win (defeat or draw) (S8305: No), the continuation value stored in the continuation value storage area 233ca and the sum value storage area are stored. The difference with the total value that has been calculated is calculated (S8306), and the subtraction value of the first attack effect data of the effect data in the determined final mode data table is changed to the subtraction value obtained by adding the calculated difference. (S8307), the process proceeds to S8308.

  Here, the processing contents of S8306 and S8307 described above will be described. In the third control example, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is the main continuation value set by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the lottery result of the special symbol. The display control device 114 is configured to add the sub continuation value set for production to the production. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen while reducing the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113, and to enhance the effect. However, in the battle reach that displays the result of the continuation effect (battle effect), there may occur a situation in which the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen is close to “0”.

  In such a case, for example, in the audio lamp control device 113, even if the main continuation value that does not set the opponent continuation value (HP value) to “0” is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, the display control device 114. There is a possibility that the continuation value (HP value) of the other party displayed on the display screen becomes “0” due to the production secondary continuation value set in. That is, while the displayed continuation value (HP value) is large, there is an error between the main continuation value set and managed by the sound lamp control device 113 and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen. Even if there is, there is no adverse effect on the production side, but rather it has a positive effect of increasing the variation of the production. On the other hand, if the displayed continuation value (HP value) becomes small, the sound lamp control device An error between the main continuation value set and managed at 113 and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen causes a contradiction in the effect result, and an effect that causes distrust to the player is executed. There was a problem that there was a risk of it.

  Therefore, in the third control example, when setting the final aspect (battle reach) of the continuous effect (battle effect), the final result of the current continuous effect (battle effect) is determined, and the determination result is In cases other than victory, that is, when the opponent's continuation value (HP value) does not become “0”, the error between the main continuation value and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen is determined as an attack during battle reach. I try to eliminate it by directing.

  This suppresses the above-described problems that occur when the result of the continuation effect (battle effect) is displayed while the error between the main continuation value and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen remains. Can do. In the third control example, the main continuation value and the continuation value (HP) displayed on the display screen in the first own attack pattern set as the final mode (battle reach) of the continuation effect (battle effect). Since it is configured to eliminate the error from the (value), it is possible to share the effect mode of the remaining attack patterns (for example, the second time and the third time).

  In addition, when the production mode of the attack mode is set to 0 as the production mode of the final mode (battle reach) selected this time, the production of the opponent does not decrease during battle reach. Since this is an aspect, even if the error between the main continuation value and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen is not eliminated, an error between the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen is produced. Since there is no problem of causing a contradiction in the result, the attack effect data changing process is not executed in the process of S8307.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8305 that the final result is victory (S8305: Yes), the process of S8306 and S8307 is skipped and the process proceeds to S8308.

  In the process of S8038, the final mode data table determined in the process of S8301 is read from a countdown effect table storage area (not shown) in the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8308). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S8308 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8309).

  Then, based on the attack pattern display data table included in the final mode data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8309, time data representing the production time is set in the time counter 233h (S8310), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S8311). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S8312), the final mode command process is terminated, and the present process is terminated.

<Regarding another control example of the third control example>
Next, another control example of the above-described third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214. In the third control example described above, a variation scenario is set based on the jackpot type, and a variation pattern is selected based on the set variation scenario. The battle reach can be effectively executed. In addition, in order to prevent the player from getting bored early with respect to the continuous performance executed in accordance with the predetermined variation scenario, a plurality of variation scenarios are prepared and differ according to the jackpot type. It was configured to select a variable scenario.

  The third control example configured in this way is a configuration that can enhance the effect of continuous production, but is set in correspondence with the storage capacity for storing a plurality of variation scenarios and the plurality of variation scenarios. There has been a problem that the storage capacity for storing a plurality of jackpot types increases. In particular, the main controller 110 needs to store various processes related to games and data in a limited storage capacity. As a result, there was a risk of reducing the interest of the game.

  On the other hand, in another control example of the third control example, even if the number of fluctuation scenarios is reduced, in order to be able to provide a variation-rich continuous effect, the jackpot type is the same as the third control example described above. In addition to the fluctuation scenario set corresponding to, fluctuation using a different fluctuation scenario for a predetermined period (for example, 10 special symbol fluctuations) when the lottery result of a special symbol becomes a specific lottery result The pattern was selected to be selected.

  By configuring in this way, even if one variation scenario is set, the content of the continuous effect to be executed can be varied depending on the timing at which the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the specific lottery result. it can. In addition, since the effect mode during the continuous effect is set by a combination of a plurality of variable scenarios, even if the number of stored variable scenarios is reduced, it is possible to execute a variety of continuous effects.

<Electric Configuration in Another Control Example of Third Control Example>
Here, with reference to FIG. 212 to FIG. 214, the electrical configuration in this another control example will be described. This separate control example differs from the third control example described above in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 are partially changed and the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 are partially changed. doing. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 212 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in another control example of the third control example. As shown in FIG. 212 (a), in this separate control example, the small hit type selection table 202da is added to the third control example described above, and the contents of the first hit random number table 202a are partially changed. This is different from the point that the contents of the variation scenario setting table 202ca are partially changed. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the first random number table 202a in this separate control example, a range for determining “small hit” is provided in part when the special symbol lottery result is out of place. The first random number table 202a in this separate control example will be described with reference to FIG. 213 (a). FIG. 213 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents prescribed in the first random number table 202a in the present another control example.

  As shown in FIG. 213 (a), in the third control example described above, the range of the first per-random number counter value C1 in which “out” is defined when the gaming state is the probability variation state as the lottery result (“5 to 5”). 299 ”) is defined as“ small hit ”for the range of“ 295-299 ”. When a special symbol lottery result is won as a “small hit”, a bonus that is less than the above-mentioned jackpot but advantageous to the player is provided.

  Specifically, control is performed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened only for a short period so that a ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. As described above, since “small hit” can be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is not big hit, the game set in the pachinko machine 10 when “winning big” is won. It is possible to eliminate the setting of the state.

  Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202da will be described with reference to FIG. 213 (b). FIG. 213 (b) shows the contents of the small hit type selection table 202da. As shown in FIG. 213 (b), in another control example of the third control example, a plurality of small hit types are set. Specifically, the acquired value of the small hit type counter value C5 that can acquire any value out of 100 counter values in total of “0” to “99” is in the range of “0 to 49”. , “Small hit A” is defined in association with each other, and “small hit B” is defined in association with the range of “50 to 99”.

  Then, when winning “small hit A”, a fluctuation scenario for executing a specific fluctuation pattern is additionally set. When winning “small hit B”, a specific fluctuation pattern is executed. It is configured so that additional fluctuation scenarios are not set.

  Next, the contents of the variation scenario setting table 202ca in this another control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 214 (a) and 214 (b). FIG. 214 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the fluctuation scenario A1 stored in the fluctuation scenario setting table 202ca. FIG. 214 (b) is a diagram showing the fluctuation scenario setting table 202ca. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed | regulated to the stored small hits after fluctuation scenario.

  In the variation scenario setting table 202ca in this separate control example, only the two variation scenarios described above are stored, and when winning a promising variation jackpot in the special symbol lottery, the variation scenario A1 is set after the jackpot ends. It is configured to be stored in the fluctuation scenario storage area 203ca. Further, when winning a small hit in the special symbol 2 lottery executed during the probability variation state, a variation scenario after the small hit is set and stored in the variation scenario storage area 203ca. After the small hit, the special symbol variation pattern is selected based on the contents defined in the small hit after fluctuation scenario for the number of special symbol variations specified in the small hit after variation scenario. Yes.

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, also in this separate control example, the variation number subtraction process 4 (see FIG. 204) is executed in the same manner as in the third control example described above, and every time a special symbol variation is performed ( In the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 203), each time it is determined that the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed), the variation scenario set in the variation scenario storage area 203ca is updated. .

  The variation scenario storage area 203ca is configured so that both the variation scenario A1 and the variation scenario after the small hitting can be stored. When the small winning is won during the probability variation state, both variation scenarios are subjected to the variation number subtraction process 4. (See FIG. 204). Therefore, the variation scenario A1 can be updated regardless of the number of small wins in the probability variation state, and the table B can be set when the number of special symbol variations after the end of the big hit reaches 200. .

  As shown in FIG. 214 (a), the variation scenario A1 is defined in association with the above-described table A (special (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc4) in the range of the variation number “1 to 4”. Table C (first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of “5 to 13”, and table D (second variation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3) is “14”. Is defined.

  Thereafter, until the number of fluctuations reaches “195”, the table C (first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in association with the number of fluctuations nine times, and the table D (second) is defined for one fluctuation number. A deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined in association with it. In other words, during the period in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the jackpot ends is “5 to 195”, the special pattern variation in which the variation pattern is selected using the table C is executed nine times, and then the variation pattern is changed using the table D. The scenario in which the selected special symbol variation is executed is repeatedly executed.

  Then, the table C (first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of the variation count “195 to 198”, and the table D (second deviation (probability variation) variation is “199”. A pattern table 202dc3) is defined. Then, in the range where the number of fluctuations is “200 to”, the table B is defined in association with the third control example as described above.

  As shown in FIG. 214 (b), the after-hit variation scenario is defined in association with the above-mentioned table A (special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc4) in the range of the number of variations “1-9”. The table D (second deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined in the range of the number of variations “5 to 13”, and the table D (second variation (probability variation) variation pattern table is set to “10”. 202 dc3) is defined. And when the frequency | count of a fluctuation | variation exceeds 10, it is comprised so that a fluctuation | variation scenario may be complete | finished. Note that when the after-hit variation scenario ends, the variation pattern of the special symbol is continuously selected according to the contents defined in the variation scenario A1 in which the variation scenario is updated at the same time.

  As described above, in another control example of the third control example, when a special winning lottery is won as a special symbol lottery, different fluctuation scenarios occur for a predetermined period (for example, 10 special symbols). Since it is configured to be set, the variation pattern table used when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol can be made different according to the timing of winning the small hit. Therefore, it is possible to provide various patterns of continuous effects without preparing a plurality of fluctuation scenarios in advance as in the third control example described above.

  In addition, at the end of the fluctuation scenario used when winning a small hit, because a fluctuation pattern table (table D) is executed (easy to be performed) battle reach is defined, It is possible to prevent the situation that the battle reach is not executed for a long time.

  In this separate control example, a configuration having one variation scenario (variation scenario A1) as a variation scenario set after the end of probability variation jackpot is used. However, as in the third control example described above, a plurality of variation scenarios are included. A configuration may be used. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide continuation effects of more patterns. In addition, in this separate control example, when winning a small hit, the small hit type (small hit A) that sets a different fluctuation scenario is the same as the small hit type (small hit B) that does not set a different fluctuation scenario However, the distribution ratio of each small hit type may be set as appropriate, the probability of winning a small hit, the battle reach in the fluctuation scenario A1 May be set based on the interval at which the variation pattern table (table D) is executed (easy to be executed) and the contents of the privilege (prize ball) provided at the time of winning the small hit.

  Further, in the control example according to the present embodiment, the same variable winning device (variable winning device 65) is used when the special symbol jackpot is won and when the small bonus is won. The machine 10 may be provided with a second variable winning device that is opened only when a small win is won. In this case, it is better to configure that the second variable winning device is opened than the variable winning device 65 is opened. With such a configuration, the player wins a small hit during the continuous performance. Since it is difficult for the player to grasp this, it is possible to provide the player with continuous effects of various patterns without a sense of incongruity. In addition, in this case, the display of the 3rd symbol for indicating that the small win is won is also difficult to be grasped by the player, for example, in the 3rd symbol stop timing, It is preferable to display a lively effect that is more conspicuous than the third symbol in the main display area Dm of the three symbol display device 81.

  In the present control example, the first random number table 202a is configured such that only the special symbol 2 is won in the small win, but the special symbol 1 may also be configured to win in the small bonus. In this case, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may have different probabilities for winning a small hit.

  In another control example of the third control example described above, as a condition for setting a variation scenario (small hit-after variation scenario) different from the variation scenario (variation scenario A1) predetermined based on the lottery result of the special symbol Although the case where the special symbol is won in the small win is shown, it may be configured to set a different fluctuation scenario when other conditions are satisfied. For example, in the second control example described above, You may comprise so that a different fluctuation | variation scenario may be set when winning the used fall lottery.

<Regarding another control example of the suggestive effect described in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216, another control example of the suggestion effect (see FIG. 100) described in the first control example will be described. In the first control example described above, the execution timing and end timing of the suggestion effect are set separately, and the period during which the suggestion effect is executed can be adjusted. Specifically, the end timing of the suggestion effect (end timing of the countdown effect that is the second half part) is set based on the execution timing of the specific effect that is the target of the suggestion effect, and the start timing of the suggestion effect (the precursor that is the first half part) The start timing of the effect) is configured to be settable from a plurality of points, and the suggestion effect is executed without presetting the period of execution, thereby increasing the degree of freedom when setting the suggestion effect. In the suggestion effect of the first control example described above, the timing for executing the specific effect as the target of the suggestion effect is set from a plurality of timings, and the end timing of the suggestion effect (the countdown effect of the countdown effect) is set based on the execution timing of the suggestion effect. By setting the (end timing) and setting the execution period of the suggestion effect, various combinations of suggestion effects can be executed.

  On the other hand, in this control example, the suggestion effect is executed in a state where the end timing of the suggestion effect is not set, and a predetermined condition that is satisfied during the period in which the suggestion effect is being executed (operation contents to the frame button 22). On the basis of this, a specific effect that is the target of the suggestion effect is determined, and a countdown effect is executed toward the determined specific effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the presentation mode of the suggestion effect according to the operation contents of the player on the frame button 22 during the execution of the suggestion effect, so that the player can actively participate in the game. Can do.

  First, with reference to FIG. 215, the flow of the suggestive effect in the present another control example will be described. FIG. 215 is a timing chart showing the flow of effects in the case where the effect mode of the suggestion effect is varied depending on the operation content to the frame button 22 during execution of the suggestion effect. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the same element as the timing chart (refer FIG. 100) which shows the flow of the suggestion effect in the 1st control example mentioned above, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 215, when the change of the special symbol that can execute the suggestive effect is started, the sign display (see FIG. 98 (a)) that is the first half part of the suggestive effect is executed for 13 seconds 10 seconds after the start of the change. Is done. A button operation effective period for effectively determining a pressing operation on the frame button 22 is set for the latter 8 seconds in the display period in which the sign is displayed, and the frame button 22 during the button operation effective period is set. Depending on the contents of the operation, the production mode (display mode, display period) of the countdown production which is the latter half part of the suggestion production is determined.

  Specifically, during the button operation effective period, the comment “Press the button with good timing” is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the player operates the frame button 22 for the display. The timing is discriminated by the operation timing discriminating means. The operation timing discriminating means is configured to be able to discriminate the player's operation timing with respect to the frame button 22 in a plurality of stages, and the frame button 22 has the best timing (for example, within a range of 0.2 seconds before and after the designated timing). When the operation is performed (hereinafter referred to as button operation B), and the range deviated from the specified timing than the button operation B (for example, the range of the button operation B is excluded from the range of 1 second before and after the specified timing). The frame button 22 is operated (hereinafter referred to as “button operation A”) and the operation of the frame button 22 at any other timing or the frame button 22 is not operated (hereinafter, there is no button operation). At least).

  Here, when the button operation A is determined by the operation timing determination means, that is, when the button operation is performed during the button operation effective period but the operation timing is slightly deviated, it is executed during the current variation effect. Among the specific effects to be performed, a countdown effect for the specific effect b (cut-in display executed 26 seconds after the start of fluctuation) is set. Specifically, a countdown display for 3 seconds is executed as a countdown effect (values displayed in the second display area of the display screen in FIG. 98B are “3”, “2”, “1”, “ An effect of counting down in the order of “0” is executed). Then, the cut-in display as the specific effect b is displayed at the timing when the numerical value displayed in the countdown effect becomes “0”.

  Next, when the button operation B is determined by the operation timing determination means, that is, when the button operation is performed with good timing during the button operation effective period, the specific effect executed during the current variation effect is specified. A countdown effect for the effect a (PUSH display (see FIG. 99) executed 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation) is set. Specifically, a countdown display for 7 seconds is executed as a countdown effect. Then, the PUSH display that is the specific effect a is displayed at the timing when the numerical value displayed in the countdown effect becomes “0”.

  Also, when it is determined by the operation timing determination means that there is no button operation, that is, when the button operation is not performed during the button operation effective period, or when the button operation is performed at a greatly deviated timing, the countdown effect is executed. Without suggestion, the suggestion effect ends at the timing when the precursor effect ends (gase suggestion effect).

  As described above, this separate control example sets the execution timing and the end timing of the suggestive effect at different timings (conditions) as in the first control example described above. The specific effect that is the target of the suggested effect that is being executed is determined based on a predetermined condition (result of determination of the operation content on the frame button 22) that is established during the precursor effect execution period that is the first part, and the latter part of the suggested effect It is configured to set the production mode (display mode, display period) of the countdown production. Thereby, it can be made to participate in a game eagerly with respect to a player.

  Further, in the control example according to the present example, the later the timing at which the specific effects (specific effects a and specific effects b) executed at a plurality of timings are executed, the higher the degree of expectation that the special symbol variation of this time is won. It is configured to be high. Therefore, if the button operation is performed in a timely manner during the button operation effective period, the countdown effect is executed for the specific effect with a high expectation of jackpot, so that the player can be relieved.

  That is, in FIG. 215, the variation pattern in which the specific effect a and the specific effect b are executed is shown as an example, but only the specific effect b is executed among the plurality of change patterns set in the pachinko machine 10. Since there is also a deviation variation pattern, when the button operation A is performed in the variation pattern shown in FIG. 215, the target of the suggestion effect is the specific effect b, and the player is In this case, it is impossible to notify in advance whether or not the current variation pattern is a variation pattern in which both the specific performance a and the specific performance b are executed, and the performance progresses with an uneasy feeling to the player. Become.

  However, if the frame button 22 is operated in a timely manner during the button operation effective period, the countdown effect for the specific effect a is executed, so that the player can play the game without anxiety. Can be made. Therefore, it is possible to participate in a game in which the player operates the frame button 22 eagerly.

  In the control example according to the present embodiment, in a variation pattern in which the specific effect a and the specific effect b are executed as one variation pattern, the specific effect that is the target of the suggestion effect is defined as a predetermined condition ( Although it is configured to be determined based on the operation content of the frame button 22, it may be configured not to display a specific effect that is not the target of the suggestion effect. Further, in a variation pattern in which only the specific effect a is executed as one variation pattern, the timing at which the specific effect a that is the target of the suggestion effect is executed is determined based on a predetermined condition that is established after the suggestion effect is executed. You may comprise so that it may do. By configuring in this way, when the frame button 22 cannot be operated with good timing, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the content of the suggestive effect that is executed when the frame button 22 can be operated with good timing. The frame button 22 can be operated.

  In the other control example described above, as an operation content of the frame button 22 after the suggestion effect is started, an operation effect for causing the frame button 22 to be operated in a timely manner during the sign effect that is the first part of the suggestion effect is executed. Then, the specific effect that is the target of the suggestion effect is determined based on the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated during the operation effect, and the effect mode of the countdown effect corresponding to the determined specific effect is set. ing.

  In this case, as an operation effect, on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device, a character “press button with good timing” is displayed as a display mode indicating the content of the operation effect, and an index display for indicating the designated timing of the operation effect It is good to display a mode and the movement display mode which moves with progress of time, and to show to a player that the timing when the movement display mode overlaps with the index display mode is the best. Thereby, the contents of the operation effect can be notified to the player in an easily understandable manner.

  In addition, as an operation result of the frame button 22 for the operation effect, the moving display mode is stopped and displayed at the timing when the frame button 22 is actually operated, and an error from the indicator display mode is displayed so that the player can visually recognize the error. It is preferable to display “Excellent” or “Good” characters for notifying whether or not the error range is within the allowable range (corresponding to button operation A or button operation B). Thereby, it is possible to easily notify the player of the result of the operation effect.

  According to the example described above, in order to vary the effect mode of the suggestive effect based on the operation content of the frame button 22, the configuration for discriminating an error between the operation timing of the frame button 22 and the designated timing specified in advance. However, other configurations may be used as long as the presentation aspect of the suggestion effect can be changed based on the predetermined designated condition and the actual operation content, for example, within the period during which the operation effect is executed. It is possible to determine the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed), and to change the effect mode of the suggestive effect based on the determination result. As an operation means that can be operated by the player, the frame button Operation means other than 22 may be provided, and it may be determined whether or not a specific operation means has been operated among the plurality of operation means, and based on the result of the determination, the presentation mode of the suggested effect may be varied.

  The other control example shown in FIG. 215 is configured to set the effect mode of the suggestion effect (the effect mode of the countdown effect that is the second half part of the suggestion effect) based on the operation content for the frame button 22 during the button operation effective period. However, in order to achieve the same effect, it may be configured to set the effect mode of the suggestive effect based on the timing when the pressing operation is performed during the button operation effective period. Here, it will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 216 (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect when the effect mode of the suggestion effect is changed by the operation timing (pressing timing) to the frame button 22 during execution of the suggestion effect. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the element same as the timing chart (refer FIG. 100 or FIG. 215) which shows the flow of the suggestion effect in the 1st control example mentioned above and another control example, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 216, in this separate control example, the button operation effective period (8 seconds) set during the precursor effect period, which is the first half part of the suggestion effect, is determined as the first half (2 seconds) and the second half (6 seconds). It is classified as possible. Here, the presentation aspect of the suggestive effect set based on the operation timing (pressing timing) of the frame button 22 during the button operation effective period will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 (b) to 216 (d).

  FIG. 216 (b) is a timing chart showing the effect mode of the suggestive effect when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the first half (2 seconds) of the button operation effective period. ) Is a timing chart showing an effect mode of the suggestive effect when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the second half (6 seconds) of the button operation effective period, and FIG. It is a timing chart which showed the production | presentation aspect of the suggestion effect when not operating (pressing down) the frame button 22 during the operation effective period.

  First, as shown in FIG. 216 (b), when it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the first half (2 seconds) of the button operation effective period, the target of the suggested effect is the specific effect a. The first half (2 seconds) of the button operation effective period is set as the precursor period (8 seconds) until one second later, and the second half (6 seconds) of the button operation effective period is started. It is set as the execution period (12 seconds) of the countdown effect from 1 second to the timing when the specific effect a is started.

  As described above, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first half (2 seconds) with respect to the switching timing of the first half (2 seconds) and the second half (6 seconds) defined in the button operation effective period (8 seconds). When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated just before the end of the first half (2 seconds), the timing of switching the effect mode of the suggestive effect (switching from the sign effect to the countdown effect) is delayed by 1 second. Even if it exists, the process which switches an effect smoothly can be performed using the period (1 second) until an effect is switched.

  In this case, the button operation effective period changing process for invalidating the operation of the frame button 22 for the second half (6 seconds) of the preset button operation effective period (8 seconds) is executed. Thereby, even if the countdown effect is executed during the period in which the button operation valid period is set in advance, the operation to the frame button 22 in the middle can be invalidated.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 216 (c), when it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the second half (6 seconds) of the button operation effective period, the target effect is specified. b, and is set as the execution period (3 seconds) of the countdown effect from the timing when the button operation effective period ends to the timing when the specific effect b starts. Then, when there is no operation on the frame button 22 during the button operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 216 (d), the specific effect that is the target of the suggestion effect is not set and the button operation effective period is set. The precursor effect (13 seconds) is executed, and then the suggestion effect is terminated without performing the countdown effect (gase suggestion effect).

  As described above with reference to FIG. 216, even if the specific effect that is the target of the suggested effect is set based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 during the button operation effective period, The same effect as in FIG. 215 can be obtained.

  In the example described with reference to FIG. 216, the button operation effective period (8 seconds) is divided into two periods (first half and second half), and different times (first half ( 2 seconds) and the latter half (6 seconds)), but it is only necessary to be able to identify the operation timing of the frame button 22 during the button operation effective period. The period may be divided into two or more periods (for example, divided into three periods), or the same time may be set for the divided periods. The button operation effective period (8 seconds) is divided into two periods (for example, period A (1 second) and period B (1 second)), and the period A and the period B are alternately set. You may do it. As a result, a different suggestion effect is executed only when the timing at which the button operation is performed on the frame button 22 is slightly shifted, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  As described above, in another control example of the suggestion effect described in the first control example described with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216, the player's operation mode for the frame button 22 (as a predetermined condition established during the execution of the suggestion effect) The presence / absence of the operation, the operation content, and the operation timing are set, but other conditions may be set. For example, a winning that occurred during execution of the suggestive effect (the first entrance 64, the second entrance) Even if a ball is entered into the mouth 140, a ball is entered into the general winning opening 63, and a ball is entered (passed) into the through gate 67, the generation timing of the information and the content of the generation are set as predetermined conditions. good. Thereby, it can suppress that the situation where a player stops discharge | release of a ball | bowl during the special symbol fluctuation | variation can generate | occur | produce.

  Further, in the another control example of the suggestion effect described in the first control example described with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216, an example in which the suggestion effect is completed during one special symbol change is shown. As shown in FIG. 101 of the first control example described above, a suggestion effect may be executed across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in Another Control Example of Suggestion Effect Described in First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 217 to 219, the control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in this another control example will be described. In this separate control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, instead of the countdown effect setting process (see FIG. 152), a countdown effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 217) is provided. The difference is that processing 5 (see FIG. 218) is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the contents of the countdown effect setting process 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the contents of the countdown effect setting process 5. When the countdown effect setting process 5 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a win (S4303). If it is determined that it is a win (S4303: Yes), it is specified 26 seconds after the start of the change. For the effect b (cut-in), the specific effect a (PUSH) is set 30 seconds later (S4371), and the process proceeds to S4373.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4303, when it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is not a hit (S4303: No), a specific effect b (cut-in) is set 26 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (S4372), and the process proceeds to S4373. Transition.

  In the process of S4373, a button operation effective period is set in a period of 15 seconds to 23 seconds from the start of change (S4373), a precursor effect corresponding to the current change pattern is set (S4374), and a display precursor effect command is set. (S4375), and this process ends.

  Next, the contents of the frame button input monitoring / production process 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / production process 5. When the frame button input monitoring / production process 5 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S5051). If it is determined that it has not been detected (S5051: No), this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has been detected (S5051: Yes), it is determined whether the current period is the effective period of the first precursor effect (S5081), and if it is determined that it is during the effective period of the first precursor effect (S5081: Yes), the frame button operation-related processing (S5082 to S5088) during the first warning effect is executed, and if it is determined that the first warning effect is not valid (S5081: No), the second It is determined whether or not it is during the effective period of the precursor effect (S5089), and if it is determined that it is during the effective period of the second predictor effect (S5089: Yes), processing related to the frame button operation during the second predictor effect is performed. The second precursor effect setting process is executed (S5090). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not during the effective period during the second sign production (S5089: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  Next, the frame button operation-related processing (S5082 to S5088) during the first precursor effect will be described. First, an error between the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated and the designated timing set as the precursor effect is calculated (S5082), and it is determined whether the error is within 0.1 seconds (S5083). When the error is within 0.1 seconds (S5083: Yes), the specific effect a is set as the effect target (S5084), and the period from the start of the change to 23 seconds to 30 seconds is set as the countdown effect period (S5085). ), A display countdown effect command corresponding to the set mode is set (S5077), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the error is not within 0.1 seconds (S5083: No), then it is determined whether the error is within 0.5 seconds (S5086), and is within 0.5 seconds. If it is determined (S5086: Yes), the specific effect b is set as the effect mode (S5087), the period from the start of fluctuation to 23 seconds to 26 seconds is set as the countdown effect period (S5088), and the process of S5077 described above is performed. The process is terminated. If it is determined in S5086 that it is not within 0.5 seconds (S5086: No), the process proceeds to S5077 as described above, and this process is terminated.

  Next, the second precursor effect setting process executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 5 (see FIG. 218) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second warning effect setting process. When the second precursor effect setting process is executed, it is first determined whether the current period is the first half period, that is, whether the period in which the frame button 22 is operated is the first half period (S5091). If it is determined in the processing of S5091 that the period is the first half period (S5091: Yes), the specific effect a is set as the effect target (S5092), the precursor effect period is set to 8 seconds (S5093), and the change starts from 18th. The period from second to 30 seconds is set as the countdown effect period (S5094), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the first half period (S5091: No), it is next determined whether the current period is the second half period, that is, the period when the frame button 22 is operated is the second half period (S5095). When it is determined that it is the latter half period (S5095: yes), the specific effect b is set as the effect target (S5096), the precursor effect period is set to 13 seconds (S5097), and the change starts from 23 seconds to 26 seconds. The period up to is set as the countdown effect period (S5098), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5095 that it is not the latter half period (S5095: No), the precursor effect period is set to 13 seconds (S5099), and this process ends.

<Another Example of Control Processing of Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in Extended Display Explained in First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 220, another example of the extended display process (process for displaying the jackpot ending display extended during the special symbol change period after the jackpot end) set after the jackpot ends will be described. In the first control example described above, when the number of changes in the special symbol is executed a predetermined number (4 times) after the extended display is executed, or a predetermined period (4 seconds) elapses after the extended display is executed. If the end condition based on the elapsed period is satisfied prior to the end condition based on the number of changes in the special symbol, the third symbol is used. The demonstration display is performed on the display device 81, and the demonstration display is continued until the special symbol variation in which the variation time for a short period (0.5 seconds) is set is completed.

  On the other hand, in this example, the end condition based on the elapsed period is established prior to the end condition based on the number of changes in the special symbol, and after the extended display ends, the short period (0.5 seconds) changes. When special symbol variation for which time is set is executed, the variation effect is set based on the remaining number of fluctuations of special symbol variation for which the variation time for a short period (0.5 seconds) is set. Yes.

  Specifically, a specific period effect is set in which a variation effect of a period longer than the actual special symbol variation period (0.5 seconds) is executed. For example, the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol is 2 (the current variation In the case of 2), the variation effect of 2 seconds is set, and when the number of remaining variations of the special symbol is 3 times (including the current variation), the variation effect of 3 seconds is set and the remaining variation of the special symbol When the number of times is 4 (including the current variation), a variation effect of 4 seconds is set.

  And, when the next special symbol variation is executed while the variation effect that is the specific period effect is being executed, the remaining period of the variation effect that has already been executed is newly executed. It is set so that the fluctuating effect can be rewritten so that

  By configuring in this way, the extended display is executed after the jackpot ends, and the special symbol variation executed during the predetermined period after the jackpot ends (four special symbol variations or 4 seconds) is won by the jackpot On the other hand, in order to continue the performance during the jackpot without a sense of incongruity, when a short period (0.5 seconds) of variation time is set for a specific number of special symbol variations after the jackpot ends, after the jackpot ends Even if the special symbol variation is not executed a predetermined number of times (four times) within the predetermined period (4 seconds), the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation can be executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  Here, with respect to the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in this different example, differences from the first control example described above will be described with reference to FIG. This another example is different from the first control example described above in that the contents of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) are partly changed, and the other processes are the same. About the same element, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 6 in this another example. When the variable display setting process 6 is executed, first, the same processes of S3801 to S3804 as the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) of the first control example described above are executed. If it is determined in the process of S3803 that the display extension flag 223i is not on (is off) (S3803: No), it is then determined whether the value of the variation counter 223j is 1 or more (S3871). That is, it is determined whether or not a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed from when the extended display is executed after the jackpot ends until the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number (4 times).

  In the process of S3871, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation counter 223j is not 1 or more (0), the same S3811 to S3817 as the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 147) of the first control example described above. The process is executed and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3871 that the value of the variation counter 223j is 1 or more (S3871: Yes), then a specific period effect corresponding to the value of the variation counter 223j is determined (S3872). Then, the display specific period effect command is set (S3873), the value of the variation counter 223j is decremented by 1 (S3874), and the same S3812 to S3817 as the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) of the first control example described above. This process is executed and the present process is terminated.

  As described above, in this another example, in a state where a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed from when the extended display is executed after the jackpot is ended until the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (4 times). When the special symbol variation is started, the specific period effect corresponding to the remaining special symbol variation number (the value of the variation number counter) is executed, so that the predetermined period (4 Even if the special symbol variation is not performed a predetermined number of times (four times) within a second), the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation can be performed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

  In addition, when using the structure of another example mentioned above, the period (special symbol fluctuation frequency) which performs an extended display may be made longer than the reservation upper limit number (4 pieces) of special symbol 2, for example, it is extended. The maximum number of special symbol fluctuations that can be executed before the elapsed period (4 seconds), which is one of the display end conditions, elapses (for example, 8 changes for 0.5 seconds) is set as the end condition for extended display. You may do it. Thereby, the opportunity to continue the performance during the big hit can be increased, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, it is executed in a state where a predetermined period (4 seconds) elapses after the special symbol is changed a predetermined number of times (four times) after the extended display is executed after the jackpot ends. Jackpot game is started after a special symbol variation of 0.5 seconds variation is executed, but other configurations may be used, for example, 0.5 In addition to the special symbol variation period of seconds, the variation effect using the opening period of the jackpot game may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a variation effect using a period of 0.5 seconds or more, and therefore it is possible to provide an effect that is easy to understand for the player.

<About another control example of the expectation suggestion effect described in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 221 to 225, another control example of the expectation suggestion effect in the first control example described above will be described. In this separate control example, similar to the first control example described above, an effect period in which an expectation level 1 display Dk1 to an expectation level 3 display Dk3, which are expected level display modes displayed in one variation effect, can be displayed. And a period during which the expected degree increase mode Dk4, which is a sum of the variable amounts that are varied during the varying effects, can be displayed in one varying effect (see FIG. 221), For this, an operation valid period for enabling the operation of the frame button 22 can be set.

  Furthermore, when setting the production effect, when the production mode that does not display the three expected level display modes is selected, the display mode of the reserved symbol can be changed using the points acquired by the expected level increase mode Dk4. It is composed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to use the points acquired by the expectation increase mode Dk4 for game results other than the lottery result corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed. Can participate in games.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 221 to FIG. 223, the contents of effects in this another control example will be described. FIG. 221 is a timing chart showing the flow of the expectation suggestion effect in this control example. In addition, the description is abbreviate | omitted about the element same as the expectation degree suggestion effect of the 1st control example mentioned above.

  As shown in FIG. 221, when a variation effect in which an expectation suggestion effect is performed is executed, an expectation for notifying the expected degree increase mode Dk4 in the current variation effect for 10 seconds from the time when 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation. The variable degree suggestion effect is executed (see FIG. 102B). Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 221 (b), the display screen shown in FIG. 222 (a) is displayed. Here, with reference to FIG. 222 (a), the display content displayed during the expectation suggestion effect will be described.

  FIG. 222 (a) is a diagram schematically showing a display example in a period from when the expected degree increase mode Dk4 is notified until the expected degree increase effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 222 (a), the value acquired as the expected degree increase mode Dk4 (“3UP” in this figure) is displayed in the second sub display area Ds2. Returning to FIG. 221, the description will be continued. Thereafter, when 33 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, an expectation increasing effect is set in which a first operation effective period of 5 seconds is set (FIG. 221 (c). In this state, FIG. 222 (b) The displayed display screen is displayed.

  Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the first operation valid period, the display mode of the expectation level 1 display Dk1 is varied and the expectation level increase mode Dk4 is changed as shown in FIG. 223 (a). The value is displayed with subtraction. Since the display mode of the corresponding expectation level display can be changed by operating the frame button 22 during each operation effective period in this way, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22. It becomes possible. Further, as shown in FIG. 221, since the expectation level 1 display is displayed over a plurality of operation effective periods, even if the frame button 22 is operated in any operation effective period, The display mode may vary. As a result, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first operation effective period, when the display mode of the expectation 1 display Dk1 does not change, or when the variable amount is small, that is, in the middle stage of the variable effect (the first stage) It is possible to prevent the player from losing his expectation for the jackpot at an early stage during one operation effective period.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 224 and FIG. 225, the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in another control example of the expectation suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the content of the expectation effect setting process 7. When the expectation degree effect setting process 7 is executed, first, the expectation degree is selected based on the expectation degree selection table 222i as in the first control example described above (S4251). Based on the selected degree of expectation, points to be given in the degree-of-expectation manner Dk4 are set (S4252), and effects executed in each of the first period, the second period, and the third period based on the degree of expectation. A mode is set (S4253).

  When the process of S4253 is completed, it is determined whether there is a period (empty period) in which the effect mode is not set in each period (first period, second period, and third period) (S4254), and the effect mode is set. If there is a period (empty period) that has not been received (S4254: Yes), it is then determined whether or not there is winning information indicating win in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S4255). Here, when it is determined that there is winning information indicating a winning (S4255: Yes), a reserved symbol variable effect mode for changing the reserved symbol is set in a period in which the effect mode is not set (vacant period). (S4256), the process proceeds to S4257. On the other hand, in the process of S4254, when there is no period in which the production mode is not set (S4254: No), or when it is determined in the process of S4255 that there is no winning information indicating winning (S4255: No), S4257 is continued. Move on to processing.

  In the process of S4257, an operation effective period (first operation effective period, second operation effective period, third operation effective period) for effectively determining the operation of the frame button 22 for each period in which the production mode is set. The display expectation degree effect command is set (S4257), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the expectation degree effect setting process 7 (S3808), using the expectation degree selected based on the expectation degree selection table 222i, the grant points used in the current variation effect and the grant points are determined. It is comprised so that the production | presentation aspect used may be set. And the production | presentation aspect using a grant point is the presence or absence of the setting selected in each of several periods (1st period-3rd period) prescribed | regulated in association with the variation pattern of the variation production performed this time. It is set in the production mode based on (whether or not to set the production mode) and the contents of the production mode (the type of the expected degree display mode to be set and the display mode).

  By comprising in this way, it can make it difficult for a player to grasp | ascertain which production | generation aspect is performed in which period (1st period-3rd period). In addition, since the number of expected display modes that can change the display mode using the value acquired as the expected level increase mode Dk4 during the expected level variable suggestion production period is indefinite, it is acquired as the expected level increase mode Dk4. Even if there are few values (for example, 2UP), if the number of display of the expected degree display mode to be executed is small, the value acquired as the expected degree increase mode Dk4 should be used for the expected degree display mode Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's willingness to play is reduced due to the effect result during the expectation variable suggestion effect period.

  In addition, in another control example of this expectation degree suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 221, a configuration in which the expectation variable suggestion effect period is executed once in the early stage of the change effect is used. You may provide in the middle stage of a change production (for example, between a 2nd operation effective period (refer FIG. 221 (d)) and a 3rd operation effective period (refer FIG. 221 (e)). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the period that is the target of the effect using the value acquired as the expectation increase mode Dk4 during the expectation variable suggestion effect, and thus a large value ( For example, when 3) is acquired, the degree of expectation for the jackpot can be further increased. Moreover, you may comprise so that an expectation variable suggestion effect may be performed in multiple times (for example, twice) during one fluctuation | variation effect.

  Further, in another control example of the expectation suggestion effect, when the effect mode using the grant points is not set for a plurality of periods in which the operation effective period can be set, the display pattern of the reserved symbol as an additional effect However, other contents may be used as additional effects. For example, the value collected by the player (for example, another example of the first control example described above) An effect for adding the accumulated value described above (see FIG. 176 (c)) or an effect for suggesting the current gaming state may be added.

  In addition, even if the production mode using the granted points is set for all of the plurality of periods in which the operation valid period can be set, the production selection means capable of selecting the production executed by the player (For example, a selection screen for selecting an effect to be executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, and an effect executed by an operating means that can be operated by the player is selected). Based on this, the executed performance may be varied.

  In the expected effect setting processing 7 described with reference to FIG. 224, the expectation variable suggesting effect period is for the display defined as the fixed period of the variable effect (the period of 15 to 25 seconds from the start of change shown in FIG. 221). The expectation effect command is configured so as to be set, but as another configuration, for example, based on the determination result of the determination unit that determines the expectation selected with reference to the expectation selection table 222i, A period for executing the expectation variable suggestion effect is a plurality of periods (for example, a period of 15 to 25 seconds from the start of change shown in FIG. 221, a period after the first period shown in FIG. Among the periods of 50 seconds)), an expectation variable suggestion effect period setting means for setting any period may be provided. Thereby, a plurality of timings at which the expectation variable suggesting effect is executed can be set, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, the period in which the expectation variable suggestion effect is executed is set by the above-described expectation variable suggestion effect period setting unit based on elements other than the expectation selected with reference to the expectation selection table 222i. For example, a period during which the expectation variable suggesting effect is executed may be set based on the operation content of the player operating the operating means, or the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a may be set. You may comprise so that the period when an expectation variable suggestion production is performed based on the information contained in information may be set.

  Next, the frame button input monitoring / production process 7 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / production process 7. When the frame button input monitoring / production process 7 is executed, it is first determined whether or not the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 has been detected (S5051). If detected (S5051: Yes), then the hold variable production setting is performed. It is determined whether it is during the period (S5901), and if it is determined that it is during the holding variable production setting period (S5901: Yes), a display variable command for changing the holding symbol is set (S5902), and subtraction is performed. A display command indicating a later grant point is set (S5903), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5901 that it is not during the hold variable effect setting period (S5901: No), it is determined whether it is the first operation effective period (S5904), and it is determined that it is the first operation effective period. If so (S5904: Yes), a display variable command for changing the first expectation level display (expectation level 1 display) Dk1 is set (S5905), and a display command indicating a given point after subtraction is set. (S5903), the process ends.

  In the process of S5904, when it is determined that it is not the first operation effective period (S5904: No), it is determined whether it is the second operation effective period (S5906), and when it is determined that it is the second operation effective period (S5906: Yes), a display variable command for changing the second expectation level display (expectation level 2 display) Dk2 is set (S5907), and a display command indicating a given point after subtraction is set (S5903). This process is terminated.

  In the process of S5906, if it is determined that it is not the second operation effective period (S5906: No), it is determined whether it is the third operation effective period (S5908), and if it is determined that it is the third operation effective period (S5908: Yes), third expectation degree display (expectation degree 3 display) A display variable command for changing Dk3 is set (S5909), and a display command indicating a given point after subtraction is set (S5903). This process is terminated.

  As described above, in this separate control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, expectation degree 1 display Dk1 to expectation degree 3 display, which is an expectation degree display mode displayed in one variation effect. An effect period during which Dk3 can be displayed and a period during which the expected degree increase mode Dk4 can be displayed, which is a sum of the variable amounts for which each expectation display mode is changed during the change effect, are set in one change effect ( Referring to FIG. 221), an operation effective period for enabling the operation of the frame button 22 for each effect period can be set.

  Furthermore, when setting the production effect, when the production mode that does not display the three expected level display modes is selected, the display mode of the reserved symbol can be changed using the points acquired by the expected level increase mode Dk4. It is composed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to use the points acquired by the expectation increase mode Dk4 for game results other than the lottery result corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed. Can participate in games.

  In addition, the grant points given in this separate control example are set so that they can all be used when the frame button 22 is operated during all the operation valid periods, and the amount of time that the frame button 22 is not operated ends. You may make it remain so that the provision content of the title provision effect mentioned above may be varied with respect to the remaining grant points at the end of the change.

<A1 embodiment>
Hereinafter, A1 embodiment of the present invention is described with reference to an accompanying drawing. The same configurations as those described in the above embodiments and control examples will be described again for convenience. First, with reference to FIGS. 226 to 296, as an A1 embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 226 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the A1 embodiment, FIG. 227 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the A1 embodiment, and FIG. 228 is a pachinko machine 10 according to the A1 embodiment. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 226, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment A1 is formed with an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 11. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with two metal hinges 18 on the left and right sides of the front view (see FIG. 226), and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 227) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 229) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 226), and the front frame is provided with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 226), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 229) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 227) or changing the content of the Super Reach effect. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 226), there is provided a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and capable of displaying a payout of a prize ball and an error occurrence.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 227) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 227, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of balls for nails (not shown) and a windmill (movable member 310), (Not shown), rails 61 and 62, general winning port 63, first winning port 64, second winning port 640, variable winning device 65, second variable winning device (not shown), normal symbol starting port ( The through gate) 67, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 226). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display unit 80 are formed through the base plate 60 by router processing. It is disposed in the hole and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 226). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 226) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 229) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 227) to prevent a situation where the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once returns to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part of FIG. 227) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 227). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 229), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  The first winning port 64 is disposed below the variable display unit 80. The variable display unit 80 is arranged so as to divide the game area on the game board 13 to the left and right, the left channel where the game ball can flow down on the left side of the variable display unit 80, and the game on the right side of the variable display unit 80. A right-side flow path through which the sphere can flow is formed. The game ball that has flowed down the left channel is configured not to flow down the right channel. The first winning port 64 is arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the left channel and a game ball flowing down the right channel can enter.

  The second winning opening 640 is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the right channel is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down the left channel. The second winning port 640 has a horizontally-long rectangular opening formed in the game board 13, and a flow path through which a game ball can flow down is formed in the opening, and the ball entered the opening A photo sensor for detecting a game ball is provided. The front side of the opening is provided with an electric accessory 640a as a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate capable of closing the opening, and the opening / closing drive is performed on the front side around the variable opening / closing plate. And an opening solenoid (not shown). Normally, the opening of the second winning opening 640 is in a closed state in which a game ball cannot win or is difficult to win. When the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hit, the opening solenoid is driven to tilt the electric accessory 640a to the lower side of the front, and the ball is temporarily in an open state where the ball can easily win the opening of the second winning port 640. And is operated so as to repeat a predetermined number of times determined by the gaming state between the opened state and the normally closed state.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. The jackpot type determined here is 5R short time (95 times) jackpot (big hit A) and 5R short time set corresponding to the first special symbol that is displayed in a variable manner when winning in the first winning slot 64. (3 times) jackpot (bonanza B), 15R regular jackpot (jackpot C) is prepared. Further, a 15R short time (95 times) jackpot (big hit D) set corresponding to the second special symbol that is displayed in a variable manner when winning in the second winning slot 640 is prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “5R short time (95 times) jackpot (bonus A)” means that the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed 95 times after the jackpot of the maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds, 95 During the period until the first change stops, the lottery probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) shifts to the high probability state, and the short game state is set when the short fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is easy to be selected. It is a big hit. “5R short-time (3 times) jackpot (bonus B)” means that the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed 3 times after the maximum number of rounds is 5 and the third change It is a big hit when the short game state is set when the lottery probability of the normal symbol (2nd symbol) shifts to the high probability state and the short fluctuation time of the normal symbol (2nd symbol) is easy to be selected during the period until the game stops It is. Further, “15R normal jackpot (jackpot C)” is a jackpot in which a low probability state is set and the short-time gaming state is not set after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 15 rounds.

  During the short time (during the short time gaming state), not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, compared to the normal time A long time is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the time saving, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640a is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric accessory 640a per one time. It is good also as what changes the frequency | count to open | release more than usual. In addition, during the time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and at least the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released per hit is at least. One may be changed. Also, during the time savings, the time that the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released per time is not counted, but only the probability of winning the second symbol. However, it may be changed so as to be higher than normal.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 uses the winnings (start winnings) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger to synchronize with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and to change the third symbol. The second symbol is variably displayed using a third symbol display device 81 constituted by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs is provided. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 238). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 238). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, the second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)). Is displayed so as to alternately light up for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol “◯” after displaying the variation of the second symbol. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter in the shorter time than in the normal gaming state. Thus, during the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery (the number of times of variation display of the second symbol) can be performed more than usual. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the time. In addition, since four balls are paid out to the player 17 as the winning ball by the player entering the second winning port 640, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning port 640. , It is possible to play the game while suppressing the decrease of the player's ball, and to suppress the investment for lending the ball additionally, it is possible to draw the special symbol lottery for a short period of time .

  It is to be noted that the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the time shortening also by other methods such as increasing the probability of winning in the time shortening and increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. In this case, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set to be shorter than normal during the time reduction, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the object 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board in the area of the left flow path of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls launched to the game board, a part of the balls flowing down the left side of the game board is formed. It is configured to pass. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 of the sphere is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained spheres is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol retention lamp. (Not shown) is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of balls to be held for the passage of the ball of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to four times, but is set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). You may do it. Further, the number of normal symbol start ports (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 229), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A. In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, the prize ball is not paid out. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number such as one ball is used. You may comprise so that a prize ball may be paid out.

  Further, each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports through which four balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state, and the ball is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, if the symbol “○” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, 640a is in the open state, and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, during the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is also short. Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 640 in the shorter time than in the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, if the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as the type of jackpot selected when the jackpot is won (the jackpot is won in the lottery corresponding to the second special symbol), 15R at a rate of 100% If the short-time (95 times) jackpot (bonus D) is selected and the ball wins the first winning slot 64 (the lottery corresponding to the first special symbol is a jackpot), the short-time gaming state is given. The jackpot is a jackpot of up to 5R (61% in the case of a jackpot), and the jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 is selected. Has been. With this configuration, in the normal gaming state (the state in which the time is not given in the low-probability gaming state), it becomes easier for the ball to win the first winning slot 64 than the second winning slot 640, By making a game ball win at the 1 winning opening 64, the ratio of selection of the jackpot (bonus A or jackpot B) to which the time is given is set low, and the time is given to the second winning slot 640. When it becomes easy to win, it is possible to make it easy to make a big hit with the second special symbol, and the time-short state can be easily continued. Therefore, it is possible to increase the value for providing time savings.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. Further, on the right side of the variable display unit 80, a V winning door 600 capable of guiding a ball to the V winning slot 600a of the V winning device 620 is arranged. The V winning door 600 stands upright and the ball does not enter the V entrance 600a when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit B or a small hit. Thus, the ball can enter the V entrance 600a by changing from an upright closed state to an open state rotated about 90 degrees to the right.

  In the case of a small hit, a 1R (round) small hit game is executed that is in an open state until the V winning door 600 is won for 1.2 seconds or 10 balls, and the V winning opening 600a is won. On the other hand, in the case of the big hit B, the V winning door is opened until the 1R, like the small hit game, and the variable winning device 65 is changed to the opened state from the 2R. Here, from the 2Rth, it is set in advance as 1R (round) until the V winning door arranged on the front side of the specific winning opening 65a is 30 seconds or 10 balls enter the specific winning opening 65a. Round games are repeatedly executed up to the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type.

  By being configured in this way, even if it is a small hit or a big hit B, the third symbol display device 81 or the like does not notify whether the big hit or the big hit B, and the small hit By configuring the game to shift to a game or a jackpot game, the game ball is similarly entered into the V winning device 620, and the game is expected to enter the V winning port 624, which will be described later. It can be carried out. In the present embodiment, in the case of a small win, the game ball enters a V winning port 624 of the V winning device 620 described later, so that a big hit game is executed after the small hit game. . Note that the variable winning device 65 is opened from the 1R-th when a big win is started when a game ball enters the V winning opening 624 during the small hit game.

  In the case of a jackpot game in the jackpot B, winning control is executed so that when a game ball enters the V winning device 620 in the 1R jackpot game, the game ball enters the V winning port 624. It is configured. As a result, even in the case of a big hit game in the big win B, it is possible to make it seem as if the variable winning device 65 has been opened afterward by winning the V prize opening 624 (in practice, 2R in the big win game) Eyes are running). In addition, when a ball enters the V winning slot 600a and the specific winning slot 65a, 15 balls are paid out to the player as winning balls for one ball. In the jackpot game other than the jackpot B, the variable winning device 65 is configured to be opened from the 1R (round), so that the jackpot game is started instead of the jackpot. It is also possible to identify by.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that a stop symbol (for example, a cross symbol such as 333) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a small win, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has passed, it becomes a stoppage pattern for the small hit The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol (for example, a cross symbol such as 333) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of a small hit or a big hit B, the third symbol display device 81 similarly has a reach display mode (the left symbol and the middle symbol are the same in the first symbol). The display is stopped with 3 symbols), and the chance symbol composed of a combination in which the middle symbol is stopped and the chance symbol (the third symbol with the letter “CHANCE”) is stopped and displayed. Will be informed. As a result, the player can perform at least the game in which the 1R V winning door 600 is opened (corresponding to a small hit game or a big hit game) by the third symbol being stopped and displayed with the chance symbol. This can be recognized, and it can be expected that the ball enters the V prize opening 624. In addition, when a specific symbol (for example, 777 glance symbol) is stopped and displayed in the third symbol, it is notified that the jackpot game is executed, and the specific symbol May be configured so that the player can recognize early on that a jackpot game with high added value is executed.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. The big opening B solenoid is driven from the 2R at the big hit B, and from the 1R at the other than the big hit B, the open / close plate is tilted to the lower side of the front, and the open state is easy for the ball to win the specific winning opening 65a. Is temporarily formed and operates so as to alternately repeat the open state and the normally closed state.

  Next, the V winning device 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 229 to 231. The V winning device 620 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 and is attached to a position on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIGS. 229 and 231, the V winning device 620 includes a movable guiding member 622, a rotation distributing member 621, a V winning opening 624, a left discharge path 623a, a right discharge path 623b, a first staying member 622d, and a flow path switching. It is comprised by the member 622e.

  Normally, the rotation distribution member 621 of the V winning device 620 is configured to be visible to the player, and when the power is turned on, the rotation distribution member 621 is always rotated in the left-right direction at a constant cycle. It is comprised so that. When the V winning door 600 is opened in response to the start of the small hit game or the big hit game, the game ball can flow into the V winning port 600a of the V winning device 620. At the abutting portion between the V winning door 600 and the V winning device 620, a V entering port 600a into which a game ball can enter is formed, and the gaming ball enters the V winning device 620 from the V entering port 600a. A guide path is formed for guiding. A photo sensor capable of detecting the passage of a ball is arranged at the V entrance 600a, and is configured to be able to count the number of winnings to the V winning device 620 (V entrance 600a). Based on the fact that a ball is detected by this photosensor, a prize ball (three balls) is paid out to the player.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 253, the V winning device 620 will be described in detail according to the timing chart of the operation control of the V winning device 620 in the small hit game. When the small hit game is started, after the opening period (t1: 0.1 second) has elapsed, the V winning opening solenoid is activated (actuated to ON) during the opening period (t2: 1.2 seconds). The door 600 is changed to an open state. When the game ball is opened and the game ball wins in the V entrance 600a, the game ball that has flowed down the guide path is configured to be retained by the first stay member 622d shown in FIG. The first staying member 622d is configured such that the staying 1 solenoid is actuated for 4 seconds (actuated to ON) so as to protrude to the front side so that the ball stays in the upper part based on the start of the small hit game. . When one sphere stays in the first staying member 622d, the game balls that flow down thereafter collide with the stayed sphere and are discharged to either the left or right. After lapse of 1.2 seconds of the opening period of the V winning door 600, 2.7 seconds after the V winning opening solenoid is turned off and the V winning door 600 is changed from the open state to the closed state, The stay 1 solenoid 209a is turned off, the first stay member 622d is retracted toward the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10, and the ball staying in the upper part flows downward. A flow path switching member 622e that always operates in the left-right direction is disposed below the first staying member 622d.

  The flow path switching member 622e is configured to operate left and right by being turned on and off at intervals of 0.4 s by the flow path solenoid 209b. By being turned off, the movable guide member 622 is configured to move to a position that closes the inlet of the movable guide member 622 so that a sphere cannot enter the movable guide member 622. In the off state, the sphere flowing down from the upstream is configured to be guided to the right side by an inclined portion formed at the upper part of the flow path switching member 622e and discharged out of the V winning device. On the other hand, when the flow path solenoid is turned on and the flow path switching member is retracted to the left side of the inlet, the sphere can flow into the movable guide member 622. It is configured.

  The flow path switching member 622e is in an open state (a state in which the flow path solenoid is turned on and the flow path switching member is retracted to the left side) at the timing when the first staying member 622d is retracted and the retained game ball flows down. Then, the sphere flows into the movable guide member 622. As shown in FIG. 231, the movable guide member 622 has a cylindrical shape that allows a single sphere to flow down. An inflow port through which the sphere flows is formed on one end side, and the sphere is discharged on the other end side. A discharge port 622a is formed. A recess 622c that holds one sphere is formed in front (upstream side) of the discharge port 622a, and a second staying member that prevents the sphere that has entered the recess 622c from flowing downstream of the recess 622c. 622b is arranged. The second staying member 622b has a restricted state in which the staying 2 solenoid 612 is turned off to prevent the flow of a ball that protrudes upward and enters the recess 622c, and the staying 2 solenoid 612 is turned off. 622b rotates to the left and is changed to a release state that allows the sphere flowing into the recess 622c to flow down.

  As shown in FIG. 253, the second stay member 622b is changed to the restricted state by the stay 2 solenoid 612 being activated (on) for 2 seconds (t6) 5 seconds after the start of the small hit game. The ball that has entered the recess 622c is restricted from flowing down. The movable guide member 622 is rotated leftward so that the inflow side rises as shown in FIG. 231 (b) by the stay 2 movable motor 610a 5 seconds after the start of the small hit game (t4). Thereafter, the stay 2 movable motor 610a is operated for 1.5 seconds (t5), and the movable guide member 622 is moved up to be moved to the maximum movable position (see FIG. 231 (b)). As described above, the stay 2 solenoid 612 is controlled to be turned off at a timing 6 seconds after the start of the small hit game, so the second stay member 622b is released while the movable guide member 622 is moving up. When the movable guiding member 622 is inclined to the lower left and the inclination angle is further increased, the ball entering the recess 622c is configured to easily flow downward to the lower left.

  As shown in FIG. 229 (a), when the ball that has entered the recess 622c starts to flow down, the ball that has entered the recess 622c is discharged to the rotary sorting member 621 from the discharge port 622a. The discharged sphere rolls on the rotary sorting member 621 and is discharged downstream. The rotation distribution member 621 is rotated to the left and right at a constant cycle after the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and the V winning port 624 and the rotation distribution member 621 disposed downstream of the rotation distribution member 621 are rotated. When a ball is discharged from the downstream discharge port 621a at a timing when the downstream discharge port 621a coincides in parallel, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the V prize winning port 624. On the other hand, when the ball is discharged from the downstream discharge port 621a in a state where the downstream discharge port 621a and the V winning port do not match in parallel, the left discharge path 623a or the right discharge path 623b arranged on the left and right side of the V winning device 620. It is configured to be discharged to the outside.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 253, a V effective period for determining that it is effective that a ball has entered the V winning opening 624 is set for 2 seconds (t7) after 5 seconds from the start of the small hit. It is configured. Only when the photo sensor detects that a ball has entered the V winning opening 624 during the V valid period, the winning detection is made valid, and when it is won during other periods, the control process is made invalid. doing. With this configuration, it is possible to determine only the period during which a prize can be awarded to the V prize opening 624, and damage caused by fraud when the ball is manipulated by a magnet or the like to illegally win the V prize slot 624. Can be reduced. In the present embodiment, when a winning to the V winning opening 624 is detected during the V effective period, the big hit game is executed after the small hit game. The jackpot game that is given when the ball passes normally through the V winning opening 624 in the jackpot game is the type of the jackpot game that is executed (the jackpot A or the jackpot B (FIGS. 244 (b) to (c) The jackpot type corresponding to the reference)) is set.

  Note that the timing chart shown in FIG. 254 is shown for the case where V does not pass through the small hit. In the example shown in FIG. 254, when the flow path switching member 622e is in the closed state, the game ball is not guided to the movable guiding member 622 due to the release of the first staying member 622d. An example that did not. Similarly, FIG. 254 is an example of a timing chart for winning to the V winning opening 624 when the jackpot is B, and FIG. 255 is a timing chart for not winning to the V winning slot 624 when the jackpot is B. It is an example. FIG. 252 is a game flow showing a game state set in the case of a big hit or a small win in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 244 (b), when the small hit A in the special figure 1 is executed, 5R (short time 95 times) big hit is set, and when the small hit B is executed, 10R normal ( A jackpot is set. Also, as shown in FIG. 244 (c), when the small hit C in the special figure 2 is executed, 15R (95 times shorter) is set, and when the small hit D is executed, 5R ( When the small hit E is executed, 5R (no short time) big hit is set. It should be noted that the time of each jackpot name indicates that a time-short gaming state is set, and the subsequent number display indicates the number of times the special symbol fluctuates as a period during which the time-short gaming state is set. “Normal” indicates that the time saving gaming state is a big hit that is not set.

  In the present embodiment, when the small winning game is executed, the winning combination corresponding to the small winning type is executed by winning the V winning opening 624, but not limited thereto, the V winning opening 624 is not limited thereto. A counter value (for example, the first hit type counter value C2) may be acquired at the timing of winning a prize and selected from a predetermined selection table. As the predetermined selection table, a different selection table may be set for each gaming state (normal gaming state, short-time gaming state), or a different selection table may be set depending on the type of special symbol. Different selection tables may be set depending on the hit type.

  Here, when the variable display when the first special symbol (Special Fig. 1) and the second special symbol (Special Fig. 2) are determined to be a small hit or a big win is stopped, the type of the small hit is displayed. The LED of the first symbol display device 37a is lit in a lighting manner corresponding to the jackpot type. Since it is a display mode in which a plurality of LEDs are displayed in combination, even if the player visually recognizes the first symbol display device 37a, it is difficult to identify the details of the small hit type and the big hit type at a glance. Has been. Furthermore, when the jackpot is large, the LED of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed corresponding to the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type. Regarding the notification of the number of rounds, the number of rounds is not notified by letters or the like, but is displayed together with the lighting of the LED indicating the jackpot type, so that the player is more difficult to identify. Thus, even if the player is informed of the jackpot type, the jackpot type, and the number of rounds of the jackpot with the first symbol display device 37 to maintain the fairness of the game, it is difficult for the player to understand. This makes it difficult for the player to identify the jackpot game and the jackpot game before the execution, and even during the jackpot game, the jackpot game in the jackpot B, the player can It is configured to play games while making predictions. Thereby, the interest of a game can be improved more.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a small win game is executed, the type of jackpot game given when winning the V winning opening 624 differs depending on the small hit type, so that the big hit that is disadvantageous to the player When a small hit game corresponding to the small hit type to which the type is given is executed, by stopping the launch of the game ball and playing the game so that the game ball does not enter the V entrance 600a, There is a risk that the disadvantages at the amusement store side may increase, but in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81, etc. are configured in a notification mode in which the small hit type is difficult to understand. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the way of gaming that suffers from the above disadvantages.

  Further, after the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol determined to be a small hit is stopped and displayed, after 0.1 seconds, the V winning door 600 is opened and maintained open for 1.2 seconds. Therefore, even if the player can identify the player by analyzing the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, even if the player operates the launch of the game ball to the V entrance 600a It is configured such that it is difficult to fire the game ball to reach it. Specifically, in this embodiment, since it is configured to fire 100 game balls per minute at equal intervals regardless of the firing strength, it is configured to fire once in 0.6 seconds. Since it takes about 2 seconds for the game ball to reach the V entrance 600a after being launched from the launching device, the V entrance 600a must be continuously fired to the right area. When it is controlled not to enter the V entrance 600a at the time of a small hit, a game ball to the V entrance 600a for a small hit game corresponding to any type of small hit Can no longer enter the ball. Therefore, the player immediately starts right-handed when the third symbol is stopped and a right-handed notification (notification mode for notifying the player that a game ball is to be fired to the right region) is given. A game can be made to be performed.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 226).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 600a, 640 are guided to the unillustrated ball discharge path through the out opening 66. The out port 66 is disposed below the variable winning device 65.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged. In the present embodiment, one of the windmills (referred to as the movable member 310) is disposed on the upper left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and is illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 228, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 229). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 229). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning), the first special symbol or the second special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Is displayed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Note that the 3rd symbol is displayed in common with the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. In addition, the second special symbol is configured to be displayed in a variable manner in preference to the first special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in a variable manner at the same time. Has been.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in a variable manner at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be displayed in a variable manner at the same time. It is good also as a possible structure. With such a configuration, more lottery games can be executed in the same time, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 to be described later. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. The display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols consisting of numbers from “0” to “9”.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of special symbols performed by the main controller 110 described later is a big win, the variation display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and the variation display is performed. It is configured to generate a jackpot after it is over. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, a symbol row having three main symbols is displayed. In each symbol row, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row is scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform variable display. The symbol sequence is displayed as a left symbol sequence displayed on the left side of the display area, a middle symbol sequence displayed on the right side of the left symbol sequence, and a right symbol sequence displayed on the right side of the middle symbol sequence.

  In addition, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row. The middle part of the third symbol is set as the effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol column → right symbol column → middle symbol column. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, below the display area of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. One identification symbol (holding symbol) of “round symbol” is displayed for one reserved ball and is notified to the player. The player can discriminate the current number of reserved balls from the number of the reserved symbols. Note that a maximum of four reserved balls are set for each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640, and each of the reserved balls is held by the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. Are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in differently distinguishable colors (for example, black for the first winning port 64 and red for the second winning port 640).

  In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the third symbol and the reserved symbol, a character symbol, a character, or the like is displayed as a notice display mode displayed during the variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol. Is done. When a game is not performed for a predetermined period, a standby display image such as a model name of the pachinko machine 10 and a digest in a reach display mode is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured that the balls entered into the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 239 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  In the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, a first per random number table 202a, a first per type selection table 202b, a normal per symbol random table 202c, a variation pattern table 202d, a small hit type selection table 202e, a big hit scenario table 202aa, a small hit Each scenario table 202ab is set. Although data necessary for other games is also stored, the description of the invention in this embodiment is unnecessary and will not be described.

  The first hit random number table 202a, the first hit type selection table 202b, the normal symbol random number table 202c, the variation pattern table 202d, and the small hit type selection table 202e will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

  The jackpot scenario table 202aa is a data table in which a jackpot scenario in which the operation contents during the jackpot game are set is defined. The jackpot game opening period (the first round game is executed after the jackpot game is started). Period), round period (maximum period in which one round game is set), and inter-round interval period (period from the end of the round game to the start of the next round game) Corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 203aa, which is set when the jackpot game is started and is periodically added (every time the main process of the main controller 110 is executed) is added. Operation control is executed.

  In the jackpot scenario table 202aa, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the selected jackpot type are defined. Here, the detailed contents of the jackpot scenario table 202aa will be described with reference to FIG. 248 (a). FIG. 248 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot scenario table 202aa. As shown in FIG. 248 (a), different scenarios are defined in the jackpot scenario table 202aa corresponding to the jackpot type (jackpot A to jackpot D).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 248 (a), a jackpot scenario A202aa1 corresponding to a jackpot game for 5R is a jackpot type A and C in which a jackpot game for opening the specific winning opening 65a is executed. In D, a jackpot scenario 202aa6 corresponding to a jackpot game for 15R is defined.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 248 (a), a scenario corresponding to the first round of the jackpot game for the jackpot type B that opens the V winning port 624 or the specific winning port 65a according to the number of rounds during the jackpot game, Hit scenario a202aa2 showing the first half of the operation content of the first round, hit scenario b202aa3 showing the second half of the operation content of the first round, win scenario c202aa4, and the operation content of the round game from the second round to the fifth round A jackpot scenario b202aa5 is defined.

  As will be described later with reference to FIGS. 254 and 255, in the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type B, the content of the first round game is the same as the game content of the small hit game (an error that is difficult for the player to identify). Is included), and when the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type B is started, the V winning door 600 is opened and a round game (V challenge) aiming at the V winning opening 624 is executed. Is done.

  Further, by opening the V winning door 600 during the V challenge, it becomes easy for a game ball to enter the V entrance 600a, and the game ball entered into the V entrance 600a becomes a flow path switching member. Based on the detection result of the second stagnation sensor (not shown) whether or not the game ball is stagnation by the second stagnation member 622b of the movable guide member 622 (see FIG. 231 (a)). The operation contents of the second half of the first round game are made different based on the determination result.

  In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 241, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 262), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 274). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a second winning port 640 corresponding to winning in the first winning port 64 composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). And a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to winning a prize, and in each of these areas, the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 is synchronized with the timing of entering the ball. Each value of the random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the normal start ports (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 999). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 274).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. Are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. And the value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table (see FIGS. 242 (a) to (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. When the value of the counter C1 matches the value of the random number that is a big hit set by the first random number table, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. Here, in the first random number table 202a1, a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 corresponding to the second special symbol are set.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 242 (b), in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is “0 to 3”, and “0 to 0” is obtained. If it is any of “3”, it is determined that it is a big hit. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is other than “0-3” (that is, when it is determined that the big hit lottery is out), it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “4”. If it is “4”, it is determined that the game is a small hit. Here, when it is determined that it is not a small hit, it is determined that the lottery result is out of place.

  As shown in FIG. 242 (c), in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the first per-random number counter C1 obtained in the same manner as the first special symbol is “0 to 3”. If it is any of “0-3”, it is determined that it is a big hit. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is other than “0-3” (that is, when it is determined that the big hit lottery is out), the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is any one of “4 to 997”. If it is any one of “4 to 997”, it is determined that it is a small hit. Here, when it is determined that it is not a small hit, it is determined that the lottery result is out of place.

  In this way, the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to be the same. However, with regard to the jackpot probability, the second special symbol has a smaller jackpot probability than the first special symbol. Is set high. As a result, in the short-time gaming state in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the second winning opening 640, the lottery is likely to be executed with the second special symbol. Opportunities that can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to more advantageously set the player in the short-time game state, so that even if the normal game state is set, it is expected that a jackpot game to which the short-time game state is given will be executed. Thus, a game can be performed, and a problem that the player gets bored with the game early can be suppressed.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type when the special symbol jackpot is reached, and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37. The first hit type counter C2 determines a display mode of the first symbol display device 37. ) Are added one by one in order, and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second winning opening 640.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit or small hit of the special symbol, that is, If the random number falls outside the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. In the first per random number counter C1, there are four random numbers that are big hits of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the random numbers “0-3” are random numbers per special symbol as described above. It is stored in a table 202a1 and a random number table 202a2 per special symbol 2. Thus, since the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 4 among the total number of random number values, the probability that a special symbol jackpot will be “1/250”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the jackpot lottery result for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a jackpot, a first jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 241 (a)) for determining a jackpot type to be executed. It is set in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. In the first hit type selection table 202b, as shown in FIG. 243 (a), a special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 which is a data table for determining the type of jackpot game for the first special symbol, and a second special A special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2, which is a data table for determining the type of jackpot game for the symbol, is set.

  FIG. 243 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1. The jackpot type of the first special symbol is set so that the above three types from jackpot A to jackpot C are selected by the value of the first jackpot counter C2. Specifically, the jackpot type when the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is any one of “0 to 44” is “big jackpot A (short for 95 times 5R)”. That is, the value of “0 to 44” of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value. When the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is any one of “45 to 60”, the big hit type is “big hit B (5R short-time three big hits)”. That is, a value of “45 to 60” of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value. The jackpot type when the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is any one of “61 to 99” is “jackpot C (10R hour short no big hit)”. That is, the value of “61 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value.

  As described above, in the normal gaming state, the game ball is mainly won in the first winning opening 64 and the game is played. However, the short-time gaming state is in a ratio of 61% with respect to the jackpot of the first special symbol. It is a jackpot to be awarded (jackpot A and jackpot B). Therefore, even if the first special symbol is a jackpot, the short-time gaming state is not necessarily given, so the player is interested in whether or not the jackpot type to which the short-time game is awarded even if the jackpot is won. You can have it, and you can improve the fun of the game.

  FIG. 243 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2. The jackpot type of the second special symbol is set so that one type of jackpot D is selected according to the value of the first jackpot type counter C2. Specifically, the jackpot type when the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is any one of “0 to 99” is “jackpot D (15R short time 95 jackpots)”. That is, a value of “0 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value.

  In this way, when the second special symbol is a jackpot (by the jackpot determination for the winning to the second winning slot 640), the jackpot to which the short-time game is given is always given. Yes. Furthermore, the number of time reductions is set to 95 times, which is more advantageous than jackpot B, and the number of rounds to be executed is also set at 15R, so that it is more advantageous to the player than jackpots AC. It is configured. As a result, in the case where a big hit is made by lottery of the second special symbol that is easy to be executed mainly in the time-saving gaming state, the jackpot game that is advantageous over the first special symbol is executed. It is configured to increase the value when the gaming state is executed.

  The small hitting type counter C5 determines the small hitting type when the special symbol is small hitting, and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, and is a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 0). 99), one by one is added in order, and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), the value returns to 0. The value of the small hit type counter C5 is, for example, updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second winning opening 640.

  Further, the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the result of the big hit lottery with respect to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit, the small hit type selection table 202e for determining the type of the small hit to be executed (see FIG. 244 (a)). Is set in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. In the small hit type selection table 202e, as shown in FIG. 244 (a), a special figure 1 small hit type selection table 202e1 which is a data table for determining the type of the small hit game for the first special symbol, A special figure 2 small hit type selection table 202e2 which is a data table for determining the type of small hit game for the special symbol is set.

  FIG. 244 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 small hit type selection table 202b1. The small bonus types of the first special symbol are set so that the two types of small bonus A and small bonus B are selected by the value of the small bonus type counter C5. Specifically, when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of “0 to 64”, the small hit type is “small hit A (95 passes for 5R when V passes)” It becomes. That is, a value of “0 to 64” of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. The small hit type when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any one of “65 to 99” is “small hit B (10R time short hit big hit when V passes)”. That is, the value “65 to 99” of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

  Here, for the small hit A and the small hit B, the type of the big hit game to be executed later when the game ball enters the V winning opening 624 in the small hit game is set. In the case of the small hit A, the jackpot is set to 95 times 5R time short, and after the small hit A, the big winning that the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, and then 95 as the short game state. It is configured to set a short time game (a period from when the special symbol change is executed 95 times until it is stopped and displayed). Further, in the case of the small hit B, the 10R hour short hit big hit is set, and after the small hit B is executed, the big hit game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 10R open state is executed. Is configured such that the normal gaming state is set instead of the short-time gaming state. In this way, the small hit B has a larger number of rounds executed in the big hit game and is set to be more advantageous than the small hit A. However, since the short-time gaming state is not set after the big hit game, The lottery with the second special symbol that is advantageous is difficult to execute, and overall, the small hit A is set to be advantageous to the player when winning the V winning opening 624 than the small hit B Has been.

  FIG. 244 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small hit type selection table 202b2. The small special types of the second special symbol are set so that the above three types of small hit C to small hit D are selected according to the value of the small hit type counter C5. Specifically, the small hit type when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of “0 to 49” is “small hit C (short pass 95 at 15 V when passing V)” It becomes. That is, a value of “0 to 49” of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. The small hit type when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any one of “50 to 79” is “small hit D (short 5 times at 5R when passing V)”. That is, a value of “50 to 79” of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. The small hit type when the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 is any one of “80 to 99” is “small hit E (5R time short hit big hit when V passes)”. That is, a value of “80 to 99” of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

  Here, from the small hit C to the small hit E, the type of the big hit game to be executed after the game ball enters the V winning opening 624 in the small hit game is set. In the case of the small hit C, the jackpot is set to 95 times 15R time short, and after the small hit C is executed, the big winning that the variable winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state is executed, and then 95 as the short time gaming state. It is configured to set a short time game (a period from when the special symbol change is executed 95 times until it is stopped and displayed). Further, in the case of the small hit D, the 5R short-time 95 big hits are set, and after the small hit D is executed, the big win game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, and then the variable winning is achieved. The jackpot that the device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, and then the time-short game state is set to 95 time-short games (period until the special symbol change is executed 95 times and stopped). It is configured. Further, in the case of the small hit E, 5R time short hit big hit is set, and after the small hit E is executed, the big win game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed. Is configured such that the normal gaming state is set instead of the short-time gaming state.

  In this way, with regard to the small bonus type for the second special symbol, the small bonus for which the short-time gaming state is set to be advantageous to the player when winning the V winning opening 624 as compared to the small bonus type for the first special symbol. The rate at which the type is selected is set high. Thereby, when the short-time gaming state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol becomes easy to be executed, and the probability of being determined to be a small hitting is set higher than the lottery of the first special symbol, It is possible to easily execute the jackpot game in which the short-time game state is set again by determining that the game is a small win and winning the V winning opening 624. Thereby, the jackpot game can be given to the player while continuing the short-time gaming state, and the value of the short-time gaming state can be further increased.

  In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be small hits and the variable display stops, the LED corresponding to the small hit type of the first symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed. It is comprised so that. Therefore, the player wants to play a game so that a more advantageous jackpot game (a jackpot game in which a short-time game state is set) is executed by effectively using the remaining number of times in the short-time game. . Then, the small hit game type displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is discriminated, and only in the case of the small hit type to which the short-time game state is not given, the launch of the game ball is stopped to the V entrance 600a. There is a possibility that a game method that is disadvantageous to the game store side is performed such that the game is played so as not to enter the game ball. However, in this embodiment, the V winning door 600 is set to the open state for 1.6 seconds after 0.1 seconds after the variable display determined to be a small hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. In the configuration of this embodiment, which is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds and requires 2 seconds to reach the V entrance 600a, the game ball is fired after confirming the first symbol display device 37. Therefore, it is difficult to enter the V entrance 600a, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be small hits, the fluctuation stops, and the right strike notification is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the game ball is not fired immediately to the right area and played, the game ball seems to be difficult to enter the V entrance 600a in the small hit game in all the small hit types. It is configured. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the gaming method that is extremely disadvantageous on the game store side.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 247, each win type and win game operation will be described. For the big hit A and the big win C, 10 rounds of 1R are won in the variable winning device 65, and the round game that continues until the game ball is won or until the open state is continued for 29 seconds is repeated 5R.

  In jackpot B, in the 1R round game, the V winning door 600 is opened and the V entrance 600a is opened for 1.2 seconds. In addition, when 10 balls are won in the 1R, it is closed before 1.2 seconds elapses, but in 1.2 seconds, it is impossible to enter 10 balls in practice. It has become. In the 2R-5R round game, a round game is executed until 10 balls or game balls are won in the variable winning device 65 or until the open state is continued for 29 seconds.

  As for the big hit D, the round game which continues until the 1R is 10 balls in the variable winning device 65 and the game ball wins, or until the open state is continued for 29 seconds is repeatedly executed 15R.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Depending on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the lottery results (off, big hit type, small hit), so-called short out (7 seconds), loose out (30 seconds), various normal reach (30 seconds), various super reach (60 seconds), special reach Rough display modes of various types (90 seconds), pseudo-development non-production (30 seconds), pseudo-development one-time production (34 seconds), pseudo-development two-time production (38 seconds), and pseudo-development three-time production (42 seconds) Variation time) is determined. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 274) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a variation pattern table (see FIG. 245 (a)) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 245 (a), the fluctuation pattern table 202d includes a normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 used in the normal gaming state and a short-time fluctuation pattern table 202d2 used in the short-time gaming state. Are set respectively.

  FIG. 245 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal variation pattern table 202d1. The variation pattern table 202d1 for normal use is a variation pattern that is selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is out of sync. 30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and various types of special reach (90 seconds) are set, and the corresponding fluctuation is checked by comparing the value of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS1 with the set judgment value. A pattern is selected.

  Specifically, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 139”, short deviation (7 seconds) is selected, and when it is “140 to 149”, offset (30 seconds) is selected. In the case of “150 to 179”, various types of normal reach (30 seconds) are selected. In the case of “180 to 194”, various types of super reach (60 seconds) are selected, and “195 to 198”. In this case, determination values are set so that various special reach types (90 seconds) are selected.

  As a variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot type is jackpot A, C to D (that is, other than jackpot B), various types of normal reach (30 seconds) Various types of super reach (60 seconds) and special reach types (90 seconds) are set, and the corresponding variation pattern is selected by comparing the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 with the set judgment value. Is done. In this case, the player is notified that the third symbol is a big hit when the third symbol is stopped and displayed (a big jackpot with the same symbols) when the change is stopped. It should be noted that “777” is displayed only in the case of the jackpot type in which the short-time gaming state is set after the jackpot game. In addition, in the case of a jackpot type in which the short-time gaming state is set after the jackpot game, it is configured so that the slots other than "777" are determined by the stop symbol determination lottery of the third symbol It is also configured so that it does not know whether or not a short-time game will be awarded unless it is after a jackpot game.

  Specifically, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 40”, various types of normal reach (30 seconds) are selected, and when the value is “41 to 179”, various types of super reach (60 seconds) are selected. When the selected value is “180 to 198”, the determination values are set so that various special reach types (90 seconds) are selected.

  In addition, each variation pattern selected in the case of a jackpot is composed of the same variation time as each variation pattern selected in the case of a loss, and finally has a stop pattern (a glance) that indicates a jackpot It is configured differently depending on whether or not it is displayed. As a result, even if the determination result is out of place, the player can have an expectation for the jackpot by selecting the same variation pattern (variation pattern that will be reached) that is selected even in the case of the jackpot. it can.

  As a variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or big hit and the big hit type is a big hit B, the pseudo-development non-production (30 seconds), the pseudo-development once production (34 seconds), pseudo-developed twice effect (38 seconds), and pseudo-developed three times effect (42 seconds) are set, respectively, and the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 and the set determination value are The corresponding variation pattern is selected by collation. In this case, when the change is stopped, the chance (see FIG. 238) is stopped and displayed, so that the player is informed that at least a small win is won. As a result, even if the big hit B is displayed with the same stop pattern as the small win, the player can play a game in the expectation of winning the game ball to the V winning opening 624 in the small hit game. it can.

  Specifically, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 49”, the pseudo-development non-production (30 seconds) is selected, and when it is “50 to 99”, the pseudo-development one-time production ( 34 seconds) is selected, and if it is “100 to 149”, a pseudo-developed twice effect (38 seconds) is selected. If it is “150 to 198”, a pseudo-developed three times effect (38 seconds) is selected. Each determination value is set so as to be selected.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 232 to FIG. 236, the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment in the case of offset (30 seconds), pseudo-development non-production (30 seconds), and pseudo-development one-time production (34 seconds). The effect aspect displayed is demonstrated. FIG. 232 to FIG. 233 are diagrams showing the flow of the variation pattern of the third symbol in the case of offset (30 seconds). When the change start timing of the first special symbol or the second special symbol determined to be out is triggered, as shown in FIG. 232 (a), each third symbol (left, middle, and left) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Scroll display starts in the vertical direction. Further, in the lower right area of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the fourth symbol is a “circle symbol” in a display area smaller than the region where the third symbol is displayed (the region where each third symbol is displayed). ”And“ × symbol ”are configured to be displayed in two columns on the left and right as symbols that are alternately displayed in a variable manner. The fourth symbol is configured to be displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable symbol display period of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37, and a display mode corresponding to the determination result at the end timing of the variable term. (Displacement: Round symbol on the left column, × symbol combination on the right column, jackpot: Round symbol on the left column, circle symbol combination on the right column, Small hits: × symbol combination on the left column, × symbol combination on the right column) It is configured to be stopped and displayed. As shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (b), the state in which three lines are written on the fourth symbol indicates that the fourth symbol is variably displayed.

  In the case of off-set (30 seconds), when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the third figure that has been temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 233 is confirmed and stopped (stopped display from fluctuation), and the fourth figure is synchronized with that. Is also configured to stop display.

  In the pseudo-development non-production (30 seconds), the temporarily stopped symbol is a reach display mode as shown in FIG. 237 (a), and the middle symbol is “ The difference is that a chance symbol with the characters “CHANCE” is displayed.

  Next, FIGS. 234 to 236 are diagrams showing the flow of the variation pattern of the third symbol in the pseudo development once effect (34 seconds). When it is determined that the jackpot or jackpot is B, and the pseudo-development one-time production is selected, the change start timing of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is triggered as in the case of the pseudo-development no production as shown in FIG. As shown in a), the respective 3rd symbols (left, middle and right symbols) displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 are scroll-displayed in the vertical direction. After that, after being displayed at high speed and scrolling (speed or mode in which the third symbol type is difficult to identify), the chance symbol is temporarily stopped as shown in Fig. 232 (b) (for example, stopped with a combination of "354") After the display, the third symbol is shaken up and down).

  Thereafter, in the pseudo development once effect, as shown in FIG. 234 (a), the middle symbol “5” symbol and the right symbol “4” symbol are changed and displayed. Here, in the present embodiment, when the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination of “345”, it is set as a combination symbol that notifies the player that the re-variation is executed. As shown in FIG. 234 (b), the scroll display is started again in the vertical direction by moving and displaying the combination of “345”. Thereafter, through the high-speed scroll display, as shown in FIG. 237 (a), the chance chance is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the stop time is displayed when 34 seconds of the variation time (variation period) has elapsed. Here, in the case of the pseudo-developed twice effect (38 seconds) and the pseudo-developed three times effect (42 seconds), after the temporary stop, if the pseudo-developed effect is twice, it will be changed once again. In the case of the pseudo-developed three-time effect, the chance symbol pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed after the effect that the re-variation is executed twice is executed. As described above, by executing the pseudo variation a plurality of times, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the small hit game or the big hit B starts.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 235 to 236, SW (switch) effects in the offense, the pseudo-developed one-time effect, the pseudo-developed two-time effect, and the pseudo-developed three-time effect will be described. On the sound lamp control device 113 side, an effect using the frame button 22 is set as one of effects selected according to the variation pattern command. A detailed effect content is selected by the sound lamp control device 113 by lottery based on the fluctuation pattern command indicating the offense, the pseudo development once effect, the pseudo development twice effect, and the pseudo development three effect. As one of the effects, when a temporary stop is displayed, as shown in FIG. 235 (a), the symbol indicating the frame button 22 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the frame button 22 is pressed. An effect that prompts the player is executed.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 235 (b), if any one of the pseudo-expansion effect, the pseudo-expansion effect twice, and the pseudo-exposure effect three times is selected, it is changed again. The symbol “345” suggesting this is displayed and re-variation is executed. On the other hand, when the offset is selected, the symbol that is temporarily stopped does not change as shown in FIG. 236, and is stopped and displayed at the timing when the fluctuation period has passed. .

  In the present embodiment, the “CHANCE” symbol of the chance is displayed as the final stop symbol that has been changed again. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the “CHANCE” symbol and other symbols (for example, the middle symbol) are displayed. “4” symbol) may be displayed alternately, or both symbols may be displayed and scrolled to display an effect as to whether the “CHANCE” symbol is displayed up to the stop display position. In this case, if the “CHANCE” symbol does not stop at the middle symbol, it may be changed again if it is changed again from the stopped symbol. With this configuration, it becomes difficult to discriminate each variation pattern before the player is confirmed and stopped, and the start timing of the small hit game and the big hit B can be made difficult to understand. Therefore, even if it is the structure which is displayed in the aspect which can recognize a big hit and a big win in the 4th symbol, attention to the 4th symbol can be lowered by the effect of the 3rd symbol, and the start of the small hit game Can be difficult to identify. Furthermore, in the 4th symbol, since it is configured such that even the small hit type cannot be identified, the 1st symbol display device 37 must be confirmed, and the launch of the game ball in a specific small hit game is stopped, etc. It is possible to suppress the special game method (capture).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 237 to 238, an effect mode (variation pattern) in the third symbol display device 81 until a definite stop symbol in the small hit or big hit B is described. As described earlier in the case of pseudo-development-free production, pseudo-development 1-time production, pseudo-development 2-time production, and pseudo-development 3-time production, if the chance symbol indicating the final stop symbol is temporarily stopped, the chance goal symbol fluctuates. In this state, the word “ready to aim right” is displayed at the top of the chance symbol. Further, the outline of the right-handed notification symbol n for informing the player to operate the firing handle with the firing strength for firing the game ball to the right region is displayed in the upper right of the display region of the third symbol display device 81. When the variation time elapses and two seconds before the variation time elapses, the text “Now, aim right” is displayed and the density of the contour of the right-handed notification symbol n is displayed darkly (FIG. 237). (See (b)). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 238, at the timing when the variation time has elapsed, the right-handed notification symbol n is displayed not only in the outline but also in the middle, and the character “right-handed” is displayed on the left side.

  In this way, by right-notifying the right-handed notification before it is confirmed and stopped, the game ball is fired to the right region in accordance with the timing at which the small hit game is started, and the V winning door 600 is opened. It is possible to suppress a problem that the game ball cannot be fired in time during the period.

  In the present embodiment, the right-handed notification symbol is displayed step by step when the re-variation is displayed as a fixed symbol after the predetermined number of times of execution, but the present invention is not limited to this, and temporarily stops. When the stage display of the right-handed notification symbol n is started each time at the timing and the display is shifted or changed again, the right-handed notification symbol n is displayed before switching to the display mode of the confirmed right-notification symbol n (see FIG. 238). May be configured so that the third symbol is changed again. In this case, the “CHANCE” symbol is displayed in the middle symbol at each temporary stop, and when it is changed again, the final symbol is not displayed but scrolled again. It is good also as a fixed stop symbol which replaces | replaces with 3 symbols, and carries out a fixed stop (for example, scrolls 1 frame (shift) and stops), and alert | reports a removal. By configuring in this way, the special game such as making it difficult to understand the small hit start time and making the player prepare for the right-handed strike every time a temporary stop is made so that the specific small hit type is not fired. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the time variation pattern table 202d2 will be described. FIG. 246 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the short-time variation pattern table 202d2. The short time variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table used to select a special symbol variation pattern when the gaming state is the short time gaming state. In the short time variation pattern table 202d2, as a variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the short time gaming state is out of place, short out (2 seconds), short out pseudo one time ( 6 seconds), the short deviation pseudo-twice (9 seconds) is set, and the corresponding variation pattern is selected by comparing the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 with the set determination value.

  Specifically, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 90”, the short deviation (2 seconds) is selected, and when it is “91 to 189”, the short deviation is simulated once (6 seconds). ) Is selected, and when the value is “190 to 198”, the determination value is set so that the false deviation is twice (9 seconds) is selected.

  The short deviation (2 seconds) is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time set at 2 seconds. After a high-speed fluctuation for 1 second from the start of fluctuation, it shakes at the chance (the middle symbol is “CHANCE” symbol is greatly fluctuating). After changing and temporarily stopping for 1 second, a change effect is performed in which the off symbol (the symbol whose center symbol is “CHANCE”) is switched to a symbol that scrolls (slides) one frame downward is confirmed and stopped. Variation pattern. Note that the middle symbol during the temporary stop is greatly shaken and the “CHANCE” symbol and the symbol “for example,“ 1 ”symbol” arranged next to the next frame are alternately displayed at the stop display position. The player is not misunderstood as having a lottery result such as a small hit.

  The fluctuation pattern of the short deviation pseudo one time (6 seconds) is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 6 seconds. After the temporary deviation of the short deviation (2 seconds) described above for 1 second, the design is again fast for 2 seconds. After starting to fluctuate and re-varying, after a temporary stop for 2 seconds (a temporary stop mode similar to a short break (2 seconds)), the disengaged symbol (the middle symbol is “CHANCE”) scrolls down one frame This is a variation pattern in which a variation effect in which it is switched to (slide) symbol), confirmed and stopped, and informed that it is off is executed.

  The fluctuation pattern of the short deviation pseudo-twice (9 seconds) is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 9 seconds. After starting and re-changing, after a temporary stop (same temporary stop mode as a short break (2 seconds)) at a chance, the disengaged symbol (the middle symbol is “CHANCE”) scrolls down one frame ( This is a variation pattern in which a variation effect is executed in which it is switched to (slide) symbol), confirmed and stopped, and informed that it is off.

  In the short time variation pattern table 202d2, as the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the short time gaming state is a small hit, the short short hit (2 seconds), the pseudo one per short short (6 seconds), pseudo 2 times per short and small (9 seconds), pseudo 3 times per short and small (12 seconds) are set, and the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is collated with the set judgment value Accordingly, the corresponding variation pattern is selected.

  Specifically, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 67”, the short / small hit (2 seconds) is selected, and when “68 to 136”, the pseudo short hit (6 seconds) ) Is selected, and if it is “137 to 167”, pseudo two times per short small (9 seconds) is selected, and if it is “168 to 198”, pseudo three times per short small (12 seconds) is selected. Each determination value is set to be

  Short per minute (2 seconds) is a variation pattern with a variation time set at 2 seconds. After a high-speed variation for 1 second from the beginning of the variation, it swings at the chance (the middle symbol is “CHANCE” symbol is greatly fluctuated). This is a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuating effect is executed after a fluctuating temporary stop for 1 second and then a final stop and a notification of a small hit. In addition, the middle symbol during the temporary stop shakes greatly, and the “CHANCE” symbol and the symbol “for example,“ 1 ”symbol” arranged next to the next frame are alternately displayed at the stop display position.

  The variation pattern of pseudo one per short (6 seconds) is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set to 6 seconds, and after the temporary stop of 1 second of the short small (2 seconds) mentioned above, the design is again high speed for 2 seconds. After starting to fluctuate and re-fluctuate, there is a fluctuating effect in which it is confirmed that it is a small hit after making a temporary stop for two seconds (a temporary stop mode similar to short short hit (2 seconds)) after a chance. The variation pattern to be executed.

  The variation pattern of pseudo 2 times per short (9 seconds) is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set to 9 seconds. After starting and re-varying, after a temporary stop (same temporary stop mode as short short hit (2 seconds)) for 1 second at a chance, a fixed stop is performed, and a fluctuating effect in which it is informed that it is a small hit is executed Variation pattern.

  The variation pattern of pseudo 3 times per short (12 seconds) is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set to 12 seconds. After starting and re-varying, after a temporary stop (same temporary stop mode as short short hit (2 seconds)) for 1 second at a chance, a fixed stop is performed, and a fluctuating effect in which it is informed that it is a small hit is executed Variation pattern.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, during the short-time game, the lottery result is composed of the same variation time in the case of being out of play and in the case of the small hit, with the same variation timing (elapsed timing of the variation time). The third pattern was configured to temporarily stop at the chance. Thereby, even if the lottery result is out of place, it is possible to make it seem as if it is a small hit for each change, and it is possible to make the player prepare for the right handing in preparation for the start of the small hit game. Furthermore, it is confirmed by the first symbol display device 37 whether or not it is a specific small hit type (for example, a small hit type E which is disadvantageous to the player among the small hit types), and the game ball is launched. It is possible to suppress a problem that a special game method for stopping the game ball from entering the V entrance 600a is avoided.

  In addition, you may comprise so that the stepwise alerting | reporting of the right-handed alerting | reporting symbol in a normal game state may be performed for every temporary stop also during a short-time game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game with expectation of a small hit even if the fluctuation is more deviated.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and the ball has passed through the right or left normal starting port (through gate) 67. Is detected and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 242 (d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. If the value matches the value of the winning random number set by the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol (second symbol). The second random number table 202c is used for a normal symbol when the probability is low (period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and at a high probability (ordinary symbol when the normal symbol is more likely to hit than the low probability). The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  FIG. 242 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c described above. In the second per random number table 202c, there are 24 random number values that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is “5 to 28”. These random number values are stored in the second per-random number table 202C for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore the probability of jacking a special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes the normal start port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 changes the normal symbol. The display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second prize opening 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of the normal symbol, the second winning port 640 is opened “only once for 0.2 seconds” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the second per-random number table 202C for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes the normal start port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 changes the normal symbol. The display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the normal symbol having a low probability, and the release period of the second prize opening 640 is further reduced. However, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times” becomes very long, so that the ball can easily enter the first winning opening 64. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened “only once per second × 2” when the normal symbol is hit. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 274).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 240, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 240, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 274), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 273) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 272) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, Special symbol 2 held ball counter 203e, normal symbol held ball counter 203f, hour and middle counter 203g, big hit start flag 203h, big hit middle flag 203i, small hit start flag 203j, small hit middle flag 203k, V pass big hit type value 203m, V flag 203n, and other memory area 203z.

  As shown in FIG. 240, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selecting counter C3, and the small hitting type counter C5 acquired based on winning in the first winning port 64 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and C5 is acquired at the timing when the ball has won (start winning) at the first winning opening 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding). Among the vacant areas of the first area to the reserved fourth area, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special controller lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that the counter value acquired for winning in the second winning port 640 is stored, respectively. Since the configuration is the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c includes one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67 on either the left or right side, and the acquired data is stored in four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth). Among the vacant areas, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winnings stored in the other reserved areas are the same as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Is shifted to the reserved area with the area number 1 smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (start winning) at the first winning opening 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. Addition is performed (see S304 in FIG. 266). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 263).

  The value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 held ball number command (S211 in FIG. 263, FIG. 266). (See S305). The special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value held in the main controller 110 by a special symbol 1 hold ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls in the display itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual changed display held ball held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next-holding ball number command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls (holding symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in that the number of reserved balls held in the second winning opening 640 is stored with respect to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted. When the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a special symbol 2 reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has a maximum of four held symbols (the number of waiting times) of the variable symbol display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal start port 67. It is a counter that counts up to once. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases. . On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time a new variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed.

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67 on either the left or right side, the second random number counter C4 Is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67 on either the left or right side, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c.

  The hour / medium counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the hour / short game state. The counter value corresponding to the number of time reductions is set in the hour / minute counter 203g, and is decremented by 1 at the timing when the change of the special symbol stops, so that the time of the special symbol change set in the time reduction gaming state is completed. A gaming state is set.

  The jackpot start flag 203h is a flag indicating the start timing of the jackpot game. When the change of the special symbol for which the lottery result is determined to be a jackpot stops, the jackpot start flag 203h is set to ON (see FIG. 263: S219). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203h is on and it is determined that the jackpot start timing is reached, the jackpot start flag 203h is set to off. The jackpot start flag 203h is set to OFF in the initial state, and is configured to be backed up and maintain the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is turned off.

  The jackpot flag 203i is a flag indicating that a jackpot game is being played. It is set to ON at the timing when the variation of the special symbol whose determination result is a big hit is stopped (FIG. 263: S219). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (when it is determined that the game of the number of rounds corresponding to the set jackpot type has ended), it is configured to be set to off. The jackpot flag 203i is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clear. When a power interruption occurs, the state immediately before the occurrence of the power interruption is backed up and retained. It is comprised so that.

  The small hit start flag 203j is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small hit game. It is set to ON at the timing when the variation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped. When it is determined that the small hitting start flag 203j is on and it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hitting game, it is set to off. This small hitting start flag 203j is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like when the power failure or the like occurs. It is configured to be.

  The small hitting flag 203k is a flag indicating that a small hitting game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the variation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds per small end is completed), it is configured to be set to off. This small hitting flag 203k is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power interruption when the power interruption occurs. It is configured to be.

  The V passing jackpot type value 203m is stored in which data for determining the jackpot type set when a ball is won at the V winning opening 624 within the V valid period when a small hit game is being executed is stored. It is an area. The V passing big hit type value 203m stores a data value corresponding to the big hit type corresponding to the determined big hit type when the variation of the special symbol whose determination result is the small hit stops. When a ball wins the V winning opening 624 during the V valid period, the V flag 203n corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V hit jackpot type value 203m is set to ON. ing. At the end of the small hit game, the data value stored in the V hit big hit type value 203m is cleared. This V hit jackpot type value 203m is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power interruption occurs, the state immediately before the occurrence of the power interruption is backed up. It is comprised so that it may be hold | maintained.

  The V flag 203n is set to the flag corresponding to the big hit type corresponding to the type of the small hit game being executed when a ball enters the V winning opening 624 during the V valid period in the small hit game. The At the end of the small hit game, it is determined whether or not the V flag 203n is turned on, so that it is identified that the V winning opening 624 has been won during the V valid period, and the flag set to on. The jackpot type to be executed is determined and the start of the corresponding jackpot game is set. The V flag 203n is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clear. When a power interruption occurs, the V flag 203n is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power interruption. It is configured as follows.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  The scenario counter 203aa is a counter for advancing various scenarios (big hit scenario, winning scenario) that define the action control content of the big hit game or the small hit game, and when the big hit game or the small hit game is started The counter value is set to “1”, and then the big hit control process (see S1004 in FIG. 275) executed in the main process (see FIG. 274) of the main controller 110 or the small hit control process (see FIG. Each time (S1005 of 278) is executed, the value is incremented by “1”. Then, when various scenarios (a jackpot scenario and a winning scenario) are added up to values at which the scenario ends, “0” is reset as a counter value.

  The specific controlled flag 203ab is a flag for indicating that the specific jackpot control process (see S1118 in FIG. 276) executed when the jackpot B is set as the jackpot type is set to ON. This indicates that the specific jackpot control process (see S1118 in FIG. 276) has ended.

  This specific controlled flag 203ab is set to ON when the specific jackpot control process (see S1118 in FIG. 276) is completed (see S1212 in FIG. 276), and the flag setting status is the jackpot control process (see S1004 in FIG. 275). ) (See S1118 in FIG. 275). Here, when it is determined that the specific controlled flag 203ab is set to ON (S1118: Yes), when the jackpot B is set as the jackpot type, the first round in which a special round game is executed is determined. It is determined that the game has been completed, and a normal round game for the second and subsequent rounds (round game for opening the specific winning opening 65a) is executed. Then, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off (see S1307 in FIG. 277).

  Returning to FIG. 239, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 272) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 251 (a), the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a and other various data and programs necessary for game control.

  In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of variation pattern types (out of reach, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) are set as counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The sound lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as variation time and variation pattern type. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variation display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 251 (b), in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, A stop type selection flag 223e, an effect counter 223f, a SW valid time counter 223g, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. Based on the information stored in this winning information storage area 223a, the voice lamp control device 113 can discriminate the lottery result of the reserved ball before the start of the fluctuation.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), And a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the held ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b holds the reserved ball of the first special symbol. Manage numbers.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of held balls in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64, or the main control device 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol and holds it. When the number of balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 223b in accordance with the retained ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 retained ball of the main controller 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, and the special symbol 1 held ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved balls displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol with respect to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, and is turned off when variation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S2002) of the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2105 in FIG. 282), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2226 in FIG. 284). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The effect counter 223f is a counter used for the notice effect and various lotteries. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-198. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

  The SW valid time counter 223g is a storage area that stores a period during which the frame button 22 is determined to be valid.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 282) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 228). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 272).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 228) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

<Electric Configuration of Display Control Device in First A1 Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 257 to 261, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the present control example will be described. FIG. 257 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads out the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read out the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers a control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time from reading to setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is a control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S3002 in FIG. 286) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S3001 in FIG. 286) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 261), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 288 (b)), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and it is possible to omit the time required for the reading. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. In addition, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first winning port 64 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image for displaying the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S3003 and S3004 in FIG. 286).

  The fluctuation image at power-on will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image in the third symbol display device. 81 (display of “◯” and “×” on the third symbol display device 81).

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image at power-on of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen and the fluctuation image at power-on of the “×” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol. It is displayed repeatedly alternately. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged. If it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “out of special effect”, the image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on The MPU 231 causes the image controller 237 to draw a power-on variation image using image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235 b and alternately display the images on the third symbol display device 81. Instructed. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 257, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols is resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the first winning opening 64 is entered. The occurrence of such a state can be suppressed.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and follow the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to ending effects and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while if the stop type of the variation effect is a big hit, The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  By notifying the short time period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol. The longer the short time period of the normal symbol, the more opportunities for the ball to pass through the through gate 67. Therefore, there are more opportunities for the normal symbol to be drawn, and more opportunities to hit the normal symbol. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric symbol to be released as a big bonus for the normal symbol, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640 and the special symbol lottery is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the short time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit, and it can be given to the player, which can increase the player's willingness to participate in the game it can. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, since the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters, the electric symbol is released as a big bonus of the normal symbol, and the ball becomes the second winning opening. As it becomes easier to enter 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the number of possessed balls is difficult to decrease or the number of possessed balls is not decreased even when a game is performed. You can get a feeling of a period that you can get a big jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game continuously.

  Also, in the ending effect, by notifying that one of the lottery results of the reserved special symbol will be a big win of the special symbol, the player can make a special symbol in the special symbol lottery that is on hold. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously given willingness to participate in the game.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, is prepared with 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 259 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to C. Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “0000H”, which is the head address of the display data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 259) "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The content of the image to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 261) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 260 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 260 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to be transferred corresponding to the address. Data is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 260).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 260, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 261) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 260, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined by the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , The main processing (see FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S3005 in FIG. 286). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S3305 in FIG. 288 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3301 in FIG. 288 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S3308 in FIG. 288 (b)) and a simple display setting process (FIG. 288 (b) S3309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 289 to 296) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 167 to 169) are executed.

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7901 in FIG. 170A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 170 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 261), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 261), which will be described later, describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 261), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 completing the drawing process of the image for one frame (FIG. 288 (b) )), The pointer update process (see S7605 in FIG. 169) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 261), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 261 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 261, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed (FIG. 288 (b Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3307 in FIG. 288 (b)). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S3002 in FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S8113 in FIG. 171). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S8114 in FIG. 171). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S8202 in FIG. 172).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 288 (b)) is executed (see S8202 of FIG. 172).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in the first A1 control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 262 to 279. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When reaching 999, 99, 239), they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is performed in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b (S104). Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 263 to 267.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106). The details of the normal symbol variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the normal symbol variation process, the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the sphere at the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is executed (S107). Details of the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the through gate passing process is executed, the V inlet passing process is executed (S108), and then the V passing process (S109) is executed. Here, details of the V inlet passing process and the V passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 270 and 271.

  After executing the V passing process (S109), the firing control process is executed (S110), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display and the third symbol performed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol and the like performed on the display device 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81. Includes during the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is performed. If the aspect is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205), and is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 274) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. They are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

  After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), that is, when there is no new reserved ball for starting the special symbol fluctuation, The process ends.

  On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210). A reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the changed special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). Thereafter, the process of S213 is executed, and this process ends.

  In addition, in the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is changing (S202: Yes), the change display variable time being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S214). The variation display variation time executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is set (S215). . The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start processing is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Is called. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first per random number counter C1, and if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first per type counter C2 is set. Accordingly, one of jackpot A to jackpot D is determined. If the lottery result of the special symbol is jackpot, one of jackpots A to E is determined according to the value of the jackpot type counter C5.

  In addition, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that a player may be notified of the lottery result of this special symbol (decision result of various counters) by the display mode (lighting mode) of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. If the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. The red LED and the green LED are turned on.

  When the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot A is determined, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b indicate a blue LED with a jackpot A (for example, “a” of the alphabet) If the jackpot B is determined, the lamp is turned on in a mode indicating the jackpot B (for example, a mode imitating the alphabet “b”), and if the jackpot C is determined, the jackpot Turns on in a mode indicating C (for example, a mode simulating the letter “c”), and when the jackpot D is determined, lights in a mode indicating the jackpot D (for example, a mode simulating the alphabet “d”) Let

  Also, when the special symbol lottery result is a small win, the red LED is lit in a manner corresponding to each small hit type (small hit A to small hit E), as in the case of winning the big hit described above. Let In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops. Further, in the present embodiment, an aspect (color corresponding to a lottery result of a special symbol) showing the contents of each hit type so that the player can grasp each hit type (big hit type or small hit type) determined as described above. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are lit in a lighting mode corresponding to each hit type), but other configurations may be used, such as lottery results, Even if the determined hit types are different, the same lighting manner may be used as the lighting manner of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is configured so that it is possible to grasp the lottery result of this special symbol and the determined winning type by confirming the lighting state of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. However, other configurations may be used. For example, it may be configured to display that the special symbol lottery results are different in a lighting manner that is divided to the extent that the player can discriminate. .

  After the process of S215 is completed, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is a special symbol jackpot ( S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), in order to make it possible for a ball to win a specific winning slot (specific winning slot 65a, V winning slot 624) based on the type of jackpot, An opening scenario for opening and closing the door 600 is set (S217), and then the setting of the jackpot start (the jackpot setting such as 15 rounds) is executed corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this jackpot (S218). ).

  When the processing of S218 is completed, next, the big hit start flag 203h and the big hit middle flag 203i are set to ON (S219), the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is set to 0 (S220), and a stop command is set (S225). ), This process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (S216: No), then it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (S221), and it is a big hit. (S221: Yes), after the small hitting start setting process (S222) is executed, the process of S225 described above is executed, and this process is terminated. Details of the small hit start setting process (S222) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S221, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (displacement) (S221: No), then it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 1 or more (S223). . If it is determined that the value of the hourly / intermediate counter 203g is not 1 or more (0) (S223: No), the process of S225 described above is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hour / hour counter 203g is 1 or more (S223: Yes), that is, when the current hour / hour counter is in the hour / short state, the value of the hour / hour counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S224). The process is executed and the present process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 264, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing (S213). This special symbol fluctuation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 263) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262). Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery of “special symbol big hit”, “special symbol small hit”, or “special symbol miss” ( This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b). The values of the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S231). Next, the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table (special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, special symbol 2 random number table 202a2) corresponding to the type of special symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2). (S232), the process proceeds to S233.

  Specifically, when the special symbol variation executed in the current process is the first special symbol, the obtained value of the first per-random number counter C1 is used as the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 242 (b)). Are compared one by one with the four random values set in. As described above, four random numbers “0 to 3” are set as the big numbers for the first special symbol jackpot, and the obtained value of the first random number counter C1 and the random hits for these jackpots are set. If the numerical value matches, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. Similarly, when the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random value “4” that is a small hit set in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 242 (b)), It is determined that the special symbol is a small hit.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value determined as a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different random values may be used. By comprising in this way, it is comprised so that the random number value determined to be off in the 1st special symbol may be determined to be a win in the 2nd special symbol, and the big hit bias can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The number of random values to be set may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of jackpots can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher jackpot probability, the player Can give you the expectation of jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured such that the number of determination values determined as small hits is different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the probability that the lottery result will be a small hit according to the type of special symbol, and the player is willing to execute the lottery with the special symbol with the higher probability of a small hit Can be made to play games.

  In the present embodiment, the first random number table 202a is set so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are won in a small win, but only one of the special symbols is a small hit. The first random number table 202a may be set so as to win. Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 corresponding to the first special symbol is not set with a random value that is a small hit of the special symbol, and is special only in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 corresponding to the second special symbol. It is good to set so that the random number value which becomes the small hit of the design is set. By comprising in this way, the privilege (small hit game) which can be provided to a player according to the kind of special symbol can be varied, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbol jackpot is made to correspond to the predetermined range (0 to 3) of the value of the first per-random number counter C1, and the other range (4 to 999) according to the special symbol type. In other configurations, for example, the first special symbol has a small value (for example, 0 to 2) and the second special symbol is small. It may be set as a winning range.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a special symbol lottery (big hit, small hit, miss) is performed using the value of the first random number counter C1 and the first random number table 202a. As a configuration other than the above, a special symbol lottery may be performed using a plurality of hit random number tables. For example, whether the special symbol lottery result is a big hit using the first random number table. And when the lottery result using the first random number table is not a big win, the second random number table is used to determine whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit You may do it. In this way, by drawing a special symbol using a plurality of random number tables, the lottery result of the special symbol can be set more randomly, and an illegal act of operating the lottery result of the special symbol can be suppressed. .

  In the present embodiment, the value of the first random number counter C1 is used when a special symbol lottery is performed. However, other configurations may be used. For example, a plurality of random number counter values and a first A special symbol lottery may be performed using the random number table 202a. In this case, for example, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit based on the value of the first random number counter, and the lottery result of the special symbol is small based on the value of the second random number counter. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is a win.

  Returning to FIG. In the process of S233, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S232 is a big hit of the special symbol (S233). If it is determined that the special symbol jackpot (S233: Yes), the jackpot type is acquired based on the jackpot type selection table corresponding to the special symbol type corresponding to the current special symbol lottery (S234), The display mode at the time of jackpot corresponding to the special symbol and the jackpot type is set (S235), the jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter (S236), and the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot variation pattern determined this time A command is set (S243), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S233, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (S233: No), it is next determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (S237), and the big hit is made. Is determined (S237: Yes), the small hitting type is acquired based on the small hitting type selection table corresponding to the type of special symbol corresponding to the current special symbol lottery (S238), and the special symbol and the small hitting type are acquired. , The small hitting variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter, the variation pattern command corresponding to the small hit variation pattern determined this time is set (S243), This process ends.

  Further, in the process of S237, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S237: No), that is, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the range, the special symbol type is out of correspondence. The display mode at the time is set (S241), the variation pattern at the time of departure is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S242), and the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern at the time of departure determined this time is set (S243), This process ends.

  Although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win or a small hit, the variation pattern is determined regardless of the number of reserved balls, while the special symbol When the lottery result is out of place, the variation pattern is configured to be different depending on the number of reserved balls. Specifically, it is configured such that a variation pattern with a short variation time is more easily determined as the number of reserved balls at the timing at which the special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed. This makes it possible to shorten the period until the lottery result (off) that does not give special benefits to the player as a result of the special symbol lottery is displayed, so the number of reserved balls increases. In order to increase the number of lotteries for the special symbol to be played, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly to always secure a large number of reserved balls. In addition, when a large number of reserved balls cannot be secured, the special symbol change time can be increased, so that the situation in which the special symbol does not change during the game is suppressed. It is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play.

  In the present embodiment, the variation pattern is configured to be different based on the number of reserved balls at the timing at which the special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed. You may comprise so that the variation time set to the variation pattern in execution may be shortened on the condition that the number of balls on hold became more than predetermined number (for example, three) during the variation. . With this configuration, it is possible to play a game eagerly to secure a large number of reserved balls even while the special symbol fluctuates.

  Further, in this embodiment, only when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variation pattern is made different based on the number of reserved balls. However, even when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the reserved ball The variation pattern may be varied based on the number, or the variation pattern having a long variation time may be determined more easily as the number of reserved balls increases. Further, the number of reserved balls to be referred to when determining the variation pattern may be a value obtained by adding the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, or the first special symbol and the first Among the two special symbols, only the value of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol for which the special symbol variation start process is executed with priority may be used, or the special target for the special symbol variation start process to be executed this time Only the value of the number of reserved balls of the symbol may be used.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 265, the small hitting start setting process (S222) will be described. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the small hitting start setting process (S222). In this small hitting start setting process, a solenoid (V inlet solenoid) 209 for opening the V winning door 600 when a special winning lottery is won and a ball passing through the opened V winning door 600 is V A first staying member 622d (see FIG. 231), a movable guide member 622 (see FIG. 231), a second staying member 622b (see FIG. 231), and a rotation distribution member provided in a flow path that flows down toward the winning port 624. A process of setting a scenario for driving a solenoid for operating each of 621 (see FIG. 231) is executed.

  In the small hit start setting process (S244), first, based on the small hit scenario table 202ab (see FIG. 248 (b)), a scenario (hit scenario a) corresponding to the set small hit type is set (S241). . Next, the small hitting type corresponding to the small hitting type determined as the V passing big hitting type value is set (S242), the small hitting start corresponding to the small hitting type is set (S243), and the small hitting start flag 203j Then, the small hitting / medium flag 203k is set to ON (S244), and this process ends.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 266. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105) executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 262) in the present embodiment. The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 262), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, and the starting winning is determined. Is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a hold process for the values.

  When the start winning process (FIG. 266, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S301). Here, the ball entering the first winning port 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S301: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S302). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S303).

  And, there is no winning in the first winning opening 64 (S301: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S303: No), the process proceeds to S307. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first winning opening 64 (S301: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S303: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S304). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S305).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 274) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S305, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C5 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. Are stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S306). In the process of S306, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in the processing from S307 to S312, the same processing as that for the processing from S301 to S306 is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640. The second winning symbol 640 is different from the winning in the second special symbol only in that the holding process is executed, and the other processes are the same, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. And when it determines with the ball | bowl not having won the 2nd winning opening in the process of S307 (S307: No), a prefetch process is performed after the process of S312 (S313). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, the prefetch process (S313) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing the prefetch process (S313). When the prefetch process (S313) is executed, it is first determined whether or not there is a new winning (S321). When there is no new winning (S321: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning (S321: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the winning is a winning of the first special symbol (S322).

  In the process of S322, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S322: Yes), based on the special symbol 1 random number table, the special symbol 1 big hit selection table and the special symbol 1 small hit selection table The lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (S323), and the process proceeds to S325.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S322 that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (S322: No), the special symbol 2 random number table, the special symbol 2 big hit selection table and the special symbol 2 small hit selection table are displayed. Based on the lottery result, the jackpot type and the jackpot type are acquired (S324), and the process proceeds to S325. In the process of S325, a winning information command including information for indicating each lottery result obtained in the process of S323 or S324 described above (a jackpot determination result, a jackpot type, a jackpot determination result, a jackpot type) is set ( S325). Then, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 268, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a, and the like are displayed. It is a process for controlling.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by a normal symbol (second symbol) (S401). The normal symbol (second symbol) being hit includes when the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a hit and during the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S401: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S401: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S402), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S402: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S403). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S404), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S404: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S404: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S405).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S406). In the process of S406, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S407).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203g in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S408). Note that the hour / minute counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the hour / hour counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / hour state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 1 or more (S408: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S409). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S409: Yes), the process proceeds to S411.

  If the special symbol jackpot is not in the process of S409 (S409: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, so acquired in the process of S407 Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table for normal symbols for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S410). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 8B).

  In the process of S408, when the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 0 (S408: No), the process proceeds to S411. In the process of S411, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S407, Based on the random number table per normal symbol for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S411). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 8B).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S410 or S411 is a normal symbol win (S412), and if it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S412: Yes) The display mode for hitting is set (S413). In the process of S413, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / hour counter 203g is 1 or more (S414). If the value of the hour / hour counter 203g is 1 or more (S414: Yes), the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S415). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S415: Yes), the process proceeds to S417.

  In the process of S415, if the special symbol is not big hit (S415: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol. The opening period is set to 1 second, the number of opening times is set to 2 (S416), and the process proceeds to S419. In the process of S414, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 0 (S414: No), the process proceeds to S417. In the process of S417, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is set to 0.2 seconds, The number of releases is set to 1 (S417), and the process proceeds to S419.

  In the process of S412, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S412: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S418). In the process of S418, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S419.

  In the process of S419, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 1 or more (S419), and if the value of the hour / hour counter 203g is 1 or more (S419: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 is detected. The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S420), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 0 (S419: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S421), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the opening period of the electric accessory 640a becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

  In the process of S402, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S422). The variation time here is a time set in advance by the process of S420 or the process of S421 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the process of S422, if the variation time has not elapsed (S422: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S422 (S422: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S423). In the process of S423, when the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S413, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is stopped in the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lighted display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S418, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S423, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lighted display) in the display mode set in the processing of S413 or S418.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S424). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S424: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set (S425), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S425, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S416 or S417 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S424, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S424: No), the process of S425 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 269, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. In this through gate passing process, it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and if a sphere has passed, the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 is acquired and held. Process.

  Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S431). Here, the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S431: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S432). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S433).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S431: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S433: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S433: Yes), the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f. 1 is added to the value (M) of (S434). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S435), and this process ends.

  When the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in the first area of the free reserved areas of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to and the value is If 0, the reserved first area is the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 270, the V inlet passage process (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing the V-entrance passing process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262).

  In the V inlet passage process (S108), it is first determined whether or not the first stagnation sensor 622f is on (S501). If not (S501: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first stagnation sensor 622f is on (S501: Yes), then the first round of the jackpot game during which the V winning opening is open, that is, the jackpot B is set as the jackpot type It is determined whether or not it is during the round game or the small hit game based on whether the set scenario is the hit scenario a202aa2 (S502). In the process of S502, when it is determined that the V prize opening opening period is in progress (S502: Yes), a V entrance passing command is set (S503), and this process ends. If it is not a small hit (S502: No), it is a case where a game ball has entered the V winning device 620 even though it is not a small hit game, an error command is set (S504), and this process is executed. finish.

  The V-entrance passing command set in the processing of S503 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V-entrance passage command, it counts the game balls that have passed through the V-entrance and transmits a command for executing an effect based on the passage of the V-entrance to the display control device 114. Thereby, the effect during the small hit game based on the ball entering the V winning device 620 can be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 271, the V passing process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing the V passing process (S109) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262).

  When the V passing process (S109) is executed, first, it is determined whether there is a V passing, that is, whether a game ball has won the V winning opening 624 (S601), and if it is determined that a winning has been won (S601: Yes). Next, it is determined whether or not the current V period is in effect (S602). In the process of S602, when the value of the scenario counter 203aa that counts the progress of the scenario set in the jackpot type B or the jackpot type B (hit scenario b222aa3) is “1” to “501”, It is determined that it is during the V effective period, and otherwise it is determined that it is not during the V effective period.

  In the process of S602, when it is determined that the V valid period is in effect (S602: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the current small hit game is being played (S603), and if the small hit game is being played (S603) : Yes), the V pass big hit type value corresponding to the small hit type of the current small hit game is acquired (S604), the V flag corresponding to the big hit type is set to ON (S605), and the hour / mid-time counter is set to 0 (S606), and the process proceeds to S607.

  That is, in the processes of S604 to S606, a process for executing the big hit game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the V winning opening 624 during the small hit game. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S603 that the game is not in the big hit game (the big hit game corresponding to the big hit type B is in progress) (S603: No), it is necessary to perform a process for newly executing the big hit game Therefore, the process of S604 to S606 is skipped and the process proceeds to S607.

  In the process of S607, a V passing command is set (S607), and this process ends. The V passing command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the same manner as other commands set in the control process of the main control device 110. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a V-pass command, for example, when a V-pass command is received during a small hit game, the V-challenge executed during the small hit game succeeds, and following the small hit game The effect for indicating that the jackpot game is executed is executed. Further, when the V pass command is received during the big hit game, the same effect as when the V pass command is received during the small hit game is executed.

  On the other hand, if the V-pass command is not received at a predetermined timing during the small hit game, a disappointing effect is executed to indicate that the V challenge has failed, and the V-pass command is received at a predetermined timing during the big hit game. If not, a revival effect from the disappointing effect is executed, and the player is informed that the jackpot game will be executed continuously.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is shown in which only a command (V passing command) for indicating that a game ball has been won is set in the V winning opening 624, but no gaming ball has been won in the V winning opening 624. A command (for example, a V non-passing command) for indicating this may be set. In this case, for example, in this embodiment, the number of game balls that can enter the V winning opening 624 is only the game ball retained by the second retention member 622b (for example, one), so the second retention member 622b. The number-of-game counting means that counts the number of game balls that are retained by the above, and the passage of the game balls to the left discharge path 623a and the right discharge path 623b (see FIG. 229) through which the game balls that have flowed down from the rotary sorting member 621 can flow And detecting means for detecting the above-described V non-passing command when the number of game balls measured by the number measuring means is detected by the detecting means. Thereby, an appropriate effect can be executed by the sound lamp control device 113, and the effect can be enhanced. Further, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to quickly determine that a game ball is clogged in the V winning device 620.

  On the other hand, in the process of S602, if it is determined that the current V period is not in effect (S602: No), an error command is set (S607), and this process ends. By performing the process of S607, a state in which the game ball has won the V prize opening 624 outside the V validity period, that is, if a game in which the game ball is illegally awarded to the V prize opening 624 is performed, The case where the malfunction of the member (for example, 2nd staying member 622b) attached to the opening | mouth 624 has generate | occur | produced can be alert | reported rapidly.

  Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the contents of the NMI interrupt process. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S801). That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process.

  The NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, startup processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the contents of the startup process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) is obtained. A payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 (S912). On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, in this case as well, the payout initialization is performed in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device). A command is transmitted (S912).

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so that the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) is initialized. A payout initialization command is transmitted (S912). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. Main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 after sending out the payout initialization command.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed when the occurrence information of the power interruption is not set or when the abnormality of the backup is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) (S914). In the initialization process of the RAM, the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0, and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on, information on occurrence of power interruption is stored, and if the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S907: Yes), the RAM 203 is backed up. The information on occurrence of power interruption is cleared while retaining the data (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for transmitting the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Then, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S910), and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects (S911). Next, the interrupt is permitted and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 274, a description will be given of the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the startup process described above. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process (see FIG. 274), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 262) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. In addition, various commands set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 263), the start winning process (see FIG. 266), the V entrance passage process (see FIG. 270), and the V passage process (see FIG. 271) are processed by the voice lamp control device. 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, round number command, ending command set in the big hit control process (see FIG. 275) and various commands set in the small hit control process (see FIG. 278) described later are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. . In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 274), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262).

  Next, a small hitting control process (S1005) is executed. The small hitting control process (S1005) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1006). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S425 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 268), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S416 or the processing of S417 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of 1st symbol display apparatus 37a, 37b is performed (S1007). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S236, the process of S240 or the process of S242 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 264), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed. The process starts in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED If the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is lit. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned on. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S236, the process of S240 or the process of S242 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 264) is completed, 1 The symbol display devices 37a and 37b end the variation display, and in the display mode set by the processes of S235, S239, and S241 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 264), the stop symbol (first symbol) ) On the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

  Next, the 2nd symbol display update process which updates the display of a 2nd symbol display apparatus is performed (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S420 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 268) or the process of S421, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. . Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. In addition, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S423 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 268), the variation executed in the second symbol display device The display is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighted display) in the display mode set by the processing of S413 or the processing of S418 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 268). )

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs a power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1010). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1010: No), within the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. The update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1011 and S1012).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S1009, if the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process has been executed, the power-off process after S1013 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1009 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shut-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value ( By setting the initial value, it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 274). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects corresponding to the jackpot and the variable prize device 65 are performed. This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot scenario is set (S1101). Specifically, the process of S217 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 263) or the process of S1406 of the small hitting ending control process (see FIG. 279) described later is executed to determine whether or not the big hit scenario is set. To do. In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, and a big hit scenario is set based on whether a big hit scenario is set based on the lottery result or a specific area (V winning opening 624) is passed during the small hit game. Determine if it is set. If it is determined in the processing of S1101 that the jackpot scenario is not set (S1101: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1101 that a jackpot scenario is set (S1101: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203h is set to OFF, and then the set scenario is that of jackpot B Whether or not (S1102).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1102 that the big hit scenario B is set (S1102: Yes), it is determined whether or not the specific controlled flag 203ab is on (S1117).

  In the process of S1117, when it is determined that the specific controlled flag 203ab is off (S1117: No), the specific jackpot control process (S1118) is executed, and the jackpot control process is terminated. The specific jackpot control process (S1118) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1102 that a jackpot scenario other than jackpot B is set (S1102: No), or in step S1117, it is determined that the specific controlled flag 233ab is on (S1117: Yes) adds 1 to the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa (S1103), and determines whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is the opening timing of the jackpot scenario (S1104). For example, when the jackpot scenario a is set (not shown), the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa corresponding to the start of opening (opening start) is 1, so whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is 1 or not. Determine.

  In the process of S1104, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the opening start (the counter value is 1 if the jackpot scenario a) (S1104: Yes), a jackpot opening command is issued. The setting is made (S1105), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value that does not correspond to the opening start (S1104: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa corresponds to a value corresponding to the start of the round (if the jackpot scenario a Whether the counter value is 1251) is determined (S1106).

  In the process of S1106, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the start of the round (S1106: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be opened in the process of S1107 (specific win) The specific prize opening solenoid is set to ON so that the opening / closing door 65b of the mouth 65a is opened), and then a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1108), and this process is terminated.

  The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1105 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not a value corresponding to the start of the round (S1106: No), it is next determined whether or not the closing condition for the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied. (S1109). Here, as a condition for closing the specific winning opening 65a in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of balls (when 29 seconds have elapsed since the opening of the specific winning opening 65a or after the specific winning opening 65a is opened) For example, it is determined that the closing condition is established when 10).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1109 that the specific winning opening 65a closing condition is satisfied (S1109: Yes), the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is set to the counter value corresponding to the round end of the currently executed round. Is updated to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from (S1110), and this process ends. If it is determined in step S1109 that the closing condition is satisfied, the closing condition is cleared, and it is not determined that the closing condition is satisfied again in the next jackpot control process. .

  Here, the jackpot scenario is configured to update (add) the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa and execute an operation corresponding to the updated (added) counter value. Therefore, when the closing condition is satisfied because a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a, that is, the specific winning opening 65a is closed due to a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value). In this case, the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is updated to the value immediately before the counter value for which the corresponding operation control is executed (the operation control is executed in the next jackpot control process). Are configured).

  By doing in this way, the operation control (for example, the operation control that closes the specific winning opening when the ball has won a predetermined number of times) that is executed due to a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (counter value update) becomes a jackpot scenario. It is possible to execute based on this. Therefore, as a closing condition of the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a, the operation control is performed based on the jackpot scenario when a predetermined time has elapsed, and without being based on the jackpot scenario when there is a predetermined number of winnings. There is no need to perform complicated control such as execution of operation control, and it is possible to simplify the design and to prevent a situation in which both operation controls are mixed.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1109 that the condition for closing the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (S1109: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the end of the round (if it is a jackpot scenario a) For example, it is determined whether the counter value is 8750) (S1111).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1111 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the end of the round (S1111: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the processing of S1112 (specific winning) The specific winning opening solenoid 65f2 is set to OFF so that the opening / closing door 65b of the opening 65a is closed), and the process is terminated. Note that the above-described determination processing from S1106 to S1111 is repeatedly executed for the number of jackpot rounds set in the jackpot scenario.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1111 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not a value corresponding to the end of the round (S1111: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the start of the interval (big hit If it is scenario a, it is determined whether the counter value is 8751) (S1113). In the process of S1113, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the start of the interval (S1113: Yes), an interval command is set (S1114), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1113 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not a value corresponding to the start of the interval (S1113: No), then a big hit ending control process (S1115) is executed. This jackpot ending control process is a process executed during a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the jackpot game, that is, the end of the last round of the jackpot game until the start of the special symbol change. .

  The contents of the jackpot ending control process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the jackpot ending control process (S1115) is finished, an operation process based on other scenarios is then executed (S1116), and this process ends. Here, as the processing of S1116, for example, when the drive control of the V sorting motor 620a for driving the rotary sorting member 621 is performed based on the jackpot scenario, the operation processing of the motor is executed.

  Next, the specific jackpot control process (S1118) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing this specific jackpot control process (S1118). This specific jackpot control process (S1118) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 275), and is a process executed when the jackpot type B is set as the jackpot type.

  In the specific jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the set scenario is a hit scenario a (S1201). If it is determined in the process of S1201 that the hit scenario a is set (S1201: Yes), 1 is added to the scenario counter 203aa (S1202), and the operation corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 203aa after the addition is performed. Execute (S1203).

  Next, based on the value of the scenario counter 203aa, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the hit scenario a (S1204). In the process of S1204, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the winning scenario a (S1204: No), the process directly returns to the jackpot control process.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1204, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the hit scenario a (S1204: Yes), the value of the scenario counter 203aa is set to 0 (S1205), and the second stay member 622b stays. It is determined whether or not there is a game ball (staying ball) that is present (S1206).

  In the process of S1206, if it is determined that there is a staying ball on the first staying member 622d, a win scenario b is set (S1207), and the process proceeds to S1209. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no staying ball in the first staying member 622d, a hit scenario c is set (S1208), and the process proceeds to S1209. Thereby, at the end timing of the hit scenario a, the type of the hit scenario set thereafter can be made different depending on whether or not the second stay member 622b has a stay ball.

  In the processing of S1209, an operation according to the value of the scenario counter 203aa is executed (S1209), and then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the winning scenario b or c (S1210).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1210 that the end timing of the winning scenario b or c is reached (S1210: Yes), the big winning scenario b is set (S1211), and the specific controlled flag 233ab is set to ON ( S1212), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1210, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the hit scenario b or c (S1210: No), the processes of S1211 and S1212 are skipped and this process is terminated.

  If it is determined in the process of S1201 that there is no setting for the winning scenario a (S1201: No), it is then determined whether there is a setting for the winning scenario b or c (S1213). In the process of S1213, when it is determined that the hit scenario b or c is set (S1213: Yes), the process proceeds to S1209. Thereby, when the winning scenario a is set, the processing from S1202 to S1208 is executed, and when the winning scenario b or c is set thereafter, the processing of S1202 to S1208 is skipped and the processing of S1209 is performed. You can do the following.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1213 that neither of the winning scenarios b and c is set (S1213: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  Next, the jackpot ending control process (S1115) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending control process (S1115). This jackpot ending control process (S1115) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 275).

  In the jackpot ending control process, first, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the start of ending (the counter value is 40751 for the jackpot scenario a) (S1301). In the process of S1301, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the start of ending (S1301: Yes), a jackpot ending command is set (S1302), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not a value corresponding to the start of ending (S1301: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the end of ending (if it is a big hit scenario a It is determined whether the counter value is 42000) (S1303). In the process of S1303, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not a value corresponding to the end of ending (S1303: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1303 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the end of ending (S1303: Yes), the jackpot scenario setting is cleared (S1304), and then the scenario counter 203aa is reset to 0 (S1305). That is, the operation control of the jackpot game based on the jackpot scenario is ended.

  Next, the big hit flag 203i is set to OFF (S1306), and the specific controlled flag 203ab is set to OFF (S1307). Then, the value of the hour / medium counter 203g corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S1308), a jackpot end command is set (S1309), and this processing is terminated.

  Next, the small hitting control process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing this small hitting control process (S1005). This small hitting control process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 274), setting commands for causing the sound lamp control device 113 to execute various effects according to the small hitting, This is processing for controlling the operation of the V winning solenoid for opening and closing the V winning door 600 associated with the mouth 600a and the flow path solenoid 209b. In the present embodiment, the scenario set during the small hit game is the same as the specific jackpot control process (S1118) described above with reference to FIG. 276, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether or not a hit scenario a is set (S1401). If it is determined in the process of S1401 that the hit scenario a is set (S1401: Yes), 1 is added to the scenario counter 203aa (S1402), and the operation corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 203aa after the addition is performed. Execute (S1403).

  Next, based on the value of the scenario counter 203aa, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the hit scenario a (S1404). In the process of S1404, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the hit scenario a (S1404: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1404 that the end timing of the hit scenario a is reached (S1404: Yes), the value of the scenario counter 203aa is set to 0 (S1405), and the second staying member 622b stays. It is determined whether or not there is a game ball (staying ball) that is present (S1406).

  In the process of S1406, if it is determined that there is a staying ball on the second staying member 622b, a winning scenario b is set (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1409. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no staying ball in the second staying member 622b, a hit scenario c is set (S1408), and the process proceeds to S1409. Thereby, at the end timing of the hit scenario a, it is possible to set an effect according to whether there is a staying ball in the second staying member 622b.

  In the processing of S1409, an operation corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 203aa is executed (S1409), and then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the winning scenario b or c (S1410).

  In the process of S1410, when it is determined that the end timing of the hit scenario b or c is reached (S1410: Yes), the small hit ending control process is executed (S1411), and this process is ended. Details of the small hitting ending control process (S1411) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1410, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the hit scenario b or c (S1410: No), the process of S1411 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1401 that there is no setting for the winning scenario a (S1401: No), it is then determined whether there is a setting for the winning scenario b or c (S1412). If it is determined in the process of S1412 that there is a hit scenario b or c setting (S1412: Yes), the process proceeds to S1409. Thereby, when the winning scenario a is set, the processing from S1402 to S1408 is executed, and when the winning scenario b or c is set thereafter, the processing of S1402 to S1408 is skipped and the processing of S1409 is performed. You can do the following.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1412 that neither of the winning scenarios b and c is set (S1412: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 279, the small hitting ending control process (S1411) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 279 is a flowchart showing this small hitting ending control process (S1411). This small hitting ending control process (S1411) is a process executed in the small hitting control process (see FIG. 278).

  In the small hitting ending control process, first, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the start of ending (the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is 751) (S1501). In the process of S1501, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the start of ending (S1501: Yes), a small hit end command is set (S1502), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not a value corresponding to the start of ending (S1501: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the end of ending (if it is a scenario counter 203aa) Whether the counter value is 1500) is determined (S1503). In the process of S1503, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not a value corresponding to the end of ending (S1503: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the end of ending (S1503: Yes), the setting of the small hit scenario is cleared and the scenario counter 203aa is reset to 0 (S1504). Then, the process proceeds to S1505.

  In S1505, it is determined whether or not the V flag 203n is set to ON (S1505). In the process of S1505, when it is determined that the V flag 203n is not set to ON (S1505: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203n is set to ON (S1505: Yes), then the jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the V flag 203n set in S705 of FIG. It sets (S1506). Then, the jackpot start flag 203h and the jackpot medium flag 203i are set to ON (S1507), the V flag 203n is set to OFF (S1508), and this process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, since all the small hit games are set as one round game, unlike the big hit scenario in which the operation control of the big hit game is executed, a process for setting a command related to the number of rounds and an interval period (round) In the case where a small hit game having a plurality of rounds is provided, a scenario similar to the big hit scenario used in the big hit game described above may be set.

  In this embodiment, the small hit scenario is set for the period in which the small hit game is executed. For example, after the small hit game ends, a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses. A small hit scenario may be set for the interval. With this configuration, for example, it is possible to set the V passing effective period until 1 second has elapsed after the end of the small hit game. Therefore, it is possible to set a period set across different game states by one scenario, and there is an effect that the capacity of the control processing can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the V winning opening 624 in the small hit game, the big hit game corresponding to the big hit type set in advance corresponding to the small win is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type may be determined by acquiring the value of the first hit type counter C2 based on the detection of the game ball by the V winning opening 624.

<Control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment A1>
Next, with reference to FIG. 280 to FIG. 285, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1401). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process in S2018 (see FIG. 281) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1402). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 281, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2015 in FIG. 281), it executes the power-off process in S2018. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S2018 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1402: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process in S1514 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to S1404, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1516, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. If it is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223. Therefore, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the process proceeds to S1408.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1402: Yes), the startup processing of this time is after the instantaneous power failure, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S2018, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1404, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1404, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1406). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1516 is executed (see S2017 in FIG. 281). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S2018 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2018 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1409), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1411), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the process of S1408 is reached after the power-off flag is turned off because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S1404 to S1406. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), S1409, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1410, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and interrupt permission is set. In step S1411, the process proceeds to the main process.

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S1409 is that when the process from S1404 to S1406 is reached via the process of S1406, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1404. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 281, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current process of S2001 was executed (S2001). If not (S2001: No), the process proceeds to S2013 without performing S2002 to S2012. In the process of S2001, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S2002 to S2012 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S2014 and the command determination process of S2013 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2013 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S2014 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S2001 (S2001: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S2003 to S2012 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S2002). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S2008 described later are set (S2003), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2004). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 so that it may alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2005 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2005, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold number display update process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on a hold lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 number-of-holds ball counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2007). Although this frame button input monitoring / production process will be described later with reference to FIG. 285, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored. Is set to perform an effect corresponding to the confirmation of the input. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set to the display control device 114. Details of this frame button input monitoring / effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S2008), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S2009). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S2009, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2010). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process of S2008 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S2009 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81. In the various counter update processing in S2011, various counters used in the control processing of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are updated. In the effect update process of S2012, an update process such as effect is executed.

  After the effect update process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S2013). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to S2014. In the process of S2014, a variable display setting process is executed (S2014). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2015). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2015 (S2015: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S2017), and the power interruption processing is executed (S2018). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S2019), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the processing of S2015 (S2015: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2016), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2016: No), the process returns to S2001, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2016: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 282, a command determination process (S2013) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2013). This command determination processing (S2013) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Further, in this process, when the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 also determines to start the continuous notice effect.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 280, S2013), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control device 110. It is then determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S2101). When the variation pattern command is received (S2101: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2102), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S2103). Return to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 284) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S2101: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2104). When the stop type command is received (S2104: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2105), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2106). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 284) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2104: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2107). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S2107: Yes), the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is extracted from the received reserved ball number command, and the corresponding special symbol 1 reserved ball is extracted. Stored in the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively. When the processing of S2108 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is issued. Is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in step S2107 that no pending ball number command has been received (S2107: No), it is then determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2109). If it is determined that a winning information command has been received (S2109: Yes), winning information corresponding to the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2110). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2109 that no winning information command has been received (S2109: No), it is determined whether or not a hit-related command related to a big win, a small win, etc. has been received (S2111). If it is determined that a win-related command has been received (S2111: Yes), a win-related process is executed (S2112). The hit-related processing (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 283, but processing based on each command output from the main controller 110 in the big hit or the small hit is executed. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2111 that a hit-related command has not been received (S2111: No), it is determined whether another command has been received, and processing corresponding to the received command is executed. (S2115), the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set so as to be transmitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 283, the hit related process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing the hit-related processing (S2112). This hit-related process (S2112) is executed in a command determination process (see FIG. 282) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the hit-related processing (S2112), first, it is determined whether a jackpot start command has been received (S2201). When the jackpot start command is received, the display jackpot start command is set (S2202). Although omitted, in the sound lamp control device 113, when the jackpot start command is received, processing necessary for starting the jackpot of various lamps, sounds, and the like is executed. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S2203). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (S2203: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number indicated by the received command (S2204). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If it is determined that a round number command has not been received (S2203: No), it is determined whether a jackpot end command has been received (S2205). When it is determined that a jackpot end command has been received (S2205: Yes), a display jackpot end command indicating that it is a jackpot end timing is set (S2206). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If it is determined that the jackpot end command has not been received (S2205: No), it is determined whether a jackpot start command has been received (S2207). If it is determined that a small hitting start command has been received (S2207: Yes), a display small hitting start command indicating that it is the start timing of the small hitting game is set (S2208). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If it is determined that a small hitting start command has not been received (S2207: No), it is determined whether a small hitting end command has been received (S2209). If it is determined that a small hitting end command has been received (S2209: Yes), a small hitting end command for display indicating that it is the end timing of the small hitting game is set (S2210). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether a V-entrance passage command has been received (S2211). If it is determined that the V inlet passage command has been received (S2211: Yes), a display V inlet passage command indicating that the first staying sensor is on is set (S2212). Thereafter, this process is terminated. The fact that the first stay sensor is on indicates that a game ball has entered the V entrance 600a.

  If it is determined that a V-entry passage command has not been received (S2211: No), it is determined whether a V-pass command has been received (S2213). If it is determined that the V passing command has been received (S2213: Yes), the game ball passes through the V winning opening 624 and the V effect (the effect of displaying a character such as “V” on the third symbol display device 81). A V-effect command for display indicating that it is time to execute is set (S2214). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 284, the variable display setting process (S2014) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S2014). This variable display setting process (S2014) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2221). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2221: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S2226. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2221: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2222), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S2003 of the command determination process (see FIG. 282). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2223).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S2224). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  In the process of S2225, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2225). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, is off) (S2225: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this change display. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2225: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2226), and then in the process of S2006 of the command determination process (see FIG. 282), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2227). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuating effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2228), and the process proceeds to S2229. In the processing of S2229, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2229). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 285, the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S2007) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 285 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / production process (S2007). This frame button input monitoring / production process (S2007) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and enhances the production effect in the third symbol display device 81. In order to cause the player to perform an effect according to the player's operation, a display command is generated and set based on the operation of the frame button 22.

  In the frame button input monitoring / production process (FIG. 285, S2007), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is longer than 0, that is, whether the SW effective time (SW effective time counter 223g> 0) is set (S2301). . As shown in FIG. 235, the SW effective time is automatically selected at the timing corresponding to the case where the effect of the variable pattern using the frame button 22 is selected. Is set. If it is determined that the SW valid time is set (S2301: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223g is updated by subtracting the value corresponding to the elapsed time (S2302). It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2303). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2303; Yes), a display chance command is set based on the set variation pattern and the pressing timing. With this display chance eye command, re-variation (see FIG. 235) is executed on the third symbol display device 81, or an effect that a temporary stop display of shaking fluctuation is executed again without re-variation is executed. The SW valid time counter 223g is reset (set to 0) (S2305). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the value of the SW valid time counter 223g is 0 (S2301: No), and if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed in the process of S2303 (S2303: No) ), The process of S2306 is executed. In the process of S2306, other processes related to the SW effect (background change or the like) are executed.

<Control processing executed by display control device in first control processing example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 286 to 296, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply apparatus 115 to the display control apparatus 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S3001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S3001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 287 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process (S3001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory 234a has a low read speed particularly when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads out and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S3101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S3102). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S3102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S3103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S3104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (see S3001 in FIG. 286). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S3002 in FIG. 286) (S3105), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S3001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM 234d does not store all the boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 287, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S3102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S3103 to S3105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S3101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S3101. The processing of S3103 to S3105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S3102.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S3103 to S3105 without performing the processes of S3101 and S3102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 286. When the boot process is finished, an initial setting process is then executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S3002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process (S3002), after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is displayed so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Instructs execution of image drawing and display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S3003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S3003, then the power-on variation image is displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S3004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S3004, then the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S3005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video in the transfer setting process (see S3305 in FIG. 288 (b)) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer to the RAM 235 is executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 288 (b)), the simple command determination process (see FIG. 288) is performed so that the power-on main image and the power-on variation image, which are power-on images, are drawn. 288 (b) S3308) and simple display setting process (see S3309 in FIG. 288 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) into the first winning opening 64, and an instruction to start the changing effect is sent from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device. 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on can be immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S3005, interrupt permission is set (S3006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S3006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 288 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 288 (b), a V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 288 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 261) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 288 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S3301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that the normal effect image is displayed instead of the power-on image. In order to display on the display device 81, a command determination process (S3302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S3303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S3302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed, and a display demo command or When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 289 to 296.

  In the display setting process (S3303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S3302) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process are the same as the display setting process (see FIGS. 167 to 168) of the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  After the display setting process (S3303) is executed, a task process is then executed (S3304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S3303) or the simple display setting process (S3309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S3305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process are the same as the transfer setting process of the first control example (see FIGS. 170 and 171), and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S3306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S3304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S3305) are used. 261 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Note that the details of the drawing processing are the same as the drawing processing (see FIG. 172) of the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the processing of S3307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process (S3302), the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hits A to D, front / rear out of reach, reach out of front / rear out, out of front) The stop type table corresponding to the chance) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S3308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S3309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S3304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 289 to 296, details of the above-described command determination process (S3302) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. First, FIG. 289 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 289, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S3401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S3303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S3402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S3403).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among unprocessed commands (S3404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S3404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S3405), the process returns to S3401.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S3405) will be described with reference to FIG. 290 (a). FIG. 290 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S3501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3502). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S3501 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S3503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S3503, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3501, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S3504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3506), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3505 is updated, and the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3501 is updated. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S3502. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S3504, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S3404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S3404: No), it is then determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S3406). If there is a display stop type command (S3406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S3407), and the process returns to S3401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S3407) will be described with reference to FIG. 290 (b). FIG. 290 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to stop type information (one of big hits A to D, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out, chance chance) indicated by the display stop type command is displayed. The third symbol display device 81 is determined (S3601) by comparing the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 288 (b)) is executed. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect displayed on is finally set (S3602).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S3602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. (S3603), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S3602 is described. In the task process (S3304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S3602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S3603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the process of S3602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment as in the present embodiment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S3406 that there is no display stop type command (S3406: No), then it is determined whether there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S3408). If there is an image change command (S3408: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S3409), and the process returns to S3401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 291 (a), details of the rear image change command processing (S3409) will be described. FIG. 291 (a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the back image change command processing, first, a back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 171) of a back image change accompanying reception of the back image change command in the on state is set to on ( S3701). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S3702), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S3701 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S3702. . If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task processing (S3304), if it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S3702 The rear image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3702, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S3408 that there is no rear image change command (S3408: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S3410). If this is the case (S3410: Yes), error command processing is executed (S3411), and processing returns to S3401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 291 (b), details of the error command processing (S3411) will be described. FIG. 291 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3801). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S3802). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S3801, the error type generated from the error determination flag set in the process of S3802 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON in the process of S3802. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S3410 that there is no error command (S3410: No), then it is determined whether there is a hit related command among the unprocessed commands (S3412). If (S3412: Yes), the hit related command process is executed (S3413), and the process returns to S3401.

  Next, details of the hit-related command process (S3413) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. First, FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing the hit related command processing.

  In this hit-related command processing, as shown in FIG. 292, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command in the hit-related commands (S3901), and if there is a display jackpot start command. (S3901: Yes), a jackpot start command process is executed (S3902), and the process proceeds to S3903.

  Here, the details of the jackpot start command process (S3902) will be described with reference to FIG. 293 (a). FIG. 293 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command processing. This jackpot start command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display jackpot start command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the jackpot start command processing, first, a jackpot start display data table corresponding to the received display jackpot start command is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3921). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table set in S3921 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3922).

  Then, based on the jackpot start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3921, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3923), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3924). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3925), the jackpot start command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the jackpot start command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3924, the jackpot start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3921 The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer is processed by the process of S3922. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in 233e, and the necessary sprite image data in the set jackpot start display data table is stored in the character ROM 234 in advance. As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the jackpot start command process is executed, the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, image data required for the round effect and the jackpot end effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the jackpot start effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, the jackpot effect (the jackpot start effect, the round effect, the jackpot end effect) is caused by the slow reading speed. However, it takes a long time for the image data used for production to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Since the display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the jackpot start effect in the 3rd symbol display device 81 ends, the first round When the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command shown, there is much time until the round effect starts after the jackpot start effect ends. There is a risk that the player may have anxiety such as whether the operation has stopped or a sense of incongruity.

  The display jackpot end command for instructing the start of the jackpot end effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 are ended. When the image data necessary for the jackpot end effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the end command is received, a large waiting time is required from the end of the round effect to the start of the jackpot end effect. May occur, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether or not the operation has stopped, and to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when a display jackpot start command is received, transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the jackpot end effect is started therefrom, and the jackpot variation display is ended in the third symbol display device 81. By the time, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the jackpot end effect is controlled to end. Thereby, when the jackpot start effect is finished in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started in the third symbol display device 81 immediately. In addition, when all the round effects are finished in the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot end effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81, so that anxiety such as whether the player has stopped the operation, There is no sense of incongruity. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the jackpot end effect is started therefrom. Control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the jackpot start effect ends before the variation effect that is a jackpot ends in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, when the variation effect that is a big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the jackpot start effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81, so that the player has not stopped the operation. There is no anxiety or discomfort. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S3901 that there is no display jackpot start command (S3901: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the hit related commands (S3903). If there is a round number command for use (S3903: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3904), and the process proceeds to S3906.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S3904) will be described with reference to FIG. 293 (b). FIG. 293 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3931). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3932).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3931, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3934). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3935), the round number command is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S3903 that there is no display round number command (S3903: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display jackpot end command among the hit related commands (S3905). If there is a business jackpot end command (S3905: Yes), the jackpot end command processing is executed (S3906), and the process proceeds to S3907.

  Here, the details of the jackpot end command processing (S3906) will be described with reference to FIG. 294 (a). FIG. 294 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot end command processing. The jackpot end command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display jackpot end command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the jackpot end command processing, first, a jackpot end display data table corresponding to the display mode of the jackpot end effect indicated by the display jackpot end command is determined, and the determined jackpot end display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3941). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3942). Note that the jackpot end display data table set by the processing of S3941 may be discriminable. Specifically, the data table determination flag corresponding to the jackpot end display data table set by the processing of S3941 is turned on, and the data table determination flags corresponding to other jackpot end display data tables are set to off. Thus, by referring to the data table determination flag, the jackpot end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in processing such as display setting processing corresponds to which display mode of the jackpot end effect. Can be easily determined.

  Next, based on the jackpot end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3941, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3943), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3944). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3945), the jackpot end command is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S3905 that there is no display jackpot end command (S3905: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command among the hit related commands (S3907). If there is a display small hit start command (S3907: Yes), a small hit start command process is executed (S3908), and then the process proceeds to S3909.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 294 (b), details of the small hitting start command process (S3908) will be described. FIG. 294 (b) is a flowchart showing the small hitting start command process. The small hitting start command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display small hitting start command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the small hitting start command processing, first, a small hitting start display data table corresponding to the received display small hitting start command is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3951). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the small hitting start display data table set in S3951 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3952).

  Then, based on the small hitting start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3951, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3954). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3955), the small hitting start command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the small hitting start command process, in the display setting process, the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3954 is updated, and the small hitting start display set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3951. The drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted from the data table, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the table buffer 233e, and the necessary sprite image data in the set small hitting start display data table is stored in the character ROM 234 in advance. Or As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the small hitting start command process is executed, the small hitting start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, image data necessary for the round effect and the small hit end effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the small hit start effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. . As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, the small hitting effect (small hitting start effect, round effect, small hitting is attributed to the slow reading speed. It takes a long time for the image data used for the production (end production) to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing at which the small hitting start effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command indicating, until the round effect starts after the end of the small hit start effect Many waiting times occur, and there is a risk that the player may feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped or feel uncomfortable.

  Further, the display small hitting end command for instructing the start of the small hitting end effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 are ended. When the image data necessary for the small hit end effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the small hit end command, the round hit ends and the small hit end effect starts. Many waiting times occur, and there is a risk that the player may feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped or feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display small hitting start command is received, data transfer required for the round effect and the small hitting end effect is started from there, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the small hit variation display. Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the small hit end effect is completed by the end of. Thereby, when the small hitting start effect is ended in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects are ended in the third symbol display device 81. In this case, since the small winning end effect can be started immediately on the third symbol display device 81, the player does not feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped or feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the big hit stop type, transfer of image data used in the small hit end effect is started therefrom. Then, the control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the small hitting start effect is completed by the end of the variation effect that is a big hit in the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, when the variation effect that is a small hit in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the small symbol start effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation is not stopped by the player. There is no such anxiety or discomfort. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S3907 that there is no display small hitting start command (S3907: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display small hitting end command among the hit related commands (S3909). If there is a display small hitting end command (S3909: Yes), small hitting end command processing is executed (S3910), and then the process proceeds to S3911.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 295 (a), details of the small hit end command processing (S3910) will be described. FIG. 295 (a) is a flowchart showing the small hit end command processing. This small hitting end command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display small hitting end command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the small hitting end command processing, first, a small hitting end display data table corresponding to the display mode of the small hitting end effect indicated by the display small hitting end command is determined, and the determined small hitting end display data table is used as the data table. The data is read from the storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3961). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3962). Of the data table determination flags provided for each small hit end display data table corresponding to the display mode of each small hit end effect, the data table determination corresponding to the small hit end display data table set by the process of S3961 The flag is turned on, and the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the other small hit end display data table is set to off. In the display setting process, the small hitting end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to the display mode of which small hitting end effect by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2703. It is possible to easily determine whether it is a thing.

  Next, based on the small hit end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3961, the time data indicating the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3963), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3964). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3965), the small hit end command is ended, and the process returns to the hit related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S3909 that there is no display small hitting end command (S3909: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display V inlet passing command in the hit related commands (S3911). If there is a display V-entrance passage command (S3911: Yes), the V-entrance passage command process is executed (S3912), and then the process proceeds to S3913.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 295 (b), the details of the V inlet passage command processing (S3912) will be described. FIG. 295 (b) is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage command processing. This V entrance passage command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display V entrance passage command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the V entrance passage command processing, first, a V entrance passage display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V entrance passage effect indicated by the display V entrance passage command is determined, and the determined V entrance passage display data table is used as the data table. The data is read from the storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3971). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3972). Note that the display mode of the V entrance passage effect may be determined. Specifically, a data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display mode of the V entrance passage effect is provided, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the V entrance passage display data table set by the processing of S 3971 is turned on, and other V The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the entrance passage display data table is set to OFF. Thereby, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the processing of S2703, the V entrance passage display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing such as the display setting processing shows which V entrance passage end effect. It is possible to easily determine whether the display mode corresponds to the display mode.

  Next, based on the V entrance passage display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3971, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S9773), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3974). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3975), the V inlet passing command is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S3911 that there is no display V entrance passage command (S3911: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display V effect command in the hit related commands (S3913). If there is a display V effect command (S3913: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S3914), and then the winning related command process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 296, details of the V effect command process (S3914) will be described. FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing the V effect command process. This V effect command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display V effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the V effect command process, first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V effect indicated by the display V effect command is determined, and the determined V effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table buffer 233d is set (S3981). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3982).

  Next, based on the V effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3981, the time data indicating the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3983), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3984). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3985), the V effect command is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S3412 that there is no hit-related command (S3412: No), it is then determined whether there is a display chance command (S3414), and if there is a display chance command (S3414). : Yes), the chance command processing is executed (S3415), and the processing returns to S3401.

  Here, the details of the chance eye command process (S3415) will be described with reference to FIG. 291 (c). FIG. 291 (c) is a flowchart showing the chance eye command process. This chance eye command process executes a process corresponding to the display chance eye command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the chance eye command processing, first, a chance eye display data table corresponding to the display mode of the chance eye indicated by the display chance eye command is determined, and the determined chance eye display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table buffer 233d is set (S3851). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3852).

  Next, based on the chance display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3851, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3853), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3854). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3855), the chance command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no chance command in the process of S3414 (S3414: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S3416), and the process returns to S3401.

  In the process of S3401, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3401: Yes). ), The processes of S3402 to S3416 are executed again. Then, the processes of S3401 to S3416 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in S3401 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 288 (b)), the simple command determination process (S3308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, a command necessary for displaying a power-on image (not shown) from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, a display variation pattern command and a display command Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 290 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 290 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and others For this command, the process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 290 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S3501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3502, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the content is cleared.

<A2nd embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 297 to 299, the configuration of the game board 13 in the A2 embodiment will be described. FIG. 297 is a front view of the game board 13 in the present A2 embodiment. As shown in FIG. 297, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present A2 embodiment is a region on the right side of the variable display unit 80 compared to the above-described A1 embodiment (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed region). Is different in that the configuration of is different. Specifically, the distribution device B700 is provided in the right-handed region, and among the game balls flowing down the right-handed region, the game balls flowing down the first flow path B701a and flowing into the distribution device B700 are separated into two flow paths ( It has the structure for distributing to 2nd flow path B701b and 3rd flow path B701c).

  Next, the sorting device B700 provided in the right-handed region of the game board 13 according to the present A2 embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 298 and 299.

  FIG. 298 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the right-hand hit area of the game board 13. The sphere launched into the right-handed region and flowing down the first flow path B701a passes through the sorting device B700 and is distributed to the second flow path B701b or the third flow path B701c. The detailed configuration of the sorting apparatus B700 will be described with reference to FIG. 114 to be described later. A sphere that has flowed down the first flow path B701a is divided into the second flow path B701b and the third flow path B701c by 3: It is configured to be distributed at a rate of 1. By configuring in this way, it is necessary to fire a plurality of game balls in order to make sure that the game balls are inserted into the V entrance 600a during the period in which the V winning door 600 is open. In addition, it is possible to suppress a game in which a game ball is fired in a single shot, and to improve the operation of the game. In addition, since at least one of four balls that have flowed into the sorting apparatus B700 can flow down the third flow path 701c, in the case of performing a normal game in which a plurality of game balls are continuously fired. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball cannot enter the V entrance 600a during the period when the V winning door 600 is open.

  The second flow path B701b is configured to flow down to a region where the sphere that has flowed down can pass through the through gate 67, and the third flow path B701c allows the sphere that has flowed down to enter the V entrance 600a. When the V winning door 600 is open, the ball that has flowed out from the second flow path B 701b passes through the open V winning door 600 and enters the V entrance 600a. Inflows (enters). On the other hand, when the V winning door 600 is closed, it is configured to flow down to an area that can pass through the through gate 67.

  In the present embodiment, when the V winning door 600 is open, the ball that has flowed out from the third flow path B 701c is surely entered into the V entrance 600a. For example, a distribution member (such as a nail or a distribution device) that distributes the flow direction of the sphere is provided between the outlet of the third flow path B 701 c and the V winning door 600, and the V winning door 600 is provided. May be configured such that only a part of the sphere that has flowed out of the third flow path B701c enters the V entrance 600a.

  By comprising in this way, among the game balls regularly distributed (3: 1 ratio) by the distribution apparatus B700, the game balls flowing into the V entrance 600a are generated irregularly. Therefore, in order to allow the game ball to enter the V entrance 600a while the V winning door 600 is open, the game ball can be continuously launched more aggressively.

  Next, the structure of the sorting apparatus B700 that distributes the inflowing spheres to the two flow paths will be described with reference to FIGS. 299 (a) to (d). FIGS. 299 (a) and (b) are schematic views schematically showing the configuration of the sorting apparatus B700. FIGS. 114 (c) and 114 (d) show the flow and distribution of the first flow path B701a. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the relationship with the apparatus B700.

  As shown in FIG. 299 (a), the sorting apparatus B700 is a rotating body configured to be rotatable about an axis, and is arranged in four directions of the rotating body (four directions at intervals of 90 degrees). Blade members (first blade member B700a, second blade member B700b) that can come into contact with the sphere are provided. The first blade member B700a is configured in a flat shape so that the sphere flowing down to the sorting device B700 flows down to the third flow path B701c (so as to flow down in the lateral direction of the rotating body of the sorting device B700). The second blade member B700b is configured so that the sphere that has flowed down with respect to the sorting device 700 flows down into the second flow path B701b (so as to flow down directly below the rotating body of the sorting device B700). It is composed of a flat plate shape.

  In this embodiment, since the rotating body having one first blade member B700a and three second blade members B700b is used as the sorting device B700, the number of balls distributed to the second flow path B701b and the third flow The number of balls distributed to the path B 701c is configured to be a ratio of 3: 1. Further, a metal piece B700c is embedded in the side surface of the rotating body of the sorting apparatus B700, and is configured to be able to determine whether or not the rotating body is rotating by a detection sensor (not shown). Thereby, the act of illegally modifying the sorting apparatus B700 and causing the sphere that has flowed into the flow path unit B720 to flow down to only one flow path (the second flow path B701b or the third flow path B701c) is being executed. Can be easily determined.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 299 (c) and (d), the arrangement relationship between the first flow path B701a and the sorting apparatus B700 will be described. FIG. 299 (c) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the second blade member B700b is located in the flow path. In this state, when the sphere flows down through the first flow path B701a, the sphere comes into contact with the second blade member B700b and is distributed to the third flow path B701c. Then, the second blade member B700b in contact with the sphere rotates 90 degrees (down 90 degrees in the downward direction) along the flow direction of the sphere (downward direction in FIG. 299 (c)), and the first blade member B700a becomes the flow path. Will be located within.

  When two balls pass through the sorting device B700 from the state shown in FIG. 299 (c), the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 299 (d) (the state where the first blade member B700a is located in the flow path). To do.

  In this way, the sphere that flows down the sorting device B700 and the blade member provided on the rotating body are brought into contact with each other, thereby changing the flowing direction of the sphere and using the configuration for rotating the rotating body. Since the rotating member can be rotated each time the rotating member rotates and the blade member that can come into contact with the ball can be changed, the balls can be reliably distributed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the distribution device B700 is provided in the right-handed region, and a flow path (third flow path 701c) that can enter the V entrance 600a and the V entrance 600a. Since the game balls are distributed to the flow path (second flow path 701b) that cannot enter the ball (the second flow path 701b), the V entry gate is open during the period when the V winning door 600 is open. Since it is necessary to fire a plurality of game balls in order to reliably enter the game balls in 600a, it is possible to suppress a game in which the game balls are fired in a single shot, and to improve the operation of the game. .

  In addition, since at least one of four balls that have flowed into the sorting apparatus B700 can flow down the third flow path 701c, in the case of performing a normal game in which a plurality of game balls are continuously fired. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball cannot enter the V entrance 600a during the period when the V winning door 600 is open.

  In the above-described A2 embodiment, the configuration having the sorting device B700 is used to suppress a game in which a game ball is fired in a single shot. However, other configurations may be used, for example, a game ball A delay means is provided in the right-handed area to make the flow period of the game ball irregular so that the period from when the ball is launched to the V entrance 600a becomes irregular, and the game ball is fired. It is possible to use a configuration that suppresses a game in which a game ball is fired in a single shot by making it difficult to grasp the period until reaching the V entrance 600a. If the game ball stays in the right-handed area for a predetermined period so that the game ball does not reach the V entrance 600a unless it flows down, the game ball stays in the stay means. , Games in which the following game balls stay It may be configured so as to flow into the ball entrance possible flow path V ball entrance opening 600a by impinging on.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration of the sorting device B700 is configured to distribute to the third flow path 701 at a rate of 1 in 4 balls, but is not limited thereto, and may be other rates. The distribution device B700 may be configured by a windmill or the like and distributed at a random rate.

<A3rd embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 300 to 301, the configuration of the game board 13 in the A3 embodiment will be described. FIG. 300 is a front view of the game board 13 in the present A3 embodiment. As shown in FIG. 300, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present A3 embodiment is an area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 compared to the above-described A1 embodiment (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed area). It is different in that the configuration of is different. Specifically, it is different in that a croon member 1700 for delaying the flow of the game ball is provided above the V winning door 600 in the right-handed area, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, by providing the cruising member 1700, the flow of the game ball is delayed by flowing down the interior of the cruising member 1700 as the path of the game ball flowing down the right-handed area, and the V winning door 600 is reached. And a normal path for flowing down to the V winning door 600 after flowing down the outside (right side) of the cleon member 1700.

  With this configuration, the game ball flowing down the delay path can reach the V winning door 600 even after the player stops the launch of the game ball.

  Here, for example, when a player determines a small hit type and a small hit type that is disadvantageous to the player occurs, an illegal such as refraining from launching so that the game ball does not flow down to the V winning door 600 A game can be considered. In this case, the V prize due to the small hit game unfavorable to the player does not occur, and the damage of the game shop becomes large.

  On the other hand, with the above-described configuration, even if the player stops firing the game ball after determining the type of small hit, the game ball whose flow is delayed by the clown member 1700 (delay path) is displayed in the V winning door 600. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a V winning due to a small hit game that is disadvantageous to the player does not occur.

  Further, the timing at which the launched game ball reaches the V winning door 600 varies greatly depending on whether it flows down the delay path or the normal path. Therefore, during the period when the V winning door 600 is open, in order to surely enter the game ball into the V entrance 600a (that is, even if the game ball flows down the delay path) It is necessary to fire a game ball before the V winning door 600 is opened. Thereby, the game which launches a game ball by one shot can be suppressed, and the operation of the game can be improved.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 301, the detail of the clown member 1700 is demonstrated. The croon member 1700 is formed in a conical shape, and has a ball entry portion 1710a into which a game ball flowing down the right-handed region enters the upper portion. This ball entry portion 1710a is an opening that is slightly larger than one game ball (in this embodiment, a diameter of 12 mm).

  A spiral channel 1710d is formed inside the croon member 1700 to allow the game ball that has entered the ball entrance portion 1710a to flow down spirally along the inner wall of the croon member 1700, and at the end of the spiral channel 1710d. Is formed with a bottom surface portion 1710c which is gently inclined in a mortar shape toward the center. The spiral flow path 1710d is configured such that the game ball that has entered the ball entry portion 1710a flows down to the outer end portion of the bottom surface portion 1710c, and the game ball flows down spirally along the inner peripheral surface of the bottom surface portion 1710c. Yes. The bottom surface portion 1710c has the same shape as the well-known bottom surface of the croon, and gradually guides the game ball to the center portion while circularly moving the game ball along the inner periphery of the bottom surface. At the center of the bottom surface portion 1710c, a ball outlet 1710b that is slightly larger than one game ball (in this embodiment, 12 mm in diameter) protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape. Further, the ball outlet 1710b is formed by a protruding flow path wall having a spiral flow path of 0.5 mm inside the ball outlet 1710b, and the game ball rotates spirally inside the ball outlet 1710b and goes outside the ball outlet 1710b. It is configured to be discharged.

  In the present embodiment, the spiral channel 1710d is formed inside the clown member 1710. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a configuration without the spiral channel 1710d may be used. May be formed only by the spiral flow channel 1710d. Moreover, you may comprise not the spiral flow path 1710d but the speed reducing part comprised with the raw material with a high friction coefficient etc. which decelerates the falling speed of a game ball. As long as the flow of the game ball is delayed, it may be appropriately selected.

  As a result, the game ball that has entered the ball entry portion 1710a of the croon member 1700 is slowly rolled along the inner peripheral wall of the crune member 1700 in the spiral flow path 1710d and guided to the bottom surface portion 1710c. The game balls guided to the bottom surface portion 1710c are gradually guided to the ball outlet 1710b while circularly moving from the outer peripheral side to the center on the bottom surface portion 1710c. Further, the diameter of the ball outlet 1710b is slightly larger than that of the game ball, and the game ball rotates in a spiral manner inside the ball outlet 1710b protruding downward by a spiral channel formed inside. While being discharged to the outside of the ball outlet 1710b. With this configuration, it is configured that the game ball that has entered the ball entry portion 1710a of the clown member 1700 takes approximately 6 seconds to be discharged from the ball outlet 1710b.

  Here, in this embodiment, the time from when the small hit type is displayed until the V winning door 600 is opened is set to 1 second. Therefore, even if the launch of a new game ball is refrained after the small hit type is displayed, the game ball flowing down through the interior of the clown member 1700 flows down to the V winning door 600. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent illegal games that prevent the player from launching the game ball after judging the small hit type and prevent the occurrence of the V prize due to the small hit game unfavorable to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the small variation time is configured to be selected so that the variation time is shorter (or the same) than the time (6 seconds) during which the game ball passes through the clown member 1700 (delay path). Yes. As a result, a game ball that has entered the pitching part 1710a of the cruising member 1700 before (or during the variation effect) the small winning variation effect ends the small hit variation effect and the V winning door 600 is opened. It becomes easy to discharge from the ball outlet 1710b at the timing. This makes it difficult for the player to control the entry of the game ball into the V entrance 600a and suppresses illegal games, and makes it easier for the game ball to enter the V entrance 600a in a normal game. , Can improve the interest of the player. It should be noted that a variation time shorter (or the same) than the time (6 seconds) required for the game ball to pass through the cruising member 1700 (delay path) may not be selected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of variation times (2 seconds, 6 seconds, 9 seconds, and 12 seconds) are selected as the variation times per unit. Therefore, it is difficult to launch the game ball at the timing when the V winning door 600 is opened and to enter the game ball into the V entrance 600a. In addition, in this embodiment, the timing at which the game ball reaches the V entrance 600a varies greatly depending on whether the game ball flowing down the right-handed region flows down the delay path or the normal path. Therefore, it can be made more difficult to launch the game ball in time for the timing at which the V winning door 600 is opened. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game in which a game ball is fired in a single shot, and to improve the operation of the game.

  Note that the small variation time is not limited to that described above, and may be a variation time shorter (or the same) than the time (6 seconds) during which the game ball passes through the clown member 1700, or only a long variation time. Naturally good.

  In the present embodiment, by providing two routes, a delay route and a normal route, it is difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the game ball reaches the V entrance 600a. Of course, three or more routes may be provided.

  As described above, in the present A3 embodiment, by providing the crune member 1700 above the V winning door 600 (V entrance 600a), the game ball flowing down the right-handed area can be placed in the V entrance 600a. As a route to enter the ball, a delay route and a normal route having different flow times are provided.

  With this delay path, the game ball flowing down the delay path can reach the V winning door 600 even after the player stops the launch of the game ball. That is, even if the player stops the launch of the game ball after determining the small hit type, the game ball whose flow is delayed by the clown member 1700 (delay path) enters the V entrance 600a. become. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the illegal game that the player discriminates the type of small hit and prevents the game ball from entering the V entrance 600a at the small hit game that is disadvantageous to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the launched game ball reaches the V winning door 600 varies greatly depending on whether it flows down the delay path or the normal path. Therefore, during the period when the V winning door 600 is open, in order to surely enter the game ball into the V entrance 600a (that is, even if the game ball flows down the delay path) It is necessary to fire a game ball before the V winning door 600 is opened. Thereby, the game which launches a game ball by one shot can be suppressed, and the operation of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the time for the game ball to flow down the crune member 1700 (delay path) is longer than the time from when the small hit type is displayed until the V winning door 600 is opened. doing. Therefore, even if the launch of a new game ball is stopped after the small hit type is displayed, the game ball flowing down through the interior of the crew member 1700 flows down to the V winning door 600. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent an illegal game that stops the launch of the game ball after the player determines the small hit type, and prevents the V winning due to the small hit game unfavorable to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the small variation time is configured to be selected so that the variation time is shorter (or the same) than the time (6 seconds) during which the game ball passes through the clown member 1700 (delay path). Yes. As a result, a game ball that has entered the pitching part 1710a of the cruising member 1700 before (or during the variation effect) the small winning variation effect ends the small hit variation effect and the V winning door 600 is opened. It becomes easy to discharge from the ball outlet 1710b at the timing. This makes it difficult for the player to control the entry of the game ball into the V entrance 600a and suppresses illegal games, and makes it easier for the game ball to enter the V entrance 600a in a normal game. , Can improve the interest of the player.

<A4th embodiment>
Next, an A4 embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 to 319. In the present A4 embodiment, with respect to the A1 embodiment, a distribution device 720 that distributes game balls is arranged in the right channel of the variable display unit 80 so that the balls flowing down the right channel are distributed alternately. After a special symbol that is determined to be a small hit or big hit is stopped and displayed in one of the passages that are distributed, a gate that starts the small hit or big hit game is placed, and the ball is placed in the right channel It is different in that the ball can be entered into the V winning device 620 at the start of the small hit or the big win by continuing to fire. Since other configurations are the same, other configurations are omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 302 and FIG. 303, the structure of the game board 13 in A4th embodiment is demonstrated. In the present A4 embodiment, a sorting device 720 is disposed in the right region of the variable display unit 80 at a position upstream of the V winning door 600. In the sorting device 720, the entrance 720c into which a sphere flowing down the right channel can enter is formed with a width that allows one game ball to pass therethrough, and the sphere that has passed through the entrance 720c When it flows down, it is configured to distribute the spheres that rotate left and right alternately and flow down alternately into the left channel 720d and the right channel 720e. A start gate 720a composed of a photosensor capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is disposed at the lower end of the right channel 720e. When the ball passes through the start gate 720a, the start of the small hit game or the big hit game is set. As described above, in the second embodiment, even when the change of the special symbol determined to be a small hit or big win stops, the ball does not move to the small hit game or the big hit game, and the ball moves the start gate 720a. Execution of the small hit game or the big hit game is on standby until it passes.

  The distribution rotating member 720b receives the entered game ball in the left accommodation portion or the right accommodation portion arranged on the left and right. When a game ball is received in the left accommodating portion, the sorting rotation member 720b rotates counterclockwise by the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the left channel 720d. Here, each of the distribution rotating members 900 is configured to be able to rotate about 90 degrees around the left and right, and a magnet is provided on a boundary wall between the left storage portion and the right storage portion.

  In the base body provided on the back side of the sorting device 720, the magnet of the sorting rotating member 720b is arranged at a position on the center line of the passage port. The magnet of the sorting rotating member 720b and the base side magnet are configured to have repulsive polarities. Specifically, the base-side magnet is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet is disposed and fixed so that the tip end portion faces the sorting rotation member 720b side.

  The magnet is also composed of a rod-shaped magnet like the base-side magnet, and is fixed to the sorting and rotating member 720b so that the tip portion faces the base-side magnet side. At the position where the distribution rotating member 720b is rotated and the boundary wall between the left accommodating portion and the right accommodating portion is located directly above (on the center line of the interval where the game balls at the passing port can enter about one ball), This is the position at which the side magnet and the magnet of the sorting and rotating member are closest to each other (the tip portions face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so that the polarities are the same (for example, the N pole and the N pole), the rebound is stopped at the position where the boundary wall of the sorting rotating member faces directly above. There is no, and it will be maintained in the position rotated to the left or right.

  Thereby, when the magnet is in a position (upward position) where the magnet is on the center line of the passage opening, the magnet and the base-side magnet are repelled, so that the distribution rotating member 720b is left or right. The left storage part or the right storage part turns to the side that receives the game ball entering the sorting device 720 (the upper side of the gaming machine). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls that have entered the ball from coming into contact with the boundary wall between the left housing portion and the right housing portion and causing a ball clogging.

  Further, the magnet and the base-side magnet are repelled, for example, the left accommodating portion receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left, and after the game ball is guided to the left channel 720d, the distribution rotation is performed. It is possible to prevent the member 720b from rotating to the right (the left housing portion faces upward). As a result, after the game ball is guided to the left channel 720d, the right housing portion is directed upward, and the next game ball that has entered the sorting device 720 is received by the right housing portion. The weight rotating member 720b rotates about 180 degrees to the right to guide the game ball to the right channel 720e. As described above, the distribution rotating member 720b can alternately guide the game balls entering the distribution device 720 to the left channel 720d and the right channel 720e. Therefore, the game balls can be distributed and guided equally to the left channel 720d and the right channel 720e.

  The balls passed through the entrance 720c after being distributed to the right channel 720e by the distribution rotation member 720b are moved to the left channel 720d by the rotation of the distribution rotation member 720b leftward. Sorted. When distributed to the left channel 720d, the channel is guided to a channel capable of entering the V entrance 600a. When the ball passes through the start gate 720a, the small hit or big hit game is started, and the V winning door 600 is changed to the open state, so that the balls distributed to the left channel after that go to the V entrance 600a. And can enter. Here, the V winning door 600 is opened for 3 seconds after 1 second from the start timing of the jackpot game at the small hit or big hit B (the timing at which the ball has passed through the start gate 720a). Here, since the ball is fired at the same interval by 100 shots per minute by the launching device, one shot is fired at an interval of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, when the balls are continuously fired to the right region, the game balls are discharged from the left channel 720d after about 0.6 seconds after passing through the start gate 720a (sorting device). The flow paths are formed so that the time for the spheres of the left flow path 720d and the right flow path 720e of 720 to flow down is the same).

  Since the flow time from the lower end of the left channel 720d to the V entrance 600a is about 0.1 seconds, the ball flows down before the V winning door 600 is opened, The ball discharged from the left flow path 720d (1.2 seconds after being discharged from the left flow path 720d first) can be awarded to the V winning opening 600a because the V winning door 600 is open. Become. Next, it is possible to win the V entrance 600a up to the ball discharged from the left channel 720d.

  In this way, after passing the ball to the start gate 720a, the ball is stopped from firing and the small hit type is confirmed by the first symbol display device 37, and the big hit type with a small number of time reductions is selected. Even if trying to avoid winning the V prize opening 624 in the game, the number of balls that can be won is limited to 2 even if they are fired continuously. It is difficult.

  In this embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the left channel 720d is configured to be able to enter the V entrance 600a. However, the game ball that has passed through the right channel 720e is configured to be able to enter. Alternatively, the game balls that have not entered the sorting device 720 among the game balls that flow down the right channel may be configured to be able to enter.

  Moreover, although the distribution device 720 in the present embodiment is configured to distribute the game balls that have entered the ball alternately, the distribution rotation member 720b may be configured by a windmill or the like and distributed randomly to the left and right. .

<Electrical Configuration in A4th Embodiment>
The present A4 embodiment is different from the A1 embodiment in that the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 307 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the A4 embodiment. The RAM 203 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the present A4 control is different from the A1 embodiment in that a condition device flag 203ac is added. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment A1, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The condition device flag ac is a flag indicating that the start gate 720a has been passed. This is a flag for discriminating whether or not it is after passing through the start gate 720a with reference to when the power is restored when the power is cut off. Set to off based on the end of the jackpot game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 304 to FIG. 306 and FIG. 308 to FIG. 309, an effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when it is determined that a small hit or big hit B in this embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 308 (a) is a diagram showing the content controlled by the main controller 110 when passing through the V winning opening 624 in the small hit game and the timing chart of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is.

  When the special symbol is stopped and displayed, whether or not to win is determined, and when the small hit is determined, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device start displaying the variation of the third symbol (special symbol). Is done. At the beginning of the change, characters “start roulette chance” are displayed as shown in FIG. 304 (a). Three seconds later, as shown in FIG. 304 (b), the third symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper right, and the roulette display is started. In the roulette display, an arrow symbol is displayed on the left side, and a “V” symbol indicating that the winning / not-judgment determination result (big hit, miss, small hit) and the V winning opening 624 is won by the roulette symbol stopped at the arrow position. The “BIG” symbol indicating that the jackpot game has started, and the “skull” symbol indicating that it is out of place, are arranged although the V winning opening 624 has not been won. Thereafter, during the special symbol fluctuation time, the roulette display is displayed at a high speed rotation as shown in FIG. 305 (a). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 305 (b), when the fluctuation period has elapsed and the fluctuation of the third symbol is stopped, the roulette display scroll (rotation display) is displayed in a slow manner, and the right-handed notification symbol is displayed at the upper left. It is displayed and the player is informed that it is a right-handed period.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 306 (a), at the timing when a game ball enters the V winning opening 624, the position of the “V” symbol on the roulette display is stopped and displayed at a position that matches the arrow symbol. In addition, when a game ball does not enter the V winning opening 624, if the result of the determination is wrong at the timing when the V validity period elapses, the “skull” symbol of FIG. 306 (b) is displayed. The display is stopped at a position where the position matches the arrow symbol. Although illustration is omitted, if a game ball does not enter the V winning opening 624 and the result of the determination is a big hit (big hit B), the position of the “BIG” symbol stops at a position where it matches the arrow symbol. The displayed game is informed that the game being executed is a jackpot game.

  By comprising in this way, it is comprised by a series of production | presentation until the period which can enter a V winning opening 624 passes whether it is a big hit or a small win, and the period until V winning It is possible to improve the interest of the game by directing using.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the A4th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 310 to 311. In the A1 embodiment, if the winning / failing determination result is a jackpot after the special symbol change period has elapsed, the jackpot game is started 0.1 seconds later. However, in this embodiment, the game ball is placed on the start gate 720a. It differs in that the jackpot game is started by passing. The description of the same configuration as that of the A1 embodiment is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 310, the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 (S140) in this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 310 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (S140). In the special symbol variation process 2 (S140), the processes from S217 to S220 are deleted and the conditional device determination process (S250) is added to the special symbol variation process (S104: see FIG. 263) in the A1 embodiment. Is different. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 311, the condition device determination process (S250) in the present A4 embodiment will be described. FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing the contents of the conditional device determination process (S250). In the conditional device determination process (S250), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the start gate 720a (S251). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the start gate 720a (S251: Yes), a specific winning opening release scenario is set based on the jackpot type (S252). The jackpot start flag 203j, the jackpot medium flag 203k, and the condition device flag 203ac are set to ON (S254). The hour / middle counter 203g is set to 0 (S255), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S251, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the start gate 720a (S251: No), this process ends.

  As described above, in this embodiment, since the jackpot game is started by passing through the start gate 720a, the jackpot game can be started with the intention of the player.

  In the present embodiment, only the start of the big hit game is configured to pass through the start gate 720a. However, the small hit game may be configured to start by passing through the start gate 720a. . With this configuration, the game ball that has passed through the start gate 720a can be easily awarded to the V entrance 600a, and a specific small hit game type can be avoided so that the game ball does not enter the game ball. It can be difficult to fire.

  In this embodiment, the start gate 720a is provided in the left channel 720e. However, the present embodiment is not limited thereto, and the start gate 720a may be disposed in the right channel 720d. In such a configuration, a period from when the game ball passes through the start gate 720a to when the V winning door 600 is opened can enter the V entrance 600a from the passage of the start gate 720a. You may comprise so that it may become the period which becomes. By configuring in this way, in the small hit game, it is possible to enter the game ball into the V entrance 600a, and it is possible to suppress the game method of avoiding winning of the game ball in a specific small hit type.

<A5th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 312 to 314, the present A5 embodiment and its modifications will be described. In the first A1 embodiment, the control of the rotation distribution member 621 in the V winning device 620 is always constant, but in this embodiment, the control of the rotation distribution member 621 is changed when the big hit is B. It is different in point.

  In FIG. 312 (a), the big hit B in the present A5 embodiment is executed, the game ball enters the V entrance 600a, and the game ball is guided to the rotation distribution member 621 by the movable guide member 622. FIG. At the timing when the movable guide member 622 starts to rise, the rotary sorting member 621 is configured to stop at the center position (position where the game ball is guided to the V winning opening 624).

  FIG. 313 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific jackpot control process 3 (S1118) in the present A5 embodiment. It differs from the specific jackpot control process (S1118: see FIG. 276) in the A1 embodiment in that the processes of S1281 to S1282 are added. Since other processes are the same as those in the first A1 embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  In the process of S1203, after the operation corresponding to the value of the scenario counter is executed, the process of S1281 is executed. In the process of S1281, it is determined whether it is time to turn off the V winning opening solenoid (the solenoid that opens and closes the V winning door 600) (S1281). If it is determined that it is time to turn off the V winning solenoid (S1281: Yes), the data for stopping the V sorting motor at the center position for 3.7 seconds is set in the hit scenario a (S1282). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not time to turn off the V winning opening solenoid, the process proceeds to S1204.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of the big hit B, since the rotation distribution member is configured to stop at the center position in accordance with the V winning timing, the game that was considered to be a small hit game It is possible to produce a fresh taste for the person. Furthermore, since it is always possible to make a winning at the jackpot B to the V winning opening 624, it is possible to make it seem as if the 2R-th has been started by winning the V winning opening 624.

  Next, a modification of the A5th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 312 (b). In the A5th embodiment, the control of the rotation distribution member 621 is changed when the big hit B, but not limited thereto, the control of the rotation distribution member 621 is not changed, and when the big hit B, The confirmed channel 660 newly protrudes, the movable guide member 622 releases the stay 2 solenoid at a midway position, the game ball is dropped on the movable guide member 622, and the confirmed channel 660 is played to the V prize opening 624. The difference is that the sphere is guided. The determined flow path 660 is configured to be projected by a motor, and is configured to guide the game ball to the V prize winning opening 624 with high probability or 100%.

  FIG. 314 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific jackpot control process 4 (S1118) in the modification of the present A5 embodiment. It differs from the specific jackpot control process (S1118: see FIG. 276) in the first A1 embodiment in that the process of S1283 is added. Since other processes are the same as those in the first A1 embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  In the processing of S1207, when the hit scenario B is set, that is, when the movable guide member 622 starts to rise, the fixed flow path is operated by the motor for 2 seconds, protrudes forward, and falls from the movable guide member 622. The game ball is changed to a position where the upper surface can receive the game ball to be played (S1283). Thereafter, the processing of S1209 is executed. Although illustration is omitted, the movable guide member 622 is also set so that the stay 2 solenoid is turned off at an intermediate position.

  Thereby, in the case of big hit B, it is possible to win to the V winning opening 624 via a different guide way than in the case of small hit. Thereby, the winning control to the V winning opening can be switched between the case of the small win and the case of the big hit B, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The term “at the start of the jackpot (bonus game)” (execution time) used when explaining each control example and each embodiment described above wins the jackpot lottery of the special symbol, and the jackpot game is started. The symbol is used as a concept that indicates when the symbol is fixed. Specifically, the special symbol is stopped (determined) with a combination of symbols to indicate that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. It is a concept that includes timing, timing at which a jackpot opening period is started, timing at which jackpot round games are started, and the like.

  The term “at the end of jackpot (big hit game)” used in explaining each control example and each embodiment described above is used as a concept indicating the timing at which the jackpot game ends. Specifically, The concept includes the timing at which the last jackpot round ends, the timing at which the jackpot ending period ends, the timing at which the first special symbol drawing after the jackpot ends, and the like.

  For each wording used in such a concept, when a specific timing is not specified in each control example and each embodiment described above, any one of the above timings is appropriately adopted. May be.

  About the structure of the pachinko machine 10 demonstrated in each control example mentioned above and each embodiment, you may implement combining suitably, for example, the fall lottery means which performs the fall lottery used in the 2nd control example mentioned above is provided. You may provide the small hit | lottery means which performs the small hit lottery used in the 3rd control example mentioned above with respect to the pachinko machine 10 which has.

  Further, the falling lottery means used in the second control example described above executes a lottery for shifting (falling) the jackpot probability of the special symbol from the high probability state to the low probability state. For example, the probability of hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) is shifted (falls) from a high probability state to a low probability state. It may be configured to execute a lottery for the purpose or a lottery for shifting (falling) the short-time state to the normal state.

  In each control example described above, a frame button 22 that can be operated by the player is used as an operation unit that can be operated by the player. However, a configuration different from the frame button 22 may be provided as the operation unit. Shooting results of lever-shaped operation means that the player can operate in the front-rear direction, touch-sensor-type operation means that detects that the player has touched (or approached), and imaging means that captures the movement of the player A camera-type operation means or the like may be provided. Further, the number of operation means is not limited to one, and a plurality of operation means may be provided.

  In each control example described above, a configuration is used in which various effects to be executed are executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. However, a plurality of display means of the pachinko machine 10 are provided, and a plurality of display means In the pachinko machine 10 that can execute at least two or more effects among the various effects described in the above-described control examples. The player may select an effect that is actually executed from two or more effects that can be executed.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment and each control example. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, a combination of probabilities related to the jackpot lottery (commonly referred to as “setting”) may be provided in a plurality of stages, and may be implemented as a pachinko machine configured to be able to change the setting at the game store side. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused may be used.

  In addition, as a pachinko machine having a multi-stage setting, any combination of jackpot probabilities (a combination of a jackpot probability in a low probability state and a jackpot probability in a probabilistic state) is one of a plurality of stages (for example, six stages). A typical example is one that can be set as follows, but is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, it is implemented as a pachinko machine that can vary the ratio of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined when the jackpot hits, according to the setting May be. That is, according to the setting, the rate at which the type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player is varied, or the rate at which the type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio at which a big jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined is variable depending on the setting, or a big jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, two rounds) is determined. It is good also as a structure which varies the advantageous degree for every setting by changing the ratio to change according to a setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot for which a large number of time reductions (for example, 100 times) is determined after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot for which a small number of time reductions (for example, 0) is granted. The ratio at which is determined may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the jackpot is over, the ratio at which the jackpot is determined to be shifted to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probable change state) (or easy to shift) is varied according to the setting, or the disadvantageous gaming state (for example, the normal state) ) May be varied in accordance with the setting. Alternatively, a jackpot type may be provided in which the ratio determined only with a specific setting is significantly high (almost not determined with other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting can be set in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set as the setting 6. And in setting 6, when the jackpot is a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2%, while in other settings, a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01% It is good also as a structure. By configuring in this way, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility that it is the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so let the player play the game paying attention to the number of jackpot rounds be able to. Instead of this, or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type to which 66 time reductions are given after the jackpot ends may be configured to be higher than other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to play a game by paying attention to the number of times the time-short state is completed. Alternatively, or in addition, for example, a jackpot type in which a jackpot (or an accessory in the jackpot) is activated with an operation pattern different from that of other jackpot types during execution of the jackpot game. The jackpot type may be configured to be easily determined with a specific setting (the ratio to be determined increases). Also, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is varied according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the probability variation state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes jackpot probability high so that it is. This configuration is of a type that tends to increase the number of possessed balls as the number of lottery special symbols increases, especially in the probability variation state (the number of prize balls to be paid out tends to be larger than the number of game balls fired). It is effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the probability variation state wins the next big win, and is applied to a gaming machine of a type that has a high probability of small winning in the probability variation state, so that the advantage of high setting The sex can be increased. That is, if the probability of winning a big hit in the probability variation state is low, the number of lotteries until the next big win is likely to increase. Therefore, in the probable state, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big hit.

  In addition, the slot machine is a known example in which a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and the symbol is stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that the structure of each said embodiment and each control example may be implemented combining all or one part.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<About the concept of the invention taking the projection plate member 620 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
A light transmissive member formed in a plate shape from a light transmissive material and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiating means for irradiating light to a side end surface of the light transmissive member, are incident from the side end surface of the light transmissive member. In the gaming machine in which the reflected light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member, the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member out of the light emitted from the light irradiating means is increased. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it includes an emission increasing means that is disposed outside the display area.

  Here, a light transmissive member formed in a plate shape from a light transmissive material and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiation means for irradiating light to a side end surface of the light transmissive member, from the side end surface of the light transmissive member. A gaming machine in which incident light is reflected by a reflecting portion and emitted from the front of a light transmitting member is known (for example, JP-A-2015-29735). According to this type of gaming machine, for example, by arranging the light transmitting member on the front side of the liquid crystal display device in the game area, the player can display the liquid crystal display device through the light transmitting member in a normal state. On the other hand, when a predetermined gaming state is formed, the light irradiated from the light irradiation means is incident from the side end surface of the light transmission member, and the light traveling inside the light transmission member is reflected by the reflection portion. Then, the light is transmitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the reflecting portion includes a plurality of groups each composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces, and each group has a pattern or a pattern shape. Therefore, the player can recognize the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member as a pattern or a pattern. That is, along with the display of the liquid crystal display device, a pattern or a pattern can be raised (displayed) on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device.

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is weak. For this reason, it becomes difficult to clearly display (display) a pattern or a pattern. In this case, if the output of the light irradiating means is increased, not only the cost and power consumption increase, but also the amount of heat generated increases, which causes a problem that heat is exerted on other members and devices.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the game machine A1 includes the emission increasing means for increasing the ratio of the light emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member in the light emitted from the light irradiating means. The light emitted from the front surface of the transmissive member can be increased. As a result, it is possible to clearly display (display) a pattern or a pattern. In addition, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area, it can be hardly seen by the player, and the appearance can be prevented from deteriorating accordingly.

  In addition, the formation position of the reflection part of the light transmissive member may be, for example, the back surface of the light transmissive member, or may be inside the light transmissive member.

  In the gaming machine A1, the emission increasing means includes an outer edge member disposed along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the rear surface of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine A2, since the emission increasing means includes the outer edge member disposed along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the rear surface of the light transmitting member, the light increasing means irradiates the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Not only the light that reaches directly, but also the light that is irradiated from the light irradiation means and reflected by the outer edge member can be made incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Condensation efficiency can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light reaching the reflection part of the light transmission member among the light irradiated from the light irradiation means, so that the light reflected from the reflection part and emitted from the front of the light transmission member is strengthened. , Patterns and designs can be clearly displayed (displayed). In addition, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed.

  Further, in this way, when the emission increasing means includes the outer edge member disposed along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the rear surface of the light transmitting member, when other devices in the game area emit light. Can prevent the light from the other device from being blocked by the outer edge member and entering from the side end face of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiation means is turned off (when light is not incident on the light transmitting member and no pattern or design is displayed on the front surface of the light transmitting member), light from another device enters the light transmitting member. It can suppress that a pattern and a pattern are displayed on the front of a light transmissive member.

  In the gaming machine A2, the outer edge member is disposed on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, the gaming machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the outer edge members are arranged on the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, respectively, so that the light transmitting member of the light irradiated from the light irradiating means. Light that is not directly incident on the side end face but is off the front side of the light transmitting member and light that is off the back side is reflected by the front outer edge member and the rear outer edge member, respectively, and is incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member. be able to. Therefore, the condensing efficiency of the light incident on the side end face of the light transmitting member can be further increased accordingly.

  Further, by providing the outer edge member on each of the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member in this way, even when light emitted from other devices in the game area arrives from either the front or back side of the light transmitting member. Since it can be blocked by each of the front outer edge member and the rear outer edge member, it can be prevented from entering from the side end face of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiation means is turned off (when light is not incident on the light transmitting member and no pattern or design is displayed on the front surface of the light transmitting member), light from another device enters the light transmitting member. Thus, it is possible to more reliably suppress the display of a pattern or a pattern on the front surface of the light transmitting member.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the outer edge member is arranged to project outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the outer edge member is arranged so as to protrude outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, so that the light irradiated from the light irradiation means Further, it is possible to easily reflect the reflected light at the projecting portion of the outer edge member (surface connected to the side end surface of the light transmitting member) and to enter the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the condensing efficiency of the light incident on the side end face of the light transmitting member can be further increased accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the outer edge member is formed of a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine A5, since the outer edge member is formed of a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member in the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the outer edge member is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Light can be easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily made to reach the reflecting portion, so the light reflected from the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the pattern and design are clear. It can be raised (displayed).

  That is, for example, when the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are formed of the same refractive index material, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is not easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. It is easy to be transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) at the outer surface (boundary with air) of the outer edge portion and then returns to the light transmitting member, but the light returned from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member. Includes not only those that travel in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member but also those that travel in the direction toward the side end face of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light that reaches the reflecting portion is reduced. On the other hand, like the gaming machine A4, the outer edge member is formed of a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmission member, so that the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmission member can be converted into the light transmission member and the outer edge member. Can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected), and thus light reaching the reflecting portion can be secured.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the outer edge member is disposed in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the outer edge member is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member in the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A5. Light incident from the side end face of the light transmissive member can be easily reflected on the front surface or the back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmissive member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily made to reach the reflecting portion, so the light reflected from the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the pattern and design are clear. It can be raised (displayed).

  That is, for example, when the refractive index of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are the same or the difference in refractive index is relatively small, if the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are in close contact, the side end surface of the light transmitting member The incident light is not easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member, and is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) at the outer surface (boundary with air) of the outer edge portion and then returns to the light transmitting member, but the light returned from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member. Includes not only those that travel in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member but also those that travel in the direction toward the side end face of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light that reaches the reflecting portion is reduced. On the other hand, like the gaming machine A5, the outer edge member is disposed in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, so that the light is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) on the front surface or the back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member, so that the light reaching the reflecting portion can be secured.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the light transmission member is rotatably supported and includes a rotation mechanism that applies a rotational driving force to the light transmission member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. A curved rack gear is engraved along the circumferential direction of the annular outer peripheral surface or inner peripheral surface, and the rotating mechanism rotates and drives the pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member. A gaming machine A7 comprising a driving means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape and along the circumferential direction of the annular outer peripheral surface or inner peripheral surface. The curved rack gear is engraved, and the rotation mechanism includes a pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member and a driving means for rotationally driving the pinion gear. The rotation of the pinion gear can be transmitted to the outer edge member via the curved rack gear, whereby the light transmitting member can be rotated together with the outer edge member. Therefore, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member in a displaced (rotated) state.

  In this case, the outer edge member has both the role of condensing the light emitted from the light irradiating means on the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the light transmitting member and rotating it. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved along with the simplification of the structure.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A7, the light transmission member is rotatably supported and includes a rotation mechanism that applies a rotational driving force to the light transmission member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that a guide groove is recessed along the circumferential direction of the annular outer peripheral surface, and the rotating mechanism includes a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide groove.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A7, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and the guide groove is formed along the circumferential direction of the outer circumferential surface of the annular shape. Since the concave rotation mechanism includes a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide grooves, the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member are exposed by the action of the guide grooves and the support rings, that is, the light The light transmissive member can be rotatably supported in a state where light can be incident from the side end face of the transmissive member. Therefore, by rotating the light transmissive member, the player can visually recognize the pattern or symbol displayed by the light emitted from the front surface of the light transmissive member in a displaced (rotated) state.

  In this case, since the light irradiated from the light irradiating means can be concentrated on the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of rotatably supporting the light transmitting member together with the support wheel can be used as the outer edge member. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved by simplifying the structure.

  The support wheel may be rotatably supported, or may be fixed so as not to rotate. In this case, as a form in which the support wheel is guided along the guide groove, a form in which the support wheel rotatably supported rolls along the guide groove or rolls while sliding, or cannot rotate. A configuration in which the fixed support wheel slides along the guide groove is exemplified.

  In addition, in the gaming machine A8 that is subordinate to the gaming machine A7, the outer edge member on which the curved rack gear is engraved is provided on one of the front and rear surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the outer edge member on which the guide groove is provided is provided on the light transmitting member. It is preferable to arrange each on the other of the front or the back. That is, by arranging the outer edge members on the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, the light irradiated from the light irradiating means is not directly incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the front surface of the light transmitting member. This is because each of the light deviating to the side and the light deviating to the back side can be reflected by the front outer edge member and the rear outer edge member, respectively, and incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member. In addition, as described above, the outer edge member is disposed on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmission member, so that light emitted from other devices in the game area reaches from either the front surface or the back surface of the light transmission member. Even in this case, the outer edge member on the front surface and the outer edge member on the rear surface can block each other, and the incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A8, the outer edge member is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral side faces the front surface or the rear surface of the light transmitting member with a predetermined interval, and the gap between the outer edge member and the light transmitting member is the guide. A gaming machine A9 characterized by being a groove.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A8, the outer edge member is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral side faces the front or back surface of the light transmitting member with a predetermined interval therebetween, and the outer edge member and the light transmitting member Since the space between the two is a guide groove, it is possible to reduce the size of the structure including the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. That is, it is not necessary to form the outer edge member in a U-shaped cross section by bearing one inner wall of the guide groove on the front or back surface of the light transmitting member, and the thickness dimension of the outer edge member can be reduced. Therefore, the size of the structure described above can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, since the outer edge member is disposed in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is transmitted to the front surface of the light transmitting member. Or it can be easily reflected on the back (boundary with air). As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily made to reach the reflecting portion, so the light reflected from the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the pattern and design are clear. It can be raised (displayed).

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A9, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is formed orthogonal to the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiation means has an irradiation direction of light from the irradiation surface. A gaming machine A10, wherein the irradiation surface is disposed so as to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A9, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is formed orthogonal to the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiation means Since the irradiation surface is arranged so that the irradiation direction of the light from the surface is orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmission member and facing the side end surface of the light transmission member, the side end surface of the light transmission member irradiated from the light irradiation means Can be easily reflected on the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily made to reach the reflecting portion, so the light reflected from the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the pattern and design are clear. It can be raised (displayed).

<About the concept of the invention taking the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising: a target member to be irradiated with light; and a plurality of light emitting means distributed around the target member in a posture in which each irradiation surface faces the target member. And at least two or more of the light emitting means are mounted, and one or a plurality of substrate members formed to be elastically deformable, and a base member that holds the substrate members in a predetermined posture elastically deformed. Characteristic gaming machine B1.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine including a target member to be irradiated with light, and a plurality of light emitting units each arranged in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed to the target member (for example, JP-A-2015 2015). -29735). According to this gaming machine, by irradiating light from the light emitting means and making it incident from the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the incident light travels inside the light transmitting member and is reflected by the reflecting portion. The light can be emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member. In this case, the applicant of the present invention forms the target member in a disk shape from the light-transmitting material and forms the reflection portion, while the plurality of light emitting means are irradiated on the outer peripheral surface of the disk shape (target member). The structure which arrange | positions so that the circumference | surroundings of a target member may be surrounded in the attitude | position which faced, and inject | emitted the light irradiated from each light emission means from the outer peripheral surface of a target member was devised (it is unknown at the time of this-application application).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it has been newly found that there is a problem in that it takes a lot of time and labor to arrange a plurality of light emitting means around the target member. In particular, since the plurality of light emitting means need to be arranged in a posture in which each irradiation surface faces the outer peripheral surface of the target member (that is, each has a different orientation), the labor of the arrangement work also increases from this point. .

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, at least two or more light emitting means are mounted and one or a plurality of board members formed elastically deformable, and the board members are held in a predetermined posture elastically deformed. Therefore, by disposing one substrate member on the base member, the disposition work of at least two or more light emitting means can be completed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the labor for arranging the light emitting means.

  Further, when the substrate member is disposed on the base member, the substrate member is held in a predetermined posture that is elastically deformed, so that the direction of the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be defined. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose the plurality of light emitting means in a posture in which their irradiation surfaces are individually directed toward the outer peripheral surface of the target member, it is possible to suppress the labor of disposing the light emitting means from this point.

  In the gaming machine B1, a gaming machine B2 comprising a block body that is formed to be higher in rigidity than the board member and disposed on the board member, and the block body is held by the base member.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the block body is formed with higher rigidity than the board member and disposed on the board member, and the block body is held by the base member. Further, it is possible to easily regulate the posture of the substrate member by suppressing the warpage and the bending of the substrate member. As a result, the posture of the light emitting means can be suppressed from being affected by the warping or bending of the substrate member, and the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction and the orientation can be easily maintained.

  In the gaming machine B2, the light emitting means is disposed in a region of the board member where the block body is disposed.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the light emitting means is disposed in the region of the board member where the block body is disposed. And the influence of bending can be more reliably suppressed. Therefore, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be more easily maintained.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, a plurality of the block bodies are arranged on the board member at a predetermined interval, and the base member is positioned in a posture in which the board members positioned between the block bodies are elastically deformed. A gaming machine B4 that is held by the body.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2 or B3, a plurality of block bodies are arranged on the board member at a predetermined interval, and the board members located between the block bodies are elastic. Since the base body is held in a deformed (bent) posture, the posture of the light emitting means (the direction of the irradiation surface) is stabilized as compared with the case where the substrate member in the elastically deformed posture is directly held by the base member. be able to.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is disposed in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is disposed on the opposite side of the target member. A gaming machine B5, which is arranged on the back surface.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is disposed in front of the board member facing the target member, and the block body is on the side opposite to the target member. Therefore, the light emitting means can be brought closer to the target member while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture of the substrate member by the block body.

  In the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by screws from the front of the board member, and the head of the screws protrudes from the front of the board member.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by screws from the front of the board member, and the heads of the screws protrude from the front of the board member. Can be protected by screw head. That is, for example, when the movable member is displaced to the front surface of the substrate member, it is possible to prevent the screw head from coming into contact with the member and the light emitting means from being damaged.

  In the gaming machine B6, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is disposed between the heads of the two screws.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is disposed between the heads of the two screws. The light emitting means can be easily protected by the head of the screw.

  The two screws are preferably arranged along the displacement direction of the movable member. This is because by arranging the light emitting means between the screw heads arranged in this manner, the movable member can be easily brought into contact with the screw head, and the light emitting means can be easily protected.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B7, a protrusion is provided on one of the base body or the block body, and a fitting hole for receiving the protrusion is fitted into the other of the base body or the block body. A gaming machine B8, characterized in that it is recessed.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, a protrusion is provided on one of the base body and the block body, and the fitting is received and fitted to the protrusion. Since the hole is recessed in the other of the base body or the block body, the block body can be disposed on the base body by fitting the protrusion into the fitting hole, and the labor of the disposing operation can be suppressed. . In particular, when a plurality of block bodies are arranged on a substrate member and are arranged in a posture in which the block bodies are elastically deformed (bent), one block body is positioned (temporarily fixed) by fitting. ), The substrate member can be elastically deformed (bent), and the work can be performed in such a manner that the other block body is fitted, so that the workability of the arrangement work can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the block body includes a recess on a surface disposed on the substrate member, and an electronic component disposed on the substrate member is accommodated in the recess of the block body. A gaming machine B9, which is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in any of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the block body is provided with a concave portion on the surface disposed on the substrate member, and is disposed on the substrate member in the concave portion of the block body. Since the electronic component is accommodated, the electronic component can be covered and protected by the block body. Therefore, for example, it is possible to avoid the movable member coming into contact with the electronic component and being damaged.

<Concept of Invention Taking Vertical Displacement Unit 800 as an Example>
A game comprising a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. The apparatus includes an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member moves from the first position to the second position by the action of gravity. In a state where it is disposed on the base member in a form displaced in the direction, and the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, A gaming machine C1 in which gravity acting on the displacement member and an elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced.

  Here, a base member, a displacement member that is disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable between the first position and the second position, and a driving means that applies a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. There is known a gaming machine that provides an effect by displacement of a displacement member (for example, JP 2011-239870 A). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is disposed at a retracted position (for example, one of the first position and the second position) that is not visible to the player or is located on the outer edge side of the game area, while the predetermined game When the state is formed, the displacement member is displaced toward the overhang position (the other of the first position and the second position) projecting into the game area, and the operation of the displacement member displaced toward the overhang position is played. An effect to make the person visually recognize is performed. However, in the gaming machine described above, the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the drive means, and the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed, so it is difficult to cause the displacement member to perform an interesting displacement. There was a problem that there was.

  In contrast, the gaming machine C1 includes an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member is moved from the first position by the action of gravity. In a state where it is disposed on the base member in a form that is displaced in the direction toward the second position and the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, Since the gravity acting on the displacement member balances with the elastic recovery force of the elastic member, reciprocal displacement (approximately simple vibration) is caused by the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member around this balance position (predetermined position). ) Can be performed by the displacement member. In other words, the displacement of the displacement member in the direction of gravity can be an orthogonal projection motion of a constant velocity circular motion, and the displacement speed can be changed, so that the displacement member can be subjected to an interesting displacement.

  On the other hand, if a driving force is applied from the driving means to the displacement member, the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position in a manner different from the above-described displacement (orthographic projection motion of constant velocity circular motion). The variation of displacement can be increased accordingly. That is, it is possible to increase the variation of displacement only by switching whether or not to apply the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member, and it is not necessary to complicate the structure and control. Improvement.

  In the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is formed such that one end side is rotatably supported by the base member and the other end side is moved up and down between the first position and the second position. Game machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, one end side is rotatably supported by the base member, and the other end side is moved up and down between the first position and the second position. This is necessary when releasing the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member and causing the displacement member to perform reciprocal displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member. The displacement of the other end of the displacement member can be a combination of not only a linear motion in the vertical direction but also a rotational motion centered on one end side. As a result, it is possible to cause the displacement member to perform an interesting displacement.

  The gaming machine C2 includes transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the transmission means is rotatably disposed on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means. And a connecting member having one end rotatably connected to a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member and the other end rotatably connected to the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the transmission means is arranged to be rotatable on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and is eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member. And a connecting member whose one end is connected to the displaced member and the other end is connected to the displacing member, so that the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacing member is released, the action of gravity and the elastic recovery of the elastic member When reciprocal displacement (approximately simple vibration) by force is performed on the displacement member, the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member. Since the attitude of the connecting member is changed, the magnitude of the force component in the direction in which the rotating member is rotated out of the force in the push-pull direction can be changed. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed, and as a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocation displacement of the displacement member can be changed, Such a displacement member can have an interesting displacement.

  In the gaming machine C3, in the predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotation center of the rotating member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member are connected. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that a direction connecting the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member is substantially orthogonal.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, at a predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotation center of the rotating member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member The direction connecting the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member is substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting the connecting member and the connecting member and the displacement member. The magnitude of the force component can be maximized at the balance position (predetermined position), and the force component can be reduced when going from the balance position in either direction of push-pull. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced, the resistance received by the displacement member from the transmission means can be changed substantially symmetrically with respect to the balance position, so that the reciprocation of the displacement member can be easily continued.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating member or the connecting member includes a projecting portion projecting toward the other, and the predetermined position in the movable range between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in the central range including the protruding portion, the projecting portion is not opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the first position or the second position is more than the central range. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that when the displacement member is displaced in an outer range close to, the projecting portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to come into contact therewith.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating member or the connecting member includes a projecting portion that projects toward the other, and is between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced within the central range including the predetermined position of the movable range, the projecting portion is not opposed to the other of the rotating member or the coupling member, and the first position or When the displacement member is displaced in the outer range close to the second position, the projecting portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, so that the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released. When the displacement member is caused to reciprocate around the balance position (predetermined position), the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member is smoothed by avoiding the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the protruding portion in the central range. While the driving force of the driving means can be When displacing the displacement member more, the protruding portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be able to come into contact with the other in the outer range, and rattling between the rotating member and the connecting member can be suppressed. .

  In the gaming machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central range, and the central range is set to a range including the predetermined position and the second position. A gaming machine C6 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central range, and the central range includes a predetermined position and a second position. Therefore, in the state where the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the posture of the displacement member can be changed by suppressing the rattling between the rotating member and the connecting member using the protruding portion. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position by the driving force of the driving means, it is possible to avoid the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion, so that it acts on the displacement member. The displacement member can be smoothly displaced while using gravity.

  For example, when the first position is a retracted position where the displacement member is retracted to the outer edge side of the game area, and the second position is an extended position where the displacement member is projected toward the center side of the game area. In the first position (retracted position), it is possible to suppress the rattling of the displacement member to improve the appearance and durability, and to inhibit the effects of other members from being disturbed. Can be quickly projected (displaced) to the second position when the first position is displaced from the first position to the second position (projected position), and the effect of the projecting operation can be enhanced. .

  In the gaming machine C6, in the second position, the rotation center of the rotation member, the connection position of the rotation member and the connection member, and the connection position of the connection member and the displacement member are positioned substantially in a straight line. A gaming machine C7.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, in the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially straight. Since the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, the pushing and pulling direction becomes the direction toward the rotation center of the rotating member, and the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member is A state that does not occur (ie, dead center) can be formed. Therefore, when the displacement member is displaced toward the second position, it is possible to avoid the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion, and to smoothly (rapidly) displace the displacement member, while the second After being arranged at the position, the above-described dead point can suppress the rattling of the displacement member, thereby improving the appearance and improving the durability.

  In any one of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the connecting member includes a contact portion formed so as to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion is connected to the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member and the rotation. It is on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting member, and is disposed on the opposite side of the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member across the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. Game machine C8.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the connecting member includes a contact portion formed so as to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion includes the displacement member and the base. It is on a substantially straight line connecting the connection position of the member and the connection position of the rotation member and the connection member, and is disposed on the opposite side of the connection position of the displacement member and the base member across the connection position of the rotation member and the connection member. When the displacement member shakes against the base member, the rotating member and the connecting portion of the connecting member (the rotating member and one end of the connecting member can rotate by the contact portion of the connecting member coming into contact with the base member. It is possible to easily suppress the inclination of the rotation axis with respect to the shaft support hole of the portion connected to the shaft. As a result, the driving force of the driving means can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member via the transmitting means.

<Concept of Invention with Displacement Unit 400 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a base member, a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, and a drive unit that applies a drive force to the displacement member, the drive unit includes a first drive unit, a first drive unit, And a case where the displacement member is displaced by a driving force applied from the first driving unit, and a case where the displacement member is displaced by a driving force applied from the second driving unit. In the gaming machine D1, the displacement member is displaced in a different manner.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine that includes a base member, a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, and a driving unit that applies a driving force to the displacement member, and performs an effect by displacement of the displacement member. (For example, JP 2011-239870 A). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is disposed at a retracted position that is not visible to the player or on the outer edge side of the game area, and when a predetermined game state is formed, the tension member that protrudes to the game area is formed. An effect is produced in which the displacement member is displaced toward the extended position and the player visually recognizes the movement of the displaced member that is displaced toward the extended position.

  However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the effect of the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient. Specifically, in the conventional gaming machine, the displacement mode of the displacement member (the trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to a single pattern, so that the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member is one pattern As a result, it was difficult to produce a player's intention. Even if the driving force of the driving means is varied to provide a change, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases and decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) remains constant, so that the player's intention can be expressed. It was difficult to do.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the driving means includes the first driving means and the second driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means, Since the displacement member is displaced in a different manner depending on the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the two drive means, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member. That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member (the trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one pattern, the production is not one pattern, and at least two displacement members are used. Since it can be displaced in the same manner of displacement, it is possible to produce an effect that makes a player's intention by switching the displacement manner.

  In the gaming machine D1, the first member is slidably disposed on the base member and driven by the first driving means, and the second driving means is slidably disposed on the base member. And a second member driven by the first and second parts of the displacement member, wherein the first member and the second member are at least rotatably coupled to the first member and the second member, respectively. .

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the base member is slidably disposed and the first member driven by the first driving means, and the base member is slidably disposed. And a second member driven by the second driving means, and the first part and the second part of the displacement member are connected to the first member and the second member, respectively, at least rotatably. When the first member is slid and displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side can be formed, while the second driving force of the second driving means causes the second member to rotate. When the member is slidably displaced, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side can be formed. In other words, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two different displacement modes, it is possible to produce an effect that gives a player's intention by switching the displacement modes.

  In particular, according to the gaming machine D2, the two displacement modes are not formed by making the rotation center the same and making the rotation direction different, but forming the rotation directions different and the rotation centers different. Therefore, the change of the displacement mode of the displacement member can be increased, and it is possible to easily perform an effect that makes the player's intention.

  In the gaming machine D2, the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a connecting pin protruding from one of the first portion of the displacement member or the first member is provided. A gaming machine D3 that is rotatably and slidably inserted into a guide groove formed on the other side.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and either the first part of the displacement member or the first member Since the connecting pin protruding from the second guide member is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide groove formed on the other side, the first member is linearly displaced by the driving force of the first driving unit or the driving force of the second driving unit Depending on whether or not the second member is displaced linearly, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated about the second portion side and a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated about the first portion side are formed. it can. In other words, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two different displacement modes, it is possible to produce an effect that gives a player's intention by switching the displacement modes.

  In this case, since the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, it is not necessary to have a complicated structure as in the case of sliding displacement with a curved locus (with a curved locus). In that case, it is necessary to provide not only a mechanism for guiding the first member and the second member in a curved shape, but also a mechanism for continuously applying a driving force to the first member and the second member that are displaced in a curved shape. For example, a rack and pinion mechanism can be used, and the structure can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve durability and operation reliability.

  In the gaming machine D3, the gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the linear displacement direction of the first member and the linear displacement direction of the second member are substantially parallel.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3, the direction of the linear displacement of the first member and the direction of the linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel. In addition to a displacement mode in which only one of the drive means is driven to rotate the entire displacement member, both the first drive means and the second drive means are driven to linearly displace (for example, traverse) the entire displacement member. Embodiments can be formed. In other words, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least three different displacement modes, it is possible to make it easy to produce a player's intention by switching such displacement modes.

  In particular, according to the gaming machine D4, as the displacement mode of the displacement member, the type of displacement (rotation) is the same, but in addition to the direction of rotation and the position of the center of rotation being different, the type of displacement itself is different. (That is, rotation and linear displacement can be formed), the change of the displacement mode of the displacement member can be further increased, and the effect of giving the player's intention can be further facilitated.

  In the gaming machine D4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the displacement speed of the second member are different. A gaming machine D5 characterized by being speeded.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the second Since the displacement speed is different from the displacement speed of the member, the displacement of the displacement member can include rotational motion and linear motion. That is, the displacement member can be not only displaced (linear motion) in parallel with the linear displacement direction of the first member and the second member while maintaining the posture, but can also be linearly moved while rotating the posture. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to produce a player's intention.

  It should be noted that it is impossible to displace the displacement member in a displacement manner combining such rotational motion and linear motion in the conventional configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove with the driving force of one driving means. As in the present invention, it is possible to use two driving means for the first time.

  Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5 includes a second displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, and when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, the displacement While the second displacement member is displaced together with the member, the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. Game machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the gaming machine D6 includes the second displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means. When the displacement member is moved, the second displacement member is displaced together with the displacement member. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second drive means, the second displacement member is maintained in the stopped state. The apparatus (change) of the displacement mode by the first drive unit and the displacement mode by the second drive unit can be increased. Therefore, by switching such a displacement mode, it is possible to make it easier to produce a player's intention.

<Concept of Invention with Projection Unit 5600 as an Example>
In a gaming machine including a target member to be irradiated with light and a light irradiation means for irradiating light toward the target member, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are formed to be displaceable. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that an irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means is changed by the one or both displacements.

  Here, a game that includes a displacement member formed to be displaceable between the first position and the second position, and a drive unit that applies a driving force to the displacement member to displace it, and performs an effect by the displacement of the displacement member. The machine is known (for example, JP, 2011-239870, A). In this gaming machine, light irradiating means (LED) is disposed inside the displacement member, and a translucent portion made of a light transmissive material is provided on the front surface (player side surface) of the displacement member. By irradiating the light part from the back surface with the light irradiating means, the player can visually recognize the form in which a part of the displacement member (the light transmitting part) emits light. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the irradiation mode of the target member is constant by the light irradiation means, there is a problem that the mode of visual recognition by the player is scarce and it is difficult to have interest.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are formed to be displaceable, and the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means is changed by the displacement of one or both, The aspect visually recognized by the player can be changed. As a result, it is easy to give the player interest.

  In addition, as the form in which the light irradiation mode is changed, for example, the form in which the position of the target member irradiated by the light irradiation unit is changed, or the distance from the irradiation surface of the light irradiation unit to the irradiation position of the target member is changed. And the combination of these are exemplified.

  The gaming machine E1, comprising a base member, wherein the light irradiating means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably disposed on the base member.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is disposed displaceably on the base member. The target wiring can be fixed, and the occurrence of disconnection can be suppressed accordingly.

  The gaming machine E2 includes a shielding member that has an opening and is disposed on the base member, and allows a player to visually recognize a part of the target member from the opening of the shielding member. Formed in a plate shape from a transmissive material and provided with a reflection portion, the light irradiated from the light irradiation means and incident from the side end face is reflected by the reflection portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member. A gaming machine E3 characterized by

  Here, the reflecting portion includes a plurality of groups each composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces, and each group forms a pattern or a pattern. Therefore, the player can recognize the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member as a pattern or a pattern.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the gaming machine E3 includes a shielding member that has an opening and is disposed on the base member, and allows the player to visually recognize a part of the target member from the opening of the shielding member. By displacing the target member, the player can visually recognize different portions of the target member from the opening of the shielding member.

  For example, a first position in which a first group of a plurality of groups constituting the reflecting portion is visible through the opening, and a second group that is a group different from the first group is the opening. When the target member is displaceable between the second position that can be visually recognized via the first member, the first member can be disposed through the opening of the shielding member by arranging the target member at the first position. While allowing the player to visually recognize the first pattern or design to be formed, the pattern or design to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member by displacing the target member from the first position to the second position. The second pattern or the pattern formed by the second group can be changed.

  In this case, since the target member is formed of a light transmissive material, when the target member is displaced in order to change a pattern or a pattern visually recognized by the player, light from the light irradiation means is not irradiated. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the target member is displaced.

  In the gaming machine E3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the base member so as to be rotatable about the center of the circular shape or the annular shape. A gaming machine E4.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape when viewed from the front, and the base member can be rotated around the center of the circular shape or the annular shape. Therefore, as compared with the case where the target member is slidable, the target member is disposed while ensuring the number of patterns and symbols to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member. The space required for this can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine E2, the target member is formed from a light-transmitting material in a circular plate shape in front view and includes a reflection portion, and the light irradiated from the light irradiation means and incident from the side end surface is received. The light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the target member, and a plurality of the light irradiating means are dispersedly arranged around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface faces the side end surface of the target member. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the target member is rotatably disposed on the base member with the circular center as a rotation center.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E6, the target member is formed in a circular plate shape from a light-transmitting material and is provided with a reflective portion, and is irradiated from the light irradiation means and from the side end surface. The incident light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member, and a plurality of light irradiation means are distributed around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface faces the side end surface of the target member. Therefore, by rotating the target member while irradiating light from the light irradiation means, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the target member in a rotated state. it can.

  In the gaming machine E5, the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E5, the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed in the circumferential direction at positions that are equidistant from the rotation center of the target member. Regardless of the phase, the light emitted from the front of the target member can be easily made constant. That is, it is possible to stably form a pattern or a pattern displayed by light emitted from the front surface of the target member.

  The gaming machine E1, comprising a base member, wherein the light irradiating means and the target member are displaceably disposed on the base member.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the light irradiating means and the target member are displaceably disposed on the base member. Variations in changes in the irradiation mode can be increased. Therefore, the aspect visually recognized by the player can be changed, and the player can be easily provided with interest.

  The gaming machine E7 includes a driving unit that applies a driving force to the target member to displace the target member, and the light irradiation unit abuts the target member that is displaced by the driving force applied from the driving unit. Thus, the gaming machine E8 is displaced together with the target member.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E7, the gaming machine E8 includes a driving unit that applies a driving force to the target member to displace the target member, and the light irradiation unit is a target that is displaced by the driving force applied from the driving unit. Since the member is abutted and displaced together with the target member, it can also be used as a driving means for displacing the target member, and there is no need to separately provide a driving means for displacing the light irradiation means. it can.

<Feature F group> (Countdown notice can be set freely)
Among the different effect periods, the effect period setting means for setting one effect period, the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect in the specific period set within the one effect period, and the specific effect executing means A notification effect executing means for executing a notification effect for notifying that the specific effect is executed in advance, and a start timing of the notification effect based on predetermined first information, and a second different from the first information A gaming effect setting means for setting an end timing of the notification effect based on the information.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that executes a variation effect for suggesting to a player whether or not a win has been won. A game in which a prior notification effect (countdown effect) for notifying a player in advance of a timing at which a specific effect (for example, a cut-in effect) is executed among the effects executed for a predetermined period is executable. There is a machine. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2013-198568).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to execute a variable effect while increasing the degree of expectation of the player's jackpot by notifying the player in advance of the timing at which a specific effect is executed. However, since it is configured to set a period (that is, a start timing and an end timing) for executing the advance notification effect when it is determined that the advance notification effect is executed, the content of the effect becomes monotonous, There was a problem that the player gets bored early with the production. Further, in the conventional gaming machine having the above-described configuration, while the prior notification effect is being executed, the effect mode of the prior notification effect is varied (for example, the specific effect that is the target of the prior notification effect is varied). ) Cannot be achieved, and there is a problem that the production effect cannot be enhanced.

  According to the gaming machine F1, a start opportunity is set based on the first information by the notification effect setting means as a notification effect execution period for notifying that the specific effect is executed, and based on the second information. The end trigger is set. Thereby, since the period for performing the notification effect is set based on a plurality of different information, the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set, and the effect of effect can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine F1 includes execution information determination means for determining execution information of the specific effect, and the notification effect setting means uses the execution information of the specific effect determined by the execution information determination means as the second information. A gaming machine F2 that is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the execution information for indicating that the specific effect is executed is set as the second information, and the end event of the notification effect is set. The notification effect corresponding to can be set. Therefore, since the notification effect corresponding to the specific effect to be executed can be executed while the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set, there is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine F2, the execution information determining means determines at least the timing at which the specific effect is executed.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F2, the execution timing for indicating that the specific effect is executed is set as the second information, and the end timing of the notification effect is set. The notification effect corresponding to can be set. Therefore, while the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set, it is possible to accurately notify the timing at which the specific effect is executed, so that the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine F2 or F3, as the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing unit, a specific effect setting unit that sets one specific effect among a plurality of the specific effects having different execution timings is provided. A gaming machine F4 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2 or F3, it is possible to easily set a notification effect that matches the timing at which the specific effect is executed for a plurality of specific effects with different execution timings. it can. Therefore, while the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set, it is possible to accurately notify the period during which the specific effect is executed, so that the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machines F1 to F4, the notification effect setting means is different from the timing for setting the start timing of the notification effect based on the first information, and the end timing of the notification effect based on the second information. A gaming machine F5, characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine F5, since the execution period of the notification effect can be set at different timings in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set. It is possible to increase the production effect.

  In the gaming machine F5, the notification effect period setting means sets an end timing of the notification effect based on the second information while the notification effect is being executed by the notification effect execution means. Characteristic gaming machine F6.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F5, after the notification effect is executed, the end timing of the notification effect can be set so that the notification effect is executed. The execution period will be set. Therefore, the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set, and the effect of effect can be enhanced. In addition, at the time when the notification effect is executed, it is not set at which timing the notification effect is targeted for the specific effect, so that the content of the notification effect is predicted in advance by the player. It can be surely prevented.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, an operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation effect execution means that executes an operation effect for operating the operation means, and the operation executed by the operation effect execution means Operation discriminating means for discriminating that the operating means has been operated during the performance, and the notification effect setting means sets the effect mode of the notification effect based on the determination result of the operation determination means A gaming machine F7 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the effect period of the notification effect is set based on the operation content of the operation means during the operation effect, so the participation in the player's effect It has the effect of increasing motivation.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the notification effect setting means sets a first notification effect period and a second notification effect period set after the first notification effect period as a period during which the notification effect is executed. The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that at least the second notification effect period is set based on the second information.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, since the second notification effect period can be set based on the second information in the period in which the notification effect is executed, the notification effect period can be freely set. In the gaming machine that can be set to the above, there is an effect that it is possible to secure a period for executing the effect based on the second information, and it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the gaming machine F8, the notification effect executing means executes a time effect that suggests a period of time until the specific effect is executed during the second notification effect period. Machine F9.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F8, the timing effect can be executed during the second notification effect period, so that it is possible to easily notify the player of the timing at which the specific effect is executed. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine F9, based on the notification effect period determining means for determining the effect period of the notification effect set by the notification effect setting means, and the length of the effect period determined by the notification effect period determining means, A gaming machine F10, comprising: a timed effect period setting means for setting a period during which the timed effect is executed.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F9, the time-periodic effect period setting means executes the time-periodic effect period for a certain period based on the length of the effect period in which the notification effect is executed. As the timing for executing the production over time, the timing for subtracting a certain period from the execution timing of the specific production is determined. Therefore, even when a different production period is set by the production period setting means, the start timing of the specific production is accurately set. There is an effect that can be suggested to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines F8 to F10, the notification effect setting means sets an effect mode of the first effect that is executed during the first notification effect period based on the first information. A gaming machine F11 comprising first effect mode variable means for changing the first effect mode when a predetermined effect variable condition is satisfied during one notification effect period.

  According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines F8 to F10, the effect mode of the first effect executed during the first notification effect period is established while the first effect is being executed. It is varied when possible production variable conditions are satisfied. Thus, after the notification effect is executed, the effect mode of the notification effect can be varied, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine F11, the effect variable condition is established when an end timing of the notification effect is set by the notification effect setting means.

  According to the gaming machine F12, when the end time of the notification effect is set and the effect period of the notification effect is determined, the effect mode of the first effect can be varied. Therefore, the first effect corresponding to the set end opportunity can be executed, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine F1, the operation means operable by the player, the operation effect execution means for executing the operation effect for operating the operation means, and the operation during the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means. Operation discriminating means for discriminating that the means has been operated, and the operation effect executing means executes the operation effect while the notification effect is being executed by the notification effect executing means. The notification effect setting means sets the second information based on the determination result by the operation determination means.

  According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the end timing of the notification effect is set based on the operation content for the operation effect executed during the notification effect. Therefore, the effect period of the notification effect can be varied by the player's operation, and the effect can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine F13 includes a specific period setting unit that sets the specific period based on a determination result by the operation determination unit, and the notification effect setting unit indicates the specific period set by the specific period setting unit. The gaming machine F14 is characterized in that information for the purpose is the second information.

  According to the gaming machine F14, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F13, a specific period in which the specific effect is executed is set based on the operation content for the operation effect executed during the notification effect, and the specified specific period is set. Since the effect period of the notification effect can be varied based on this, there is an effect that the notification effect corresponding to the specific effect to be executed can be executed.

  In the gaming machine F14, the specific period setting unit sets one predetermined period as the specific period from among a plurality of predetermined periods, and the specific effect executing unit is set by the specific period setting unit A gaming machine F15 that executes the specific effect corresponding to the specific period.

  According to the gaming machine F15, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F14, the specific effect corresponding to the specific period set by the specific period setting unit is executed, so that the specific effect that varies depending on the operation content of the operation unit is executed. Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to actively participate in the game.

  In the gaming machine F15, the notification effect setting means sets a first notification effect period and a second notification effect period set after the first notification effect period as a period during which the notification effect is executed. The operation effect executing means executes the operation effect during the first notification effect period, and the length of the second notification effect period corresponds to the specific period set by the specific period setting means. It has production period varying means for varying it. A gaming machine F16 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine F16, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F15, in the notification effect set from the first notification effect period and the second notification effect period, the operation effect is executed during the first notification effect period, The length of the notification effect is varied by varying the length of the second notification effect period based on the operation content of the operation means during the operation effect. Therefore, when varying the length of the notification effect, it is possible to secure a period during which the operation effect is executed, so that it is possible to execute an effect that makes it easy for the player to operate the operation means.

<Characteristic G group> (HP display variation)
The variable effect is executed by the determining means for executing the determination based on the effect information, the variable effect executing means for executing the variable effect for changing the effect value based on the determination result by the determining means, and the effect executing means. The first effect value determining means for determining the first effect value for changing the effect value, and the effect value when the first effect value is determined by the first effect value determining means. And a second effect value determining means for determining a second effect value different from the first effect value that can be varied.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that executes a variation effect for instructing a player whether or not a jackpot has been won. Then, as a variation effect, a game machine that performs an effect (battle effect) in which the player character and the enemy character battle each other, and informs the result of whether or not the winner is won by the value of each physical strength point at the end of the effect. is there. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-9075).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, during the battle performance, the effect of reducing the physical strength point of the own character or enemy character is performed multiple times, and it is specified whether or not the decreasing physical strength point is won by the player. By informing the player in advance of the timing at which this effect is executed, it was possible to execute the variable effect while increasing the player's expectation for the jackpot. Furthermore, by setting in detail the physical strength points that decrease during the battle effect, the effect pattern of the battle effect is increased, and the player is prevented from getting bored with the battle effect. However, the conventional gaming machine is configured to manage the detailed physical strength points displayed on the display screen and set the next physical fitness point based on the managed physical fitness points. There has been a problem that the amount of processing for management becomes enormous. In addition, it is possible to simplify the management of the reduction of physical fitness points by reducing the pattern of decreasing physical fitness points during the battle performance, but in this case, the performance pattern of the battle performance will be reduced and the player will be quicker There was a problem of getting bored.

  According to the gaming machine G1, since the effect value is determined based on the values determined by the plurality of determining means, it is easier to increase the variation of the effect value than when the effect value is determined by one determining means. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine G1, when the specific effect state is set by the effect state setting means capable of setting the specific effect state in which the variable effect is continuously executed and the effect state setting means, the effect value is set. Effect value updating means for continuously variably updating, and first effect value storage means capable of storing the first effect value determined by the first effect value determining means, wherein the effect value updating means is The gaming machine G2 variably updates the effect value based on the first effect value stored in the first effect value storage means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, when the production value determined based on the first production value and the second production value is variably updated, Since only one effect value is stored and the effect value is variably updated based on the first effect value, the actually displayed effect value (the effect value obtained by adding up the first effect value and the second effect value) With respect to the display pattern, it is possible to reduce the pattern of values (first effect values) that are variably updated by the effect value update means, and to reduce the processing load.

  In the gaming machine G2, an effect mode setting unit that sets an effect mode based on a variable amount of the effect value that is variably updated by the effect value update unit, and an effect that displays the effect mode set by the effect mode setting unit. A gaming machine G3, comprising: an aspect display unit.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G2, an effect mode based on the variable amount of the effect value variably updated by the effect update means is displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to easily notify the player of the variable amount of the production value.

  In the gaming machine G3, the first effect value is a part of the effect value, the second effect value is configured with a value different from the first effect value, and the first effect and the The gaming machine G4 is characterized by having an effect value adding means for calculating the effect value by adding the second effect value.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G3, the first effect value that is part of the effect value and the second effect value that is different from the first effect value are added together by the effect value adding means. Since the effect value is determined, there is an effect that the effect value can be more diversified.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, a privilege is given based on a determination unit that executes determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and that a determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result. A gaming machine G5, wherein the first effect value is determined by the first effect value determining means when the determination by the determining means is executed.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G1 to G4, the first effect value is determined when the determination by the determining means is executed, and the effect value is variable. An effect can be executed so that the determination result of the determination means is related. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be watched in the variable state of the production value, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the second effect value determining means determines the second effect value based on the fact that the first effect value determining means has determined the first effect value. A gaming machine G6 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, when the first effect value is determined, the second effect value is determined, so the first effect value and the second effect value are determined. An effect value obtained by adding the values is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the variable amount of the effect value that has been changed by the determination by the determination means, and to provide the enjoyment of prediction.

  In the gaming machine G5 or G6, the first effect value determination means causes the determination means to vary the variable amount of the first effect value based on the determination result.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G5 or G6, it is possible to vary the variable amount of the production value based on the determination result of the determination means. Can be watched, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine G7, the first effect value determining means makes it easy to determine the first effect value so that the variable amount becomes large when the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result. A gaming machine G8 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine G7, the greater the variable amount of the production value, the easier it is to give a privilege. Therefore, the player can watch the variable amount of the production value. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G8, the first range or a second range different from the first range is selected as a selection range in which the second effect value determined by the second effect value determining means can be selected. Selection range storage means, and determined value determination means for determining whether the first effect value determined by the first effect value determination means is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, and the second effect value determination The means determines one of the plurality of selection ranges stored in the selection range storage means based on the determination result of the determination value determination means and determines the second effect value. A gaming machine G9 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G8, the selection range in which the second effect value is selected is different based on whether or not the first effect value is greater than or equal to a predetermined value. Can be made. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily increase variations in the production value.

  In the gaming machine G9, the selection range storage means stores, as the second effect value, a first selection range in which a range in which the first effect value can be increased or decreased is stored, and a range in which the first effect value can be decreased. Is stored, and the second effect value determining means determines that the determination result of the determined value determining means is that the first effect value is less than a predetermined value. The gaming machine G10 is characterized in that the second selection value is selected and the second effect value is set.

  According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G9, when the first effect value is less than the predetermined value, the second effect value that decreases the first effect value is selected. It can suppress that the production value which added the value and the 2nd production value becomes larger than the 1st production value. Thereby, for example, when a lower limit value (for example, 0) is determined as the first effect value, it can be suppressed that a value larger than the lower limit value is determined as the effect value, and the player feels strange. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the performance that is performed.

<Characteristic H group> (Advantageous period suggestion notification of falling lottery machine)
First determination means for executing determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and a bonus game execution for executing a special game when the first determination result by the first determination means is a predetermined first determination result And a high probability state in which the first determination result by the first determination unit is likely to be the predetermined first determination result, and the first determination result by the first determination unit is greater than the high probability state. In a state where the high probability state is set by the probability setting means capable of setting a low probability state that is unlikely to be the first determination result, and when the high probability state is set by the probability setting means, A second determination unit configured to perform determination; and the probability setting unit sets the low probability state when the second determination result by the second determination unit is the predetermined second determination result. Yes, as a gaming state, A gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state in which a predetermined determination condition is easily established, and a second gaming state in which the predetermined determination condition is less likely to be established than the first gaming state, and a gaming state setting thereof And a period effect executing means for executing a period effect for informing the period during which the first gaming state is set. In the gaming machine, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state. The second game state is set when the first condition is satisfied in the state where the first condition is satisfied, and the period effect execution means indicates the first effect for indicating whether or not the first condition is satisfied. And the period effect composed of the second effect for determining the effect mode of the first effect, and the first condition is set by the probability setting means by the low probability game. First to be done And the second requirement that the first determination means executes a predetermined number of determinations in a state where the first gaming state is set, and the first requirement or Corresponding to the formation information of said 2nd requirement, it has the period production mode setting means which sets the production mode of the said period production, The gaming machine H1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the gaming state is set to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a probability variation state in which the probability of winning the winning is high) based on the winning of the winning, and the advantageous There is a gaming machine that suggests to the player whether or not the period during which the gaming state continues is based on the result of the production (for example, battle production). (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2011-143197).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, when winning is performed when the advantageous gaming state continues, the effect result of the winning pattern that the player wins is displayed, and when winning when the advantageous gaming state ends, The result of the defeat pattern where the player loses is displayed, and when the win is not won (when the advantageous game state is continuously set), the battle effect is displayed so that the result of the draw pattern without winning or losing is displayed. Since it is executed, the content of the battle production can be watched by the player, and the production effect can be enhanced. However, when a game is executed without winning a win for a long time in the advantageous game state, it becomes easy to execute a battle effect in which an effect result of the draw pattern is displayed as a result, and the player with respect to the battle effect There was a problem that the degree of expectation declined. Furthermore, the conventional gaming machine described above is configured so that when a specific variation pattern is drawn without winning as a result of the lottery, a battle pattern battle effect is executed. When a specific variation pattern is drawn in succession, there is a problem that the battle effect of the draw pattern is continuously executed and the player's expectation for the battle effect is further reduced.

  According to the gaming machine H1, among the period effects executed in the state where the first gaming state is set, the effect mode of the second effect is set corresponding to the first requirement and the second requirement establishment information. Thus, it is possible to predict whether or not the first requirement and the second requirement are satisfied based on the effect mode of the second effect. Thereby, even if it is a case where a period effect is repeatedly performed, the player can predict a game state based on the effect aspect of the 2nd effect newly performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored early with respect to the period effect.

  In the gaming machine H1, the period effect mode setting means includes first effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the first effect.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H1, the first aspect of the presentation effect for indicating whether or not the first condition is satisfied is the first requirement or Since the second requirement is set based on whether or not the second requirement is satisfied, the result of whether or not the first condition is satisfied and the situation until the first condition is satisfied are predicted according to the production mode of the first effect. Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the effect mode of the first effect and to enhance the effect.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the period effect mode setting means includes second effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the second effect.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the second rendering performance mode for determining the first rendering performance mode is based on whether the first requirement or the second requirement is established. Therefore, the situation until the first condition is satisfied can be predicted by the effect mode of the second effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be gazed at the effect mode of the second effect and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the period production mode setting means sets a different production mode when any of the first requirement or the second requirement is satisfied. Characteristic gaming machine H4.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the effect mode of the period effect can be obtained by satisfying any of the requirements for satisfying the first condition. Variable. Therefore, it is possible to predict the period until the first condition is established according to the effect form of the period effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be watched in the production mode of the period production, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine H4 includes a remaining period determining unit that determines a remaining period until the second requirement is satisfied, and the period effect mode setting unit is configured to determine whether the remaining period determining unit includes the remaining period when the first requirement is satisfied. A gaming machine H5, which sets an effect mode of the period effect corresponding to the determination result.

  According to the gaming machine H5, the effect mode of the period effect is set based on the remaining period until the first condition is satisfied. Thereby, the remaining period until the 1st condition is satisfied can be suggested by the production mode of period production. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with a sense of crisis and to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the period effect executing means switches the period effect being executed from the second effect to the first effect when a predetermined effect switching condition is satisfied, The ease of establishment of the effect switching condition is different between the case where the high probability state is set by the probability setting means and the case where the low probability state is set. Game machine H6.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, there are a case where a high probability state is set by the probability setting means and a case where a low probability state is set. Since the frequency at which one effect is executed can be varied, the currently set probability state can be predicted based on the frequency at which the first effect is executed, and the fun of the game can be improved. There is an effect.

  The gaming machine H7 includes a condition setting unit that makes it easy to establish the effect switching condition for a predetermined period after the first requirement is established.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H6, the first effect can be easily performed for a predetermined period after the low probability state is set by the probability setting means. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to predict the currently set probability state based on the frequency at which the first effect is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the period effect executing means executes the first effect when the first determination result by the first determination means is the predetermined first determination result. A gaming machine H8 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the first effect is also executed when the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is a discrimination result in which the privilege game is executed. Therefore, when the first effect is executed, the effect is watched while paying attention to whether or not the bonus game is won or whether or not the first condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player interested in the performance performed and to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8, there is a frequency measuring means for measuring the number of times of the period effect that is executed while the first gaming state is continuously set by the gaming state setting means. The gaming machine H9 is characterized in that the second performance mode setting means sets the second performance mode based on the number of executions of the period effect measured by the frequency measurement means.

  According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H8, when the period effect is repeatedly executed, the second effect mode is set based on the number of repetitions. When the gaming state is continuously set for a long time, it is possible to prevent the same effect mode from being set repeatedly as the second effect mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In any one of the gaming machines H6 to H9, in the state where the period effect executing means determines an effect period after the first effect is executed and the predetermined effect switching condition is satisfied. And an effect regulating means for restricting execution of the first effect by the period effect executing means when the effect period determined by the effect period determining means is within a predetermined period. Characteristic gaming machine H10.

  According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H6 to H9, even if the effect switching condition is satisfied, it is determined that the effect period after the first effect is executed is within a predetermined period. In the case of being performed, the execution of the first effect is restricted by the effect restricting means. Thereby, since it can suppress that a 1st effect is performed frequently, it can suppress that a player gets bored with respect to performing a 1st effect.

  In the gaming machine H10, the first effect that is executed when the first determination result by the first determination unit is the predetermined first determination result is not restricted by the effect restriction unit. Characteristic gaming machine H11.

  According to the gaming machine H11, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H10, the first effect that is executed when the privilege game is executed is executed regardless of the determination result of the effect period determination means, so There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a reduction in the production effect when executed. In addition, when the first effect is executed again within a predetermined effect period after the previous first effect is executed, the expectation that the privilege game is executed can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be increased. There is an effect.

<Characteristic J group> (The target effect is changed at the notification timing of the expectation increase effect)
Expectation level display control means capable of displaying on the display means a plurality of expectation degree display modes capable of suggesting the degree of expectation for indicating that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the expectation level display control means Display mode variable means for changing the degree of expectation display stepwise, variable information setting means for setting variable information variable by the display mode variable means, and at least one expectation among the plurality of expectation level display modes Variable suggestion effect execution means for executing a variable suggestion effect that suggests that the degree display mode is variable, and the expectation level display control means is an expectation level of at least one of the plurality of expectation level display modes The display mode is displayed on the display means at different timings, and has an execution timing setting means for setting the timing for executing the variable suggestion effect. Game machine J1 to butterflies.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that executes a variation effect for instructing a player whether or not a jackpot has been won. And as a display mode of the character displayed on the display screen in the effect executed for the predetermined period, it has a plurality of display modes corresponding to the jackpot expectation level, and the jackpot expectation level of the current variation effect is displayed. There is a gaming machine that informs the player according to the display mode of the character. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2013-248305).

  In such a conventional game machine, the expectation degree of jackpot can be shown to the player by the display mode of the character displayed during the variation effect, so that the content of the effect of the variation effect to be executed is interested. This can enhance the production effect. Furthermore, in the conventional gaming machine described above, a plurality of types of expectation display modes for displaying a display mode corresponding to the expected degree of jackpot are provided among a plurality of display modes, and the display modes of the respective expectation level display modes are combined. Judgment can be made to suggest the jackpot expectation level to the player, so that the player can predict the jackpot expectation level based on the display modes of a plurality of types of expectation display modes, and the effect to be executed The player can be watched for the contents, and the production effect can be enhanced. Further, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, it is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting the display mode of the expectation level display mode, and to suggest which display mode is displayed as the expected level display mode. There is also a gaming machine that executes an expectation level display mode prior suggestion effect that allows a player to predict in which display mode an expectation level display mode is displayed as a variation effect. There is also a gaming machine that changes the display mode of the expectation level display mode from the display mode once displayed on the display screen.

  However, in a gaming machine having a plurality of types of expectation level display modes, when an expectation level display mode prior suggestion effect corresponding to a specific expectation level display mode is executed, the expectation that is not a target of the expectation level display mode prior suggestion effect There is a problem in that the effect of reducing the presentation mode is implicitly denied and the effect of the presentation is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine J1, the variable suggestion effect suggesting that any one of the expectation level display modes among the plurality of expectation level display modes displayed on the display unit at different timings is changed by the variable suggestion effect execution unit. Executed. Since the execution timing of the variable suggestion effect is set by the execution timing setting means, the execution timing of the variable suggestion effect can be varied. Thereby, even if the same effect mode is used as the variable suggestion effect, there is an effect that the expectation level display mode as the suggestion target of the variable suggestion effect can be varied.

  In the gaming machine J1, a determination unit that executes determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, a privilege grant unit that grants a privilege based on a result of determination by the determination unit being a specific determination result, The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, when a privilege is granted, the expectation display mode can easily indicate a high expectation level, so that the player can display the expectation display mode. The content will be watched closely. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the variable suggestion effect is to notify variable information of an expected degree display mode that is varied step by step.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the variable suggestion presentation can be used to notify the variable information of the target degree of expectation display mode. There is an effect that a gaze can be made and a production effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine J3, the variable suggestion effect is a display of a plurality of variable amounts including at least a variable amount for indicating a degree to which the expectation display mode is actually varied. J4.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J3, since a plurality of variable amounts are displayed as variable suggestion effects, the larger variable among the plurality of variable amounts displayed to the player. There is an effect that the game can be performed while expecting the amount to be an actual variable amount, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, there is provided an object notifying unit for notifying an expectation degree display mode to be a target of the variable suggestion effect executed by the variable suggestion effect executing unit before the variable suggestion effect ends. A gaming machine J5 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the variable that is executed for the player by notifying the player of the target of the variable suggestion effect to be executed this time in advance. There is an effect that the suggestion can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

  In any one of the gaming machines J2 to J5, based on the determination result of the determination unit, an expectation type setting unit that sets an expectation type, and based on the expectation type set by the expectation type setting unit Expectation degree setting means for setting an expectation degree for each of the plurality of expectation degree display forms, and the expectation degree display control means is the plurality of expectation degree display forms set by the expectation degree setting means. The expected degree display mode for indicating at least a part of the expected degree is displayed in advance, and the variable suggestion effect is set by the expected degree already displayed and the expected degree setting means. The gaming machine J6 is characterized by suggesting a difference from the expected level as the variable amount.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, an effect that suggests the difference between the already displayed expectation degree and a preset expectation degree as a variable amount is executed. Therefore, even if the variable amount displayed as the variable suggestion effect is small, if the variable suggestion effect is executed for the expectation display mode in which a high expectation is already displayed, a privilege is given. The possibility that Therefore, not only the contents of the effect of the variable suggestion effect, but also the display mode of the current expectation level display mode is selected, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine J2, the operation means operable by the player, the operation effect executing means for executing the operation effect for operating the operation means, and the operation during the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing means. An operation discriminating unit that discriminates that the means has been operated, and the display mode varying unit varies the expectation display mode in accordance with a discrimination result by the operation discriminating unit. Characteristic gaming machine J8.

  According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J2, the expectation display mode is changed in response to the operation on the operating means, so that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine J8, a determination unit that executes determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and a privilege game execution unit that executes a privilege game when the determination result by the determination unit is a predetermined determination result; When a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied, an acquisition means for acquiring entrance information and the entrance information acquired by the acquisition means are stored up to a predetermined number until the predetermined determination condition is satisfied. Possible storage means, pre-discrimination means for executing pre-discrimination based on the entrance information stored in the storage means, and the number of entrance information indicating the number of the entrance information stored in the storage means In a gaming machine having display information for displaying the number of entered balls, when a predetermined additional condition is satisfied, the number of displayed information for the displayed information is displayed according to the result of determination by the operation determining unit. The entrance information And characterized in that having an additional effect execution means for executing an additional effect of varying the display mode for indicating the game machine J9.

  According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J8, the display mode for indicating the number of pieces of incoming information can be changed by the additional effect executed in response to the operation on the operating means. There is an effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operation means.

  In the gaming machine J9, the gaming machine J9 includes an effect condition determining unit that determines whether the expectation display mode displayed by the expectation level display control unit satisfies a predetermined effect condition, and the effect condition determining unit satisfies the effect condition. The gaming machine J10 is characterized in that the additional condition is satisfied when it is determined that it is not.

  According to the gaming machine J10, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J9, an additional effect is executed when the expectation display mode displayed on the display means does not satisfy a predetermined effect condition. There is an effect that relevance can be given and the production effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine J10, the effect condition determining means determines that the effect condition is not satisfied when a predetermined number of the expectation level display modes are not displayed by the expectation level display control means. Game machine J11.

  According to the gaming machine J11, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J10, the number of effects to be executed can be complemented by executing the additional effects. There exists an effect that it can control that it falls.

<Characteristic K group> (Large hit production during holding consecutive times)
A determination means for executing determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game when the determination result by the determination means is a predetermined determination result, and a predetermined acquisition condition An acquisition means for acquiring entrance information when established, and a storage means for storing the entrance information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number until the predetermined determination condition is satisfied. A pre-determination unit that performs pre-determination based on the entry information stored in the storage unit, wherein the pre-determination unit satisfies at least a pre-determination condition during the bonus game In this case, the prior discrimination is executed, and the production mode setting means for setting the production mode during the privilege game corresponding to the determination result of the prior discrimination means is provided. Game machine K1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the entry information is acquired based on the entry into the starting port, and the holding means that can hold the entry information until the lottery conditions are established, and the lottery conditions are established. A lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the ball entry information, and an execution means for executing a winning game that is advantageous to the player when the lottery result of the lottery means is won. There is a gaming machine. And it has pre-discrimination means that discriminates in advance before the lottery means the lottery means the entrance information that is held in the holding means, and the pre-discrimination means that there is a hit in the hold at the end of the hit game There is a gaming machine that continuously displays the display mode (number of rounds) in a winning game when it is determined. (For example, JP, 2014-30737, A).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, a special effect can be executed during the second winning game when the winning is won again within the hold, and the player can be satisfied. However, the winning information that is held at the end of the jackpot is discriminated, and during the first winning game, only the effect set at the time of winning the winning game is executed. Even if the winning information to be held is suspended, there is a problem that the effect for the first hit game cannot be changed and the effect of the effect cannot be enhanced.

  Further, although the effects are configured to be continuous with respect to a plurality of winning games, only the effects that allow the player to easily identify the break between the first winning game and the second winning game are executed. However, there is a problem that it is possible to easily predict how many hit games will be executed during the performance continuously executed during the hit game.

  According to the gaming machine K1, since the effect mode during the privilege game is set based on the determination result of the prior determination means executed during the privilege game, compared to the case where the effect mode during the privilege game is set in advance. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the processing load when setting the production mode corresponding to the prior discrimination result.

  In the gaming machine K1, the bonus game executed by the bonus game executing means is one in which a plurality of small bonus games are executed, and the prior determination condition is satisfied when the small bonus game is executed. A gaming machine K2 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine K1, when the small privilege game is executed, a prior determination condition is established, and an effect mode during the privilege game is set. It is possible to set a special game effect mode. Therefore, even if the effect mode of the bonus game is set during the bonus game, there is an effect that the bonus game can be executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the gaming machine K2, as the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the game machine K2 has a privilege game selection means for selecting one privilege game among the plurality of privilege games in which a different number of small privilege games are executed. A gaming machine K3 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine K2, one bonus game is selected as a bonus game from a plurality of bonus games in which different numbers of small privilege games are executed. There is an effect that change can be given and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K3, the pre-discriminating means includes, when the result of the pre-discrimination is a predetermined pre-discrimination result, the storage information includes the entry information for executing the bonus game. The effect mode setting means sets the effect mode during the bonus game corresponding to the number of small privilege games executed in the bonus game determined in advance by the prior discrimination means. A gaming machine K4 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K3, since the effect mode during the bonus game is set according to the number of small privilege games determined by the prior discrimination means, There exists an effect that it can be made to pay attention to a production mode.

  In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the execution number storage means for storing the number of small privilege games of the privilege game selected by the privilege game selection means, and the number of the small privilege games stored in the execution number storage means Among these, the small privilege game number notifying means for notifying at least a part, the number of small privilege games stored in the execution number storage means, and the small privilege information notified by the small privilege game number notifying means. A notification for setting the number of small privilege games to be notified by the small privilege game number notification means based on a determination result of the first difference determination means and a first difference determination means for determining a difference from the number of games. And a number setting means.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine K3 or K4, one bonus is provided by partially informing the number of small privilege games (round games) executed during the bonus game (big hit). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of small privilege games executed during the game, and while the privilege game is being executed, the game is performed while expecting more small privilege games to be executed. There is an effect that can be made.

  The gaming machine K5 has an adding means for adding, to the execution number storage means, the number of the small privilege games to be executed in the privilege game determined in advance by the prior determination means. Machine K6.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K5, when it is determined in advance that a privilege game is executed by the prior determination means during the bonus game (big hit), in the bonus game determined in advance The number of small privilege games to be executed is stored in the execution number storage means by the adding means. Thereby, in the case where a plurality of privilege games are executed at short intervals, the number of the small privilege games that are notified while the previous privilege game is being executed is reduced to the small privilege game that is executed in the subsequent privilege game. Can be set taking into account the number of. Therefore, it is possible to predict whether or not the next privilege game will be executed by viewing the number of small privilege games that are notified during the bonus game by the small privilege game number notification means, and one bonus game is completed. There is an effect that a sense of expectation can be given to the game after being played.

  In the gaming machine K5 or K6, when the small privilege game is executed, the gaming machine K5 or K6 has an update determining means for determining whether or not to update the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means. A gaming machine K7 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K5 or K6, the update determining unit determines whether to update the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification unit. Even if the number of small privilege games is set by the setting means, the number of small privilege games may not be updated. Therefore, when a new small privilege game is executed, even if the number of small privilege games reported by the small privilege game number notification means is not updated, The possibility of updating the number of small privilege games reported by the small privilege game number notification means can be left, and the game can be performed while expecting more small privilege games to be executed. effective.

  In the gaming machine K7, forcibly updating means for updating the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notifying means when the determination result by the first difference determining means satisfies the first condition. A gaming machine K8 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K7, when the determination result by the first difference determination unit satisfies the first condition, the forced update unit notifies the small bonus game number notification unit. By forcibly updating the number of small privilege games that are present, there is an effect that it is possible to set a period for the player to execute the privilege game with peace of mind.

  In the gaming machine K7 or K8, the executed small privilege game number notifying means for notifying the number of small privilege games that have already been executed, and the number of small privilege games being notified by the small privilege game number notifying means, A second difference determining means for determining a difference from the number of small privilege games notified by the executed small privilege game number notifying means, and a determination result by the second difference determining means satisfying a second condition; And a compulsory update means for updating the number of the small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means.

  According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K7 or K8, when the determination result by the second difference determination means satisfies the second condition, the forced update means notifies the small privilege game number notification means. In order to forcibly update the number of small privilege games being played, it is possible to prevent the number of executed small privilege games from becoming larger than the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means. There is an effect that can be.

  In any of the gaming machines K5 to K9, the small privilege game number notifying unit is configured to determine the advance determination of the pitch information acquired by the acquiring unit during a specific period in a period in which the privilege game is being executed. When the result is the predetermined pre-determination result, a specific small bonus game number notification is executed.

  According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K5 to K9, in the period in which the bonus game is being executed, the entrance information acquired within the specific period is the bonus game as a result of prior discrimination. If the player has been won, a specific small privilege game number notification is executed by the small privilege game number notification means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide pleasure to acquire the entrance information during the special game.

  In any one of the gaming machines K5 to K10, the number of small privilege games stored in the execution number storage means and the number of small privilege games notified by the executed small privilege game number notification means In a state where the third difference determining means for determining the difference and one of the privilege games are completed, and the determination result of the third difference determining means satisfies the third condition, the one privilege game is ended. And a production continuation means for continuing the production executed during the bonus game until the specific condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K5 to K10, when the determination result by the third difference determination unit satisfies the third condition, it is executed by the effect continuation unit during the bonus game. The effect is continuously displayed. Thereby, when it is determined by the prior determination means that the privilege game is executed, it is possible to display an effect that is continuously executed during the privilege game after the first privilege game is completed. is there.

  In the gaming machine K11, the specific condition does not hold until at least the next bonus game is executed.

  According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K11, during the bonus game during the period from the end of the first bonus game to the execution of the second bonus game by the effect continuation means. It is possible to reliably execute the effect. Therefore, since a series of effects can be executed for a plurality of privilege games, the game can be performed while expecting more small privilege games to be executed while the effect is being executed. effective.

  In any one of the gaming machines K5 to K12, when the result of determination by the determination means is a predetermined determination result, a storage number determination means for determining the number of the incoming information stored in the storage means; Effect mode storage means for storing a plurality of effect modes executed during a special game, and stored in the effect mode storage means based on the number of the entrance means determined by the memory number determination means. The gaming machine K13 is characterized by having a bonus game effect mode selection means for selecting one effect mode from the plurality of effect modes.

  According to the gaming machine K13, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines K5 to K12, in the case of a predetermined discrimination result, an effect mode during the bonus game based on the number of pieces of entry information stored in the storage means Is selected, it is possible to provide various effects to the player during the bonus game. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine K13, the effect mode storage means, as the plurality of effect modes, is a game at the time when the bonus game is started that the result of the prior determination by the prior determination means is the predetermined prior determination result. A gaming machine K14 that stores at least a first effect mode that can be notified to a player and a second effect mode that can be notified to the player after the bonus game is completed.

  According to the gaming machine K14, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K13, the effect mode selected by the privilege game effect mode selection means informs that the result of the prior determination by the prior determination means is a predetermined prior determination result. The timing effect can be increased, so that the production effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic L group> (Direction frequency is changed by game history)
A determination means for executing a determination when the determination condition is satisfied, an effect execution means for executing an effect for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and an effect for indicating the specific determination result by the effect execution means. Executed by a privilege granting means for granting a benefit that is advantageous to the player when executed, a storage means for storing corresponding game information as history information when a specific condition is established, and the effect execution means A game machine L1 having a determination means for determining whether to execute a specific effect among the effects to be executed based on the history information.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that executes a variation effect for suggesting to a player whether or not a win has been won. As a variation effect executed for a predetermined period, there is a gaming machine that executes an operation effect whose effect mode varies based on an operation result of an operation means that can be operated by a player. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-249877).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, since the effect mode is varied based on the operation content of the player to the operation means, the player can actively participate in the game. However, if an operation effect is frequently executed for a player who does not actively operate the operation means, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine L1, since the execution of the specific effect is determined based on the history information, it is possible to vary the execution frequency of the specific effect according to the progress of the game and the like, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L1, there is provided an effect selection table storage unit in which a plurality of effect selection tables set so that the selection ratio of the specific effect is different, and the determination unit selects the effect selection corresponding to the history information A gaming machine L2 that determines a table.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1, the selection ratio of the specific effect can be switched by selecting the corresponding effect selection table, so that the selection rate of the specific effect can be varied with easy control. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine L1 or L2, the game machine has an operation means operated by a player, and an operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. When the predetermined operation is determined by the operation determining means, an operation effect that changes the effect mode is set, and the specific condition is that at least 1 that the predetermined operation is determined by the operation determining means. The gaming machine L3 is characterized by being set to the conditions of

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L1 or L2, operating the operating means in the operation effect not only changes the effect mode but also makes it easy to satisfy a specific condition. Can be varied, and the execution ratio of the specific performance can be influenced.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the storage means capable of storing at least the history information, the setting means capable of setting the stored value up to a predetermined value based on the storage result by the storage means, and the setting means A selection means for selecting an accumulated privilege system corresponding to the set accumulated value from a plurality of accumulated privilege systems, and an accumulated privilege providing means for providing an accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated privilege system selected by the selection means And when the new accumulated value is set by the setting unit, the accumulated privilege granting unit grants a new accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated value privilege selected by the selecting unit. And the selecting means selects one accumulated privilege system from a plurality of accumulated privilege systems based on the history information stored in the storage means. Gaming machine F4, characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, an accumulated privilege system is selected based on the accumulated history information, and an accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated privilege system is given. Thereby, both the setting of the frequency at which the specific effect is executed and the provision of the accumulated privilege are executed based on the history information. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine L4, the stored bonus granted by the stored bonus granting unit is different for each of the stored bonus systems selected by the selecting unit.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L4, the accumulated privilege granted by the accumulated privilege system can be made different, so it is fun to acquire various accumulated privileges while varying the operation contents of the operation means. Can be provided to the player. Furthermore, since the frequency of production can be varied by varying the operation content of the operation means, there is an effect that new enjoyment can be provided to the player even for the performance to be executed.

  The gaming machine L5 includes history information erasing means that allows the history information stored in the storage means to be erased to a state in which the different stored privilege systems can be selected by the selection means. A gaming machine L6.

  According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L5, the history information can be erased until a different stored privilege system can be selected. It is possible to facilitate selection of the accumulated privilege system. Therefore, there is an effect that the willingness to acquire other accumulated benefits can be increased.

  In addition, since the history information is partially erased by the history information erasing means, the accumulated value set by the setting means is also changed (decreased), so the accumulated value is set to a predetermined upper limit. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the production effect is lowered due to reaching the value.

  Any one of the gaming machines L4 to L6 has a guiding means for guiding a game content for selecting a specific stored privilege system by the selecting means.

  According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L4 to L6, a specific stored privilege system is selected by playing a game based on the game content guided by the guiding means. Therefore, it is possible to give various accumulated privileges to the player, and there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine L7, the guidance means guides the game content for selecting a specific stored privilege system by changing the effect mode of the operation effect.

  According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L7, the effect mode of the operation effect is varied by the guidance means, so that only the accumulated privilege system can be selected by operating the operation means according to the effect mode of the operation effect. Will come to be. Therefore, various benefits can be given to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L8, as the effect mode of the operation effect, the guide unit is either a notification effect mode for notifying the operation unit to perform the predetermined operation, or a non-notification effect mode that is not notified. A gaming machine L9 characterized by using or for guiding game contents.

  According to the gaming machine L9, as the operation effect, it is possible to execute an effect mode in which a predetermined operation is easily performed on the operation means and an effect mode in which it is difficult to perform. Only by operating, a different accumulation privilege system is selected. Therefore, various benefits can be given to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines L4 to L9, there is a system selection unit that allows a player to select the specific stored privilege system corresponding to the game content guided by the guide unit from the plurality of stored privilege systems. A gaming machine L10 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effect of playing any of the gaming machines L4 to L9, the game content can be notified so that the accumulated privilege system desired by the player is selected, so that the effect of production is further enhanced. There is an effect that can be.

<Feature M group> (Distinguishing measures when the small hits are confirmed)
Launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a launching means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and a game ball entered the launching means Determination means capable of executing determination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means And a dynamic display mode determination unit that determines a dynamic display mode of the identification information that is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result to the display unit is stopped. And a bonus game executing means capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when displayed, a game ball is inserted during a period in which the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means. Specified input that enables a ball Means, a specific area in which a game ball entering the specific ball entry means can enter, and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific area; The player identifies the privilege type determining unit that determines the type of the privilege to be granted by the privilege granting unit, and the privilege type determined by the privilege type determining unit when the identification information is stopped and displayed. An informing means for informing possible informing information, and when the launching means has stopped firing for a predetermined period or more after the informing information is informed by the informing means, A gaming machine M1 having means for making it difficult.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start opening provided in the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a state after the game is set to be advantageous for the player or a state that is disadvantageous is set according to the type of the game played. As for the type of winning game, when the lottery result is displayed and notified with a symbol or the like, the game is known in a predetermined notification mode so that the fairness of the game can be maintained. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-147965).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, a game ball is set to be executed after that a game ball enters a specific entrance or a specific area during the win game, and the win game is further executed. Assuming that the state is determined by the type of hit game that has been executed first, it is determined whether or not the hit type is given a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, and a specific entrance or specific area There is a possibility that the disadvantage of the game store side is increased by performing a game method of playing a game so that a game ball does not enter.

  The present gaming machine M1 is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a disadvantage on the side of a gaming store.

  According to the gaming machine M1, when the player tries to avoid giving a specific privilege type by confirming the notification information indicating the privilege type determined by the privilege type determining means, the other privilege type Even in this case, it is difficult to enter the specific entry means, so that there is an effect that the disadvantage of the game store side can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine M1, the dynamic display mode determination means determines one dynamic display mode among different dynamic display modes combined with a pseudo stop mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed and then temporarily stopped. A gaming machine M2 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine M2, the temporary stop in the pseudo stop mode makes it difficult to understand the final stop timing of the identification information, and when a specific privilege game is executed, the game ball is moved to the specific ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the execution of the game method for avoiding entering the ball.

  In the gaming machine M1 or M2, the gaming machine M3 is characterized by having variable control means for varying a rate of entering the specific area according to a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the rate of entering the specific area can be varied depending on the type of privilege game to be executed, so the probability of entering the specific area There is an effect that can be easily controlled.

<Feature N group> (Direct production part 2)
A ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a determination means that can execute a determination when a game ball enters the ball entry means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. Display means to be displayed, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and dynamic display for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means When the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the mode determining means and the display means, the first privilege game that is advantageous to the player and the second privilege game are different from the first privilege game. In a game having privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game, a game ball can enter during a period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means. Specific entry means and its identification A specific area in which a game ball that has entered the ball means can enter, and when the first privilege game is executed and the game ball enters the specific area, a first privilege advantageous to the player is provided. When the second privilege game is being executed, in order to show the specific determination result, the privilege granting means for granting the second privilege that is advantageous to the player regardless of the entry into the specific area And an effect execution means capable of executing an effect over a period from the start of dynamic display of the identification information to the entry to the specific entry means. N1.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start opening provided in the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a state after the game is set to be advantageous for the player or a state that is disadvantageous is set according to the type of the game played. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-147965).

  However, the above-described conventional gaming machine only produces effects up to the hit game, and there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  This gaming machine N1 is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from getting bored at an early stage.

  According to the gaming machine N1, when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed, an effect is executed in a period from the start of dynamic display of the identification information to entering a specific area. Therefore, it is possible to expect not only that the identification information indicates a specific determination result but also whether or not to enter the specific area by the effect, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine N1, the effect execution means executes one effect based on the type of privilege game given from a plurality of effects, the gaming machine N2.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine N1, there is an effect that various effects can be executed.

  In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the effect executing means switches to a specific effect and executes it when a game ball does not enter even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the specific area. A gaming machine N3.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N1 or N2, when the player does not enter the specific area, it is switched to the specific effect, so that it is effective that the player has not entered the specific area. There is an effect that can be notified to.

<Characteristic P group> (A delay device is installed on the upper part of the V-attacker to prevent choking)
A ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a determination means that can execute a determination when a game ball enters the ball entry means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. Display means to be displayed, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and dynamic display for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means A mode determining unit, and a bonus game executing unit capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display unit. In a game, a specific entry means that allows a game ball to enter during the period in which the award game is being executed by the award game execution means, and a specification that allows a game ball that has entered the specific entry means to enter A game ball enters an area and its specific area. In the case where the privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, the privilege type determining means for determining the type of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means, and the identification information are stopped and displayed, Notification means for notifying information related to the privilege type determined by the privilege type determining means, and predetermined game balls guided to the specific entry means at positions where the game balls can be guided to the specific entry means A game machine P1 having adjustment means for reducing a flow amount with respect to a period.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start opening provided in the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a state after the game is set to be advantageous for the player or a state that is disadvantageous is set according to the type of the game played. As for the type of winning game, when the lottery result is displayed and notified with a symbol or the like, the game is known in a predetermined notification mode so that the fairness of the game can be maintained. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-147965).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, a game ball is set to be executed after that a game ball enters a specific entrance or a specific area during the win game, and the win game is further executed. Assuming that the state is determined by the type of hit game that has been executed first, it is determined whether or not the hit type is given a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, and a specific entrance or specific area There is a possibility that the disadvantage of the game store side is increased by performing a game method of playing a game so that a game ball does not enter.

  The present gaming machine P1 is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a disadvantage on the side of a gaming store.

  According to the gaming machine P1, the amount of flow for a predetermined period guided to the specific entry means is reduced by the adjustment means. Therefore, the information notified by the notification means is determined and the game ball is inserted into the specific entry means. There is an effect that it is difficult to decide whether or not to make a ball.

  In the gaming machine P1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area, a launch intensity varying means capable of changing the launch intensity emitted by the launch means by a player's operation, and a game ball capable of flowing down. 1 flow path and a 2nd flow path where the game ball which flowed down the 1st flow path becomes difficult to flow down, The adjustment means makes game ball flowing down the 2nd flow path the specific entrance ball The gaming machine P2 is characterized in that the game machine P2 is distributed at a predetermined ratio between a specific flow path that can enter the means and a flow path that makes it difficult to enter the specific entry means.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine P1, among the gaming balls flowing down the second flow path, the amount of gaming balls guided to the specific entry means can be easily reduced. effective.

  In the gaming machine P1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area, a launch intensity varying means capable of changing the launch intensity emitted by the launch means by a player's operation, and a game ball capable of flowing down. And a second flow path in which the game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and the adjusting means rolls the game ball flowing down the second flow path for a predetermined period or more. A gaming machine P3 having rolling means capable of moving and discharging a game ball to a flow path guided to the specific entry means.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P1, the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or more is rolled by the adjusting means, so that the player has stopped firing the game ball. In addition, there is an effect that the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entry means after a predetermined period.

  In any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the period from when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed until the specific ball entry means can enter the ball is to the second flow path. A gaming machine P4, which is configured to be shorter than a period from when the game ball is fired to when it reaches the specific ball entry means through the adjusting means.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, in order to enter the specific ball entry means, it is necessary to continuously launch the game ball. There is an effect that it is possible to regulate a game method in which the special game is not allowed to enter the specific entry means.

<Characteristic Q group> (Choro strike countermeasure 2)
A ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a determination means that can execute a determination when a game ball enters the ball entry means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. Display means to be displayed, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and dynamic display for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means A mode determining unit, and a bonus game executing unit capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display unit. In a game, a specific entry means that allows a game ball to enter during the period in which the award game is being executed by the award game execution means, and a specification that allows a game ball that has entered the specific entry means to enter A game ball enters an area and its specific area. In this case, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to the player, a bonus type determining means for determining the type of the bonus granted by the bonus granting means, and guiding the game ball to the specific entry means A gaming machine Q1 having adjustment means for reducing a flow amount of the game ball guided to the specific entry means at a possible position for a predetermined period.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start opening provided in the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a state after the game is set to be advantageous for the player or a state that is disadvantageous is set according to the type of the game played. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-147965).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the disadvantage of the game store side is increased by performing a game method of playing a game so that the game ball does not enter a specific entrance or a specific area. was there.

  This gaming machine Q1 has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the disadvantage on the side of the gaming store.

  According to the gaming machine P1, the amount of flow for a predetermined period guided to the specific entry means is reduced by the adjustment means. Therefore, the information notified by the notification means is determined and the game ball is inserted into the specific entry means. There is an effect that it is difficult to decide whether or not to make a ball.

  In the gaming machine Q1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area, a launch intensity varying means capable of changing the launch intensity emitted by the launch means by a player's operation, and a game ball capable of flowing down. 1 flow path and a 2nd flow path where the game ball which flowed down the 1st flow path becomes difficult to flow down, The adjustment means makes game ball flowing down the 2nd flow path the specific entrance ball The gaming machine Q2 is characterized in that the game machine Q2 is distributed at a predetermined ratio between a specific flow path that allows entry into the means and a flow path that makes it difficult to enter the specific entry means.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1, among the gaming balls flowing down the second flow path, the amount of gaming balls guided to the specific entry means can be easily reduced. effective.

  In the gaming machine Q1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area, a launch intensity varying means capable of changing the launch intensity emitted by the launch means by a player's operation, and a game ball capable of flowing down. And a second flow path in which the game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and the adjusting means rolls the game ball flowing down the second flow path for a predetermined period or more. A gaming machine Q3 having rolling means capable of moving and discharging the game ball to a flow path guided to the specific entry means.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1, the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or more is rolled by the adjusting means, so that the player has stopped firing the game ball. In addition, there is an effect that the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entry means after a predetermined period.

  In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the period from when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed until the specific ball entry means can enter the ball is to the second flow path. The gaming machine Q4 is configured to be shorter than a period from when the game ball is fired to when the adjustment means is passed to reach the specific ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, in order to enter the specific entry means, it is necessary to continuously fire the game ball, the specific There is an effect that it is possible to regulate a game method in which the special game is not allowed to enter the specific entry means.

<Characteristic R group> (Direction until V passing in small hit and direct hit)
A ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a determination means that can execute a determination when a game ball enters the ball entry means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. Display means to be displayed, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and dynamic display for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means When the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the mode determining means and the display means, the first privilege game that is advantageous to the player and the second privilege game are different from the first privilege game. In a game having privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game, a game ball can enter during a period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means. Specific entry means and its identification A specific area in which a game ball that has entered the ball means can enter, and when the first privilege game is executed and the game ball enters the specific area, a first privilege advantageous to the player is provided. When the second privilege game is being executed, in order to show the specific determination result, the privilege granting means for granting the second privilege that is advantageous to the player regardless of the entry into the specific area Production execution means capable of executing an production over a period from the start of dynamic display of the identification information to the entry into the specific entry means, the effect execution means A game machine that performs a suggestion effect suggesting that the method of launching the game ball is switched stepwise before the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. R1.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start opening provided in the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a state after the game is set to be advantageous for the player or a state that is disadvantageous is set according to the type of the game played. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-147965).

  However, the above-described conventional gaming machine only produces effects up to the hit game, and there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  This gaming machine N1 is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from getting bored at an early stage.

  According to the gaming machine N1, when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed, an effect is executed in a period from the start of dynamic display of the identification information to entering a specific area. Therefore, it is possible to expect not only that the identification information indicates a specific determination result but also whether or not to enter the specific area by the effect, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine R1, the effect executing means executes one effect based on the type of privilege game given from a plurality of effects, the gaming machine R2.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine R1, there is an effect that various effects can be executed.

  In the gaming machine R1 or R2, the effect executing means switches to the specific effect and executes it when the game ball does not enter even after a predetermined period has elapsed in the specific area. A gaming machine R3.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R1 or R2, if the player does not enter the specific area, it is switched to the specific effect, so it is effective that the player has not entered the specific area. There is an effect that can be notified to.

<Characteristic S group> (2 types of control switching per small hit and per symbol)
A ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a determination means that can execute a determination when a game ball enters the ball entry means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. Display means to be displayed, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and dynamic display for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means When the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the mode determining means and the display means, the first privilege game that is advantageous to the player and the second privilege game are different from the first privilege game. In a game having privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game, a game ball can enter during a period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means. Specific entry means and its identification A specific area in which a game ball that has entered the ball means can enter, and when the first privilege game is executed and the game ball enters the specific area, a first privilege advantageous to the player is provided. When the second privilege game is being executed, the privilege granting means for granting the second privilege that is advantageous to the player regardless of the entry into the specific area, and the specific entry means are entered. Switching means for switching a guide path for guiding the game ball to the specific area between a first state that can be guided to the specific area and a second state that is difficult to guide to the specific area; and the first privilege game Is executed, the first switching information for switching the guide path is set by the switching means, and the second switching different from the first switching information is performed when the second privilege game is executed. A setting means for setting information, and That the gaming machine S1.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start opening provided in the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A game is executed, and depending on the type of game played, the state after winning the game is set to be advantageous to the player, or the disadvantaged state is set, and a specific entrance or specific is specified during the winning game. It has been proposed that a game ball enters a region so that a bonus game or the like can be given. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2013-9795).

  However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has been required to further enhance the interest of the game.

  The present gaming machine P1 is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine S1, the control method of the guide path is switched between the first privilege game and the second privilege game, so that it is possible to show the player how to guide to different specific areas and to improve the interest of the game. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine S1, the gaming machine S2 is switched to the first state when the taxiway is switched by the second switching information.

  According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S1, the guide path is switched to the first state by the second switching information. Therefore, in the second privilege game, it is easy to make the game ball enter the specific area. Even if it is a 2nd privilege game to a player, there exists an effect that it can be made to think as if the 2nd privilege is provided by having entered the specific area.

  In the gaming machine S1 or S2, a plurality of different information is set as the first switching information, and one piece of information is determined based on a predetermined rule.

  According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine S1 or S2, the first switching information can be varied, and the guidance state of the guidance path can be switched in various ways.

<Characteristic T group> (2 types of switching per small hit and per symbol 2)
A ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a determination means that can execute a determination when a game ball enters the ball entry means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. Display means to be displayed, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and dynamic display for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means When the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the mode determining means and the display means, the first privilege game that is advantageous to the player and the second privilege game are different from the first privilege game. In a game having privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game, a game ball can enter during a period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means. Specific entry means and its identification A specific area in which a game ball that has entered the ball means can enter, and when the first privilege game is executed and the game ball enters the specific area, a first privilege advantageous to the player is provided. When the second privilege game is being executed, the privilege granting means for granting the second privilege that is advantageous to the player regardless of the entry into the specific area, and the specific entry means are entered. Switching means for switching a guide path for guiding the game ball to the specific area between a first state that can be guided to the specific area and a second state that is difficult to guide to the specific area; and the first privilege game Is executed, the first switching information for switching the guide route is set by the switching means, and when the second bonus game is executed, the guide route is switched to the first state. 2 setting means for setting the switching information. Game machine T1 which is characterized in.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a start opening provided in the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A game is executed, and depending on the type of game played, the state after winning the game is set to be advantageous to the player, or the disadvantaged state is set, and a specific entrance or specific is specified during the winning game. It has been proposed that a game ball enters a region so that a bonus game or the like can be given. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2013-9795).

  However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has been required to further enhance the interest of the game.

  The present gaming machine P1 is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine S1, the control method of the guide path is switched between the first privilege game and the second privilege game, so that it is possible to show the player how to guide to different specific areas and to improve the interest of the game. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine T1, the game ball is moved to the specific area by a different guide path when switched to the first state by the second switching information and when switched to the first state by the first switching information. A gaming machine T2 characterized in that is guided.

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored early because it is guided to a specific area by different guidance.

  In the gaming machine T1 or T2, a plurality of different pieces of information are set as the first switching information, and one piece of information is determined based on a predetermined rule.

  According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine T1 or T2, the first switching information can be varied, and the guidance state of the guidance path can be switched in various ways.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, and the gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)

Claims (4)

A ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter,
Determination means capable of executing a determination when a game ball enters the entry means;
Display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means;
Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means;
Dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit;
In a game having privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means,
Specific entry means for allowing a game ball to enter during a period in which the award game is being executed by the award game execution means;
A specific area in which a game ball that has entered the specific entry means can enter;
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the specific area;
A privilege type determining means for determining a type of the privilege to be given by the privilege giving means;
Adjusting means for reducing the amount of flow of the game ball guided to the specific ball entry means for a predetermined period at a position where the game ball can be guided to the specific ball input means. Machine. Launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area;
Firing intensity variable means capable of varying the firing intensity emitted by the launching means by the player's operation;
A first flow path through which the game ball can flow down, and a second flow path through which the game ball flowing down the first flow path becomes difficult to flow,
The adjusting means has a predetermined ratio between a specific flow path that allows a game ball flowing down the second flow path to enter the specific entry means and a flow path that makes it difficult to enter the specific entry means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machines are distributed according to each other. Launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area;
Firing intensity variable means capable of varying the firing intensity emitted by the launching means by the player's operation;
A first flow path through which the game ball can flow down, and a second flow path through which the game ball flowing down the first flow path becomes difficult to flow,
The adjusting means is rolling means capable of rolling the game ball flowing down the second flow path for a predetermined period or more and discharging the game ball to the flow path guided to the specific entrance means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a machine.   The period from when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed until the specific ball entry means can enter the ball is after the game ball is launched into the second flow path and after the adjustment. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be shorter than a period until it reaches the specific entry means through the means.

Images